(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "tektronix :: catalog :: Tektronix Catalog 1969"

TE KTRO N IX 

OSCILLOSCOPES & ASSOCIATED INSTRUMENTS 





committed to progress in waveform measurement 



INTRODUCTION 






CONTENTS 

Tektronix products are grouped according to common charac- 
teristics on pages 2, 3, 4, 5. You can compare the performance 
of a group of instruments that share similar characteristics with 
your measurement requirements. For example, those oscillo- 
scopes that feature portability; those oscilloscopes that use the 
same group of plug-in units; those oscilloscopes that use the 
sampling technique for their display; etc. Thorough study of 
these groupings will give you a better understanding of the 
Tektronix product line. 



REFERENCE INFORMATION 

Bandwidth, risetime, deflection factor and other instrument 
parameters are of vital interest to you in selecting the appro- 
priate instrument for your application. The following outlines 
information provided for your assistance. 

Page 5 contains a chart of available CRT phosphors with 
technical data as well as selected areas of usage. 

Information presented on pages 6 through 10 describes fac- 
tors affecting over-all oscilloscope performance or measurement 
capability. Time-base application and selection is discussed 
initially, including single-shot and delayed-sweep use. Vertical 
amplifier risetime and high-frequency capabilities are reviewed 
on page 7. 

Starting on page 8 is a discussion of various oscilloscope 
configurations and how these relate to specific applications 
including: switched vertical inputs versus dual-beam oscillo- 
scope operation, differential input use, sampling techniques, 
traveling wave and distributed deflection CRT's, and curve 
tracing (X-Y) oscilloscopes. 

Page 10 includes a discussion of Photographic Writing Speed 
considerations, a subject of particular interest to those con- 
cerned with photographing an oscilloscope display of a non- 
recurring phenomenon. Page 10 continues with a discussion 
of mechanical and environmental characteristics related to 
electrical instrument performance. 



Page 11 offers an introduction to component manufactur- 1- 
ing at Tektronix, a capability which contributes significantly 
toward the design and manufacture of high-performance, reli- 
able instrumentation. 



FIELD OFFICE ASSISTANCE 

Tektronix maintains 67 domestic and international field offices 
as well as 46 distributors and representatives throughout the 
world. These offices are staffed with qualified field engineers 
who specialize in solving measurement problems. They pro- 
vide a direct communication link between you and the factory 
and are the people to contact for assistance. Please call or 
visit your nearest field office for details on applications, main- 
tenance, instrument selection or instrument orders. You'll find 
these offices listed on pages 12 through 16. 

Ordering information such as terms, shipment, and warranty 
details are contained on pages 12 through 16. 

ABBREVIATIONS AND GLOSSARY 

Page 19 lists some of the abbreviations used at Tektronix, 
primarily derived from IEEE standards. The glossary on pages 
20 to 24 represents our concept of the terms used in this catalog. 

ACCESSORIES 

Descriptions of accessories for use with Tektronix Instruments 
are located as follows: television related items, page 87; 
cameras and camera components, pages 325-337; Scope- 
Mobiles®, pages 338-339; probes, pages 340-364; general pur- 
pose connectors, adapters, cables and cords, pages 365-379. 

INDEX 

The last 5 pages contain a comprehensive index of (1) in- 
struments in alphanumeric order according to type numbers, 
(2) accessories by subject and (3) instruments according to 
function. 



TEKTRONIX, INC. 

An Oregon Corporation 

Corporate Offices and Plant Located at: 

TEKTRONIX INDUSTRIAL PARK 

14150 S.W. KARL BRAUN DRIVE 

BEAVERTON, OREGON 

Mailing Address: P. O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon 97005 
Telephone: (503) 644-0161 TWX: 503-291-6805 Telex: 36-691 Cable: TEKTRONIX 




TEKTRONIX, 

SCOPE-MOBILE 

are registered trademarks 

of Tektronix, Inc. 



Information in this catalog supersedes all previously published 
material. Specification and price change privileges reserved. 



© 1969, Tektronix, Inc. All Rights Reserved. 



Litho In U.S.A. 




TEKTRONIX FIELD SERVICES 



^3»sH 





Tektronix Customers are urged to take advantage of 
the many field services available to them through Tektronix 
Field Engineering Offices and Overseas Representatives. 
Some of these services are described below. 

COMMUNICATIONS 

Your Field Engineer is a valuable communication link between you and the factory. 
He knows the exact person to contact in each circumstance, and he can reach that 
person fast and easily. Let him help speed your communications on any problem 
related to your Tektronix Instruments. 

ORDERING 

There are many types of oscilloscopes, each designed for a specific application area. 
Your Field Engineer can help you select the one best suited to your present and future 
needs, and he will be happy to arrange a demonstration of the instrument ... in your 
application if you so desire. 

If you are a Purchasing Agent or Buyer, your Field Engineer or his secretary can pro- 
vide information on prices, terms, shipping estimates, and best method of transportation 
on instruments, accessories, and replacement parts. 



OPERATION 

Your Tektronix Oscilloscope can be most useful to you when you are familiar with all 
control functions. Your Field Engineer will be glad to demonstrate the use of your in- 
strument in various applications to help you become more familiar with its operation. 
If your instrument is to be used by several engineers, your Field Engineer will be happy 
to conduct informal classes on its operation in your laboratory. 



APPLICATIONS 

Perhaps the answers you need in a specific application can be obtained faster and easier 
through use of your Tektronix Oscilloscope. Your Field Engineer can help you find out, 
and if use of your oscilloscope is indicated, help you with procedures. He may also 
be able to suggest many time-saving uses for your oscilloscope in routine checks and 
measurements. 



MAINTENANCE 

Tektronix willingly assumes much of the responsibility for continued efficient operation 
of the instruments it manufactures. If you should experience a stubborn maintenance 
problem, your Field Engineer will gladly help you isolate the cause. Often a telephone 
discussion with him will help you get your instrument back in operation with minimum 
delay. If yours is a large laboratory, your Field Engineer can be of service to your 
maintenance engineers by conducting informal classes on test and calibration procedures, 
troubleshooting techniques, and general maintenance. 

If you are responsible for the maintenance of a large quantity of Tektronix Instruments, 
ask your Field Engineer about the free factory training course in maintenance and 
calibration. 

INSTRUMENT RECONDITIONING 

An older Tektronix Oscilloscope, properly reconditioned, can give you many additional 
years of service. Your Field Engineer will gladly explain the advantages of instrument 
reconditioning, major repair, and recalibration that can be performed at a nearby Field 
Service Center. Ask your Field Engineer about this service to Tektronix customers. 



CONTENTS 



INTRODUCTION 

Introduction Inside Front Cover 

Tektronix Field Services 1 

Contents 2 

CRT Phosphor Data 5 

Reference Information 6 

General Information 12 

Field Offices and Overseas Distributors 13 

Instrument Dimensions 17 

Abbreviations 19 

Glossary of Terms 20 

AUTOMATIC /PROGRAMMABLE OSCILLOSCOPES 



561B, R561B 

564B, R564B 

3A5 

3B5 

263 



DC-to-15MHz — X-Y 168 

Split-Screen Storage — X-Y .... 172 
DC-to-15MHz Automatic/Pro- 
grammable Amplifier Unit .... 191 
Automatic/Programmable Time- 
Base Unit 192 

3A5/3B5 Programmer 193 



DIGITAL READOUT AND 
PROGRAMMABLE OSCILLOSCOPES 




567, R567 


Digital Readout Oscilloscopes 




323 


6R1A 


Digital Unit 




323 


262 


Programmer 




323 


568, R568 


Digital Readout Oscilloscopes 




220 


230, R230 


Digital Units 




227 


240, R240 


Program Control Units .... 




230 


241, R241 


Programmers 




234 


R250 


Auxiliary Program Units . . . 




236 


S-3110, S-3111 


Programmable Measurement 
terns 


Sys- 


240 


S-3120, S-3121, 
S-3122 


Programmable Measurement 


Sys- 


242 


S-3130, S-3131, 
S-3132 


Programmable Measurement 


Sys- 


244 


Plug-Ins for 567, 568 Digital Oscillosco 


Des 




3A2 


Analog/Digital Dual-Trace A 


npli- 


226 


3B2 


Analog/Digital Time-Base . 




226 


3S1 


350-ps Dual-Trace 




210 


3S2 


Dual-Trace 




?11 


S-l 


350-ps Sampling Head .... 




212 


S-2 


50-ps Sampling Head 




212 


S-3 


350-ps — 100 kn Sampling Head 


213 


S-4 


25-ps Sampling Head 




214 


S-50 


25-ps Generator 




714 


S-51 


18-GHz Trigger Countdown 




215 


3S5 


Programmable Sampling . . 




222 


3S6 


Programmable Sampling . . 




223 


3T2 


Random Sampling Sweep . . 




216 


3T5 


Programmable Sampling Sweep . 


224 


3T6 


Programmable Sampling Sweep . 


225 


3T77A 


Sampling Sweep 




217 



DISPLAY UNITS 

601 Storage — 5-inch 27< 

602 Non-Storage — 5-inch 279 

61 1 Storage — 1 1 -inch 282 

DUAL-BEAM OSCILLOSCOPES 

502A, RM502A 100-/iV/cm — Dual-Beam Verti- 
cal 56 

551 DC-to-27 MHz — Dual-Beam Ver- 
tical 130 

555 DC-to-33 MHz — Dual-Beam — 

Sweep-Delay 324 

556, R556 DC-to-50 MHz — Dual-Beam — 

Sweep-Delay 133 

565, RM565 Dual-Beam — Sweep-Delay.... 183 

ENGINE ANALYZER 

Engine Analyzer 1 78 

GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

310A DC-to-4 MHz 25 

317, RM17 DC-to-lOMHz 27 

515, RM15 DC-to-15 MHz 63 

516 DC-to-15 MHz— Dual-Trace 66 

TYPE 530, 540, 550, 580-SERIES 
PLUG-IN UNIT OSCILLOSCOPES 

Type 530-Series Oscilloscopes f 

531A DC-to-15 MHz 97 

533A DC-to-15 MHz — X 100 Magnifier . 100 

535A, RM35A DC-to-15 MHz— Sweep Delay .. 103 

536 DC-to-1 1 MHz— X-Y 106 

Type 540-Series Oscilloscopes 

543B, RM543B DC-to-33 MHz — X100 Magnifier . 109 

544, RM544 DC-to-50 MHz — X 100 Magnifier . 112 

545B, RM545B DC-to-33 MHz— Sweep-Delay .. 115 

546, RM546 DC-to-50 MHz — Sweep-Delay .. 118 

547, RM547 DC-to-50 MHz — Sweep-Delay — 

Automatic Display Switching . . 121 
549 Split-Screen Storage — Sweep-De- 
lay 125 

Type 550-Series Oscilloscopes 

551 DC-to-27 MHz— Dual-Beam Verti- 
cal 130 

555 DC-to-33 MHz — Dual-Beam — 

Sweep-Delay 324 

556, R556 DC-to-50 MHz — Dual-Beam — 

Sweep Delay 1 33 

Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes 

581A DC-to-80 MHz 259 

585, RM585 DC-to-80 MHz— Sweep-Delay . . 261 

81 A Plug-In Adapter (for 1 and Letter- /"" * 

Series Plug-In Units) 264 

82 DC-to-80 MHz Dual-Trace Plug-In 265 
86 DC-to-80 MHz Plug-In 266 



PLUG-IN UNITS 
FOR TYPE 530, 540, 550, 580-SERIES 

Multi-Trace Plug-Ins 

1A1 DC-to-50 MHz Dual-Trace 147 

1A2 DC-to-50 MHz Dual-Trace 149 

1A4 DC-to-50 MHz Four-Trace 150 

CA DC-to-24 MHz Dual-Trace 324 

M DC-to-20 MHz Four-Trace 324 

Differential Plug-Ins 

1A5 DC-to-50 MHz Comparator 152 

1A6 DC-to-2 MHz 154 

1A7A 10/tV/cm 155 

G DC-to-20 MHz 138 

W DC-to-20 MHz Comparator 145 

Sampling Plug-Ins 

151 350-ps Sampling 164 

152 Time-Domain Reflectometer .... 166 

Spectrum Analyzer Plug-Ins 

U5 50 Hz-to-1 MHz 158 

1L10 1 MHz-to-36 MHz 160 

1L20 10 MHz-to-4.2 GHz 161 

1L30 925 MHz-to- 10.5 GHz 324 

1 L40 1 .5 GHz-to-40 GHz 161 

Single-Trace Plug-Ins 

B DC-to-20 MHz 137 

H DC-to-15MHz 139 

K DC-to-30 MHz 323 

L DC-to-30 MHz 140 

Special Purpose Plug-Ins 

O Operational Amplifier 141 

Q Transducer and Strain Gage .... 143 

T Time-Base Generator 108 

Plug-In Unit Power Supplies 

127 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 305 

132 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 310 

133 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 311 

TYPE 560-SERIES PLUG-IN UNIT OSCILLOSCOPES 

561 B, R561B DC-to-15 MHz— X-Y 168 

564B, R564B Split-Screen Storage — X-Y 172 

565, RM565 Dual-Beam — Delayed-Sweep ... 183 

PLUG-IN UNITS 
FOR TYPE 560-SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES 

Multi-Trace Plug-Ins 

3A3 100/iV/div Dual-Trace Differen- 
tial 189 

3A6 DC-to-10 MHz Dual-Trace 194 

3A72 DC-to-650 kHz Dual-Trace 200 

3A74 DC-to-2 MHz Four-Trace 201 



CONTENTS 

Differential Plug-Ins 

2A61 Differential 323 

2A63 Differential 187 

3A3 100 ,uV/div Dual-Trace 189 

3A7 Differential Comparator 195 

3A9 10-/iV/div — Current Probe Input 198 

Sampling Plug-Ins 

351 350-ps Dual-Trace 210 

352 Dual-Trace 211 

S-l 350-ps Sampling Head 212 

S-2 50-ps Sampling Head 212 

S-3 350-ps 100 kO, Sampling Head . 213 

S-4 25-ps Sampling Head 214 

S-50 25-ps Generator 214 

S-51 18-GHz Trigger Countdown .... 215 

3S5 Programmable Sampling 222 

3T2 Random Sampling-Sweep 216 

3T5 Programmable Sampling-Sweep . 224 

3T77A Sampling-Sweep 217 

Spectrum Analyzer Plug-Ins 

3L5 50 Hz-to-1 MHz 206 

3L10 1 MHz-to-36 MHz 208 

Single-Trace Plug-Ins 

2A60 DC-to-1 MHz 186 

3A5 DC-to- 1 5 MHz Automatic/Pro- 
grammable Amplifier 191 

3A75 DC-to-4 MHz 202 

Special Purpose Plug-Ins 

3A8 Operational Amplifier 196 

3C66 Carrier Amplifier 205 

Time-Base Plug-Ins 

2B67 Time-Base 188 

3B3 Time-Base — Delayed-Sweep .... 203 

3B4 Time-Base — X50 Magnifier 204 

3B5 Time-Base — Programmable 192 

Plug-In Unit Power Supply 

129 Plug-in Unit Power Supply 307 

LOW-FREQUENCY OSCILLOSCOPES 

502A, RM502A 100 /iV/cm — Dual-Beam 56 

503, RM503 DC-to-450 kHz — X-Y 59 

504, RM504 DC-to-450 kHz 61 

PHYSIOLOGICAL MONITOR 

410 Physiological Monitor 36 

PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLIES 

127 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 305 

129 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 307 

132 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 310 

133 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 311 

3 



CONTENTS 

PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES 

321 A DC-to-6MHz — AC/DC or Battery 30 

323 DC-to-4 MHz — AC/DC or Battery 33 

422, R422 DC-to-15MHz — AC, AC/DC or 

Battery 39 

453, R453 DC-to-50 MHz — Sweep-Delay . . 43 

454, R454 DC-to-150MHz — Sweep-Delay . 48 

PREAMPLIFIER AND AMPLIFIER 

122 Low-Level Preamplifier 303 

1 25 Power Supply 304 

1121 XI 00 Amplifier 324 

PULSE AND SIGNAL GENERATORS 

106 Squarewave Generator 294 

109 Pulse Generator 295 

1 1 1 Pretrigger Pulse Generator 296 

1 14 Variable Pulse Generator 298 

1 1 5 Pulse Generator 299 

Rl 16 Programmable Pulse Generator . . 301 

140 NTSC Test Signal Generator .... 88 

141 PAL TV Test Signal Generator . . 93 

184 Time-Mark Generator 317 

191 Constant-Amplitude Signal 

Generator 318 

284 Pulse Generator 320 

R293 Programmable Pulse Generator . . 321 

160-Series 

160A Power Supply 312 

161 Pulse Generator 313 

162 Waveform Generator 314 

163 Pulse Generator 315 

360 Indicator Unit 360 

RUGGEDIZED OSCILLOSCOPES 

321 A DC-to-6 MHz— AC/DC or Battery 30 

323 DC-to-4 MHz— AC/DC or Battery 33 

422, R422 DC-to-15 MHz— AC, AC/DC or 

Battery 39 

453, R453 DC-to-50 MHz — Sweep-Delay . . 43 

454, R454 DC-to-150MHz — Sweep-Delay . 48 
647A, R647A DC-to-100 MHz 267 

10A1 Differential Comparator Unit .... 270 

10A2A DC-to-100 MHz Dual-Trace Unit . 272 

11B1 Time-Base — X50 Magnifier Unit . 273 

1 1B2A Time-Base Unit 274 

SAMPLING OSCILLOSCOPES 

Plug-Ins for 530, 540, 550, 580-Series 
Oscilloscopes 

151 350-ps Sampling 164 

152 90-ps Reflectometer and Sampling 166 



Plug-Ins for 560-Series Oscilloscopes 

351 350-ps Dual-Trace Sampling ... 210 

352 Dual-Trace Sampling 211 

S-1 350-ps Sampling Head 212 

S-2 50-ps Sampling Head 212 

S-3 350-ps 100-kfi, Sampling Head . 213 

S-4 25-ps Sampling Head 214 

S-50 25-ps Generator 214 

S-51 18-GHz Trigger Countdown .... 215 

3S5 Programmable Sampling 222 

3T2 Random Sampling-Sweep 216 

3T5 Programmable Sampling-Sweep . 224 

3T77A Sampling-Sweep 217 

661 90-ps Sampling Oscilloscope . . . 323 
4S1 350-ps Dual-Trace Sampling .... 323 
4S2A 90-ps Dual-Trace Sampling .... 323 
4S3 350-ps Dual-Trace — Sampling- 
Probe 323 

5T3 Sampling-Sweep 323 

SCAN CONVERTER 

4501 Scan Converter Unit 290 

SPECIAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

410 Physiological Monitor 36 

507 High-Voltage, Surge-Test 323 

519 350-ps Risetime 68 



491, R491 



SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 

10MHz-to-40GHz Portable 



Plug-Ins for 530, 540, 550, 580-Series 
Oscilloscopes 

1L5 50 Hz-to-1 MHz Plug-In Unit .. . 

1L10 1 MHz-to-36MHz Plug-In Unit . 

1 L20 10 MHz-to-4.2 GHz Plug-In Unit 

1L30 925 MHz-to-10.5 GHz Plug-In 

Unit 

1.5 GHz-to-40 GHz Plug-In Unit 



1L40 



Plug-Ins for 560-Series Oscilloscopes 

3L5 50 Hz-to-1 MHz Plug-In Unit . 

3L10 1 MHz-to-36MHz Plug-In Unit 



•* 



52 



158 
160 
161 

324 
161 



206 
208 



STORAGE INSTRUMENTS 

549 Split-Screen Storage — Sweep- 
Delay 125 

564B, R564B Split-Screen Storage — X-Y 172 

601 5-inch Storage Display Unit .... 276 

611 11 -inch Storage Display Unit ... 282 



o 



4 



TELEVISION OSCILLOSCOPES 

453 DC-to-50 MHz — General Purpose 

MOD 127C 46 

520, R520 NTSC Vectorscope 71 

520, R520 PAL Vectorscope 75 

529, RM529 Waveform Monitor 83 

TV Accessories 87 

TERMINAL 

T4002 Graphic Computer Terminal .... 286 

TRACE-RECORDING CAMERAS 

C-12 Trace-Recording Camera 327 

C-27 Trace-Recording Camera 329 

C-30A Trace-Recording Camera 332 

C-31 Trace-Recording Camera 334 

C-40 Trace-Recording Camera 324 

TRANSISTOR-CURVE TRACERS 

575 Transistor-Curve Tracer 248 



CONTENTS 

175 High-Current Adapter 252 

576 Curve Tracer 254 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CARTS 

200 Scope-Mobile® Carts 338 

201, 202, 205 Scope-Mobile® Carts 339 

OTHER INSTRUMENTS 

1 1 3 Delay Cable 297 

1 30 L-C Meter 309 

281 Time-Domain Reflectometer Pulser 319 

282 Probe Adapter 319 

292 Semiconductor Tester Power 

Supply 323 

360 Indicator Unit 316 

PROBES AND ACCESSORIES 

Probe Reference Chart 340 

Voltage Probes 342-347, 350-354, 359-364 

Current Probes 348, 355-357 

Accessories 365-379 



CATHODE-RAY TUBE PHOSPHOR DATA 



The catalog description of each oscilloscope indicates 
the phosphor normally supplied. However, for specific 
applications, you may want to specify another phosphor. 
The phosphor data chart will help in your selection. 

For more specific information regarding the best-suited 
phosphor for your particular application, please confer 
with your Tektronix Field Engineer, Representative or Dis- 



tributor. He will know the factors that must be considered in 
selection of a phosphor for any given application. For 
example, Pll is excellent for waveform photography but due 
to its short persistence, it is not well suited for applications 
requiring visual observation of low speed phenomena. 

Phosphors are rated in several parameters, such as color 
of fluorescence or phosphorescence, decay, etc. The fol- 
lowing table describes the more commonly used phosphors. 









PHOSPHOR 


DATA CHART 






Phosphor 


F/uorescence 


Phosphorescence 

Where Different 

Than 

Fluorescence 


Relative 
Luminance® 


Relative 

Photographic 

Writing 

Speed® 


Decay to 
0.1% 
fin ms) 


Relative 

Burn 

Resistance 


Comments 


PI 


Yellowish-green 


— 


50% 


20% 


95 


Medium 


Replaced by P31 in 
most applications. 


P2 


Bluish-green 


Yellowish-green 


55% 


40% 


120* 


Medium 
high 


Good compromise for 
high and low speed 
applications. 


P4 


White 


— 


50% 


40% 


20 


Medium 
high 


Television displays 


P7 


Blue 


Yellowish-green 


35% 


75% 


1500* 


Medium 


Long decay, double 
layer screen. 


Pll 


Purplish-blue 




15% 


100% 


20 


Medium 


For photographic ap- 
plications 


P15 


Bluish-green 


— 


15% 


15% 


0.05 


Very high 


Very short decay for 
flying spot scanner use. 


P31 


Yellowish-green 




100% 


50% 


32 


High 


General purpose, 
brightest available 
phosphor. 



® Taken with a Spectra Brightness Spot Meter which incorporates a CIE standard eye filter. Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens. P31 as reference. 
® Pll as reference with Polaroid 410 film. Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens. 
* Low level lasts over one minute under conditions of low ambient illumination. 



BEHIND THE FRONT PANEL 



i 



Fig 1 is a block diagram of a typical oscilloscope, omitting 
power supplies. The waveform (A) to be observed is fed into 
the vertical-amplifier input. The calibrated VOLTS/DIV con- 
trol sets the gain of this amplifier. The push-pull output (8 
and C) of the vertical amplifier is fed through a delay line to 
the vertical-deflection plates of the cathode-ray tube. The pur- 
pose of the delay line is explained later on this page. 

The time-base generator or "sweep generator" developes 
a sawtooth wave (Ej that is used as a horizontal-deflection volt- 
age. The rising or positive-going part of this sawtooth, called 
the "run-up" portion of the wave, is linear. That is, the wave- 
form rises through a given number of volts during each unit of 
time. This rate of rise is set by the calibrated TIME/DIV con- 
trol. The sawtooth voltage is fed to the time-base amplifier. 
This amplifier includes a phase inverter so that the amplifier 
supplies two output sawtooth waveforms (GJ and (Jj simultane- 
ously — one of them positive-going, like the input, and the other 
negative-going. The positive-going sawtooth is applied to the 
right-hand horizontal-deflection plate of the cathode-ray tube, 
and the negative-going sawtooth is applied to the left-hand 
deflection plate. As a result, the cathode-ray beam is swept 
horizontally to the right through a given number of graticule 
divisions during each unit of time — the sweep rate being con- 
trolled by the TIME/DIV control. 

In order to maintain a stable display on the cathode-ray-tube 
screen, each horizontal sweep must start at the same point 
on the waveform being displayed. To maintain a stable dis- 
play, we feed a sample of the displayed waveform to a "trig- 
ger" circuit that gives a negative output voltage spike (D) at 
some selected point on the displayed waveform. This triggering 
spike is used to start the run-up portion of the time-base saw- 
tooth. As far as the display is concerned, then, "triggering" 
can be taken as synonymous with the starting of the horizontal 
sweep of the trace at the left-hand side of the graticule. 

A rectangular "unblanking" wave (F) derived from the time- 
base generator is applied to the grid of the cathode-ray tube. 
The duration of the positive part of this rectangular wave cor- 
responds to the duration of the positive-going or run-up part 
of the time-base output, so that the beam is switched on during 
its left-to-right travel and is switched off during its right-to-left 
retrace. 

In the case shown, the leading edge of the waveform being 
displayed is used to actuate the trigger circuit. Yet we may 
want to observe this leading edge on the screen — and the trig- 
gering and unblanking operations require a measurable time 
interval P, often about 0.15 microsecond. To permit us to see 
the leading edge, a delay Q of about 0.25 microsecond is 
introduced by the delay line in the vertical-deflection channel, 
after the point where the sample of the vertical signal is tapped 
off and fed to the trigger circuit. 



To summarize the purpose of the delay line, it is to retard 
the application of the observed waveform to the vertical- 
deflection plates until the trigger and time-base circuits have 
had an opportunity to get the unblanking and horizontal-sweep 
operations under way. In this way, we can view the entire 
desired waveform — even though the leading edge of that 
waveform was used to trigger the horizontal sweep. 

If the delay line were not used, we would be able to see only 
that portion of the waveform following the instant designated 
as (T) in waveform (A). 



THE OSCILLOSCOPE BLOCK DIAGRAM 




o 



Figure 1 



REFERENCE INFORMATION 



The following discussion is intended to clarify the significance 
of many of the technical terms used to describe oscilloscopes. 
The information is intended for those who, being responsible 
for buying or recommending such instruments, feel a need for 
a better understanding of the relative importance of different 
features. 

Things like workmanship, component quality and construc- 
tion layout have important bearings on reliability and service- 
ability but, unfortunately, cannot be adequately specified. The 
quality and availability of technical assistance before and after 
purchase are other matters deserving considerable attention. 
However, they too can be appraised only after experience. 

SCALES AND SWEEPS 

Except in special cases, oscilloscopes have built-in sawtooth 
sweep generators for producing constant-speed horizontal beam 
deflection. In early scopes, these generators ran continuously 
and horizontal calibration was based on their repetition fre- 
quency. In most modern laboratory scopes, sweeps are cali- 
brated in terms of a direct unit of time for a given distance of 
spot travel across the screen; hence the term, "time-base." The 
present system permits such advantages as: 

1. Direct measurement of time between events (waveforms) 

2. Viewing and measuring small portions of wavetrains 

3. Viewing and measuring random or aperiodic events 

4. Viewing and measuring single non-recurrent events 

The units of distance are usually inches or centimeters (or 
fractions thereof) but sometimes are specified simply as "divi- 
sions." The choice of how long a division might be is based 
upon the manufacturer's best opinion of how the full scale 
should be divided. One major division is the unit of distance 
in a specification. Some instruments have different distance- 
units for the vertical and horizontal scales. 

A transparent scale with vertical and horizontal lines spaced 
one division apart usually is fitted against the face of the CRT 
or in more modern instruments inside the CRT. This scale allows 
time and amplitude to be read directly. These graduated scales 
(graticules) often have small markings which subdivide the major 
divisions to assist in making accurate measurements. Such sub- 
divisions should not be interpreted as the distance-unit in a 
specification. 

Although it is common practice to think and speak of time- 
bases in terms of relative sweep speeds (horizontal velocity 
of the spot), we should not specify them in this way. Instead 
they are specified by a term which is actually the reciprocal of 
speed: time per division (Time/Div). 

FAST AND SLOW SWEEPS 

Some investigations require fast sweeps and others slow 
sweeps. Obviously an oscilloscope with the widest range of 
sweeps is usually the most versatile. However, the primary 
usefulness of a scope is as a high-speed device, so very slow 
sweeps have only limited use. From the standpoint of com- 
patibility with frequency response, the fastest sweeps are usu- 
ally considered adequate if they are capable of displaying 
one cycle of the upper passband frequency across the full hori- 
zontal scale. High-frequency scopes seldom have sweeps which 
are that fast. 



To measure risetime as accurately as possible, a step-signal 
(squarewave, rectangular pulse, etc.) should occupy almost the 
full vertical scale, and the rising portion of the signal should 
be displayed at nearly a 45-deg slope. This requirement can 
be met only if the fastest sweep is able to move the beam a 
horizontal distance nearly equal to the full vertical scale in a 
time interval equal to the risetime of the vertical deflection 
system. Because of the compounding difficulties and costs of 
providing extremely fast sweeps which are both linear and 
accurate, the requirement is seldom met by scopes having very 
good vertical deflection risetime capabilities. 

When accurate risetime measurements must be made which 
require the fastest sweep, a useful figure of merit for the ade- 
quacy of that sweep is M = T r /T d where M = figure of merit, 
T r = vertical system (usually amplifier) risetime and Td = 
time per division of the fastest sweep. Figures of merit greater 
than 1 are seldom found in scopes having risetimes less than 
approximately 30 nanoseconds (0.03 /.is). Figures of merit great- 
er than about 6 exceed the ideal and offer no further advan- 
tage. It should be realized that this figure of merit is only a 
measure of compatibility,- whenever possible, accurate risetime 
measurements should not be attempted when the risetime of a 
step-signal exceeds the vertical deflection system risetime. (See 
section on Risetime and High Frequency Response.) 

Fortunately, most risetime measurements are not made to 
determine actual risetime, but are made to determine whether 
certain limits are met or exceeded. In such cases, an adequate 
comparison with a standard signal of known risetime can usu- 
ally be made, using a sweep having a relatively poor figure 
of merit, if the vertical deflection system risetime is good 
enough. 

SWEEP MAGNIFICATION AND 
SWEEP DELAY 

Sometimes it is desirable to display parts of waveforms 
which occur considerably later than suitable sweep triggering 
signals occur. Such waveforms can always be displayed on 
sweeps which last long enough, but if the duration of the wave- 
form is short compared to the duration of a full sweep, an 
accurate examination may not be possible. The need to mag- 
nify (expand) the display for the time interval during which a 
particular event occurs is apparent. Portions of sweeps may 
be magnified by increasing the gain of the horizontal amplifier 
(allowing either or both ends of the sweeps to go off-screen) 
and positioning the display so that the desired portion is on- 
screen. This is a simple way to meet the need. Another way 
is to generate suitably delayed sweep triggering signals so 
that fast sweeps may be triggered just prior to the moment 
when the signal to be examined occurs. The first method delays 
the presenfat/on of a sweep portion; the second method delays 
the actual generation of the displayed sweep. Calibrated sweep 
delay can provide some advantages over ordinary sweep mag- 
nification, cost and simplicity not being among them. These 
advantages are: 

1. Greater ratios of effective magnification 

2. Elimination of "time jitter" or "time drift" of displayed 
waveforms 

3. Greater accuracy of time-interval measurements between 
waveforms 

4. Better long-term accuracy of the displayed time-base 



REFERENCE INFORMATION 

RISETIME AND HIGH FREQUENCY 
RESPONSE 

The first qualification generally sought in a scope is ade- 
quate risetime or adequate high-frequency sinewave response. 
Risetime is the more important specification for "faster" scopes, 
and passband (bandwidth) the more frequently used specifica- 
tion for "slower" scopes. The two will be closely related mathe- 
matically, however, when fast step-signals produce little or no 
overshoot or ringing. The product of risetime and frequency 
response should produce a factor whose value lies between 
0.33 and 0.35, when transient response is optimum. For ex- 
ample, the product of 0.023 microsecond risetime (0.023 X 
10-° second) and 15 MHz (15 X 10" Hz) equals 0.345. Factors 
larger than 0.35 probably indicate overshoot in excess of 2 
percent, while those larger than 0.4 probably indicate overshoot 
in excess of 5 percent. 

Ideally, scopes should have a vertical system capable of 
rising in about one-fifth the time that the fastest step-signal 
applied rises. In such a case, the risetime of the signal (as 
indicated on the scope) will only be in error by about 2 per- 
cent, assuming sweep timing and linearity are perfect. Vertical 
deflection systems which have a risetime no better than equal 
to the fastest rising signal applied are often considered ade- 
quate — a conclusion which may or may not be true depending 
upon the accuracy desired. Such reasoning is based upon the 
fact that the indicated risetime will be in error by a predictable 
amount when transient response is optimum. Under such con- 
ditions, signal risetime can be calculated to a close approxi- 
mation by the formula 



I 



• 



Ti s 



where T s = signal risetime, T| = indicated risetime and T a 
= vertical system (usually amplifier) risetime. The accuracy 
of such calculations falls off sharply for signals which rise 
faster than the scope amplifier, because of the increased sig- 
nificance of measurement errors. For instance, the following 
sweep timing or display reading errors will contribute as much 
as 100 percent difference between calculated and actual sig- 
nal risetimes. 

measurement error 

which can account 

for 100 percent 

calculation error 

When the fastest sweep is relatively slow compared with 
vertical deflection system risetime (or the scale is small to start 
with), measurements become confined to quite small sections 
of the screen, and the probability of measurement errors be- 
comes even worse. 

As mentioned in a previous section, very accurate risetime 
measurements are usually not as common as risetime compari- 
sons. For comparing the risetimes of two signals, scopes hav- 
ing a risetime equal to the risetime of signals applied to them 
are usually adequate. 



When T./T, 


= 2/1 


1 1 percent 


When T a /T s 


= 3/1 


5 percent 


When T a /T s 


= 4/1 


3 percent 


When T./T, 


= 5/1 


2 percent 



SWITCHED INPUTS AND 
DUAL-BEAM SCOPES 



A very useful type of dual-input amplifier is one which 
can pass either of two input signals one at a time to permit 
viewing either signal without disturbing connections. Com- 
parison of the two signals is thereby permitted. Manual switch- 
ing, available on some instruments, is the simplest method but 
electronic switching permits simultaneous viewing of two sig- 
nals. Since the two signals trace out separate displays, scopes 
with built-in electronic switches are commonly called dual- 
trace scopes. They should not be confused with dual-beam 
scopes. Dual-trace scopes offer some advantages over dual- 
beam scopes and vice versa. Two simultaneous, non-recurrent 
signals of short duration may be displayed on a dual-beam 
scope, but cannot be displayed on a dual-trace scope. Also, 
some dual-beam scopes can display non-recurrent signals on 
different time-bases. The principal advantages of dual-trace 
scopes are lower cost and intrinsically better comparison ca- 
pabilities. 

Steady displays of two signals which are not synchronous 
with each other may be displayed on dual-trace scopes. This 
is possible because the triggering signals may be switched in 
synchronism with the input signals. A useful application of such 
a display is one in which one waveform might be some kind 
of standard. Dual-beam scopes having two sweep generators 
and two sets of horizontal deflection plates also permit this 
kind of comparison. 

Electronic switches should be capable of switching in two 
ways: rapidly during sweeps or synchronously during sweep 
retrace intervals. The first way is usually called "chopped," 
the second way "alternate." The alternate mode is used more 
frequently and is preferred for displays employing faster 
sweeps. The chopped mode usually is reserved for comparing 
low-frequency recurrent signals or long-duration, non-recurrent 
signals. 

When displaying two very bright traces using the chopped 
mode, the display may show the chopping waveform transients 
as faint lines connecting the two traces. Some scopes blank 
(turn off) the CRT beam during these transition intervals to pre- 
vent them from appearing in the display. 

The chopping rate (frequency) should be as high as possi- 
ble so long as the resulting traces are not broadened signifi- 
cantly by distortion of the chopping signal. When the chopped 
mode is used with relatively fast non-recurrent sweeps, the 
traces are not continuous but are made up of separate seg- 
ments, the number of segments depending on the chopping 
rate and the sweep duration. For instance, if the chopping rate 
is 100,000 Hz and the sweep duration is 1 millisecond, there 
will be 100 segments in each trace. How well these separate 
segments depict all the detail in the two waveforms establishes 
the limits of usefulness of the chopped mode compared to an 
alternately switched display or a dual-beam scope. 



8 



REFERENCE INFORMATION 



DIFFERENTIAL, BALANCED OR 
PUSH-PULL INPUTS 

Push-pull signals may be introduced to the vertical deflection 
system if the input circuits are designed to accommodate such 
signals. Such amplifiers are commonly called differential or 
balanced amplifiers. They provide a feature beyond mere ac- 
commodation of push-pull signals: they have the ability to 
cancel or reject, to a high degree, any signal components equal 
in amplitude and phase that appear at both inputs. This abil- 
ity explains the term "differential amplifier" since essentially 
only the difference between two signals is amplified. Such 
amplifiers provide a simple and accurate means of measuring 
the difference between two signals. They also provide a means 
of rejecting most of any unwanted signal components common 
to both inputs, such as power line "hum." 

"SUMMING" INPUTS 

A type of dual-input arrangement available on some ampli- 
fiers, opposite in character to differential input, is the summing 
input. Such an amplifier rejects out-of-phase signal components 
which are equal in amplitude but adds those components which 
are of the same phase. Since this amplifier adds or subtracts, 
depending on phase, a descriptive term is "added algebraic- 
ally." 

"SAMPLING" OSCILLOSCOPES 

A very significant advancement in the art of oscilloscope 
design is a system employing sampling techniques. The techni- 
que is very similar, in principle, to the use of stroboscopic light 
to study fast mechanical motion. Progressive samples of adjacent 
portions of successive waveforms are taken; then they are 
"stretched" in time, amplified by relatively low-bandwidth 
amplifiers and finally shown, one sample at a time, on the 
screen of a cathode-ray tube. The graph produced is a replica 
of the sampled waveforms. The principle difference in appear- 
ance, between displays made by sampling techniques and con- 
ventional displays, is that those made by sampling are com- 
prised of separate segments or dots. This technique is limited 
to depicting repetitive signals, since no more than one sample 
is taken and displayed each time the signal recurs. 

The sampling method, however, provides a means for examin- 
ing fast-changing signals of low amplitude that cannot be ex- 
amined in any other way. The system is capable of resolving 
events that occur in less than 1 nanosecond, on an "equivalent" 
time-base of less than 1 /5 nanosecond per cm and which have 
less than 10 mV of peak amplitude. 

TRAVELING-WAVE AND DISTRIBUTED- 
DEFLECTION OSCILLOSCOPES 

When examining extremely fast non-recurrent signals (or sig- 
nals having a very low repetition rate) a high writing-rate oscil- 
loscope having no vertical amplifier must be used. Ordinary 



cathode-ray tubes with only one pair of relatively long vertical 
deflection plates are not suitable in this type of scope because 
the transit-time of beam electrons through the deflection plate 
region is excessive and because the deflection plate capacitance 
and lead inductances tend to "ring." Traveling-wave and dis- 
tributed-deflection cathode-ray tubes have numerous small verti- 
cal-deflection plates, connected to one another through a delay 
network, which progressively and collectively deflect the beam. 
An applied signal progresses from one plate to the next at the 
same speed as the beam electrons travel through the deflection 
region. 

The principal features sacrificed in such instruments are usu- 
ally vertical sensitivity and scan area. The term "sensibility" is 
sometimes used in preference to the terms "sensitivity" or "de- 
flection factor." Sensibility is stated in terms of volts per spot 
diameter (or per trace width). When the deflection is quite 
small, sensibility is the better term since it accurately indicates 
the amount of information that can be contained in the scan 
area. 

CURVE TRACING (X-Y) SCOPES 

Some scopes have vertical and horizontal amplifiers which are 
alike. In this way the two amplifiers can be made to have very 
similar characteristics. Perhaps the widest use of such instru- 
ments is for the plotting of two functions, such as current versus 
voltage, magnetizing force versus flux density, and speed versus 
acceleration. Another important use is the display of phase 
differences between two signals by means of Lissajous figures. 
Phase equality is particularly easy to verify by this means if the 
phase delay through each channel is the same at the frequency 
applied. In most such instruments, phase shift does not remain 
exactly equal for all frequencies within the pass band — and this 
is particularly true for frequencies near the upper limit of the 
pass band. Phase shift differences between the two amplifiers 
are especially apparent when the two amplifiers are not operated 
at equal deflection factors. If exacting phase comparisons or 
measurements at the higher frequencies need to be made by 
such instruments, some method is needed for first equalizing the 
phase shifts through the two amplifiers. The maximum phase 
difference at certain frequencies usually is specified, but often 
only for equal sensitivity settings. 

Specific curve tracing oscilloscopes are built for displaying 
semiconductor parameters. Known as transistor curve tracers, 
these oscilloscopes are capable of displaying one or more char- 
acteristic curves of two and three-terminal devices. Each curve 
is developed by driving one terminal with a constant voltage or 
current and then sweeping the other with a half sinewave of 
voltage. If more than one curve is to be drawn, the driving 
source is stepped through several values and the sweep re- 
peated, once for each step. The horizontal deflection is then 
a plot of either the driving voltage or the sweep voltage across 
the device under test, while the vertical deflection is a plot of the 
current drawn from the sweep source. 



\ 



REFERENCE INFORMATION 



ELECTRICAL & MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS 

VENTILATION 

In general, a standard oscilloscope using 250 watts of power 
or more will have filtered forced-air cooling. 
CLEARANCE 

Under normal conditions, at least two inches of unobstructed 
space around the oscilloscope should be maintained to assure 
safe operating temperature. When rackmounting an instrument, 
add approx 3 inches to the depth of the instrument for adequate 
clearance of rear connections (power cords, etc.). Should the 
chassis temperature become excessive, a thermal-cutout switch 
will interrupt the power and keep it off until a safe operating 
temperature is reached. 

CONSTRUCTION 

The oscilloscope chassis and cabinet are of aluminum alloy 
for lightweight durability. 

FINISH 

The oscilloscope front panel is anodized and the cabinet has 
blue-vinyl finish. 
POWER REQUIREMENTS 

In general, instruments are factory wired for operation at 115 
VAC. Newer instruments provide quick-change line-voltage 
selectors for convenient selection of line-voltage operating 
ranges. Transformer taps in other instruments can be changed 
to accommodate specific line-voltage operating ranges or can 
be factory wired for a specific range if specified on the purchase 
order. Tektronix instruments are designed with electronically- 
regulated power supplies to compensate for changing line volt- 
ages. 

Most Tektronix instruments are designed for operation from 
a power source with its neutral at or near ground (earth) potent- 
ial. They are not intended for operation from two phases of 
a multi-phase system, or across the legs of a single-phase three- 
wire system (220 V). 

Tektronix instruments are equipped with either a three-conduc- 
tor attached power cord, or a three-terminal power cord recept- 
acle. The third wire, or terminal, is connected directly to the in- 
strument frame, and is intended to ground the instrument to pro- 
tect operating personnel, as recommended by national and 
international safety codes. If the instrument must be operated 
from a two-contact outlet, a three-to-two-conductor adapter 
should be securely connected to a suitable ground, or the in- 
strument frame should be securely grounded with an external 
connection. Color coding of the power cord conductors follows 
the National Electrical Code (LISAS CI - 1965): the line con- 
ductor is black; the neutral is white; the safety earth or ground 
is green. 

ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 

The following instruments are specifically designed for the 
more severe environments often encountered when they are used 
in portable or mobile applications: 

321 A, 323, 422 and R422, 453 and R453, 454 and R454, 491 
and R491,647Aand R647A. 

The environmental characteristics listed include some or all of 
the following: 

Temperature, Altitude, Humidity, Vibration, Shock and Elec- 
tromagnetic interference (EMI, previously RFI). 
Sample production instruments are tested periodically as part 
of a continual quality control process. Complete tests on every 
production instrument are undesirable as well as uneconomical. 
The specifications for humidity, vibration, shock and trans- 
portation are intended to be beyond what can be expected in 
use, and operation at these extremes may cause minor physical 
deterioration. Such operation, however, should not cause elec- 

10 



trical performance deterioration outside specifications. The 
specifications for temperature and altitude are such that con- 
tinual use at the limits will not cause significant short term dete- 
rioration. Naturally, higher temperature operation can be 
expected to reduce long term reliability and should be avoided 
if possible. The EMI test is completely non-destructive. 

For more specific information on the environmental charac- 
teristics and how they apply to the above instruments, please 
refer to the page covering that instrument. 

PHOTOGRAPHIC WRITING SPEED 

Photographic writing speed is a figure of merit which de- 
scribes the ability of a particular camera, film, oscilloscope, 
and phosphor to record fast moving traces. The writing speed 
figure expresses the maximum single event spot velocity (usually 
in centimeters per microsecond) which may be recorded on 
film. 

The results achieved are a function of the combined system 
performance of the oscilloscope, camera, film, recording tech- 
nique, and the ability of the film reader to make a consistent 
interpretation of the results. Prefogging and postfogging of the 
recording film improves the apparent photographic writing 
speed of a particular system but the results are unpredictable 
and difficult to repeat. 

The illustration below shows one way in which writing speed 
can be measured. There is displayed a single trace of a 
damped sinewave whose frequency and amplitude is such that 
the rapidly rising and falling portions of the first cycle or two 
fail to record. The peak to peak amplitude of the sinewave 
should be three to four times as great as the horizontal distance 
occupied by one cycle. 

The writing speed capability of the oscilloscope is deter- 
mined as follows: mask out the sinewave peaks on the photo- 
graph leaving the central one-third visible. View the photograph 
while backlighted. Starting from the left, find the first rapidly 
rising or falling portion of the damped sinewave which is dis- 
cernible. Let D represent the vertical distance in centimeters 
between the peaks which are connected by this portion. The 
writing speed in centimeters per microsecond is calculated by: 




Photographic writing speed = 3.74 Df where f is the fre- 
quency of the damped sinewave in megahertz. 

Although the writing speed is an important characteristic of 
the oscilloscope, it does not completely describe the ability 
of the oscilloscope to present detailed information. 



3 



" 



SOME FACTORS AFFECTING THE VALUE 





nf 'Uf [ iif V> %Hf it, 




CATHODE-RAY TUBES 

At Tektronix, the cathode-ray tube 
is considered to be the heart of 
each oscilloscope. Each instru- 
ment has a cathode-ray tube de- 
signed to optimize total perform- 
ance. The electron optics devel- 
oped for the Type 454 CRT feature 
distributed vertical deflection plates 
(shown) that contribute significant- 
ly to the performance of the Type 
454 Oscilloscope. 

SEMICONDUCTORS 

Tektronix designs and manufac- 
tures semiconductors to satisfy 
specialized instrument require- 
ments. Notable examples are semi- 
conductors used in sampling os- 
cilloscopes that feature state-of- 
the-art measurements. 



CABLES 

Cable technology permits us to 
make compact delay lines and volt- 
age and current probes that are a 
necessary requirement for high- 
performance oscilloscopes. We 
manufacture more than 2,000,000 
feet of probe cables and delay 
lines each year. The illustrated 
over-and-under winding technique 
provides increased pulse delay and 
preserves waveform fidelity. 

CAPACITORS ■■■F 

Building our own capacitors per- 
mits us to meet specific perform- 
ance requirements and make spe- 
cial sizes and mounting configura- 
tions. Timing capacitors and input- 
coupling capacitors are critical 
components in oscilloscope per- 
formance. 



CERAMICS 

Our ceramic technology gives us 
the ability to produce ceramic 
CRT's with increased strength, 
tight internal tolerances, and im- 
proved edge lighting for the illu- 
minated internal graticules. We 
also produce a wide variety of 
specialized ceramic parts designed 
to satisfy specific oscilloscope re- 
quirements. 



METALS 

Our metals technology and produc- 
tion capability provide design free- 
dom for our engineers. Fabrication 
of any and all metal parts, from the 
precision machining required for 
spectrum analyzers to forming 
chassis of oscilloscopes, gives 
Tektronix a valuable tool in the 
design of new products. 



OF TEKTRONIX PRODUCTS 



POWER TRANSFORMERS 

Designing and manufacturing our 
own transformers permits our en- 
gineers to easily satisfy the power 
supply requirements of each in- 
strument. Power transformers, de- 
signed and manufactured at Tek- 
tronix, are warranted for the life 
of the instrument. 



INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 

Integrated circuits technology of- 
fers significant new opportunities in 
instrument performance. Recent 
developments include a highly-sen- 
sitive Hall device for the unique 
P6042 DC Current Probe. 



RESISTORS 

Variable resistors, with reverse and 
multiple pitched windings, provide 
a controlled inductance per unit 
resistance. Used as variable con- 
trols in Tektronix oscilloscopes, 
they change the vertical gain of 
the oscilloscope while maintaining 
pulse fidelity. 



PLASTICS 

Plastics technology provides Tek- 
tronix with many components. Volt- 
age and current probe parts made 
with special plastics reduce un- 
desirable electrical effects and 
withstand rugged use. Other plas- 
tic parts include special switch 
couplings, handles, knobs, capac- 
itor mounts and covers, and many 
other items designed to optimize 
oscilloscope performance. 

ELECTROCHEMICAL 

Precision electroplating of plastics 
and other materials, and electro- 
forming intricately shaped parts 
are daily tasks of our electrochem- 
ical department. Chemical machin- 
ing can quickly produce prototype 
parts for evaluation by design en- 
gineers while maintaining critical 
tolerances. 









11 



GENERAL INFORMATION 

THE UNITED STATES 



A 



INSTRUMENT ORDERS, TERMS, AND SHIPMENT 

Orders should be placed with your Tektronix Field 
Engineering Office listed on page 13. 

TERMS OF SALE 

Credit terms may be arranged through your Tektronix 
Field Engineer. 

Tektronix standard terms of sale are NET 30 DAYS, 
which is to agree that payment will be deferred for thirty 
days following shipment. 

Other terms are offered to meet varied purchasing 
objectives and to assist in financial planning. Some of 
these terms of sale are: 

Extended terms of 60 to 120 days are available on the 
same single payment basis as standard terms. Since the 
cost of extended terms is not included in catalog prices, a 
service charge is added to the product invoice. 

Installment terms may be used to purchase instruments 
for use now, while payment is monthly for periods of six 
months to five years, depending on the amount to be 
financed. As little as 10% is advanced prior to shipment 
of an installment purchase. 

A term lease (buying the use of instrumentation rather 
than the equipment) of six months to five years is avail- 
able. At the expiration of the lease there is the oppor- 
tunity to update your instruments, to renew the existing 
lease for a modest annual rental, or to return the equip- 
ment at Tektronix expense. 

All prices, quotations and shipments are FOB Beaverton, 
Oregon. 

Unless otherwise specified, shipment will be made via 
most economical method. Surface and air shipments will 
be insured at full valuation unless your order instructs 
otherwise. 



FIELD MAINTENANCE 

To help assure adequate instrument-maintenance facili- 
ties for our customers, Tektronix has established Field 
Engineering Offices and Service Centers at strategic points 
in the United States. Your own Tektronix Field Office will 
process all orders for repair parts promptly, and provide 
emergency parts service when needed to restore an instru- 
ment to operating condition. Your Field Office will also 
arrange for fast service with necessary adjustments or 
repair of your instruments at a nearby Service Center. 

Tektronix repair and replacement-part service is geared 
directly to the field, therefore all requests for repairs and 
replacement parts should be directed to the Tektronix 
Field Office in your area. This procedure will assure you 
the fastest possible service. Please include instrument 
Type number and Serial number with all requests for 
parts or service. PLEASE DO NOT RETURN INSTRUMENTS 
OR PARTS BEFORE RECEIVING DIRECTIONS. 



WARRANTY 

All Tektronix instruments are warranted against defec- 
tive materials and workmanship for one year. Tektronix 
transformers, manufactured in our own plant, are war- ' 
ranted for the life of the instrument. 

Questions regarding warranty should be discussed 
with your Tektronix Field Engineer. 



TEKTRONIX, INC. 

An Oregon Corporation 

Corporate Offices and Plant Located at: 

TEKTRONIX INDUSTRIAL PARK 

14150 S.W. KARL BRAUN DRIVE 

BEAVERTON, OREGON 

Mailing Address: P. O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon 97005 
Telephone: (503) 644-0161 TWX: 503-291-6805 Telex: 36-691 



Cable: TEKTRONIX 



12 



UNITED STATES FIELD ENGINEERING OFFICES 



TEKTRONIX, INC. 

P. O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon 97005 
Telephone: (503) 644-0161 TWX— 503-291-6805 Telex: 36-691 

FIELD ENGINEERING OFFICES 



ALABAMA 
Hunlsvllle 35801 

Suite 27, 3322 S. Memorial Parkway 
Phone (205)881-2912, Telex 59-4422 

ARIZONA 

Phoenix 

7045 E. Camelback Road 
Scottsdale 85251 

Phone (602)946-4273, Telex 66-7401 
Tucson Area: Enterprise 383 

CALIFORNIA 

Alhambra 91801 

Suite D, 1525 S. Garfield Avenue 
Phone (213)576-1601, Telex 6-74397 
From L.A. call: 283-0501 

Concord 94520 
2339 Stanwell Circle 
Phone (415)687-8350, Telex 335-344 
From Oakland, Berkeley, Richmond, 
Albany and San Leandro: 254-5353 

Orange 92667 

1722 E. Rose Avenue 

Phone (714)633-3450,, Telex 6-78432 

Palo Alto 94303 

3750 Fabian Way 

Phone (415)326-8500, Telex 34-8411 

San Diego 92120 

Suite 107, 6150 Mission Gorge Road 

Phone (714)283-6225, Telex 69-5025 

San Jose 

Suite 1B, 1725 De La Cruz Blvd. 

Santa Clara 95050 

Phone (408)296-3010, Telex 34-6439 

Santa Barbara 93104 
1310 Santa Barbara Street 
Phone (805)963-1848, Telex 658-411 
From Island of Oahu, 
Hawaii Area: Enterprise 5-700 

Van Nuys 91406 

16930 Sherman Way 

Phone (213)987-2600, Telex 65-1426 

From L.A. call: 873-6868 



COLORADO 

Denver 80222 

2120 South Ash Street 

Phone (303)757-1249, Telex 045-662 

CONNECTICUT 

Hartford 

809 Main Street 

East Hartford 06108 

Phone (203)289-8695, Telex 9-9338 

Stamford 06902 

125 Strawberry Hill Avenue 

Phone (203)325-3817, Telex 096-5917 

FLORIDA 

Fort Lauderdale 33311 
1871 West Oakland Park Blvd. 
Phone (305)581-0221, Telex 51-4474 
Also serves Puerto Rico and 
U.S. Virgin Islands 

Orlando 32803 

Suite 185, 1010 Executive Center Dr. 
Phone (305)841-2382, Telex 56-4465 
From The Cape Kennedy Area: 
636-0343 

GEORGIA 

Atlanta 30329 

Suite 106, 1680 Tullie Circle. N.E. 

Phone (404)633-0344, Telex 05-42233 

ILLINOIS 

Hinsdale 60521 

Suite 111. 119 E. Ogden Avenue 

Phone (312)325-3050, Telex 02-53694 

Park Ridge 60068 
400 Higgins Road 
Phone (312)825-6666, Telex 02-53374 



INDIANA 

Indianapolis 46205 

3937 N. Keystone Avenue 

Phone (317)546-2408, Telex 027-348 

KANSAS 

Kansas City 

Suite 106, 5845 Horton 

Mission 66202 

Phone (913)432-1003, Telex 04-2321 



MARYLAND 

Baltimore 

1526 York Road 
Lutherville 21093 

Phone (301)825-9000, Telex 087-804 
From Harrisburg, Lancaster and 
York Area call: Enterprise 1-0631 

Rockville 20852 

1500 East Jefferson Street 

Phone (301)427-0700, Telex 89-2337 



MASSACHUSETTS 

Boston 

244 Second Avenue 

Waltham 02154 

Phone (617)894-4550, Telex 92-3446 

MICHIGAN 

Detroit 

22132 West Nine Mile Road 

P.O. Box 363 

Southfield 48075 

Phone (313)358-3122, Telex 023-400 

Lansing 48910 

Suite 10, 6425 S. Pennsylvania Ave. 

Phone (517)393-5280, Telex 22-9423 

MINNESOTA 

Minneapolis 55426 

Suite 115, 7515 Wayzata Blvd. 

Phone (612)545-2581, Telex 029-699 

St. Paul 

Pentagon Office Park 

4930 West 77th Street 

Edina 55435 

Phone (612)920-1860, Telex 29-5393 



MISSOURI 
St. Louis 63135 
119 North Harvey 
Phone (314)524-0900, Telex 044-851 



NEVADA 
Las Vegas 89102 
5128 West Charleston Blvd. 
Phone (702)870-8201, Telex 68-4419 



NEW JERSEY 
Cherry Hill 08034 
905 Kings Highway North 
Phone (609)667-4333, Telex 84-5338 

Springfield 07081 

964 South Springfield Avenue 
Phone (201)379-1670, Telex 1-26344 

NEW MEXICO 

Albuquerque 87108 

1258 Ortiz Drive, S.E. 

Phone (505)268-3373, Telex 66-0421 

Southern N.M. Area: Enterprise 678 

NEW YORK 

Buffalo 14225 

965 Maryvale Drive 

Phone (716)633-7861, Telex 091-385 

Endicott 

3214 Watson Blvd. 

Endwell 13763 

Phone (607)748-8291, Telex 933-421 



Cable: TEKTRONIX 



Poughkeepsie 12603 
12 Raymond Avenue 
Phone (914)471-3620, Telex 96-816 

Roslyn Heights, L.I. 11577 

125 Mineola Avenue 
Phone (516)484-2300 
Telex ROSN 01-26446 

Syracuse 13211 

East Molloy Road & Pickard Drive 

P.O. Box 155 

Phone (315)455-6666, Telex 937-239 

NORTH CAROLINA 

Greensboro 27405 

1011 Homeland Avenue 

Phone (919)274-4647, Telex 57-4416 

OHIO 

Cleveland 44129 

Suite 101, 5562 Pearl Road 

Phone (216)884-6558, Telex 098-5217 

Columbus 

Suite 5, 12 West Selby Blvd. 
Worthington 43085 
Phone (614)888-4040 
Telex WOGN 024-684 

Dayton 45439 

3309 Office Park Drive, Suite 103 

Phone (513)293-4175, Telex 02-88225 

OREGON 

Portland 

8845 S.W. Center Court 

Tigard 97223 

Phone (503)639-7691, Telex 36-0205 

PENNSYLVANIA 

Philadelphia 

126 Presidential Blvd. North 
Bala-Cynwyd 19004 

Phone (215)839-3111, Telex 083-4218 

Pittsburgh 

3834 Northern Pike 

Monroeville 15146 

Phone (412)351-3345, Telex 086-761 

TEXAS 

Dallas 75207 

Suite 162, 2600 Stemmons Freeway 

Phone (214)631-4560, Telex 073-2217 

Houston 77027 
Suite H, 3723 Westheimer 
Phone (713)622-8141, Telex 077-494 
New Orleans, Louisiana Area: 
WX 3093 

San Antonio 78209 

8031 Broadway 

Phone (512)826-0686, Telex 76-7456 

UTAH 

Salt Lake City 84115 
65 West 2950 South 
Phone (801)484-8501, Telex 388-365 

VIRGINIA 

Alexandria 22304 

Suite 102, 6000 Stevenson Avenue 

Phone (703)751-6096, Telex 8-9406 

Hampton 23366 

1310 Todds Lane 

Phone (703)826-4020, Telex 82-3409 

WASHINGTON 

Seattle 981 83 
410 Baker Blvd. 
Andover Industrial Park 
Phone (206)243-2494, Telex 032-488 
From Pullman, Richland, Spokane, 
Yakima: Zenith 9369 



WISCONSIN 

Milwaukee 53226 

Mayfair Plaza 

2421 North Mayfair Road 

Phone (414)476-6850, Telex 2-6604 



13 



GENERAL INFORMATION 

CUSTOMERS OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES 

To provide you with personal assistance in ordering as well as servicing Tektronix instruments, we have established 
Field Engineering Offices and technically qualified Tektronix distributors in many countries throughout the world. The 
Tektronix office or distributor in your country will be pleased to help you select the instrument that best suits your re- 
quirements in performance, and provide you with prompt ordering service. 



SERVICE 

If you require service, replacement parts, a warranty 
question resolved, or other help, please notify the Tek- 
tronix facility through which you ordered your instrument. 
They will process all orders for repair parts promptly, 
and provide emergency parts service when needed to 
restore an instrument to operating condition. They will 
also arrange for fast service with necessary recalibration 
or repair work on your instrument. 

COUNTRIES WITH TEKTRONIX 
FIELD ENGINEERING OFFICES 



AUSTRALIA 

CANADA 

FRANCE 

JAPAN 

SWITZERLAND 

UNITED KINGDOM 

Listed on page 15 



The Tektronix Field Engineer- 
ing office in your country will 
provide you with quotations 
and accept your orders. Nor- 
mally, prices quoted are FOB 
your plant. 



WARRANTY 

All Tektronix instruments are warranted against defec- 
tive material and workmanship for one year from date 
of shipment. Tektronix transformers, manufactured in our 
own plant, are warranted for the life of the instrument. 



PLEASE DO NOT RETURN INSTRUMENTS OR PARTS BE- 
FORE RECEIVING DIRECTIONS. 



COUNTRIES WITH 
TEKTRONIX DISTRIBUTORS 

Listed on pages 15 and 16 



Your Tektronix distributor 
will provide you with quo- 
tations FOB your country 
and accept your orders. 



COUNTRIES WITH NO TEKTRONIX DISTRIBUTOR OR TEKTRONIX FIELD ENGINEERING OFFICE 



Please address your inquiries and orders to: 

Tektronix, Inc. 

International Marketing Dept. 

P. O. Box 500 

Beaverton, Oregon 97005 USA 

INFORMATION AND QUOTATIONS 

Staff Field Engineers will be pleased to provide you 
with information on Tektronix instruments and answer your 
technical questions. A pro forma invoice will be issued, 
if requested, indicating price and sales conditions. When 
pro forma invoice or purchase order acknowledgement is 
issued, we will indicate the documents needed to ship 
your order. We will be glad to prepare necessary export 
documentation for you and make all shipping arrange- 
ments. 



METHOD OF PAYMENT 

We would like to make our products available to cus- 
tomers on open account terms, whenever conditions per- 
mit. Other credit terms are available for a customer's 
particular requirements. However, due to political, foreign 
exchange, and regulatory conditions in many areas of the 
world, credit terms are not always available. In those 
cases, advance payment or irrevocable letters of credit 
are required. 

SHIPMENTS 

Unless otherwise requested, shipments will be made 
by the most economical method. 



14 



INTERNATIONAL 
FIELD OFFICES AND DISTRIBUTORS 



TEKTRONIX INTERNATIONAL FIELD OFFICES 



AUSTRALIA 

Tektronix Australia Pty. Limited 

North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113 

80 Waterloo Road 

Phone 88-7066 

Cable: TEKTRONIX AUSTRALIA 

Adelaide, South Australia 5000 
128 Gilles Street 
Phone 23-2811 

Melbourne, Victoria 3004 
Suite 20, 67 Queen's Road 
Phone 51-1592 

CANADA 

Tektronix Canada Limited 

Montreal 308, Quebec 

5050 de Sorel Street 

Phone (514)731-3761. Telex 01-2867 

Cable: TEKANADA 

Ottawa 6. Ontario 

28A Northside Road, Bells Corners 

Phone (613)828-5171, Telex 01-3419 

Downsview. Ontario 

1177 Finch Avenue, West 

Phone (416)638-6404, Telex 02-2776 



Vancouver, British Columbia 

2180 West Broadway 

Phone (604)736-0265, Telex 04-50262 



FRANCE 

Relations Techniques Intercontinentales 

91, Orsay 
Z. I. Courtaboeuf 
Route de Villejust 
(Boite Postale 13) 
Phone 920 61 73 
Cable: TEKFRANS Orsay 

(69) Lyon 7° 

Centre Regional de Lyon 
166, Avenue Berthelot 
Phone (78) 72.00.70 

(6) Nice 

Centre Regional de Nice 
11, Avenue Valdiletta 
Phone (93) 84.05.93 

(35) Rennes 

Centre Regional de Rennes 
6, Avenue Barthou 
Phone (99) 00.84.42 



(31) Toulouse 

Centre Regional de Toulouse 
15, rue Joseph Vie 
Phone (61) 42.04.50 

JAPAN 

Sony/Tektronix Corporation 

Tokyo 141 

10-14 Osaki -2. Shinagawa-Ku 

(P.O. Box 14, Haneda Airport, Tokyo 149) 

Phone 493-3311 (Area 03/Tokyo) 

Telex TK 2262, TK 2436, TK 4666 

Cable: SONYTEK TOKYO 

SWITZERLAND 

Tektronix International A.G. 



6300 Zug 

Alpenstrasse No. 9 
Phone 042 21.91.92, 
Cable: TEKINTAG 



Telex 78808 



UNITED KINGDOM 

Tektronix U.K. Limited 

Harpenden, Herts 

Beaverton House. Station Approach 
Phone Harpenden 61251, Telex 25559 
Cable: TEKTRONIX HARPENDEN 



INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTORS AND REPRESENTATIVES 

Supplied and Supported by Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon, U.S.A. 97005 
Telephone: (503) 644-0161 Telex: 36-691 Cable: TEKTRONIX 



ARGENTINA 

Coasin S.A. 

Buenos Aires 

Virrev del Pino 4071 

Phone 52-3185 & 51-9363, Telex 012-2284 

Cable: COASIN, Buenos Aires 



BRAZIL 

Importacao, Industria e Comercio 
Ambriex, S.A. 

Rio de Janeiro 

Av. Graca Aranha 

226-6° andar, s/601-609 

Phone 42-7990 42-7291 & 52-9873 

Cable: RAIOCARDIO Rio de Janeiro 

Sao Paulo 811 

Av. Pacaembu 

Phone 52-0655 & 51-0912 

Cable: RAIOCARDIO Sao Paulo 



CEYLON 

Maurice Roche Limited 

Colombo 

P.O. Box 61 

Cable: LAXAPANA Colombo 

CHILE 

Pentz & Cia. Ltda. 

Santiago 

Casilla 2839, Matias Cousino 68 

Phone 63010 

Cable: PETIER Santiago 

COLOMBIA 

Manuel Trujillo Venegas e Hijo Ltda. 

Bogota 

Carrera 7° #48-71 
Apartado Aereo No. 20702 
Phone 320679 
Cable: TRUVEHIJO Bogota 



HONG KONG 

Gilman & Co. 



Ltd., Engineering Dept. 



P.O. Box 56 

(8th Floor, Alexandra House) 
(Des Voeux Road, Central) 
Phone H-227011, Telex HKG-358 
Cable: GILMAN 

INDIA 

Hinditron Services Private Ltd. 

Bombay 6 

Manesha 

69/A Nepean Sea Road 
Phone 365344, Telex 594 
Cable: TEKHIND (BOMBAY) 

KOREA 

M-C International 

Seoul 

Room 516, Bando Bldg. 

P. O. Box 1355 

Phone 22-4316, 22-6891, 28-1415 

Cable: EMCEEKOREA Seoul 

MALAYSIA 

Mecomb Malaysia Sendirian Berhad 

Selangor 

2, Lorong 13/6A, Section 13 
Petaling Jaya 
Phone 53570, 53478 

MEXICO 

Fredin, S.A. 

Mexico 5, D.F. 

Melchor Ocampo No. 212-505 

(Mexico 17, D.F. 

P.O. Box 53-905) 

Phone 46-44-21 

NEW ZEALAND 

W. & K. McLean, Ltd. 

Auckland 

103-105 Feiton Mathew Avenue 

Glen Innes 

P.O. Box 3097 

Phone 586-000 

Cable: KOSFY Auckland 



PAKISTAN 

Pak-Land Corporation 

Karachi 29 

Central Commercial Area 

Iqbal Road 

P.E.C.H. Society 

Phone 472315 

Cable: PAKLAND Pakistan 

PERU 

Importaciones y Representaciones 
Electronicas, S.A. 

Lima 

Franklin D. Roosevelt 105 

Phone 72076 

Cable: IREING, Lima 

SINGAPORE 

Mechanical & Combustion 
Engineering Co. (Pte) Ltd. 

Singapore 3 

9, Jalan Kilang 

(P.O. Box 46, Alexandra Post Office) 

Phone 642361-3 

Cable: MECOMB 

TAIWAN 

Heighten Trading Co. 

Taipei 

16 Nan-King East Road 
(P.O. Box 1408) 
Republic of China 
Phone 518324, 518372 
Cable: "HEIGHTEN" Taipei 

THAILAND 

G. Simon Radio Co. Ltd. 

Suriwong 



Ltd. 



SEC3 



Bangkok 

30, Patpong Avenue, 
Phone 33969, 33960 
Cable: SIMONCO Bangkok 

VENEZUELA 

Coasin C.A. 

Caracas 

Edificio La Linea-Av. Libertador 

entre Las Palmas y Las Acacias 
(Apartado 50939-Sabana Grande No. 1) 
Phone 72-9637 
Cable: INSTRUVEN, Caracas 



15 



INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTORS 



INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTORS AND REPRESENTATIVES 

Supplied and Supported by Tektronix Limited, P. O. Box 36, St. Peter Port, Guernsey, Channel Islands 

Telephone: Guernsey 23411, Telex: 41193 

Tektronix Limited maintains a warehouse of United States-made instruments, accessories and parts on the Island of Guernsey to quickly 
support these distributors in filling customer orders. Technical support of customers and distributors is also available from this facility 
In addition, Tektronix has manufacturing facilities within the European Economic Community and European Free Trade Association 



o 



ANGOLA 

Equipamentos Tecnicos, Lda. 

Luanda 

Rua Serpa Pinto 39 
Caixa Postal 6319 
Phone Luanda 6917 
Cable: EQUIPAL Luanda 

AUSTRIA 

Inglomark Markovitsch & Co. 

A-1151 wren 

P.O. Box 73 

Phone (0222) 83-05-08, Telex (1) 1393 

Cable: INGLOMARK Wien 

BELGIUM 

Regulation Mesure, SPRL 

Bruxelles 15 

22, Rue Saint-Hubert 

Phone 71.20.20, Telex 02-21520 



DENMARK 

Tage Olsen 



A.S. 



Copenhagen 

1, Ronnegade 

Phone (01) 29.48.00, Telex 5788 

Cable: TOCOPEN, Copenhagen 



EAST AFRICA (Kenya, Tanzania, Uganda) 

Projects Development Limited 

Nairobi, Kenya 

Uniafric House, P.O. Box 8828 

Phone 21239 

Cable: PRODEVEL, Nairobi 

FINLAND 

Into O/Y 

Helsinki 

P.O. Box 153, 11, Meritullinkatu 

Phone 11123 

Cable: INTO, Helsinki 

GREECE 

Marios Dalleggio Representations 

Athens 139 

2, Alopekis Street 
Phone 710.669, Telex 216435 
Telex Answer Code: DALM GR 
Cable: DALMAR Athens 

ISRAEL 

Eastronics Ltd. 

Tel Aviv 

75 Haifa Road, P.O. Box 21029 
Phone 440-466, Telex 033-638 
Cable: EASTRONIX Tel Aviv 

ITALY 

Silverstar Ltd. 

Milano 20146 

Via dei Gracchi No. 20 

Phone 46.96.551/2/3/4/5 and 

49.80.151/2/3/4/5 

Telex 32634 SILSTAR MILANO 

Cable: SILVERSTAR MILANO 



Roma 00198 

Via Paisiello No. 30 

Phone 855.366, 869.009, 854.554 

and 854.529 

Telex 61511 SILSTAR ROMA 

Cable: SILVERSTAR ROMA 

Torino 10129 

Corso Castelfidardo No. 21 
Phone 540.075 and 543.527 
Cable: SILVERSTAR TORINO 



LEBANON 

Projects 

Beirut 

P.O. Box 5281 
Phone 241200 
Cable: PROJECTS Beirut 

MOROCCO 

F. Pignal, Materiel Radio En Gros 

Casablanca 

21/29 Boulevard Girardot 

Phone 702-61 

Cable: PIRADIO Casablanca 

MOZAMBIQUE 

Equipamentos Tecnicos, Lda. 

Lourenco Marques 

Av. 24 de Julho, 1847 

Phone 2601 

Cable: EQUIPAL-Lourenco Marques 

THE NETHERLANDS 

C.N. Rood, N.V. 

Rijswijk 

13 Cort van der Lindenstraat 

P.O. Box 4542 

Phone The Hague 98.51.53, Telex 31238 

Cable: ROODHOLLAND G.V. 



NORWAY 

Morgenstierne & Co. A/S 

Oslo 

Konghellegt.3. 

(P.O. Box 6688 RDdeiokka, Oslo 5) 
Phone (02) 37 29 40, Telex 1719 
Cable: MOROF Oslo 



PORTUGAL 

Equipamentos de Laboratorio Lda. 

Lisboa 1 

Rue Pedro Nunes 47 

Phone 73.34.36 & 73.34.37 

Cable: EOUILAB, Lisboa 

REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA 

Protea Physical & Nuclear 
Instrumentation (Pty) Ltd. 

Johannesburg 

Wemmer 

Phone 838-8351, Telex J7337 

Cable: MANLU 



SPAIN 

C.R. Mares, S.A. 

Barcelona (9) 

Valencia 333 

Phone 257.62.00, Telex 54676 

Cable: SERAM Barcelona 

Madrid (15) 

Gaztambide, 54-1° 

Phone 243-08-38, Telex 07332 

Cable: SERAM Madrid 



SWEDEN 

Erik Ferner, A.B. 

Bromma 

Snormakarvagen 35, Box 56 
Phone 08/252870, Telex 10312 
Cable: SCIENTRON, Stockholm 

Goteborg 

O. Annebergsvagen 19, Box 30 

Partille 

Phone 031-444130 



TUNISIA 

Selection Internationale 

Tunis 

17, Rue Kamel 

Ataturk 

Cable: INTERSEL Tunis 



TURKEY 

M. Suheyl Erkman 

Istanbul 

Necatibey Cad No. 207, Galata 

Phone 441546 

Cable: INGMESUER Istanbul 



WEST GERMANY 

Rohde & Schwarz Handels-GmbH 

1000 Berlin 10 
Ernst-Reuter-Platz, 10 
Phone 34 05 36, Telex 181 636 
Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Berlin 

2000 Hamburg 50 
Grosse Bergstrasse 213-217 
Phone 38 14 66, Telex 213 749 
Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Hamburg 

7500 Karlsruhe 

Kriegsstrasse 39 

Phone 2 39 77, Telex 7 826 730 

Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Karlsruhe 

5000 Koeln 

Hohe Strasse 160-168 

Phone 23 30 06, Telex 08 882 917 

Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Koeln 

8000 Muenchen 

Dachauer Strasse 109 

Phone 52 10 41, Telex 522 953 

Cable: ROHDESCHWARZVERTRIEB Muenchen 



o 



16 



Instrument Dimensions 





RACK MOUNT INSTRUMENTS 

EXCLUSIVE OF PLUG-IN UNITS AND PROBES 


Symbol 


Description 


Definition 


H 


Height 


Height of front panel. 


W* 


Width 


Width of front panel. 


L 


Length 


Rack front to rearmost permanent 
fixture, excluding cables. 


F 


Forward Clearance 


Back of front panel to foremost 
protrusion. 


G 


Vertical Axis 


Bottom of front panel to horizontal 
plane of rotation. 


E 


Extended Inst. 


Maximum forward clearance with 
instrument out and horizontal. 


RF 


Radius — front 


Front radius of rotation. 


RR 


Radius — rear 


Rear radius of rotation. 


T 


Track 


Rack front to pivot point. 


C 


Cabinet 


Cabinet height. 



* Note: Instruments mount to a standard 19-inch wide rack. 







Th 


ese instruments mount with 


sliding tracks 
























in a 


cob/net that mounts to a standard 19 in wide rack, 
ese instruments mount with sliding tracks to a standard 


79 ir 


wide rack. 
























Ir 












R< 


tar support for sliding tracks is required, such as 
These instruments bolt directly to a standard 19 in 


an enclosed rack, 
wide rack. They can 


be orderec 
































at additional cost, with 


tilt-lock, sliding tracks. Rear support 


for tracks 


is re 


quired 






















MOUNTING DIMENSIONS 


TYPE 










H L F 


G E 


RF 




RR 






T 


C 




in 


cm in cm in 


cm in cm in cm 


in 


cm 


in 


cm 


in 


cm 


in 


cm 


RM15 








8% 


22.2 22"/,, 57.6 l 3 / 4 


4.5 2% 6.1 29"/,, 75.4 


13"/,, 


348 


12% 


31.4 


16% 


41.9 


8% 


21.6 


RM17 








7 


17.8 18% 46.0 1% 


4.5 2v 8 7.3 21%, 53.8 


12%, 


31.8 


8%, 


21.1 


9% 


23.2 


6'%, 


17.3 


RM35A 








14 


35.6 22"/,, 57.6 2 


5.1 6'%, 17.8 29%, 74.7 


14%, 


357 


12%, 


31.9 


16% 


41.3 


13'%, 


35.1 


RM122 








5% 


13.3 6 15.2 '%. 


2.4 














4 


10.2 


RM12S 








5V, 


13.3 13%, 34.5 '/, 


2.2 














4%, 


10.3 


RM502A 








12 'A 


31.1 22% 57.8 1'%. 


4.6 5% 14.9 28% 71.7 


15% 


39.7 


10%, 


26.2 


13'/, 


33.2 


11% 


28.6 


RM503, RM504 








7 


17.8 17 43.2 1% 


4.5 3% 8.9 22"/,, 57.6 


H'%, 


30.3 


7% 


19.7 


11% 


28.3 


6% 


17.5 


RM529 








5% 


13.3 18% 46.4 1% 


4.5 2% 6.1 21% 54.1 


12% 


30. B 


8%, 


21.5 


9% 


238 


5% 


13.1 


RM543B, RM544 








14 


35.6 22"/,, 57.7 1'%. 


5.0 6'%, 17.3 28% 33.0 


13% 


34.3 


12'%, 


32.9 


16% 


41.3 


13 ,s /„ 


35.4 


RM545B, RM546 






























RM547 






























RM561B 








7 


17.8 18%, 46.9 1% 


4.5 2% 6.1 24%, 60.8 


13% 


34.9 


77, 


20.0 


11 


27.9 


6% 


17.2 


RM564B 








7 


17.8 18%, 46.9 1% 


4.5 2% 6.1 24%, 60.8 


13% 


34.9 


7% 


20.0 


11 


27.9 


6% 


17.2 


RM565 








12 V., 


31.1 22%, 56.4 1'%, 


4.6 2% 6.1 30% 77.4 


15%, 


39.1 


13%, 


33.2 


16% 


42.2 


12%. 


31.0 


RM567 








12% 


31.1 22%, 56.4 1'%, 


4.6 7% 19.4 31%. 80.1 


16% 


41.0 


11%, 


28.3 


16% 


42.2 


14'%. 


38.0 


RM585A 








14 


35.6 22"/,, 57.7 2 


5.1 6'%, 17.8 29%, 74.7 


14%, 


35.7 


12%, 


31.6 


16% 


41.3 


13'%, 


35.1 


Rl 16 








5% 


13.3 17%, 44.6 1% 


4.1 1% 4.5 25% 65.4 


11%. 


29.4 


8% 


21.0 


14% 


37.2 


5%. 


12.8 


R230, R240, 








7 


17.8 21 53.3 2 


5.1 1% 4.4 28%, 88.8 


14%, 


36.6 


10%, 


25.8 


15% 


23.6 


7 


17.8 


R241, R250 






























R293 








3V, 


8.8 16%, 41.4 1% 


4.8 1% 4.5 22%, 56.4 


9% 


24.5 


8%, 


20.8 


12% 


32.1 


3% 


8.6 


R422 








7 


17.8 12% 31.8 1"/„ 


4.6 3% 8.9 16% 42.3 














6% 


17.2 


R453 








7 


17.8 17% 44.1 1'%, 


4.6 3% 8.9 20"/,, 52.6 


11% 


29.5 


7% 


20.0 


9%. 


23.7 


6% 


17.2 


R454 








7 


17.8 17% 44.1 1'%, 


4.6 3% 8.9 20"/,, 52.6 


11% 


29.5 


7% 


20.0 


9%, 


23.7 


6% 


17.2 


R491 








7 


17.8 17% 44.2 2%, 


5.2 3% 8.9 21%, 53.5 


H'%, 


30.4 


8% 


21.6 


9%, 


23.7 


6'%. 


17.3 


R520 








7 


17.8 17% 44.8 2 


5.1 


















R556 








14 


35.6 22'%, 57.9 1% 


4.5 8% 20.7 30%, 77.0 


13% 


33.3 


14% 


36.2 


18% 


57.0 


13% 


35.2 


R568 








7 


17.8 21 53.3 2 


5.1 1% 4.4 28% 88.8 


14%, 


36.6 


10%, 


25.8 


15% 


23.6 


7 


17.8 


R647A 








7 


17.8 19 48.3 l"/„ 


4.3 2%, 6.2 27% 70.9 


13% 


34.5 


8"/„ 


22.1 


16% 


41.6 


13% 


35.2 


127 








8% 


22.2 21 >/, 55.0 1% 


4.5 2% 6.1 28"/,, 72.9 


12% 


32.4 


12% 


31.1 


16% 


41.9 


8% 


21.6 


129 








ioy, 


26.6 21% 55.0 2 


5.1 1% 4.5 29% 74.9 


17% 


44.8 


11%. 


28.3 


13% 


33.7 


10% 


26.8 


262 








5% 


13.3 17%, 44.6 1% 


4.1 1% 4.5 20% 52.7 


11%, 


29.4 


8% 


21.0 


14% 


37.2 


5%. 


12.9 


016-0086-01 








5% 


13.3 17'%, 45.6 % 


1.0 














5%. 


13.8 


016-0115-01 








5V, 


13.3 17 43.2 




















437-0031-00 








8% 


22.2 9% 24.2 % 


0.7 














7%. 


18.0 


437-0071-00 








7 


17.8 13% 34.0 1% 


4.0 














6%, 


16.8 



17 



Shipping Volumes 





Domestic 


Export 




Pack 


Pack 


Type 


Volume 


Volume 




ft 3 


ft 3 


B 


0.9 


1.5 


CA 


0.9 


1.5 


C-12 


2.1 


4.8 


C-27 


2.1 


4.8 


C-30A 


1.0 




C-31 


1.0 




C-40 


0.9 


2.1 


Engine 






Analyzer 






Access 


2.2 


3.4 


G 


0.9 


1.5 


H 


0.9 


1.5 


K 


0.9 


1.5 


L 


0.9 


1.5 


M 


0.9 


1.5 


i 
O 


0.9 


1.5 


Q 


0.9 


1.5 


S-1 


0.3 


1.3 


S-2 


0.3 


1.3 


S-3 


0.6 




S-4 


0.3 


1.3 


S-50 


0.3 


1.3 


5-51 


0.3 


1.3 


T 


0.9 


1.5 


W 


0.9 


1.5 


1A1 


0.9 


1.5 


1A2 


0.9 


1.5 


1A4 


0.9 


1.5 


1A5 


0.9 


1.5 


1A6 


0.9 


1.5 


1A7A 


0.9 


1.5 


1L5 


1.2 


2.1 


U10 


1.2 


2.1 


1L20 


1.2 


2.1 


1L30 


1.2 


2.1 


1L40 


1.2 


2.1 


1S1 


1.9 


3.1 


1S2 


1.9 


3.1 


2A60 


1.0 


1.7 


2A61 


1.0 


1.7 


2A63 


1.0 


1.7 


2B67 


1.0 


1.7 


3A2 


1.0 


1.7 


3A3 


1.0 


1.7 


3A5 


1.0 


1.7 


3A6 


1.0 


1.7 


3A7 


1.0 


1.7 


3A8 


1.0 


1.7 


3A9 


1.0 


1.7 


3A72 


1.0 


1.7 


3A74 


1.0 


1.7 


3A75 


1.0 


1.7 


3B2 


1.0 


1.7 





Domestic 


Export 




Pack 


Pack 


Type 


Volume 


Volume 




ft 3 


ft 3 


3B3 


1.0 


1.7 


3B4 


1.0 


1.7 


3B5 


1.0 


1.7 


3C66 


1.0 


1.7 


3L5 


1.0 


1.7 


31.10 


1.2 


2.1 


3S1 


1.0 


1.7 


3S2 


1.0 


1.7 


3S5 


1.0 


1.7 


3S6 


1.0 


1.7 


3T2 


1.0 


1.7 


3T5 


1.0 


1.7 


3T6 


1.0 


1.7 


3T77A 


1.0 


1.7 


4S1 


1.9 


3.1 


452A 


1.9 


3.1 


4S3 


1.9 


3.1 


5T3 


1.0 


1.7 


6R1A 


2.4 


3.6 


10A1 


1.0 


1.7 


10A2A 


1.0 


1.7 


11B1 


1.0 


1.7 


11B2A 


1.0 


1.7 


81 A 


1.0 


1.7 


82 


0.9 


1.5 


86 


0.9 


1.5 


106 


1.3 


3.1 


109 


1.3 


3.1 


111 


1.2 


2.1 


113 


4.7 


6.8 


114 


1.3 


2.5 


115 


1.3 


3.1 


Rl 16 


5.2 


9.9 


122 


0.8 


1.5 


FM122 


0.8 


1.5 


RM122 


1.9 


3.1 


125 


1.3 


4.8 


FM125 


1.3 


4.8 


RM125 


3.5 


5.6 


127 


5.4 


9.9 


129 


6.7 


9.9 


130 


1.2 


2.1 


132 


1.9 


3.1 


133 


1.9 


3.1 


140 


5.2 


9.9 


141 


5.2 


9.9 


160A 


1.3 


4.8 


161 


0.8 


1.5 


162 


0.8 


1.5 


163 


0.8 


1.5 


175 


4.9 


9.9 


184 


1.3 


3.1 


191 


1.3 


3.1 





Domestic 


Export 




Pack 


Pack 


Type 


Volume 


Volume 




ft 3 


ft 3 


200-1 






200-2 






201-1 


13.2 


14.5 


201-2 


13.2 


14.5 


202-1 


13.2 


14.5 


202-2 


13.2 


14.5 


205-1 


18.4 


20.2 


205-2 


18.4 


20.2 


205-3 


18.4 


20.2 


230 


5.2 


9.9 


R230 


5.2 


9.9 


240 


5.2 


9.9 


241 


5.2 


9.9 


R250 


5.2 


9.9 


262 


5.0 


9.9 


263 


1.3 


3.1 


284 


1.3 


3.0 


285 


0.3 


1.3 


292 


0.9 


1.5 


31 0A 


1.9 


3.1 


317 


2.4 


3.6 


RM17 


5.2 


9.9 


321 A 






w bat 


1.9 




wo bat 


1.9 


3.1 


323 


1.3 


3.0 


360 


1.3 


3.6 


410 


1.9 


3.6 


422 






w cover 


3.7 


5.5 


422 125B 






wo bat 


3.7 


5.5 


R422 


5.2 


9.9 


R422 150B 


5.2 


9.9 


R422 150E 


5.2 


9.9 


453 






w cover 


3.7 


5.5 


R453 


5.2 


9.9 


454 






w cover 


3.7 


5.5 


R454 


5.2 


9.9 


491 






w cover 


3.7 


5.5 


R491 


5.2 


9.9 


502A 


4.1 


7.5 


RM502A 


6.7 


9.9 


503 


3.5 


5.6 


RM503 


5.2 


9.9 


504 


3.5 


5.6 


RM504 


5.2 


9.9 


507 


5.4 


7.5 


507 P.S. 


3.5 


5.6 


51 5A 


3.5 


5.6 





Domestic 


Export 




Pack 


Pack 


Type 


Volume 


Volume 




ft 3 


ft 3 


RM15 


5.2 


9.9 


516 


3.5 


5.6 


519 


7.8 


10.4 


520 NTSC 


5.2 


9.3 


520 PAL 


5.2 


9.3 


528 


1.9 


3.6 


529 


2.4 


5.6 


RM529 


5.2 


9.9 


531A 


5.4 


7.5 


533A 


5.4 


7.5 


535A 


5.4 


7.5 


RM35A 


6.7 


9.9 


536 


5.4 


7.5 


543B 


5.4 


7.5 


RM543B 


6.7 


9.9 


544 


5.4 


7.5 


RM544 


6.7 


9.9 


545B 


5.4 


7.5 


RM545B 


6.7 


9.9 


546 


5.4 


7.5 


RM546 


6.7 


9.9 


547 


5.4 


7.5 


RM547 


6.7 


9.9 


549 


5.4 


7.5 


551 


5.4 


7.5 


551 P.S. 


3.5 


5.6 


555 


6.4 


9.2 


555 P.S. 


3.5 


5.6 


556 


10.3 


11.2 


R556 


10.3 


11.2 


561 B 


3.5 


5.6 


R561B 


5.2 


9.9 


564 B 


3.5 


5.6 


R564B 


5.2 


9.9 


565 


6.7 


9.9 


R565 


6.7 


9.9 


567 


6.7 


9.9 


R567 


6.7 


9.9 


568 


5.2 


9.9 


R568 


5.2 


9.9 


575 


5.4 


7.5 


575 122C 


5.4 


7.5 


576 


6.8 




581A 


5.4 


7.5 


585A 


5.4 


7.5 


R585A 


6.7 


9.9 


601 


1.9 


3.6 


602 


1.9 


3.6 


611 


5.5 


7.5 


647A 


3.5 


5.6 


R647A 


5.2 


9.9 


661 


5.4 


7.5 


1121 


1.7 


3.0 



o 



18 



Symbols and Abbreviations 



The user of this catalog may find some unfamiliar symbols and abbreviations. In general, Tektronix has adopted the 
Symbols For Units, IEEE Standard Number 260, dated January 15, 1965. The abbreviations have been adopted by Tek- 
tronix following a thorough study of available abbreviations and guidelines published by the National Bureau of Stand- 
ards, United States Government, American Standards Association, and others. 

Many of these symbols and abbreviations are new, and inconsistencies between this list and other sources such as 
instrument panels and existing instrument manuals will be found. Future instruments and manuals will reflect adherence to 
these new symbols and abbreviations. 

Below are some of the symbols and abbreviations used in this catalog. Those symbols found in IEEE Standard Number 
260 are marked with an asterisk. 



alternating current 
*ampere 

amplitude modulation 
approximate 
approximately equal to 
attenuation 
audio frequency 
automatic 

bandwidth 
base 
"bel 
beta 



calibrate 

cathode-ray oscilloscope CRO or scope 
cathode-ray tube 
"centimeter 
clockwise 

common-mode rejection 
common-mode rejection ratio 
continuous wave 
counterclockwise 
current 



*decibel 

*decibel referred to one 
milliwatt 

deflection factor 
*degree 

*degree Celsius (centigrade) 
*degree Fahrenheit 
*degree Kelvin 

delay 

delay line 

differential 

direct current 

division 

electrocardiogram 
electroencephalogram 
electromagnetic interference 

*farad 
*foot 

*foot lambert 
frequency modulation 

*IEEE Standard Number 260 



AC 


giga 


A 


♦gigahertz 


AM 


graticule 


approx 
or es* 


gravity unit 
greater than 


atten 


greater than or equal to 


AF 


ground 


auto 


♦henry 


bw 

b 
B 


♦hertz 
horsepower 
*hour 


P 


impedance 




*inch 


cal 


inductance 


r scope 
CRT 


intermediate frequency 


cm 


kilo 


cw 
CMR 


♦kilogram 
♦kilohertz 


CMRR 


kilohm 


CW 


kilometer 


ccw 

1 


♦kilovolt 




less than 


dB 


less than or equal to 




local oscillator 


dBm 
DF 


low frequency 


°C 
°F 
°K 
dly 
DL 


maximum 


mega 
♦megahertz 


♦megohm 
♦meter 
micro 


diff 
DC 


♦microsecond 
milli 


div 


♦millimeter 




♦millisecond 


ECG 


♦millivolt 


EEG 


minus 


EMI 






nano 


F 


♦nanosecond 


ft 


National Television 


ft 


System Committee 


FM 


negative 



G 


ohm 


n 


GHz 


operational amplifier 


op amp 


grat 


oscilloscope 


scope or CRO 


g 






> 






> 

gnd 


pair 


pr 


parts per million 


P/M 


peak to peak 


P-P 




per 


/ 


H 


phase alternate line 


PAL 


Hz 


♦pico 


P 


hp 


♦picoampere 


pA 


h 


♦picofarad 


pF 




♦picosecond 


PS 


Z 


plus 


+ 


in 


plus and minus 


+ and — 


L 


plus or minus 


± 


IF 


positive 


pos 




pulse per second 


p/s 


k 


pulse-repetition rate 


PRR 


kg 


pulse width 


PW or t p 


kHz 






kC 


radio-frequency interference RFI 


km 


resistance 


R 


kV 


resistance-capacitance 


RC 




resistance-inductance 


RL 


< 


♦revolution per minute 


r/min 


< 


risetime 


tr 


LO 


root mean square 


RMS 


LF 








♦second (time) 


s 


max 

M 


serial number 


SN 


signal 


sig 

S/N 


MHz 
MQ 


signal-to-noise ratio 


standing-wave ratio 


SWR 


m 


storage time 


u 


M 


sweep 


swp 


jUS 

m 


synchronize 


sync 


mm 






ms 


temperature 


T 


mV 


time domain reflectometry 


TDR 




tolerance 


tol 




transconductance 


g m 


n 
ns 


vertical interval test signal 


VITS 


NTSC 


♦volt 


V 



neg 



"watt 



W 



19 



Glossary of Terms 



This glossary is published to promote better communication 
through a common concept of oscilloscope terms. 

Terms which have particular meaning to different technolo- 
gies are identified by a key following the term. 



General Terms none 

Sampling Terms (S) 

Optical Terms (O) 

Spectrum Analyzer Terms (SA) 

Cathode-Ray Tube and Storage Terms . . (CRT) 
Digital Instrument Terms (Dl) 



accelerating voltage — The cathode-to- 
viewing-area voltage applied to a cath- 
ode-ray tube for the purpose of acceler- 
ating the electron beam. 

address (Dl) — An expression identifying 
a location where information is stored. 

alternate display — A means of displaying 
output signals of two or more channels 
by switching the channels in sequence. 

astigmatism — In the viewing plane of the 
cathode-ray tube, any deviation of the 
indicating spot from a circular shape. 

attenuator — A device for reducing the 
amplitude of a signal without deliberate- 
ly introducing distortion. 

automatic triggering — A mode of trigger- 
ing in which one or more of the trigger- 
ing circuit controls are preset to condi- 
tions suitable for automatically displaying 
repetitive waveforms. The automatic 
mode may also provide a recurrent trig- 
ger or recurrent sweep in the absence 
of triggering signals. 

background luminance (CRT) — The lumi- 
nance of the stored target when it is 
completely erased and at a specified 
operating voltage. 

balanced circuit- — A circuit in which two 
branches are electrically alike and sym- 
metrical with respect to a common ref- 
erence point, usually ground. For an ap- 
plied signal difference at the input, the 
signal relative to the reference at equiva- 
lent points in the two branches must be 
opposite in polarity and equal in ampli- 
tude. 

balanced sampling gate (S) — A type of 
sampling gate arranged so that strobe 
currents are balanced to minimize kick- 
out. 

bandwidth — Of an oscilloscope, the dif- 
ference between the upper and lower 
frequency at which the voltage or cur- 
rent response is .707 ( -3 dB) of the 
response at the reference frequency. 
Usually both upper and lower limit fre- 
quencies are specified rather than the 
difference between them. When only 
one number appears, it is taken as the 
upper limit. 

Note 1: The reference frequency shall be 
(1) for the lower bandwidth limit, 20 times 
the limit frequency, and (2) for the upper 
bandwidth limit, 1/20 the limit frequency. 
The upper and lower reference frequen- 
cies are not required to be the same. 

20~ 



Note 2: This definition assumes the am- 
plitude response to be essentially free 
of departures from a smooth roll-off char- 
acteristic. 

Note 3: If the lower bandwith limit ex- 
tends to DC, the response at DC shall 
be equal to the reference frequency, not 
-3 dB from it. 

beam finder — A provision for locating the 

spot when it is not visible. 

beam splitter fO) — A device such as a 
prism or half-silvered mirror which splits 
a light beam into 2 or more beams not 
necessarily equal in intensity. 

bezel — The flange or cover used for hold- 
ing an external graticule or cathode-ray 
tube cover in front of the cathode-ray 
tube in an oscilloscope. May also be 
used for mounting a trace recording cam- 
era or other accessory item. 

bit (Dl) — A binary digit. 

blanking — Extinguishing of the spot. Re- 
trace blanking is the extinction of the 
spot during the retrace portion of the 
sweep waveform. The term does not 
necessarily imply blanking during the 
holdoff interval or while waiting for a 
trigger in a triggered sweep system. 

brightness— The attribute of visual per- 
ception in accordance with which an 
area appears to emit more or less light. 

cable release (O) — A cable provided for 
remote actuation of a camera shutter. 

calibrator — A signal generator whose 
output is used for purposes of calibra- 
tion; normally either amplitude or time. 

camera adapter (O) — A bezel used to 
attach a camera to an oscilloscope. 

center frequency (radio frequency or in- 
termediate frequency) (SA) — That fre- 
quency which corresponds to the cen- 
ter of the reference coordinate. 

center frequency range (radio frequency) 
(SA) — That range of frequencies that 
can be displayed at the center of the 
reference coordinate. When referred to 
a control the term indicates the amount 
of frequency change available with the 
control. 

channel — A single path for transmitting 
electric signals, usually in distinction 
from other parallel paths. 

character (Dl) — A group of bits that may 
be represented by a single symbol such 
as to 9, A to Z, etc. 



chopped display — A time-sharing method 
of displaying output signals of two or 
more channels with a single cathode- 
ray tube gun, at a rate which is higher 
than, and not referenced to, the sweep 
rate. 

chopping rate — The rate at which chan- 
nel switching occurs in chopped dis- 
play operation. 

chopping transient blanking— The process 
of blanking the indicating spot during the 
switching periods in chopped display 
operation. 

clear (Dl) — 1. To store a ZERO in a 
flip flop regardless of other input con- 
ditions. 2. To reset. 

collimate (O) — To render parallel. 

common-mode rejection ratio (CMRR) — 

The ratio of the deflection factor for 
a common-mode signal to the deflection 
factor for a differential signal applied to 
a balanced circuit input. 

common-mode signal — The instantane- 
ous algebraic average of two signals 
applied to a balanced circuit, both sig- 
nals referred to a common reference. 

common-mode signal maximum — The 

largest common-mode signal at which the 
specified common-mode rejection ratio 
is valid. 

compression — An increase in the deflec- 
tion factor, usually as the limits of the 
quality area are exceeded. 

contrast — The comparative brightness 
between specified elements of a presen- 
tation. 

contrast ratio (CRT) — The ratio of stored 
luminance to background luminance at 
a given operating voltage. 

conventional mode (CRT) — That mode of 
operating a storage tube where the dis- 
play does not store but performs with 
the usual phosphor luminance and de- 
cay. 

countdown (S) — In a circuit receiving 
a recurrent triggering signal, the process 
of responding to only every n ,h recur- 
rence of the signal where "n" is an 
integer which may or may not be con- 
stant. 

counter (Dl) — A device for storing a num- 
ber and allowing the number to be in- 
creased or decreased. 

DC balance — An adjustment to avoid a 
change in DC level when changing gain. 



Glossary of Terms 



DC drift — See stability. 

DC offset — A DC level which may be 
added to the input signal, referred to the 
input terminals. 

DC shift — A step response with a time 
constant of several seconds. 

decoder (encoder) (Dl) — A device which 
converts from one number system to an- 
other. Two commonly used types are the 
binary-to-decimal and decimal-to-binary 
converters. 

definition (O) — The degree of clarity of 
reproduction of an object by an optical 
system. 

deflection blanking — Blanking by means 
of a deflection structure in the cathode- 
ray tube electron gun which traps the 
electron beam inside the gun to extinguish 
the spot, permitting blanking during re- 
trace and between sweeps regardless of 
intensity setting. 

deflection factor — The ratio of the input 
signal amplitude to the resultant dis- 
placement of the indicating spot (for ex- 
ample, volts/division). 

deflection polarity — The relation between 
the polarity of the applied signal and the 
direction of the resultant displacement of 
the indicating spot (conventionally a posi- 
tive going voltage causes upward deflec- 
tion or deflection from left to right). 

deflection sensitivity — The reciprocal of 
the deflection factor (for example, divi- 
sions/volt). 

delay line — A passive transmission sys- 
tem intended to introduce a time delay. 

delay pickoff — A means of providing an 
output signal when a ramp has reached 
an amplitude corresponding to a certain 
length of time (delay interval) since the 
start of the ramp. The output signal may 
be in the form of a pulse, a gate, or sim- 
ply amplification of that part of the ramp 
following the pickoff time. 

delay, signal — See signal delay. 

delayed sweep — A sweep that has been 
delayed either by a predetermined peri- 
od or by a period determined by an ad- 
ditional independent variable. 

delaying sweep — A sweep used to delay 
another sweep. See delayed sweep. 

dichroic (O) — Exhibiting the quality of 
selective reflection and transmission of 
light as a function of color. 

differential amplifier — An amplifier whose 
output signal is proportional to the alge- 
braic difference between two input sig- 
nals. 

differential signal — The instantaneous al- 
gebraic difference between two signals. 

dispersion (sweep width) (SA) — The fre- 
quency sweep excursion over the fre- 
quency axis of the display. Can be ex- 
pressed as frequency/full frequency axis 
or frequency (Hz)/div in a linear display. 



display — The visual presentation on the 
indicating device of an oscilloscope. 

display flatness (SA) — Uniformity of am- 
plitude response over the rated maximum 
dispersion (usually in units of dB). 

display magnifier (horizontal) (S) — A con- 
trol or circuit whose function is to de- 
crease the sweep-time per division of a 
display by increased gain in the hori- 
zontal amplification system. 

display window (S) — The particular time 
interval represented within the horizontal 
limits of the graticule. 

dot (S) — A displayed spot indicating the 
horizontal and vertical coordinates of 
a particular sample. 

dot density (S) — The number of dots per 
horizontal division. 

drift (frequency drift) (stability) (SA)— 

Long term frequency changes or instabili- 
ties caused by a frequency change in the 
spectrum analyzer local oscillators. Drift 
limits the time interval that a spectrum 
analyzer can be used without retuning 
or resetting the front panel controls (units 
may be Hz/s, Hz/°C, etc). 

dual-beam oscilloscope — A multi-beam 
oscilloscope in which the cathode-ray 
tube produces two separate electron 
beams that may be individually or jointly 
controlled. 

dual trace — A multi-trace operation in 
which a single beam in a cathoce-ray 
tube is shared by two signal channels. 
See alternate display, chopped display 
and multi-trace. 

dynamic range (S) — In a system or instru- 
ment, the ratio of the specified maximum 
input-signal capability to the noise value. 

dynamic range (on screen) (SA) — The 

maximum ratio of signal amplitudes that 
can be simultaneously observed within the 
graticule (usually in units of dB). 

dynamic range, maximum useful (SA) — 
The ratio between the maximum input 
power and the spectrum analyzer sen- 
sitivity (usually in units of dB). 

edge defocusing (CRT) — Change in size 
and/or shape of the indicating spot as it 
approaches the edge of the cathode-ray 
tube. 

edge lighting — A method of illuminating 
the lines on a graticule by introducing 
light into the edges of the graticule. 

enhance (CRT) — To momentarily alter the 
electrode potentials in a storage tube to 
increase performance (n: Enhancement). 

equivalent time (S) — The time scale re- 
presented in the display of a sampling 
oscilloscope operating in the equivalent- 
time sampling mode. 



equivalent-time sampling (S) — A sam- 
pling process in which at least one repet- 
itive signal event is required for each 
sample taken. 

erase (CRT) — To momentarily change 
electrode potentials in such a manner that 
previously stored information is removed. 

expansion — A decrease in the deflection 
factor, usually as the limits of the quality 
area are exceeded. 

external sweep — A sweep generated ex- 
ternal to the oscilloscope. 

external triggering — Introducing the trig- 
gering signal into the trigger circuit from 
an external source. 

fade up (CRT) — In a storage tube the fail- 
ure of a unwritten area to remain at back- 
ground brightness. The background spon- 
taneously moves to the stored brightness 
of the written state. 

false display (S) — A sampling display al- 
lowing faulty or ambiguous interpretation, 
usually caused by insufficient dot densi- 
ty or improper triggering. 

fiber optics (O) — A system for transmit- 
ting an image by means of a large number 
of transparent fibers. Each fiber carries 
only one element of the image so that 
the image is a mosaic rather than a con- 
tinous picture. 

flood gun (CRT) — A low-energy electron 
gun directing a large cone of electrons 
toward the entire storage target. 

fluorescence — Emission of light from a 
substance (a phosphor) during excitation 
by radiant energy. 

focus — Maximum convergence of the 
electron beam manifested by minimum 
spot size on the phosphor screen. 

frequency band (SA) — A range of fre- 
quencies that can be covered without 
switching. 

frequency range — That range of frequen- 
cies over which a device meets its speci- 
fication. 

Gaussian response — A particular frequen- 
cy response characteristic following the 
curve y(f) = e - a '\ Typically, the fre- 
quency response approached by an am- 
plifier having good transient response 
characteristics. 

geometry — The degree to which a cath- 
ode-ray tube can accurately display a 
rectilinear pattern. Generally associated 
with properties of a cathode-ray tube; the 
name may be given to a cathode-ray tube 
electrode or its associated control. 

graticule — A scale for measurement of 
quantities displayed on the cathode-ray 
tube of an oscilloscope. 

incidental frequency modulation — Short- 
term frequency jitter or undesired fre- 
quency deviation. 

~21 



Glossary of Terms 



incremental linearity (SA) — A term used 
to describe local aberrations seen as non- 
linearities for narrow dispersions. 

incremental sweep — A sweep which is not 
a continuous function, but which rep- 
resents the independent variable in dis- 
crete steps. 

information writing speed — The oscillo- 
scope-recorder characteristic that is a 
measure of the maximum number of spots 
of information per second that can be re- 
corded and identified on a single trace. 
Test conditions must be specified. 

input leakage current — A direct current 
(of either polarity) that would flow in a 
short circuit connecting the input termi- 
nals of an amplifier. 

input RC characteristics — The DC re- 
sistance and parallel capacitance to 
ground present at the input of an oscillo- 
scope. 

instruction (Dl) — A set of characters, with 
or without addresses, that defines an op- 
eration in a digital device or a computer. 

integrate (CRT) — To interrupt flooding of 
the storage target and permit the writing 
gun electrons to sum over several sweeps. 

intensity — A term used to designate 
brightness or luminance of the spot. 

intensity modulation — The process and 
(or) effect of varying the electron beam 
current in a cathode-ray tube resulting in 
varying brightness or luminance of the 
trace. 

internal graticule — A graticule whose rul- 
ings are a permanent part of the inner 
surface of the cathode-ray tube faceplate. 

internal triggering — The use of a portion 
of a deflection signal (usually the vertical 
deflection signal) as a triggering signal 
source. 

jitter — An aberration of a repetitive dis- 
play indicating instability of the signal or 
of the oscilloscope. May be random or 
periodic, and is usually associated with 
the time axis. 

kickout (S) — A signal emanating from an 
input connector. 

linear display (SA) — A display in which 
the vertical deflection is a linear function 
of the input signal voltage. 

linearity (dispersion linearity) (SA) — 

Measure of the comparison of frequency 
across the dispersion to a straight line 
frequency change. Measured by display- 
ing a quantity of equally spaced (in fre- 
quency) frequency markers across the 
dispersion and observing the positional 
deviation of the markers from an ideal- 
ized sweep as measured against a linear 
graticule. 

line triggering — Triggering from the pow- 
erline frequency. 

22 



locate zone (CRT) — A non-storing zone to 
the side of the graticule that permits pre- 
setting of the vertical position of the trace. 

location (Dl) — A storage position holding 
one computer word designated by a speci- 
fic address. 

logic levels (Dl) — Voltage or current levels 
which are assigned logical meanings; i.e., 
they can activate or deactivate the logic 
devices within the system. 

loop gain (S) — In a sampling loop the 
product of sampling efficiency, forward 
gain, and feedback attenuation. Loop gain 
is normally unity except in a smoothed 
display where it is less than unity. 

luminance — The photometric equivalent 
of brightness. 

magnified sweep — A sweep whose time 
per division has been decreased by ampli- 
fication of the sweep waveform rather 
than by changing the time constants used 
to generate it. 

magnifier (S) — See display magnifier and 
time magnifier. 

maximum input power (SA) — The upper 
level of input power that the spectrum 
analyzer can accommodate without deg- 
radation in performance (spurious re- 
sponses and signal compression). (Usu- 
ally in units of dBm). 

memory (S) — A circuit which stores the 
vertical (or horizontal) coordinate value 
of sample. 

microphonics — Incidental frequency mod- 
ulation caused by mechanical vibration 
or shock. 

minimum usable dispersion (SA) — The 
narrowest dispersion obtainable for mean- 
ingful analysis. Defined as ten times the 
incidental frequency modulation when lim- 
ited by "incidental frequency modula- 
tion." (in units of Hz). 

mixed sweep — In a system having both a 
delaying sweep and a delayed sweep, a 
means of displaying the delaying sweep 
to the point of delay pickoff and display- 
ing the delayed sweep beyond that point. 

multi-trace — A mode of operation in which 
a single beam in a cathode-ray tube is 
shared by two or more signal channels. 
See dual trace, alternate display and 
chopped display. 

negative logic (Dl) — A system of logic 
level identification where the less posi- 
tive level is identified as a logical one 
and the more positive level as a logical 
zero. 

noise — Any extraneous electrical disturb- 
ance tending to interfere with the normal 
display. 



optimum resolution (SA) — The best res- 
olution obtainable for a given dispersion 
and a given sweep time and theoretically 
(in un its of Hz); optimum reso lution = 
'dispersion (in Hz) 

sweep time (in seconds) 

oscillography — The art and practice of 
utilizing the oscillograph (oscilloscope or 
mechanical recorder). 

oscilloscope — An oscillograph primarily 
intended for the immediate viewing of the 
graphic plot; most commonly used to de- 
note a cathode-ray oscilloscope. 

overshoot— In the display of a step func- 
tion (usually of time), that portion of the 
waveform which, immediately following 
the step, exceeds its nominal or final am- 
plitude. 

parallax (O) — The apparent displacement 
of an observed object due to the angle of 
observation. 

parallel (Dl) — Pertaining to simultaneous 
transmission of, storage of, or logical 
operations on elements of data using 
separate facilities for the various ele- 
ments. 

parity bit (Dl) — A redundant bit added to 
a group of bits so that an inaccurate re- 
trieval of that group of bits can be de- 
tected. 

phase lock (SA) — The synchronization of 
the local oscillator with a stable reference 
frequency. 

phosphor decay — A phosphorescence 
curve describing energy emitted versus 
time. 

phosphorescence — Emission of light from 
a substance after excitation has been re- 
moved. 

postfogging (O) — A technique of increas- 
ing the apparent sensitivity of film by a 
uniformly controlled exposure to light 
after the image producing exposure. 

prefogging (O) — A technique of increas- 
ing the apparent sensitivity of film by a 
uniformly controlled exposure to light be- 
fore the image producing exposure. 

preshoot — In the display of a step func- 
tion (usually of time), that portion of the 
waveform which immediately precedes 
the step. Polarity of the excursion is 
usually but not necessarily opposite to 
that of the step which follows. 

pretrigger (S) — A trigger signal which 
occurs before a related signal event. 

program (Dl) — 1. A set of conditions for 
solving a problem. This set may contain 
subsets called routines. 2. To arrange or 
devise conditions for solving a problem. 

ramp — A voltage or current that varies at 
a constant rate; for example, that portion 
of the output waveform of a time-linear 
sweep generator used as a time base for 
an oscilloscope display. 



o 



Glossary of Terms 



random sampling (S) — A sampling proc- 
ess involving significant time-interval un- 
certainty between the signal and the sam- 
ple-taking operation. Also the process of 
coherent display construction from such 
randomly-taken samples. May be em- 
ployed by either real-time or equivalent- 
time sampling oscilloscopes. 

raster — A predetermined pattern of scan- 
ning lines which provides substantially 
uniform coverage of an area. 

read (Dl) — To accept information from in- 
put devices or storage. 

ready-to-write state (CRT) — The stable 
mode of any area of the storage target 
after erasure and before writing. 

real time (S) — The time scale associated 
with signal events. 

real-time sampling (S) — A sampling proc- 
ess in which more than one sample is 
taken for each signal event. The time re- 
quired for display construction is the 
same as the time represented in the dis- 
play. 

reflection coefficient (p, rho) (S) — In time- 
domain reflectometry the ratio of peak 
amplitude of a particular reflection to the 
incident-step amplitude. In practice the 
observed reflection coefficient may de- 
pend upon system risetime, losses in the 
associated transmission medium and the 
nature of reflection-producing discontinu- 
ity. 

register (Dl) — One or more binary stor- 
age elements arranged to store data. 

resolution — A measure of the total num- 
ber of trace lines discernible along the 
coordinate axes, bounded by the extremi- 
ties of the graticule or other specific 
limits. 

resolution (SA) — The ability of the spec- 
trum analyzer to display adjacent signal 
frequencies discretely. The measure of 
resolution is the frequency separation of 
two equal amplitude signals, the displays 
of which merge at the 3 dB down points 
(in units of Hz). 

The resolution of a given display depends 
on three factors; sweep time, dispersion 
and the bandwidth of the most selective 
amplifier. The 6 dB bandwidth of the 
most selective amplifier (when Gaussian) 
is called resolution bandwidth and is the 
narrowest bandwidth that can be dis- 
played as dispersion and sweep time are 
varied. At very long sweep times, resolu- 
tion and resolution bandwidth are syn- 
onymous. 

resolving power (O) — The degree to 
which a system or a device distinguishes 
fineness of detail. 

retrace — Return of the spot on the cath- 
ode-ray tube to its starting point after 
a sweep; also that portion of the sweep 
waveform which returns the spot to its 
starting point. 



ringing — A damped oscillatory transient 
occuring in the output of the system as a 
result of a sudden change in input. 

risetime — In the display of a step func- 
tion, the interval between the time at 
which the amplitude first reaches speci- 
fied lower and upper limits. These limits 
shall be 10% and 90% of the nominal or 
final amplitude of the step, unless other- 
wise stated. 

roll-off — A gradually increasing loss or 
attenuation with increase or decrease of 
frequency beyond the substantially flat 
portion of the amplitude-frequency re- 
sponse characteristic of a system or trans- 
ducer. 

routine (Dl) — A set of instructions, con- 
tained within a program, that perform a 
well-defined operation. 

sampling (S) — A process of sensing and 
storing one or more instantaneous values 
of a signal for further processing or dis- 
play. 

sampling oscilloscope (S) — An oscillo- 
scope which employs sampling together 
with means for constructing a coherent 
display of the samples taken. 

sawtooth sweep — A sweep generated by 
the ramp portion of a sawtooth waveform. 

sawtooth waveform — A waveform contain- 
ing a ramp and a return to initial value, 
the two portions usually of unequal dura- 
tion. 

scan — The process of deflecting the elec- 
tron beam. 

sector (Dl) — A serially-accessible seg- 
ment of a track. 

sensitivity (SA) — Rating factor of spec- 
trum analyzers ability to display signals. 

1. Signal equals noise. That input signal 
level (usually in dBm) which results in a 
display where the signal level above the 
residual noise is equal to the residual 
noise level above the baseline; expressed 
as: signal + noise = twice noise. 

2. Minimum discernible signal. That in- 
put level (usually in dBm) which results 
in a display where the signal is just dis- 
tinguishable from the noise. 

serial (Dl) — Pertaining to sequential trans- 
mission of, storage of, or logical opera- 
tions on elements of data using the same 
facilities for the various elements. 

shift register (Dl) — A register with pro- 
vision for displacing or shifting its con- 
tents one step at a time to the right or 
left, by means of the shift input. 

signal delay — In an oscilloscope, the time 
required for a signal to be transmitted 
through a channel or portion of a channel. 
The time is always finite, may be unde- 
sired, or may be purposely introduced as 
in a delay line. 



single-sweep mode — Operating mode for 
a triggered-sweep oscilloscope in which 
the sweep must be reset for each opera- 
tion, thus preventing unwanted multiple 
displays. Particularly useful for trace 
photography. In the interval after the 
sweep is reset and before it is triggered 
it is said to be an armed sweep. 

skirt selectivity (SA) — A measure of the 
resolution capability of the spectrum an- 
alyzer when displaying signals of un- 
equal amplitude. A unit of measure would 
be the bandwidth at some level below the 
6 dB down points. 

slideback (S) — A measurement process 
by which the value of a known is varied 
and compared with an unknown until they 
are equal (null). 

smoothing (S) — A process affecting dot 
transient response intended to reduce the 
effect of random noise or jitter in the 
display. 

spectrum analyzer (SA) — A device which 
displays a graph of relative power distri- 
bution as a function of frequency, typi- 
cally on a cathode-ray tube or chart 
recorder. 

A. Real Time Spectrum Analyzer — A 
spectrum analyzer that performs a con- 
tinuous analysis of the incoming signal 
with the time sequence of events pre- 
served between input and output. 

B. Non-Real Time — A spectrum analyzer 
that performs an analysis of a repetitive 
event by a sampling process. 

1. Swept front end spectrum analyzer — 
a superheterodyne spectrum analyzer in 
which the first local oscillator is swept. 

2. Swept intermediate frequency spec- 
trum analyzer — a superheterodyne spec- 
trum analyzer in which a local oscillator 
other than the first is swept. 

spurious responses (spurii, spur) (SA) — A 
characteristic of a spectrum analyzer 
wherein displays appear which do not 
conform to the calibration of the radio 
frequency dial. Spurious responses are 
of the following type: 

A. Intermediate frequency feedthrough. 
Wherein signals within the intermediate 
frequency passband of the spectrum an- 
alyzer reach the intermediate frequency 
amplifier and produce displays on the 
cathode-ray tube that are not tunable with 
the RF center frequency controls. These 
signals do not enter into a conversion 
process in the first mixer and are not af- 
fected by the first local oscillator fre- 
quency. 

B. Image response. The superheterodyne 
process results in two major responses 
separated from each other by twice the 
intermediate frequency. The spectrum an- 
alyzer is usually calibrated for only one 
of these responses. The other is called 
the image. 

~23 



Glossary of Terms 



C. Harmonic conversion. The spectrum 
analyzer will respond to signals that mix 
with harmonics of the local oscillator and 
produce the intermediate frequency. Most 
spectrum analyzer's have dials calibrated 
for some of these higher order conver- 
sions. The uncalibrated conversions are 
spurious responses. 

D. Intermodulation. In the case of more 
than one input signal, the myriad of com- 
binations of the sums and differences of 
these signals between themselves and 
their multiples creates extraneous re- 
sponses known as intermodulation. The 
most harmful intermodulation is third 
order, caused by the second harmonic of 
one signal combining with the fundament- 
al of another. 

E. Video detection. The first mixer will 
act as a video detector if sufficient input 
signal is applied. A narrow pulse may 
have sufficient energy at the intermediate 
frequency to show up as intermediate fre- 
quency feedthrough. 

F. Internal. A display shown on the cath- 
ode-ray tube caused by a source or 
sources within the spectrum analyzer itself 
and with no external input signal. 

G. Anomalous IF responses. The filter 
characteristic of the resolution-determin- 
ing amplifier may exhibit extraneous 
passbands. This results in extraneous 
spectrum analyzer responses when a sig- 
nal is being analyzed. 

stability— Property of retaining defined 
electrical characteristics for a prescribed 
time and environment. Deviations from a 
stable state may be called drift if it is 
slow, or jitter or noise if it is fast. In trig- 
gered sweep systems, triggering stability 
may refer to the ability of the trigger and 
sweep systems to maintain jitter-free dis- 
plays of high-frequency waveforms for 
long (seconds to hours) periods of time. 
Also, the name of the control used on 
some oscilloscopes to adjust the sweep 
for triggered, free-running, or synchro- 
nized operation. 

stairstep sweep — An incremental sweep 
in which each step is equal. The elec- 
trical deflection waveform producing a 
stairstep sweep is usually called a stair- 
case or stairstep waveform. 

store (CRT) — To retain the written infor- 
mation on the storage target after the 
writing beam has passed. 

stored resolution (CRT) — A measure of 
the tubes capability to display discrete 
elements of stored information usually de- 
fined by the number of line pairs resolv- 
able per centimeter on the tube face. 

stored writing rate (CRT) — The reciprocal 
of stored writing speed (seconds per 
centimeter or other units). 



stored writing speed (CRT) — The speed 
(centimeters per second or other units) 
at which the writing beam will register 
stored information when scanning the 
storage target, under stated conditions of 
operation. 

sweep — An independent variable of a dis- 
play; unless otherwise specified, it is time 
linear, but may also vary in some other 
controlled and definable manner. 

sweep accuracy — Accuracy of the hori- 
zontal (vertical) displacement of the trace 
compared with the reference independent 
variable, usually expressed in terms of 
average rate error as a percent of full 
scale. 

sweep generator — A circuit that generates 
a signal used as an independent variable; 
the signal is usually a ramp, changing 
amplitude at a constant rate. 

sweep linearity — Maximum displacement 
error of the independent variable between 
specified points on the display area. 

sweep switching (automatic) — Alternate 
display of two or more time bases or 
other sweeps using a single-beam cath- 
ode-ray tube; comparable to dual- or 
multiple-trace operation of the deflection 
amplifier. 

sweep time/division — The nominal time 
required for the spot in the reference 
coordinate to move from one graticule 
division to the next. Also the name of the 
control used to select this time. 

synchronized sweep — A sweep that would 
free run in the absence of an applied sig- 
nal but in the presence of the signal, is 
synchronized by it. 

tangential noise measurement (S) — A 

procedure to determine displayed noise 
wherein a flat-top pulse or square-wave 
input signal is adjusted in amplitude until 
the two traces (or portions of two traces) 
thus produced appear to be immediately 
adjacent or contiguous. Measurement of 
the resulting signal amplitude determines 
a noise value which correlates closely 
with the value interpreted by the eye from 
a sampling display and is called the 
"tangential noise value". 

test (Dl) — In a programmable measure- 
ment system, a word that contains the in- 
formation necessary to command the sys- 
tem to make a specific measurement. 

time base — The sweep generator in an 
oscilloscope. 

time domain reflectometry (S) — The tech- 
nique of launching a pulse or step signal 
into a transmission medium with subse- 
quent analysis of any reflections thus 
produced. 



time magnifier (S) — A control which acts 
to alter the equivalent-time scale without 
an accompanying change in dot density. 
May magnify about a fixed point in the 
display. 

trace — The cathode-ray tube display pro- 
duced by a moving spot. 

trace width — The distance between two 
points on opposite sides of a trace (per- 
pendicular to the direction of motion of 
the spot) at which luminance is 50% of 
maximum. 

trigger — A pulse used to initiate some 
function (for example, a triggered sweep 
or delay ramp). 

trigger countdown — A process that re- 
duces the repetition rate of a triggering 
signal. 

trigger pickoff — A process or a circuit 
for extracting a triggering signal. 

triggered sweep — A sweep that can be 
initiated only by a trigger (not free-run- 
ning). 

triggering level — The instantaneous level 
of a triggering signal at which a trigger is 
to be generated. Also, the name of the 
control which selects the level. 

triggering slope — The positive going (+ 
slope) or negative going (— slope) por- 
tion of a triggering signal from which a 
trigger is to be derived. Also, the control 
that selects the slope to be employed. 

Note: + slope and — slope apply to the 
slope of the waveform only, and not to the 
absolute polarity. 

unblanking — Turning on of the cathode- 
ray-tube beam. 

undershoot — In the display of a step func- 
tion (usually of time), that portion of the 
waveform which, following any overshoot 
or rounding that may be present, falls be- 
low its nominal or final value. 

viewing area — The area of the phosphor 
screen of a cathode-ray tube which can 
be excited to emit light by the electron 
beam. 

word (Dl) — A number of bits or characters 
handled as a unit by a digital device. 

write (Dl) — To place information in an 
output device or storage. 

write (CRT) — To bombard the phosphor 
screen with electrons and produce lumi- 
nescence. 

write through mode (CRT) — That mode of 
operating a storage tube where the stored 
information is retained, and the writing 
beam is operated to produce a non-stor- 
ing display, as in the conventional mode. 

writing gun (CRT) — A high-energy elec- 
tron gun giving a narrow focused beam 
which can be deflected and is used to 
write the information to be stored. 



o 



o 



24 



type 310 A 



DC-to-4 MHz 
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPE 





• SMALL SIZE — LIGHT WEIGHT 

• 4-MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 10-mV/DIV DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 



The Type 31 OA Oscilloscope is an instrument you can take 
with you — easily, comfortably. Small size and low weight com- 
bined with operation on 50- to 800-hertz line frequency make 
this an ideal instrument for maintenance and calibration of 
specialized measuring and recording instruments at their point 
of use. Accurate calibration and excellent linearity assure 
precise time and amplitude measurements either in the labora- 
tory or in the field. Panel design and controls contribute to 
operator convenience. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— 0.1 V/div to 50V/div, DC to 4 MHz. lOmV/div 
to 50mV/div, 2 Hz to 3.5 MHz. 

RISETIME— 90 ns to 0.1 V/div, 100 ns to lOmV/div. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

DC-coupled, 0.1 V/div to 50 V/div. 
AC-coupled only, lOmV/div to 50 mV/div. 

INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.5 M s/div to 0.2 s/div. 
X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 0.1 /.is/div. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.5 V/div, DC to 500 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 div. Each div equal to '/ 4 inch. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1.85 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31 . 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, approx 1-kHz 
squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 175 
watts. 



25 



type 310 A 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 
BANDWIDTH 

DC to 4 MHz at 3-dB down to 0.1 V/div, 2 Hz to 3.5 MHz at 
3dB down to lOmV/div. Low-frequency 3 dB down point, 
AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with included 10X probe. 

RISETIME 
S90ns to 0.1 V/div; SlOOns to lOmV/div. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 50 V/div in 12 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. AC coupled at lOmV/div to 50 mV/ 
div. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and 
to approx 125 V/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated 
setting. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 
TIME BASE 

0.5ju,s/div to 0.2s/div in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 0.6 s/div. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 0.1 /is/ 
div. Magnified time base accurate within 4% (5% at 0.1 fis/ 
div). 

EXTERNAL INPUT 
1.5 V/div, adjustable. DC to 500 kHz at — 3 dB. Input R 
approx 100 kfi. 

TRIGGERING 
MODES 

Manual or automatic. Automatic operation is useful between 
approx 60 Hz and 2 MHz, minimizes trigger adjustment for 
signals of different amplitudes, shapes and repetition rates. 
With no input, automatic triggering occurs at an approx 50- 
Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. 

COUPLING 
AC or DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal, external, or line. 

REQUIREMENTS 
0.25-div deflection or 0.2 V external from DC to 1 kHz, in- 
creasing to 2-div deflection or 2 V external at 5 MHz. AC 
coupling response — 3dB at 16 Hz. Automatic operation 
requires 0.25 div deflection or 0.2 V external from 60 Hz to 

1 kHz, increasing to 2-div deflection or 2.0 V external at 

2 MHz. 

CRT 
TEKTRONIX CRT 

8 x 10-div display area; each div is V, inch. 3-inch tube 
operates at 1.85-kV accelerating voltage. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or Pll are optional without 
extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or 
Distributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 20 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. Vertical and horizontal 
centerlines marked in 5 minor divisions per major V 4 -inch 
division. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
50 mV to 100-V squarewave, 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 
sequence), accurate within 3%. Approx 1-kHz repetition 
rate. 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117-V nominal). Transformer taps 
permit operation at nominal voltages of 110, 117, 124, 220, 
234 and 248 VAC, 50 to 800 Hz (requires approx 4% higher 
line voltage at 800 Hz). Power consumption approx 175 W. 
Can be factory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, 
if so indicated on order. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


10% in 


27.6 cm 


Width 


6' 5 /u in 


17.6 cm 


Depth 


17"/w in 


44.9 cm 


Net weight 


23V 2 lb 


10.7 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


S30 lb 


Si 3.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


s38 lb 


Si 7.3 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

P6012 probe (010-0203-00); 18-inch BNC-to-BNC patch cord 
(012-0087-00); 18-inch BNC-to-banana plug patch cord (012- 
0091-00); BNC post jack (012-0092-00); 3-conductor power 
cord (161-0024-01); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); smoke- 
gray filter (378-0550-00); two instruction manuals (070-0244-00). 

TYPE 310A OSCILLOSCOPE $735 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard probe supplied with 
the instrument satisfies most measurement requirements; optional 
probes may be better suited for particular applications. See 
catalog accessory pages for additional information on these and 
other items. 
CARRYING CASE 

Protects Type 31 0A, provides convenient accessory storage 
compartment, order 016-0028-01 $19.50 

C-30A COMPACT CAMERA 

f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1, Polaroid 
Land* Pack-Film back for 3000-speed film, order C-30A-P . . 
$450 

Type 31 0A to C-30A Camera adapter, order 016-0241-00 $15 

C-30A CAMERA CARRYING CASE 

Constructed of heavy-gage, high-impact plastic, has foam- 
backed, vacuum-formed styrene liner. Holds C-30A Camera, 
all standard accessories and extra film. 
Order 016-0126-00 $35 

PROBES 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

P6011 IX Miniature Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 . . $19 

FAN BASE 




Provides filtered forced-air ventilation recommended for con- 
tinuous operation at 25°C or higher. Tilts Type 310A for 
convenient viewing. 

Order 016-0012-00 for 105 to 125 V, 50 to 60 Hz $60 

Order 016-0013-00 for 210 to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz $60 

'Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



26 



TYPE 



317 




RM 

DC-to-10 MHz 
9-kV OSCiLLOSCOP 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



• BRIGHT TRACE 

• 10-MHz BANDWIDTH AT lOmV/DIV 

• INTERNAL DELAY LINE 

• COMPACT CABINET OR RACK MODELS 

• AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 



The Type 317 is an excellent oscilloscope for the daylight 
conditions often encountered in the field and at production test 
stations. Its brilliant trace, provided by 9-kV accelerating poten- 
tial on a Tektronix 3-inch cathode-ray tube, is easily readable 
in bright areas . . . even at low sweep-repetition rates. Its 
DC-to-10 MHz vertical response and wide sweep range pro- 
vide the measurement capability necessary for many of today's 
complex field and test station applications. Of course, these 
fine characteristics make it an excellent laboratory oscilloscope, 
too. 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC-coupled, DC to 10 MHz. AC-coupled, 2 Hz 
to 10 MHz. 

RISETIME— 35 ns. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 

DC-coupled, 0.1 V/div to 50 V/div. 
AC-coupled, lOmV/div to 50 V/div. 

INPUT RC— 1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.2 M s/div to 2s/div. 
X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends calibrated time base to 40 ns/div. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.4 V/div, DC to 500 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 div. Each div equal to % inch. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 9 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, approx 1-kHz 
squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 300 
watts maximum. 



27 



TYPE 



317 
RM17 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to 10 MHz at 3-dB down to 0.1 V/div, 2 Hz to 10 MHz 
at 3-dB down to lOmV/div. Low-frequency 3-dB point, AC 
coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with included 10X probe. 

RISETIME 
J=35 ns. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 50 V/div in 12 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. AC coupled at lOmV/div to 50 mV/div. 
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 125 V/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated 
setting. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 

0.2/xs/div to 2s/div in 22 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to at least 5s/div. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 40 
ns/div. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

1.4 V/div, adjustable. DC to 500 kHz at — 3dB. Input R 
approx 100 kn. 

FRONT-PANEL OUTPUTS 

^20-V positive gate, S2150-V positive-going sawtooth. 

TRIGGERING 

MODES 

Manual or automatic triggering, high-frequency sync. Auto- 
matic operation is useful between approx 60 Hz and 2 MHz, 
minimizes trigger adjustment for signals of different ampli- 
tudes, shapes, and repetition rates. With no input, auto- 
matic triggering occurs at an approx 50-Hz rate, providing 
a convenient reference trace. High-frequency sync assures 
a steady display of sinewaves to 15 MHz. 

COUPLING 
AC to DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal, external, or line. 

REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-div deflection or 0.5 V external from DC to 1 kHz, increas- 
ing to 2-div deflection or 4 V external at 5 MHz. AC cou- 
pling response — 3 dB at approx 16 Hz. Automatic opera- 
tion requires 0.5-div deflection or 1 V external from 60 Hz to 
1 kHz, increasing to 2-div deflection or 4 V external at 2 MHz. 
High-frequency sync requires 0.2-div deflection or 0.5 V ex- 
ternal at 5 MHz, increasing to 2-div deflection or 4 V external 
at 15 MHz. 




CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

8xl0-div display area; each div is V 4 inch. 3-inch tube 
provides brilliant trace with 9-kV accelerating potential. 
P31 phosphor is normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or Pll are 
optional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. Z-axis input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, re- 
quires 10 V peak to peak for beam modulation at normal 
intensity. 



GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. Vertical and 
centerlines marked in 5 minor divisions per major V 4 -inch 
division. 



horizontal 
per ma|or 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
50 mV to 100-V squarewave, 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%. Approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117-V nominal). Transformer 
taps permit operation at nominal voltages of 110, 117, 124, 
220, 234 and 248 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz. Power consumption 
300W maximum. Can be factory wired for any of the above 
nominal voltages, if so indicated on order. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


12% in 


31.4 cm 


Width 


8Vj in 


21.6 cm 


Depth 


18"/,« in 


47.5 cm 


Net weight 


33 lb 


15.0 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=;46 lb 


:=21.0kg 


Export-packed weight 


^57 lb 


=;25.9 kg 


*CK MODEL DIMENSIONS 


AND WEIGHTS 




Height 


7 in 


17.8 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Rack depth 


18V B in 


46.0 cm 


Net weight 


36'/ 2 lb 


16.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=i65 lb 


=;29.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=:89 lb 


:=S40.5 kg 






TYPE 



RACKMOUNTING 
Type RM17 withdraws from rack on slide-out tracks, tilts 
and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information on 
catalog instrument dimension page. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

P6012 probe (010-0203-00); 18-inch BNC-to-BNC patch cord 
(012-0087-00); 18-inch BNC-to-banana-plug patch cord (012- 
0091-00); BNC post jack (012-0092-00); 3-conductor power cord 
(161-0010-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); smoke-gray 
filter (378-0550-00); two instruction manuals (070-0297-00). 
Type RM17 includes same accessories except two manuals 
(070-0325-00); also includes mounting tracks (351-0083-00) and 
hardware. 

TYPE 317 OSCILLOSCOPE $ 950 

TYPE RM17 OSCILLOSCOPE $1025 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard 10X probe supplied 
with the instrument satisfies most measurement requirements; 
optional probes may be better suited for particular applica- 
tions. See catalog accessory pages for additional information 
on these and other items. 

PROBES 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6011 IX Miniature-Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 $19.00 

SUPPORTING CRADLE 

Required to mount Type RM17 in backless rack, order 
040-0345-00 $7.50 



317 

RM17 




C-30A COMPACT CAMERA 

f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1, Polaroid 
Land* Pack-Film back for 3000-speed film, order C-30A-P . . . 

$450 

Type 317 to C-30A Camera adapter, order 016-0241-00 $ 15 




C-30A CAMERA CARRYING CASE 

Constructed of heavy-gage, high-impact plastic, has foam- 
backed, vacuum-formed styrene liner. Holds C-30A Camera, 
all standard accessories and extra film. 
Order 016-0126-00 $ 35 

*Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



29 



type 3 21 A 



DC-to-6 MHz 
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPE 




• 6-MHz BANDWIDTH AT lOmV/DIV 

• SMALL SIZE — LIGHT WEIGHT 

• ALL SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

• LOW POWER CONSUMPTION 

• AC, DC, OR BATTERY OPERATED 

• UP TO 8 -HOURS OPERATION FROM INTERNAL 
BATTERIES 

• DESIGNED FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS 



The Type 321 A is a high-performance DC-to-6 MHz Oscillo- 
scope. Its rugged mechanical and electrical design plus a 
choice of power options make it ideal for field operations 
requiring accurate waveform measurements. FET inputs provide 
low drift and fast stabilization time. With internal batteries, 
it weighs 17V 2 pounds; without batteries, it weighs 14 pounds. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 6 MHz. 

RISETIME— 58 ns 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 10 mV/div to 20 V/div, 
DC coupled. 

INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 35 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.5 /is/div to 0.5s/div. 
X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 0.1 jtis/div. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 1 V/div, DC to 1 MHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 div. Each div equal to Vi inch. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 500-mV squarewave peak to peak 
and internal 40-mV squarewave peak to peak at approx 
2 kHz. 

POWER OPTIONS— 10 size D batteries; external DC supply of 
11.5 to 35 V, <700mA ; 115 VAC ±10% or 230 VAC ±10%, 
45 to 800 Hz, 20 W. 



30 



TYPE 3 21 A 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 6 MHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB-down point 
with AC coupling is <2Hz, extended to < 0.2 Hz when us- 
ing the included 10X probe. 

RISETIME 
<58 ns. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 20V/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm within 2%, paralleled by 41 pF within 6 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
500 V (DC + peak AC), <500V P-P AC. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 

0.5/is/div to 0.5s/div in 19 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3% over center 8 divisions. Uncalibrated, 
continuously variable between steps and to approx 1 .5 s/div. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Extends all time base steps, the fastest to 0.1 /xs/div. 
Magnified display accurate within 5% over center 8 divisions. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

1 V/div ±10% with X5 magnifier. DC to >1 MHz at —3 dB. 
Input RC 100 kn within 5% paralleled by 25 pF within 5 pF. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic or manual level selection, or free run. Automatic 
operation is useful above 50 Hz, minimizes trigger adjustment 
for signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition 
rates. With no input, automatic triggering occurs at an 
approx 50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. 

COUPLING 

AC or DC 

SOURCES 

Internal or external. External trigger input RC lOOkfi within 
20% paralleled by 9 pF within 4 pF. 

REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-div deflection or 1 V external from DC to 1 kHz, increasing 
to 1-div deflection or 3 V external at 6 MHz. Requirements 
increase below 1 kHz for internal AC coupled triggering, 
and below approx 30 Hz with external AC-coupled triggering. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

6xl0-div display area; each div is Vi inch. 3-inch tube pro- 
vides bright trace, utilizes low heater power. 4-kV acceler- 
ating potential. P31 phosphor normally supplied; P2, P7, or 
Pll are optional without extra charge. Consult your Field 
Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for application in- 
formation and availability. Z-axis input is AC coupled, 5 V 
P-P at 1 kHz gives visible trace modulation at normal inten- 
sity. 



GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting when instrument is operated 
from AC line. Vertical and horizontal centerlines marked in 
5 minor divisions per major '/ 4 -inch division. 

ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 
Operating (without batteries) — 15°C to +55°C. 

(with batteries installed) Charge Range, 0°C to 
+40°C; Discharge Range, — 15°C to 40°C. 
Non-operating (without batteries) — 55°C to +75°C. 

(with batteries installed) — 40°C to +60°C. 

ALTITUDE 

Operating: 15,000 ft max. 
Non-operating: 50,000 ft max. 

VIBRATION 

Operating: 15 minutes along each of 3 axes at 0.025 in peak 
to peak displacement (4 g's at 55 c/s), 10 to 55 to lOc/s 
in 1 -minute cycles. 

SHOCK 
Operating: 20 g's, '/ 2 sine, 11 -ms duration. Two guillotine- 
type shocks per axis each direction for a total of 12 shocks. 
Non-operating: 60 g's, '/ 2 sine, 11 -ms duration. One guillo- 
tine-type shock per axis each direction for a total of 6 shocks. 

HUMIDITY 

Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications 
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202C, 
Method 106B (omit freezing and vibration, and allow a post- 
test drying period at +20°C and 25% to 80% relative 
humidity). 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

500 mV at external jack; accurate within 3% throughout op- 
erating range. 40 mV applied internally to vertical amplifier; 
accurate within 2% throughout operating range. <l-/xs rise- 
time; 2 kHz ±20% repetition rate; 45% to 55% duty cycle. 

POWER OPTIONS 
Wired for 115V RMS ±10%, 45 to 800 Hz; tapped trans- 
former also allows operation at 230 V ±10%; 20-W maxi- 
mum power consumption for oscilloscope only, 30-W maxi- 
mum with internal batteries under full charge. Operates on 
external DC supply from 11.5 to 35 V DC; draws <600mA. 
Operates on 10 internal size D batteries. NiCd rechargeable 
cells provide approx 8 hours continuous operation. Front- 
panel light indicates when internal batteries are low, or (using 
external power) when the voltage source drops too low for 
proper power supply regulation. Recharge requires at least 
16 hours. 

BATTERY CHARGER 

Internal charger provides two different charging currents to 
the internal batteries. A trickle charge or a full charge is ap- 
plied to the internal batteries when the instrument is turned 
off, but connected to the AC line. 



31 



type 321 A 



DIMENSIONS AND 


WEIGHTS 






Height 




8% in 


22.2 cm 


Width 




5 3 A in 


1 4.6 cm 


Depth 




16V 2 in 


41 .9 cm 


Net weight 




14V 4 lb 


6.5 kg 


Domestic shipping 


weight 


;=22 lb 


^ilO.Okg 


Export packed we 


ght 


^33 lb 


1=15.0 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
P6012 10X probe (010-0203-00); two 18-inch BNC-to-banana 
plug patch cords (012-0091-00); DC power cord (161-0016- 
01); AC power cord (161-0015-01); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103- 
0013-00); smoke-gray light filter (378-0547-00); mesh filter, 
installed (378-0577-00); two instruction manuals (070-0425-00). 




TYPE 321 A OSCILLOSCOPE, without batteries 



$975 



C-30A CAMERA CARRYING CASE 

Constructed of heavy-gage, high-impact plastic, has foam- 
backed, vacuum-formed styrene liner. Holds C-30A Camera, 
all standard accessories and extra film. 
Order 016-0126-00 $ 35 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard 10X probe supplied 
with the instrument satisfies most measurement requirements; 
optional probes may be better suited for particular applica- 
tions. In addition to the listed optional probes, other probes 
are available for current and high-voltage measurements. See 
catalog accessory pages for additional information on these 
and other items. 




C-30A COMPACT CAMERA 

f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1, Polaroid 

Land* Pack-Film back for 3000-speed film, order C-30A-P . . . 

$450 



321 A to C-30A Camera adapter, order 016-0242-00 

•Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 



$ 15 




CARRYING CASE 

Protects Type 321 A, provides convenient accessory storage 
compartment, order 01 6-0026-00 $38 

RECHARGEABLE BATTERIES 
Each NiCd cell, order 146-0010-00 $ 7 

Set of 10 NiCd cells, order 016-0077-01 $ 70 

PROBES 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

P6011 IX Miniature-Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 .. $19 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



32 



type 323 



DC-to-4 MHz 
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPE 




NEW 



• AC, DC OR BATTERY POWERED 

• COMPACT SIZE — WEIGHT ^7 lb 

• ALL SOLID-STATE RELIABILITY 

• 4-MHz BANDWIDTH AT 10 mV/DIV 

• UP to 8 -HOURS OPERATION FROM INTERNAL 
BATTERY PACK 

• DESIGNED FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS 

• CONVENIENT ACCESSORY STORAGE 

The Type 323 is an all solid-state, single-channel, 4-MHz 
portable oscilloscope providing the operator the convenience 
of using AC, DC or internal rechargeable batteries for powering 
the instrument. The 323 features small size and light weight, 
together with extremely low power consumption. Depth is 
10 5 /e inches, width — 8y 2 inches, height — 4V 4 inches, weight — 
~7 pounds. Power consumption is up to 4.5 watts, typically 
1.6 watts from an external DC source and 14 watts when pow- 
ered from the AC line. Internal rechargeable batteries will 
provide up to 8 hours continuous operation, sufficient for a 
full working day. The portability/performance provided by the 
Type 323 Oscilloscope, makes it most attractive for use in 
"on-site" maintenance applications; for example, industrial con- 
trol equipment, communication systems, business machines and 
computers. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 4 MHz. 

RISETIME— 90 ns. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 10 mV/div to 20V/div 

at full bandwidth, 1 mV/div at 2.75-MHz bandwidth. 
INPUT RC— 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 5 jus/div to 1 s/div. 
X10 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 0.5 /xs/div. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 30 mV/div to 20V/div, continuously vari- 
able, DC to 10 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 divisions (V 4 inch/division). 
PHOSPHOR— P31 . 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— Internal, 0.5 V at external jack. 

POWER SOURCES — Internal batteries; external DC supply of 
6 to 16 V, 4.5 W; 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 Hz 
to 440Hz, 14W at 115 VAC. 



33 



type 323 




EASY TO CARRY 

Adjustable handle and included shoulder strap make this 
7-pound oscilloscope easy to carry. 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 
BANDWIDTH 

DC to af least 4 MHz at 3-dB down. DC to at least 2.75 MHz 
at 3-dB down using XI gain. Low-frequency 3-dB-down point 
with AC coupling is 2 Hz or less, extending to 0.2 Hz or less 
with the included 10X probe. 

RISETIME 
90 ns or less; 130 ns or less using XI gain. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
lOmV/div to 20V/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
1 mV/div to 2V/div using XI gain, all steps accurate within 
3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and 
to approx 50 V/div. 

ABERRATIONS 
At the lOmV/div vertical attenuator setting, aberrations 
are +2%, —2% or less, total of 3% P-P or less at — 15°C 
to +55°C. At all other V/div settings, aberrations are 
+3%, —3% or less, total of 3% P-P or less at 0°C to +55°C 
and +4%, —4% or less, total of 4% P-P or less at -15°C 
to +55° C. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm within 2% paralleled by 47 pF within 4 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
500 V (DC + peak AC). 

DISPLAYED NOISE 
0.1 div or less at 1 mV/div, using 50-fi termination or in- 
cluded probe. 



[ 



EXT TRIO OR HORtZ 



© 



i 



] 



Input and output connections are provided on the left side panel, 
freeing important front panel space for operating controls. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 
TIME BASE 

5/xs/div to 1 s/div in 17 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%, over the center 8 divisions, from 5 ps/div 
to 0.2 s/div, accurate within 4% from 0.5 s/div to 1 s/div. 
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 2.5 s/div. 
XI MAGNIFIER 
Operates over full time base, increases fastest sweep rate to 
0.5 jus/div. Accuracy of magnified display is within 4%, 
over the center 8 divisions, from 2 ^s/div to 20 ms/div, within 
5% at 0.5 /is/div, 1 jts/div, 50 ms/div, and 0.1 s/div. 

34 




EASY TO USE 

Small size of the Type 323 makes it easy to carry around 
the neck or support in the lap. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 
Continuously variable from approx 25mV/div to approx 
25 V/div, AC or DC coupled. DC to at least 10 kHz at 3-dB 
down. 

TRIGGER 
MODES 

Automatic or manual level and slope selection with a single 
control. Automatic operation minimizes trigger adjustments 
and is useful above 30 Hz. With no input, automatic trigger- 
ing provides a bright baseline at all sweep rates. 

COUPLING 
AC and AC LF REJ for internal triggering, AC and DC for 
external triggering. 300-V maximum input voltage (combined 
DC + peak AC). 

AMPLITUDE REQUIREMENTS 
0.3-div deflection or 75 mV external to 400 kHz, increasing 
to 0.75-div deflection or 190 mV external at 4 MHz. Require- 
ments increase below 30 Hz with internal or external AC 
coupling and below 30 kHz with AC LF REJ coupling. 

CRT 
CRT 

6xl0-div display area; each div is y 4 inch. CRT uses direct 
heated cathode, providing a useful display approx two 
seconds after turn-on. P31 phosphor normally supplied; P7 
is optional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative or Distributor for application information and 
availability. External blanking input requires +5 V to +20 V 
(DC coupled), is usable from DC to at least 100 kHz. 150-V 
maximum input voltage (combined DC + peak AC). 
GRATICULE 

Internal, black, non-illuminated. Vertical and horizontal cen- 



terlines marked 
sion. 



in 5 minor divisions per major V 4 -inch divi- 



'C (without batteries). 
'C (with batteries). 



ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 

Operating: — 15°C to +55°C. 
Non-operating: — 55°C to +75° 
— 40°C to +60" 
Charging: — 0°C to +40°C. 
ALTITUDE 

Operating: 15,000 feet; maximum ambient temperature rating 

must be decreased by 1 "C/1000 feet from 5,000 feet to 15,000 

feet. 

Non-operating: 50,000 feet. 



type 323 



VIBRATION 

Operating: 15 minutes along each of the 3 major axes, 0.025 
inch peak-to-peak displacement (4 g's at 55 c/s) 10 to 55 to 
lOc/s in 1 -minute cycles. 

SHOCK 

Operating and non-operating: 30 g's, y 2 sine, 11 -ms duration, 
2 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of 12 shocks. 

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE 

Meets radiated interference requirements of MIL-I-6181D and 
MIL-I-1690C over the range 150 kHz to 1 GHz. Instrument 
must be battery operated with CRT mesh filter (378-0596-00) 
installed. Installation of the CRT mesh filter diminishes the 
usefulness of the internal non-illuminated graticule. 

HUMIDITY 

Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications 
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202C. 
Method 106B (omit freezing and vibration, and allow a post- 
test drying period at +25°C ±5°C at 20% to 80% relative 
humidity. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
0.5 V at external jack, accurate within 1% from +20°C to 
+30°C, within 2% throughout the operating temperature 
range. Output resistance approx 10 kQ. Risetime 2 /is or less; 
duty cycle 40% to 60%. Output also switchable internally 
to vertical amplifier. 

PROBE 

The P6049 is a miniaturized 10X probe with 3.5-foot cable, 
and right-angle swivel BNC connector. Input RC with probe 
is lOMfi within 2% paralleled by less than 13.5 pF. 

POWER SOURCES 

Battery operation: removable power pack contains 6 size 
"C" NiCd cells providing 3.4 to 8-hours operation. Operating 
time depends on signal frequency and amplitude, the setting 
of trace intensity, operating temperature and temperature 
during previous battery charge. Maximum time is achieved 
at 20°C to 25°C charge and 20°C to 30°C operating tem- 
perature. Internal charger provides for charging the internal 
batteries when connected to the AC line, operating or non- 
operating. Recharge requires at least 16 hours at full charge. 
A Trickle Charge position prevents battery self-discharge 
when not in use. 

External DC source: operates from an external DC source of 
6 V to 16 V, requires up to 4.5 W, typically 1.6W. 
External AC source: operates from an external AC source of 
90 to 136 V, or 180 to 272 V. 48 to 440 Hz, 14 W maximum 
at 115 VAC. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


4% in 


10.8 cm 


Width without handle 


7Va in 


18.4 cm 


Width with handle 


8y 2 in 


21.6 cm 


Depth with panel cover 


10% in 


27.0 cm 


Depth with handle extended 


12% in 


32.3 cm 


Net weight without accessories 


ZZ7 lb 


^3.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=;13 lb 


^5.9 kg 


Export-packed weight 


^21 lb 


^9.5 kg 




Optional rain jacket (left) slips over the Type 323 and 
its included accessory pouch (right). 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
P6049 10X probe (010-0223-00); patch cord (012-0089-00); ac- 
cessory pouch (016-0113-00); viewing hood (016-0247-01); 
3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); BNC-to-binding post adap- 
ter (103-0033-00); power cord (161-0043-00); panel cover (200- 
0812-00); strap assembly (346-0051-00); smoke-gray light filter 
(426-0403-00); two instruction manuals (070-0750-00). 

TYPE 323 OSCILLOSCOPE, including batteries $925 

The SONY®/TEKTRONIX® Type 323 is manufactured and marketed 
in Japan by Sony/Tektronix Corporation, Tokyo, Japan. Outside 
of Japan the Type 323 is available from Tektronix, Inc., its market- 
ing subsidiaries and distributors. 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

RAIN JACKET 

The rain jacket provides protection for the Type 323 during 
transport or storage, is constructed of waterproof blue vinyl, 
order 016-0112-00 $7 




POWER PACK 
Extra power pack, in addition to the one supplied with the 
Type 323 allows one power pack to charge while the other 
is powering the oscilloscope. Pack contains 6 size "C" NiCd 
cells and battery charger, order 016-0119-00 $95 

BATTERY SET 
Set of 6 NiCd cells, order 146-0012-00 $20 

U.S. Soles Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 



35 



TYPE 410 
PHYSIOLOGICAL MONITOR 




• DISPLAYS ECG, EEG, OR PULSE WAVEFORMS 



• SIMPLE CONTROLS 



• SOLID-STATE RELIABILITY, QUICK TURN-ON 



• HEART RATE BEEP 



• PORTABLE, 1 2 y 2 POUNDS 

• UP TO 12 -HOURS OPERATION FROM INTERNAL 
BATTERY PACK 

The Type 410 is designed for patient monitoring during sur- 
gery, recovery, and intensive care. Of special use to the an- 
esthesiologist, it displays on a cathode-ray tube waveforms 
of the electrocardiogram (ECG), electroencephalogram (EEG), 
or pulse. During surgery, the Type 410 can give early warn- 
ing of a developing problem. Other applications of the Type 
410 include measurements of fetal ECGs, using the high-gain 
input (EEG) and electrodes supplied with the Monitor. 

Ease of operation, with a minimum of controls, contributes 
to the usability of the Type 410, as do its other features: 4- 
second recovery after overdrive by defibrillator or cauterizer, 
output for strip-chart recorder, and a cabinet finish that is dur- 
able and washable. 

36 




The Monitor can be conveniently positioned (using the op- 
tional mounting fixture) at the five-foot level on the anesthesi- 
ologist's gas machine for easy viewing, then lifted off and 
carried with the patient to the recovery room. The 12V 2 -pound 
weight and battery operation permit easy mobility and con- 
tinuous operation without disconnecting leads or power. 



TYPE 410 



IHI w 


^^^^ : ; jL* ' 


* 1 ■■ 


ft 'Wm t^L : 
t r ' ^^ 


*&£~ 




I 


^ tftaC 1 


1 \ 



ECG MEASUREMENTS 

Heart rates from 35 beats/min to 180 beats/min can be 
directly read by observing the point on the CRT graticule 
scale where the second R wave occurs. A beep sound coin- 
cident with each repetition of the ECG waveform provides an 
audible indication of heart rate, in addition to the waveform 
display. Thus a sudden change in heart rate can be quickly 
detected, even without constant observation of the display. 
Loss of signal to the Monitor for 2 to 4 seconds automatically 
increases the rate of the beep to an alarm level, and also pro- 
vides a baseline on the CRT. Bandwidth in the ECG mode is 
<0.1 Hz to 250 Hz ± 15%. Deflection sensitivity is 20 mm/ 
mV, accurate within 5%. Seven commonly-used leads can be 
selected: I, II, III, aV R , aV L , aV F and V. Silver-silver chloride 
non-polarizing electrodes are supplied as standard accessories. 
The Type 410 is also compatible with common needle elec- 
trodes and inexpensive disposable surface electrodes. 

EEG MEASUREMENTS 

EEG input accepts the included silver -silver chloride ECG 
electrodes supplied with the Monitor. Optional EEG elec- 
trodes (identical except for color coding) are also available. 
Bandwidth in the EEG mode is <0.1 Hz to 100 Hz ±15%. 
Deflection sensitivity is 10 mm/50 ^V, accurate within 5%. 

PULSE MEASUREMENTS 

Auxiliary input accepts the optional photosensitive pulse 
sensor. The pulse sensor, containing a light source and photo- 
resistor, is attached to the patient's finger. As the pulse 
occurs, the amount of blood in the finger changes the amount 
of light reaching the photo-resistor. The resulting display 
provides a quick indication of heart rate. A beep sounds 
coincident with each pulse, giving an audible as well as 
visible indication of the patient's heart activity. Loss of sig- 
nal to the Monitor for 2 to 4 seconds automatically increases 
the rate of the beep to an alarm level, and provides a base 
line on the CRT. Bandwidth at the Auxiliary mode input is 
<0.1 Hz to 250Hz ±15%. Deflection sensitivity is 2mm/ 
mV, accurate within 5%. 



HIGH COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

>500,000:1 throughout bandwidth with a balanced, low- 
impedance source. 50,000:1 AUX; 100,000:1 ECG; 150,000:1 
EEG at 60 Hz with 5-kQ source impedance unbalance between 
properly-applied electrodes. High common-mode rejection, 
with corresponding reduction of interference is obtained under 
actual operating conditions. 

COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE 

+3 V to -3 V. 

DIFFERENTIAL DYNAMIC RANGE 
Monitor characteristics are valid with an input terminal DC 
potential difference (offset) of up to 20 mV. Typically less 
than lOmV difference exists between the non-polarizable 
silver-silver chloride electrodes supplied with the Type 410. 
At least 100 mV of either polarity can be applied with no 
more than 5% reduction in amplifier gain. 

DIFFERENTIAL INPUT RESISTANCE 

2 Ma ±15% in EEG and ECG mode, 20Mfi ±15% in 
Auxiliary mode. 

DRIFT 

< 0.5 cm per hour after 10-second warm-up. 

DISPLAY NOISE 

<0.1 cm in the calibrated EEG mode, input shorted. 

SWEEP SPEEDS 
25, 50, and 100 mm per second; accurate within 5%. 
Sweep is triggered in ECG and AUX operating modes. 

AUDIO SIGNAL 

Beep sounds at heart rate, providing audible indication of 
normal or arrhythmic heart rate. Automatic alarm sounds 
if there is a loss of signal for 2 to 4 seconds. Loudness is 
adjustable. Using the audio output jack disconnects the in- 
ternal speaker. 

WAVEFORM SIZE 
Vertical size of ECG, EEG, and pulse waveforms is continu- 
ously variable from '/ 3 to 3 times the height of the calibrated 
display. 



Pulse display — approx 75 beats/minute 




CRT 

5-inch rectangular CRT has 8xl0-cm viewing area. P-7 
phosphor has long decay time for convenient viewing at 
slow sweep speeds. The external graticule has a graduated 
heart-rate scale at the top, a battery-condition scale at the 
bottom, and a vertical and horizontal center-line scale marked 
in centimeters. 

37 



TYPE 410 



BATTERY OPERATION 

Removable battery pack contains 10 size "C" NiCd cells, 
provides 8 to 12 hours operation with maximum accessory 
load at +20°C to +25°C. Internal charger provides re- 
charge in 16 hours, operates from 90 V to 136 VAC or 180 V 
to 272 VAC, 48 Hz to 440 Hz, requires <7W at 115 V, 60 
Hz. Monitor can also be operated from line (with reduced 
charge to battery pack). 

CLEANING 

Monitor and accessories can be damp wiped with mild soap 
and water. 



MIX 

1 

iCG A INPUT 

SELECTOR 

VnmCAL VERTICAL fCO i^B 
FF/: on nmtini. ir»n «iirnn imio*f*s ^^KM^^^^H 


H# m m # - 


/50 M BATTERY «K!Ow3HHI 
/ A CHECK ^^gj^^g 

"J ' 1 

\ SWEEP 
\m , SPEED 

POWER 



Type 4J0 operating controls. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 

Width without handle 
Width with handle 
Depth without handle 
Depth with handle 
Weight without accessories 
Domestic shipping weight 
Export packed weight 



5% in 


13.7 cm 


8'/ 2 in 


21.6 cm 


9% in 


23.2 cm 


10% in 


27.4 cm 


12% in 


32.7 cm 


12% lb 


5.6 kg 


20 lb 


~9.1 kg 


30 lb 


=213.6 kg 



REPRESENTATIVE ACCESSORIES 




LA 012-0121-10 RA 0120121-19 
IL 012-0121-12 Rl 012-0121-15 



Electrode Adopter Kits 
4-foot 012-0122-00 
6-foot 012-0138-00 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Power cable assembly (161-0037-02); patient cable assem- 
bly (012-0120-00); electrode LA black (012-0121-10); electrode 
LL red (012-0121-12); electrode RL green (012-0121-15)- elec- 
trode RA white (012-0121-19); package adhesive electrode 
rings (006-1099-00); tube electrode paste (006-1098-00); two 
electrode adapter kits (012-0122-00), one electrode adapter 
kit (012-0138-00); two instruction manuals (070-0658-00). 
TYPE 410 PHYSIOLOGICAL MONITOR $850 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

MOUNTING STAND 

Mounts Type 410 at the five-foot level, permits swivelling 
and tipping the Monitor for convenient viewing. Hardware 
supplied with the fixture attaches to gas machine, bed, flat 
or round surface up to 1 %-inch diameter 
Order 016-01 10-00 $ 35 

MOUNTING CUP 

Mounts Type 410 to flat surface, permits tipping the Moni- 
tor for convenient viewing. Mounting screws not included- 
Order 407-0393-01 $ 3 

CHEST ELECTRODE 
Brown color code. 
Order 012-0121-11 $ 15 

EEG ELECTRODE 

Yellow color code, 2 required 

Order 012-0121-14 (each) $ 15 

PULSE SENSOR ASSEMBLY 

Photoresistive sensor for pulse measurements, used with Type 

410 Auxiliary input. 

Order 015-0104-00 $ 6 q 




Pulse Sensor attached to finger. 

BATTERY PACK 

Extra battery pack, in addition to the one supplied with the 
Type 410, allows one pack to charge while the other is 
powering the Monitor. Pack contains 10 size "C" NiCd cells 
and battery charger. 
Order 016-0107-00 $ 90 

U.S. Soles Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



38 



TYPE 



R422 




DC-to-15 MHz 
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES 



• COMPACT SIZE — LIGHT WEIGHT 

• DUAL TRACE, FET INPUTS 

• DESIGNED FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS 

• AC AND AC/DC VERSIONS 

• UP TO 5 HOURS OPERATION FROM INTERNAL 
BATTERY PACK (AC/DC VERSION) 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 



The Type 422 is a portable dual-trace oscilloscope that com- 
bines small size and light weight with the ability to make 
precise waveform measurements. It weighs under 22 pounds and 
occupies less than 0.6 cubic foot. To make it truly portable, 
the Type 422 is ruggedly constructed to withstand shock, vibra- 
tion, and other extremes of environment. Solid-state design, 
using FET input circuitry, provides minimum drift and fast sta- 
bilization time. No longer need measurements be compromised 
due to adverse field conditions; the Type 422 brings the pre- 
cision of the laboratory to the field. 

Two models are available. One operates on AC; the other 
on AC or DC, with an optional battery pack providing up to 
5 hours operating time for completely portable operation. The 
AC model is also available as Type R422, arranged in a rack- 
mount panel assembly with a hinged-door compartment for 
storing accessories. The hinged door can be removed to allow 
the installation of a second Type 422 for applications that 
require two instruments. The entire assembly is mounted to 
the rack with slide-out tracks. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

(2 Identical Channels) 
BANDWIDTH— DC to 1 5 MHz. 
RISETIME— 24 ns. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 10 mV/div to 20 V/div. 
INPUT RC— I megohm paralleled by 33 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.5 ^s/div to 0.5s/div. 
XIO MAGNIFIER— Extends fastest time-base to 0.05 /j.s/div. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— I V/div to 100 V/div, DC to 500 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 divisions (0.8cm/div). 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 6 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 V peak to peak, internally; 2 V 

peak to peak, front-panel jack; 1-kHz squarewave (approx). 

POWER OPTIONS- 
AC Model: 95 to 136 VAC or 190 to 272 VAC, 45 to 440 Hz, 
approx 26 W. AC/DC Model: AC mode— 92 to 137 VAC 
or 184 to 274 VAC, 45 to 440 Hz, maximum 30 W. DC 
mode — 11.5 to 35 VDC, maximum 26 W. Also accepts 24-V 
battery pack. 



39 



TYPE 



422 
R422 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

(2 Identical Channels) 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 15 MHz at 3-dB down (each channel); 5 Hz to 5 MHz 
at 3-dB down, on XI gain (channel 2). Low-frequency 3-dB- 
down point is <2Hz with AC coupling (each channel), <0.2 
Hz with included 10X probe. 

RISETIME 

24 ns each channel; 70 ns at XI gain (channel 2). 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 20V/div in 11 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence 
(each channel). Deflection factor extended to 1 mV/div in 
XI position (channel 2). All steps accurate within 3%; 7.5% 
on X10 GAIN (channel 2). Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/div. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

DC DRIFT 

Drift with time — 

Short term: (ambient temperature and line voltage con- 
stant) 0.1 div or less during any minute within 
first hour after 20-minute warm-up. 
Long term: (with ambient temperature 20°C to 30°C and 
line voltage constant) 0.2 div or less during 
first hour after 20-minute warm-up. 
Drift with temperature — 0.2 div or less per 10°C. 



:2% paralleled by 33 pF ±1 pF. 



INPUT RC 

1 megohm 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

300 V (DC plus peak AC), AC not to exceed 300 V, 1 kHz 
or less. 

OPERATING MODES 

Channel 1 only; Channel 2 only; Channels 1 and 2 added 
algebraically; dual-trace chopped; dual-trace alternate. In 
chopped operation, successive 3.3-/is segments of each chan- 
nel are displayed at an approx 150-kHz rate. Channel 2 has 
polarity inversion. Common-mode rejection ratio is > 1 00:1 at 
50 kHz with Channels 1 and 2 adjusted for equal gain. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing of leading edge of triggering waveform. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 

0.5 jus/div to 0.5s/div in 19 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3% over center 8 div. Uncalibrated, con- 
tinuously variable between steps and to approx 1 .25 s/div. 
Warning light indicates uncalibrated vernier settings. 

X10 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 50 ns/ 
div. Accuracy of magnified time base is within 5% over 
center 8 div. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Variable between approx 1 V/div to 100 V/div. DC to >500 
kHz at 3-dB down. Input RC 300 kQ ±10% paralleled by 
35 pF ±3pF. 

OTHER 

Gate output (on front panel) is a negative-going rectangular 
pulse with same duration as time base; 0.5-V minimum; 620- 
ohm ±10% source impedance. 



TRIGGER 

MODES 
Automatic or Normal. Automatic operation useful between 
20 Hz and 15 MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for signals 
of different amplitudes, shapes and repetition rates. With no 
input (or input less than 20 Hz), the automatic triggering free 
runs the sweep and provides a bright reference trace at all 
sweep rates. 

COUPLING 
DC; AC; AC LOW FREQ REJECT. 

SOURCES 

Internal: Channels 1 and 2, Channel 1 only; 
External: Input RC is 100 kn ±3% paralleled by 33 pF ±5 
pF. Positive or Negative slope. Trigger level range at least 
+ 10 V to — 10 V. Maximum input voltage 250 V (DC plus 
peak AC). 

REQUIREMENTS 
DC: 0.2-div deflection or 125mV ext up to 5 MHz, increasing 

to 1 div or 0.6 Vat 15 MHz. 
AC: Same as DC above 50 Hz. 
AC LOW FREQ REJECT: Same as DC above 50 kHz. 



ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES 



AC MODEL 

Ambient Temp: 

Altitude: 
Humidity: 



Vibration: 



Shock: 



Operating: — 15°C to +55°C. 
Non-operating: — 55°C to +75°C. 

Operating: 15,000 ft, maximum. 
Non-operating: 50,000 ft, maximum. 

Non-operating: Meets electrical performance 
specification after exposure to five cycles 
(120 hrs) of Mil-Std-202C, Method 106B 
(omit freezing and vibration, and allow a 
24-hour post-test drying period at room am- 
bient conditions of 25°C, ±5°C and 20 to 
80% relative humidity). 

Operating: 15 minutes along each of 3 axes 
at 0.025 inch peak to peak displacement (3.9 
g's at 55 c/s), 10-55-10 c/s in 1-minute cycles. 
Operating and non-operating: 30 g's, '/j sine, 
11 -ms duration, 2 shocks per axis in each di- 
rection for a total of 12 shocks. 

Meets interference requirements of MIL-I- 
6181 D, Power line conducted: 150 kHz— 25 
MHz. Radiated (with mesh filter installed): 150 
kHz— 1000 MHz. 



AC/DC MODEL, with batteries 
Same as AC MODEL, with these exceptions: 
Temperature: Operating: — 15°C to +40°C 

Non-operating: —40° C to +60° C 
Humidity: Derate temperature to +60° C. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

Squarewave, 1 kHz within 20%, negative-going. Provides 
0.2 V, internally, ±1.5% (+20°C to +30°C), and 2 V, 
±0.5% (+20°C to +30°C), at Probe Cal jack on front 
panel. 



EMI: 



40 



TYPE 



POWER OPTIONS 

AC Model: 95 to 136 VAC or 190 to 272 VAC, 45 to 440 Hz, 
26 watts at 115 VAC. 

AC/DC Model: AC mode: 92 to 137 VAC or 184 to 274 VAC, 
45 to 440 Hz, 30 W maximum. DC mode: 11.5 to 35 VDC, 
26 W maximum (constant power: 2.3 A max, 750 mA min). 
24-V battery pack (part number 016-0066-02) provides up to 
5-hours continuous operation. 



TEKTRONIX CRT 

Rectangular, 4-inch 
area. Illuminated 
potential. External 

will completely blank trace. P31 phosphor normally supplied; 
PI, P2, P7, or Pll are optional without extra charge. Con- 
sult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for 
application information and availability. 



with 0.8-cm divisions; 8xl0-div display 
internal graticule. 6-kV accelerating 
blanking, DC-coupled +2V and greater 




Panel cover provides storage for standard accessories. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS (Type 422) 

Height 6' 5 / u in 17.7 cm 

Width 9% in 23.8 cm 

Depth (including panel cover) 

AC Model 15 3 / 4 in 40.0 cm 

AC/DC Model 18% 6 in 47.2 cm 

Depth (with extended handle) 

AC Model 17' 3 /, 6 in 45.4 cm 

AC/DC Model 20 5 / 8 in 52.4 cm 

Weight (with front cover and ac- 
cessories) 

AC Model 21 Vi lb 9.7 kg 

AC/DC Model without batteries 23 lb 10.5 kg 

AC/DC Model with batteries 30 lb 13.7 kg 

Domestic shipping weight 

AC Model ^30 lb ^13.6 kg 

AC/DC Model without batteries ^32 lb ;=14.6kg 

Export-packed weight 

AC Model ^44 lb :=20.0 kg 

AC/DC Model without batteries ^46 lb ^r20.9 kg 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS (Type R422) 

Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Depth behind front panel 12y 2 in 31.8 cm 

Net weight 23'/, lb 10.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~50 lb ~22.7kg 

Export-packed weight ~73 lb ~33.2 kg 



R422 



TYPE 422 AC POWERED PORTABLE 
INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6012 10X probe (010-0203-00); adapter, BNC to binding 
post (103-0033-00); ornamental ring (354-0248-00); light grati- 
cule, smoke-gray filter (378-0549-00); clear, CRT protector plate 
(386-0118-00); mesh filter, installed, (378-0571-00); AC power 
supply (016-0072-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); power 
cord, 117 V, 3-conductor, right-angle, female with straight 
male plug (161-0024-01); two instruction manuals (070-0894-00). 

TYPE 422 OSCILLOSCOPE $1450 



TYPE 422 AC/DC POWERED PORTABLE 
MOD 125B 




422 MOD 1 25B (Shown with protective cover in place) 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Type 422 with AC/DC battery power supply, less batteries. 
Two P6012 10X probe (010-0203-00); ornamental ring (354- 
0248-00); light graticule, smoke-gray filter (378-0549-00); clear, 
CRT, protector plate (386-0118-00); mesh filter, installed (378- 
0571-00); AC/DC power supply (016-0073-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); 3-wire AC with female connector and 
male plug power cord (161-0015-01); 3-wire DC with female 
connector power cord (161-0016-01); BNC to binding post 
adapter (103-0033-00); two instruction manuals (070-0895-00). 
TYPE 422 MOD 125B OSCILLOSCOPE, without Battery Pack 

$1800 

BATTERY PACK FOR TYPE 422 MOD 125B 
Order 016-0066-02 $125 



TYPE R422 AC POWERED RACKMOUNTS 




41 



TYPE 



422 
R422 



OSCILLOSCOPE ON LEFT 



Type R422 Oscilloscope (mounted on left side) includes acces- 
sories listed for Type 422 above plus slide-out tracks (351- 
0100-00); and mounting hardware. 

TYPE R422 OSCILLOSCOPE $1525 

OSCILLOSCOPE ON RIGHT, MOD 150E 

Type R422 Oscilloscope (mounted on right side) includes 
accessories listed for Type 422 above plus slide-out tracks 
(351-0100-00); and mounting hardware. 

TYPE R422 MOD 150E OSCILLOSCOPE $1525 

OSCILLOSCOPES SIDE BY SIDE, MOD 150B 

Two Type 422's mounted in a rackmount panel include two 
sets of accessories listed for Type 422 above plus slide-out 
tracks (351-0100-00); and mounting hardware. 

TYPE R422 MOD 150B OSCILLOSCOPE $2950 

OSCILLOSCOPE WITHOUT CABINET, MOD 146B 

Type 422 Oscilloscope without cabinet for rackmount con- 
version includes accessories listed for Type 422. 

TYPE 422 MOD 146B OSCILLOSCOPE $1425 

CONVERSION KITS 

PORTABLE TO RACKMOUNT CONVERSION KIT 

This mounting kit includes hardware and instructions to con- 
vert existing Type 422 Oscilloscopes (AC version) for rack- 
mount installation. Order 040-0419-00 $85 

RACKMOUNT TO PORTABLE CONVERSION KIT 

This kit includes the cabinet and necessary hardware to con- 
vert existing Type R422 Oscilloscopes for portable operation. 
Order 040-0421-00 $60 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

This listing covers only the more commonly used items. The 
standard probes (10X) supplied with the instrument satisfy most 
measurement requirements. In addition to the listed optional 
probes, other probes are available for current and high-volt- 
age measurements. A complete list of accessory items can be 
found in the catalog accessory pages. 

C-30A COMPACT CAMERA 

f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1, Polaroid 
Land* Pack-Film back for 3000-speed film, order C-30A-P 
$450 

PROBES 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6011 IX Miniature Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 $19.00 

OSCILLOSCOPE COVER 

Provides protection for Type 422 during transport or storage. 
Type 422 (with battery pack) COVER, 016-0075-00 .... $7.50 
Type 422 (without battery pack) COVER, 016-0076-00 .. $7.50 




AC/DC POWER SUPPLY WITHOUT BATTERY PACK 

Converts Type 422 Portable Oscilloscope for DC or (with 

battery pack) battery operation. 

Domestic shipping weight 10V 4 lbs. 

Includes: 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); power cord, 3- 

wire AC w/female connector and male plug (161-0015-01); 

power cord, 3-wire DC w/female connector (161-0016-01); 

two instruction manuals (070-0895-00). 

Order 016-0073-00 $600 

COLLAPSIBLE VIEWING HOOD 

Permits viewing of trace under high ambient-light conditions, 
order 01 6-0082-00 $8.00 




SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Type 200-2 occupies less than 18-inches aisle space, has stor- 
age space in base $85 

*Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



42 



TYPE 



453 
R453 



DC-to-50 MHz PORTABLE 
SWEEP DELAY OSCILLOSCOP 



)PES 




• 7-ns RISETIME WITH OR WITHOUT PROBE 

• COMPACT, LIGHT WEIGHT 

• DUAL-TRACE, 5-mV/DIV DEFLECTION f ACTOR 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• FULL-SENSITIVITY X-Y DISPLAY 

• FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

The Type 453 is a portable, wide-band, dual-trace oscilloscope 
designed to withstand rough transport and other environmental 
extremes. Bandwidth of the Type 453 is DC to 50 MHz (with or 
without supplied probes). Probes are miniaturized for easy 
access to dense circuitry. 

The sharply-focused, bright trace provides a high-definition 
display compatible with the wide-band capabilities of the Type 
453. 

Solid-state design, with FET inputs, provides low drift and fast 
stabilization time. 

Mechanical design features include plug-in transistors (for ease 
of maintenance), a front-panel cover (for use in transit or storage) 
with storage space for accessory items, and a carrying handle 
which can be rotated to several positions as a tilt-stand or for 
convenient carrying. 

Channel 1 can be switched to give horizontal deflection with 
Channel 2 providing the vertical deflection, enabling full-sen- 
sitivity X-Y displays (to 5 mV/div). 

Type R453 is electrically identical to Type 453. It mounts 
on tilting, slide-out tracks to a standard 19-inch rack, requir- 
ing only 7 inches of vertical rack-space. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

(2 Identical Channels) 

BANDWIDTH & RISETIME 

lOV/div to 20mV/div: DC to 50 MHz, 7 ns 

lOmV/div: DC to 45 MHz, 7.8 ns 

5 mV/div: DC to 40 MHz, 8.75 ns 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR — 5 mV/div to lOV/div. 

50mV/div to lOOV/div with P6010 Probe. 
INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE — 0.1 /xs/div to 5s/div. 
XI MAGNIFIER — Operates over full time base, increases 

fastest rate to lOns/div. 
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY — 1 /*s to 50 s. 
EXTERNAL INPUT — 270 mV/div to 2.7V/div, or Channel 1 

can drive HORIZONTAL. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA — 6x10 div (0.8 cm/div). 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE — 1 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE AND TIME CALIBRATOR— 1 V or 0.1 V output; 

5 mA output; 1-kHz squarewave. 
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 V or 180 to 272 V, 48 to 

440 Hz, approx 92 watts. 



43 



TYPE 



453 
R453 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 



(2 identical channels) 



BANDWIDTH* AND RISETIME 


DEFLECTION FACTOR** 


FROM 50-n TERMINATED 

SOURCE WITH OR 
WITHOUT P6010 PROBE 


lOV/div to 20mV/div 


DC to at least 50 MHz, 7 ns 


lOmV/div 


DC to at least 45 MHz, 7.8 ns 


5 mV/div 


DC to at least 40 MHz, 8.75 ns 


1 mV/div 

Ch 1 & 2 Cascaded 


DC to at least 25 MHz, 14 ns 



♦Measured at 3-dB down. Lower 3-dB point, AC coupled is approx 1.6 Hz 
(approx 0.16 Hz with P6010 10X Probe). 

**Without P6010 10X Probe. Deflection factor with P6010 is 10X panel reading. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR (EACH CHANNEL) 

5 mV/div to lOV/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated continuously variable 
between steps and to ~25 V/div. Warning lights indicate 
uncalibrated settings. 



TRACE DRIFT 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


TIME 


TEMPERATURE 


5 mV/div 


less than 0.08 div/h 


less than 0.02div/°C 


lOmV/div 


less than 0.05 div/h 


less than 0.0125 div/ °C 


20mV/div 
through 
lOV/div 


less than 0.03 div/h 


less than 0.0075 div/°C 



INPUT RC 

1 megohm ±2% paralleled by 20 pF ±3%. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

OPERATING MODES 

Channel 1 only; Channel 2 only (normal or inverted); Added 
algebraically (common-mode rejection ratio at least 20:1 at 
20 MHz with 160 mV P-P of common-mode signal at 20 mV/ 
div); Alternate; Chopped at a 500 kHz (±20%) rate. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing of leading edge of triggering waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

Channel 1 Vertical Signal: >25 mV/div into 1 megohm; 
approx 50-fJ output resistance; DC to > 25 MHz (— 3 dB). 

INTERNAL TRIGGER SOURCE 

Normal (displayed signal) or Channel 1 signal only picked off 
ahead of channel switching. 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A 
0.1 ;u.s/div to 5 s/div in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Uncalibrated continuously variable between steps and to 
12.5 s/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated setting. 
Sweep length continuously variable from <4div to 11.0 
±0.5 div. 




Type R453 Oscilloscope 



TIME BASE B 

0.1 ^is/div to 0.5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Uncalibrated continuously variable between steps and to 
> 1.25 s/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated setting. 



TIME BASE A & B SWEEP ACCURACY (center 8 div) 


SWEEP RANGE 


0°C to 40°C 


-15°C to +55°C 


0.1 /is/div to 
50 ms/div 


±3% 


±4% 


0.1 s/div to 
5 s/div 


±3% 


±5% 



X10 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 10 ns/ 
div. Magnified display accurate within 1 % in addition to 
specified basic sweep accuracy. 

TIME BASE A SWEEP MODES 

Auto Trigger — sweep free runs in absence of triggering sig- 
nal; Normal Trigger; Single Sweep. Light indicates when 
sweep is triggered. 

TIME BASE B SWEEP MODES 
Time Base B Triggerable after delay time; Time Base B starts 
after delay time. 

TRIGGER 



TIME BASE A & B TRIGGER SENSITIVITY 


TRIGGER MODE 


TO 10 MHz 


AT 50 MHz 


INTERNAL 
EXTERNAL 


<0.2div deflection 
<50mV 


<1 div deflection 
<200 mV 


AC 


As above, except — 3 dB at 16 Hz 


AC LF REJECT 


As above, except — 3dB at 16 kHz 


AC HF REJECT 


As above, except — 3dB at 16 Hz and 
100 kHz 



SOURCES 

Internal, Line, External, External + 10. *-^ 

Input RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF 
(except in AC LF Reject mode). 600 volts maximum input (DC 
+ peak AC). Level adjustment through > ±2 volts in 
External, through > ±20 volts in External +• 10. 



44 



TYPE 



453 
R453 



X-Y OPERATION 

FULL-SENSITIVITY X-Y (CH 1 HORIZ, CH 2 VERT) 

5 mV/div to lOV/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 5% from 0° C to +40° C within 8% 
from — 15°C to +55°C; no variable on Ch 1. Bandwidth is 
DC to >5 MHz (—3 dB). Phase difference between amplifiers 
is <3° at 50 kHz. 

HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER (EXTERNAL INPUT) 

270mV/div ±15% in External, 2.7V/div ±20% in External 
-HO. Same bandwidth and phase difference as above. 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

4-inch rectangular tube; 6xl0div (each div = 0.8cm) dis- 
play area; P31 phosphor normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or Pll 
are optional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engi- 
neer, Representative, or Distributor for application informa- 
tion and availability. 10-kV accelerating potential. Z-axis 
input DC coupled to CRT; noticeable modulation at normal 
intensity with 5 volts or more peak to peak; DC to >50MHz 
usable frequency range; maximum input voltage, 200 volts 
(DC plus peak AC, P-P AC 200 V or less, 1 kHz or less). 



CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

DELAY TIME RANGE 
1 /is to 50 s, continuously variable with 10-turn multiplier. 

DELAY ACCURACY 



DELAY 


0°C to +40°C 


-15°C to +55°C 


1 jus/div to 
50 ms/div 


±1.5% 


±2.0% 


0.1 s/div to 
5 s/div 


±2.5% 


±3.5% 



MULTIPLIER INCREMENTAL LINEARITY 

Included in delay accuracy: ±0.2% from 0°C to +40°C, 
±0.3% from -15°C to +55°C. 

JITTER 

<1 part in 20,000 of 10X Time Base A Time/div setting. 



ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 

Operating: — 15°C to +55°C. 
Non-operating: — 55°C to +75°C. 

ALTITUDE 

Operating: 15,000 feet; maximum allowable ambient tem- 
perature decreased 1°C/1000 feet from 5,000 to 15,000 feet. 
Non-operating: 50,000 feet. 

VIBRATION 

Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three axes, 0.025 
inch peak to peak displacement (4g's at 55 c/s) 10 to 55 to 
lOc/s in 1 -minute cycles. 

SHOCK 

Operating and non-operating: 30 g's, '/j sine, 11 -ms duration, 
2 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of 12 shocks. 

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (Type 453 MOD 163D 
and R453 MOD 163D only) 

Meets interference requirements of MIL-I-6181D and MIL-I 
16910C, power line conducted: 150 kHz to 30 MHz, radi- 
ated (with mesh filter installed): 14 kHz to 1 GHz. 

HUMIDITY 
Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications 
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202C, 
Method 106B (omit freezing and vibration, and allow a post- 
test drying period at +25°C ±5°C and 20% to 80% rela- 
tive humidity). 



GRATICULE 

Internal, parallax-free; variable edge lighting. 

TRACE FINDER 

Compresses display to within graticule area, for ease in 
determining the location or relative magnitude of an off- 
screen signal. 




Small probe for easy access to dense circuitry. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE AND TIME CALIBRATOR 

1 volt or 0.1 volt output; 5-mA output. Amplitude accurate 
within 1% from 0° C to +40° C, within 1.5% from —15° C 
to +55°C 1-kHz squarewave, repetition rate accurate 
within 0.5% from 0° C to +40° C, within 1% from —15° C 
to +55°C. <l-/ts risetime; 49% to 51% duty cycle. 





Panel cover provides storage for standard accessories. 



45 



453 

TYPE --„ 

R453 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

A and B Gates: 12 volts d 
ance. 



:10%, approx 1.5-kfi output resist- 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Quick-change line-voltage selector provides 6 ranges: 90 
to 110V, 104 to 126V, 112 to 136V, 180 to 220V, 208 to 
252 V, and 224 to 272 V. 48 to 440 Hz, 92 watts maximum 
at 115V and 60 Hz. 

COOLING 

Filtered forced-air cooling. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS (Type 453) 



Height 

Width 

Depth (including panel cover) 

Depth (with extended handle) 

Net weight (without panel cover) 

Weight (with panel cover and 

accessories) 
Weight (with dust and rain cover, 

power cord, and one instruction 

manual) 
Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight ; 



VU in 
12'/ 2 in 
20% in 

22% in 
27 3 / 4 lb 

30 lb 
32 lb 



i42 lb 

;54 lb 



18.4 cm 


30.8 cm 


52.0 cm 


56.8 cm 


12.6 kg 


13.6 kg 


14.6 kg 


19.1 kg 


24.6 kg 


17.8 cm 


48.3 cm 


45.0 cm 


14.7 kg 


.28.8 kg 


,39.6 kg 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS (Type R453) 

Height 7 in 

Width 19 in 

Depth (behind front panel) 17 3 /4 in 

Net weight 32 1 /, lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~63V 2 lb 

Export-packed weight ~87 lb 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6010 3.5-ft 10X probe package (010-0188-00); 18-inch 
50-n BNC cable (012-0076-00); BNC jack post (012-0092-00); 
3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); CRT ornamental ring 
(354-0269-00); smoke-gray light filter (378-0576-00); mesh 
filter (installed) (378-0573-00); CRT face-plate protector (386- 
0218-00); oscilloscope dust and rain cover (016-0074-01); two 
BNC to binding post adapters (103-0033-00); five fuses, as- 
sorted spares; two instruction manuals (070-0755-00). Acces- 
sories for R453 are the same as for Type 453 less dust and 
rain cover, but also includes: mounting hardware; slide-out 
tracks (351-0101-00). 

TYPE 453 OSCILLOSCOPE $1950 

TYPE R453 OSCILLOSCOPE $2035 



CONVERSION KIT 

PORTABLE TO RACKMOUNT 

Includes hardware and instructions to convert existing Type 
453 Portable Oscilloscopes for rack-mount installation. 
Order 040-0446-01 $100 

TYPE 453 AND TYPE R453 MOD 163D 

Includes the features of the standard Type 453 and R453, 
and in addition meets electromagnetic interference require- 
ments of MIL-I-6181D and MIL-I-16910C; Power line conducted: 
150 kHz to 30 MHz; Radiated (with mesh filter installed): 
14 kHz to 1 GHz. 

TYPE 453 MOD 163D OSCILLOSCOPE $2050 

TYPE R453 MOD 163D OSCILLOSCOPE $2135 



TYPE 453 AND R453 MOD 127C 

An internal TV Sync Separator circuit permits stable internal 
Line or Field-rate triggering from displayed composite video or 
composite sync waveforms. External -f- 10 trigger sources are 
replaced by internal TV Sync positions providing Line (Hori- 
zontal) sync pulses to the B Sweep circuit and either Field 
(Vertical) or Line sync pulses to the A Sweep circuit. 

Individual line selection of VIT (vertical interval test) signals 
is facilitated by the sweep delay features in the Type 453. The 
wide range of sweep delays permit accurate alternate-frame 
color-burst observations in the PAL color system. 

Conventional waveform displays and measurements can be 
made from standard broadcast or closed-circuit TV systems, 
domestic or overseas, with up to 1201 -line, 60-Hz field rates. 
A parallax-free, 6x10 div, edge-lighted graticule is standard. 
Two additional snap-in TV graticules are supplied for viewing 
convenience but may not be edge lighted. Other character- 
istics are the same as Type 453 and R453. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Same as Type 453 except as follows: delete two P6010 3.5 
ft 10X probe packages (010-0188-00), add two P6010 6 ft 
probe packages (010-0185-00), two 6-32 adapters (103-0051- 
00), two spring phone tip adapters (206-0060-00), snap-in light 
filter/TV graticule (NTSC) 378-0576-04, snap-in light filter/TV 
graticule (CCIR) 378-0576-05. 

TYPE 453 MOD 1 27C $2035 

TYPE R453 MOD 127C $2120 




NTSC color bar test signal displayed on the Type 453 MOD 
727C. 




Multiburst test signal displayed on the Type 453 MOD 127C. 



46 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories serve to extend the usefulness of the 
Type 453 in certain applications. This list covers only the 
more commonly used items. The standard probes (10X) sup- 
plied with the instrument satisfy most measurement require- 
ments. In addition to the listed optional probes, other probes 
are available for current and high-voltage measurements. See 
catalog accessory pages. 

COLLAPSIBLE VIEWING HOOD 

Permits viewing of trace under high ambient-light conditions. 
Order 01 6-0083-00 $8.00 




TYPE 



453 
R453 



PROBES 

P6010 6 ft 1 OX Probe Package, order 010-0185-00 . 
P6011 3.5 ft IX Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 



$37.00 
$19.00 




The Type 453 with the Tektronix C-30A. 

C-30A COMPACT CAMERA 

f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1, Polaroid 

Land* Pack-Film back for 3000-speed film, 

order C-30A-P $450 



SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Type 200-1 occupies less 
storage space at base . . . 



than 18 inches aisle space, has 
$85.00 



*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer fo Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



47 



TYPE 



454 
R454 



DC-to-150 MHz PORTABLE 
SWEEP-DELAY OSCILLOSCOPES 




• 2.4 -ns RISETIME WITH OR WITHOUT PROBE 

• HIGH-WRITING-SPEED CRT 

• DUAL-TRACE, 5-mV/DIV DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• FULL-SENSITIVITY X-Y DISPLAYS 

• COMPACT, RUGGED CONSTRUCTION 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Type 454 offers convenient measurement of fast-rise 
pulses and high-frequency signals previously beyond the capa- 
bility of most conventional real-time oscilloscopes. Risetime 
is 2.4 ns, bandwidth is 150 MHz, with or without probe. 

The two channels of the Type 454 provide cascaded single- 
trace displays at 1 mV/div, and also provide X-Y displays to 
5 mV/div. The dual-trace vertical system displays either chan- 
nel separately, adds channels algebraically, alternates between 
channels, or chops between channels at a 1-MHz rate. 

A time-base system with calibrated sweep delay permits 
highly-magnified displays of small portions of undelayed 
sweeps, accurate measurement of waveform time jitter, pre- 
cise time measurements, and many other measurement uses. 

The Type 454 is mechanically designed to withstand environ- 
mental extremes and rough handling in transit. Plug-in tran- 
sistors provide ease of maintenance. 

Type R454 (the rackmount model) is electrically identical 
to Type 454, but is mechanically designed to mount on tilting 
slide-out tracks in a standard 19-in rack. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

(2 identical channels) 

BANDWIDTH & RISETIME 

lOV/div to 20mV/div: DC to 150 MHz, 2.4 ns 

lOmV/div: DC to 100 MHz, 3.5 ns 

5mV/div: DC to 60 MHz, 5.9 ns 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTORS— 5 mV/div to lOV/div, 

11 steps; 50mV/div to lOOV/div with P6047 Probe. 
INPUT RC— 1 megohm paralleled by 20 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE — 0.05/xs/div to 5s/div, 25 steps. 

TRIGGERING— DC to 150 MHz. 

XI MAGNIFIER — Operates over full time base, increases 

fastest rate to 5 ns/div. 
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 1 /xs to 50s. 
X-Y OPERATION— 5 mV/div to lOV/div, DC to 2 MHz. 

CRT 
DISPLAY AREA— 6 x 10 div (0.8 cm/div), internal graticule. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 4 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31 . 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE AND TIME CALIBRATOR— 1 V, 5 mA; 1 kHz. 
PROBE POWER— 2 connectors for P6045 FET Probe power. 
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 V and 180 to 272 V in 

six ranges; range selection via quick-change switching device. 

48 to 440 Hz, approx 125 watts. 



48 



TYPE 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM 





(2 identical 


channels) 




BANDWIDTH* AND RISETIME 

(0°C to +40°C) 


FROM 50-fi TERMINATED SOURCE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR** 


with or without 
P6047 PROBE 


WITH P6045 
FET PROBE 


WITH P6048 
10X PROBE 


lOV/div to 
20 mV/div 


150 MHz and 
2.4 ns 


130 MHz and 
2.7 ns 


100 MHz and 
3.5 ns 


lOmV/div 


100 MHz and 
3.5 ns 


95 MHz and 
3.7 ns 


75 MHz and 
4.7 ns 


5 mV/div 


60 MHz and 
5.9 ns 


58 MHz and 
6 ns 


45 MHz and 
7.8 ns 


1 mV/div 
Ch 1 & 2 
Cascaded 


33 MHz and 
11 ns 


33 MHz and 
11 ns 


30 MHz and 
12 ns 



*Measured at 3-dB down. Lower 3-dB point, AC coupled is less than 10 Hz 

(less than 1 Hz with P6047 10X Probe). 

♦♦Oscilloscope only. Deflection factor with P6047 or P6048 Probe is 10X panel 

reading. 

PROBE DATA— P6047 10X Passive Probe (supplied with Type 
454): 10X attenuation, 10 megohms input resistance, and 10 
pF input capacitance. P6045 IX FET Active Probe (extra-cost 
option): IX attenuation, 10 megohms input resistance, and 
less than 5.5 pF input capacitance. P6048 10X Passive Probe 
(extra-cost option): 10X attenuation, 1 kQ input resistance, and 
1 pF input capacitance. See catalog accessory page for ad- 
ditional data. 

PROBE POWER 

Two connectors provide correct operating voltages for two 
P6045 FET Probes. 

TRACE FINDER— 5-MHz BANDWIDTH SWITCH 

Down position compresses display to within graticule area 
for convenient trace location. Up position limits bandwidth 
of main vertical amplifier to between 4 and 6 MHz for noise 
and interference reduction at higher sensitivities. Center 
position provides normal operation. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR (2 identical channels) 
5mV/div to lOV/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within ± 3%. Continuously variable (uncalibrated) 
between steps and to approx 25 V/div. Warning lights indi- 
cate uncalibrated settings. 



ABERRATIONS 

(Measured from a 50-12 terminated source) 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


Aberrations occuring during the 50 ns fol- 
lowing the 50% amplitude point on a 
positive-going (noninverted) step, without 
probe, after a 20-minute warm-up at 20° C 
to 30° C ambient temperature. 


lOOmV/div 


+7% or less, —7% or less, total 7% or 
less P-P. 


50 and 20 mV/div 


+5% or less, —5% or less, total 5% or 
less P-P. 


lOmV/div 


+6% or less, —6% or less, total 6% or 
less P-P. 


5 mV/div 


+7% or less, —7% or less, total 7% or 
less P-P. 



INPUT RC 

1 megohm ± 2%, paralleled by 20 pF ± 1 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V (DC + peak AC), 600 V (P-P AC) at 1 kHz or less. 



454 
R454 




OPERATING MODES 

Channel 1 only; Channel 2 only (normal or inverted); Added 
algebraically (common-mode rejection ratio at least 10:1 at 
50 MHz with 400 mV P-P of common-mode signal at 50 mV/ 
div); Alternate; Chopped at 1 MHz (± 20%). 

TIME DELAY BETWEEN CHANNELS 

0.25 ns or less. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of triggering waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

Channel 1 vertical output: > 25 mV per division of Chan- 
nel 1 display (into 1 megohm); approx 30-Q output resistance; 
DC to > 33 MHz (3-dB down). 

INTERNAL TRIGGER SOURCE 

Normal (displayed signal) or Ch 1 signal only picked off 
ahead of channel switching. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM 

TIME BASE A 
0.05/ts/div to 5s/div in 25 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Continuously variable (uncalibrated) between steps and to 
approx 12.5 s/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated set- 
ting. Sweep length continuously variable from < 4 div to 
11.0 div ± 0.5 div. 

TIME BASE B 

0.05/xs/div to 0.5 s/div in 22 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Continuously variable (uncalibrated) between steps and to 
approx 1.25 s/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated set- 
ting. 

XI MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 5 ns/ 
div. 



TIME BASE A & B SWEEP ACCURACY (center 8 div) 


SWEEP TIME/DIV 


0°C to +40°C 


-15°C to +55°C 


Normal Magnified 


Normal Maqnified 


0.05 ms 


±3% ±4% 


±4% ±6% 


0.1 ixs to 0.5 s 


±4% ±5% 


1 s to 5 s 


±5% ±6% 



HORIZONTAL-DISPLAY MODES 
Time Base A only, A Intensified During B, B (delayed sweep), 
and X-Y (switches Channel 1 to drive X axis). 

TIME BASE A SWEEP MODES 

Repetitive sweep with automatic triggering, repetitive sweep 
with normal triggering, or single sweep for photographic 
recording. Light indicates when sweep is triggered. 

TIME BASE B SWEEP MODES 

Time Base B triggerable after delay time, or Time Base B 
runs automatically at end of delay time. 



49 



TYPE 



454 
R454 



X-Y OPERATION 



FULL-SENSITIVITY X-Y (CH 1 HORIZ, CH 2 VERT) 

5mV/div to lOV/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within ±3%; no variable on Ch 1. X bandwidth 
is DC to > 2 MHz (3-dB down). Phase difference between 
amplifiers is < 3° from DC to 2 MHz. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

DELAY TIME RANGE 
1 jus to 50 s, continuously variable with 10-turn, calibrated 
multiplier. 

JITTER 

< 1 part in 20,000 of maximum delay. 



DELAY ACCURACY 


TIME/DIV SETTING 


0°C to +40°C 


-15°C to +55°C 


1 /xs/div to 50 ms/div 


±1.5% 


±2% 


O.ls/div to 5s/div 


±2.5% 


±3.5% 


Multiplier Incremental 
Linearity 


±0.2% 


±0.3% 



TRIGGERING 

MODES 

Automatic or Normal on Time Base A. Automatic operation 
useful between 20 Hz and 150 MHz, minimizes trigger ad- 
justments for signals of different amplitudes, shapes and 
repetition rates. With no input (or input less than 20 Hz), 
the automatic triggering free runs the sweep and provides 
a bright reference trace at all sweep rates. Normal trigger- 
ing only on Time Base B. With sweep delay, Time Base B 
can be set to run at end of delay period, or to be trigger- 
able at end of delay period. 

JITTER 

1 ns or less at 150 MHz. 

SIGNAL REQUIREMENTS, TIME BASE A & B 

INTERNAL 



TRIOOER COUPLING MODES 



iooo AC LOW- FREQUENCY REJECT 
■ --AC HIGH- FREQUENCY REJECT 



TYPICAL 3-dB-down POINTS 
VERIFICATION POINTS 



%*-■»-■-■ 



E$fejA 



fc^ ySG883S < 




DC 10 16 60 

Hz Hz Hi 

FREQUENCY 



100 mV -- 




COUPLING, TIME BASE A & B 
AC, DC, AC Low-Frequency Reject, or AC High-Frequency 
Reject. 

SOURCES, TIME BASE A & B 

Internal, External, External -f- 10, or Line. 500-V maximum 
input (DC + peak AC). Level adjustment through at least 
± 2 volts in External, through at least ± 20 volts in External 
H- 10. 

CONVENIENT SWITCH LOGIC 

Trigger switches are arranged with the up position provid- 
ing the most commonly used set of trigger functions: Auto- 
matic mode, + slope, AC coupling and Internal source. 

ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 

(Oscilloscope and P6047 Probe) 



AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 

Operating: -15°C to +55°C. 
+75°C. 



Nonoperating: — 55°C to 



ALTITUDE 

Operating: To 15,000 feet; maximum allowable ambient 
temperature decreased by 1 "C/1000 feet from 5,000 to 15,000 
feet. Nonoperating: to 50,000 feet. 

VIBRATION 

Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three axes, 0.025 
inch peak-to-peak displacement (4 g's at 55 c/s) 10 to 55 to 
lOc/s in 1-minute cycles. 

SHOCK 

Operating and nonoperating.- 30 g's, Y 2 sine, 11-ms dura- 
tion, 2 shocks per axis in each direction for a total of 12 
shocks. 

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (Type 454 MOD 163D 
and R454 MOD 163D only) 

Meets interference requirements of MIL-I-6181D and MIL-I- 
16910C, power line conducted: 150 kHz to 30 MHz, radiated 
(with mesh filter installed): 14 kHz to 1 GHz. 

HUMIDITY 

Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications 
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202C, 
Method 106B (omit freezing and vibration, and allow a post- 
test drying period at +25 °C ±5°C and 20% to 80% rela- 
tive humidity). 



DC 10 16 60 

Hi m Hi 

FREQUENCY 



PHOTOGRAPHIC WRITING SPEED 

(without Film Fogging Techniques) 


Camera and Phosphor 


Minimum 

Photographic 

Writing 

Speed 


Camera 


Lens 


Object- 
to-image 
ratio 


Polaroid* 
film type 


CRT 
Phosphor 


C-31-R 


fl.2 


1:0.5 


410 

(10,000 

ASA) 


P31 


1600 div/Vs 
(1280cm//«) 


Pll 


3200 div//xs 
(2560 cm//is) 


C-30A 


fl.9 


1:0.7 


107 
(3,000 
ASA) 


P31 


182 div//xs 
(146cm/ju,s 



*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 



50 



TYPE 



454 
R454 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

4-in rectangular tube; 6 x 10 div display area, each div 
is 0.8 cm, horizontal and vertical centerlines further marked 
in 0.2-div increments. P31 phosphor normally supplied; PI, 
P2, P7, or P11 are optional without extra charge. Consult your 
Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for application 
information and availability. 14-kV accelerating potential. 
Z-axis input DC coupled to CRT cathode; noticeable modula- 
tion at normal intensity with 5-V or more peak-to-peak signal- 
DC to 50 MHz usable frequency range; maximum input volt- 
age 200 V (DC plus peak AC), P-P AC 200 V or less, 1 kHz or 
less. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, no parallax; variable edge lighting. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE AND TIME CALIBRATOR 

1 V and 5 mA at external jacks; accurate within 1 % from 
0°C to +40°C, and within 1.5% from — 15°C to +55°C. 
1-kHz repetition rate accurate within 0.5% from 0°C to 
-f40°C, and within 1% from — 15°C to +55°C. Risetime 
< 1 /xs, duty cycle 49% to 51%, output resistance 250 Q 
± 1%. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Positive gates from both time bases (12.6 V ± 10%), and a 
positive-going sawtooth from Time Base A (10 V ± 10%). 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Quick-change line-voltage selector provides six ranges: 90 
to 110 V, 104 to 126V, 112 to 136V, 180 to 220V, 208 to 
252 V, and 224 to 272 V. 48 to 440 Hz, 125 watts maximum 
at 115 V and 60 Hz. 

COOLING 

Filtered, forced-air ventilation. 

TYPE 454 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


7'/ 4 in 


18.4 cm 


Width 


12V 2 in 


30.8 cm 


Depth (incl. panel cover) 


20V 2 in 


52 cm 


Depth (handle extended) 


22% in 


56.8 cm 


Net weight (w/o panel cover) 


29V 4 lb 


12.7 kg 


Net weight (with panel cover 


31 y 4 lb 


13.6 kg 


and accessories) 






Domestic shipping weight 


=43 lb 


=18.7 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=57 lb 


1=24.8 kg 


rPE R454 DIMENSIONS AND 


WEIGHTS 




Height 


7 in 


17.8 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Depth (behind front panel) 


17% in 


45 cm 


Net weight 


33V 2 lb 


14.5 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=65 lb 


=28.2 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=86 lb 


=37.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two P6047 Probes with accessories (010-0211-00); 50-fi 18-inch 
BNC cable (012-0076-00); BNC jack post (012-0092-00); 3 
to 2-wire power-cord adapter (103-0013-00); CRT ornamental 
ring (354-0269-00); light filter, smoke-gray (378-0576-00); mesh 
filter (installed) 378-0573-00; CRT faceplate protector (386- 
0218-00); two BNC binding-post adapters (103-0033-00); dust 
and rain cover (016-0074-01); two instruction manuals (070- 
0617-00); four fuses, assorted spares. 

TYPE 454 OSCILLOSCOPE $2700 

TYPE R454 OSCILLOSCOPE $2785 




Panel cover provides storage for standard accessories. 

CONVERSION KIT 

PORTABLE TO RACKMOUNT 

Includes hardware and instructions to convert existing Type 
454 Portable Oscilloscope for rackmount installation. 

Order 040-0446-01 $100 

TYPE 454 AND R454 MOD 163D 

Includes the features of the standard Type 454 and R454, 
and in addition meets electromagnetic interference require- 
ments of MIL-1-6181D and MIL-1-16910C; Power line con- 
ducted: 150 kHz to 30 MHz; Radiated (with mesh filter in- 
stalled): 14 kHz to 1 GHz. 

TYPE 454 MOD 163D OSCILLOSCOPE $2800 

TYPE R454 MOD 163D OSCILLOSCOPE $2885 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard probes supplied 
with the instrument satisfy most measurement requirements; 
optional probes, including high-voltage and current-measuring 
probes, may be better suited for particular applications. See 
catalog accessory pages. 




The Type 454 with the Tektronix C-31-R. 

C-31-R HIGH-SPEED CAMERA 

f/1.2, 1:0.5 lens with Roll-Film back for 10,000 or 3000-speed 

film, order C-31-R $550 

C-30A COMPACT CAMERA 
f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1, 
Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back for 3000-speed film, order 
C-30A-P $450 

PROBES 

P6048 10X Probe Package, order 010-0215-00 $ 55 

P6045 IX FET Probe Package, order 010-0204-00 $295 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
200-1 is small and compact for easy maneuvering .... $ 85 

'Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



51 



TYPE 



491 
R491 



10 MHz-to-40 GHz 
SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 




• COMPACT, LIGHT WEIGHT 

• INTERNAL PHASE LOCK 

• CALIBRATED DISPERSION TO 1 00 MHz 

• COUPLED RESOLUTION 

• WIDE-RANGE TIME BASE 

• LOW POWER CONSUMPTION 

• ENVIRONMENT AUZED 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Type 491 is a precision, wide-band spectrum analyzer 
designed for rugged environmental conditions and easy mobil- 
ity. It is an easy-to-carry package weighing less than 40 
pounds complete with accessories. The Type R491 is electrical- 
ly identical, requires only 7 inches of rack height. 

Operation is simple. Resolution and calibrated dispersion 
controls are coupled, providing narrow resolution bandwidth 
at narrow dispersion and wide resolution bandwidth at wide 
dispersion. Since dispersion is calibrated, frequency differences 
can be read directly from the CRT. Internal phase lock pro- 
vides stable displays even at 1 kHz/div dispersion. 

Both Type 491 and R491 are completely self contained, have 
oscilloscope-type time base and trigger circuits, 8xl0-div CRT 
with P7 phosphor and internal graticule. They operate over a 
wide range of AC voltages, require only 55 W, maximum. 



BAND 


FREQUENCY 
RANGE 


MINIMUM CW SENSITIVITY* 


1-kHz 
RESOLUTION 


100-kHz 
RESOLUTION 


1 


10 MHz to 
275 MHz 


> -100 dBm 


> -80 dBm 


2 


275 MHz to 
900 MHz 


>— HOdBm 


> -90 dBm 


3 


800 MHz to 
2000 MHz 


> -105 dBm 


> -85 dBm 


4 


1.5 GHz to 
4.0 GHz 


> — HOdBm 


> -90 dBm 


5 


3.8 GHz to 
8.2 GHz 


> -100 dBm 


> -80 dBm 


6 


8.2 GHz to 
12.4 GHz 


> -95 dBm 


> -75 dBm 


7 


12.4 GHz to 
18.0 GHz 


> -90 dBm 


> -70 dBm 


8 


18.0 GHz to 
40 GHz 


> —80 dBm to 

26.5 GHz 

> —70 dBm to 

40 GHz 


> —60 dBm 

> -50 dBm 



*Signal + noise = 2 X noise 



o 



52 



TYPE 



491 
R491 



DIAL ACCURACY 

± (2 MHz + 1 % of dial reading). 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

1 kHz/div to lOMHz/div in 1-2-5 sequence, 2 ranges (kHz/ 
div — MHz/div). Accuracy throughout full range of RF-center 
frequency control, within ±3% except at 2 MHz/div (±5%) 
and 1 MHz/div (±7%). Accuracy can be increased using 
internal 1-MHz crystal markers for calibration. Dispersion 
linearity within ±3%. Zero dispersion useful for PRF meas- 
urements. 

COUPLED RESOLUTION 

1 kHz to 100 kHz, coupled with calibrated dispersion posi- 
tions but separately switchable. 

DISPLAY FLATNESS 

Maximum amplitude variation over 100-MHz dispersions up to 
12.4 GHz is 3-dB or less, except over 50-MHz dispersion in 
Band 1. Above 12.4 GHz the maximum amplitude variation 
(100-MHz dispersion) is 6-dB or less. 

INCIDENTAL FM 
Less than 300 Hz at fundamental, with Phase Lock. 

FREQUENCY STABILITY 

kHz/div dispersion range — ±10 kHz throughout line voltage 
range after 1 minute; ±5kHz/°C. MHz/div dispersion 
range — ±200 kHz throughout line voltage range after 1 
minute; ±20kHz/°C. 

PHASE LOCK 

Internal 1-MHz reference. External input accepts 1-MHz to 
5-MHz signals from 1 V to 5 V peak to peak. 

INPUT IMPEDANCE 

Approx 50 fl for coaxial inputs. 

MAXIMUM INPUT POWER 

— 30dBm for linear operation, +15dBm (25 mW) safe diode 
power limit. 

IF ATTENUATOR 

51 dB in 1-dB steps, ±0.1 dB/dB. 

IF GAIN CONTROL 
>50-dB range. 

IF CENTER FREQUENCY 

±25-MHz adjustment of center frequency from 5 MHz/div 
to 0.2 MHz/div dispersion positions, ±10-MHz adjustment at 
10 MHz/div, ±2.5-MHz adjustment from 500 kHz/div to 
1 kHz/div dispersion positions. 

VERTICAL DISPLAY (8 DIVISIONS) 
Log — >40-dB dynamic range. 
Linear — >26-dB dynamic range. 
Square Law — >13-dB dynamic range. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

INTERNAL SAWTOOTH GENERATOR 

lOjus/div to 0.5s/div in 15 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Uncalibrated continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 1 .25 s/div. 

TRIGGER SOURCE 

Internal, external, or line. 100-V maximum external input 
(DC + peak AC). 

TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-div deflection or 0.2-V external from 20 Hz to 100 kHz. 




CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

8xl0-div display area (each div = 0.8cm); P7 phosphor. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, no parallax, variable edge lighting. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Intensity, focus and astigmatism controls. Intensifier adjusts 
relative brightness of signal and baseline for convenient view- 
ing and photography. 




Qualify of photographs is greatly enhanced 
when relative brightness of signal and baseline 
can be controlled, as in upper waveform. Lower 
waveform taken under same conditions shows 
normal results of slow sweep time/div settings. 
Improvement is even more pronounced in some 
applications. Waveforms photographed with 
C-30A Camera. 




53 



TYPE 



491 
R491 




ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE 

Meets specifications of MIL-I-6I8ID over the following fre- 
quency ranges: Radiated (with CRT mesh filter installed) 
— 150 kHz to I GHz; conducted (power line) — 150 kHz to 
25 MHz. 

TEMPERATURE 

Operating: —15° C to +55° C. 
Non-operating: —55° C to +75° C. 

ALTITUDE 

Operating: 15,000 feet. 
Non-operating: 50,000 feet. 

HUMIDITY 

Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications 
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202C, 
Method 106B (omit freezing and vibration, and allow a 24- 
hour post-test drying period at +25° C and 20% to 80% 
relative humidity). 

VIBRATION 

Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three axes, 0.025 
inch peak to peak displacement (4g's at 55 c/s) 10 to 55 to 
lOc/s in 1-minute cycles. 

SHOCK 

Operating and non-operating: 30g's, V 2 sine, 11 -ms duration, 
1 shock per axis. 




OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz ; 55 watts 
maximum. Rear panel selector provides rapid accommoda- 
tion for six line-voltage ranges. 

REAR PANEL CONNECTORS 

BNC connectors for external trigger input, sawtooth output 
(70 to 90 mV P to P) and recorder output (>4mV/div of dis- 
played signal in LIN mode, DC-coupled, approx 600-fi source 
resistance). 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 
Width 

Depth (incl. panel cover) 
Depth (with handle extended) 
Net weight (w/o panel cover) 
Weight (with panel cover and 

accessories) 
Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND 
Height 
Width 
Rack depth 
Net weight 
Domestic shipping weight 

RACKMOUNTING 
Type R491 withdraws from rack on slide-out tracks, tilts for 
convenience. Further mounting information on catalog 
instrument dimension page. 



7Vu 


in 


18.2 cm 


12 7 /, l6 


in 


31.6 cm 


19"/ u 


in 


50.0 cm 


21 '/u 


in 


54.7 cm 


30 lb 




13.6 kg 


38 lb 




17.3 kg 


50 lb 




:=22.7 kg 


62 lb 




^28.2 kg 


WEIG 
7 in 


HIS 


17.8 cm 


19 in 




48.3 cm 


17'/ 2 in 


44.4 cm 


41 lb 




18.6 kg 


72 lb 




:=32.7 kg 



54 






TYPE 



491 
R491 




ACCESSORY STORAGE 

Included panel cover for Type 491 and drawer for Type R491 
hold all standard accessories except manuals and dust and 
rain cover. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

6 ft BNC cable, 50 €1 miniature coax (012-0113-00); 6 ft N 
cable, RG 223/U coax (012-0114-00); 2 ft TNC cable, RG 
223/ U coax (012-0115-00); wave guide mixer, 12.4 to 18 GHz 
(119-0097-00); wave guide mixer, 18 to 26.5 GHz (119-0098-00); 
wave guide mixer, 26.5 to 40 GHz (119-0099-00); 10-dB atten- 
uator, Type N fittings (011-0085-00); 20-dB attenuator, Type 
N fittings (011-0086-00); 40-dB attenuator, Type N fittings (011- 
0087-00); two BNC male to N female adapters (103-0058-00); 
two BNC female to N male adapters (103-0045-00); wave 
guide mixer adapter (119-0104-00); power cord (161-0024-01); 
oscilloscope dust and rain cover (016-0074-01); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); blue light filter (378-0558-00); amber 
light filter (378-0559-00); clear CRT protector plate (386-0118- 
00); ornamental ring (354-0248-00); mesh filter, installed (378- 
0571-00); two one-ampere fuses (159-0022-00); y 2 -ampere fuse 
(159-0025-00); front cover (200-0633-03); two instruction man- 
uals (070-0598-00). Type R491 includes all above accessories 
except the panel and oscilloscope cover, also includes moun- 
ting tracks and hardware. 

TYPE 491 SPECTRUM ANALYZER $4500 

TYPE R491 SPECTRUM ANALYZER $4600 



CONVERSION KITS 

PORTABLE TO RACK-MODEL 

Kit includes hardware and instructions to convert Type 491 

Analyzers for rack installations. 

Order 040-0444-00 $125 

RACK MODEL TO PORTABLE 

Kit includes cabinet, panel cover, oscillsocope cover, and 

instructions to convert Type R491 Analyzers for portable 

operation. 

Order 040-0445-00 $75 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories provide added convenience to the 
Type 491 and R491. Cameras, Scope-Mobile® Carts and other 
major accessories are completely described in the catalog 
accessory pages. 

COLLAPSIBLE VIEWING HOOD 

Permits viewing of trace under high ambient-light conditions, 
order 016-0082-00 $8.00 




C-30A CAMERA 
f/1.9 lens; magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1; Polaroid 
Land* Pack-Film back, order C-30A-P $450 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 




Model 200-1: friction locks hold Type 491 at 0° to 60° angle. 
Cart occupies <18 in of aisle space, goes up and down 
stairs easily, has storage space in base, order 200-1 . . $85.00 

PANEL COVER 

Included as a part of Type 491, protects front panel and 
holds standard accessories. Available separately for use with 
Type R491 , order 200-0633-03 $20.00 

BNC THRU-PANEL ADAPTER 

Mounts in pre-punched holes in Type R491 panel, BNC con- 
nector on both sides, order 103-0070-00 $2.25 

BNC CABLE 

Used in conjunction with above adapter, provides access to 
rear-panel connectors on Type R491. BNC-to-BNC 30-in 
cable, order 012-0117-00 $6.00 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

55 



TYPE 



502A 
RM502A 



100 iiV/cm DUAL-BEAM OSCILLOSCOPES 




• 2 IDENTICAL VERTICAL AMPLIFIERS 

• COMMON HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

• DIFFERENTIAL INPUT AT ALL DEFLECTION 
FACTORS 

• X-Y CURVE TRACING WITH I OR 2 BEAMS 

• SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION 

• BEAM FINDERS 



A wide range of measurement capabilities make the Type 
502A and RM502A useful in a variety of applications including 
education, biology, defense, and production control. Differ- 
ential or single-ended inputs can be used for dual-beam or 
single-beam X-Y displays as well as dual-beam or single-beam 
time-based displays. With one of the vertical amplifiers switched 
to provide horizontal deflection, full sensitivity is available for 
both axes. Phase shift is less than 1 degree from DC to 100 
kHz. With the external horizontal amplifier switched to provide 
horizontal deflection, dual-beam X-Y plots can be displayed at 
full vertical sensitivity, and at 0.1 V/cm to 2 V/cm horizontally. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 100 kHz at lOOjuV/cm, increasing to DC 
to 1 MHz from 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 100 juV/cm to 20 V/cm. 

INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION— At least 50,000:1 (DC to 50 
kHz). 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 1 /xs/cm to 5s/cm. 
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, XI 0, X20. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 and 2 V/cm. 

CRT 
DISPLAY AREA— 8 x 10 cm (each beam). 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 2.9 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.5 mV to 50 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 50 

to 60 Hz; 290 watts. 



56 



TYPE 



502A 
RM502A 



APPLICATIONS 

Here are just a few of the many possible uses for this 
versatile oscilloscope: 

7. Compare and measure the waveforms at two points in a 
circuit simultaneously. 

2. Display X-Y curves with one or both beams in a variety 
of applications. 

3. Plot one transducer output against another — pressure 
against volume or temperature, for instance. 

4. Use the differential-input feature for cancellation of com- 
mon-mode signals, and to eliminate the need for a com- 
mon terminal, in both single and dual displays. 

5. Measure phase angles and frequency differences. 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

Two identical systems 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to >100kHz (3-db down) at 100/xV/cm, increasing to 
DC to >1 MHz (3-db down) from 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm. Low- 
frequency 3-dB-down point is <2 Hz with AC coupling, 
<0.2Hz with included 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

100/xV/cm to 20 V/cm in 17 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 2% (3% at 100/xV/cm). Uncalibrated, con- 
tinuously variable between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE (DC to 1 MHz) 
50 V (combined DC + peak AC) from 100 ii V/cm to 0.2 
V/cm. 350 V (combined DC + peak AC) from 0.5 V/cm to 
20 V/cm. 

COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE 
100/xV/cm to 0.2 V/cm — ±15 V. 
0.5 V/cm to 20 V/cm — ±350 V. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

DC Coupled 
100 fiV to 2mV/cm: >50,000:1 from DC to 50 kHz,- ±5-V 
signal. 

5mV to 200mV/cm: <y 2 -mm deflection from DC to 50 
kHz; ±5-V signal. 

500 mV to 20 V/cm: Adjustable to >500:1 from 1 kHz to 
50 kHz; adjustable to >5,000 : 1 from DC to 1 kHz; ±50-V 
signal. 

AC Coupled 
2,000:1 (60 Hz). 

DC DRIFT 

Typically <400/xV/hour averaged over 10 hours, tempera- 
ture and line voltage constant. <300 /xV with line variation 
from 105 to 125 V AC. 

DIRECT-COUPLED SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

CF outputs for each amplifier at rear panel. Approx 2 V for 
each centimeter of displayed signal. 




HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

Common to both beams 

TIME BASE 

1 /ts/cm to 5s/cm in 21 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12.5 s/cm. Warning light in- 
dicates uncalibrated setting. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER 

X2, X5, XI 0, or X20 magnification; magnified time base accu- 
rate within 5%. 

DISPLAY MODES 

Normal or single sweep. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

0.1 V/cm to 2 V/cm in 5 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accuracy within ±5%, DC to 100 kHz. 20 V maximum (DC 
+ peak AC). Input RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by 
approx 70 pF. 

X-Y OPERATION 

SINGLE-BEAM CURVE TRACING 

100/xV/cm to 20 V/cm calibrated deflection factor in each 
axis, differential or single-ended input. Panel light indicates 
upper beam amplifier switched to provide horizontal deflec- 
tion. X-Y phase difference between amplifiers is < 1 ° from 
DC to 100 kHz, measured at 100 //.V/cm. 

DUAL-BEAM CURVE TRACING 

100/xV/cm to 20 V/cm calibrated vertical deflection factor, 
separately selectable for upper and lower beams, differen- 
tial or single-ended input; 0.1 V/cm to 2 V/cm calibrated 
horizontal deflection factor using external horizontal input 
common to both beams. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic or manual level selection, free run (recurrent). Auto- 
matic operation minimizes trigger adjustment for signals of 
different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. With no 
input, automatic triggering occurs at an approx 50-Hz rate, 
providing a convenient reference trace. 

57 



TYPE 



502A 
RM502A 



COUPLING 

AC or DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal from either amplifier, external, or line. Input R approx 
1 megohm. 

REQUIREMENTS 

INTERNAL 
DC: 2 mm, DC to 200 kHz, increasing to 1 cm at 1 MHz. 
AC: 2 mm, 50 Hz to 200 kHz, increasing to 1 cm at 1 MHz. 

EXTERNAL 

DC: 0.5 V to 10 V, DC to 200 kHz, increasing to 2 V to 10 V 

at 1 MHz. 
AC: 0.5 V to 10 V, 50 Hz to 200 kHz, increasing to 2 V to 
10 V at 1 MHz. 

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES 

TEKTRONIX DUAL-BEAM CRT 

8xl0-cm display per beam. Separate vertical-deflection 
plates; common horizontal deflection plates. 2.9-kV acceler- 
ating potential. P2 phosphor normally supplied; PI, P7, Pll 
or P31 are optional without extra charge. Consult your Field 
Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for application infor- 
mation and availability. Z-axis input requires ±25 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. lOxlO-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal centerlines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Pushbutton beam finder for each beam, separate focus for 
each beam, common intensity, intensity balance. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.5 mV to 50 V in 6 calibrated decade steps, accurate with- 
in 3%. 1-kHz ±30% repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENT 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117-V nominal). Transformer taps 
permit operation at nominal voltages of 110, 117, 124, 220, 
234 and 248 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz. Power consumption 290-W 
maximum. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 15 7 / 8 in 

Width 11 3 /s in 

Depth 23 7 / 8 in 

Net weight 50V 4 lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~62 lb ' 

Export-packed weight ~84 lb ? 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 12V 4 in 

Width 19 in 

Rack depth 22 3 / 4 in 

Net weight 58 lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 97 lb J 

Export-packed weight ~117 lb J 

Type RM502A can be withdrawn from rack on 
tracks, tilted and locked in 4 positions. 



40.3 cm 
28.9 cm 

60.7 cm 

22.8 kg 
;28.2 kg 
-38.2 kg 

31.1 cm 

48.3 cm 
57.8 cm 

26.4 kg 
r:44.1 kg 
=53.2 kg 

slide-out 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6006 10X probes (010-0125-00), banana-to-banana cable 
(012-0031-00), two binding-post adapters (013-0004-00), 3 to 
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00), 3-conductor power cord (161- 
0010-03), smoke-gray light filter (378-0567-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0382-02). Type RM502A includes in addition one 
pair mounting tracks (351-0085-00), and mounting hardware. 

TYPE 502A OSCILLOSCOPE $1150 

TYPE RM502A OSCILLOSCOPE $1250 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard 10X probes sup- 
plied with the oscilloscope, and the listed optional probes 
satisfy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-1: storage drawer and 9-position tilt-lock oscillo- 
scope tray, order 202-1 $1 30 

Order tray adapter 040-0365-00 $2.75 

CAMERAS 
C-27-547: f/1.9— 1:0.7 lens, Polaroid Land 1 Pack-Film back 
provides lOxlO-cm coverage on 3V4x4y 2 film. 
Order C-27-547 $450 

C-27G: f/1.9— 1:0.85 lens, no back, provides lOxlO-cm cov- 
erage on 4x5 film with optional Graflok 2 back and Polaroid 
Land film holder $350 

Graflok back for 4x5 film holder (not included). 

Order 122-0604-00 $45 

Type 502A to C-27-547 or C-27G Camera adapter, order 
016-0225-02 $15 

PROBES 

P6023 10X Probe: for more-accurate differential measure- 
ments, order 01 0-0065-00 %^7 

P6027 1 X Probe, order 01 0-0070-00 $15 

1 Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 
* Registered Trademark Graflex, Inc. 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



o 



sa 



TYPE 



503 



RM503 

DC-to-450 kHz X-Y OSCILLOSCOPE 




• IDENTICAL VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL 
AMPLIFIERS 

• DIFFERENTIAL INPUT 

AT ALL DEFLECTION FACTORS 

• ELECTRONICALLY. REGULATED DC SUPPLIES 

• COMPACT CABINET OR RACK MODELS 



The Type 503 and RM503 provide accurate measurements and 
signal-handling versatility in DC-to-450 kHz applications. Dif- 
ferential or single-ended inputs can be used for X-Y displays or 
conventional time-based displays. Large display area, simple 
operation, and low cost make the Type 503 ideal for classroom 
and production-line uses. 

The Type RM503, for the same reasons, is ideal for inclusion in 
a variety of systems, or other monitor applications. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 450 kHz. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 1 mV/cm to 20V/cm. 

INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION— 100:1 at 1 mV/cm deflection 
factor. DC to 50 kHz, 4 V P to P, max. 

SWEEP GENERATOR 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 1 ^s/cm to 5s/cm. 
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, XI 0, X20, X50. 

CRT 
DISPLAY AREA— 8 x 10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2. 



OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 5 mV and 0.5 V, approx 350 Hz 
squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 120 
watts, max. 



59 



TYPE 



503 
RM503 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

Two identical systems 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 450 kHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB point is 
<10Hz with AC coupling. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/cm to 20V/cm in 14 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to at least 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

350 V combined DC + peak AC. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

From DC to 50 kHz: > 100:1 at calibrated deflection factors 
from 1 mV/cm to 0.2 V/cm with 4-V peak to peak input, 
<30:1 at calibrated deflection factors from 0.5 V/cm to 20 
V/cm with 40-V peak to peak input (400-V peak to peak 
from 5 V/cm to 20 V/cm). 

PHASE DIFFERENCE IN X-Y MODE 

<1° to 450 kHz at equal calibrated deflection factors from 
1 mV/cm to 0.2 V/cm, <2° to 50 kHz at equal calibrated 
deflection factors from 0.5 V/cm to 20 V/cm. Same polarity 
inputs in both cases. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 

1 /.is/cm to 5s/cm in 21 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence) 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to at least 12s/cm. 

MAGNIFIER 

X2, X5, XI 0, X20 or X50 magnification; magnified time base 
accurate within 5% up to 0.1 /ts/cm. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic or manual level selection, free run. Automatic 
operation is useful from 50 Hz to 450 kHz, minimizes trigger 
adjustment for signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and 
repetition rates. With no input, automatic triggering occurs 
at an approx 50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference 
trace. 

COUPLING 
AC or DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal, external or line. 

REQUIREMENTS 

y 2 -cm deflection from DC to 50 kHz, increasing to 2-cm deflec- 
tion at 450 kHz; '/ 2 V external from DC to 450 kHz. Require- 
ments increase below 50 Hz with AC coupling. Automatic 
operation requires 4/5-cm deflection from 50 Hz to 50 kHz, 
increasing to 2.5 cm at 450 kHz; Vs V external from 50 Hz to 
450 kHz. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

3-kV accelerating potential. P2 phosphor normally supplied, 
PI, P7, PI 1, or P31 are optional without extra charge. Consult 
your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for applica- 
tion information and availability. Z-axis input requires ±10 V 
for CRT modulation at normal intensity. 



60 




GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 8 x 10-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal centerlines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
5-mV and 500-mV squarewaves, accurate within 3%. 350-Hz 
±50% repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117-V nominal); transformer taps 
permit operation from 210 to 250 VAC (234-V nominal); 50 to 
60 Hz. Operates from 112 to 132 or 224 to 264 VAC at 400 
Hz, 120 to 140 or 240 to 280 VAC at 800 Hz. 120-W maxi- 
mum power consumption (125 V at 50 Hz). 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height U"/i« in 37.3 cm 

Width 9 3 / 4 in 24.8 cm 

Depth 21 % in 55.0 cm 

Net weight 29V 2 lb 13.4 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~38 lb ^17.3 kg 

Export-packed weight ^51 lb £i23.2 kg 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Rack depth 17 in 43.2 cm 

Net weight 28 lb 12.7 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~51 lb ~23.2 kg 

Export-packed weight ZZ72 lb Si32.7 kg 

RACKMOUNTING 

Type RM503 mounts directly to standard 19-inch rack. MOD 
171 A provides slide-out tracks. Instrument can be conveniently 
withdrawn, tilted and locked in 7 positions. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two A510 binding-post adapters (013-0004-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); smoke-gray filter (378-0567-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0218-01). Type RM503 also includes 
mounting hardware; 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-03); 
two instruction manuals (070-0314-01). 

TYPE 503 OSCILLOSCOPE $660 

TYPE RM503 OSCILLOSCOPE $675 

TYPE RM503 OSCILLOSCOPE, MOD 171 A $725 

U.S. Soles Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



TYPE 



504 



RM50 A 

DC-to-450 kHz OSCILLOSCOPE 



TYPE 504 OSCILLOSCOPE 


o 


L©^— "< 


ff _• ! m E 




t»' 







■ 



• ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES 

• COMPACT CABINET OR RACK MODELS 



The Type 504 and RM504 provide accurate measurements in 
DC-to-450 kHz applications. Features include easy-to-use trig- 
gering 1-2-5 sequence on Vertical Sensitivity and Horizontal 
Time/cm switches, and Calibrator outputs. Large display area, 
simple operation, and low cost make the Type 504 ideal for 
classroom and production-line uses. 

The Type RM504, for the same reasons, is ideal for inclusion in 
a variety of systems, or other monitor applications. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 450 kHz. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm. 

INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 1 ,as/cm to 0.5s/cm. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.5 V/cm, variable. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8 x 10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 25 mV and 0.5 V, approx 350-Hz 
squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 115 
watts, max. 



61 



504 



RM504 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 
BANDWIDTH 
DC to 450 kHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB point is 
<10Hz with AC coupling. Bandwidth constant at all deflec- 
tion factors. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

5mV/cm to 20V/cm in 12 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to at least 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

350 V combined DC + peak AC. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 
TIME BASE 

1 /xs/cm to 0.5s/cm in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence) 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to at least 1.2s/cm. 
EXTERNAL INPUT 
0.5 V/cm, variable. 

TRIGGER 
MODES 

Automatic or manual level selection, free run. Automatic 
operation is useful from 50 Hz to 450 kHz, minimizes trigger 
adjustment for signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and 
repetition rates. With no input, automatic triggering occurs 
at an approx 50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference 
trace. 

COUPLING 
AC or DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal, external or line. 

REQUIREMENTS 

V 2 -cm deflection from DC to 50 kHz, increasing to 2-cm de- 
flection at 450 kHz; >/ 2 V external from DC to 450 kHz. Re- 
quirements increase below 50 Hz with AC-coupling. Auto- 
matic operation requires 4/5-cm deflection from 50 Hz to 
50 kHz, increasing to 2.5 cm at 450 kHz; V 2 V external from 
50 Hz to 450 kHz. 

CRT 
TEKTRONIX CRT 

3-kV accelerating potential. P2 phosphor normally supplied; 
PI, P7, PI 1, or P31 are optional without extra charge. Consult 
your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for applica- 
tion information and availability. Z-axis input requires ±10 V 
for beam modulation at normal intensity. 
GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 8 x 10-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal centerlines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
25-mV and 500-mV squarewaves, accurate within 3%. 350 Hz 
±50% repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117-V nominal); transformer taps 
permit operation from 210 to 250 VAC (234-V nominal); 50 to 
60 Hz. Operates from 112 to 132 or 224 to 264 VAC at 400 
Hz, 120 to 140 or 240 to 280 VAC at 800 Hz. 115-W maxi- 
mum power consumption (125 V at 50 Hz). 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height U"/w in 37.3 cm 

Width 9 3 / 4 in 24.8 cm 

62 




Depth 21 % in 55.0 cm 

Net weight 27V 2 lb 12.5 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~36 lb ~16.4kg 

Export-packed weight ~50 lb s;22.7kg 
RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Rack depth 17 in 43.2 cm 

Net weight 25'A lb 11.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~49 lb ~22.3 kg 

Export-packed weight :=69 lb ~31 .4 kg 

RACKMOUNTING 

Type RM504 mounts directly to standard 19-inch rack. MOD 
171 A can be withdrawn from rack on slide-out tracks, tilted 
and locked in 7 positions. 
INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

A510 binding-post adapter (013-0004-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter 
(103-0013-00); smoke-gray filter (378-0567-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0224-00). Type RM504 also includes mounting 
hardware; 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-03); two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0315-00). 

TYPE 504 OSCILLOSCOPE $560 

TYPE RM504 OSCILLOSCOPE $570 

TYPE RM504 OSCILLOSCOPE, MOD 171 A $620 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

PROBES 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0125-00 $ 26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0134-00 $ 26 

P6027 IX Probe Package, order 010-0070-00 $ 15 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 201-1: storage drawer and 9-position tilt-lock oscil- 
loscope tray, order 201 -1 *^ 30 

SLIDE-OUT TRACKS 

Convert standard Type RM504 to MOD 171 A, provide easy 
withdrawal and tilt of instrument, order 351-0050-00. . . .$45 

CAMERAS 
Standard C-12 provides no-parallax viewing, f/ 1.9-1:0.85 lens, 
Polaroid Land* Pack Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 504 or RM504 to C-12 Camera adapter. 

Order 016-0226-01 $ 15 

Standard C-27 has rotating and removable viewing hood 
allowing mounting on adjacent Type RM504's, f/1. 9-1:0. 85 
lens. Polaroid Land Pack Film back, order C-27 $430 

Type 504 or RM504 to C-27 Camera adapter. 

Order 016-0225-02 $ 15 

♦Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Soles Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 






TYPE 



515A 



RM15 

DC-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 




• SO-mV/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• INTERNAL DELAY LINE 

• TWO INPUTS, SELECTABLE FROM THE FRONT PANEL 

• AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 



The Tektronix Type 51 5A is a DC-coupled general purpose 
cathode-ray oscilloscope combining reliable circuitry in an 
easy-to-use, compact instrument. Wide time-base range, broad 
bandwidth characteristics, and calibrated deflection factor 
make the Type 51 5A well suited for general-purpose laboratory 
work and production-line testing applications. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 15 MHz. 

RISETIME— 24 ns. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 50 mV/cm to 20V/cm. 

INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 36 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.2 /is/cm to 2s/cm. 

X5 MAGNIFIER — Operates over full time base, increases fast- 
est rate to 40 ns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.4 V/cm to approx 25 V/cm. DC to 500 
kHz at 1.4 V/cm. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6 x 10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, approx 1-kHz 
squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 50 
to 60 Hz, approx 300 W. 



63 



TYPE 



515A 
RM15 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 15 MHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB-down 
point is approx 2 Hz with AC coupling, approx 0.2 Hz with 
included 1 OX probe. 

RISETIME 
24 ns. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
50mV/cm to 20V/cm in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
All steps accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. Warning 
light indicates uncalibrated setting. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 36 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC and peak AC. 

SIGNAL INPUTS 

Two manually-selected signal inputs with approx 60-dB iso- 
lation. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing of leading edge of triggering waveform. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 

0.2/is/cm to 2s/cm in 22 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 5s/cm. Warning light indicates 
uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 40 
ns/cm. Accuracy of magnified time base is within 5%. A 
neon light indicates when the magnifier is in use. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Variable between approx 1.4 V/cm to 25 V/cm. DC to 500 
kHz at 1.4 V/cm (3-dB-down). 

OTHER 

Gate output: positive-going rectangular pulse with same 
duration as time base; approx 20-V amplitude. 

Sawtooth output: positive-going ramp with same duration 
as time base; approx 150-V amplitude. 



TRIGGER 

MODES 

Manual level selection; Automatic; Preset Stability; HF SYNC. 
Automatic triggering may be used for signal repetition rates 
between approx 50 Hz to 2 MHz, eliminating the need for 
re-adjusting TRIGGERING LEVEL while sequentially viewing 
signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. 
With no input, automatic triggering occurs at an approx 
50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. HF 
SYNC assures a steady display of sinewave signals up to 
approx 20 MHz. 

COUPLING 
DC or AC. 

SOURCES 

Internal; External; or Line. 




REQUIREMENTS 

AC coupling requires 2-mm deflection (internal) or 0.5 V 
external at 1 kHz, increasing to 5-mm deflection or 1.5 V 
external at 2 MHz; low-frequency response is 3-dB down at 
approximately 16 Hz. DC coupling requires 5-mm deflection 
(internal) or 0.5 V external from DC to 1 kHz, increasing to 
2-cm deflection or 1.5 V external at 2 MHz. Automatic trig- 
gering requires 5-mm deflection (internal) or 1 V external 
from 50 Hz to 1 kHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or 3 V 
external at 2 MHz. HF sync requires 2-cm deflection or 2 V 
external at 20 MHz. 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

Approx 1-kHz squarewave; 50 mV to 100 V peak to peak 
in 11 steps (1-2-5 sequence); accurate within 3%. 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

Round, 5-inch, flat-faced tube with helical post-accelerating 
anode. 4-kV accelerating potential. Edge-lighted graticule 
is scaled with 6 vertical and 10 horizontal centimeter divi- 
sions. P31 phosphor normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or Pll are 
optional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. Z-axis input (51 5A only): AC-coupled to CRT 
cathode: 15nF, 27 kn. Positive signal of 5 V will provide 
adequate blanking of trace at moderate intensity setting. 
Maximum recommended drive is ±20 V. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


Uy„ in 


35.7 cm 


Width 


9% in 


24.8 cm 


Depth 


21 13 /,< in 


55.4 cm 


Net weight 


42 lb 


19.1 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


»51 lb 


S23.2 kg 


Export-packed weight 


S64 lb 


^29 kg 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, wired for 
117 V center. Instrument can be ordered wired for opera- 
tion on any line voltage listed below. Power consumption 
is approx 300 watts. 

Changing taps insures regulation as follows: 



110 


99 to 117 volts 


220 


198 to 235 volts 


117 


105 to 125 volts 


234 


210 to 250 volts 


124 


111 to 132 volts 


248 


223 to 265 volts 



64 



i 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

P6006 10X probe package (010-0127-00); 3 fo 2-wire adapter 
(103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); smoke 
gray filter (378-0567-00); patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18 inch 
(012-0087-00); patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18 inch (012- 
0091-00); post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0247-01). 

TYPE 515A OSCILLOSCOPE $950 

RACK-MOUNT OSCILLOSCOPE 

The Type RM15 is a mechanically rearranged Type 51 5A 
Oscilloscope. It mounts in a standard 19-inch rack on slide- 
out tracks. It can be pulled forward, tilted, and locked in 
any of seven positions for servicing convenience. Except for 
no Z-axis input, electrical characteristics of Type RM15 are 
the same as described for Type 51 5A Oscilloscope. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


8% in 


22.2 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.2 cm 


Depth 


22"/,, in 


57.8 cm 


Net weight 


42 lb 


19.1 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


^76 lb 


s:34.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=S96 lb 


s:43.6 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Type RM15 includes accessories listed for Type 51 5A plus 
one pair mounting tracks (351-0085-00). Part number for 
two included instruction manuals is (070-0242-00). 

TYPE RM15 OSCILLOSCOPE $1025 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories serve to extend the usefulness of the 
Type 51 5A and Type RM15 in certain applications. This list- 
ing covers only the more commonly used items. The standard 
probe (10X) supplied with the instrument satisfies most measure- 
ment requirements; optional probes may be better suited for 
particular applications. In addition to the listed optional probes, 
other probes are available for current and high-voltage meas- 
urements. A complete list of accessory items can be found in 
the catalog accessory pages. 



515A 

TYPE 

RM15 

CRADLE ASSEMBLY 
When the Type RM15 is used in a backless rack, these sup- 
porting cradles are necessary for rear slide support. 
Order 040-0344-00 $ 9.00 

SCOPE-MOBILE 111 CART 
Type 201-1 Scope-Mobile® Cart features tilt locking in any 
of nine positions for convenience in viewing Type 51 5A. 
5-inch rubber wheels permit easy transport between loca- 
tions. Order Type 201-1 $130.00 

DUST COVER 
Provides protection for Type 51 5A during transport or stor- 
age. Made of waterproof blue vinyl with a clear frontal 
area for easy identification of the instrument. 
Order 016-0067-00 $ 7.50 

POLARIZED VIEWER 

The polarized viewer reduces troublesome reflections and 
glare under high ambient-light conditions. Order 016-0053-00 
$12.00 

VIEWING HOOD 

Includes molded rubber eyepiece and separate tubular light 
shield. Order 016-0001-01 $ 6.00 

CAMERAS 

Standard C-12 provides no-parallax viewing, f/1. 9-1:0.85 lens, 

Polaroid Land* Pack Film back, order C-12 $460.00 

Type 515 or RM15 to C-12 Camera adapter. 

Order 016-0226-01 $ 15.00 

Standard C-27 has rotating and removable viewing hood 
allowing mounting on adjacent Type RM15's, f/1. 9-1:0.85 
lens, Polaroid Land Pack Film back, order C-27 .... $430.00 
Type 515 or RM15 to C-27 Camera adapter. 
Order 016-0225-02 $ 15.00 

PROBES 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $ 26.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $ 15.00 

^Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



65 



TYPE (jiff 

DC-to-15 MHz DUAL-TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE 





o 



• 50-mV/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• 2 IDENTICAL INPUT CHANNELS 

• CHOPPED OR ALTERNATE SWITCHING 

• AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 



The Type 51 6 is a dual-trace, semi-portable instrument 
ideally suited to bench work applications. Vertical calibrated 
deflection factor is 0.05 V/cm for each channel, with four 
operating modes. The Type 516 provides small size and light 
weight combined with simple operation and reliable perform- 
ance making it suitable for many laboratory and field applica- 
tions. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

(2 Identical Channels) 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 15 MHz. 

RISETIME— 24 ns. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm. 

INPUT RC— 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.2 jus/cm to 2s/cm. 

X5 MAGNIFIER — Operates over full time base, increases fast- 
est rate to 40 ns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.5 V/cm to approx 25 V/cm. DC to 500 
kHz at 1.5 V/cm. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6 x 10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, approx 1-kHz 
squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125V or 210 to 250V, 50 
to 60 Hz, approx 300 W. 



66 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

(2 Identical Channels) 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 15 MHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB-down point 

is approx 2 Hz with AC coupling, approx 0.2 Hz with included 

10X probe. 
RISETIME 

24 ns. 
DEFLECTION FACTOR 

50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 

All steps accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously 

variable between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. Warning 

light indicates uncalibrated setting. 
INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF. 
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC and peak AC. 
OPERATING MODES 

Channel A only; Channel B only; Alternate; Chopped; 3.3-/is 

segments of each channel are displayed (chopping rate 

150 kHz). Chopped transient blanking is provided. Polarity; 

either channel may be operated as normal or inverted. 
SIGNAL DELAY 

Permits viewing the leading edge of waveform. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 
0.2 /j.s/cm to 2s/cm in 22 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 6s/cm. Warning light indicates 
uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 
Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 40 
ns/cm. Accuracy of magnified time base is within 5%. A 
neon light indicates when the magnifier is in use. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 
Variable between approx 1.5 V/cm to 25 V/cm. DC to 500 
kHz at 1.5 V/cm (3-dB-down). 

OTHER 

Gate output: positive-going rectangular pulse with same 
duration as time base; approx 25-V amplitude. 
Sawtooth output: positive-going ramp with same duration 
as time base; approx 150-V amplitude. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Manual level selection; Automatic; Preset Stability; HF SYNC. 
Automatic triggering may be used for signal repetition rates 
between approx 60 Hz to 2 MHz, eliminating the need for 
readjusting TRIGGERING LEVEL while sequentially viewing 
signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. 
With no input, automatic triggering occurs at an approx 
50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. HF SYNC 
assures a steady display of sinewaves to approx 20 MHz. 

COUPLING 
AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal; External; or Line. 

REQUIREMENTS 
AC coupling requires 2-mm deflection (internal) or 0.5 V 
external at 1 kHz, increasing to 5-mm deflection or 1.5 V 
external at 2 MHz; low-frequency response is 3-dB down at 
approximately 16 Hz. AC low-frequency reject attenuates fre- 
quencies below 16 kHz. DC coupling requires 5-mm deflection 
(internal) or 0.5 V external from DC to 1 kHz, increasing to 
2-cm deflection or 1.5 V external at 2 MHz. Automatic trig- 
gering requires 5-mm deflection (internal) or 1 V external 
from 50 Hz to 1 kHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or 3 V 



TYPE (jiff 

external at 2 MHz. HF sync requires 2-cm deflection or 2 V 
external at 20 MHz. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
Approx 1-kHz squarewave; 50 mV to 100 V peak to peak 
in 11 steps (1-2-5 sequence); accurate within 3%. 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

Round, 5-inch, flat-faced tube with helical post-accelerating 
anode. 4-kV accelerating potential. Edge-lighted graticule 
is scaled with 6 vertical and 10 horizontal centimeter divi- 
sions. P31 phosphor normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or PI 1 are 
optional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. A rear panel switch provides blanking voltage to 
eliminate switching transients when operating in the chopped 
mode. External terminal permits Z-axis modulation AC coupled 
to the cathode. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 14'/ u in 35.7 cm 

Width 9% in 24.8 cm 

Depth 21 13 / u in 55.4 cm 

Net weight 43 '/ 2 lb 19.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~53 lb ~24.1 kg 

Export-packed weight ~66 lb ~30 kg 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, wired for 
117 V center. Power consumption is approx 300 watts. 
Changing taps insures regulation as follows: 
110 99 to 117 volts 220 198 to 235 volts 

117 105 to 125 volts 234 210 to 250 volts 

124 111 to 132 volts 248 223 to 265 volts 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two P6006 probe packages (010-0127-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter 
(103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); Smoke- 
gray filter (378-0567-00); Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18 inch 
(012-0087-00); Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18 inch (012- 
0091-00); Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); two instruction manu- 
als (070-0225-00). 

TYPE 516 OSCILLOSCOPE $1 1 50 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories extend the usefulness of the Type 516 in 
certain applications. The standard 10X probes supplied with the 
instrument satisfy most measurement requirements. Listed optional 
probes may be better suited for particular applications. Other 
probes are available for current and high-voltage measurements. 
A complete list of accessory items can be found in the catalog 
accessory pages. 
RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 
Consists of a cradle to support the Type 516 in any standard 
19-inch relay rack, and a mask to fit around the regular instru- 
ment panel. Rack height requirement is 15 3 / 4 inches, order 

040-0277-00 $ 31 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 201-1: tilt locking in any of nine positions for conveni- 
ence in viewing Type 516. 5-inch rubber wheels permit easy 

transport between locations, order 201-1 $130 

C-12 CAMERA 
f/1.9, 1:0.85 lens; Polaroid Land* Pack-Film Back. Beam-split- 
ting mirror provides on-axis binocular view of the CRT dis- 
play, eliminating parallax, order C-12 $460 

C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 $ 15 

PROBES 

P6007 100X Probe Package,, order 010-0150-00 $ 26 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $ 15 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

67 



TYPE (jiff 




• SINGLE-SHOT PHOTOGRAPHS AT 2 NS/CM 

• 0.004-INCH SPOT SIZE 

• SENSITIVE WIDEBAND TRIGGER SYSTEM 

• SYNCHRONIZATION TO OVER I GIGAHERTZ 

• VSWR, 1.25, OR LESS, TO I GIGAHERTZ 

• DISTRIBUTED-DEFLECTION CRT 

• BUILT-IN DELAY LINE 

The Tektronix Type 519 Oscilloscope is a calibrated, high- 
speed, laboratory instrument designed for observation, meas- 
urement, and photographic recording of fractional nanosecond 
risetimes. A 2 x 6 cm viewing area, coupled with 24-kV accel- 
erating potential, affords bright displays with excellent resolu- 
tion. Performance features include: bandwidth from DC to 
beyond 1 gigahertz, risetime less than 0.35 ns, deflection fac- 
tor <10V/cm, linear sweeps to 2 ns/cm, sweep delay through 
35 ns, and a wideband trigger system. The single unit houses 
a fixed signal delay line, a convenient sweep-delay control, 
a pulse-rate generator, a standard amplitude and waveshape 
generator, and regulated power supplies and high-voltage 
supply. Only one connection is necessary for normal opera- 
tion — a connection of the signal from the device under test. 

Combining simple operation with laboratory precision and 
reliability, the Type 519 ideally suits single-shot or random 
nuclear events. In addition, the bandwidth permits applications 
to general measurements where oscilloscope risetime must be 
less than signal risetime. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 1 GHz. 
RISETIME— less than 0.35 ns. 
DEFLECTION FACTOR— <10 V/cm. 
INPUT IMPEDANCE— 125 n ±2%. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 2 to 1000 ns/cm. 
SWEEP DELAY— to 35 ns. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 2x6cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 24 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— PI 1. 

OTHER 

CALIBRATION-STEP GENERATOR— to 10 V into 125 Q or 
to 1 V into 50 Q, calibrated and continuously variable. 
(0.1 ns risetime, approx.) Approximately 750-Hz repetition 
rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 
approx 650 watts. 



68 



TYPE 519 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to 1 GHz at 3-dB down. 

RISETIME 
Less than 0.35 ns. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
<10V/cm. 

INPUT IMPEDANCE 
125 £2 ±2%. 

MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL 

±15VDC or 15 V RMS, or ±100-V pulse. Maximum power 
input is 1.8 watts. 

SIGNAL DELAY 

45 ns approx. Permits viewing of leading edge of triggering 



waveform. 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 



TIME BASE 

2 ns/cm to lOOOns/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. 

SWEEP DELAY 
Sweep start delayed — 35 ns. 

SINGLE SWEEP 
After a single sweep is generated, the sweep circuit is 
locked out until the RESET button is pressed then sweep fires 
on next trigger. An external jack is provided for remote 
control of single sweep operation. 

SYNCHROSCOPE OPERATION 

The output signal from either the +TRIGGER 50 fi, the 
DELAYED +GATE 50 fi, or the +RATE 50-Q connector can 
be used to control an external device. 

RATE GENERATOR 
Output pulse approx 15 V, risetime < 0.8 ns, duration 
approx 10 ns. Repetition rate variable between 3 Hz and 
30 kHz. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Pulse — Permits choice of a free-running sweep or a stable 
sweep which can be triggered on random or uniform repe- 
tition rates up to approx 50 MHz. 

Sync — Permits stable displays of signals occurring at a con- 
stant repetition rate to over 100 MHz. 

HF Sync — Permits the sweep to be synchronized with signals 
from approx 100 MHz to over 1 GHz. 



SOURCES 

Internal, external, calibration-step generator, or rate gen- 
erator. 

REQUIREMENTS 

Two trace widths vertical deflection and 1 ns or greater dura- 
tion (Internal) or 20 mV or greater amplitude and 1 ns or 
greater duration (External). Sweep triggers on either the 
positive or negative slope of the triggering signal. 

TRIGGER GAIN 

Four gain settings of X0.2, NORMAL, X5, and X20 provide 
for attenuation or amplification of trigger signals. 



MISCELLANEOUS 

CALIBRATION STEP GENERATOR 

A step-waveform of approximately 750-Hz repetition rate, 
with amplitude continuously variable and calibrated from 
to 10 V into 125 Q, or to 1 V into 50 Q (through a 
T50/T125 adapter) is available at a front-panel 125-fi con- 
nector. Risetime is approximately 0.1 ns and either polarity 
can be selected. Continously variable uncalibrated ampli- 
tudes of to 50 V into 125 Q are also available. 

CATHODE-RAY TUBE 

5-inch round, flat-faced tube. 24-kV accelerating potential. 
Spot diameter at normal intensity 0.004 inch. Maximum 
x-ray radiation at a distance of two inches from the face- 
plate does not exceed 0.7 millirems per hour (human limit is 
2.5 millirems per hour). At normal viewing distances, x-ray 
radiation is essentially zero. Supplied with Pll phosphor. 

GRATICULE 

Edge-lighted, 2-cm by 6-cm divisions. The horizontal center 
line markings are 5 mm apart and the vertical center line 
markings are 2 mm apart. Illumination is controlled by a 
front-panel knob. The graticule can be dropped out of view 
if desired. 

CAMERA MOUNTING 

A special camera-mounting adapter with swing-away hinging 
easily accepts a Tektronix C-27-662R Camera. Please refer 
to the Camera Section for complete description. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, typically 
650 watts. Factory wired for 105 V to 125 V. May be ordered 
wired for 210-V to 250-V operation. 



SINGLE-SHOT PHOTOGRAPHY 

A single-shot exposure using a Type C-27-662R Camera was 
used to take the picture at the right. The display shows a 
~l-GHz damped wave at 2 ns/cm. The waveform was enlarged 
2 times to represent the actual size of the CRT display. 









69 



\ 



TYPE 5J9 



DIMENSIONS 


AND 


WEIGHTS 






Height 






22 1 /, in 


56.5 cm 


Width 






14% in 


37.2 cm 


Depth 






25 '/ 4 in 


64.1 cm 


Net weight 






97 lb 


44.1 kg 


Domestic sh' 


pping 


weight 


^130 lb 


^59 kg 


Export-packed wei 


ght 


SS169 lb 


^77 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Viewing hood (016-0001-01); two 125-Q terminations (017- 
0051-00); two 125-Q insertion units (017-0013-00); 125-Q cou- 
pling capacitor (017-0018-00); 125Q 1-GHz timing standard 
(017-0019-00); Double-button contact assembly (017-0032-00); 
Panel adapter assembly (017-0033-00); Cable connector (017- 
0035-00); 125-Q min loss attenuator, T50/T125 (017-0052-00); 
125-n adapter N50/N125 (017-0053-00); 125-Q adapter, T50/ 
N125 (017-0055-00); Delay-line equalizer (017-0057-00); 1-ns 
cable (017-0507-00); 2-ns cable (017-0508-00); 5-ns cable (017- 
0509-00); 10-ns cable (017-0510-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103- 
0013-00); Phone jack plug (134-0069-00); 3-conductor power 
cord (161-0010-03); Walnut box (202-0083-00); Two reed 
switches (260-0693-00); Accessory box tray (436-0030-00); Two 
instruction manuals (070-0243-00). 

TYPE 519 OSCILLOSCOPE $4300 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories serve to extend the usefulness of the 
Type 519 in certain applications. This listing covers only the 
more commonly used items. The termination, cables, and 
adapters supplied with the instrument satisfy most measure- 
ment requirements. A complete list of accessory items can be 
found in the catalog accessory pages. 

ATTENUATORS, ADAPTERS, AND CABLES 

125-Q 2:1 attenuator, order 017-0071-00 $30.00 

125-Q 5:1 attenuator, order 017-0049-00 30.00 

125-Q 10:1 attenuator, order 017-0050-00 30.00 

125-Q adapter N50/T125, order 017-0054-00 18.00 

125-Q 90° elbow assembly, order 017-0043-00 16.50 

125-Q 20-ns cable, order 017-0511-00 20.00 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Provides portability between various operating areas and 
serves as a convenient working surface for Type 519, order 
Model 202-1, Mod 52 $165.00 

CAMERA 

Ultra-high writing rate — fl.3, 1:0.5 — Polaroid* Roll-Film back, 
order C-27-662R $595.00 

♦Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



70 



TYPE 



520 



R520 

TSC VECTORSCOPE 




• PUSH -BUTTON OPERATING CONVENIENCE 



• AMPLITUDE CALIBRATED DISPLAYS 



• LUMINANCE AMPLITUDE, CHROMINANCE PHASE 
AND AMPLITUDE, DIFFERENTAL PHASE AND 
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN MEASUREMENTS 



• THE LUMINANCE CHANNEL AND THE LINE-RATE 
TIME BASE PERMIT DECODED R, G, B and Y 
DISPLAYS 



• ALL SILICON SOLID-STATE, COOL, QUIET 
OPERATION 



The Tektronix Type 520 NTSC Vectorscope is designed to 
measure luminance amplitude, and chrominance amplitude 
and phase of the NTSC composite color television signal. 
Self-canceling pushbutton switches permit rapid selection of 
displays for quick analysis of television signal characteristics, 
and to check Vectorscope calibration. All solid-state circuitry 
provides low power consumption and cool, quiet operation. 

Dual inputs provide time-shared displays for comparison of 
input-output signal phase and gain distortion. A chrominance 
channel is provided which demodulates the chrominance signal 
to obtain color information from the composite video signal for 
use in VECTOR, LINE SWEEP, R, G, B, I, Q, Differential Gain 
(dA) and Differential Phase (d</>) displays. A luminance channel 
separates and displays the luminance (Y) component of the 
composite color signal. The Y component is combined with the 
output of the chrominance demodulators for R, G and B displays 
at a line rate. 

A digital line selector permits the display of a single line 
Vertical Interval Test Signal from a selected line of either field 
1 or field 2. 



71 



TYPE 



520 

R520 



\ 



NTSC VECTORSCOPE 



VECTOR PRESENTATION 

The vector presentation graphically displays the relative 
phase and amplitude of the chrominance signal on polar 
coordinates. To identify these coordinates the graticule (see 
fig 1) has points which correspond to the proper phase 
and amplitude of the primary and complementary colors: 
R (Red), B (Blue), G (Green); Cy (Cyan), Y L (Yellow) and M G 
(Magenta). 




fig J — Vector display — full field color bars, 75% amplitude, 
?00% white reference, 70% set-up. Conforms to El A standard 
RSI 89. Type 141 NTSC Test Signal Generator used as a signal 
source. 



Any errors in the color encoding, video tape recording or 
transmission processes which change these phase and/or 
amplitude relationships cause color errors in the television 
receiver picture. The polar coordinate type of display such 
as that obtained on the Type 520 CRT has proved to be the 
best method for portraying these errors. 

The polar display permits measurement of hue in terms of 
relative phase of the chrominance signal with respect to the 
color burst. Saturation is expressed in terms of the displace- 
ment from center (radial length) toward the color point which 
corresponds to 75% (or 100%) saturation of the particular 
color being measured. 

The outer boxes around the color points correspond to phase 
and amplitude error limits per FCC requirements (±10°, 
±20%). The inner boxes indicate ±2.5° and 2.5 IRE units 
and correspond to phase and amplitude error limits per EIA 
specification RS-189, amended for 7.5% setup. 
An internally generated test circle matched with the vector 
graticule verifies quadrature accuracy, horizontal to vertical 
gain balance and gain calibration for chrominance signal 
amplitude measurements. Two methods of measuring phase- 
shift are provided. Large phase-shifts can be accurately read 
from the parallax-free vector graticule. A precision calibrated 
phase shifter with a range of 30°, spread over 30 inches of 
dial length, is provided for measuring small phase-shifts. 



LINEAR-SWEEP PRESENTATION 

The linear time base operates at the line rate. Color signals 
are demodulated along any desired axis, I, Q, R-Y, B-Y, etc. 
and displayed at the line rate on a linear time base. 

DUAL DISPLAY 

In dual-channel operation, successive samples of channels 
A and B are displayed on a time-shared basis. The switch- 
ing rate is locked to horizontal sync and switching transients 
are blanked. Input-output signals from video equipment can 
be conveniently compared on channel A and B for phase 
and/or amplitude distortion. The subcarrier processing channel 
contains two uncalibrated 0° to 360° phase-shifters and one 
30° CALIBRATED PHASE shifter. While viewing channel A or 
B, either of the uncalibrated phase-shifters, A<j> or B<j>, can be 
switched into the subcarrier processing channel. A<f> and B<£ 
will lock to channel A and B respectively, when A and 
B channel are time-shared, permitting independent phase 
control of channel A and B displays. Phase shifts caused 
by unequal signal paths are easily cancelled, leaving only 
phase and amplitude distortion caused by equipment de- 
ficiencies. Video cable lengths can be accurately matched 
for time delay at color subcarrier frequency to less than 
0.5° phase difference. Accurate amplitude measurements 
of chrominance and luminance are provided from the CRT. 
An internal 1-V luminance amplitude calibration test signal 
is provided to check the gain accuracy of channel A and B 
amplifiers and the luminance channel. 

DIFFERENTIAL GAIN AND DIFFERENTIAL PHASE MEASURE- 
MENTS 

The two main chrominance-signal distortions are differential 
gain and differential phase. Both can be measured on the 




Fig 2 — Differential Gain display from the Type 520 using the 
Type 140 NTSC Test Signal Generator. Lower trace, luminance 
is on. Upper trace, luminance is off. Minor divisions of graticule 
indicate .5% Differential Gain. Double exposure. 



Type 520 Vectorscope. Differential gain (fig 2) is a change 
in color subcarrier amplitude as a function of luminance. In 
the reproduced color picture, the saturation will be distorted 
in the areas between the light and dark portions of the scene. 
The IRE graticule major divisions represent % of voltage 
gain or loss when making a differential gain measurement. 
The 520 permits differential gain measurements with accuracy 
to better than 1%. 



72 



1 



NTSC VECTORSCOPE TYPE 



520 
R520 












CALIBRATED 
PHASE 




5 -? 


° 

2.5 

. ! i '1 


■ ,. j 













Fig 3 — Differential Phase of a typical video amplifier. The trace 
overlay technique provides excellent resolution for measuring 
small phase changes. From reference point in top photo fist step 
of staircase signal overlayed) to point of measure in second photo 
(6th step overlayed) represents 2./° differential phase distortion. 



Differential phase (fig 3) is a phase modulation of the 
chrominance signal by the luminance signal. In the repro- 
duced color picture, the hue will vary with scene brightness. 
Differential gain and differential phase may occur separately 
or together. The causes of these distortions are amplitude 
non-linearity and time delay that are not independent of the 
signal level. Differential phase is read from the precision 
calibrated phase shift control. Dial resolution is excellent 
with 1 ' phase shift represented by approximately 1 inch of 
dial movement. The vertical deflection of the display is greatly 
magnified and inverted on alternate lines allowing the use 
of a trace overlay technique and the slide-back method for 
measuring small phase changes. The CALIBRATED PHASE 
control provides direct readout of differential phase. Using 
the standard linearity test signal, differential phase of 0.2° 
can be measured. Reference burst is selectable, internal or 
external. 

RED (R), GREEN (G), BLUE (B) AND LUMINANCE (Y) 
OBSERVATIONS 

The Type 520 provides a luminance channel which permits the 
separation and display of the luminance (Y) component from 
the composite color signal (fig 4). The Y component can 
also be combined with the output of the chrominance de- 
modulators for R, G and B displays at a line rate (fig 5, 
6, 7). Amplitude measurements of color signal components 
can be made with an accuracy of 3%. 






100 = 














' 1 | =(""*""! 3 




! ——] 1 a 












= J! 




= 




\ ==\ 


i . 




n -m == „ 


L ^-. 














5 


-40 
















00 , > s ^ 
































I i fc— a d 




'•*-na = 


L - 1 -* ' , 














8 
















100 = 












,„.. 




■■■■= 


n 




n 
















fcr 




































"-j-ilJ 








°, 






U 


— 


C 
















7 


-40 -U 



75% amplitude EIA Color Bar Signal. Line-sweep displays of 
Luminance (fig A), decoded Red (fig 5), decoded Green (fig 6), 
and decoded Blue (fig 7). Displays photographed with a Tek- 
tronix C-27-549 Camera, using a Tektronix Type 140 NTSC Test 
Signal Generator as a source. 



73 



TYPE 



520 
R520 



NTSC VECTORSCOPE 



VERTICAL INTERVAL TEST SIGNAL OBSERVATION 

Vertical Interval Test Signals from preselected lines of either 
field 1 or field 2 can be displayed on the Type 520 Vector- 
scope. 

Binary counters operate in conjunction with the field selector 
to select lines in either field that may carry suitable test sig- 
nals. These circuits enable the Vectorscope to be used for 
measuring differential gain and differential phase from test 
signals transmitted in the vertical blanking interval of color 
broadcasts. 

Normally, lines 18 and 19 in either field 1 or field 2 are 
selected by means of the VITS 18 and VITS 19 pushbuttons 
in conjunction with the FIELD switch. Internal quick-disconnect 
jumper wires permit selecting any line from 7 through 21 
of either field. Intensity and focus are automatically adjusted 
for optimum viewing of VITS. 

GRATICULE 

Two separate graticules provide references for vector and 
line sweep displays. The parallax-free vector graticule, or 
the IRE graticule, is automatically selected and edge-lighted 
concurrent with operating mode selection. 

Z AXIS INPUT 

The Z-AXIS INPUT connector accepts external trace-bright- 
ening pulses for intensifying a portion of the display during 
the time of interest. A 1-V negative-going pulse is required. 

VIDEO INPUTS 

Dual input BNC connectors (fig 8) for each channel permit 
75-Q loop-through operation with a return loss greater than 
46 dB* to 5 MHz. Amplitude range is 0.7 V to 1.4 V VIDEO 
(sync tip to peak white). 





1 <•" - 


"" — *,r™*tl ™ 


_»_ 


— m •" itt m 




' 1 


«'• 


tf V»Xl 


j«_.r 


i tf ^m* 


W 


^ M 




(•» ® ^k 








* ~|B 




tfi^/St 1 




■ ' 








'BRlii V 1 ™ 




W 




. 1 




- wffifjm:--- ^ 










■ «••- 


"*" ?? 


«» °-» 


t m 




Ij 


■^Z."... «S» „'. 




" 1 















Fig 8 — Rear view of 520 Vectorscope. The mounting angle of 
the coax connectors permit connecting cables to leave the instru- 
ment without protruding excessively and with a minimum of 
clearance space required. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, 95 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 
Ruggedly designed to withstand temperature and altitude 
variations, vibration, shock, and transportation. Listed instru- 
ment characteristics are valid over a temperature range of 
0° C to +50° C ambient. 

MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 

The Type 520 Vectorscope is available in two mechanical 
configurations. A cabinet model (Type 520) (fig 9) and a 
rackmount model (Type R520). Both instruments are electric- 
ally identical. The R520 mounts in a 19-inch rack and is pro- 
vided with slide-out chassis tracks for convenient access to 
internal components. 
*Exceeds CCIR recommendation 451-2, paragraph 3.1 and 3.2 




Fig 9 — Cabinet model. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

TYPE 520 Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 16 7 / 8 in 42.9 cm 

Depth 19y 8 in 48.7 cm 

Net weight 33 lb 15 kg 

TYPE R520 Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Depth 19 3 / 4 in 50.2 cm 

Net weight 33 lb 15 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~61 lb ~27.7 kg 

Export-packed weight ~82 lb ~37.3 kg 
INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

TYPE 520: Smoke-gray filter, installed (378-0581-00); camera 

gasket and mounting screws (016-0114-00); power cord (161- 

0036-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2 instruction 

manuals (070-0639-00). 

TYPE R520. Same as Type 520 but includes rackmounting 

hardware, and mounting tracks (351-0101-00). 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

Cabinet model, order TYPE 520 NTSC VECTORSCOPE . . 

$1875 

Rackmount model, order TYPE R520 NTSC VECTORSCOPE 

$1900 

UHF connectors are optional and may be specified without 
extra cost. 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

75-Cl VOLTAGE STEP-UP TERMINATION 
The 75-17 Voltage Step-Up Termination provides a 5X in- 
crease in chrominance amplitude and permits Differential 
Gain and Differential Phase measurements to be made to 
a higher degree of accuracy when used with the Type 520 
NTSC Vectorscope. Input impedance to the termination is 
a constant 75 CI. Use of the termination requires a source 
of external sync to the Type 520. 

UHF connectors, order 01 1 -01 00-00 $25 

BNC connectors, order 011 -01 00-01 $25 

SIDEBAND CHROMA AMPLITUDE EQUALIZER 
The Sideband Chroma Amplitude Equalizer is designed for 
use with the Type 520 NTSC Vectorscope in transmitter ap- 
plications where a vestigial sideband signal is being demodu- 
lated with a detecting diode. The equalizer provides a 2X 
increase in chrominance amplitude and passes luminance 
components with little or no attenuation. Input impedance 
is 75 CI. 

UHF connectors, order 011-0107-00 $25 

BNC connectors, order 011-01 07-01 $25 

C-27 TRACE RECORDING CAMERA 

f/1.9, 1:0.5 lens; Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back. 

Order C-27-549 $470 

Type 520 to C-27 Camera Adapter, order 016-0225-02 . . $ 15 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



74 



TYPE 



520 
R520 



>AL VECTORSC 




• PUSH-BUTTON OPERATING CONVENIENCE 

• AMPLITUDE CALIBRATED DISPLAYS 

• LUMINANCE AMPLITUDE, CHROMINANCE PHASE 
AND AMPLITUDE, DIFFERENTIAL PHASE AND 
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN MEASUREMENTS 

• THE LUMINANCE CHANNEL AND THE LINE-RATE 
TIME BASE PERMIT DECODED R, G, B and Y 
DISPLAYS 

• ALL SILICON SOLID-STATE, COOL, QUIET 
OPERATION 



The Tektronix Type 520 PAL Vectorscope is designed to 
measure luminance amplitude, and chrominance phase and 
amplitude of the PAL composite color television signal. Self- 
canceling pushbutton switches permit rapid selection of displays 
for quick analysis of television signal characteristics, and to 
check Vectorscope calibration. All solid-state circuitry pro- 
vides low power consumption and cool, quiet operation. 

Dual inputs are provided permitting time-shared displays for 
comparison of input-output signal phase and gain distortion. A 
chrominance channel is provided which demodulates the 
chrominance signal to obtain color information from the com- 
posite video signal for use in VECTOR PAL, VECTOR NTSC, R, 
G, B, U, V, Differential Gain and Differential Phase displays. 
A luminance channel separates and displays the luminance (Y) 
component of the composite color signal. The Y component is 
combined with the output of the chrominance demodulators for 
R, G and B displays at a line rate. 

A digital line selector permits the display of a single line 
Vertical Insertion Test Signal from a selected line of either field 
1 or field 2. 



75 



TYPE 



520 

R520 



PAL VECTORSCOPE 



VECTOR PRESENTATION 

The vector presentation graphically displays the relative 
phase and amplitude of the chrominance signal on polar 
coordinates. To identify these coordinates the graticule (see 
fig 1) has points which correspond to the proper phase and 
amplitude of the primary, complementary and conjugate 
chrominance vectors: Red (R) (r), Green (G) (g), Blue (B) (b), 
Cyan (CyJ (cy), Magenta (Mg) (mg) and Yellow (Yl) (yl). 




Fig. 1A — Vector PAL presentation of PAL color bar signal. 




Fig. IB — Vector NTSC presentation of PAL color bar signal. 



Any errors in the color encoding, video tape recording or 
transmission processes which change these phase and/or 
amplitude relationships cause color errors in the television 
receiver picture. The polar coordinate type of display such 
as that obtained on a vectorscope has proved to be the 
best method for portraying these errors. 

The polar display permits measurement of hue in terms of 
relative phase of the chrominance signal with respect to the 
color burst. Saturation is expressed in terms of the displace- 
ment from center (radial length) toward the color point which 
corresponds to 75% (or 100%) saturation of the particular 
color being measured. 

The outer boxes around the color points correspond to phase 
and amplitude error limits (±10°, ±20%). The inner boxes 
indicate ±3° phase angle and ±5% amplitude. 

(+V), (+V and —V) and (—V) vector displays are provided, 




Fig 2 — Type 520 PAL and Type 141 system being used 
to measure differential gain of a typical cascade of video 
amplifiers. Indicated differential gain is 6'/ 2 %. 



\ 



permitting observation of the 135° and 235° burst-related 
color information, individually or combined. 

An internally generated test circle matched with the vector 
graticule verifies quadrature accuracy, horizontal to vertical 
gain balance and gain calibration for chrominance signal 
amplitude measurements. Two methods of measuring phase- 
shift are provided. Large phase-shifts can be accurately read 
from the parallax-free vector graticule. A precision calibrated 
phase shifter with a range of 30°, spread over 30 inches of 
dial length, is provided for measuring small phase-shifts. 

LINEAR-SWEEP PRESENTATION 

The linear time base operates at the line rate. Color signals 
are demodulated along any desired axis, U, V, etc. and dis- 
played at the line rate on a linear time base. 

DUAL DISPLAY 

In dual-channel operation, successive samples of channels 
A and B are displayed on a time-shared basis. The switch- 
ing rate is locked to horizontal sync and switching transients 
are blanked. Input-output signals from video equipment can 
be conveniently compared on channel A and B for phase 
and/or amplitude distortion. The subcarrier processing channel 
contains two uncalibrated 0° to 360° phase-shifters and one 
30° CALIBRATED PHASE shifter. While viewing channel A or 
B, either of the uncalibrated phase-shifters, A</> or Bcj>, can be 
switched into the subcarrier processing channel. Ac/> or B<j> 
will lock to channel A and B respectively, when A and B 
channel are time-shared, permitting independent phase control 
of channel A and B displays. Phase shifts caused by unequal 
signal paths are easily cancelled, leaving only phase and 
amplitude distortion caused by equipment deficiencies. Video 
cable lengths can be accurately matched for time delay at 
color subcarrier frequency to less than 0.5° phase difference. 
Accurate amplitude measurements of chrominance and lumi- 
nance are provided from the CRT. An internal 1-V luminance 
amplitude calibration test signal is provided to check the gain 
accuracy of channel A and B amplifiers and the luminance 
channel. 

DIFFERENTIAL GAIN AND DIFFERENTIAL PHASE MEASURE- 
MENTS 

The two main chrominance-signal distortions are differential 
gain and differential phase. Both can be measured on the 
Type 520 PAL Vectorscope. Differential gain (fig 2) is a change 



76 



PAL VECTORSCOPE TYPE 



520 

R520 



in color subcarrier amplitude as a function of luminance. In 
the reproduced color picture, the saturation will be distorted 
in the areas between the light and dark portions of the scene. 
The luminance graticule major divisions represent % of voltage 
gain or loss when making a differential gain measurement. 
The 520 PAL Vectorscope permits differential gain measure- 
ments with accuracy to better than 1 %. 




Fig 3 — Differential Phase presentation using a modulated 
staircase signal. A trace overlay technique provides excel- 
lent resolution for measuring small phase changes. From 
reference point in top photo (1st step of staircase signal 
overlayedj to point of measure in bottom photo (6th step 
overlayed) represents 7.2° differential phase distortion. 

Differential phase (fig 3) is a phase modulation of the 
chrominance signal by the luminance signal. In the repro- 
duced color picture, the hue will vary with scene brightness. 
Differential gain and differential phase may occur separately 
or together. The causes of these distortions are amplitude 
non-linearity and time delay that are not independent of the 
signal level. Differential phase is read from the precision 
calibrated phase shift control. Dial resolution is excellent 
with 1 ° phase shift represented by approximately 1 inch of 
dial movement. The vertical deflection of the display is greatly 
magnified and inverted on alternate lines allowing the use 
of a trace overlay technique and the slide-back method for 
measuring small phase changes. The CALIBRATED PHASE 
control provides direct readout of differential phase. Using 
the standard linearity test signal, differential phase of 0.2° 
can be measured. Reference burst is selectable, internal or 
external. 




100% -pi — — 


DIFF 
GAIN 


8 




80% 


10% 


6 


8 




6 


60% 4 


- 4 




2 



-2 


40% 

30% m ~ 




20% 


-8 

-10% 








Line sweep presentations of Luminance (signal sequence; 
white, yellow, cyan, green, magenta, red, blue, and black, 
fig 4), decoded Red (fig 5), decoded Green (fig 6), and 
decoded Blue (fig 7), components of the PAL color bar 
signal. Photos were taken using a Type 141 PAL Tele- 
vision Test Signal Generator and a C-27-549 Camera. 



77 



TYPE 



520 
R520 



PAL VECTORSCOPE 



RED (R), GREEN (G), BLUE (B) AND LUMINANCE (Y) 
OBSERVATIONS 

The Type 520 PAL Vectorscope provides a luminance channel 
which permits the separation and display of the luminance 
(Y) component from the composite color signal (fig 4). The Y 
component can also be combined with the output of the 
chrominance demodulators for R, G and B displays at a line 
rate (fig 5, 6, 7). Amplitude measurements of color signal 
components can be made with an accuracy of 3%. 

VERTICAL INSERTION TEST SIGNAL OBSERVATION 

Vertical Insertion Test Signals from preselected lines of either 
field 1 and 3 or field 2 and 4 can be displayed on the Type 
520 PAL Vectorscope. 

Binary counters operate in conjunction with the field selector 
to select lines in either field that may carry suitable test sig- 
nals. These circuits enable the Vectorscope to be used for 
measuring differential gain and differential phase from test 
signals transmitted in the vertical blanking interval of color 
broadcasts. 

Normally, lines 17 and 18 in field 1 and 3 and lines 330 and 
331 in field 2 and 4 are selected by means of the VITS I 
and VITS II pushbuttons in conjunction with the VIT FIELD 
switch. Internal quick-disconnect jumper wires permit selecting 
any line from 4 through 22 or 316 through 335. Intensity and 
focus are automatically adjusted for optimum viewing of VITS. 

GRATICULE 

Two separate graticules provide references for vector and line 
sweep displays. The parallax-free PAL vector graticule, or the 
luminance graticule, is automatically selected and edge-lighted 
concurrent with operating mode selection. 

Z AXIS INPUT 

The Z-AXIS INPUT connector accepts external trace-bright- 
ening pulses for intensifying a portion of the display during 
the time of interest. A 1-V negative-going pulse is required. 

VIDEO INPUTS 

Dual BNC input connectors (fig 8) for each channel permit 
75-fl loop through operation with a return loss greater than 
46 dB* to 5 MHz. Amplitude range is 0.7 V to 1.4 V VIDEO 
(sync tip to peak white). 




Fig 8 — Rear view of 520 PAL Vectorscope. The mounting 
angle of the coax connectors permit connecting cables to 
leave the instrument without protruding excessively and 
with a minimum of clearance space required. - 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 47 to 63 Hz, 95 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

*Exceeds CCIR recommendation 451-2, paragraph 3.1 and 3.2 



ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 

Listed instrument characteristics are valid over a temperature 
range of 0°C to +50 °C ambient. 

MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS 

The Type 520 PAL Vectorscope is available in two mechanical 
configurations. A cabinet model (Type 520 MOD 188M) (fig 9) 
and a rackmount model (Type R520 MOD 188M). Both instru- 
ments are electrically identical. The R520 MOD 188M mounts 
in a 19-inch rack and is provided with slide-out chassis tracks 
for convenient access to internal components. 




Fig 9 — Cabinet model. 




MENSIONS 


AND WEIGHTS 




TYPE 520 


Height 


7 in 


MOD 188M 


Width 


16% in 




Depth 


19% in 




Net weight 


33 lb 


TYPE R520 


Height 


7 in 


MOD 188M 


Width 


19 in 




Depth 


19 3 / 4 in 




Net weight 


33 lb 



17.8 cm 

42.9 cm 

48.7 cm 
15 kg 

17.8 cm 
48.3 cm 
50.2 cm 
15 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Smoke-gray filter (378-0581-00); camera gasket and mount- 
ing screws (016-0114-00); power cord (161-0036-00); 3 to 2- 
wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2 instruction manuals (070-0801- 
00). 

TYPE R520 MOD 188M: Same as Type 520 MOD 188M but 
includes rackmounting hardware, and mounting tracks (351- 
0101-00). 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

Cabinet model PAL Vectorscope, order TYPE 520 MOD 
188M $1875 

Rackmount model PAL Vectorscope, order TYPE R520 MOD 
188M $1900 

UHF connectors are optional and may be specified without 
extra cost. 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

C-27 TRACE RECORDING CAMERA 

f/1.9, 1:0.5 lens; Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back. 

Order C-27-549 $470 

Type 520 to C-27 Camera Adapter, order 016-0225-02 . . $ 15 

•Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



78 



type 528 



TELEVISION WAVEFORM MONITOR 



NEW 




• LARGE 8 x I O-em DISPLAY AREA 

• 1/2 RACK SIZE 

• TWO VIDEO INPUTS 

• PICTURE MONITOR OUTPUT 

• SELECTABLE 1 -VOLT AND 4-VOLT FULL SCALE 
DEFLECTION FACTORS 

• YRGB AND RGB INPUTS 

• ALL SOLID-STATE — LOW POWER CONSUMPTION 



The solid-state Type 528 Television Waveform Monitor pro- 
vides bright, easy-to-read video waveform displays on a 5-inch 
CRT, yet requires only 5 V 4 -inch vertical height and y 2 -rack 
width mounting space. This compact instrument is especially 
well suited for monitoring signals from camera outputs, video 
system output lines, transmitter video input lines, closed-circuit 
TV systems and educational TV systems. 

Either of two video inputs, selectable from the front panel, 
may be displayed. The displayed video signal is also provided 
at a video output jack for viewing on a picture monitor. Cali- 
brated, 1-volt and 4-volt full scale (140 IRE unit) sensitivities are 
provided for displaying common video and sync signal levels. 
A variable sensitivity control permits uncalibrated displays from 
0.25-volt to 4.0-volt full scale. The built-in 1-volt calibration 
signal may be switched on to check vertical sensitivity calibra- 
tion. Flat, IRE, Chroma, and Diff Gain frequency response posi- 
tions permit observation of various signal characteristics. 

Horizontal Sweep selection provides 2 H (two line), 1 /ts/div 
(expanded two line), 2 V (two field) and 2 V MAG (expanded 
two field). Displays of RGB and YRGB waveforms from color 
processing amplifiers are provided for with interconnection 
through a rear-panel 9-pin receptacle. 

A DC Restorer maintains the back porch at an essentially con- 
stant level despite changes in signal amplitude, APL and color 
burst. May be turned off when not needed. 

All solid-state circuitry provides low power consumption, and 
long-term reliability. 



TYPE 



VIDEO FEATURES 



INPUTS 

Rear-panel BNC connectors provide two unbalanced inputs 
(A & B) which may be used with either 75-Q loop-through 
or bridging connection. Maximum return loss for A and B 
video inputs, terminated in 75 Q, operating or non-operating 
is 46 dB or greater at 5 MHz. Normally AC coupled but 
may be easily modified by user for DC coupling. 



r 






/^ ^ ^^ 




1^ 


®> ■■■■ m 


^L/^\^H 


Ax® 




FUSt OAT* 







Rear pane/ of Type 528 Waveform Monitor. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Calibrated 1 -volt and 4-volt (for 140 IRE unit deflection) posi- 
tions are provided for video inputs A or B with accuracy 
within 1% for the 1 -volt positions and 3% for the 4-volt 
positions. A variable sensitivity control permits uncalibrated 
displays from 0.25-volt to 4.0-volt full scale. 

FREQUENCY RESPONSE 
4 response positions are provided: FLAT — 25 Hz to 3.6 MHz 

within 1% of response at 50 kHz, 3.6 MHz to 5 MHz +1%, 
— 3% of response at 50 kHz, and +1%, — 3% of response at 
3.58 MHz; IRE— per 1958 IRE STD 23S-1 (amended). Response 
at 4.43 MHz attenuated at least 22 dB; CHROMA— 30% 
down between 3.1MHz and 3.4 MHz, 30% down between 
3.8 MHz and 4.1 MHz. Response at 3.58 MHz does not vary 
between FLAT and CHROMA by more than 1 %. DIFF GAIN— 
same as CHROMA response with additional gain for display- 
ing 100 IRE units of 90 mV to 143 mV subcarrier levels. 

DIFFERENTIAL GAIN 

1% or less with 10 to 90% APL changes using DIFF GAIN 
operating mode with modulated stairstep signal, baseline 
adjusted to 50 IRE units position, and signal adjusted to 100 
IRE units P-P. 

TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

1 -volt or 4-volt calibrated deflection factor, FLAT response 
position, using 125-ns HAD sin- pulse and bar test signal: 
preshoot is not more than 1 IRE unit, overshoot not more than 

2 IRE units, ringing not more than 2 IRE units and pulse to 
bar ratio within 0.99:1 to 1.01:1. 

LOW FREQUENCY TILT 

1 % or less tilt on the vertical window or 60 Hz squarewave 
(DC Restorer off). 



MAXIMUM INPUT LEVEL 

MAXIMUM DC INPUT 

5 voltst for all response positions using AC coupling. 

MAXIMUM AC INPUT 

Flat and IRE response — Signal levels should be limited to 
produce displays not exceeding 200 IRE units. 

CHROMA response — Chroma levels up to 140 IRE units may 
be displayed, provided the chroma plus luminance level 
does not exceed 200 IRE units when viewed in the FLAT 
response mode. 

DIFF GAIN— Subcarrier signal levels of 90 mV to 143 mV 
peak to peak may be expanded, using the variable gain 
control, to 100 IRE units for measurement of differential gain 
with 10 to 90% APL. 

DC RESTORER 

Slow acting back porch DC restoration. Blanking level shift 
due to presence or absence of burst or changes in APL from 
10% to 90% will not exceed 2 IRE units. May be disabled 
when desired. 

VIDEO OUTPUT 

The displayed signal is provided at a rear-panel BNC con- 
nector. Frequency response is 25 Hz to 5 MHz within 3%. 
Output signal amplitude is 1 volt within 15% for 140 IRE 
unit display using the FLAT response mode. DC level is 2 
voltt or less into 75-Q load. Nominal output impedance 
is 75 Q. Return loss is 30dBt or greater from 25 Hz to 5 
MHz. 




Infrequently used operating controls are conveniently located 
behind a front-panel hinged door. 

fExceeds CCIR recommendation 451-2 paragraph 3.1. 
^Exceeds CCIR recommendation 451-2 paragraph 3.2. 



80 



type 528 



TIME BASE FEATURES 

SYNCHRONIZATION 

Internal or external sync is provided and is selectable by a 
switch behind the front panel hinged door. Internal sync is 
derived from composite video input. External sync is via a 
rear panel BNC loop-through connector and requires 1 .5-volts 
to 4.5-volts composite sync input. The unterminated sync 
input impedance is approximately 15 kfi paralleled by ap- 
proximately 5 pF and maximum input voltage is 20 volts.}' 



SWEEP MODES 
4 sweep modes are provided: 2-V SWEEP — repetition rate 
equal to frame rate of applied video or external sync; 2-V 
MAG SWEEP — expands the vertical blanking interval (approxi- 
mately 20X magnification of 2 V); 2-H SWEEP— repetition 
rate equal to half-line rate of applied video or external sync; 
1 -/ts/div SWEEP — calibrated sweep with accuracy within 
3% for center 10 div of 12-div sweep, and linearity within 
3% throughout horizontal POSITION range, excluding first 
and last div. 




Fig 7. Modulated stairstep signal. 
FLAT response. 



2 H SWEEP, Fig 2. 



Modulated stairstep signal. 2 H SWEEP, 
IRE response. 



Fig 3. Modulated stairstep signal. 2 H SWEEP, 
DIFF GAIN response. 




Fig 4. 



Multiburst 
response. 



signal. 2-H SWEEP, FLAT 



Fig 5. 75% saturated color bar signal. 
SWEEP, FLAT response. 



2-H Fig 6. .125 us HAD Sin 7 Pulse and Bar. 7 -/is/ 
div calibrated sweep, FLAT response. 




7. Horizontal Blanking Interval, 
calibrated sweep. 



i.s/div Fig 8. Vertical Blanking Interval. 2-V MAG 
SWEEP. 20X magnification permits con- 
venient vertical blanking interval ob- 
servation. 



Fig 9. .250 fts HAD Sin 2 Pulse (left) and Modu- 
lated 20 T Sin 2 Pulse (right) with super- 
imposed Bar Signal (top). 



81 



type 528 



YRGB AND RGB DISPLAYS 

The Type 528 can be used with color camera processing ampli- 
fiers which provide the necessary sequential signal switching 
and staircase signals. A rear panel 9-pin receptacle provides 
the necessary interconnections. Factory wired for RGB (3 
step) input. 



produce a 9-div 



STAIRSTEP AMPLITUDE 

A 10-volt amplitude stairstep signal wil 
display length within 15%. 

STAIRSTEP DC LEVEL 

Peak AC plus DC signal levels shall not exceed limits of 
—12 to +12 volts. Maximum AC signal level is 12-volts 
peak-to-peak. 

CONTROL SIGNALS 

The RGB or YRGB modes may be initiated through the use of 
external voltage (12 volts to 15 volts) or ground connection 
at the rear panel 9-pin receptacle. A 9-pin plug is supplied 
with the included standard accessories. 

OTHER FEATURES 

REGULATED POWER SUPPLY 

Operates on 99 volts AC to 132 volts AC and 198 volts AC to 
264 volts AC, 48 Hz to 66 Hz line frequency. Operates on 115 
volts ±10% or 230 volts ±10% at line frequencies from 
66 Hz to 440 Hz. POWER CONSUMPTION: approx 48 watts 
at 115 volts AC, 60 Hz. 

TEKTRONIX CATHODE-RAY TUBE 

Flat-faced 5-inch rectangular CRT providing an 8xl0-cm 
display area. P31 phosphor supplied. External graticule with 
variable illumination. 

CALIBRATOR 

An internal calibration signal provides a convenient reference 
for verifying deflection factor. Amplitude is 1.0 volt within 
1%. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Type 528: Height 


5 1 /, in 


13.3 cm 


Width 


87 2 in 


21.6 cm 


Depth 


18V 2 in 


47.0 cm 


Net weight 


15 lb 


6.8 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

9-pin connector (136-0099-00), connector cover (200-0249-00), 
two instruction manuals (070-0800-00). 

ORDERING INFORMATION 

ORDER TYPE 528 FOR 525-LINE, 30-FRAME TELEVISION 
STANDARDS 

TYPE 528 WAVEFORM MONITOR $825 

TYPE 528 MOD 146B WAVEFORM MONITOR $825 

As above, but less cover, for mounting in Tektronix rack 
adapter (016-0115-00). 

ORDER TYPE 528 MOD 188G FOR 625-LINE, 25-FRAME 
TELEVISION STANDARDS, CALIBRATED WITH CCIR SIG- 
NALS WITH CHROMA RESPONSE CENTERED AT 4.43 MHz. 

TYPE 528 MOD 188G WAVEFORM MONITOR $825 




TYPE 528 WITH PROTECTIVE CABINET 

The Type 528 MOD 147B is a standard Type 528 provided with 
a protective cabinet for table-top use or portable applications. 
Cabinet is aluminum construction, blue vinyl finish. 

TYPE 528 MOD 147B WAVEFORM MONITOR $855 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 




RACK ADAPTER 

For mounting two Type 528's side-by-side in a standard 19- 
inch rack, order 016-0115-01 $85.00 

PANEL ASSEMBLY 

For covering '/ 2 of rack adapter when only one Type 528 
is rackmounted, order 016-0116-00 $ 7.50 




C-27 CAMERA 

f/1.9, 1:85 lens, Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-27 
$430.00 

Type 528 to C-27 camera adapter, 016-0249-00 .... $ 15.00 

^Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



O 



82 



TYPE 



529 



RM529 

TELEVISION WAVEFORM MONITORS 







• LINE SELECTOR 

• FLAT TO 8 MHz 

• 4 FREQUENCY RESPONSES 

• POSITIVE FIELD SELECTOR 

• COOL — QUIET — CLEAN 

• NO FAN — ONLY 80 WATTS 

• AVAILABLE FOR USE WITH SEVERAL 
TV STANDARDS 



The Type 529 and RM529 bring to the Industry a new flexi- 
bility in waveform monitoring: signal-level monitoring, bandwidth 
and differential gain measurements, sine 2 -pulse and bar testing, 
monitoring Vertical Interval Test signals, transmitter percent-of- 
modulation measurements, YRGB displays (in conjunction with 
color-processing amplifiers) and others. Included are four video 
response characteristics, HIGH-PASS, LOW-PASS, IEEE, and FLAT. 
Both instruments feature FLAT RESPONSE to 8 MHz, assuring 
excellent waveform fidelity for sine squared testing with 2T, T 
and y 2 T pulses. 



DC RESTORATION maintains the back porch at an essentially 
constant level despite changes in signal amplitude, APL, and 
color burst, and may be turned off for viewing other than video 
signals. The circuit can easily be modified for sync-tip restora- 
tion. 

Sensitivity range is 0.12 volts to 1.5 volts for full-scale deflec- 
tion. Full-scale calibration at 0.714 V or 1.00 V is provided. 

BRIGHT WAVEFORM DISPLAYS in line selector operation are 
obtained with a highly-efficient 5-inch aluminized CRT. The 
instrument uses the best of both solid-state and vacuum-tube 
circuitry resulting in improved stability and reliability. These 
instruments do not require a fan, resulting in cleaner operation 
and complete freedom from noise. 

HORIZONTAL SELECTION provides 2-field or 2-line displays, 
plus calibrated sweep rates of 0.125 H/cm or 0.25 H/cm. Either 
calibrated rate may be delayed for line selection. SWEEP 
MAGNIFICATION extends the sweep rate by X5 or X25, offer- 
ing calibrated sweep rates from 0.250 H/cm to 0.005 H/cm. 
POSITIVE FIELD SELECTION assures stable displays in the 
presence of random noise bursts and video switching. The LINE 
SELECTOR permits detailed study of any portion of any desired 
line(s), and a front panel switch selects lines 16 through 21 
for viewing VIT signals. A VIDEO-OUTPUT AMPLIFIER supplies 
video and a brightening pulse to the associated picture moni- 
tor, intensifying the same line, or lines, displayed on the instru- 
ment when using the LINE SELECTOR. 



83 



TYPE 



RM529 

VIDEO FEATURES 

INPUTS 

Two unbalanced inputs through rear-panel BNC connectors 
may be used with either 75-Q loop-through or bridging con- 
nection (input R & C is 1 Meg and 24 pF). Return loss is great- 
er than 46 dB to 5 MHz using 75-fJ loop-through. Alterna- 
tively, one balanced, differential input may be used. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

120mV to 1.5 V full scale. Continuously variable between 
ranges. Calibrated full-scale: 1.0, 0.50 and 0.20 V. 

FREQUENCY RESPONSE 

4 response characteristics provide: FLAT: +0.0 — 1 % to 
6 MHz; +0.0 — 3% to 8 MHz. IEEE: IRE-Spec 23S-1 of 
1958 (amended): HIGHPASS: 3.58 MHz plus and minus 400 
kHz at 15% to 35% down. LOW PASS: <80% down at 
500 kHz. 

LOW FREQUENCY TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

<3% tilt of window display (tilt is expressed as a percent- 
age of P-P display). 

DC RESTORER 

Keyed back porch* type eliminates drift in DC-coupled verti- 
cal amplifier. Does not distort color burst. Waveform will 
remain on screen if there is a loss of sync pulses for DC re- 
storer keying. DC restorer may be disabled by front-panel 
switch. 

VERTICAL AMPLIFIER 
May be DC-coupled to diode demodulator as in % Video 
Modulation Monitoring. Details are available in manual. 

VIDEO OUTPUT 

Signal is provided for driving a picture or line monitor with 
amplitude into 75 ohms approx equal to input signal to 529/ 
RM529. 



TIME-BASE FEATURES 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE 

0.125 H/cm. Magnifier extends calibrated time base to 0.025 
H/cm and 0.005 H/cm. Accuracy is ±3%. Rep rate is V 2 
of the TV line rate. The time base can be calibrated using 
TV signals. Color burst is displayed without phase interlace. 

UNCALIBRATED TIME BASE 
2 LINE: Triggered time base with rep rate of V 3 TV line 
frequency. Provides complete 2-line display with horizontal 
blanking centered on the screen. 

2 FIELD: Synchronized time base with rep rate the same as 
the TV frame rate. Entire frame of video is displayed with 
the vertical blanking centered on the screen. Time base will 
free-run in the absence of signal, indicating loss of incoming 
signal. 

TIME-BASE MAGNIFIER 

X5 and X25. Accuracy ±3%. Magnifier expands the center 
of the display, convenient for monitoring equalizing or ser- 
rated pulses. 

*Sync tip restoration available by simple modification. 




COLOR CAMERA YRGB DISPLAYS 

Can be used with color camera processing amplifiers pro- 
viding these sequential signals and the staircase signal. To 
provide YRGB display directly, switching is done in the color 
processing amplifier. Receptacle to interconnect color proc- 
essing amplifier (relay control, staircase signal input, and 
ground) is provided on rear panel. 

VIT SELECTOR 

Front-panel switch selects lines 16 through 21. Knob position 
indicates line selected for viewing. 

LINE SELECTOR 

Variable delay allows any line of either field to be viewed. 

FIELD SELECTOR 

Positive-acting field selection. 

TRIGGER SELECTION 

Stable triggering on composite video signals. INTERNAL: 
200 mV to 1 V or more, peak to peak. EXTERNAL: 250 mV 
to 1 V or more, peak to peak. 

OTHER FEATURES 

REGULATED POWER SUPPLY 

Operates on 115 V or 230 V line ± 10% RMS. LINE FRE- 
QUENCY: 50-60 Hz. POWER CONSUMPTION: Approx 80 W 
at 115 V, 60 Hz. 

TEKTRONIX CATHODE-RAY TUBE 

Flat-faced, 5-inch rectangular CRT, operating at 6.4-kV acceler- 
ating potential. Calibrated viewing area, 7 x 10 cm. Electrical 
beam rotator provides trace alignment. P31 phosphor is 
normally supplied. External graticule, variable illumination. 

CALIBRATOR 

Two internal calibration voltages of 0.714 V and 1.00 V on 1- 
volt full-scale range of VERTICAL GAIN switch. An external 
calibration signal may be used. Internal calibration pulse 
amplitude ±1% over ambient temperature range and line- 
voltage range. Reference is a Zener diode. 

VENTILATION 

Convection air-cooled. Operating Temperature Range: 0° C 
to +50° C. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
TYPE 529: Height 
Width 
Depth 
Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight 

Two Type 529 Waveform Monitors can be mounted side-by- 
side, or one mounted alongside an associated picture moni- 
tor in a standard 19-inch rack or console. 



8V 4 in 


21 cm 


8V 2 in 


21.6 cm 


19V 2 in 


49.7 cm 


27 lb 


12.2 kg 


34 lb 


« 15.5 kg 


47 lb 


K21 .4 kg 



84 



TYPE 



RM529 













■ 




£!■ 




■III 1 Mi 






■111 ■ ■■ 




-<m 


m mm 




II 


m m mmm 






■ ■■ 






■IIRWilH 






■IIIF^IH M 






Mu/f/bursf Signal. Multiple exposure showing 
High-pass, Flat, and Low-pass response. 



Modulated Stair-Step Signal. Multiple expo- 
sure left to right. High-pass position for meas- 
uring differential gain, Flat-response position, 
IEEE response position. 



Color-Burst Signal. Double exposure. Top-. X5 
magnification. Horizontal display: 0.125 H/ 
cm. Boftom: X25 magnification. Horizontal 
display: 0.125 H/ cm. 




Multiple exposure. Left: 27. Center: T. Right 
T Sine 1 , 0.25, 0.125, 0.0625 [is HAD. 



'A 



Double exposure showing complete two-field 
displays and two-line displays. 



Sine 2 Pulse and 
T-Pulse and Bar. 



Signal. 0.125 [is HAD 



TYPE RM529: Height 
Width 
Rack depth 
Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight 



5'/ 4 in 
19 in 
18V, in 
30'/ 2 lb 

;59 lb 

;81 lb 



13.3 cm 
48.2 cm 

46.4 cm 
13.9 kg 

S26.8 kg 
;36.8 kg 



Instrument 
and tilted 



fits 
90 



standard 19-inch rack, can be pulled forward 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
TYPE 529: Smoke-gray light filter (378-0560-00); composite 
graticule, shown lower center (331-0156-01); noncomposite 
graticule, shown top left (331-0077-01); dual scale grati- 
cule, shown top center (331-0157-00); sine-, K factor, and 
IRE graticule, shown top right, lower left, lower right (331- 
0161-02); 75-ohm termination resistor (011-0102-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0509-01). 
TYPE RM529: same as Type 529 but includes four retainer 
bars (381-0187-00); one pr tracks (351-0040-02); two instruction 
manuals (070-0466-01). 

TYPE 529 WAVEFORM MONITOR $1115 

TYPE RM529 WAVEFORM MONITOR $1165 

TYPE 529 MOUNTING CRADLES 

Two different cradle assemblies, with associated bezels, allow 
the Type 529 Waveform Monitor to be mounted alongside 
an 8-inch or 9-inch Conrac* Picture Monitor, in a standard 19- 
inch rack. A cradle and bezel are also available for mount- 
ing two Type 529's side-by-side. 
*Regislered Trademark, Conrac Corporation, Conrac Division 



FOR MOUNTING 8-INCH CNB-8 PICTURE MONITOR (RE- 
QUIRES 10y 2 -INCHES RACK SPACE) 

Description Part Number Price 

Cradle Assembly 014-0021-00 $30.00 

Bezel, for mounting Type 014-0027-00 45.00 

529 on operator's left 

Bezel, for mounting Type 014-0028-00 45.00 

529 on operator's right 

FOR MOUNTING 8-INCH CZB-8 PICTURE MONITOR (RE- 
QUIRES IOVj-INCHES RACK SPACE) 

Cradle Assembly 014-0021-00 $30.00 

Bezel, for mounting Type 014-0025-00 45.00 

529 on operator's left 

Bezel, for mounting Type 014-0026-00 45.00 

529 on operator's right 

FOR MOUNTING 9-INCH RNB-9 PICTURE MONITOR (RE- 
QUIRES 8%-INCHES RACK SPACE) 

Cradle Assembly 014-0020-00 $30.00 

Bezel, for mounting Type 014-0023-00 35.00 

529 on operator's left 

Bezel, for mounting Type 014-0024-00 35.00 

529 on operator's right 

FOR MOUNTING TWO TYPE 529 WAVEFORM MONITORS 
SIDE-BY-SIDE (REQUIRES 8 3 / 4 -INCHES RACK SPACE) 
Cradle Assembly 014-0020-00 $30.00 

Bezel 014-0022-00 35.00 

RM529 CRADLE ASSEMBLY 
For mounting the Type RM529 in a WECO backless rack, 
order 426-0309-00 $ 9.50 

85 



TYPE 



529 

RM529 



MULTI-STANDARD WAVEFORM MONITORS 




Type 529 or RM529 MOD 188D 

The Type 529 Mod 188D and Type RM529 Mod 188D Wave- 
form Monitors are adapted for use with 405-line 50-Hz field 
rate, 525-line 60-Hz field, 625-line 50-Hz field, and 819-line 50- 
Hz field standard television systems. Added Vertical RESPONSE 
switch positions, added MAGNIFIER steps and VARIABLE control, 
5 and lOyiis/cm sweep rates in addition to line and field rates, 
and a PAL FRAME SELECTOR permit quick setup for use on any 
of four systems without internal adjustments. Panel marking, 
color-coordinated with Line/Field indicator light colors, identi- 
fies control positions associated with the selected system. 

The added PAL FRAME SELECTOR permits normal display 
from all frames or selection of either frame of the four-field PAL 
color system cycle. 

The Vertical system features selectable DC coupling for Video 
Input A, and added 1.1 MHz and 4.43 MHz Bandpass positions 
of the RESPONSE switch. The CALIBRATOR switch has an added 
0.70 F.S. position for proper calibration for systems based on 
a 30-unit (of 100) blanking level. Sweep rates based on line 
and field intervals are supplemented by fixed 5 /is/cm and 
10/ts/cm rates. Extra X10 and X20 MAGNIFIER positions and 
a VARIABLE MAGNIFIER provide maximum flexibility of adjust- 
ment for various test signals. 

VERTICAL SYSTEM: 

Response Switch: Added positions of 1.1 -MHz Bandpass (—18 
dB at 0.2 MHz) and 4.43-MHz Bandpass (— 3dB bandwidth 
>800 kHz) at double sensitivity. 

Calibrator: 0.70 F.S. position added for CCIR standards. 

Input Switch: Added DC-coupled position for Input A. 

OPTIONAL 
TYPE 529 FIELD CASE 

Provides cabinet protection for the Type 529 when used for 
applications outside of the rack. Aluminum construction, blue 
vinyl finish; order 016-0084-00 $35.00 

C-27 CAMERA 

f/1. 9-1:0.85 lens; Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order 
C-27 $430 

Type 529 or RM529 to C-27 Camera Adapter, order 
016-0224-00 $15.00 

♦Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

86 



HORIZONTAL SYSTEM: 

Line/Field Rate Selection: 405/50, 525/60, 625/50, 819/50. 

Sweep Rates: 2 Field, 2 Line, 1 Line, 5 /is/cm, and 10^is/cm. 

Line Selector Sweep Rates: 1 Line, 5 /is/cm, 10/is/cm. 
Discrete line selection provided for 525/60 and 625/50 sys- 
tems; for 405/50 and 819/50 systems, continuously-variable 
line selection only. 

Accuracy: All sweep rates (except 2 Field, an uncalibrated 

rate) are accurate within 3% (MAG XI). 
Magnifier: XI, X5, XI 0, X20, X25, plus VARIABLE (±20% 

from selected step). 
Field Switch: Added Even/Odd marking for PAL standards. 

Positive field selection provided except for CCIR System E 

(change-of-field only). 
Pal Frame Selector: 3-position switch for viewing all frames 

or selecting alternate frames. 

GENERAL: 

Line Voltage: +10%, —8% accommodation range at 105, 
110, 115, 120, 210, 220, 230, or 240-V center voltage, 50 to 
60 Hz. Normally wired and fused for 220 V. Multi-tap 
transformer can be changed for use with any of the listed 
nominal line voltages. 

Accessories: The following graticules are furnished in addition 
to the standard 529/RM529 complement: 0-100 unit com- 
posite CCIR Video, 30-unit blanking level, PN 331-0184-00. 
0-100 unit composite CCIR Video, with sin 2 & K factor ruling 
for 0.1 /is T and 0.2 r s 2T pulses, 2% and 4% K factor, 
timing line for 4.43 MHz, PN 331-0185-00 (installed). 

TYPE 529 MOD 188D $1280 

TYPE RM529 MOD 188D (Rackmount) $1330 

ACCESSORIES 

MESH FILTER 

For improving display contrast when viewing under high- 
ambient light conditions; includes special graticule cover. 
Order 378-0575-00 $15.00 

CONNECTOR 

Used with color processing amplifiers for RBG, etc. displays. 
Order 134-0049-00 $ 4.25 

See the catalog accessory pages for additional information on 

cameras and other accessory items not listed. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



TELEVISION OSCILLOSCOPE 

TYPE 453 R453 MOD 1 27C 



TELEVISION ACCESSORIES 

TV SYNC SEPARATOR 




An internal TV Sync Separator circuit permits stable internal 
Line or Field-rate triggering from displayed composite video or 
composite sync waveforms. External -f- 10 trigger sources are 
replaced by internal TV Sync positions providing Line (Hori- 
zontal) sync pulses to the B Sweep circuit and either Field 
(Vertical) or Line sync pulses to the A Sweep circuit. 

Individual line selection of VIT (vertical interval test) signals 
is facilitated by the sweep delay features in the Type 453. The 
wide range of sweep delays permit accurate alternate-frame 
color-burst observations in the PAL color system. 

Conventional waveform displays and measurements can be 
made from standard broadcast or closed-circuit TV systems, 
domestic or overseas, with up to 1201 -line, 60-Hz field rates. 
Other characteristics are the same as Type 453 and R453. 
A parallax-free, 6x10 div, illuminated graticule is standard. 
Two additional snap-in TV graticules are supplied but may 
not be illuminated. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Same as Type 453 except as follows: delete two P6010 3.5- 
ft 10X probe packages (010-0188-00); add two P6010 6-ft 
probe packages (010-0185-00); two 6-32 adapters (103-0051- 
00); two spring phone tip adapters (206-0060-00); snap-in 
light filter/TV graticule (NTSC) 378-0576-04; snap-in light 
filter/TV graticule (CCIR) 378-0576-05. 

TYPE 453 MOD 1 27C $2035 

TYPE R453 MOD 127C $2120 

TERMINATIONS 

75-ohm termination, BNC, order 011-0102-00 $8.75 

75-ohm termination, UHF, order 011-0104-00 $8.75 




The TV Sync Separator provides the trigger facilities for view- 
ing composite video signals on a conventional oscilloscope. It 
can be used with Tektronix general-purpose oscilloscopes that 
have a 100-volt calibrator output. When used with other instru- 
ments, a separate 100-V source is required to power the unit. 

A front panel switch selects field- or line-rate triggers, and 
a separate output jack supplies field triggers continuously. The 
unit has a clipping level control, allowing it to be used with 
signals ranging from 0.5 V to 8.5 V in amplitude. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 7 mA; operates on 100-V DC, or 
from the output of an oscilloscope calibrator with a frequency 
near 1 kHz. 

INPUT — Composite video signal from signal source or from 
Vert Sig Out jack on front panel of oscilloscope. 

OUTPUT — ~10-V negative-going composite sync for line 
rate triggering or ~6-V negative-going field-rate triggers. 
Selected by toggle switch. Also second output for field-rate 
triggers. 

TV SYNC SEPARATOR, with illustrated accessories, order 
01 5-0062-00 $85.00 

VIDEO STAIRCASE DIFFERENTIATOR 




The Video Staircase Differentiator permits the use of a gen- 
eral-purpose oscilloscope for measuring amplitude linearity in 
TV systems. 

The staircase differentiator is a filter which differentiates the 
steps of an unmodulated, linearity staircase (VIT signal) into 
spikes. The spikes appear on a common-reference level. Ampli- 
tude linearity is checked by comparing the amplitude of the 
spikes on the oscilloscope display. The generator used must 
supply a staircase having equal risetime, for the output ampli- 
tude of the differentiator is proportional to the rate of rise. 
Input impedance of the differentiator is 75 ohms. 

VIDEO STAIRCASE DIFFERENTIATOR, order 015-0075-00 
$17.50 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



87 



TYPE 



140 
R140 



NTSC TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR 




NEW 




NTSC ENCODED COLOR BARS 
Conforms to El A specification RS 189 
Full-field or split-field bars 
75% and 100% amplitude 
10%, 7'/ 2 % or 0% setup 



• VERTICAL INTERVAL TEST SIGNALS 

Staircase or color bars 

Lines 15 through 21, either or both fields 

• EIA COLOR STANDARD AND SYNC GENERATOR 



MODULATED STAIRCASE 

Conforms to IRE standard 60 IRE 23.S1 

Variable APL, 10% to 90% — fixed APL, 

50% 

5 steps plus blanking level 
Subcarrier phase locked to burst 

CONVERGENCE CROSSHATCH 

For picture monitor linearity evaluation in accord 

with IRE specification 54 IRE 23.S1 
For color picture monitor convergence adjustment 



The Type 140 NTSC Test Signal Generator is a compact, 
solid-state source of high-quality television test signals for 525- 
line, 60-cycle field standard NTSC color TV systems. Combined 
in one compact unit are the test signals needed to accurately 
test, evaluate, and adjust laboratory and standard broadcast 
color video equipment. Each test signal not only strictly adheres 
to industry standards but provides additional refinements to 
enhance both the accuracy and range of measurements which 
can be made. The self-contained sync generator includes a tem- 
perature controlled color standard with excellent frequency 
stability. Digital integrated circuits are extensively used to 
achieve stability, accuracy, and reliability. 



88 




Fig 1: Full field color bars, 75% amplitude, 75% 
while reference, 7.5% setup. 



Fig 2: Full field color bars, 75% amplitude, 100 IRE 
white reference, 7.5% setup. 



TYPE 



140 

R140 



^5 ^^^ 












§■ 








■1 
















■i hum nmniym^i^^i^^i^im 








^IW H^ri 







Fig 3: Modulated staircase signal with subcarrier. 




Modulated staircase signal, subcarrier off. 




Fig 7: Staircase without modulation. Modulated 90° 
subcarrier on the 4 out of 5 lines at IRE. Signal 
APL is 10%. 



Fig 5: Multiple exposure, modulated staircase signal 
with subcarrier, variable APL, 10%, 50% and 90%. 









■:■■ 


" 




.■ ■ ■ 


■■J 


| 



Fig 8: Staircase signal without modulation. Modulated 
90° subcarrier on the 4 out of 5 lines at 90 IRE. 



Fig 6: Modulated staircase signal with variable APL, 
30 mV of subcarrier phased 90° to burst inserted on 
the 4 out of 5 variable lines which are at 50 IRE. 




Fig 9: Triple exposure of modulated staircase viewed on 
a Type 520 Vectorscope in the differential gain mode. 
Top, 90% APL; middle, 50% APL; bottom, 10% APL. 



4W H fl WM L 



t^^ff*^,' 



ttjtfi 



■wr 



Fig 10: Double exposure. Left — Modulated staircase 
viewed on a Type 520 Vectorscope, differential phase 
mode, maximum resolution. Right — Same signal with the 
calibrated phase control changed 1°. 



.■■twm< 



Fig 11: Double exposure. Differential phase of a typical 
video amplifer. From IRE nulled (right) to 100 IRE 
nulled (left), phase shift is -1.8°. 




Fig 12: Modulated staircase signal viewed on a Type 
520 Vectorscope in the differential phase mode. Photo 
indicates combined differential phase of both instruments. 



89 



TYPE 



140 
R140 

NTSC COLOR BARS 



NTSC color bars in descending luminance order in either 
full field or split field are provided by the Type 1 40. The com- 
position of these signals is in accord with EIA color bar signal 
specification RS 1 89. In addition to basic signal requirements, 
these 100% saturated color bars are provided in either 75% 
or 100% amplitude with a choice of setup level. The white bar 
amplitude, which precedes the yellow bar, may be selected 
at 75% or 100% for 75% amplitude bars. The 100% white 
bar amplitude level permits a convenient check of relative 
chrominance/luminance gain by comparing the peak ampli- 
tudes of the yellow, cyan and white bars. An additional re- 
finement to the full field color bar is a black reference bar fol- 
lowing the blue bar. 

LUMINANCE AND CHROMINANCE COMPONENT 
AMPLITUDE ACCURACIES 

(Referenced at 25°C) — Amplitudes comply with the NTSC sig- 
nal requirements as defined by the FCC. Absolute ampli- 
tudes of luminance signal, setup and sync are within 1 % or 
1.5 mV, whichever is greater. Absolute amplitudes of all 
subcarrier frequency components (chroma and burst) are 
within 3%. Relative amplitudes of all subcarrier frequency 
components (chroma and burst) are within 1% or 1.5 mV, 
whichever is greater. 



BAR WIDTH- 
is 7.5 /is. 



-Full field bar width is 6.6 /is. Split field bar width 



WHITE REFERENCE— 75% amplitude or 100% amplitude. 

CHROMINANCE ENVELOPE RISETIME AND FALLTIME— 375 

ns within 15%. 

SETUP— 10%, 7V 2 % and 0% available. 

BLANKING TO PEAK WHITE AMPLITUDE— 714 mV (inde- 
pendent of setup). 

LUMINANCE RISETIME AND FALLTIME— 100 ns within 15%. 

— I AND Q CHROMINANCE SIGNAL WIDTH— 9.4 ^s on the 

same lines as black and white references, amplitude of each 
within 1 % of burst amplitude. 

MODULATED STAIRCASE 

The modulated staircase signal is provided with a choice 
of variable APL from 10% to 90% (0 to 100 IRE) in ten equal 
increments (11 levels), or a fixed APL of 50%. 

The staircase luminance component consists of five 20-IRE- 
unit risers. The subcarrier component is phase locked to color 
burst. The signal is in strict conformity with IRE Standard 60 
IRE 23.S1 and the definition of APL is rigorously observed. Ap- 
plications include measurements of differential gain and phase, 
dynamic gain, luminance signal linearity, luminance signal dis- 
tortion caused by chrominance signal non-linearity and burst 
phase errors. 

A new signal capability provides a means to check luminance 
signal distortion caused by rectification of the subcarrier sig- 
nal. When the variable APL mode is selected, an additional 
component consisting of subcarrier, phased to lead burst by 
90°, may be added to the low-frequency lines either as a con- 
stant 30-mV amplitude signal or amplitude modulated to pro- 
duce 30-mV, 305-mV and 610-mV amplitudes. The modulated 
amplitude subcarrier signal position is useful for determining 



the effects of subcarrier rectification upon luminance signals 
at all APL's through the entire TV system. The constant 30-mV 
amplitude subcarrier signal is useful for eliminating unnecessary 
portions of the display when making differential phase meas- 
urements. 

LUMINANCE COMPONENT— 5 step amplitude is 714mV 
within 1%. Single step amplitude is 143 mV within 1%. Step 
risetime is 260 ns within 15% and aberrations are within 2%. 
Step duration at blanking level and at white level is 13.2 /us 
within 5%. Intermediate step durations are 6.6 /is within 5%. 

CHROMINANCE COMPONENT— Amplitude is 143 mV P-P 
within 3%. Phase is 0°. 

DIFFERENTIAL PHASE— 0.1 ° or less. 

DIFFERENTIAL GAIN— 0.5% or less. 

SUBCARRIER ENVELOPE— Risetime is 260 ns within 15% and 
duration is 40 fi% within 5%. Envelope delay from horizontal 
sync is 16.1 /xs within 5%. 

50% FIXED APL — Each active line carries the modulated stair- 
case signal. APL is 50% per IRE standard, 60 IRE 23.S1. 

VARIABLE APL — Staircase signal is on every 5th line and the 
same line each frame. The variable amplitude low-frequency 
signal is on the remaining 4 out of 5 lines. APL range is 
10% to 90% in 10 equal increments (11 levels). 

VARIABLE APL LINES 

Luminance Component — Adjustable in 10 equal increments 
from IRE to 100 IRE. IRE position provides 10% APL, 
50 IRE position provides 50% APL and 100 IRE position 
provides 90% APL. 

Subcarrier Component — A three-position switch controls the 
insertion of subcarrier on the low-frequency lines. Posi- 
tions are: subcarrier off; unmodulated subcarrier; and 
modulated subcarrier. The unmodulated position provides 
30 mV P-P (approx 5 IRE at 90%) during active line time 
of 52.3 /is. The modulated subcarrier position provides 
30 mV within 3% for approx 13/j.s, 305 mV within 3% for 
approx 20 /j.s (corresponding to 6-dB amplitude reduction 
from the amplitude of chrominance on 75% amplitude red 
and cyan bars) and 610mV within 3% for the last 20 (is 
of the active line time (corresponding to the chrominance 
amplitude of 75% amplitude red and cyan bars phased 
at 90°). Incidental phase errors between 30-mV, 305-mV 
and 610-mV signals is 0.5° or less. 



CONVERGENCE PATTERN 

The convergence pattern signal is provided separate and 
independent from the other test signals. It is useful for meas- 
uring picture monitor or camera scanning linearity, aspect ratio 
and geometric distortion. It conforms to IRE standard 54 23. SI. 

DISPLAYS AVAILABLE— Cross hatch; vertical lines only; hori- 
zontal lines only; dots only; and cross hatch plus dots (dots 
appear centered in the rectangles formed by the cross-hatch 
pattern). 

CONVERGENCE PATTERN SIGNAL CHARACTERISTICS— The 

P-P amplitude is 1 V within 5%. Pulse amplitude is 714 mV 
within 5%. Sync amplitude is 286 mV within 5%. Setup is 
72 mV within 5%. 



90 



TYPE 



140 
R140 








C Ma *X 

>1 








Fig 13: Color bars inserted during vertical interval. 
The full field signal is a modulated staircase, variable 
APL, 90° modulated subcarrier inserted. 



Fig 14: Vector display of VITS color bars from the 
Type 140. 



Fig 15: Vector display. Split field color bars, 75% 
amplitude, 100% white reference, 10% setup. Conforms 
to EIA specification RS 189. 




Fig 16: Double exposure (left and right) of the 
W, Q and B bars with the I and Q depressed. 



Fig 17: Split field color bars per EIA specification 
RS 189. 



Fig 18: Display of -I, W, Q and B. 




Fig 22: Multiple exposure. 
APL, 10%, 50% and 90%. 



Staircase signal, variable 



Fig 23: Staircase signal with variable APL. Staircase 
signal occupies every 5th line and the same lines every 
field. 



Fig 21: Modulated staircase signal through the lumi- 
nance (Y) channel of the Type 520 NTSC Vectorscope. 




Fig 24: Luminance component of the split field color 
bars as viewed on the Type 520 NTSC Vectorscope. 



91 



TYPE 



140 
R140 




VERTICAL INTERVAL TEST SIGNALS 

A provision is made for insertion of either the staircase or 
the color bar, as a vertical interval test signal, on any line 
from 15 through 21 of either or both fields. The phase of the 
burst (and all other subcarrier frequency components of the 
test signal outputs) may be varied 360° with respect to the 
subcarrier frequency source (internal or external). 

With the 75% amplitude full field color bar signal or the 
modulated staircase signal inserted on an appropriate line 
of both fields, it is possible to test an entire video system in- 
cluding transmitters for differential phase and gain and verify 
if the actual phase and amplitude errors of the chrominance 
at all APL's conforms to FCC rules. 



SYNC GENERATOR AND COLOR STANDARD 

The EIA sync generator circuitry is largely digital, using in- 
tegrated circuitry for counting functions. The usual frequency 
multiplier circuits and their attendent problems have been 
avoided resulting in exceptional time stability. Internal controls 
permit some variation of widths including burst flag timing. 
These adjustments are preset to conform to FCC standards. 

The color standard has a proportional control oven for the 
quartz crystal and the entire oscillator circuit. The frequency 
stability achieved is well within FCC specifications. A front- 
panel lamp indicates proper operation of the oven. When the 
internal color standard is used, the phase of the color subcarrier 
output is variable over a 360° range with respect to the phase 
of the burst contained in the video output. When an external 
color standard is used the phase of the burst (and all other 
subcarrier frequency components of the test signal outputs) 
may be varied 360° to the external subcarrier source. 

SUBCARRIER— frequency is 3.579545 MHz within 5 Hz. 

Outputs — Subcarrier outputs are provided on the front and 
rear panels. Output impedance is 75 Q within 5%. Isola- 
tion is at least 30 dB. Output level is 2 V P-P within 10% 
into 75 n. 

Input — Subcarrier input requires 2 V P-P. The return loss is 
at least 40 dB using loop-through input. 



COMPOSITE SYNC 

Input — Required amplitude is 4 V within 0.5 V. 
is at least 46 dB using loop-through inputs. 



Return loss 



Output — A front-panel and a rear-panel output is provided. 
Output level is 4 V within 0.4 V. Return loss is at least 
30 dB. Isolation is at least 40 dB. 



HORIZONTAL DRIVE— Output level is 4 V within 15%. 

VERTICAL DRIVE— Output level is 4 V within 15%. 

COMPOSITE BLANKING OUTPUT— 4 V within 0.5 V. Isolation 
is at least 40 dB. Return loss is at least 30 dB. 

BURST — Breezeway is at least 379 ns. Risetime is 375 ns within 
15%. Envelope duration is 2.22 to 2.61 /is. Time duration 
from leading edge of sync pulse (10% amplitude reference) 
to trailing edge of burst envelope (10% amplitude refer- 
ence) is 7.94 fjs or less. Burst amplitude is 286 mV P-P within 
3%. 

HORIZONTAL BLANKING WIDTH— 11.2 ^s. 

FRONT PORCH WIDTH— 1.6 yus within 5%. 

LINE SYNC PULSE WIDTH— 4.77 /as within 3%. 

LINE SYNC PULSE RISETIME— 230 ns to 290 ns. 

VERTICAL BLANKING— 21 lines (digitally determined from 
3.579545 MHz). 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT— Outputs are provided on the 
front and rear panels. Amplitude is 1-V P-P into 75 0. Re- 
turn loss is at least 30 dB from DC to 5 MHz. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90-136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 
Hz to 66 Hz, 40 watts maximum at 11 5 VAC and 60 Hz. Rear- /> 
panel selector provides rapid accommodation for 6 line- " 
voltage ranges. 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE— Performance characteristics are val- 
id over an ambient temperature range of 0°C to +50°C 
(except as noted). 

TYPE 140 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 3 3 / 4 in 9.6 cm 

Width 16 3 / 4 in 42.6 cm 

Depth 18y 2 in 47.1 cm 

Net weight 16 3 / 4 lb 7.6 kg 

TYPE R140 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 3 3 / 4 in 9.6 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Depth 18'/ 2 in 47.1 cm 

Net weight 17 3 / 4 lb 8 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

75-17, through-line termination (011-0103-02); two instruction 
manuals (070-0944-00). 

Type R140 also includes rackmounting hardware. 

TYPE 140 NTSC TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR $1600 

TYPE R140 NTSC TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR (rackmount) 
$1600 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



92 



TYPE 



141 



R141 

PAL TELEVISION TEST SIGNAL 'RATOR 




• PAL COLOUR BARS 

EBU 75% amplitude, 100% saturated 
4-field blanking sequence per CCIR specifications 

• MODULATED STAIRCASE 
Fixed or variable APL 

• VERTICAL INSERTION TEST SIGNAL 
Modulated staircase 

Field I, Field 2, or both 



The Type 141 PAL Television Test Signal Generator is a 
source of high-quality television test signals for 625-line, 50- 
cycle field standard PAL colour TV Systems. The all solid-state 
Type 141 utilizes Digital Integrated Circuits to achieve sta- 
bility, accuracy and reliability. 

Three operating modes provide PAL Colour Bars, a 5-Step 
Staircase with fixed Average Picture Level (APL), and the 
same Staircase with variable APL. The colour bar output 
is a full-field test signal appearing on every active line and 
consists of EBU 75% amplitude, 100% saturated colour bars 
in descending luminance order, with white on the left and 
black on the right, PAL Colour Burst with 4-field blanking 
sequence per CCIR specifications and composite sync and 
blanking. 



The staircase signal is particularly useful with a Tektronix 
Type 520 PAL Vectorscope to measure differential phase 
and differential gain. Luminance channel linearity may also 
be measured using the Tektronix video staircase differentiator 
part #015-0075-00 (the transient response of the staircase 
signal component is determined by a sin 2 filter whose cut- 
off frequency limits the energy content in the region of the 
colour subcarrier frequency). 

The PAL subcarrier (140 mV P-P) is accurately phased at 180° 
(it lies along the — U PAL axis and is at the same phase on 
alternate lines). Subcarrier may be switched off when de- 
sired. 

To provide VITS (Vertical Insertion Test Signal) the staircase 
signal is keyed on during a selected line of the vertical 
blanking interval, either or both fields (line 11-22 on Field 1 
and line 324-335 on Field 2). 

Normal PAL colour burst is provided on the staircase and 
colour bar signals. The complex four-field Bruch blanking 
sequence during vertical interval is provided and may be 
switched off if desired. 

A 1-MHz reference signal which is frequency "locked" to 
the 4.43361875-MHz PAL subcarrier oscillator is provided at 
the rear of the instrument. The accuracy of the internal sub- 
carrier oscillator may be conveniently verified by comparing 
the 1-MHz reference with known frequencies, such as the 
Droitwich 200-kHz radio transmissions in Europe. 

The Type 141 is available in either rackmount (R141) or 
cabinet (141) styles. 



93 



TYPE 



141 
R141 

COLOUR BARS 



LUMINANCE AND CHROMINANCE AMPLITUDE ACCU- 
RACIES (25°C reference) Component amplitudes comply with 
the CCIR signal requirements as defined by CCIR, 11th Ple- 
nary Assembly, 1966, Vol. 5, p. 281. Absolute amplitudes of 
luminance signal, setup and sync are within 1% or 1.5 mV, 
whichever is greater. Absolute amplitudes of all subcarrier 
frequency components (chrominance and burst) are within 
3%. Relative amplitudes of all subcarrier frequency compo- 
nents (chrominance and burst) are within 1% or 1.5 mV, 
whichever is greater. 

BAR WIDTH— 6.5 ^s within 5%. 



WHITE REFERENCE- 

plitude. 



-100% amplitude (normal); or 75% am- 



CHROMINANCE — Time difference between luminance and 
chrominance channels is 20 ns or less. Risetime is 260 ns 
within 10%. U, V quadrature error is 0.5° or less, V axis 
phase-switcher error is 0.5° or less. 

RESIDUAL SUBCARRIER— At least 52 dB below 1 V on white 
and black. Aberrations are not more than 4% P-P. Spurious 
subcarrier is at least 52 dB below 1 V. Other spurious out- 
puts are at least 52 dB below 1 V. 




MODULATED STAIRCASE 

LUMINANCE COMPONENT— 5-step amplitude is 700 mV with- 
in 1%- Single-step amplitude is 140 mV within 1%. Step 
risetime is 260 ns within 15%. Step duration at blanking 
level and white level is 13 /as within 5%. Intermediate step 
durations are 6.5 jis within 5%. Aberrations are within 2%. 

CHROMINANCE COMPONENT— Amplitude is 140 mV P-P 
within 3%. Phase is 180°. 

DIFFERENTIAL PHASE— 0.1 " or less. 

DIFFERENTIAL GAIN— 0.5% or less at 0%, 50% and 100% 
APL. 




75% amplitude, 100% saturation PAL colour bars, 
white reference pulse at 100% amplitude. 



PAL colour bars, chrominance switched off, white ref- 
erence pulse at 75% amplitude. 



PAL colour bars, luminance component switched off. 




PAL colour bars, V component only; U, Y switched off. PAL colour bars, U component only; V, Y switched off. Vertical Insertion Test Signal, 5-step staircase with 

PAL subcarrier on line 16, field 1. 



94 



TYPE 



141 

R141 




5-step staircase waveform with PAL subcarrier along 
-U axis. PAL burst is provided. Note white reference 
level following the modulation. 



5-step staircase waveform, luminance only. Note double 
width black and white steps. Luminance transitions 
are sin= shaped of approx 260-ns risetime. 



Staircase signal with variable average picture level 
(shown at 100). Every fourth line in successive frames 
carries the stairstep signal. APL variable in 11 equal 
steps from black to white. 




Vector PAL presentation of PAL colour bar. 



Chrominance signal, green-magenta transition, 250 ns/crr 
time base. 



Stairstep 
individual 
Video Staircase 
00). 



luminance signal showing exact equality of 

transitions when differentiated by Tektronix 

Differentiator (part number 015-0075- 




PAL colour bars, luminance signal only, white reference 
pulse at 75% amplitude. 



PAL colour bar, demodulated to recover the RED signal. 



PAL colour bar, demodulated to recover the GREEN 
signal. 




L__ 



PAL Colour bar, 
signal. 



demodulated to recover the BLUE 



Combined differential gain of Type 520 PAL Vector- 
scope and Type 141 Generator. Minor scale divisions 
equal V2% differential gain. 



Modulated staircase signal from the Type 141 as viewed 
on the Type 520 PAL Vectorscope operating at maxi- 
mum resolution in the differential phase mode. Trace 
separation is 0.5°. Flatness of the traces indicates 
over-all differential phase of less than 0.1°. 



95 



TYPE 



141 

R141 



SUBCARRIER ENVELOPE— Risetime is 260 ns within 15% and 
duration is 39 /.is within 5%. 

50% FIXED APL — Each active line carries the modulated 
staircase signal. APL is 50%. 

VARIABLE APL — Staircase signal is on every 4th line and the 
same line every frame. Luminance level range is 300 mV 
to 1 V in 10 equal increments, within 2%. The 90° I '270° 
subcarrier modulation on the variable APL lines is 30 mV 
within 10%. 

VERTICAL INSERTION TEST SIGNAL 

The staircase signal may be keyed on during a selected line 
of the vertical blanking interval, either or both fields (line 
11-22 on Field 1 and line 324-335 on Field 2). 




SYNC GENERATOR 

SUBCARRIER— Frequency is 4.43361875 MHz within 5 Hz. 
Outputs — 3 outputs (BNC type connectors, 1 front panel and 
2 rear panel). Output impedance is 75 Q within 5%. Isola- 
tion is at least 30 dB. Output level is 2 V P-P within 10% into 

75 a. 

COMPOSITE SYNC — Two outputs (BNC type connectors, one 
front panel and one rear panel). Output level is 4 V within 
0.5 V. Return loss is at least 30 dB. Isolation is at least 40 dB. 

LINE BLANKING — Two outputs (BNC type connectors, one front 
panel, one rear panel). Output level is 1 V within 15%. 

FIELD BLANKING — Two outputs (BNC type connectors, one 
front panel, one rear panel). Output level is 1 V within 15%. 

1-MHz REFERENCE FREQUENCY— 1 rear-panel output, BNC 
type connector. Frequency is 1 .000000 MHz when subcarrier 
is 4.43361875 MHz. Amplitude is IV P-P within 20% into 
75Q. 

BURST FLAG — One rear-panel output, BNC type connector. 
Output level is 1 V within 15%. Burst flag period— At V 
for 2.2 /.is within 5%, at 1 V for 60.8 /is within 5%. 

25 Hz — One rear-panel output, BNC type connector. Output 
level is 1 V within 15%. 

12.5 Hz — One rear-panel output, BNC type connector. Output 
level is 1 V within 15%. 

BURST — 10 cycles within 1 cycle. Burst delay is 5.5 /is within 
0.2 /is. Burst component is 300 mV P-P within 3%. V com- 
ponent is 212 mV P-P within 3%. U component is 212 mV 
P-P within 3%. Amplitude ratio of U/V is 1.00 within 1%. 



Amplitude on successive lines — Smaller is between 97% and 
100% of the larger. Phasing— 135° within 1° and 225° 
within 1 ° on successive lines. Phasing between successive 
bursts is 90° within 1°. 

LINE PERIOD — 64 /xs (derived from PAL subcarrier frequency). 

HORIZONTAL BLANKING— 12.1 /is to 12.4/ts. 

FRONT PORCH— 1.8 /xs within 5%. 

LINE SYNC PULSE WIDTH— 4.7 /is within 5%. 

LINE SYNC PULSE RISETIME— 230 ns to 290 ns. 

FIELD PERIOD— 20 ms (digitally derived from 4.43361 875 MHz). 

VERTICAL BLANKING— 25 lines, 1600 /is (digitally derived 
from 4.43361 875 MHz). 

EQUALIZATION PULSE SEQUENCE DURATION— First se- 
quence, 2.5 H (lines); second sequence, 2.5 H (lines). 

FIELD SYNC PULSE SEQUENCE DURATION— 2.5 H (lines). 

FIELD SYNC PULSE DURATION— 27.3 /xs within 5%. 

INTERVAL BETWEEN FIELD SYNC PULSES— 4.7 /is within 5%. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

COMPOSITE VIDEO OUTPUT 

Two outputs are provided through BNC type connectors, one 
front panel and one rear panel. Composite video consists 
of composite sync and video test signals as selected by front- 
panel controls. Amplitude is 1 V P-P into 75 Q. Return loss 
is at least 30 dB. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 Hz to 66 Hz. 40 W 
max at 230 VAC, 50 Hz. A rear-panel selector provides ac- 
commodation for 6 line voltage ranges. 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE— Performance characteristics are val- 
id over an ambient temperature range of 0°C to +50°C 
(except as noted). 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Type 141 



Type R141 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

75-Q through-line termination (011-0103-02); 2 instruction 

manuals (070-0919-00). 

Type R141 also includes rackmounting hardware. 

TYPE 141 PAL TELEVISION TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR 



Height 


3 3 A in 


9.6 cm 


Width 


16 3 /, in 


42.6 cm 


Depth 


18V 2 in 


47.7 cm 


Net weight 


16 3 /, lb 


7.6 kg 


Height 


3 3 / 4 in 


9.6 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Depth 


18'/ 2 in 


47.7 cm 


Net weight 


17»/ 4 lb 


8.0 kg 



$1500 



TYPE R141 PAL TELEVISION TEST SIGNAL GENERATOR . . . 
$1500 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



96 



type 531 A 

DC-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE 




• 6x1 0-cm DISPLAY 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



The Type 531 A is the lowest-cost oscilloscope that accepts 
Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units. In common with other 
Type 530-Series Oscilloscopes, the Type 531 A has 10-kV 
accelerating voltage for bright displays, 6xl0-cm display 
area, and a DC-to-15 MHz vertical-deflection system. With 
spectrum analyzer and sampling plug-in units, measurement 
capabilities extend into the gigahertz region. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of the 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 ^s/cm to 5s/cm. 

X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 20 ns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm to 2V/cm, DC to 350 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 

ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (1-kHz square- 
wave). 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V 
(±9% on each range). 455 watts maximum. 



97 



TYPE 



531A 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

—500 /iV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 
35 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 13 MHz 


27 ns 


280 


1A4 

Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10 MHz 


25 ns 

35 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 11 MHz 


32 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
3 Hz to 14MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 justrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 fis 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /is 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 7 MHz 
DC to 13 MHz 


50 ns 
27 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


lO^V/cm 


10 Hz to 1 MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MH 


z 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5G 


Hz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1 .5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5mp/cm 


140-ps system riset 


me 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 15 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. See 
chart. 

RISETIME 

24 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 
DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 
SIGNAL OUTPUT 

<10Hz to >5MHz at 3-dB down, no load (cathode-follower 

output). At least 1.5 V for each centimeter of displayed signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 
0.1 jus/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 20 ns/ 
cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Fixed steps of approx 0.2V/cm and 2V/cm, continu- 
ously variable between steps and to approx 20 V/cm, DC 
to > 350 kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + peak 
AC) in most sensitive position. Input RC approx 1 Mfi paral- 
leled by approx 40 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gate (positive going from to at least +20 V), sawtooth 
(positive going from to at least +130 V). Cathode follower 
outputs. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic mode or manual level selection; high-frequency 
sync. Automatic operation is useful between approx 50 Hz 
and 2 MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for signals of dif- 
ferent amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. With no 
input (or input less than 50 Hz), automatic triggering occurs 
at an approx 40-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference 
trace. High-frequency sync assures a steady display of sine- 
waves from less than 5 to 30 MHz. 

COUPLING 

AC, DC or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier), external, or 
line. External trigger input RC approx 1 Mfi (except 91 kfi 
in AC LF reject) paralleled by approx 40 pF. 50-V maximum 
input (DC + peak AC). 

REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from 150 Hz to 2 MHz, 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or IV external at 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 150 Hz with AC coupling, below 
10 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. DC coupling requires 
0.4-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from DC to 2 MHz, increas- 
ing to 2-cm deflection or 1 V external at 5 MHz. Automatic 
operation requires 0.4-cm deflection or 0.4 V external from 
50 Hz to 1 MHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or 1 V external 
at 2 MHz. High-frequency sync requires 2-cm deflection or 
2 V external between approx 5 and 30 MHz. ±10-V trigger 
level selection. 



o 



98 



r 



type 531 A 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical post accelerating anode, 10- 
kV accelerating potential for bright displays. P2 phosphor 
normally supplied; PI, P7, Pll, or P31 are optional without 
extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or 
Distributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 20 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensities. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 
sequence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 115-V RMS ±9%; transformer taps permit opera- 
tion at 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V (±9% on each 
range); 50 to 60 Hz. 455-W maximum power consumption. 
Can be factory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, 
if so indicated on order. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


17 in 


43.2 cm 


Width 


12»/,« in 


32.9 cm 


Depth 


23 7 / 8 in 


60.7 cm 


Net weight 


56% lb 


25.7 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=75 lb 


=34.1 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=95 lb 


=43.2 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch patch 
cord (012-0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 
smoke-gray light filter (378-0567-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0130-00). 

TYPE 531 A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1075 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described 
in the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERA 
The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording 
requirements. For applications that might require a different 
viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descriptions or 
consult your field engineer, representative, or distributor. 
Standard C-12: f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, no-parallax viewing, Pola- 
roid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 531 A to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . $15 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 
Consists of cradle to support the Type 531 A in any standard 
19-inch relay rack, and mask to fit around the front panel. 
Requires 17V 2 -in panel height, order 040-0281-00 $31 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix general- 
purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides stable 
triggering for the display of composite video signals. A Video 
Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity of tele- 
vision systems and their components to be measured. See the 
catalog accessory pages for additional information. 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



99 



type 53 3 A 

DC-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCO 




• XI 00 SWEEP MAGNIFIER 

• 6 x 10 -cm DISPLAY 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG -IN UNITS 



The Type 533A is a DC-to-15 MHz oscilloscope with a wide 
range of application coverage through use of versatile Tektronix 
Plug-In Units. Six different degrees of sweep magnification are 
available. Sweep lockout and high writing speed are combined 
for best results in one-shot recording. 

Operating convenience results from functionally-grouped 
controls, a single-knob direct-reading sweep selector, warning 
lights for uncalibrated sweep-rate and sweep-magnifier settings, 
beam-position indicators, and built-in blanking for switching 
transients in multi-trace operation. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of the 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 ,us/cm to 5s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, X10, X20, X50, X100. Extends 
calibrated time base to 20 ns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to lOV/cm (calibrated) DC to 
500 kHz. 



CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V; 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244V 
(±9% on each range). 500 watts maximum. 



100 



/ 



type 53 3 A 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

—500 jiiV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 
35 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 13 MHz 


27 ns 


280 


1A4 

Four-Trace 


10 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10 MHz 


25 ns 
35 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 11 MHz 


32 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
3 Hz to 14 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


lO/xstrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60fi,s 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 ,11s 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 7 MHz 
DC to 13 MHz 


50 ns 
27 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


10/iV/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 Mr 


\z 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 G 


Hz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 C 


5Hz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 GF 


Iz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5mp/cm 


140-ps system rise! 


ime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 
BANDWIDTH 

DC to 15 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. See 

chart. 
RISETIME 

24 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 
DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 
SIGNAL OUTPUT 

<10Hz to >5MHz at 3-dB down, no load (cathode follower 

output). At least 1.5 V for each centimeter of displayed signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 
0.1 /xs/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

MAGNIFIER 
X2, X5, XI 0, X20, X50, or XI 00 magnification. Magnified 
time base accurate within 5% up to 20 ns/cm. Warning light 
indicates when magnified time base exceeds 20 ns/cm (uncali- 
brated). 

OPERATING MODES 

Normal, single sweep. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 
0.1, 1, and lOV/cm, accurate within 5%. Uncalibrated, con- 
tinuously variable between steps and to approx lOOV/cm. 
DC to >500kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + 
peak AC) in most sensitive position. Input RC approx 1 Mfi 
paralleled by approx 40 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 
Gate (positive going from to at least +20 V), sawtooth 
(positive going from to at least +130 V). Cathode follower 
outputs. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic mode or manual level selection; high-frequency 
sync. Automatic operation is useful between approx 50 Hz 
and 2 MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for signals of dif- 
ferent amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. With no input 
(or input less than 40 Hz), automatic triggering occurs at an 
approx 50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. 
High-frequency sync assures a steady display of sinewaves 
from less than 5 to 30 MHz. 

COUPLING 
AC, DC or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier), external, or 
line. External trigger input RC approx 1 Mn (except 91 kQ 
in AC LF reject) paralleled by approx 40 pF. 50-V maximum 
input (DC + peak AC). 

REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from 150 Hz to 2 MHz, 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or 1 V external at 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 150 Hz with AC coupling, below 
10 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. DC coupling requires 
0.4-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from DC to 2 MHz, increas- 
ing to 2-cm deflection or 1 V external at 5 MHz. Automatic 
operation requires 0.4-cm deflection or 0.4 V external from 
50 Hz to 1 MHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or 1 V external 
at 2 MHz. High-frequency sync requires 2-cm deflection or 
2 V external between approx 5 and 30 MHz. ±10-V trigger 
level selection. 

101 



\ 



type 533 A 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical post accelerating anode, 10- 
kV accelerating potential for bright displays. P2 phosphor 
normally supplied; PI, P7, Pll, or P31 are optional without 
extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or 
Distributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 20 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 
sequence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 115-V RMS ±9%; transformer taps permit opera- 
tion 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V (±9% on each range); 
50 to 60 Hz. 500-W maximum power consumption. Can be 
factory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, if so 
indicated on order. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6006 10X Probes (010-0127-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch patch 
cord (012-0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 
smoke-gray light filter (378-0567-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0258-00). 

TYPE 533A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units. . $1200 



17 in 


43.2 cm 


12"/ M in 


32,9 cm 


23 7, in 


60.7 cm 


57V 2 lb 


26.2 kg 


76 lb 


St34.6 kg 


95 lb 


^43.2 kg 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described 
in the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERA 

The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording 
requirements. For applications that might require a different 
viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descriptions 
or consult your field engineer, representative, or distributor. 
Standard C-12: f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, no-parallax viewing, Pola- 
roid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 533A to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . $15 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 

Consists of cradle to support the Type 533A in any standard 
19-inch relay rack, and mask to fit around the front panel. 
Requires 17'/ 2 -inch panel height, order 040-0281-00 .... $31 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix general- 
purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides stable 
triggering for the display of composite video signals. A Video 
Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity of tele- 
vision systems and their components to be measured. See the 
catalog accessory pages for additional information. 

^Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



102 



TYPE 



535A 




RM35A 

C-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 



• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• 6 x JO -cm DISPLAY 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



The Type 535A and RM35A Oscilloscopes are versatile lab- 
oratory instruments designed for use with all Tektronix Letter- 
Series or I -Series Plug-In Units. 

The two time-base generators can be used in delayed sweep 
operation for highly accurate time measurements. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of all I -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— O.l /as/cm to 5s/cm. 
X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 20 ns/cm. 
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 2 ^s to 10 s. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm to 2 V/cm, DC to 350 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (1-kHz square- 
wave). 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244V 
(±9% on each range), 550 watts maximum. 



103 



TYPE 



535A 
RM35A 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

~500 //.V/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 

35 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 13 MHz 


27 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


825 


M 

Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10MHz 


25 ns 

35 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 11 MHz 


32 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
3 Hz to 14MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 
Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /xstrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 /as 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 

Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 

DC to 14 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /is 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


205 


W 
Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 7 MHz 
DC to 13 MHz 


50 ns 
27 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


10/xV/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MH 


i 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GH 


z 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 GH 


i 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mo/cm 


140-ps system risetime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


| 90 ps 




VERTICAL DEFLECTION 
BANDWIDTH 

DC to 15 MHz at 3dB down, depending on plug-in unit. See 
chart. 

RISETIME 
24 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

DELAY LINE 
Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

<10Hz to >5MHz at 3-dB down, no load (cathode fol- 
lower output). At least 1.5 V for each centimeter of displayed 
signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A 

0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

TIME BASE B 
2/x.s/cm to Is/cm in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Sweep length continuously variable 
from 4 to 10 cm, allowing use of Time Base B as a repetition- 
rate generator from 0.1 Hz to 40 kHz. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest Time Base A 
rate to 20 ns/cm, and the fastest Time Base B rate to 0.4 /is/ 
cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
2 /is to 10 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 1% (3% at 3 slowest sweep rates) of indicated delay 
±2 minor dial divisions (add processing time of approx 
300 ns at fast sweep rates). Incremental delay-time accurate 
within 1% ±4 minor divisions. Short-term jitter < 1/20,000 
of total Time Base B delay time. 

DELAY MODES 
Depending on the setting of the Delayed Sweep stability 
control, the Delayed Sweep can start immediately at end of 
delay time, or be triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter- 
free displays). 

OPERATING MODES 
Time Base A — Normal, single sweep, delayed by B. 
Time Base B — Normal, intensified by A. 



104 



TYPE 



535A 
RM35A 



EXTERNAL INPUT 

Fixed steps of approx 0.2 V/cm and 2 V/cm, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 20 V/cm, DC to >350 
kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + peak AC). Input 
RC approx 1 MQ paralleled by approx 47 pF. 
SIGNAL OUTPUTS 
Gates from both time bases (positive going from to at least 
+20 V), sawtooth from Time Base A (positive going from to 
at least +130 V), and a delayed trigger pulse (positive going 
from to at least +5V). Cathode-follower outputs. 

TRIGGER 
MODES 

Automatic mode or manual level selection; high-frequency 
sync on Time Base A. Automatic operation is useful between 
approx 50 Hz and 2 MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for 
signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. 
With no input (or input less than 50 Hz), automatic triggering 
occurs at an approx 40-Hz rate, providing a convenient 
reference trace. High-frequency sync assures a steady display 
of sinewaves from less than 5 MHz to 30 MHz. 

COUPLING 
AC or DC; AC LF reject on Time Base A. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier), external, or 
line. External trigger input RC approx 1 MQ (91 kQ at AC LF 
reject) paralleled by approx 40 pF for Time Base A, approx 
1 MQ paralleled by approx 50 pF for Time Base B. 

TIME BASE A REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from 150 Hz to 2 MHz, 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or IV external at 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 150 Hz with AC coupling, below 
10 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. DC coupling requires 
0.4-cm deflection or 0.2 V external to 2 MHz, increasing to 2- 
cm deflection or 1 V external at 5 MHz. Automatic operation 
requires 0.4-cm deflection or 0.4 V external from 50 Hz to 
1 MHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or 1 V external at 2 MHz. 
High-frequency sync requires 2-cm deflection or 2 V external 
between approx 5 and 30 MHz. ±10-V trigger level range. 

TIME BASE B REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from 150 Hz to 1 MHz, 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or IV external at 3 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 150 Hz with AC coupling. DC 
coupling requires 0.4-cm deflection or 0.2 V external to 1 
MHz, increasing to 2-cm deflection or 1 V external at 3 MHz. 
Automatic operation requires 0.4-cm deflection or 0.4 V ex- 
ternal from 50 Hz to 1 MHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or 
1 V external at 2 MHz. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical 

10-kV accelerating potential for 

phor normally supplied, PI, P7, Pll 

out extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, 

or Distributor for application information and availability. 

Z-axis input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 20 V peak 

to peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 6 x 10-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 
Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
0.2 mV to 100 V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 



post accelerating anode, 
bright displays. P2 phos- 
I, or P31 are optional with- 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 115 V RMS ±9%; transformer taps permit opera- 
tion at 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V (±9% on each 
range); 50 to 60 Hz. 550-W maximum power consumption. 
Can be factory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, 
if so indicated on order. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 17 in 43.2 cm 

Width 12' 5 / 16 in 32.9 cm 

Depth 23% in 60.7 cm 

Net weight 61 '/„ lb 27.9 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 80 lb ~36.4 kg 

Export-packed weight ~100 lb ~45.5 kg 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 14 in 35.6 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Rack depth 22 n / 1(S in 57.6 cm 

Net weight 78'/, lb 35.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~104 lb ~47.3 kg 

Export-packed weight ~125 lb ~56.8 kg 

RACKMOUNTING 
Type RM35A withdraws from its cabinet on slide-out tracks, 
tilts and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information 
on catalog instrument dimensions page. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch patch 
cord (012-0091-00); BNC post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 
smoke-gray light filter (378-0567-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0145-01). Type RM35A also includes mounting hard- 
ware. 

TYPE 535A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1450 

TYPE RM35A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1550 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described 
in the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERA 
The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording 
requirements. For applications that might require a differ- 
ent viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descrip- 
tions or consult your field engineer, representative, or dis- 
tributor. 
Standard C-12: f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, no-parallax viewing, 

Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 535A to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 $ 15 

PROBES 
The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 
In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix gen- 
eral-purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides 
stable triggering for the display of composite video signals. 
A Video Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity 
of television systems and their components to be measured. 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverlon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

705 



type 53S 



\ 



DC-to-11 MHz X-Y OSCILLOSCOPE 




o 



• ACCURATE PHASE BALANCE 

• X-Y or Y-T DISPLAYS 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



The Type 536 represents a combination of wide-band "X-Y" 
and general-purpose laboratory oscilloscopes. Identical main 
amplifiers and a Tektronix CRT with equal X and Y deflection 
characteristics are the basic components. Using identical wide- 
band Plug-In Units, horizontal and vertical deflection systems 
are almost identical. Relative phase shift is less than 1 ° to 
15 MHz, and phase balance can be obtained at any frequency 
to 30 MHz. 

With the Type T Plug-In Unit providing horizontal deflection, 
and any Letter-Series or 1 -Series Plug-In Unit providing vertical 
deflection, the Type 536 functions as a general-purpose instru- 
ment. In order to view the leading edge of a fast-rising wave- 
form, a pretrigger signal occurring approx 0.2 /as in advance of 
the signal to be viewed must be applied to the external trigger 
input of the Type T Unit. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL 

Vertical and horizontal deflection characteristics are extremely 
flexible through use of the 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In 
Units. 



TIME-BASE DEFLECTION 

(with Type T Time-Base Generator) 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.2 M s/div to 2s/div. 
5X MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 40 ns/div. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 10x10 divisions (3V 8 x3y 8 inches). 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V ; 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V 
(±9% on each range). Approx 625 watts maximum. 



106 



TYPE 536 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 




PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

~500 fiV/cm 


DC to 1 1 MHz 
DC to 10 MHz 
2 Hz to 8 MHz 


32 ns 

35 ns 
44 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 10 MHz 
2 Hz to 9 MHz 


35 ns 

40 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 9.5 MHz 


37 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 11 MHz 
3 Hz to 10 MHz 


32 ns 
35 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 //.strain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60/j.s 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 




1A5 
Comparator 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 ^ts 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/xV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 6.5 MHz 
DC to 10 MHz 


54 ns 
35 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


lOjuV/cm 


10 Hz to 1 MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


— 100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MH 


z 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5C 


Hz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70dBrr 


1.5 GHz to 40 C 


5Hz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 p: 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system risel 


ime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 p 



APPLICATIONS 

In curve-tracing applications the Type 536 extends the range 
of familiar techniques to today's higher-frequency problems. 
Differential input, a feature that eliminates the need for a 
common XY terminal, is available in the wide-band Type G 
Plug-In Preamplifier. A pair of Type G Units provides accuracy 
needed in many curve-tracing applications. 
Some applications for a wide-band "X-Y" oscilloscope: 

1. Examination of semiconductor diode characteristics — volts 
vs amperes plot. 

2. Determination of ferromagnetic material characteristics. 

3. Linear amplifier distortion measurement. 

4. Limiting or expanding-amplifier performance measure- 
ments. 

5. Displaying pressure vs volume diagrams. 

6. Analyzing amplitude selector type circuits such as Schmitt, 
diode pick-off, etc. 

7. Checking regulated power supply performance. 

8. Measurement of voltage coefficient of resistors. 

9. Performance tests of various modulation systems such as 
AM, suppressed carrier, FM, PTM, PAM, etc. 

10. Performance tests of demodulators for above modulation 
systems. 

11. Determining gating circuit characteristics. 

12. Function generator — y = f (x). 

VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

Two identical systems 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 11 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. See 
chart. 

RISETIME 
32 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

At least 1 V for each division of displayed signal. Cathode 
follower outputs. 

PHASE DIFFERENCE IN X-Y MODE 

<1° from DC to 15 MHz with two Type K Units at 50 mV/div. 
Front-panel control for amplifier phasing to 30 MHz, with 
signals not overdriving the Type K Units. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

With Type T Plug-In Unit 

TIME BASE 

0.2/ts/div to 2s/div in 22 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable be- 
tween steps and to approx 5 s/div. Warning light indicates 
uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 40 ns/ 
div. Magnified display accurate within 5%. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gate (positive going from to at least +20 V), sawtooth 
(positive going from to at least +150 V). Cathode follower 
outputs. 



107 



type 53s 



TRIGGER 

With Type T Plug- In Unit 

MODES 
Automatic or manual level selection; high-frequency sync. 
Automatic operation is useful between approx 50 Hz and 2 
MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for signals of different 
amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. With no input (or 
input less than 40 Hz), automatic triggering occurs at an 
approx 50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. 
High-frequency sync assures a steady display of sinewaves 
from approx 5 to 15 MHz. 

COUPLING 
AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

External or line. External trigger input RC approx 100 kfi 
paralleled by approx 25 pF. 

REQUIREMENTS 
0.2 V from DC to 1 MHz, increasing to 10 V at 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 100 Hz with AC coupling, below 
10 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. High-frequency sync 
requires 2 V from approx 5 to 15 MHz. 

CRT 
TEKTRONIX CRT 

Identical characteristics for vertical and horizontal deflection 
plates. 4-kV accelerating potential. P31 phosphor normally 
supplied; PI, P2, P7, or PI 1 are optional without extra charge. 
Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for 
application information and availability. Z-axis inputs: Front 
panel connector provides AC or DC coupling to CRT grid. 
Rear panel connector is AC coupled to CRT cathode. Both 
require 20 V peak to peak for beam modulation at normal 
intensity. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 10 x 10-division display area 
[3 } /zx3y e inches). Vertical and horizontal center lines marked 
in 1/5 divisions. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 
sequence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
Wired for 115-V RMS ±9%; transformer taps permit opera- 
tion at 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V (±9% on each 
range); 50 to 60 Hz. 625-W maximum power consumption 
with 2 Type K Units. Can be factory wired for any of the 
above nominal voltages, if so indicated on order. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 17 in 43.2 cm 

Width 12 1S / 16 in 32.9 cm 

Depth 23% in 60.7 cm 

Net weight 56 3 / 4 lb 25.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ^73 lb ~33.2 kg 

Export-packed weight ~93 lb ^42.3 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch patch 
cord (012-0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 
smoke-gray light filter (378-0567-00); phase-measurement grati- 
cule (331-0057-00); two instruction manuals (070-0270-00). 

TYPE 536 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1175 



108 




TYPE T TIME-BASE GENERATOR $260 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described 
in the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERA 
The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording 
requirements. For applications that might require a different 
viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descriptions or 
consult your field engineer, representative, or distributor. 
Standard C-12: f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, no-parallax viewing, Pola- 
roid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 536 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . . $15 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited for 
particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 
Consists of cradle to support the Type 536 in any standard 
19-inch relay rack, and mask to fit around the front panel. 
Requires 17V 2 -inch panel height, order 040-0281-00 $31 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



I 



TYPE 



RM543B 

DC-to-33 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 




• XI 00 SWEEP MAGNIFIER 

• UNIFORM-FOCUS 6 x ! O-cm DISPLAY 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG -IN UNITS 



The Type 543B and RM543B are versatile laboratory oscillo- 
scopes designed for use with all Tektronix Letter-Series and 1- 
Series Plug-In Units. 

A wide-range magnifier provides six steps of sweep mag- 
nification from X2 to XI 00. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 /xs/cm to 5s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, X10, X20, X50, XI 00. Extends 
time base accurately to 20 ns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to lOV/cm (calibrated), DC to 
500 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6 x 10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 
50 to 60 Hz, 475 watts. 



109 



TYPE 



543B 
RM543B 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

—500 /tV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 

DC to 23 MHz 
2 Hz to 14 MHz 


11 ns 
16 ns 
25 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 


11 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 


11 ns 


825 


M 

Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 
2 Hz to 12 MHz 


18 ns 
30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /istrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 jx% 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 
DC to 31 MHz 
DC to 30 MHz 


11 ns 

12 ns 
12ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /.is 


250 


1A7A 

High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


lOjuV/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system risetime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 




> 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 33 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 
See chart. 

RISETIME 

11 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 
DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

Approx 1.2 V for each centimeter of displayed signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 
TIME BASE 
0.1 jx%/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable be- 
tween steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indicates 
uncalibrated setting. 

MAGNIFIER 

X2, X5, XI 0, X20, X50 or XI 00 magnification. Magnified 
time base accurate within 5% up to 20ns/cm. Warning light 
indicates if time base exceeds 20 ns/cm (uncalibrated). 

OPERATING MODES 

Normal, single sweep. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

0.1, 1, and lOV/cm, accurate within 5%. Uncalibrated, con- 
tinuously variable between steps and to approx lOOV/cm. 
DC to >500kHz at — 3 dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + 
peak AC) in most-sensitive position. Input RC approx 1 MQ 
paralleled by approx 55 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gate (positive going from to at least +20 V), sawtooth 
(positive going from to at least +130V). 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic mode or manual level selection. Automatic opera- 
tion is useful between approx 50 Hz and 10 MHz, minimizes 
trigger adjustments for signals of different amplitudes, shapes, 
and repetition rates. With no input (or input less than 50 Hz), 
automatic triggering occurs at an approx 40-Hz rate, pro- 
viding a convenient reference trace. 



110 



TYPE 



543B 
RM543B 



COUPLING 

AC, DC or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier), external, or 
line. External trigger input RC approx 1 Mfi (91 kfJ at AC 
LF reject) paralleled by approx 25 pF. 50-V maximum input 
(DC + peak AC). 

REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from 150 Hz to 10 MHz, 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or IV external at 30 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 30 kHz with AC low-frequency 
reject. DC coupling requires 0.6-cm deflection or 0.2 V ex- 
ternal to 10 MHz. Automatic operation requires 0.5-cm de- 
flection or 0.5 V external at 150 Hz, increased deflection 
to 10 MHz. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical post accelerating anode, 10-kV 
accelerating potential for bright displays. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied; P2, P7, or Pll are optional without extra 
charge, consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Dis- 
tributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 15 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, parallax-free; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm dis- 
play area. Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 
2-mm divisions. Two additional horizontal lines for con- 
venient risetime measurements. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 
Special output, useful in calibrating sampling plug-ins, pro- 
vides 0.1 V ±3% into 50 O. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz ; 475 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 17 in 43.2 cm 

Width 12"/ M in 32.9 cm 

Depth 23 7 / 8 in 60.7 cm 

Net weight 60V 4 lb 27.4 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~78 lb ~35.5 kg 

Export-packed weight ~97 lb ~44.1 kg 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 14 in 35.6 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Rack depth 22 n / u in 57.6 cm 

Net weight 81 lb 36.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~106 lb ~48.2 kg 

Export-packed weight =;130 lb ^59.1 kg 

RACKMOUNTING 
Type RM543B withdraws from its cabinet on slide-out tracks, 
tilts and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information on 
catalog instrument dimension page. 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 50-fi 
cable (012-0076-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch patch cord (01 2-0087- 
00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch patch cord (012-0091-00); 
BNC post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 
smoke-gray light filter, installed (378-0567-00); clear CRT 
protection plate (387-0918-00); two instruction manuals (070- 
0429-00). Type RM543B also includes mounting hardware. 

TYPE 543B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1375 

TYPE RM543B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1475 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 




CAMERAS 

C-12 has beam-splitting mirror for straight-on viewing and use 
of optional projected graticule, f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid* 
Land Pack-Film back accepts 3000-speed film, order Stand- 
ard C-12 $460 

Type 543B to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 $ 15 

C-27 provides direct viewing and maximum transmission of 
light to film, f/1.9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid Land Pack-Film back 
accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard C-27 $430 

Type 543B to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016-0225-02 $ 15 

Polaroid Roll-Film back accepts 10,000-speed film for in- 
creased writing speed, can be substituted at no additional 
cost in either camera. Order C-12R or C-27R. Optional 
lenses are also available. 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units. 
9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 .... $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix gen- 
eral-purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides 
stable triggering for the display of composite video signals. 
A Video Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linear- 
ity of television systems and their components to be meas- 
ured. See catalog accessory pages for additional information. 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



111 



TYPE 



544 
RM544 



DC-to-50 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE 




) 



• XI 00 SWEEP MAGNIFIER 

• UNIFORM-FOCUS 6 x 1 0-cm DISPLAY 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



Type 544 and RM544 Oscilloscopes are versatile laboratory 
instruments designed for maximum performance with all Letter- 
Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units. Bandwidth extends from 
DC to 50 MHz. 

A wide-range magnifier provides six steps of sweep magnifi- 
cation from X2 to XI 00. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 



HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 ,is/cm to 5 s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, XI 0, X20, X50, XI 00. Extends 
calibrated time base accurately to lOns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to lOV/cm (calibrated). DC to 
400 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (1-kHz square- 
wave), 100 V DC, 5 mA DC, 5 mA 1-kHz squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 
50 to 60 Hz, 475 watts. 



112 



TYPE 



544 
RM544 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 




1A1 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

~500 juV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 

DC to 28 MHz 
2 Hz to 15 MHz 


7 ns 
13 ns 
24 ns 


I 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


1A4 

Four-Trace 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


825 


M 

Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


560 




SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 

2 Hz to 12 MHz 


18 ns 

30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


235 




SPECIAL PURPOSE 




O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /zstrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 (is 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 




1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 45 MHz 
DC to 40 MHz 


7 ns 

8 ns 

9 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 jus 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


lOjtiV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 




SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


lOjuV/cm 


10 Hz to IMF 


\z 


$1025 


1L10 


-lOOdBm 


1 MHz to 36 M 


Hz 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 


3Hz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 G 


Hz 


2150 




WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 




1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system ris< 


:time 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 




VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 50 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. See 

chart. 

RISETIME 

7 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of display waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

20-ns risefime, at least 0.3 V for each centimeter of displayed 
signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE 
0.1 /.is/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

MAGNIFIER r . , 

X2, X5, XI 0, X20, X50 or XI 00 magnification. Magnified 
time base accurate within 5% up to lOns/cm. Warning light 
indicates if time base exceeds lOns/cm (uncalibrated). 

OPERATING MODES 

Normal, single sweep. Single sweep reset at front panel, 
or with >+20-V pulse with <0.5-,us risetime, through rear- 
panel connector. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

0.1, 1, and lOV/cm, accurate within 5%. Uncalibrated, 
continuously variable between steps and to approx lOOV/cm. 
DC to > 400 kHz at — 3 dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + 
peak AC) in most sensitive position. Input RC approx 1 MQ 
paralleled by approx 55 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gate (positive-going from to at least +20 V) sawtooth 
(positive-going from to at least +90 V). 



113 



TYPE 



544 
RM544 



TRIGGER 
MODES 

Manual level selection with triggered or automatic opera- 
tion. Automatic operation provides a convenient reference 
trace with no trigger-signal input, or repetition rates less than 
20 Hz. Reference trace is bright throughout the full time- 
base range. 

COUPLING 

AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier or direct from 
a single channel of Type 1A1, 1A2, or 1A4 Plug-In Units), 
external, or line. 30-V maximum external input (DC + peak 
AC). External trigger input RC approx 1.1 Ma paralleled 
by approx 30 pF. 

REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at 1 kHz, increasing to 
1-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at 50 MHz. Requirements 
increase below 2 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. DC 
coupling requires 0.5-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at DC 
to 50 MHz. ±2-V or ±20-V trigger level selection. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metalized screen, helical post accelerating anode, 10-kV 
accelerating potential for bright displays. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied, P2, P7, or PI 1 are optional without extra 
charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Dis- 
tributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 15 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, parallax-free; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm dis- 
play area. Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 
2-mm divisions. Two additional horizontal lines for con- 
venient risetime measurements. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2mV-to-100V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 
50-n source resistance from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. 0.6-^s risetime 
from 0.2 mV to 5 V; 1-^us from 10 V to 100 V. 100-V DC 
reference output also provided. Front-panel current loop for 
5-mA, ±3%, squarewave or DC. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz ; 475 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Hei 9 hf 17 in 43.2 cm 

Width i2»/„ in 32.9 cm 

Depth 23% in 60.7 cm 

Net weight 61 lb 27.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ^80 lb ^36.4 kg 

Export-packed weight ~97 lb ~44.1 kg 



RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


14 in 


35.6 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Rack depth 


22"/,, in 


57.6 cm 


Net weight 


82'/, lb 


37.4 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


—106 lb 


—48.2 kg 


Export-packed weight 


—130 lb 


SS59.1 kg 



RACKMOUNTING 

Type RM544 withdraws from its cabinet on slide-out tracks, 
tilts and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information 
on catalog instrument dimension page. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6008 10X probes (010-0129-00), two BNC-to-BNC 18- 
inch patch cords (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0091-00), BNC-post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); smoke-gray light filter, installed 
(378-0567-00); clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0418-00). Type RM544 also includes 
mounting hardware. 

TYPE 544 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1550 

TYPE RM544 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1650 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

CAMERAS 

C-12 has beam-splitting mirror for straight-on viewing and use 
of optional projected graticule, f/1. 9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid* 
Land Pack-Film back accepts 3000-speed film, order Stand- 
ard C-12 $4 6 o 

Type 544 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . . $ 15 

C-27 provides direct viewing and maximum transmission of 
light to film, f/1. 9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid Land Pack-Film back 

accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard C-27 $430 

Type 544 to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016-0225-02 . . $ 15 

Polaroid Roll-Film back accepts 10,000-speed film for in- 
creased writing speed, can be substituted at no additional 
cost in either camera. Order C-12R or C-27R. Optional 
lenses are also available. 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 
9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix gen- 
eral-purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides 
stable triggering for the display of composite video signals. 
A Video Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity 
of television systems and their components to be measured. 
See the catalog accessory pages for additional information. 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



114 



TYPE 



RM545B 

DC-to-33 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 




• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• UNIFORM-FOCUS 6 x I O-cm DISPLAY 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG -IN UNITS 



The Type 545B and RM545B are versatile laboratory oscillo- 
scopes designed for use with all Tektronix Letter-Series and 1- 
Series Plug-In Units. 

Two separate time-base generators can be used in delayed- 
sweep operation for highly-accurate time measurements. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 /xs/cm to 5s/cm. Time Base B 
2 /xs/cm to 1 s/cm. 

X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 20 ns/cm. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 2 /xs to 10 s. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm, DC to 350 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 
VAC, 50 to 60 Hz, 500 watts. 



775 



TYPE 



\ 



RM545B 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 
BANDWIDTH 

DC to 33 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 
See chart. 

RISETIME 

11 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 
DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 
SIGNAL OUTPUT 

Approx 1.2 V for each centimeter of displayed signal. 



VERTICAL 

PLUG-IN 

UNITS 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

~500 /iV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 
2 Hz to 14 MHz 


11 ns 
16 ns 
25 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 


11 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


1A4 

Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 


11 ns 


825 


M 

Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 
2 Hz to 12 MHz 


18 ns 
30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10;u.srrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60,us 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 
DC to 31 MHz 
DC to 30 MHz 


11 ns 

12 ns 
12 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 pa 


250' 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/xV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


lO^V/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system risetime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 




HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A 
0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12.5 s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

TIME BASE B 
2/xs/cm to Is/cm in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Sweep length continuously variable 
from 4 to 10 cm, allowing use of Time Base B as a repetition- 
rate generator from 0.1 Hz to 40 kHz. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 
Operates over full time base, increases fastest Time Base 
A rate to 20 ns/cm, and the fastest Time Base B rate to 0.4 
fis/cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
2 fus to 10 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 1 % of indicated delay ±2 minor dial divisions (add 
processing time of approx 200 ns at fast sweep rates). Incre- 
mental delay-time accurate within 1% ±4 minor dial divi- 
sions. Short-term jitter < 1/20,000 of total Time Base B delay 
time. 

DELAY MODES 

Depending on the setting of the Delayed Sweep stability 
control, the Delayed Sweep can start immediately at end of 
delay time, or be triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter- 
free displays). 

OPERATING MODES 
Time Base A — Normal, single sweep, delayed by B. 
Time Base B — Normal, intensified by A. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Fixed steps of approx 0.2 V/cm and 2 V/cm, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 20 V/cm, DC to >350 
kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + peak AC). Input 
RC approx 1 MQ paralleled by approx 45 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gates from both time bases (positive going from to at least 
+20 V), sawtooth from Time Base A (positive going from to 
at least +130V), and a delayed trigger pulse (positive going 
from to at least +5V). 



I 



116 



TYPE 



RM545B 



TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic mode or manual level selection. Automatic opera- 
tion is useful between approx 50 Hz and 10 MHz, minimizes 
trigger adjustments for signals of different amplitudes, shapes, 
and repetition rates. With no input (or input less than 50 Hz), 
automatic triggering occurs at an approx 40-Hz rate, provid- 
ing a convenient reference trace. 

COUPLING 
AC or DC; AC LF reject on Time Base A. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier), external, or 
line. 50-V maximum external input (DC -f peak AC). External 
trigger input RC approx 1 Mfi (91 kO at AC LF reject) paral- 
leled by approx 25 pF for Time Base A, approx 1 MQ paral- 
leled by approx 47 pF for Time Base B. 

TIME BASE A REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from 150 Hz to 10 MHz 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or 1 V external at 30 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 30 kHz with AC low-frequency 
reject. DC coupling requires 0.6-cm deflection or 0.2 V 
external to 10 MHz. Automatic operation requires 0.5-cm 
deflection or 0.5 V external at 150 Hz, increased deflection to 
10 MHz. 

TIME BASE B REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2-V external at 300 Hz to 5 MHz, in- 
creasing to 1-cm deflection or 1-V external at 10 MHz. Re- 
quirements increase below 300 Hz with AC coupling. DC 
coupling requires 0.6-cm deflection or 0.2-V external to 5 MHz. 
Automatic operation requires 0.5-cm deflection or 0.5-V exter- 
nal at 300 Hz, will trigger from 50 Hz to 5 MHz with increased 
signal. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical post accelerating anode. 10-kV 
accelerating potential for bright displays. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied; P2, P7, or PI 1 are optional without extra 
charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative or Dis- 
tributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 15 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, parallax-free; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm dis- 
play area. Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 
2-mm divisions. Two additional horizontal lines for conven- 
ient risetime measurements. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching transients 
from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated in 
chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 
Special output, useful in calibrating sampling plug-ins, pro- 
vides 0.1 V ±3% into 50 n. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz; 500 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 



CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 17 in 43.2 cm 

Width 12' 5 / 16 in 32.9 cm 

Depth 23% in 60.7 cm 

Net weight 64 lb 29.1 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~82 lb ~37.3 kg 

Export-packed weight ~101 lb ~45.9 kg 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 14 in 35.6 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Rack depth 22 n / u in 57.6 cm 

Net weight 85 lb 38.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~111 lb ~50.5 kg 

Export-packed weight =;130 lb SS59.1 kg 

RACKMOUNTING 

Type RM545B withdraws from its cabinet on slide-out tracks, 
tilts and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information 
on catalog instrument dimension page. 
INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 50-Q 
cable (012-0076-00); two BNC-to-BNC 18-inch patch cords 
(012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch patch cord (012- 
0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00), 3 to 2-wire adapter 
(103-0013-00); smoke-gray light filter, installed (378-0567-00); 
clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0428-00). Type RM545B also includes mounting 
hardware. 
TYPE 545B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . $1625 
TYPE RM545B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1725 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

CAMERAS 

C-12 has beam-splitting mirror for straight-on viewing and 
use of optional projected graticule, f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, Pola- 
roid* Land Pack-Film back accepts 3000-speed film, order 

Standard C-12 $460 

Type 545B to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . $ 15 
C-27 provides direct viewing and maximum transmission of 
light to film, f/1.9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid Land Pack-Film 
back accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard C-27 . . $430 
Type 545B to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016-0225-02 . $ 15 
Polaroid Roll-Film back accepts 10,000-speed film for increased 
writing speed, can be substituted at no additional cost in 
either camera. Order C-12R or C-27R. Optional lenses are 
also available. 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 
In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix general- 
purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides stable 
triggering for the display of composite video signals. A 
Video Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity 
of television systems and their components to be measured. 

*Regisfered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



117 



TYPE 



546 



\ 



RM546 

DC-to-50 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 




• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• UNIFORM-FOCUS 6 x I O-cm DISPLAY 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG -IN UNITS 



Type 546 and RM546 Oscilloscopes are versatile laboratory 
instruments designed for maximum performance with all Letter- 
Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units. Bandwidth extends from DC 
to 50 MHz. 

The two time-base generators can be used in delayed sweep 
operations for highly accurate time measurements. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 ps/cm to 5s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, or XI extends calibrated time 
base to lOns/cm. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 0.1 ,. t s to 50 s. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm-to-1 V/cm deflection factor, DC 
to 500 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave, 100 V DC, 5 mA DC, 5 mA 1-kHz squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 
50 to 60 Hz, 550 watts. 



118 



TYPE 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

~500 ftV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 
2 Hz to 15 MHz 


7 ns 
13 ns 
24 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 
2 Hz to 12 MHz 


18 ns 
30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /xstrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 /is 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 45 MHz 
DC to 40 MHz 


7 ns 

8 ns 

9 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /.is 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


10/iV/cm 


10 Hz to 1 MH. 


r 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 Mh 


Z 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 Gf 


iz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5C 


Hz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 Gh 


z 


2150 




WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 




1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system riset 


ime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 



546 
RM546 




VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to 50 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 
See chart. 

RISETIME 

7 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 
20-ns risetime, at least 0.3 V for each centimeter of displayed 
signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A AND B 
0.1 /xs/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

MAGNIFIER 
X2, X5, or XI magnification over full time base, increases 
fastest rate to lOns/cm. Magnified time base accurate with- 
in 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
0.1 p.s to 50 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 1 % of indicated delay ±2 minor dial divisions from 
50/j.s to 50 s. At delay times less than 50 ju.s add < 100 ns 
for fixed delay. Incremental delay-time accurate within 1 % 
±4 minor dial divisions, from 1 /xs to 50 s, ±10 minor divi- 
sions at 0.1, 0.2 and 0.5 ps. Uncalibrated delay to approx 
120s. Short-term jitter <l/20,000 of total Time Base B delay 
time. 

DELAY MODES 

Delayed sweep starts immediately at end of delay time, 
or is triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter-free dis- 
plays). 

DISPLAY MODES 
Time Base A — Normal, delayed by B, single sweep of both 
modes. Time Base B — Normal, intensified by A, single sweep 
of both modes. Single sweep reset at front panel or with 
>-)-20-V pulse with <0.5-,u.s risetime, through rear-panel 
connector. 



119 



TYPE 



546 
RM546 



\ 



EXTERNAL INPUT 

Fixed steps of approx 0.1 V/cm and 1 V/cm, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 10 V/cm, DC to >400 
kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + peak AC) in 
most sensitive position. Input RC approx 1 MQ paralleled 
by approx 55 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gates from both time bases (positive going from to at 
least +20 V), sawtooth from Time Base A (positive going 
from approx to at least +90 V), and a delayed trigger 
pulse (positive going from to at least +10 V). 

TRIGGER 

2 identical systems 

MODES 

Manual level selection with triggered or automatic operation. 
Automatic operation provides a convenient reference trace 
with no trigger-signal input, or repetition rates less than 
20 Hz. Reference trace is bright throughout the full time- 
base range. 

COUPLING 
AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier or direct from 
a single channel of Type 1A1, 1A2 or 1A4 Plug-In Units), 
external, or line. 30-V maximum external input (DC + peak 
AC). External trigger input RC approx 1.1 Mn paralleled 
by approx 30 pF. 

REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at 1 kHz, increasing to 
1-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at 50 MHz. Requirements 
increase below 2 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. DC 
coupling requires 0.5-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at DC 
to 50 MHz. ±2-V or ±20-V trigger level selection. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical post accelerating anode, 10-kV 
accelerating potential for bright displays. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied; P2, P7, or Pll are optional without extra 
charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Dis- 
tributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 15 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, parallax-free; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm dis- 
play area. Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 
2-mm divisions. Two additional horizontal lines for con- 
venient risetime measurements. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 
Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2 mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 
50-fi source resistance from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. 0.6-^.s rise- 
time from 0.2 mV to 5 V; 1-^s from 10 V to 100 V. 100-V DC 
reference output also provided. Front-panel current loop for 
5 mA ±3%, squarewave or DC. 
POWER REQUIREMENTS 
90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz; 550 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

120 



CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 17 in 43.2 cm 

Width 12«/ w in 32.9 cm 

Depth 23 7 / 8 in 60.7 cm 

Net weight 65V 4 lb 29.7 kg 

Domestic shipping weight SJ 84 lb ^38.2 kg 

Export-packed weight ^102 lb ^46.4 kg 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



14 in 

19 in 

22' Vu in 

85'/ 2 lb 
;112 lb 
;136 lb 



35.6 cm 
48.3 cm 
57.6 cm 
38.9 kg 
r51.0kg 
;61.8kg 



Height 

Width 

Rack depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

RACKMOUNTING 
Type RM546 withdraws from its cabinet on slide-out tracks, 
tilts and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information 
on catalog instrument dimension page. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two P6008 10X probes (010-0129-00); three BNC-to-BNC 18- 
inch patch cords (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00). 3 to 2- 
wire adapter (103-0013-00); smoke-gray light filter, installed 
(378-0567-00); clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0367-00). Type RM546 also includes 
mounting hardware. 

TYPE 546 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1750 
TYPE RM546 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1850 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

CAMERAS 

C-12 has beam-splitting mirror for straight-on viewing and 
use of optional projected graticule, f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, Pola- 
roid* Land Pack-Film back accepts 3000-speed film, order 

Standard C-12 $460 

Type 546 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . . $ 15 
C-27 provides direct viewing and maximum transmission of 
light to film, f/1.9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid Land Pack-Film back 

accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard C-27 $430 

Type 546 to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016-0225-02 . . $ 15 
Polaroid Roll-Film back accepts 10,000-speed film for in- 
creased writing speed, can be substituted at no additional 
cost in either camera. Order C-12R or C-27R. Optional lenses 
are also available. 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements; however, optional 
probes (recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better 
suited for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 
9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix gen- 
eral-purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides 
stable triggering for the display of composite video signals. 
A Video Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude line- 
arity of television systems and their components to be meas- 
ured. See the catalog accessory pages for additional infor- 
mation. 

^Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



TYPE 



547 

RM547 



DC-to-50 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 




T T- 



MMIIONTAl DIWAT r 




«*<•«<* 


• 


• 

• 


• 

CHANNEI 1 


""-ar~ 




TT 



f f ■ 






• AUTOMATIC DISPLAY SWITCHING 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• UNIFORM-FOCUS 6 x I O-cm DISPLAY 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



Type 547 and RM547 feature AUTOMATIC DISPLAY SWITCH- 
ING which provides general dual-beam performance without 
the additional cost of a dual-beam oscilloscope. With appro- 
priate Plug-In units, both instruments are adaptable to a wide 
variety of applications such as wide-band response (up to 
50 MHz), differential input, operational, transducer and strain- 
gage, sampling, and spectrum analysis. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 jus/cm to 5s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, or X10, extends calibrated time 
base to 10 ns/cm. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 0.1 /w to 50s. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to 1 V/cm deflection factor, DC 
to 400 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 

ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 

PHOSPHOR— P31 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave, 100 V DC, 5 mA DC, 5 mA 1-kHz squarewave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 
50 to 60 Hz, 550 watts. 



121 



TYPE 



547 
RM547 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

—500 iiV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 
2 Hz to 15 MHz 


7 ns 
13 ns 
24 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


350 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 
2 Hz to 12MHz 


18 ns 
30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /j.strain/div 


DC fo 6 kHz 


60 /.is 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 45 MHz 
DC to 40 MHz 


7 ns 

8 ns 

9 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /xs 


250 


1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


10/<,V/cm 


10 Hz to 1 MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


— lOOdBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GH 


2 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1 .5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system risetir 


ne 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 




VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 50 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 
See chart. 

RISETIME 

7 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 
20-ns risetime, at least 0.3 V for each centimeter of displayed 
signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A AND B 

0.1 tis /cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 2%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

MAGNIFIER 

X2, X5, or XI magnification over full time-base, increases 
fastest rate to lOns/cm. Magnified time base accurate with- 
in 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
0.1 /xs to 50 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accu- 
rate within 1 % of indicated delay ±2 minor dial divisions 
from 50 /is to 50 s. At delay times less than 50 /us add <100 
ns for fixed delay. Incremental delay-time accurate within 
1% ±4 minor dial divisions, from 1 /xs to 50 s, ±10 minor 
divisions at 0.1, 0.2 and 0.5 /xs. Uncalibrated delay to approx 
120 s. Short-term jitter <1/20,000 of total Time Base B delay 
time. 

DELAY MODES 

Delayed sweep starts immediately at end of delay time, or 
is triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter-free displays). 



122 



HORIZONTAL DISPLAY 



A ait B 



B INTENS 
BY 'A' 



VAR 10-1 




AUTOMATIC DISPLAY SWITCHING 

Electronic switching between 2 wide-range time bases al- 
lows an alternate presentation of the same signal at 2 differ- 
ent sweep rates. Gallium Arsenide diodes in the switching 
wcircuit provide fast switching between time bases, and insure 
that only the desired time base is displayed at one time. 

Two different signals can be alternately displayed at the 
same or different sweep rates with a Type IAI or IA2 Dual- 
Trace Unit. With the Type I A4 Four-Trace Unit, channels 
I and 2 can be locked to time base A, and channels 3 and 
4 can be locked to time base 8. In many applications, this pro- 
vides equivalent dual-beam operation without the additional 
cost and complexity of a dual-beam oscilloscope. Dual dis- 
plays are equal in quality to the finest single presentations. 
Also, the full 6xl0-cm screen area can be used to display 
signals on either time base. A trace separation control oper- 
ates in conjunction with the normal vertical position to allow 
full control of dual displays. 



DISPLAY MODES 
Time Base A only, Time Base B only, A alternated with B, 
B intensified by A, A delayed by B, B intensified by A alter- 
nated with A delayed by B. Single sweep on all the A and 
the B sweep modes, can be reset at front panel or with 
>+20-V pulse with <0.5-^s risetime, through rear-panel 
connector. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Fixed steps of approx 0.1 V/cm and 1 V/cm, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 10 V/cm, DC to >400 
kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + peak AC) in 
most sensitive position. Input RC approx 1 MQ paralleled 
by approx 55 pF. 

kSIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gates from both time bases (positive going from to at 
least +20 V), sawtooth from Time Base A (positive going from 
approx to at least +90 V), and a delayed trigger pulse 
(positive going from to at least +10 V). 



TYPE 



TRIGGER 



547 
RM547 



2 identical systems 

MODES 

Manual level selection with triggered or automatic opera- 
tion. Automatic operation provides a convenient reference 
trace with no trigger-signal input, or repetition rates less than 
20 Hz. Reference trace is bright throughout the full time- 
base range. 

COUPLING 

AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from oscilloscope vertical amplifier or direct from a 
single channel of Type 1A1, 1A2 or 1A4 Plug-In Unit), ex- 
ternal, or line. 30-V maximum external input (DC + peak 
AC). External trigger input RC approx 1.1 MQ paralleled 
by approx 30 pF. 

REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at 1 kHz, increasing to 
1-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at 50 MHz. Requirements 
increase below 2 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. DC 
coupling requires 0.5-cm deflection or 0.2 V external at DC 
to 50 MHz. ±2-V or ±20-V trigger level selection. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in metallized screen, helical post accelerating anode, 
10-kV accelerating potential for bright displays. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied; P2, P7, or Pll are optional without extra 
charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Dis- 
tributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, requires 15 V peak to 
peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

Internal, parallax-free; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm dis- 
play area. Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 
2-mm divisions. Two additional horizontal lines for con- 
venient risetime measurements. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when 
off screen. Multi-trace blanking eliminates switching tran- 
sients from display when multi-trace plug-in unit is operated 
in chopped mode. 




Dual-Scope Operation — independent control of each signal 
with Channel I of the Type 1A1 Dual-Trace Unit locked to 
Time Base A, and Channel 2 locked to Time Base B. 



123 



TYPE 



547 
RM547 




Vertical and Horizontal Expansion — same signal applied to 
both channels of the Type 7 A 7 Dual-Trace Unit with inde- 
pendent control of sensitivity and sweep rate in each channel. 




Calibrated Sweep Delay — alternate presentation of 2 signals 
brightened over a selected portion, and the selected portions 
expanded to fill 10 cm. 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 
50-fJ source resistance from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. 0.6-^s rise- 
time from 0.2 mV to 5V ; 1- M s from 10 V to 100 V. 100-V DC 
reference output also provided. Front-panel current loop for 
5 mA ±3%, squarewave or DC. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz ; 550 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


17 in 


43.2 cm 


Width 


12»/„ in 


32.9 cm 


Depth 


23% in 


60.7 cm 


Net weight 


65% lb 


29.9 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


S3 85 lb 


S338.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


S3 103 lb 


S346.8 kg 



RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


14 in 


35.6 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Rack depth 


22 11 / 14 in 


57.6 cm 


Net weight 


86'/ 4 lb 


39.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


S3114 lb 


S351 .8 kg 


Export-packed weight 


S3137 lb 


S362.3 kg 



RACKMOUNTING 
Type RM547 withdraws from its cabinet on slide-out tracks, 
tilts and locks in 7 positions. Further mounting information 
on catalog instrument dimension page. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6008 10X probes (010-0129-00); three BNC-to-BNC 18- 
inch patch cords (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2- 
wire adapter (103-0013-00); smoke-gray light filter, installed 
(378-0567-00); clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0398-00). Type RM547 also includes 
mounting hardware: 

TYPE 547 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1875 
TYPE RM547 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1975 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described 
in the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERAS 

C-12 has beam-splitting mirror for straight-on viewing and use 
of optional projected graticule, f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid*^ 
Land Pack-Film back accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard 
C-12 $460 

Type 547 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . $ 15 

C-27 provides direct viewing and maximum transmission of 
light to film, f/1.9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid Land Pack-Film back 

accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard C-27 $430 

Type 547 to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016-0225-02 . $ 15 

Polaroid Roll-Film back accepts 10,000-speed film for increased 
writing speed, can be substituted at no additional cost in 
either camera. Order C-12R or C-27R. Optional lenses are 
also available. 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix general- 
purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides stable 
triggering for the display of composite video signals. A 
Video Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity 
of television systems and their components to be measured. 
See the catalog accessory pages for additional information. 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



124 



type 543 

SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE 




• BISTABLE SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE 
AND CONVENTIONAL DISPLAYS 

• VARIABLE VIEWING TIME 

• 5 -cm/ fis WRITING SPEED 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, 
SAMPLING, AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER 
PLUG-IN UNITS 



The Type 549 extends the exclusive Tektronix split-screen and 
bistable storage features into research and development appli- 
cations. Offering a high degree of versatility, it accepts all 
letter-series and 1 -series plug-in units covering many applications 
including sampling and spectrum analysis. 

The split-screen, bistable CRT provides high contrast displays 
and unparalleled writing speeds. Each half of the 6xl0-cm 
display area can be independently controlled, thus allowing 
stored or conventional displays on either the upper or lower 
half. A stored display can then be compared simultaneously 
with a conventional display. 

A variable-viewing-time system offers a new convenience to 
storage oscilloscope users. Through front panel controls, this 
system can be directed to automatically erase either or both 
halves of the display area after a predetermined viewing time. 
Viewing time can be varied from <0.5 seconds to >5 seconds 
with AUTO ERASE selected for either PERIODIC or AFTER- 
SWEEP operation. Used in conjunction with the SINGLE SWEEP, 
the "After-Sweep" erase circuit automatically resets the Single- 
Sweep circuit at the end of the viewing-time interval. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics extremely flexible through 
use of all Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 fts/cm to 5s/cm. 
X5 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 20 ns/cm. 
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 2 /xs to 10 s. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm, DC to 350 kHz. 

STORAGE CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm. 

SPLIT SCREEN STORAGE— Store on either upper or lower half 

of screen with non-storage on other half; store on entire 

screen; or non-store on entire screen. 
LOCATE ZONE — Locate button permits vertical position finding. 
VIEWING TIME— Up to one hour. 
ERASE TIME — 150 ms maximum. 

WRITING SPEED— 0.5 cm//«. 5 cm//is with enhancement. 
PHOSPHOR— PI 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V; 5-mA current 
loop; 1 kHz. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 
50 to 60 Hz, 575 watts. 



125 



TYPE 549 



AVAILABLE DISPLAYS 

With the wide range of vertical plug-in units, several types 
of stored and conventional displays are obtainable. The Type 
549, by virtue of a bistable split-screen storage CRT capa- 
ble of unparalleled writing speeds, extends storage-measuring 
capability into previously unattainable areas. 

SINGLE-TRACE AND MULTI-TRACE 

Multi-trace displays are obtained by selecting a Type 1A1, 
1A2, 1A4, CA, or M Amplifier Plug-In Unit. All other 1 -Series 
and Letter-Series Plug-In Units will give single-trace displays. 
Selection of the Type 1A5, 1A6, 1A7A, or G gives differen- 
tial amplifier operation, while strain gage and other trans- 
ducer operations are available with the Type Q Unit. 

SAMPLING 
Sampling displays with risetimes in the sub-nanosecond region 
are obtained using a Type 1S1 or 1S2 Sampling Unit. The 
Type T SI is a general-purpose sampler with 1 GHz bandwidth, 
delay line and internal triggering. The Type 1S2 is designed 
specifically for TDR (time-domain reflectometry) applications, 
but offers general-purpose sampling with 3.9 GHz bandwidth 
and built-in triggering. 

SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 
Spectral displays are obtained using a Type 1L5, 1L10, 1 L20, 
or 1 L40 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit to cover a frequency 
range from 10 Hz to 40 GHz. 

There are decided advantages in using the storage oscillo- 
scope for spectrum analysis. When slow sweep times are 
used, it is often difficult to view a complete display; however, 
by storing the display it can be completely and easily 
observed. 

Signal drift is easily measured using the storage technique. 
The signal is stored and then as subsequent displays are 
stored, drift of the signal can be observed. Or, the spectral 
display can be stored on one half of the screen and simply 
compared with a similar non-stored display on the other. 

STORAGE CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES 

STORAGE CRT 
The Type 549 CRT is a split-screen, bistable storage device 
operated at 4-kV accelerating potential. Phosphor type is PI 
(no options). 

Tektronix bistable storage offers stored trace brightness inde- 
pendent of viewing time or writing speed. 

DISPLAY AREA 

6xl0-cm split-screen storage area with independent or com- 
mon control, plus locate zone. The graticule is external and 
edge-lighted. 



LIFE CHARACTERISTICS 



BRIGHTNESS 
PERCENT 



REL 


UIVE STOR 


D BRIGHTN 


ss 
























HOURS OF 


OPERATION 



The aging rate of the storage target depends upon the mode of use. The 
above chart shows typical brightness aging characteristics when the target is 
used continuously in STORE mode. 



SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE 

Store on either upper or lower half of screen with conven- 
tional display on other half; store on entire screen; or, non- 
store on entire screen. Independent operation of both halves. 

VIEWING TIME 
Up to one hour. If ENHANCE MODE is to be used, it is 
recommended that displays be stored for 20 minutes or less. 

ENHANCE MODE 

Controls the single sweep storage capabilities of the storage 
CRT. Through adjustment of ENHANCE LEVEL control, single- 
trace spot velocities up to 5cm//is or better can be stored 
with minimal loss of resolution and contrast. 

LOCATE BUTTON (Serves two functions) 
STORAGE — When depressed, the beam appears at the left 
of the CRT screen marking the vertical position of the next 
sweep. CONVENTIONAL DISPLAYS— Permits beam finding 
of off screen signals. 

ERASE TIME 

150 ms maximum. 

AUTO ERASE SYSTEM 

Viewing time before erase continuously variable from 
<0.5s to >5s. 

In the PERIODIC Mode, there is a continuous sequence of stor- 
ing, viewing time and erasure. This sequence occurs regard- 
less of whether or not a signal is present and is independent 
of the sweep. In the AFTER SWEEP mode — which is used in 
conjunction with the SINGLE SWEEP — the sequence begins 
with the arrival of the signal. The signal initiates a sweep 
by triggering the Single Sweep circuitry. Viewing time begins 
as the sweep ends. At the end of the viewing time, erasure 
automatically resets the SINGLE SWEEP, readying it for the 
next signal. This cycle will automatically repeat itself as long 
as a signal is available. 

Manual control available through Erase and Reset button or 
by Reset position of Single Sweep switch. 

REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION 

The Type 549 has remote control-operation capabilities using 
contact closure. A 9-pin connector, located on the rear panel, 
supplies one ground and 7 inputs (plus one spare) that allows 
the following functions: 

1. Remote erase of upper screen. 

2. Remote erase of lower screen. 

3. Remote resetting of sweep for single-sweep operation. 

4. Remote erase of both halves of the screen and resetting 
of the sweep. 

5. Remote switching from conventional operation to storage 
operation (independently or commonly) of upper or 
lower screen halves. 

6. Remote interruption of the Auto Erase sequence in order 
to hold a stored waveform. 

Operation of these circuits is achieved by grounding the 
appropriate pin in the connector. 

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT 

(Optional accessory, part number 012-0102-00). Performs 
Remote Erase and Reset functions numbers 1, 2, and 3 above. 

Z-AXIS INPUT 
A CRT grid selector switch on the rear panel allows the CRT 
grid to be driven from the internal unblanking signal, or from 
an external source. Bandpass is DC to >1 MHz at — 3 dB. 
20 V peak to peak required for beam modulation. Input RC 
is 100 ka and 80 pF. A CRT CATHODE-SELECTOR switch 
allows the cathode to be driven from the internal chopped- 
blanking signal, or from an external source, AC coupled. 20 V 
peak to peak required for beam modulation at normal in- 
tensity. 



o 



126 



TYPE 549 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
{— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

—500 /iV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 
2 Hz to 14 MHz 


12 ns 
16 ns 

25 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


350 


CA 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 23 MHz 


16 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 19 MHz 


19 ns 


560 


SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 18 MHz 
2 Hz to 12 MHz 


20 ns 

30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 


13 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 
3 Hz to 23 MHz 


13 ns 
16 ns 


235 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 23 MHz 


16 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /istrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 /.is 


350 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
DC to 29 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 


12 ns 

13 ns 

13 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.1 8 (a 


250 


1A7A 

High-Gain 


10/xV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 

Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 18 MHz 


20 ns 


205 


W 
Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 7 MHz 
DC to 22 MHz 


50 ns 
16 ns 


560 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


10/xV/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1 .5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 rng/crn 


140-ps system risetime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz | 90 ps 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to > 30 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 
See chart. 

RISETIME 

<12ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

DC to >5MHz at 3-dB down, <70-ns risetime, 1.5 V ±20% 
for each centimeter of displayed signal. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A 

0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable be- 
tween steps and to approx 12.5s/cm. Warning light indicates 
uncalibrated setting. 

TIME BASE B 

2/xs/cm to Is/cm in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Sweep length variable from 4 to 10 cm, 
allowing use of Time Base B as a repetition-rate generator 
from 0.1 Hz to 40 kHz. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest Time Base A 
rate to 20 ns/cm, and the fastest Time Base B rate to 0.4 /is/ 
cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
2/xs to 10 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 1 % of indicated delay ±2 minor divisions. Add 
processing time of 200 ns at fast sweep rates. Incremental 
delay-time accurate within 1% ±4 minor divisions. Short- 
term jitter <1 part in 20,000 of the available delay time. 

DELAY MODES 

Depending on the setting of the Delayed Sweep stability con- 
trol, the Delayed Sweep can start immediately at end of 
delay time, or be triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter- 
free displays). 

OPERATING MODES 

Time Base A, Time Base B, B intensified by A, and A delayed 
by B. Single sweep in any mode; reset accomplished with 
ERASE and RESET button on front panel, NORMAL-SINGLE 
SWEEP-RESET switch on front panel, automatically with AUTO 
ERASE switch in AFTER SWEEP and NORMAL-SINGLE SWEEP- 
RESET switch in SINGLE SWEEP, or by remote control through 
rear-panel connector. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Fixed steps of approx 0.2 V/cm and 2 V/cm, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 20 V/cm, DC to >350 
kHz at — 3dB with maximum gain. 600-V maximum input 
(DC + peak AC). Input RC approx 1 Mfi paralleled by 
<60 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 
Gates from both time bases (0 to at least +20 V), sawtooth 
from Time Base A (0 to at least +130 V), and a delayed 
trigger pulse (at least +5 V). 

127 



TYPE 549 



STORED DISPLAYS 



wmsusmammmm 


WilVlilllllLllWi 


MMWMMM'MVMM 


BS 


■■■■■!■■■■■< 


■■■mSSBSSI 



5-cm/fi.s SINGLE-SWEEP WRITING SPEED 

Upper display shows a single shot 625-kHz sinewave stored 
in enhanced mode of operation. Sweep time is I jxs/cm. 

FAST REPETITIVE DISPLAY 

Lower display is a recurrent, 1-MHz squarewave with a 
risetime of 20 ns stored without enhancement. Sweep time 
is 0.1 /xs/cm. 




MMaggggBBBB 



FREQUENCY -BASED DISPLAY 

Harmonic analysis of simulated 440-Hz oboe fone (upper) 
and violin (lower screen). Dispersion is 500 Hz/cm,- mini- 
mum resolution bandwidth. Zero-frequency feedthrough 
is displayed in the first centimeter. 



TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic or manual level selection. Automatic operation 
is useful between approx 50 Hz and 1 MHz, minimizes trig- 
ger adjustments for signals of different amplitudes, shapes, 
and repetition rates. With no input (or input less than 50 Hz), 
automatic triggering occurs at an approx 50-Hz rate, pro- 
viding a convenient reference trace. 

COUPLING 

AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal from oscilloscope vertical amplifier (or direct from a 
single channel of Type 1A1, 1A2 or 1A4 Plug-In Units), 
external, or line. 50-V maximum external input (DC + peak 
AC). 

TIME BASE A REQUIREMENTS 

0.2-cm deflection or 0.3 V external from DC to 10 MHz, in- 
creasing to 2-cm deflection or 3 V external at 30 MHz. Re- 
quirements increase below 300 Hz with AC coupling, below 
200 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. Automatic operation 
requires 0.2-cm deflection or 0.3 V external from 300 Hz to 
10 kHz, increasing to 2-cm deflection or 3 V external at 1 MHz. 

TIME BASE B REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.3 V external from DC to 1 MHz, in- 
creasing to 1-cm deflection or 1.5 V external at 10 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 300 Hz with AC coupling, below 
200 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. Automatic operation 
requires 0.2-cm deflection or 0.3 V external from 300 Hz to 
10 kHz, increasing to 2-cm deflection or 3 V external at 1 MHz. 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2-mV to 100-V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 
sequence), accurate within 2%. 50-Q ±2% source resistance 
from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. SSl-joS risetime; 1-kHz ±25% repeti- 
tion rate; 40% to 60% duty cycle. 100-V DC reference out- 
put also provided. Front-panel current loop for 5-mA ±2%, 
squarewave or DC. 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz ; 575 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


17 in 


43.2 cm 


Width 


12'Vh in 


32.9 cm 


Depth 


23% in 


60.7 cm 


Net weight 


67 V a lb 


30.8 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


« 89 lb 


=:40.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 


^114 lb 


5^51 .8 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); two BNC-to-BNC 18-inch 
patch cords (012-0087-00); BNC-to-binding post adapter (103- 
0033-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); smoke-gray light 
filter (378-0567-00); two instruction manuals (070-0508-00). 

TYPE 549 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $2575 



128 



type 543 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described in 
the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERA 

The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording 
requirements. For applications that might require a different 
viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descriptions 
or consult your field engineer, representative, or distributor. 

Standard C-12: f/ 1.9— 1:0.85 lens, no-parallax viewing, Pola- 
roid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 549 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . $ 15 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

TV ACCESSORIES FOR GENERAL-PURPOSE OSCILLOSCOPES 

In addition to the Tektronix line of television instruments, 
accessories are available for use with many Tektronix general- 
purpose oscilloscopes. A TV Sync Separator provides stable 
triggering for the display of composite video signals. A Video 
Staircase Differentiator allows the amplitude linearity of tele- 
vision systems and their components to be measured. See the 
catalog accessory pages for additional information. 




REMOTE-CONTROL UNIT 

Separate controls for erase of upper screen, erase of low- 
er screen, and single-sweep reset. Mates to oscilloscope 
rear-panel connector, 9-foot cable, order 012-0102-00 .. $30 

REMOTE-CONTROL CONNECTOR 

9-pin cable connector for 5 erase and reset functions plus 
selection of storage or non-storage operation. Mates to 
oscilloscope rear-panel connector. Cable and control unit 
not included, order 134-0049-00 $4.25 

RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 

Consists of cradle to support the Type 549 in any standard 
19-in relay rack, and mask to fit around the front panel. 
Requires 17V 2 -inch panel height, order 040-0281-00 .... $31 

'Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



129 



TYPE 557 

DC-to-27 MHz DUAL-BEAM OSCILLOSCOPL 




• TWO VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEMS 

• COMMON HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

• 4x1 0-cm DISPLAY PER BEAM 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



The Type 551 uses a Tektronix two-gun cathode-ray tube 
with two pairs of vertical-deflection plates. A single pair of 
horizontal-deflection plates is common to both electron beams. 
The two wide-band main amplifiers in the Type 551 are designed 
for Tektronix Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units, providing 
a high degree of signal-handling versatility in both channels. 
Both electron beams are simultaneously deflected horizontally 
at any one of many sweep rates provided by an accurately- 
calibrated time base generator. 



VERTICAL 

2 identical vertical-deflection systems. 

Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-in Units offer a wide selection 
of vertical-deflection characteristics for both beams. 



HORIZONTAL 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 ,,s/cm to 5s/cm. 
5X MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 20 ns/cm. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V to 50V/cm ; DC to 400 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 4x10 cm (each beam), 2-cm overlap. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 
900 watts maximum. 



130 



TYPE 551 





VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 






PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R price 






MULTIPLE TRACE 






Al 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm I 
5 mV/cm 1 

=500 /j.V/cm 


)C to 27 MHz 
)C to 21 MHz 
>Hz to 13 MHz 


13 ns 
17 ns 
27 ns 


$ 625 




1A2 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 


13 ns 


350 




CA 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 22 MHz 


16 ns 


280 




1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 


13 ns 


825 




M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 19 MHz 


19 ns 


560 






SINGLE TRACE 






B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 18 MHz 
2 Hz to 12 MHz 


20 ns 
30 ns 


$ 170 




H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


200 




K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14ns 


155 




L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 
3 Hz to 22 MHz 


14ns 
16ns 


235 






SPECIAL PURPOSE 






O 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 23 MHz 


16 ns 


$ 560 




Q 

Strain Gage 


10 justrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 fis 


350 






DIFFERENTIAL 






1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 
DC to 26 MHz 
DC to 25 MHz 


13 ns 

14ns 
14ns 


$ 575 




1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18/is 


250 




1A7A 
High-Gain 


10/j.V/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 




G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 18 MHz 


20 ns 


205 




W 
Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 7.5 MHz 
DC to 20 MHz 


47 ns 
18 ns 


560 






SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 






U5 


10/j.V/cm 


10 Hz to 1 MHz 


$1025 




UIO 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 Mr- 


Iz 


1175 




1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 G 


Hz 


1950 




1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 C 


JHz 


1950 




1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 Gh 


Iz 


2150 






WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 






lSl 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 p 


; $1275 




1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system rise 


ime 


1400 
5 




5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 




| 90 p 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

2 identical systems 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 27 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 

See chart. 

risetime 

13 ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 

DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

Common to both beams 

TIME BASE 

0.1 ^s/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 20 
ns/cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

OPERATING MODES 

Normal, single sweep. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Continuously variable from 0.2 V/cm to 50V/cm, DC to 
> 400 kHz at — 3dB. 50-V maximum input (DC + peak 
AC) in most sensitive position. Input RC approx 100 kQ par- 
alleled by approx 30 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gate (positive going from to at least +20 V), sawtooth 
(positive going from to at least +150 V). Cathode follower 
outputs. 



TRIGGER 

MODES 

Automatic or manual level selection; high-frequency sync. 
Automatic operation is useful between approx 50 Hz and 2 
MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for signals of different 
amplitudes, shapes, and repetition rates. With no input (or 
input less than 40 Hz), automatic triggering occurs at an 
approx 50-Hz rate, providing a convenient reference trace. 
High-frequency sync assures a steady display of sinewaves 
from approx 5 MHz to 30 MHz. 

COUPLING 

AC, DC, or AC LF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal (from either oscilloscope vertical amplifier), external, 
or line. External trigger input RC approx 1 MO paralleled 
by approx 55 pF. 

REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.2 V external from DC to below 5 MHz, 
increasing to 1-cm deflection or IV external at 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 16 Hz with AC coupling, below 
16 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. Automatic operation 
requires 0.4-cm deflection or 0.4 V external from 60 Hz to 
250 kHz, increasing to 1-cm deflection or IV external at 
2 MHz. High-frequency sync requires 2-cm deflection or 2 V 
external from approx 5 Hz to 30 MHz. 

131 



TYPE 55f 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX DUAL-BEAM CRT 

4xl0-cm display per beam with at least 2-cm overlap. 
Separate vertical-deflection plates; common horizontal de- 
flection plates. Metallized screen, helical post accelerating 
anode. 10-kV accelerating potential for bright displays. 
P31 phosphor normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or PI 1 are op- 
tional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. Z-axis input is AC coupled to CRT cathode, re- 
quires 20 V peak to peak for beam modulation at normal 
intensity. 

GRATICULE 

External; variable edge lighting. 6xl0-cm display area. 
Vertical and horizontal center lines marked in 2-mm divisions. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators show direction of each CRT beam 
when off screen. 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2 mV to 100 V squarewave, 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117 V nominal); transformer taps 
permit operation at 107, 117, 127, 214, 234 or 254 VAC: 50 
to 60 Hz. 850-W maximum power consumption. Can be 
factory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, if so 
indicated on order. 

OSCILLOSCOPE DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

POWER SUPPLY DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 



17 in 


43.2 cm 


12 15 / u in 


32.9 cm 


23% in 


60.7 cm 


51% lb 


23.5 kg 


71 lb 


32.3 kg 


92 lb 


41.8 kg 


D WEIGHTS 




10'/ 16 in 


26.8 cm 


13 5 /,« in 


33.8 cm 


17 7 /„ in 


44.3 cm 


43V 2 lb 


19.8 kg 


52 lb 


23.6 kg 


71 lb 


32.3 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Four P6006 10X probes (010-0127-00); two BNC-to-BNC 18- 
inch patch cords (012-0087-00); BNC-to-banana plug 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0091-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2- 
wire adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord (161- 
0010-03); inter-unit cable (012-0032-01); smoke-gray light 
filter (378-0567-00); two instruction manuals (070-0245-00) 
TYPE 551 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $2000 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described in 
the catalog accessory pages. 

CAMERA 
The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording 
requirements. For applications that might require a differ- 
ent viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descrip- 
tions or consult your field engineer, representative, or dis- 
tributor. 

Standard C-12: f/ 1.9— 1:0.85 lens, no parallax viewing, 

Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 551 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 $ 15 
PROBES 
The standard 10X probes (P6006) supplied with the instrument 
satisfy most voltage measurement requirements; however, op- 
tional probes (recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be 
better suited for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 9- 
position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 202-2 $140 

INTER-UNIT CABLE 

Six-foot cable allows increased separation of Type 551 and 
Power Supply, order 012-0051-00 $30 

RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 

Consists of two cradles to support the Type 551 and Power 
Supply in any standard 19-inch relay rack, and two masks to 
fit around the front panels. Requires 17V 2 -inch panel height 
for Type 551, 12'/ 4 -inch panel height for Power Supply. Order 
040-0279-00 $75 

*Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



132 



TYPE 



556 
R556 



DC-to-50 MHz DUAL -BEAM 
OSCILLOSCOPES 







• TWO VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SYSTEMS 

• OVER 50 DISPLAY MODES INCLUDING 
DUAL-BEAM DISPLAY WITH ONE INPUT 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• EMI SUPPRESSION 

• 6x1 O-cm DISPLAY PER BEAM 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING 

• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING, 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 



The Type 556 and R556 are dual-beam laboratory instruments 
for accurate measurement in the DC to 50 MHz range. Features 
include independent vertical and horizontal deflection systems, 
trigger selectability for cross triggering, and uniform-focus CRT 
with 6xl0-cm scan per beam. 

Unique display capability allows simultaneous display of one 
signal at two different sweep times, using only one probe for 
minimum circuit loading. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

2 identical vertical-deflection systems 

Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units offer wide selection of 
vertical-deflection characteristics for both beams. 

HORIZONTAL 

2 independent horizontal-deflection systems 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 0.1 /xs/ cm to 5s/cm. 

X10 MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to lOns/cm. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 0.1 /xs to 50 s. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— <0.1 V/cm to approx 10V/cm ; DC to 
>400 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA — 6x10 cm per beam, 4-cm overlap. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31 

OTHER 

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE— Meets MIL-1-6181D, Ra- 
diated: 150 kHz to 1 GHz; Conducted: 150 kHz to 25 MHz. 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 1 -kHz squarewave; 0.2 mV to 
100 V; 100VDC; 5 mA, 1-kHz squarewave; 5 mA DC. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 VAC to 136 VAC, 180 VAC to 
272 VAC; 50 to 60 Hz ; ^840 watts, 1 kVA (maximums). 



133 



TYPE 



556 
R556 





VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 




MULTIPLE TRACE 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

-500 /j.V/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 
2 Hz to 15MHz 


7 ns 
13 ns 
24 ns 


$ 625 


1A2 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


350 


CA 
Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


825 


M 
Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


560 




SINGLE TRACE 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 

2 Hz to 12 MHz 


18 ns 

30 ns 


$ 170 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


155 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


235 




SPECIAL PURPOSE 


O 

Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14 ns 


$ 560 


Q 

Strain Gage 


10 /tstrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 ins 


350 




DIFFERENTIAL 


1A5 
Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 

1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 45 MHz 
DC to 40 MHz 


7 ns 

8 ns 

9 ns 


$ 575 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 [is 


250 


1A7A 

High-Gain 


10/iV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


205 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 




SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


1L5 


10/xV/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-lOOdBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1175 


1L20 


-110 to -90dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 Gh 


z 


1950 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system risetime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 




VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

2 identical systems 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to >50MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit. 
See chart. 

RISETIME 

<7ns, depending on plug-in unit. See chart. 
DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing leading edge of displayed waveform. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

2 identical systems 

TIME BASE A AND B 

0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12.5 s/cm. Warning light indi- 
cates uncalibrated setting. 

XI MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 10 
ns/cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
0.1 [is to 50 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 1 % of indicated delay ±2% of A TIME/CM setting 
(±5% from 0.5 jtts/cm to 0.1 ^s/cm) + fixed delay in system 
of 100 to 200 ns. Incremental delay-time accurate within 1% of 
indicated incremental delay ±4% of A TIME/CM setting 
(±7% from 0.5 /is/cm to 0.1 /.is/cm). Uncalibrated delay to 
approx 120 s. Short-term jitter <1 part in 20,000 of the avail- 
able delay time. 

DELAY MODES 

Delayed sweep starts immediately at end of delay time, or is 
triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter-free displays). 

OPERATING MODES 

Time Base A — Normal and Single Sweep. 

Time Base B— Normal, B delayed by A, and Single Sweep. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

<0.1 V/cm with XI Display Mag, <1 V/cm with XI Display 
Mag, continuously variable from <0.1 V/cm to approx 10 V/ 
cm. DC to > 400 kHz at 3-dB down. 50 V maximum (DC + 
peak AC). Input RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by approx 
65 pF. 



134 



SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Gates from both time bases (> + 10V), sawtooths from both 
time bases (>9V/cm), delayed trigger pulse (>7V). 

TRIGGER 

2 identical systems 

MODES 

Triggered and Auto Stability. Latter mode free runs sweep 
in absence of triggering signal, triggers on signals >30 Hz. 

COUPLING 
AC, DC, AC LF reject, AC HF reject. 

SOURCES 

Internal from left or right vertical amplifier, left or right plug- 
in, external, or line. External trigger input RC approx 1 meg- 
ohm paralleled by approx 35 pF. 50-V maximum external 
input (DC + peak AC). External trigger signals that have 
an amplitude greater than 2 V and a rate of rise exceeding 
l/3V/ns may cause erratic triggering. Internal source select- 
able from the oscilloscope vertical amplifier, or direct from 
a single channel of Type 1A1, 1A2, and 1A4 Plug-In Units. 
The latter mode displays the true time relationship between 
signals when plug-in units are in chopped or alternate opera- 
tion. 

REQUIREMENTS 

AC INTERNAL— 0.2-cm deflection, 60 Hz to 10 MHz increasing 

to 1 cm at 50 MHz. 
AC EXTERNAL— 0.2 V, 60 Hz to 10 MHz increasing to 0.4 V 

at 50 MHz. 
AC LF REJECT— INT: or EXT: Requirement increases below 2.5 

kHz. 
AC HF REJECT— INT: or EXT: Requirement increases above 60 

kHz (>2-cm deflection or >2V at 2 MHz). 
DC INTERNAL— 0.35-cm deflection, DC-to-10 MHz; increasing 

to 2 cm at 50 MHz. 
DC EXTERNAL— 0.2 V, DC-to-10 MHz; increasing to 0.4 V at 50 

MHz. 

DISPLAY LOGIC 

A dual-beam oscilloscope, with two horizontal and vertical 
deflection systems, presents the ability to select the driving 
source to the deflection systems . . . thereby greatly increasing 
the versatility. 

The Time Base generators can be switched to either UPPER- 
BEAM horizontal or LOWER-BEAM horizontal to give independ- 
ent time-based displays, identical time-based displays, or simul- 
taneous display of one time base delayed accurately by the 
other. 

The signal under test has the potential to be channeled from 
the plug-ins to either vertical amplifier. In the Type 556, the 
RIGHT plug-in unit output can be directed to either the UPPER- 
BEAM vertical or the LOWER-BEAM vertical or both. This means, 
among other things, only one probe need be attached to the 
signal source to perform delaying sweep operations. This re- 
duces the loading effect on sensitive circuitry. The LEFT plug-in 
unit can be coupled to the UPPER-BEAM vertical only, since the 
redundant switching capability would not add greatly to meas- 
urement ability. 

The triggering signal source to each Time Base trigger circuit 
can be selected from either UPPER-BEAM or LOWER-BEAM ver- 
tical (NORM), RIGHT or LEFT plug-in unit (necessary only in 
1 -series multi-trace plug-ins), or EXTERNAL. This virtually eli- 
minates the need to procure any additional trigger signal for 
such applications as time relation measurements or dual-trace 
operation. 



556 

TYPE 

R556 

Following are presentations of the front-panel controls which 
program display logic, and descriptions (with waveforms) of a 
few of many display combinations. 




TRIGGEf 3GERIN 

MG SI OPE ilOPF CI 



tq-jft tm. 

^UPPER BEAM LOWER BEAM^ jf 

l ^J DISPLAY DISPLAY \)J 




■ * B A "■■■'■•- 



\ 




• 




SINGLE-INPUT DUAL-BEAM DISPLAYS (Above left) 
Upper beam shows bursts of 2.5-MHz pulses on Time Base A with 
time variation between bursts. This shows up as increasing time-jitter 
between the first and successive bursts. The lower beam shows Time 
Base B (0.J fxs/cm) delayed by Time Base A and triggered on the 
second pulse of the last burst to provide a jitter-free expanded display 
of the A Sweep intensified zone. The use of only one probe and 
one plug-in input simplifies signal connection and provides minimum 
loading on the signal source. 

SIMULTANEOUS SINGLE-SHOT DISPLAYS (Above right) 
Current versus voltage display of a 0.75 ampere, fast-blow fuse 
during destructive overload. Both beams are driven by B Time Base 
(50 /.is/cm) which is delayed by pre-friggered A Time Base to provide 
base reference lines before and after the event. The upper beam 
shows the current through the fuse at 30 A/cm while the lower beam 
shows the corresponding vo/foge across the fuse at lOOV/cm. 



Bllu«i)i|iiniiwp^nvviTlwfwfi1 













■■aim 






■■mil 






in 






HH||| 


1 




■ii 











TIME AND FREQUENCY DISPLAYS (Above left) 
Upper beam shows the spectral output of a 200-MHz gated oscil- 
lator applied as IF feedthrough to a Type IL20 Spectrum Analyzer; 
the calibrated dispersion is 1 MHz/cm. The lower beam shows a 
real-time display of the 10-kHz gating pulse (0.5 /is/cm). 

SAMPLING AND REAL-TIME DISPLAYS (Above right) 
Upper beam shows a squarewave at J j.i.s/cm, as applied to a Type 
1A2 Plug-In. The lower beam shows the leading-edge of the same 
waveform at I ns/cm, as applied to a Type 1S1 Wide-Band Sampling 
Plug-In. 



135 



TYPE 



556 

R556 



1 



CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES 

TEKTRONIX DUAL-BEAM CRT 

5-inch round tube, 8xl0-cm display area; >6xl0cm per 
beam with 4-cm overlap. Spot size, focus uniformity and 
geometry equivalent to our finest single-beam tubes. Alu- 
minized construction, helical post acceleration. P31 phosphor 
normally supplied; PI, P2, P7, or PI 1 are optional without 
extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or 
Distributor for application information and availability. Z- 
axis input requires 10 V peak to peak for CRT modulation at 
normal intensity. 

INTERNAL GRATICULE 

Variable edge lighting. Vertical and horizontal centerlines 
marked in 2-mm divisions. 

DISPLAY CONTROLS 

Separate intensity, focus and astigmatism controls for each 
beam, upper and lower beam intensity contrast controls be- 
tween A sweep and non-intensified-B-zone of A sweep, trace 
rotation (screwdriver adjustment), and trace separation. BEAM 
FINDER button functions in both X-Y systems, indicates direc- 
tion of off-screen signals. 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE 

Oscilloscopes meet interference specifications of MIL-l-6181 D 
over the following frequency ranges: Radiated (with CRT 
mesh filter and BNC connector covers installed) —150 kHz to 
1 GHz; conducted (power line) —150 kHz to 25 MHz. 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

0.2 mV to 100 V in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), accu- 
racy within ±2%. 50-n source resistance from 0.2 mV to 
0.2 V. < 1 .5-/.S risetime; 1-kHz ±25% repetition rate; 45% 
to 55% duty cycle. 100-V DC reference output also provided. 
Front-panel current loop for 5-mA ±2%, squarewave or DC. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 50 to 60 Hz source with 
less than 2% harmonic distortion,- approx 840 W maximum, 
approx 1 kVA maximum. Rear-panel selector provides rapid 
accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 



CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight ; 

Export-packed weight ? 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND 

Height 

Width 

Rack depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight X 

Export-packed weight j: 



in 
in 



i5y 16 

16 ,5 /, 4 

24 in 

83 lb 

5135 lb 

;148 lb 



WEIGHTS 

14 in 

19 in 

22' 3 / 16 in 

87% lb 
:151 lb 
:162 lb 



38.6 cm 
43.0 cm 
61.0 cm 

37.7 kg 
=i61.5kg 
^67.3 kg 

35.6 cm 
48.3 cm 
57.9 cm 
39.9 kg 
;=68.6 kg 
^73.6 kg 



RACKMOUNTING 
Type R556 mounts on tilting slide-out tracks to standard 19- 
inch rack. Further mounting information on catalog instru- 
ment dimension page. 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Four P6008 10X probes (010-0129-00); eighteen BNC caps, 
ten installed (016-0088-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 
3-conductor power cord (161-0030-01); smoke-gray light filter 
(378-0567-00); clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-00); grati- 
cule cover (200-0382-00); CRT mesh filter, installed (378-0572- 
00); two instruction manuals (070-0757-00). Type R556 also 
includes mounting tracks (351-0086-00) and mounting hard- 
ware; two instruction manuals (070-0758-00). 

TYPE 556 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $3350 
TYPE R556 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . $3450 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. Cameras, probes, Scope-Mobile® 
Carts and other major accessories are completely described 
in the catalog accessory pages. 



C-12 



C-27 




CAMERAS 

C-12 has beam-splitting mirror for straight-on-viewing and use 
of optional projected graticule, f/ 1.9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid* 
Land Pack-Film back accepts 3000-speed film, order Stand- 
ard C-l 2 $460 

Type 556 to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016-0226-01 . . $ 15 

C-27 provides direct viewing and maximum transmission of 
light to film, f /1. 9— 1:0.85 lens, Polaroid Land Pack-Film back 

accepts 3000-speed film, order Standard C-27 $430 

Type 556 to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016-0225-02 . . $ 15 

Polaroid Roll-Film back accepts 10,000-speed film for in- 
creased writing speed, can be substituted at no additional 
cost in either camera. Order C-l 2R or C-27R. Optional lenses 
are also available. 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with the instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 205-2: storage drawer, carrier for 3 plug-in units, 
9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 205-2 $145 

^Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



136 



TYPE & 



DC-to-20 MHz 
UNIT 



• 5 mV/em-to-20 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• LOW COST 



The Type B Plug-In Preamplifier meets the requirements of 
many wide-band applications. Wide bandwidth, excellent 
transient response, DC-coupling, and calibrated deflection fac- 
tors are qualities most users require in an oscilloscope vertical 
amplifier. The Type B is used with Type 530, 540, 550 and 580* 
Series Oscilloscopes. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to 
operate this plug-in unit outside an oscilloscope. See descrip- 
tion of these instruments for details. 



CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE B AND 
OSCILLOSCOPE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


50mV/cm to 
20 V/cm 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


5 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


2 Hz to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


536 


50mV/cm to 
20 V/cm 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


5 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


2 Hz to 9 MHz 


40 ns 


543B, 544, 545B, 
546, 547, 555, 556, 
581 A*, 585A* 


50mV/cm to 
20 V/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


5 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


2 Hz to 12 MHz 


30 ns 


549, 551 


50mV/cm to 
20 V/cm 


DC to 18 MHz 


20 ns 


5 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


2 Hz to 12 MHz 


30 ns 



*A Type 81 A Adapter is 
fLow-frequency 3-dB po 



required. 

nt, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 12 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. AC coupled at 5 mV/cm to 20 mV/cm. 
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 50 V/cm. 















TYPE B 
PLUG-IN UNIT 

SERIAL 


WIDE- BAND 

CAtlRRATED PRfAMP 
oi ic v/cm ec coumo 

••l*MP IISETIMf I OH flUC 
DOS. 01 V/CM AC COUPUD 

ri!iWllit|l IM OJijilK 


VERTICAL 
POSITION 




INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 
600 V DC -f peak AC max input voltage. 

INPUT SELECTION 

Two inputs, front-panel selection of either. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 4 lb 1.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight Si 7 lb ~3.2 kg 

Export-packed weight Sill lb ~5.0 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0219-00). 

TYPE B PLUG-IN UNIT $170 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satis- 
fy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6006* 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26.00 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

♦Included with Type 531A, 533A, 536, 535A, 543B, 545B, 549, 551 and 555 
Oscilloscopes. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



737 



TYPE Q 



DC-to-20 MHz 
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT 



• 50 mV/cm-to-20 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• 100:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 



The Type G Plug-In Unit equips Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 
and 580* Series Oscilloscopes for wideband differential-input 
applications. Common-mode rejection is better than 100 to 1 
for the entire bandwidth at full gain. Independent step attenua- 
tors in each input with 80-dB isolation permit mixing signals 
of wide amplitude difference. Either input can be used sep- 
arately, INPUT B giving a polarity-inverted display. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to 
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip- 
tion of these instruments for details. 

Differential input permits measurements in which the output 
is proportional to the difference between signals applied to 
inputs A and B. Differential operation is useful for measure- 
ments between 2 points, differing in potential, and for cancella- 
tion of in-phase signals such as hum pickup at the signal source. 



CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE G UNIT 
AND OSCILLOSCOPE 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


536 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


543B, 544, 545B, 546, 547, 

555, 556, 581 A*, 585A* 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


549, 551 


DC to 18 MHz 


20 ns 



*A Type 81 A Adapter is required. 

tLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 
600 V DC + peak AC max input voltage. 

OPERATING MODES 

Input A only, input B only (inverted), A-B (differential). 




4y 2 ib 


1.9 kg 


7 lb 


=3.2 kg 


2 Ib 


=5.5 kg 



COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

Better than 100:1 at 20 MHz and 50 mV/cm, better than 300:1 
at 60 Hz. Common-mode signal should not exceed 2 V peak- 
to-peak between input grids. At 0.5 V/cm and 5 V/cm, sig- 
nals should not exceed 20 V and 200 V respectively. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0241-00). 

TYPE G PLUG-IN UNIT $205 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satis- 
fy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0134-00 $26.00 

P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 $47.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



735 



TYPE H 

DC-to-15 MHz 
UNIT 



5 mV/cm-fo-20 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type H is a DC to 15 MHz Preamplifier for use with Types 
530, 540, 550, and 580* Series Oscilloscopes. It provides DC 
coupling from two front panel inputs with deflection factors 
of 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to 
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the description 
of these instruments for details. 



CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE H UNIT 
AND OSCILLOSCOPE 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


531 A, 533 A, 535 A 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 


536 


DC to 9.5 MHz 


37 ns 


543B, 544, 545B, 546, 547, 
555, 556, 581 A*, 585A* 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


549, 551 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 



*A Type 81A Adapter is required. 

•flow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe- 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 12 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 
600 V DC + peak AC max input voltage. 

INPUT SELECTION 

Two inputs, front-panel selection of either. 




WEIGHTS 

Net weight 3 3 / 4 lb 1 .7 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 7 lb ~3.2 kg 

Export-packed weight Sill lb ~5.0 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0272-00). 

TYPE H PLUG-IN UNIT $200 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satis- 
fy most measurement requirements. Other probes are available 
for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog ac- 
cessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6006* 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26.00 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

'Included with Type 531A, 533A, 535A, 536, 543B, 545B, 549, 551 and 
555 Oscilloscopes. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



139 



TYPE £ 



DC-to-30 MHz 
UNIT 



• 5 mV/em-to-20 V/cm 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type L Fast-Rise Unit provides Type 540, 550, and 580* 
Series Oscilloscopes with calibrated deflection factors at low 
input capacitance, taking maximum advantage of the excellent 
transient response and wide frequency range of the oscilloscope 
vertical-deflection system. 

The Type L offers an extended deflection factor to 5 mV/cm, 
AC-coupled. An AC-coupled amplifier provides a gain of 10X 
with slightly reduced bandwidth. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 power supplies are available to 
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip- 
tion of these instruments for details. 



CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE L AND 
OSCILLOSCOPE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISE- 
TIME 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
3 Hz to 14 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


536 


50mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 


DC to 11 MHz 
3 Hz to 10 MHz 


32 ns 
35 ns 


543B, 544, 545B, 
546, 547, 555, 
556, 581 A*, 585A* 


50mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 
15 ns 


549 


50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 
3 Hz to 23 MHz 


13 ns 
16 ns 


551 


50mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 
3 Hz to 22 MHz 


14 ns 
16 ns 



*A Type 81A Adapter is required. 

fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

50mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. 5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps, 
AC coupled, using XI gain. Uncalibrated, continuously 
variable between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 




INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF. 
600 V DC + peak AC max input voltage. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 4'/ 4 lb 1.9 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 7 lb ~3.2 kg 

Export-packed weight ~12 lb ~5.5 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0336-00). 

TYPE L PLUG-IN UNIT $235 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satis- 
fy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6006* 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26.00 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

♦Included with Type 531A, 533A, 535A, 536, 543B, 545B, 549, 551 and 555 
Oscilloscopes. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



740 



• TWO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 

• 15 MHz OR GREATER GAIN-BANDWIDTH 
PRODUCT 

• 2500 OR GREATER OPEN-LOOP GAIN 

• SELECTABLE INTERNAL Z, AND Z, COMPONENTS 

• PROVISION FOR EXTERNAL Z AND Z, 
COMPONENTS 

The Type O Operational Amplifier Unit performs integra- 
tion, differentiation, function generation, linear and non- 
linear amplification. It contains two operational amplifiers and 
a display amplifier. Each operational amplifier has identical 
features, including front-panel selection of internal Z, and Z f 
components. External components can be used independently 
or in combination with the internal resistor-capacitor combina- 
tions. The output of either operational amplifier can be applied 
to the other operational amplifier; either output can be applied 
to the display amplifier. The results can be viewed on Tektronix 
Type 530, 540, 550, and 580* Series Oscilloscopes and/or fed to 
other devices. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to 
operate this plug-in unit outside an oscilloscope. See description 
of these instruments for details. 

DISPLAY AMPLIFIER 



TYPE O UNIT 
AND OSCILLOSCOPE 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


DC to 14 MHz 


25 ns 


536 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


543B, 544, 545B, 546, 547, 
555, 556, 581 A*, 585A* 


DC to 25 MHz 


14 ns 


549, 551 


DC to 23 MHz 


16 ns 



*A Type 81A Adapter is required. 

fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

50 mV/cm to 20V/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable be- 
tween steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 
600 V DC + peak AC max input voltage. 

OPERATING MODES 

Signal source selection from either operational amplifier or 
an external signal. AC or DC coupling. The display can be 
inverted to provide the desired deflection polarity. 

OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 

OPEN-LOOP GAIN 

2500 minimum. 

OPEN-LOOP GAIN-BANDWIDTH PRODUCT 

15 MHz or greater; checked at 10 MHz for open-loop gain 
greater than 1.5. 

CLOSED-LOOP BANDWIDTH 

750 kHz or greater at unity gain with internal input and feed- 
back resistors, up to 10 MHz with external compensation (such 
as provided by the optional Compensating Adapter). 




OUTPUT RANGE 

±50 V, ±5mA. 

OUTPUT DC LEVEL 

Adjustable to ground at front panel. 

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 

Approx 30 Q at 1 MHz for compensated unity-gain amplifier. 

DRIFT 

Typically <10mV/hour referred to input (after warmup). 

NOISE 

Typically <0.5 mV peak-to-peak (equivalent input noise), 
approx 3 mV peak-to-peak additional output noise when Rf = 
1 megohm. 

GRID CURRENT 

<0.5nA for each input grid; adjustable to <0.3 nA for 
—grid and <0.15nA for -(-grid. 

CROSSTALK BETWEEN AMPLIFIERS 

>300:1 with 1-kHz squarewave. 

FEEDBACK 

Provision for negative and/or positive feedback. Negative 
feedback utilizes internal and/or external impedances; posi- 
tive feedback utilizes external impedances only. 

SELECTABLE INPUT AND FEEDBACK COMPONENTS 

Front-panel switches allow independent selection of the fol- 
lowing resistors and capacitors in any combination as Z ; and 
Z f : 10, 100, 200 and 500 kn, 1 Mfi; 10 and 100 pF, 0.001, 0.01, 
0.1, and 1 /xF. All values are ±1% except 10 and 100 pF 
which are adjustable. 

INTEGRATION LOW-FREQUENCY REJECT 

For high-frequency integration applications, reduces integra- 
tion of drift and signals below approx 1 Hz or 1 kHz; can be 
switched out when desired. 

141 



TYPE 



5'/, lb 


2.5 kg 


10 lb 


=4.5 kg 


14 lb 


=6.4 kg 



TERMINAL ADAPTERS 

Two shielded adapters included for construction of external 
circuitry for custom applications. Suggested circuits for special 
applications are shown in the instruction manual. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two terminal adapters (013-0048-01); two terminal shields 
(013-0049-01); two BNC-to-binding post adapters (103-0033- 
00); two BNC-to-BNC 18-inch patch cords (012-0087-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0323-00). 

TYPE O PLUG-IN UNIT $560 

BASIC OPERATING MODES 



R 




R. 




Co ~ — 


Ri 

R, e 



AMPLIFICATION is determined by the ratio of input to 
feedback resistors. This provides convenient signal step-up or 
step-down, with low output impedances, to over 750 kHz. Use 
of external compensation extends the closed-loop gain-band- 
width product to 10 MHz or more. 





C 






R 




1 1 




e = — 


nsr/- 





INTEGRATION is obtained by placing a capacitor in the 
feedback loop. Unlike the RC integrator, this circuitry permits 
loading of the output, and integration without loss of signal 
level. Integration at repetition rates of approximately 5 MHz 
is possible. Low-frequency rejection allows drift-free repetitive- 
waveform integration. 



c 




R 




e„ = _ 


dt 



DIFFERENTIATION is accomplished by placing a capacitor in 
the input circuit. The unique characteristic of differentiation is 
its ability to extract higher frequency waveform components. 
It can advantageously detect minute information such as tran- 
sients and slope changes. Differentiation of waveforms with 
significant components as high as 1.5 MHz is possible. 




• * 






OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 
LOG ADAPTER 

The Log Adapter with the Type O Plug-In Unit allows the 
display and measurement of high-amplitude signals mixed with 
low-amplitude signals. Pulses and transient waveforms differing 
in amplitude by up to 1000 to 1 can be displayed and meas- 
ured on the same trace. 

The Log Adapter is a logarithmic feedback network that 
converts the A or B operation amplifier in a Type O Plug-In 
Unit from a linear amplifier to essentially a logarithmic ampli- 
fier. The adapter can be plugged directly into the jacks on 
the front panel of the Type O Plug-In Unit. 
Order 013-0067-00 $75 

COMPENSATING ADAPTER 

The Compensating Adapter extends the high-frequency per- 
formance of either operational amplifier of the Type O Plug-In 
Unit when the internal Zi and Z f resistors are used in any 
combination for either gain or attenuation. 

Without the Compensating Adapter, stray capacitance as- 
sociated with the internal Z ; and Z f resistors limits the opera- 
tional amplifiers high-frequency performance. The adapter can 
be plugged into the front panel of the Type O Plug-In Unit. 
Order 013-0081-00 $35 

GATING ADAPTER 

The Gating Adapter allows integration and display of repe- 
titive signals, by resetting the integrator to zero during the oscil- 
loscope's retrace time. The adapter uses Operational Amplifier 
"B" of the Type O to gate Amplifier "A" on and off in response 
to an external gating signal, such as the +Gate from the oscillo- 
scope. The signal applied to Amplifier "A" is then amplified, 
integrated, or differentiated only during the "on" time. 
Order 013-0068-00 $75 

LEAKAGE CURRENT ADAPTER 

Used with the Type O Plug-In Unit, the Leakage Current 
Adapter provides the facility for measuring leakage current 
of semiconductor diodes and small signal transistors. 

The adapter plugs into the operational jacks located on 
the front panel of the Type O Unit. A positive-going saw- 
tooth voltage is required for driving the adapter. Tektronix 
Oscilloscopes that accept the Type O Plug-In Unit have a Saw- 
tooth or Sweep-Out jack conveniently located on the front 
panel for supplying the required sawtooth voltage. 
Order 013-0086-00 $85 

Please refer to the catalog accessory pages for complete 
information on the above adapters. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



142 






TYPE Q 






TRANSDUCER & 
STRAIN GAGE UNIT 



• HIGH GAIN 

• LOW NOISE 

• ESSENTIALLY DRIFT FREE 



TYPE Q PLUG-IN UNIT 

SERIAL 
/ BRIDGE BALANCE 



TRANSDUCER AND STRAIN GAGE PREAMP 



The Type Q Plug-In Unit permits any Tektronix Type 530, 
540, 550, or 580* Series Oscilloscope to be operated with 
strain gages and other transducers. Designed to measure any 
mechanical quantity that can be converted to a change in 
resistance, capacitance, or inductance — through use of a suit- 
able transducing device — this versatile unit provides high 
gain, low noise, and extremely-low drift. Suppressed-carrier 
amplitude modulation is produced by unbalancing an AC 
bridge with the strain gages or other transducers. Phase- 
sensitive demodulation produces the proper deflected-trace 
direction. 

Requiring no external equipment other than the strain gages 
| or transducers operated with it and the associated oscillo- 
scope, the Tektronix Type Q Plug-In Unit bridges the gap 
between mechanical engineering and electronic instrumenta- 
tion. Total range of applications is as broad as the mechani- 
cal field itself. Applications include stress analysis, vibration 
studies, and fatigue tests. Typical quantities that can be meas- 
ured with the unit are force, displacement, acceleration, and 
strain. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to oper- 
ate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the description of 
these instruments for details. 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to 6 kHz at 3-dB down. 

RISETIME 

Approximately 60 /xs. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

10 ,nsfrain (microinches per inch) /div to 10,000 ,ustrain/div 
in 10 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), when used with a 
single strain gage having a gage factor of approx 2. With 
four active arms and a gage factor of 2, deflection factor 
extends to 2.5 /xstrain/div. Attenuator accurate within 2%. 
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 25,000 /istrain/div. Warning light indicates uncal- 
ibrated setting. 

AMPLIFIER INPUT 

Input is to an AC bridge with 25-kHz excitation voltage. 
One or more of the four bridge arms can have transducers 
attached to them. Total bridge voltage is approximately 
5 V RMS, regulated. 

*A Type 81 A Adapter is required. 



RESISTANCE CAPACITANCE 

<3 A ^5 



EXTERNAL 
BRIDGE ARMS 

a 



V*RIA8l£ „ ^^ 

polarity 
function 

icy- INST 

»ALANCE^^°OPERATi 



H STRAIN.'DIV. : 
SOO 200 




TEKTRONIX, INC. 



PORTLAND. OREGON. U.S.A. 



NOISE 

Typically equivalent to an input of 1.5 microstrain (peak to 
peak) at maximum calibrated sensitivity. This approximates 
an RMS noise of 0.5 microstrain. 

DRIFT 

Drift of the over-all system is primarily a function of the 
transducer stability. The Type Q Amplifier system is essen- 
tially drift free. 

GAGE FACTORS 

Factors from 1 to 6 are usable without changing the steps 
of the ^istrain/div control. The range of factors is compen- 
sated for by adjusting the Gain Adjust Control. 

EQUIVALENT DC SENSITIVITY 

A comparable DC amplification system would require a 
deflection factor of approx 10/xV/div for the same amount 
of power applied to the input bridge. 

CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCERS 

Use in conjunction with a four-arm resistive bridge results 
in the following maximum useful deflection capabilities: 
120-ohm bridge (available internally), 1 pF/div; 1000-ohm 
bridge, 0.2 pF/div; useful deflection capabilities are slightly 
lower when using long cables. 

INDUCTIVE TRANSDUCERS 

Must have characteristics compatible with the 25-kHz carrier 
frequency to function properly. Linear-variable-differential 
transformers designed for nominal carrier frequencies of 2 kHz 
and higher usually operate satisfactorily without additional 
circuitry. 



743 



TYPE Q 



Dynamic plot of the 
depletion - layer ca- 
pacitance of o back- 
biased diode. 



c 


Ml 11 


A 


INI H 


P 


urn 


A 


iikiimii 


C 




/ 


SSSni^^iiiiii 


T 


I ■■ HK2 


A 
M 


IIIII1IIII 


c 


IIIIIIIIII 


E 


■I « 



Pressing force can be 
accurately controlled 
by using the Type Q 
Unit. 




VOLTAGE 



TIME 



TRANSDUCER CABLE 

Either 3-wire or 4-wire shielded microphone cable gives the 
best results in most applications. 

CAPACITANCE BRIDGE BALANCE 

A vernier control allows compensation for an unbalance of 
up to 250 pF across any external resistive arm of the input 
bridge. 

RESISTANCE BRIDGE BALANCE 

A vernier control provides sufficient range to compensate for 
most standard transducers and strain gages. 

GAGE RESISTANCE RANGE 

Useful with cable lengths to 100 feet; extends from approxi- 
mately 50 ohms to 2000 ohms. For optimum performance, 
the recommended range is between 120 and 500 fi. 

PHASE ADJUSTMENT 

Permits either resistive or reactive transducer applications 
to be displayed. 

CALIBRATION SWITCH 

A rotary switch connects a calibration resistor across the 



strain gage to electrically simulate an external mechanical 
strain. The calibration resistor supplied with the Type Q 
Unit simulates a — 400 microstrain unbalance of the bridge 
and is suitable for most strain gage applications. The cali- 
bration resistor is mounted on a handy plug-in receptacle. 
No special gage dial is nesessary for the unit. 
To aid in calibration, a nomograph is included in the instruc- 
tion manual. This nomograph relates calibration of the sup- 
plied resistor to gage factors and strain gage resistances. 
To include the gage factor in the calibration, merely increase 
or decrease the amplifier gain proportionally. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


574 lb 


2.4 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


s 9 lb 


^4.1 kg 


Export-packed weight 


:=sl4 lb 


X6A kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

4-wire 15-ft shielded connector cable (012-0040-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0199-00). 

TYPE Q PLUG-IN UNIT $350 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



144 



TYPE y\f 



DIFFERENTIAL 
COMPARATOR UNIT 



• ! mV/cm-fo-50 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• UP TO 23-MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 20,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

• M, 000 cm EFFECTIVE SCREEN HEIGHT 



The Type W High-Gain Differential Comparator adds to 
the measurement capabilities of Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 
and 580* Series Oscilloscopes. Used with Type 127, 132 or 133 
Power Supply, the Type W can drive recording equipment, X-Y 
plotters, oscilloscopes, or other indicators. 

As a differential input preamplifier, the dynamic range of 
the W Unit permits common-mode signals up to ±15 volts in 
amplitude to be applied to the amplifier without attenuation. 
With a rejection ratio of 20,000 to 1 for DC or low-frequency 
signals, signals of 1 mV or less on large common-mode sig- 
nals can be measured. A front-panel attenuator permits the 
acceptance of common-mode voltages up to 500 V. 

As a differential comparator, voltage measurements using 
the slide-back technique can be made with this unit. The high 
accuracy and stability of the DC comparison voltage added 
differentially to the input signal makes more precise voltage 
measurements possible. Using this mode of operation, the W 
Unit has an effective screen height of ±11,000 cm. This is 
equivalent to a ±ll-volt dynamic signal range at a deflection 
factor of 1 mV/cm. Within this range, calibrated ±DC com- 
parison voltages can be added differentially to the input signal 
to permit a maximum of about 0.001% or lOO/iV per mm to 
be resolved. 



CONVENTIONAL PREAMPLIFIER 



TYPE W UNIT 

AND 
OSCILLOSCOPE 


MILLIVOLTS/CM 
SETTING 


BANDWIDTH! 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


50 

1 


DC to 13 MHz 
DC to 7 MHz 


27 ns 
50 ns 


536 


50 
1 


DC to 10 MHz 
DC to 6.5 MHz 


35 ns 
54 ns 


543B, 544, 545B, 
546, 547, 555, 
556, 581 A*, 585A* 


50 

1 


DC to 23 MHz 
DC to 8 MHz 


16 ns 
44 ns 


549 


50 

1 


DC to 22 MHz 
DC to 7 MHz 


16 ns 
50 ns 


551 


50 
1 


DC to 20 MHz 
DC to 7.5 MHz 


18 ns 
47 ns 




*A Type 81 A Adapter is required. 

fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 
1 mV/cm to 50 V/cm, determined by millivolts/cm and atten- 
uator settings. Millivolts/cm positions accurate within 3%. 
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 125 V/cm. 

ATTENUATORS 

4 decade steps covering range of 1 to 1,000. 10X position 
accurate within ±0.05%; 100X within ±0.15%, 1000X within 
±3%. 

INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by 20 pF (except in additional IX 
attenuation position (R ~ oo) where R > 10,000 megohm). 
Input resistance of 10X and IX attenuators is matched within 
±0.1 %. 

NOISE 

No more than 300 /aV peak to peak. 



DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT PREAMPLIFIER 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO 
DC COUPLED: 20,000:1 from DC to 20 kHz, 500:1 at 500 kHz; 

with ±15 V signal applied. 
AC COUPLED: 1000:1 with a 60 Hz, 30 V P-P signal applied. 

MAXIMUM PEAK INPUT 

±15 volts, increasing to ±150 volts with 10X attenuation 
and ±500 volts with 100X or 1000X attenuation. 



145 



TYPE y\f 



HIGH-RESOLUTION VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT 
using the slide-back technique 

A 150-volt sawtooth waveform is applied and clipped with 
a zener diode, shown in Figure J. The knee of the curve is 
shown expanded vertically and horizontally in Figures 2 and 3. 
This resolution is made possible in the Type W Unit by using 
the slide-back technique. Figure 3 clearly shows zener noise. 
I OX more "vertical magnification", to 1 mV/cm, could be used, 
if desired. 




Figure 2 — 50mV/cm, 0.2ms/cm. 

CALIBRATED DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR 

COMPARISON VOLTAGE 
fo ±1.1 V, or to ±11 V. Accuracy: ±(0.15% of in- 
dicated value plus 0.05% of Vc range). 

Vc SUPPLY RESOLUTION 

to ±1.1 V range: 100 ,uV per minor dial div; to ±11 V 
range: 1 mV per minor dial div. 

MAXIMUM PEAK INPUT 
Same as for Differential-Input. 

OVERDRIVE RECOVERY 

Recovers to within lOmV of the reference point within 300 ns 
after the signal returns to the screen. Certain overdrive sig- 
nals can cause an additional slow (thermal) shift of up to 5 
mV in the reference level (overdrive DC shift). 



WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 



5 lb 
=8 lb 
;12 lb 



2.3 kg 
;3.6 kg 
;5.5 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0432-00). 




I 



Figure I — 50 V /cm, 5ms/cm. 




Br jeSSSBBBB 



Figure 3 — (Single sweep), lOmV/cm, 100 /is/cm. 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Other probes are available 
for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog acces- 
sory pages for additional information on these and other items, 
items. 



P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 



$26.00 



P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 $47.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



TYPE W PLUG-IN UNIT $560 



146 



TYPE 1A1 

DC-to-50 MHz 
DUAL-TRACE UNIT 



• 5 mV/em-to-20 V/em 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• ZZ500-(iV/cm SINGLE CHANNEL 

• CHANNEL 1 SIGNAL & TRIGGER OUTPUTS 

• 1-MHz CHOPPING RATE 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN, FET INPUTS 



Type 1A1 provides dual-trace displays in Type 530, 540, 550 
and 580* Series Oscilloscopes. Maximum bandwidth is achieved 
in Type 544, 546, 547, 556, 581 A, and 585A Oscilloscopes. Input 
channels are identical with separate controls for coupling, at- 
tenuating, inverting and positioning the signal. 

Used with the Type 547 or RM547 Oscilloscopes, the alter- 
nate switching circuit can be slaved to the display switching 
circuit in the oscillocope, thus locking Channel 1 to Time Base A 
and Channel 2 to Time Base B. For many applications this pro- 
vides the equivalent of a dual-beam oscilloscope without the 
additional complexity and cost. 

Solid state components are used throughout except for the 
output stage. 

Type 127, 132, 133 Power Supplies are available to operate 
the Type 1A1 outside an oscilloscope. See the descriptions of 
these instruments for details. 



TYPE I A 1 DUAL-TRACE PLUG-IN UNIT 




PREAMP 


VARIABLE POSITION 1 

VOITS/CM ^— , 


fife 


• $ 


MODE 

CHOP 

fctf AD 

• 




^B^ 


VOITS/CM 


SERIAL 


.^r^^^^. 




' -J It* ° 5 


CH 1 


5 ^B ^m ° 7 




20 .005 


CH 1 

itiCGis our 


CHANNEL 2 


v_ 


INPUT SELECTOR 

AC DC GNO 
INPUT 2 


; .*w.™ 


[ % ■■■ 



TYPICAL BANDWIDTH 



+2dB 




10 20 30 

Frequency in Megahertz 



TYPE 1A1 
UNIT AND 
OSCILLO- 
SCOPE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISE- 
TIME 


531 A, 533A, 
535A 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 
=;500 juV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 
2 Hz to 10 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 
35 ns 


536 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 
^500/iV/cm 


DC to 1 1 MHz 
DC to 10 MHz 
2 Hz to 8 MHz 


32 ns 
35 ns 
44 ns 


543B, 545B, 
555 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 
^500 itV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 
2 Hz to 14 MHz 


11 ns 
16 ns 
25 ns 


544, 546, 547, 
556, 581 A* 
585A* 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 
^500 iiV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 
2 Hz to 15 MHz 


7 ns 
13 ns 
24 ns 


549 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 
Si500 tiV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 
2 Hz to 14 MHz 


12 ns 
16 ns 
25 ns 


551 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 
^=500 jrxV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 

DC to 21 MHz 
2 Hz to 13 MHz 


13 ns 
17 ns 
27 ns 


*A Type 81A Adapter is required. 

fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 



147 



TYPE 1A1 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 12 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 15 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

OPERATING MODES 

Either single channel, normal or inverted; algebraic addition; 
chopped or alternate electronic switching between channels. 
Alternate: channels switched at the end of each sweep. 
Chopped: successive 500-ns segments of each channel dis- 
played at an approx 1-MHz rate per channel. Chopped tran- 
sient blanking except in Type 536, 551, 581 A, and 585A 
Oscilloscopes. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

Channel 1 Output provides up to XI gain, can be AC 
coupled into Channel 2 for approx 500-/xV/cm deflection 
factor. Noise or frequency filters can be inserted between 
channels if desired. Output impedance is approx 50 Q. Maxi- 
mum bandwidth of output alone is DC to 35 MHz; see chart 
for bandwidths at 500 /xV/cm. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Channel 1 output for external triggering permits viewing 
true time relationship between signals in alternate or chopped 
operation. Output also applied internally to Type 544, 546, 
547, 549, 555 (with Types 21 A and 22A), and 556 Oscillo- 
scopes. Approx 0.5 V for each centimeter of displayed signal 
at 1 kHz with calibrated deflection factors. 



Net weight 


5% lb 


2.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


Sill lb 


=25.0 kg 


Export-packed weight 


W14 lb 


=26.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

BNC-to-BNC 50-Q cable (012-0076-00), two instruction man- 
uals (070-0885-00). 

TYPE 1A1 PLUG-IN UNIT $625 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6008** 10X Probe Package, order 010-0129-00 .... $42.00 

P6009 100X Probe Package, order 010-0140-00 $60.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

**P6008 10X Probes included with Type 544, 546, 547 and 556 Oscilloscopes 
increase input resistance to 10 M£2 and decrease input capacitance to approx 
7.5 pF. Bandwidth of probe and oscilloscope is 45 MHz or greater; risetime 
is approx 7 ns. 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



148 



TYPE 



1A2 



• 50 mV/cm-to-20 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• CHANNEL I Oft 2 TRIGGER OUTPUT 

• 220-kHz CHOPPING RATE 



Type 1A2 plug-in unit provides dual-trace displays in 530, 
540, 550, and 580* Series Oscilloscopes. Unit has identical 
input channels with separate controls for coupling, attenuating, 
inverting and positioning the signal. Chopped or alternate 
electronic switching is used for dual-trace displays. 

When the unit is used with Type 547 or RM547 Oscilloscopes, 
the alternate switching circuit can be slaved to the display 
switching circuit in the oscilloscope, thus locking Channel l 
to Time Base A and Channel 2 to Time Base B. For many ap- 
plications this provides the equivalent of a dual-beam oscillo- 
scope without the additional complexity and cost. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to op- 
erate the Type 1A2 outside an oscilloscope. See the description 
of these instruments for details. 



TYPE 1A2 UNIT 
AND OSCILLOSCOPE 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


536 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 


543B, 545B, 555, 


DC to 33 MHz 


11 ns 


544, 546, 547, 556 
581 A*, 585A* 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


549 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


551 


DC to 27 MHz 


13 ns 



*A Type 81 A Adapter is required. 

flow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

50mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm paralleled by approx 15 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

OPERATING MODES 

Either single channel, normal or inverted; algebraic addition; 
chopped or alternate electronic switching between channels. 
Alternate: channels switched at the end of each sweep. 
Chopped: successive 2-ju.s segments of each channel displayed 
at an approx 220-kHz rate per channel. Chopped transient 
blanking except in Type 536, 551, 581 A, and 585A Oscillo- 
scopes. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

>20:1 throughout full bandwidth for signals up to 0.5 V peak- 
to-peak (measured at maximum gain). 



DC-to-50 MHz 
DUAL-TRACE UNIT 




TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Channel 1 or 2 output for external triggering permits viewing 
true time relationship between signals in alternate or chopped 
operation. Output also applied internally to Type 544, 546, 
547, 549, 555 (with Type 21 A and 22A), and 556 Oscillo- 
scopes. At least 0.5 V for each centimeter of displayed signal 
at 1 kHz with calibrated deflection factors. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 4V 2 lb 2.0 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ^ 8 lb ~3.6 kg 

Export-packed weight £Sl4 lb ~6.4 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0430-01). 

TYPE 1A2 PLUG-IN UNIT $350 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit sat- 
isfy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6008* 10X Probe Package, order 010-0129-00 $42.00 

P6009 100X Probe Package, order 010-0140-00 $60.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

**P6008 10X Probes included with Type 544, 546, 547 and 556 Oscilloscopes 
increase input resistance to 10 MJ2 and decrease input capacitance to approx 
7.5 pF. Bandwidth of probe and oscilloscope is 45 MHz or greater; risetime 
is approx 7 ns. 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page. 



149 



TYPE1A4 

DC-to-50 MHz 
FOUR -TRACE UNIT 



• 10 mV/cm-fo-20 V/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• FOUR-CHANNEL ADDING (±1±2) + (±3±4) 

• SIGNAL OUTPUT 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN, FET INPUTS 

This plug-in unit for Type 530, 540, 550*, and (with adapter) 
580-Series Oscilloscopes through versatile switching logic pro- 
vides the equivalent of two wide-band, dual-trace units con- 
nected to a third wide-band, dual-trace unit. Maximum band- 
width of DC to 50 MHz is achieved with Type 544, 546, 547 
and 556 Oscilloscopes. The Type 1A4 provides a new standard 
of multi-channel versatility in all Tektronix Oscilloscopes that 
accept Letter-Series or 1 -Series Plug-In Units. 

Unique display logic provides unprecedented display flex- 
ibility: any channel can be viewed separately, alternately with 
any other channel(s), chopped with any other channel(s), added 
to or subtracted from any other channel(s). Alternate, chopped 
and added modes can also be used together: for example, 
Channel 1 added to Channel 2, and the resultant alternated 
with a chopped display of Channel 3 and 4. Used with Type 
547 or RM547 Oscilloscopes, the alternate switching circuit in 
the plug-in unit can be slaved to the display switching circuit 
in the oscilloscope. For many applications, this provides the 
equivalent of a dual-beam oscilloscope, without the added 
complexity and cost. 

The four input channels are identical. Each has separate 
controls for coupling, attenuating, inverting, positioning, and 
identifying the signal. Solid-state design, with FET inputs, pro- 
vides low drift and fast stabilization time. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to 
operate the Type 1A4 outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip- 
tion of these instruments for details. 

CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE 1A4 UNIT 
AND OSCILLOSCOPE 


BANDWIDTH! 
(— 3dB) 


RISETIME 


544, 546, 547, 556, 581 A*, 585A* 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


543B, 545B, 555 


DC to 33 MHz 


11 ns 


549 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


551 


DC to 27 MHz 


13 ns 


531 A, 533A, 535A 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


536 


DC to 1 1 MHz 


32 ns 



*A Type 81 A Adapter is required. 

fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: <2 Hz, < 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/cm to 20 V/cm in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm (±1%) paralleled by approx 20 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V DC + peak AC. 

*Early Type 555 Oscilloscopes using Type 21 and 22 Time Base Units require 
a minor modification. 




DISPLAY MODES 

Any single-channel; any two channels (alternated, chopped, 
or added); three channels (alternated, chopped, or added in 
any combination); and four channels (Channels 1 and 2 
alternated, chopped, or added with Channels 3 and 4). 
Four channel addition is useful in single-shot displays of four 
different signals, as in delay and coincidence studies. 
Channels are always displayed in numerical sequence in 
chopped and alternate modes. One channel will run twice 
when only three are turned on. In chopped operation, suc- 
cessive 2.5-/xs (approx) segments of each channel are dis- 
played. Chopping rate is approx 400 kHz. Chopped transient 
blanking with all oscilloscopes except Type 536, 551, 581 A, 
and 585A. 

DISPLAY SWITCHING with Type 547 and RM547 Oscillo- 
scopes 

Alternate switching circuit in the Type 1A4 can be slaved 
to the Automatic Display Switching in Type 547 and RM547 
Oscilloscopes to lock Channels 1 and 2 to Time Base A, and 
Channels 3 and 4 to Time Base B. For dual-trace slaving, 
Channel 1 or 2 is alternated with Channel 3 or 4. Alternation 
of up to 8 traces with each signal displayed on 2 different 
time bases is also possible when the 1A4 is not slaved to 
the oscilloscope. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 
At least 20:1, DC to 10 MHz common-mode signals up to 10 
cm in amplitude. 

CHANNEL ISOLATION 
At least 50:1 for signals from DC to 20 MHz. 



750 



TYPE 1A4 



SIGNAL OUTPUT AND TRIGGER SOURCE 

Signal from any channel can be used to externally trigger 
the oscilloscope, thus indicating the true time relationship 
between signals displayed in alternate and chopped mode. 
Selected output also applied internally to Type 544, 546, 
547, 549, 555 (with Type 21 A and 22A), and 556 Oscilloscopes. 
The front-panel output can also be cascaded with another 
channel, providing additional gain useful in many applica- 
tions. Signal output amplitude is >0.5V/cm of displayed 
signal, unterminated at 1 kHz. Bandwith is <20Hz to >10 
MHz (to approx 500 kHz with any channel operated in 
chopped mode). Approx 50-O output impedance. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


6'/ 2 lb 


3.1 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


5=210 lb 


^4.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 


»16 lb 


«7.3 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

BNC-to-BNC 18-inch cable (012-0076-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0545-00). 

TYPE 1A4 PLUG-IN UNIT $825 

SOME OF MANY POSSIBLE DISPLAY MODES 





AM Oi^^s fULted. 



Waveforms photographed with C-12 Camera, Projected Graticule, Type 547 
Oscilloscope. 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit 
satisfy most measurement requirements. Other probes are avail- 
able for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6008 10X Probe Package, order 01 0-01 29-00 $42.00 

P6009 100X Probe Package, order 010-0140-00 $60.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

2 each 10X probes are included standard accessories with 
Type 530, 540, 550-Series oscilloscopes. Additional probes may 
be required. Use of the same type probes on all inputs is recom- 
mended. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



151 



TYPE 1 AS 

DC-to-50 MHz 
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT 



• I mV/cm-to-20 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• > 7 0,000: J COMMON-MODE REJECTION 
FROM DC TO I MHz 

• LOW DC DRIFT, NON MICROPHONIC 

• ±5-V COMPARISON VOLTAGE 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN, FET INPUTS 

This wide-band differential unit for Type 530, 540, 550, and 
(with adapter) 580-Series Oscilloscopes achieves a new high 
in common-mode rejection. Gain-bandwidth products exceed 
those previously available in a differential amplifier. Maxi- 
mum bandwidth is obtained with Type 544, 546, 547, 556, 581 A*, 
and 585A* Oscilloscopes. Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Sup- 
plies are available to operate the Type 1A5 outside an oscillo- 
scope. See the description of these instruments for details. 

Solid state design, with FET inputs, provides low drift and 
eliminates microphonics. 

CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE 1A5 
UNIT AND 
OSCILLO- 
SCOPE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


BANDWIDTHt 
(— 3dB) 


RISE- 
TIME 


544, 546, 
547, 556, 
581 A,* 
585A* 


5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 45 MHz 
DC to 40 MHz 


7 ns 

8 ns 

9 ns 


543B, 545B, 
555 


5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 33 MHz 
DC to 31 MHz 
DC to 30 MHz 


11 ns 

12 ns 
12 ns 


549 


5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
DC to 29 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 


12 ns 

13 ns 
13 ns 


551 


5mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 27 MHz 
DC to 26 MHz 
DC to 25 MHz 


13 ns 

14 ns 

14 ns 


531A,533A, 
535A 


5mV/cm to 20 V/cm 
2 and 1 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 14 MHz 


24 ns 

25 ns 


536 


1 mV/cm to 20 V/cm 


DC to 11 MHz 


32 ns 



fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: <2 
*A Type 81 A Adapter is required. 



Hz. 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 14 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 2.5% (within 2% from 1 mV/cm to 20 mV/ 
cm). Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and 
to > 50 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF. 







INPUT COUPLING 

May be switched to AC, GND, or DC. Input coupling capac- 
itor is automatically charged to proper voltage through a 
1 -megohm resistor when switch is in GND position. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

±100 V (DC + peak AC) from 1 mV/cm to 20 mV/cm, 
±500 V (DC + peak AC) from lOmV/cm to 20 V/cm. 

COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE 

>±5V (DC + peak AC) from 1 mV/cm to 20 mV/cm, 
>±50V from 50 mV/cm to 0.2 V/cm, >±500V from 
0.5 V/cm to 20 V/cm. The ±50-V range can be extended 
from 50mV/cm to lOmV/cm, and the ±500-V range can 
be extended from 0.5 V/cm to 0.1 V/cm by pulling and turn- 
ing the V/cm control. 



152 



TYPE1A5 



COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIOS* 



FREQUENCY 


REJECTION 
RATIO 


SINEWAVE 
AMPLITUDE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


DC to 
100 kHz 


>20,000:1 


±5V P to P 


1 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


100 kHz to 
1 MHz 


> 10,000:1 


±5 V P to P 


1 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


1 MHz to 
10 MHz 


> 10,000:1 

divided by 
freq. in MHz 


±5 V P to P 

divided by 
freq. in MHz 


1 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 


DC to 
10 kHz 


>2,000:1 


±50 V P to P 


lOmV/cm to 
2V/cm 


DC to 
10 kHz 


>100:1 


±50 V P to P 


5V/cm to 
20V/cm 


60 Hz 

(AC coupled) 


> 1,000:1 


±5 V P to P 


1 mV/cm to 
20 mV/cm 



<200 
105 to 



lOmV 



*At 0°C to 50°C 



DC DRIFT 

With time: <200/xV/h at 25°C. With temperature: 
/. t V/°C. With line voltage change: <300/iV from 
125 VAC. 

NOISE 

<50/..V RMS. 

DC SHIFT DUE TO OVERDRIVE 
Within 1 % of ± overdrive signal, but not exceeding 
in the 5-V input signal range, 0.1 V in the 50-V input signal 
range, or 1.0 V in the 500- V input signal range. 

OVERDRIVE RECOVERY 
Recovers to within lOmV of DC-shifted level after 0.1 5 (is in 
the 5-V input signal range. 

COMPARISON VOLTAGE 

to ±5V, internally applied to + input or — input, moni- 
torable at front panel. Accuracy within 7 mV or 0.5% of 
comparison voltage, whichever is greater. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 5 

Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight ^13 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two instruction manuals (070-0638-00). 

TYPE 1A5 PLUG-IN UNIT $575 



lb 
7 lb 

lb 



2.3 kg 
;3.2 kg 
;5.9 kg 



P6046 DC-to-45 MHz DIFFERENTIAL PROBE 




COMMON-MODE LINEAR DYNAMIC RANGE is ±5V (DC 
+ peak AC), ±50 V with 10X attenuator. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIOS with deflection fac- 
tors of 1 mV/cm to 20 mV/cm are 10,000:1 at DC, 1,000:1 at 
45 MHz. Min AC-coupled CMRR from 1 mV/cm to 20mV/cm is 
1000:1 at 20 MHz decreasing to 500:1 from 40 MHz to 45 MHz. 

BANDWIDTH/RISETIME 



The P6046 expands the differential measurement capabilities 
of the Type 1A5 Plug-In Unit. With this new probe, the dif- 
ferential-signal-adding takes place in the probe itself, result- 
ing in high common-mode signal rejection at higher frequencies. 
This differential probe-tip performance minimizes the meas- 
urement errors caused by differences in probes, cable lengths, 
and input attenuators. In addition, the wide-band capability 
of the P6046 assures DC-to-45 MHz performance at the probe 
tip where the measurements are made. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

Probe with Type 1A5 Plug-In Unit 
ATTENUATION is IX. 
INPUT RESISTANCE is 1 megohm, ±1%. 
INPUT CAPACITANCE is approx 10 pF. 



TYPE 1A5 DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH* 


RISETIME* 


200 mV/cm to 5 mV/cm 


DC to 45 MHz 


7.8 ns 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 43 MHz 


8.1 ns 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 38 MHz 


9.2 ns 



*With Oscilloscope Types 544, 546, 547, 556, or 581A, 585A with Type 
81A Adapter. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is ±25 V (DC + peak AC), 
±250 V with 10X attenuator. 

NOISE (periodic and random deviation) is 200 /iV or less. 

THERMAL DRIFT at the probe head is 250/tV/°C or less. 

PROBE CABLE is 6 feet long, terminated with a special nine- 
pin connector. 

P6046 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0213-00) $425 



U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



153 



TYPE1A6 

DC-to-2 MHz 
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT 



• I mV/cm-to-50 V/cm 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• CONSTANT BANDWIDTH 

• 10,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

• ±15-V COMMON-MODE SIGNAL RANGE 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Type 1A6 Plug-In Unit is a DC coupled differential ampli- 
fier designed for Tektronix 530, 540, 550 and 580* Series Oscillo- 
scopes. It features a differential input with a high rejection 
ratio for in-phase signals, allowing the cancellation of unwanted 
or interfering signals. The differential measuring capability is 
particularly useful in the display of instantaneous voltage dif- 
ference between signals. 

The plug-in unit is simple to operate. Only one control is 
used to select the deflection factor and the common-mode 
signal range. 

Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to 
operate the Type 1A6 outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip- 
tion of these instruments for details. 



CHARACTERISTICS 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to >2MHz (<2Hz to >2MHz AC-coupled) at 3-dB 
down. Bandwidth independent of deflection factor. 

RISETIME 
<0.18,as. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/cm to 50 V/cm in 15 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
±1.5% accuracy from 1 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm, ±2.5% accu- 
racy from 0.1 V/cm to 50 V/cm. Uncalibrated continuous 
variation between steps and to approx 125 V/cm. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by 33 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

DC coupled: 1 mV to 50 mV— ±200 V (DC + peak AC) 
0.1 V to 50 V — ±600 V (DC + peak AC) 

AC coupled: 1 mV to 50 mV — ±200 V (AC peak to peak) 
0.1 V to 50 V — ±600 V (DC + peak AC) 

INPUT COUPLING 
AC, GND, or DC. Input coupling capacitor is automatically 
charged to proper voltage through a 1 -megohm resistor when 
switch is in GND position. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 



1 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm 


0.1 V/cm to 50 V/cm 


> 10,000:1 from DC to 100 kHz 


t> 1000:1 from DC to 100 kHz 


>2000:1 at 60 Hz (AC-coupled) 


> 1000:1 at 60 Hz (AC-coupled) 



*A Type 81A Adapter is required. 



154 



f Adjustable. 







COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE 

±15 V (combined DC and peak AC) from 1 mV/cm to 50 
mV/cm, ±150V from 0.1 V/cm to 0.5 V/cm, ±500 V from 
1 V/cm to 50 V/cm. The ±150-V range can be extended 
from 0.1 V/cm to lOmV/cm, and the ±500-V range can be 
extended from 1 V/cm to 0.1 V/cm by pulling and turning the 
V/cm control. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


4 lb 


1.8 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


« 8 lb 


X3.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


s;14 lb 


SS6.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0537-00). 

TYPE 1A6 PLUG-IN UNIT 



$250 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 



The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Other probes are available 
for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog ac- 
cessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 $47.00 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



/ 



type 1A7A 



• 10-/uV/cm BASIC DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• DC-to-1 MHz BANDWIDTH 

• SELECTABLE UPPER AND LOWER —3-dB POINTS 

• 100,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

• INTERNAL DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET 

• ALL SOLID-STATE, FET INPUTS 

• 10-fiV/HOUR DC DRIFT* 

CHARACTERISTICS 

Designed for use with any Tektronix 530, 540, 550, or (with 
Type 81 A Adapter) 580-Series Oscilloscopes. Used with Type 
127, 132 or 133 Power Supply, the Type 1A7A can drive re- 
cording equipment, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes or other indi- 
cators. 

Type 1A7A characteristics represent a significant improve- 
ment from previous performance standards for high gain, dif- 
ferential, DC-coupled amplifiers. DC drift is held to lO/^V/h, 
long term, without chopper stabilization; displayed noise (tan- 
gentially measured) is 16 /xV at 10/tV/cm and 1 MHz, with 
<25-£2 source resistance. Bandwidth is maintained at DC to 
1 MHz throughout the deflection factor range of 10/tV/cm to 
lOV/cm. CMRR is at least 100,000:1 from DC to 100 kHz at 
10,tiV7cm to lOmV/cm. DC differential offset provides an in- 
ternal voltage to cancel residual DC levels or inspect signal 
components over the full differential dynamic range. 

Passband is selectable at both upper and lower 3-dB points 
for noise attenuation and AC coupling at very low frequency 
(0.1 Hz). 

Input circuitry is protected (fused) against accidental severe 
overload. A differential overload light indicates overload is 
being approached. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC-to-1 MHz bandwidth independent of deflection factor. 
Selectable high and low-frequency 3-dB points. 

HIGH-FREQUENCY —3-dB POINTS 

1 MHz, 300 kHz, 100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 300 Hz 
and 100 Hz. 

LOW-FREQUENCY —3-dB POINTS 

0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, and 10 kHz. DC mode is 
included on this control. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lO/iV/cm to lOV/cm in 19 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence, 
accurate within 2%. Uncalibrated continuous variation be- 
tween steps and to approx 25 V/cm. 




INPUT COUPLING 

May be switched to AC, GND, or DC. Input coupling capacitor 
is automatically charged to proper voltage through a 1 -meg- 
ohm resistor when switch is in GND position. Lower — 3-dB 
point is 1.6 Hz (±5%) when AC coupled at input. 

MAXIMUM INPUT CURRENT 





at 25°C 


at 50°C 


lOftV/cm to lOmV/cm 


each input 


±20 pA 


±100 pA 


both inputs 


±40 pA 


±200 pA 


20mV/cm to 10 V/cm 


each input 


±10pA 


±10 pA 


Display shift at 
10/xV/cm (AC coupled) 


each input 


±2 cm 


±10cm 



INPUT RC 

1 megohm, paralleled by 47 pF. 

*With constant temperature. See DC DRIFT specifications. 



DISPLAYED NOISE 

<16/xV or 0.1cm, whichever is greater, measured tan- 
gentially at full bandwidth (DC to 1 MHz), source resistance 
25 O or less. See catalog glossary for definition of "tangential 
noise measurement". 

DC DRIFT 
Drift with time (ambient temperature and line voltage con- 
stant). 

Short term: 5 /iV/minute (P-P) after 
Long term: 10/..V/hour (P-P) after 1 
Drift with ambient temperature (line 
^V/°C. 

DIFFERENTIAL DYNAMIC RANGE 
lO/iV/cm to lOmV/cm — ±400 mV 
20mV/cm to 0.1 V/cm - ±4V 
0.2 V/cm to 1 V/cm — ±40 V 
2 V/cm to 10 V/cm - ±400 V 



1 hour warm up. 
hour warm up. 
voltage constant): 



50 



155 



type 1A7A 



\ 



DC OFFSET (within ±10%) 

±400 mV from 10/iV/cm to 10mV/cm; ±4 V from 20 mV/ 
cm to 0.1 V/cm ; ±40 V from 0.2 V/cm to 1 V/cm ; ±400 V 
from 2 V/cm to 10 V/cm. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

f A VERIFICATION POINTS 



P 

K 1,000 I 





/ 






1 


10 JIV /cm - 10m 


V/cm DC COUPLED- 
AC COUPLED 


A 






20,000. 1 

I 




/ 












DC COUPLED . 
X.AC COUPLED 

L ' 


«V/an - 

1 


10 V/om 








J i 


i"^^^^ 


^ 




800 i| | 



100 Hi I KHi 

FREQUENCY 



COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE 

lOjiiV/cm to lOmV/cm - ±10 V (DC + peak AC). 

20mV/cm to 0.1 V/cm - ±100 V (DC + peak AC). 

0.2 V/cm to 10 V/cm - ±500 V (DC + peak AC). 



MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 



±20 V 
h500V 



DC Coupled: 10 /iV/cm to lOmV/cm - 
(DC + peak AC) 
20mV/cm to 10 V/cm — 
(DC + peak AC) 

AC Coupled Input DC Voltage: 

10/aV/cm to 10 V/cm - ±500 V 

OVERDRIVE RECOVERY 

<10/is to recover within 0.5% of zero level after removal 
of a + or — voltage applied for 1 s, applied voltage within 
the differential dynamic range. 



4% lb 


2.1 kg 


9 lb 


S4.1 kg 


13 lb 


K5.9 kg 



DIFFERENTIAL OVERLOAD LIGHT 

Indicates differential overload is being approached. 

FRONT-PANEL SIGNAL OUTPUT 
0.25 V per displayed cm, ±10%. Output is DC coupled, 
output impedance <750fi. Minimum load resistance, 10kf2. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two instruction manuals (070-0782-00). 

TYPE 1A7A PLUG-IN UNIT $450 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Other probes are available 
for current and high-voltage measurements. See catalog acces- 
sory pages for additional information on these and other items. 

The P6023 low-capacitance probe is well suited for use with 
most Tektronix differential units. 

The probe can be adjusted to match plug-in unit input capac- 
itance ranging from 20 pF to 50 pF. The XI attenuation ratio 
is adjustable over a ±2.5% range to compensate for differ- 
ences in the input resistance of the plug-in unit. When two 
P6023 probes are used to drive the two inputs of a differential 
amplifier, the ability to change the attenuation ratio of one 
probe versus the other helps to maintain the common-mode 
rejection ratio of the system. 

P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 . . %A7 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



156 



Spectrum Analyzers are available from Tektronix to 
satisfy a broad range of measurement requirements and 
situations. Present users of Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550, 
560*, and (with adapter) 580-Series Oscilloscopes can 
now achieve high-quality spectrum analysis at a fraction 
of the cost of other analyzers. A plug-in analyzer and 
oscilloscope offer several advantages over ordinary spec- 
trum analyzers. The oscilloscope's calibrated time base 
and versatile triggering allow direct measurement of pulse 
repetition rate and provide stable displays even in the 
presence of interference. The oscilloscope powers the 
analyzer, and displays the spectrum on its CRT. Following 
are listed the Spectrum Analyzer plug-in units with their 
respective center frequency ranges. 

TYPE 1L5 50Hz-to-l MHz Analyzer 

TYPE 3L5 50 Hz-to-1 MHz Analyzer 

TYPE 1L10 1 MHz-to-36MHz Analyzer 

TYPE 3L10 1 MHz-to-36MHz Analyzer 

TYPE 1L20 10-to-4,200MHz Analyzer 

TYPE 1L30 925-to- 10,500 MHz Analyzer 

TYPE 1L40, 1.5 GHz to 40 GHz Analyzer 

The Type 491 is a composite Spectrum Analyzer system. 
The display and analyzer circuitry is conveniently packaged 
in an easy-to-carry (38 lb) configuration. For very broad- 
band analysis (up to 40 GHz), constant usage, rack- 
mounting (7-inch height), or portable applications, the 
Type 491 is an ideal instrument. Type 491 lOMHz-to- 
40 GHz Analyzer (see pages 52-55). 

Typically, the Spectrum Analyzer selects a portion of 
the electromagnetic spectrum — as wide as 1 00 MHz, for 
example — and displays visually on the oscilloscope CRT 
all the radio activity occurring there. Within the portion of 
the spectrum that concerns you, any signal, amplitude or 
frequency modulated, pulsed carriers, etc. — is displayed 
as a series of "pips" on the CRT. CALIBRATED DISPER- 

*Type 3L5 50-Hz-to-l MHz center frequency Analyzer and Type 3L10 l-to-36 
MHz Analyzer fit Type 561 B and Type 564B Oscilloscopes. 




Spectrum Analysis 

SION permits detailed study of the signal, with frequency 
difference read directly from the CRT. Signals separated by 
10 Hz can be resolved with the Type 1 15 or 1 LI 0; signals 
separated by 1 kHz can be resolved with the Type 1L20, 
1L40 or Type 491. 

The dynamic range capability of the Tektronix Spectrum 
Analyzers is greatly increased by the inclusion of square- 
law and logarithmic detection modes as well as a linear 
mode. The ability to compress or expand signals en- 
hances the versatility of these instruments. Signals of very 
nearly the same amplitude can be displayed in the 
SQUARE-LAW MODE which expands the small difference 
to a proportion that facilitates measurements. Conversely, 
signals of greatly different amplitude (40 dB, for ex- 
ample) can be displayed in the LOG MODE which com- 
presses the difference between them. The Analyzers are 
extremely sensitive and will give usable displays with 
inputs lower than — lOOdBm. 

The usefulness of Tektronix Spectrum Analyzers extends 
into many measurement areas. They are used by govern- 
ment agencies to check the sidebands of radio-transmitting 
devices. Telephone companies find transmission-line carrier 
measurements quick and accurate, often providing data 
not obtainable by other means. Spectrum Analyzers are 
finding increased use in missile projects and the explora- 
tion of outer space, especially in association with the main- 
tenance and trouble-shooting of telemetry equipment. They 
are indispensable to recently developed techniques of 
servicing radar and microwave equipment. The Type 1 L5 
extends spectrum analysis into lower-frequency applica- 
tions including vibration studies, design of audio equip- 
ment, speech therapy, and others. You are encouraged to 
discuss your measurement and test problems with your 
Tektronix Field Engineer or Distributor. 



500-Hz 
Modulation 
of 450-MHz 

Signal 




Log Detection Mode 



Linear Detection Mode 




200-MHz 

Pulsed 

RF 



Repetition-Rate lines evident at 5 ms/cm 
(Note: CW Feedthrough) 



■ mi mi nimn 


i 


Ml 


i 


it 


i 


muni 


■ 


mi 


i 


ii 


:HH' 


mum 


■ 


tin 


i 


if 


I 


iiiinii 


■ 


nil 


■ 


ii 


1 


in 


ii 


in 


l«««i«ii««ii*i *t n 


"1 


w mi^v w ^jiwiv 



Repetition-Rate measurement at 0.5 ms/cm 
Zero Dispersion 



157 



A 



TYPE1L5 



50 Hz-to-1 MHz 
SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT 

• CALIBRATED VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

• CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

• 1 Hz to I MHz IN ONE DISPLAY 

• TIME-BASED OR FREQUENCY -BASED DISPLAYS 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Type 1L5 operates over a center-frequency range of 50 Hz 
to l MHz, and provides accurate spectral and time-based dis- 
plays from 10 Hz to l MHz. Calibrated volts/cm and Hz/cm 
controls make the Type l L5 as easy to use as the Type 530, 540, 
550 or (with adapter) 580-Series Oscilloscopes in which it 
operates. 

Resolution bandwidth extends from 10 Hz to 500 Hz. High- 
resolution spectral displays can be viewed in their entirety 
(even at the very slow sweep rates required for maximum resolu- 
tion) with the Type 549 Storage Oscilloscope. Stored displays 
can also be compared with subsequent displays, and can be 
easily photographed for permanent record. 

Applications include vibration studies, waveform analysis, 
and noise measurements. 

SPECTRAL DISPLAYS 

CENTER FREQUENCY RANGE 

50-Hz to 990-kHz, calibrated in 10-Hz, 100-Hz, 1-kHz and 
10-kHz steps. Continuously variable to at least 1 MHz. 



CENTER 
FREQUENCY 


ACCURACY 


50 Hz to 990 Hz 


±(5% + 50 Hz + 50Hz/°C change) 


1000 Hz to 9900 Hz 


±(5% + lOOHz-f 1 00 Hz/ °C change) 


10 kHz to 99 kHz 


±(5% + 3 kHz + 200Hz/°C change) 


100 kHz to 990 kHz 


±(5% + 10 kHz + 200 Hz/ °C change) 



STABILITY 

50 Hz to 9900 Hz — 100 Hz/hour or less with stable ambient 
temperature (+1°C). 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

10/.iV/cm to 2V/cm, calibrated in RMS volt/cm (1-2-5 se- 
quence). Accurate within 3% from 1 mV/cm to 2V/cm, 
within 6% from 10/j.V/cm to 500/tV/cm (-^100 pulled), for 
linear displays at maximum resolution. The uncalibrated 
variable control is continuous between steps (~3:1). 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

10 Hz/cm to 100 kHz/cm in 9 steps. Accuracy at center fre- 
quencies of: 

a) 50 Hz to 9900 Hz - <±10% (20°C to 30°C) 

— <±20% (0°C to 50°C) 

b) 10 kHz to 990 kHz — <15% (0°C to 50°C) 
Linearity is within 3%. 

COUPLED RESOLUTION 

<10Hz to >500Hz (20°C to 30°C) cross-coupled with the 

dispersion control but separately switchable. 
DISPLAY FLATNESS 

Amplitude variations are within 0.5 dB from 10 Hz to 1 MHz 

at most deflection factors; except within +0.5 dB, — 3 dB 

at 1 mV/cm and 2 mV/cm (or 10/<,V/cm and 20/tV/cm with 

4-100 pulled). 
NOISE 

<5/xV RMS. 




;2MHz ; >1 V 



DYNAMIC RANGE 

>60dB in LOG (uncalibrated) mode. 

INTERMODULATION DISTORTION AND SPURIOUS 
SIGNALS 

>50dB below the 6-cm signal level. 

RECORDER OUTPUT 

5 to 15mV for 6-cm display, into 600-Q. 

LOCAL OSCILLATOR OUTPUT 

Must sweep >lMHz from ~3MHz to 
peak to peak. 

SWEEP MODES 

Manual, internal and external. Accuracy of frequency mea- 
surements can be increased using manual scan and monitor- 
ing the local oscillator output with a frequency counter. Type 
549 Storage Oscilloscope and Type 556 Dual-Beam Oscillo- 
scope provides an internally-coupled sweep to the Analyzer; 
external input is used with other oscilloscopes. 

TIME-BASED DISPLAYS 

BANDWIDTH 

10 Hz to 1 MHz at most deflection factors; 10 Hz to 700 kHz 
at 0.1 V/cm and 0.2 V/cm (or 1 mV/cm and 2 mV/cm with 
-^100 switch pulled). 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/cm to 100 V/cm in calibrated P-to-P steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3% (within 6% from 5 V/cm to 100 
V/cm). Uncalibrated control provides continuous variation 
between steps, reduces gain by a factor of approx 3. 
INPUT 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. 

300 V DC + peak AC maximum input voltage. 



158 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 6 lb 2.7 kg 

Domestic shipping weight JTlO lb ~4.5 kg 

Export-packed weight ~18 lb ~8.2 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

IX probe (010-0193-00), banana-to-banana cable (012-0031- 
00), BNC-to-banana cable (012-0091-00), plug (134-0052-00), 
plug protector (134-0076-00), two instruction manuals (070- 
0600-01). 
TYPE 1L5 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1025 



TYPE 1I_ $ 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The standard IX probe supplied with the analyzer satisfies 
most measurement requirements. Optional probes may be better 
suited for particular applications. See catalog accessory pages 
for additional information on these and other items. 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6012 10X Probe Package, order 010-0203-00 $32.00 

600 Q Termination (BNC), order 011-0092-00 $15.00 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



SWEPT FREQUENCY CONVERTER 




• SLAVED SPECTRUM ANALYZER-SWEPT 
FREQUENCY DISPLAYS 

• 50-Hz to 1-MHz CENTER FREQUENCY 

• 1-MHz DISPERSION CAPABILITY 

• OUTPUT CONSTANT WITHIN 0.5 dB 



The Swept Frequency Converter is designed as an accessory 
unit to the Type 3L5 and Type 1L5 Low Frequency Spectrum 
Analyzer Plug-In Units. It accepts the local oscillator output from 
the analyzer (approx 2 MHz to 3 MHz) and converts it to a 
signal source slaved to the center frequency and dispersion set- 
ting of the analyzer. 

The result is a signal source with center frequency range of 
50 Hz to 1 MHz, single frequency (analyzer in MANUAL SWEEP 
mode) or swept frequency with dispersion capability of 1 MHz 
max to 100 Hz min. It provides for variable amplitude control 
and regulation for constant output within 0.5 dB. Sweep rate 
is controlled by the horizontal TIME BASE which sweeps the 
local oscillator of the analyzer and, thereby, the converter. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

OUTPUT FREQUENCY — 50 Hz to 1 MHz, selectable within the 
center frequency range of the Spectrum Analyzer. 

OUTPUT VOLTAGE — 4 V P-P to 8 V P-P max behind 600 Q. 

OUTPUT FREQUENCY FLATNESS— within 0.5 dB into 600 Q. 



OSCILLATOR INPUT VOLTAGE (from Spectrum Analyzer) 
0.8 V P-P to 2 V P-P. 

OUTPUT REGULATION 

FAST — effective in preserving amplitude flatness when low- 
est frequency component is not less than 10 kHz and sweep 
rate is lOms/div or faster. 

SLOW — used when frequency is less than 10 kHz and for 
sweep rates slower than 10 ms/div. 
OUTPUT AMPLITUDE RECOVERY (output regulator FAST to 
SLOW) 
10 s or less to recover to same amplitude as FAST. 

OUTPUT RESISTANCE — 600 fi within 15%. 
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 VAC to 272 VAC, 50 Hz to 400 
Hz. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
600-H termination (011-0092-00); two BNC cables (012-0075- 
00); 3- to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); BNC-to-dual banana 
adapter (013-0094-00); two instruction manuals (070-0762-00). 

SWEPT FREQUENCY CONVERTER, order 015-0107-00 . . $300 
600 n STEP ATTENUATOR 



5 1 /, 


in 


14.0 cm 


5' 3 /„ 


in 


14.7 cm 


5 3 A 


in 


14.5 cm 


3V 2 


lb 


1.6 kg 


7'A 


lb 


^ 3.4 kg 


12 


lb 


W 5.5 kg 




The 600-Q Step Attenuator is a to 51 dB switch attenuator 
for use with the Type 1L5. The input resistance is 600 O 
(within 2%). The attenuation error is 0.05 dB/dB of indicated 
attenuation. Power rating is % W max. Bandwidth is DC 
to 1 MHz. 
600-Q Step Attenuator (order 01 1-0093-00) $75 



159 



TYPE 1 LI Q 



1-to-36 MHz SPECTRUM 
ANALYZER UNIT 

• CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

• COUPLED RESOLUTION 

• CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED SWEPT OSCILLATOR 

• IMAGE REJECTION 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 

1 to 36-MHz spectral displays can now be viewed on any 
Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 or (with adapter) 580-Series 
Oscilloscope. The Type 549 Storage Oscilloscope adds further 
convenience to spectrum analysis. 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION makes frequency measurement as 
easy and accurate as time measurement. Frequency differences 
can be read directly from the CRT. The SEARCH MODE per- 
mits rapid location of signals for analysis. 

COUPLED RESOLUTION greatly simplifies operation, pro- 
viding narrow resolution bandwidth at narrow dispersion and 
wide resolution bandwidth at wide dispersion. Dispersion and 
resolution controls can be uncoupled and operated separately 
if desired, for optimized viewing of a particular signal. 

IF stability is achieved through use of CRYSTAL-CON- 
TROLLED OSCILLATORS. The swept local oscillator is also 
controlled through a crystal discriminator. An external, front- 
end crystal-operated oscillator can be connected through a 
front-panel patch arrangement to provide added stability to 
spectral displays within or outside the normal 1 to 36-MHz 
range of the Type 1L10. 

IMAGE REJECTION is achieved through use of a 60-MHz 
first IF amplifier which places images at more than twice 
the upper tuning frequency of the Type 1L10. 

FREQUENCY RANGE 

1 to 36 MHz, fine and coarse tuning. 

MINIMUM CW SENSITIVITY (50-fi INPUT) 

— 100 dBm, at 2-kHz/cm dispersion and 1-kHz resolution. 

DIAL ACCURACY 

±(100 kHz + 1% of dial reading). 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

0.01 kHz/cm to 2 kHz/cm, 8 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Accuracy within ±3% when adjusted for individual oscillo- 
scope, within ±7% without adjustment. Dispersion linearity 
within ±5%. Search position (uncalibrated) — minimum 20 
kHz + 1 kHz/MHz dial frequency full scale (10 cm). 

COUPLED RESOLUTION 

10 Hz to 1 kHz, coupled with calibrated dispersion positions, 
and separately switchable. Search position — approximately 
10 kHz. 

DISPLAY FLATNESS 

Amplitude variation is within 2 dB over dispersions of 20 kHz 
or less. 

MAXIMUM INCIDENTAL FM 
IF within 5 Hz. 
LO within 25 Hz + 1 Hz/MHz dial frequency. 

INTERMODULATION 

25 dB below full-screen deflection in the log mode for input 
levels up to —20 dBm. 




-20 dBm without RF atten- 



INPUT IMPEDANCE 

Approx 50 Q and approx 600 Q. 
MAXIMUM INPUT POWER 

+24 dBm at full RF attenuation, 

uation. 
RF ATTENUATOR 

51 dB ± 0.1 dB/dB in 1-dB steps. 
IF GAIN CONTROL 

>60 dB range. 
VERTICAL DISPLAY (6cm) 

Log — 50-dB dynamic range. 

Linear — 26-dB dynamic range. 

Linear XI — 26-dB dynamic range. 

Video— 100 mV/cm (variable), <16Hz to > 10 MHz, approx 

50-fJ input resistance. 
RECORDER OUTPUT 

DC-coupled, approx 600-Q source resistance, 15-mV/cm dis- 
play in Linear mode, output linear with voltage. 
WEIGHTS 

Net weight 6 

Domestic shipping weight ~11 

Export-packed weight ~18 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Cable assembly, BNC to BNC, 2V 2 inches (012-0097-00); cable 

assembly, BNC-to-banana plug, 24 inches (012-0096-00); tini- 

plug (134-0052-00); two instruction manuals (070-0510-00). 
TYPE 1L10 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1175 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



lb 


2.7 kg 


lb 


=25.0 kg 


lb 


s;8.2 kg 



o 



160 



TYPE 



1L20 
1L40 



MULTI-BAND SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNITS 

NEW 




Type U20 covers TO MHz to 4.2 GHz 



• INTERNAL PHASE LOCK 

• CALIBRATED DISPERSION TO 1 00 MHz 

• COUPLED RESOLUTION 

• AMPLITUDE VARIATIONS WITHIN 3 dB OR LESS 

• CONVENIENT WAVEGUIDE MIXERS WITH TYPE 
1L40 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 



Operating convenience and performance is now offered in 
multi-band plug-in units for all present Tektronix Type 530, 540, 
550, or (with adapter) 580-Series Oscilloscopes. The Type 549 
Oscilloscope adds further convenience to spectrum analysis — 
allowing storage and simultaneous comparison of spectral 
displays. 

BUILT-IN PHASE LOCK circuit synchronizes the analyzer 
local oscillator with a stable reference frequency (internal 
1 MHz or external 1 to 5 MHz). When the local oscillator 
is locked in phase to the reference frequency, the local oscil- 
lator stability approaches that of the reference frequency. 
This allows very narrow dispersion at high frequencies where 
the analyzer would normally be limited by oscillator drift, 
microphonics, and other perturbations. Phase lock can be used 
to view any signal within the tuning range of the analyzer. 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION from 1 kHz/cm to 10 MHz/cm 
makes frequency measurement as easy and accurate as time 
measurement. Frequency differences can be read directly 
from the CRT. 

COUPLED RESOLUTION from 1 kHz to 100 kHz greatly 
simplifies operation, providing narrow resolution bandwidth 
at narrow dispersion and wide resolution bandwidth at wide 
dispersion. Dispersion and resolution controls can be uncoupled 
and operated separately if desired, for optimized viewing of 
a particular signal. 

*With optional accessories. 



161 



TYPE 



1L20 
1L40 



TYPE 


BAND 


FREQUENCY 
RANGE 


MINIMUM 
CW SENSITIVITY* 


1-kHz 
RESOLUTION 


100-kHz 
RESOLUTION 


1 

L 
2 



1 


10 MHz to 
275 MHz 


> -lOOdBm 


> -80 dBm 


2 


275 MHz to 
900 MHz 


> — llOdBm 


> -90 dBm 


3 


850 MHz to 
2 GHz 


> -lOOdBm 


> -80 dBm 


4 


1 .95 GHz to 

3.1 GHz 


> -95dBm 


> -75 dBm 


5 


3 GHz to 
4.2 GHz 


> -90dBm 


> -70 dBm 


1 
L 
4 



1 


1.5 GHz to 
4.0 GHz 


> -llOdBm 


> -90 dBm 


2 


3.8 GHz to 
8.2 GHz 


> -lOOdBm 


> -80 dBm 


3 


8.2 GHz to 
12.4 GHz 


> -95dBm 


> -75 dBm 


OPTIONAL WAVEGUIDE MIXERS 

AND ADAPTER 

REQUIRED BEYOND 12.4 GHz 


4 


12.4 GHz to 
18 GHz 


> -90dBm 


> -70 dBm 


5 


18 GHz to 
40 GHz 


> -80dBm 
to 26.5 GHz 


> —60 dBm 


> -70 dBm 

to 40 GHz 


> -50 dBm 



*Signal -(- noise = 2X noise 

DIAL ACCURACY 

± (2 MHz + 1 % of dial reading). 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

1 kHz/cm to 10 MHz/cm in 1-2-5 sequence, 2 ranges (kHz/ 
cm — MHz/cm). Accuracy of 10-cm display, throughout full 
range of IF center frequency control, within ±3% except 
at 2 MHz/cm (±5%) and 1 MHz/cm (±7%). Accuracy 
can be increased using internal 1-MHz crystal markers for 
calibration. Dispersion linearity within ±3%. Zero disper- 
sion useful for PRF measurements. 

BANDWIDTH RESOLUTION 

1 kHz to 100 kHz, coupled with calibrated dispersion posi- 
tions but separately switchable. 

DISPLAY FLATNESS 

Amplitude variations are within 3dB over the full 100-MHz 
dispersion range (or less) except: 

a) over 50 MHz in Band 1 with Type 1 L20. 

b) within 6dB from 12.4 GHz to 40 GHz with Type 1L40. 

INCIDENTAL FM ( LO + IF) 

300 Hz or less at LO fundamental when phase locked. 

PHASE LOCK 

Internal 1-MHz reference accurate within 0.01%. External 
input accepts 1-MHz to 5-MHz signals from 1 V to 5 V peak 
to peak. 



INPUT IMPEDANCE 
Approx 50 CI. 

MAXIMUM INPUT POWER 

—30 dBm for linear operation, +15 dBm (25 mW) safe diode 
power limit. 



IF ATTENUATOR 

51 dB in 1-dB steps, 

IF GAIN CONTROL 

>50-dB range. 



:0.1 dB/dB. 



IF CENTER FREQUENCY 

±25-MHz range from 5 MHz/cm to 0.2 MHz/cm, ±10 MHz 
at 10 MHz/cm. ±2. 5-MHz range in all kHz/cm positions. 
FINE control has ±l-MHz and ±50-kHz range in MHz/cm 
and kHz/cm modes respectively. 

VERTICAL DISPLAY (6cm) 
Log — >40-dB dynamic range. 
Linear — >26-dB dynamic range. 
Square Law — >13-dB total dynamic range. 
Video— <16Hz to >10MHz, approx 50-n input resistance. 

RECORDER OUTPUT 

12mV to 20 mV with 6-cm linear display. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 7'/ 2 lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~14 lb 

Export-packed weight ;i;20 lb 



3.4 kg 
i6A kg 
S9.1 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Patch cord, BNC to banana (012-0091-00); plug protector 
(134-0076-00); fini-plug (134-0052-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0519-01 for Type 1L20, 070-0904-00 for Type 1L40). 

TYPE 1L20 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1950 

TYPE 1L40 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $2150 



162 



TYPE 



1L20 
1L40 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 



The following accessories exfend the operational range of 
the 1L40 from 1 2.4 GHz to 40 GHz. The waveguide mixer 
adapter and cable are required for use with the waveguide 
mixers. 

Waveguide Mixer Adapter (H9-01 04-00) $40.00 

Cable Assembly (012-0115-00) $ 8.00 

Waveguide Mixer 12.4— 18.0 GHz (119-0097-00) $ 70.00 

Waveguide Mixer 18.0— 26.5 GHz (119-0098-00) $ 80.00 

Waveguide Mixer 26.5—40.0 GHz (1 19-0099-00) $125.00 



Attenuators are all supplied with Type N fittings. See acces- 
sory section for adapters for other series. Frequency range is 
DC to 12.4 GHz. Power rating is 2 W average, 300-W peak. 
Impedance is 50 CI. 



OPTIONAL WAVEGUIDE MIXERS 



Mixer Adapter 



l70^ 






Cable Assembly 




II 



* 



Mixer Mixer Mixer 

12.4— 18 GHz 18— 26.5 GHz 26.5— 40 GH 





1 0-dB attenuator, order 01 1 -0085-00 $ 40 

20-dB attenuator, order 01 1 -0086-00 $ 40 

40-dB attenuator, order 01 1 -0087-00 $ 50 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



163 



TYPE I*) ] 



350-ps SAMPLING UNIT 

• DC-fo-T GHz BANDWIDTH 

• 2 mV/cm-to-200 mV/tm 
DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• INTERNAL TRIGGERING 

• 100 ps/cm-fo-50 fis/cm 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE 

Used with any of the Type 530, 540, 550 or 580*-Series 
Oscilloscopes, the Type 1S1 Sampling Unit extends the measur- 
ing capabilities to 1 gigahertz. Operation is like a conventional 
oscilloscope — but with a combination of bandwidth and sensi- 
tivity possible only through sampling. 

The Type 1S1 features internal triggering with a built-in delay 
line — no need for pretriggers or external delay lines. The tun- 
nel-diode trigger circuit assures stable triggering through 1 
gigahertz. Calibrated sweep range is from lOOps/cm to 50 
/ts/cm. A single control is used to select the sweep range and 
magnify the display up to XI 00 when desired. This single- 
control feature allows direct read-out of the sweep time/cm 
even when magnified. 

Calibrated vertical deflection factors range from 2 mV/cm to 
200 mV/cm. Noise in the display is less than 1 mV, and can be 
reduced by a smoothing control. A DC-offset control permits 
observation of millivolt signals in the presence of up to ±1 
volt input levels. Output signals are available at the front panel 
for driving chart recorders. 



VERTICAL SYSTEM 
RISETIME 

Less than or equal to 350 ps. 

BANDWIDTH 

Equivalent to DC-to-1 GHz at 3-dB down. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

2 mV/cm to 200 mV/cm in 7 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Each step accurate within 3%. Variable between steps, ex- 
tending to 500 /xV/cm, uncalibrated. 

RANDOM NOISE 

Equivalent to an input signal of 1 mV or less, unsmoothed; 
500 /iV, smoothed (tangentially-measured). 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominally 50 0. Safe overload is ±5V. GR874 input con- 
nectors. Trigger input is BNC, nominally 50 Q. 

DC OFFSET RANGE 

+ 1 V to —1 V. Allows signals between +1 V and —1 V 
limits to be displayed at 2 mV/cm. Signals between +2V 
and — 2 V limits may be displayed at 200 mV/cm. Monitor 
jacks provide 10X actual DC offset through 10kf>. 

VERTICAL OUTPUT 

200 mV for each centimeter of displayed signal through 10 kf>. 

PROBE POWER 

Available at front-panel connector for cathode-follower 
probe, Type 281 TDR Pulser, and Type 282 Adapter for high- 
impedance probes. 

*A Type 81A Adapter is required. 




HORIZONTAL SYSTEM 

TIME BASE 

50/is/cm to lOOps/cm in 18 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Each step accurate within 3%. Variable between steps. 

MAGNIFIER 

Displays at sweep rates from 1 ns/cm to 50 /is/cm can be 
magnified up to XI 00 (depending on sweep rate) while main- 
taining a constant number of samples/cm and the same Time 
Position Range. Magnification occurs from a fixed time-ref- 
erence point at the left end of the trace. 

TIME POSITION RANGE 

500 /is, 50 /is, 5 /<s, 500 ns and 50 ns, depending on unmag- 
nified TIME/CM setting. Coarse and fine TIME POSITION 
controls position start of the display through a time interval 
equal to the TIME POSITION RANGE setting. 

SAMPLES/CM 

Continuously variable adjustment of samples displayed per 
centimeter horizontally from approximately 5 samples/cm to 
an immeasurable number. Allows optimum adjustment of 
display rate and dot density. 

DISPLAY MODES 

Repetitive, single display, manual scan, or external scan. 
Front-panel START button for single-display operation. 

INTERNAL DELAY LINE 

Permits viewing the leading edge of the input waveform. 



164 



TRIGGERING 

SOURCE (AC-Coupled): Internal, trigger pickoff in signal 
channel delivers approximately 1/7 of the input signal am- 
plitude; External, 50-O. terminated input. AMPLITUDE (EXT): 
Sinewaves, 10 mV to 400 mV, peak-to-peak; Pulses, 5 mV, 
either polarity. 2 V max DC. REPETITION RATE: Sinewave 
triggering or synchronizing from 100 kHz through 1 GHz. 
Pulse triggering from 10 Hz through 1 GHz. JITTER: Depends 
on signal shape, repetition rate and amplitude; <40 ps un- 
der optimum conditions. 

HORIZONTAL OUTPUT 

IV per displayed centimeter; lOkQ source impedance. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


7 3 A lb 


3.5 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


Si 7 lb 


X 77 kg 


Export-packed weight 


s25 lb 


Si 1.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
5-ns 50-n RG58 cable, GR connectors (017-0512-00); 50-n 
42-inch BNC coaxial cable (012-0057-01); 10X 50-n GR at- 
tenuator (017-0078-00); 10X 50-n attenuator, BNC connectors 
(011-0059-00); 18-inch patch cord, banana connectors (012- 



TYPE 1S1 

0039-00); 1 8-inch patch cord, BNC-banana plugs (012-0090- 
00); GR-to-BNC female adapter (017-0063-00); GR-to-BNC 
male adapter (017-0064-00); two instruction manuals [070- 
0475-00). 
TYPE 1S1 SAMPLING UNIT $1275 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

TYPE 281 TDR PULSER, order 015-0060-00 $95 

TYPE 282 PROBE ADAPTER, order 01 5-0074-00 $95 

P6034 10X Probe, order 010-01 10-00 $40 

P6035 100X Probe, order 010-0111-00 $40 

P6040/CT-1 CURRENT PROBE, order 015-0041-00 $35 

VP-1 VOLTAGE PICKOFF "T", order 017-0073-01 $25 

POWER DIVIDER GR 874-TPD, order 017-0082-00 .... $70 

COUPLING CAPACITOR, GR 874-K, order 017-0028-00 $11 

This represents only a partial listing of the many useful items 
available for sampling systems. Please refer to the catalog 
accessory section for a more complete listing. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



THE WAVEFORM PHOTOGRAPHS BELOW ILLUSTRATE THE PERFORMANCE CAPABILITIES OF THE TYPE 7 SI 
UNIT. THESE INCLUDE LOW INHERENT DISPLAY NOISE, STABLE TRIGGERING AND REAL-TIME SAMPLING. 



SAMPLING 





TANGENTIAL NOISE— A 1-mV, 2-ns wide pulse externally trig- 
gered. Upper waveform is unsmoothed. The lower is smoothed. 
Vert: 2 mV/cm. Horiz: 1 ns/cm. 



TRIGGERING AT 7 GHz— A 1-GHz sinewave; internally trig- 
gered. Vert: 700 mV/cm. Horiz: 0.5 ns/cm. 





PULSE TRIGGERING— A 50-mV, 2-ns wide pulse; internally trig- 
gered. Vert: 20 mV /cm. Horiz: 0.5 ns/cm. 



REAL-TIME SAMPLING DISPLAY— A 1-kHz sinewave. Internal 
Main Frame triggering. Vert: lOOmV/cm (free running sampler). 
Horiz: 0.5ms/cm (realtime — main frame). 



165 



TYPE 1S2 

REFLECTOMETER 
& SAMPLING UNIT 

• 140-ps TDR SYSTEM RISETIME 

• 90-ps SAMPLING RISETIME 

• RHO AND VOLTAGE CALIBRATION 

• TWO INTERNAL PULSE SOURCES 

The Type 1S2 Sampling Plug-In converts any Tektronix 530, 
540, or 550-Series Oscilloscope to a time-domain reflectometry 
measurement system. As a TDR, the Type 1S2 has a system 
risetime of 140ps and is calibrated in rho (p) from 0.005 p/div 
to 0.5 p/div. The horizontal is calibrated from 1 cm/div to 
lOOm/div for dielectrics of air, TFE and polyethylene. Two 
pulse outputs provide either 50 ps t r , 250 mV into 50 O, or 
1 ns f r , IV into 50 n. 

The 90-ps risetime, 5-mV/div deflection factor, 100-ps/div 
sweep and built-in triggering capability make the Type 1S2 
useful for many other sampling measurements. A pretrigger is 
required. 

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AS REFLECTOMETER 

VERTICAL 
SYSTEM RISETIME 

Less than or equal to 140ps, for the displayed reflection from 
a short-circuited 20-cm air line. 

VERTICAL SCALE 

Calibrated in p (rho) and volts: 0.005 p/div to 0.5 p/div or 
5 mV/div to 500 mV/div in 7 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Continuous variation between steps, 
uncalibrated. 

RESOLUTION 

Reflection coefficients as small as 0.001 can be observed. 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominal 50-fi feed-through signal channel, (termination sup- 
plied). GR874 connectors. 

DC OFFSET RANGE 

+2p to — 2p (or +2V to — 2 V). Allows open-circuit re- 
flections to be displayed at full sensitivity. Actual DC off- 
set may be monitored at 1 p/V through 10 kf>. 

VERTICAL OUTPUT 

1 V for each division of displayed signal through 10 kO. 

HORIZONTAL 
HORIZONTAL SCALE 

Calibrated in distance and time: full-scale, 10-div display 
(without magnification) of 10 m, 100 m, or 1 km; 100 ns, 1 /.is, 
or 10p,s. Accuracy is ±3% with or without magnification. 

MAGNIFIER 

XI to XI 00 in 7 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). Contin- 
uously variable between steps. Allows display to be mag- 
nified from a fixed on-screen reference point, 1 major division 
from the left edge of the graticule. 

UNITS/DIV READOUT 

Horizontal scale factor (combination of horizontal range and 
magnification settings) readout, directly at front panel, indi- 
cates either distance or time/div. 




DISTANCE OR TIME POSITION 

Ten-turn dial directly reads one-way distance or round-trip 
time to test-line discontinuity. Round-trip time readings are 
accurate to within ±1%. Range of 10-turn dial is the same 
as the full-scale, 10-div display without magnification. 

JITTER 

Less than or equal to 20 ps with internal pulse sources. 

DIELECTRIC 

Calibrated for air, tfe and polyethylene lines. Preset mode 
adjustable for lines with velocity of propagation from 0.6 to 
1.0X velocity of light. 

DISPLAY MODES 

Repetitive or single sweep, manual or external scan. 

HORIZONTAL OUTPUT 

1 V for each division of displayed signal through 10 kO. 

PULSE SOURCES 
FAST-RISE OUTPUT 

Approximately 50-ps risetime, 250 mV. 50-Q source (reverse 
terminated). 

LARGE-AMPLITUDE OUTPUT 

Approximately 1-ns risetime, IV. 50-fJ source (reverse ter- 
minated). 

PERFORMANCE AS SAMPLER 
RISETIME 
Less than or equal to 90 ps. 

BANDWIDTH 

Equivalent to DC-to-3.9 GHz at 3-dB down. 



166 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

5 mV/div to 500 mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence, 
accurate within 3%. Continuous variation between steps, 
uncalibrated. 

RANDOM NOISE 

Equivalent to an input signal of 2 mV or less (tangentially- 
measured). 

SIGNAL RANGE 

Signals between +2 V and — 2 V limits may be displayed at 
any deflection-factor setting. Safe overload is ±3 V if sig- 
nal channel is coupled directly into EXT TRIG INPUT, ±5V 
if not. 

TRIGGERING 

SOURCE: External only, AC coupled — may serve as termina- 
tion for signal channel. AMPLITUDE: Sinewaves, 100 mV to 
2 V, peak-to-peak; Pulses, 50 mV to 1 V either polarity. 3 V 
max DC. REPETITION RATE: Sinewave triggering or syn- 
chronizing from 100 kHz through 5 GHz. Pulse triggering from 
10 Hz through 5 GHz. JITTER: Depends on signal shape, 
repetition rate and amplitude; <30 ps under optimum con- 
ditions. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


8 lb 


3.3 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


Sl8 lb 


« 8.2 kg 


Export-packed weight 


~28 lb 


Si 2.7 kg 



TYPE 1S2 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

10-inch GR cable (017-0513-00); 5X attenuator (017-0079-00); 
2X attenuator (017-0080-00); 50-n termination (017-0081-00); 
20-cm air line (017-0084-00); 50-Q termination, short circuit 
(017-0087-00); 5-ns, 50-n RG213 cable (017-0502-00); 18-inch 
patch cord (012-0039-00); 18-inch BNC-to-banana plug patch 
cord (012-0090-00); two instruction manuals (070-0543-00). 

TYPE 1S2 SAMPLING UNIT $1400 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Type 113 Delay Cable $275 

P6034 10X Probe Package, order 010-0110-00 $ 40 

P6035 100X Probe Package, order 010-0111-00 $ 40 

Power Divider, GR 874-TPD, order 017-0082-00 $ 70 

Coupling Capacitor, GR 874-K, order 017-0028-00 $ 11 

This listing covers only a few of the more commonly useful 
items for sampling instruments. A more complete listing can 
be found in the accessory section of this catalog. 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



167 



TYPE 



561B 



R561B 

PLUG-IN OSCILLOSCOPE 




• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SAMPLING 
AND SPECTRUM ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS 

• 8 x I O-tm DISPLAY 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• X-Y DISPLAYS 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Tektronix Type 561 B and Type R561 B Oscilloscopes have 
a complete selection of plug-ins that permit changing measure- 
ment capabilities to meet changing measurement needs. Ampli- 
fier plug-ins offer a wide range of measurement capabilities 
with 10-MHz dual-trace plug-ins, 10/j.V/div differential plug-ins, 
25-ps sampling plug-ins and spectrum analyzer plug-ins cover- 
ing the spectrum from 10 Hz to 36 MHz. Time-base plug-ins 
include delayed sweep, X50 magnifier, single time bases and 
sampling time bases. Two amplifier plug-ins may be used for 
X-Y or multiple X-Y displays. An automatic-seeking amplifier 
and time base are also available. 

Both the Type 561 B and the Type R561B use an 8 by 10-cm 
cathode-ray tube that features an internal graticule with con- 
trollable illumination. You can take photographs with the same 
ease, but without the parallax of an external graticule. 

Occupying only 7 inches of rack height, the Type R561B 
bolts directly to the rack, but may be ordered with optional 
slide-out tracks at additional cost. 

The Types 561B/R561B offer reliable operation with low- 
heat dissipation through the use of solid-state components. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier Plug-In 
Units including: 

Dual trace— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns. 
Differential— DC to 1 MHz, 10/xV/div. 
Sampling— DC to 14 GHz, 25 ps. 
Spectrum Analyzer — 10 Hz to 36 MHz. 

HORIZONTAL 

Horizontal deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier and Time- 
Base Units. 



CRT 



DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE- 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 



-3.5 kV. 



OTHER 

CALIBRATOR— 4 mV to 40 V (±1.5%), 1 kHz (±1%) square- 
wave and 40 V DC. Into 50.0 Q, 2 mV, 20 mV and 200 mV 
squarewave. Current loop of 10 mA DC and 10 mA square- 
wave (±1.5%). 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 V to 136 V or 180 V to 272 V, 
48 Hz to 440 Hz (561 B), 48 Hz to 66 Hz (R561B). 



168 



TYPE 



561B 
R561B 



PARALLAX-FREE MEASUREMENTS— CONVENIENT PHOTOGRAPHY 

on the cathode-ray tube of the Type 561 B and R561B Oscillo- 



The internal graticule eliminates parallax, a common cause 
of erroneous readings. Parallax is an apparent displacement 
of the trace in relationship to the graticule. It occurs when 
the trace is on a different plane than the graticule and is not 
viewed from exactly the same angle for all parts of the display. 

When the trace and graticule are on the same plane, as 



scope, parallax is eliminated. 

Controllable illumination of the internal graticule enables 
you to easily take waveform photographs in which the graticule 
rulings are sharply delineated. This was formerly possible only 
with oscilloscopes using external graticules. 




■■>«!»■ 



BBS 




■ 




SAMPLING 

Transistor turn-on and turn-off (upper trace). 

pulse (lower trace). 



Driving 



SPECTRUM ANALYZER 

Waveform showing center frequency and two sidebands. 



DELAYING SWEEP (Double exposure) 

Intensified portion of waveform (upper trace) expanded 
(lower trace) by means of delayed sweep. 



PLUG-IN UNITS 




PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 




PLUG-IN 

UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 




MULTIPLE TRACE 




SPECIAL PURPOSE 


3A8 
Operational 


20 mV/div 


DC to 3.5 MHz 


100 ns 


$ 650 


3A3 Dual-Trace 


100/iV/div 


DC to 500 kHz 


0.7 (a 


$ 850 


3A6 Dual-Trace 


lOmV/div 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


525 


3C66 
Carrier Amp 


10/istrain 
/div 


DC to 5 kHz 


70 /is 


450 


3A72 Dual-Trace 


lOmV/div 


DC to 650 kHz 


0.54 ps 


295 




SINGLE TRACE 




3A74 Four-Trace 


20 mV/div 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 fa 


650 


2A60 


50 mV/div 


DC to 1 MHz 


0.35 (is 


$ 125 




DIFFERENTIAL 


3A5 
Automatic/Prog 


lOmV/div 
1 mV/div 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 5 MHz 


23 ns 


825 


2A61 


10/tV/div 


0.06 Hz to 
300 kHz 


1.2 /is 


$ 425 


3A75 


50 mV/div 


DC to 4 MHz 


90 ns 


195 




TIME-BASE UNITS 




2A63 


1 mV/div 


DC to 300 kHz 


1 .2 /.is 


175 


TYPE 


FASTEST 

TIME-BASE 

RATE 


MAGNIFIER 


FEATURES 


PRICE 


3A3 


100/iV/div 


DC to 500 kHz 


07 /is 


850 


3A7 Comparator 


1 mV/div 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


695 


2B67 


1 /xs/div 


X5 


sinale sweep 


$ 225 


3A9 


10/tV/div 


DC to 1 MHz 


350 ns 


490 


3B3 


0.5 /ts/div 


X5 


calib sweep 
delay; 
sinale sweep 


650 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


3B4 


0.2 iis/div 


XI to X50 


sinqle sweep 


450 


3L5 


♦10/iV/div 


10 Hz to 1MHz 




$1125 


3B5 

Automatic/ 
Programmable 


0.1 jiis/div 


X10 

XI 00 


calib delay 
mag; 

auto-seek pro- 
grammable 


950 


3L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 
Center Freq 




1275 


SAMPLING 




3S1 Dual Trace 


2 mV/div 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1195 




3T2 


0.2 ns/div 


X10 


random 
sampling 


$1000 


3S2 Dual Trace 


2 mV/div 


Used with S-Serie 


Heads 


850 


3S5 Program- 
mable 


2mV/div 


Used with S-Serie 


Heads 


1550 


3T5 Program- 
mable 


0.1 ns/div 




calib digital 
sweep delay 


1650 


S-l 


50 fi 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


275 


3T77A 


0.2 ns/div 


X10 


single sweep; 
manual scan 
sweep delay 


700 


S-2 


50 a 


DC to 7 GHz 


50 ps 


325 


S-3 


100 kn 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


395 


S-4 


50 a 


DC to 14 GHz 


25 ps 


795 


S-50 


25-ps Pulse Generator Head 


475 


S-51 


l-to-18GHz Trigger Countdow 


n Head 


450 











*RMS 



169 



561 B 

TYPE 

R561B 

AVAILABLE DISPLAYS 

MULTI-TRACE AND SINGLE-TRACE DISPLAYS 

Four-trace and dual-trace displays are obtained by select- 
ing the Type 3A74 Four-Trace Plug-In or dual-trace plug-ins 
including Types 3A3, 3A6 or 3A72 Plug-Ins. All other ampli- 
fier plug-in units provide single-trace displays. Selection of 
the Type 2A61, 2A63, 3A3, 3A7 or 3A9 gives differential am- 
plifier operation. 

SAMPLING DISPLAYS 
The Type 3T77A, 3T2 and 3T5 Sampling Sweep Units with 
the Type 3S1, Type 3S2, and Type 3S5 Amplifier Units give 
dual-trace sampling displays with risetimes in the subnano- 
second region. The Type 3S2 and Type 3S5 Sampling Units 
feature a choice of six sampling heads that offer new con- 
venience and versatility when making fast pulse measurements. 

SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 

The Type 3L10 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit covers the 
1-36 MHz range. This plug-in unit with a sensitivity of — 100 
dBm and calibrated dispersion allows the display of RF sig- 
nals with a resolution of 10 Hz to 1 kHz. 

The Type 3L5 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit provides 
both spectral and time-base displays from 10 Hz to 1 MHz. 
Calibrated dispersion is lOHz/div to lOOkHz/div. Sensitiv- 
ity is 10/xV/div RMS for spectral displays, 1 mV/div peak to 
peak for time-based displays. 

AUTOMATIC SEEKING 
The Types 3A5 Amplifier (DC to 15 MHz) and 3B5 Time Base 
are automatic-seeking plug-in units. These units, when com- 
manded, have the ability to sense voltage levels and time 
changes and adjust their deflection factors to present cali- 
brated on-screen displays. The control settings are readout 
on the front panels in large, lighted digits. 

X-Y DISPLAYS 

The Types 2A60, 2A61, 2A63, 3A3, 3A9, 3A72, 3A74 and 
3A75 Amplifier Plug-In Units operate equally well in the 
vertical and horizontal compartments of the Type 561 B and 
R561B permitting X-Y displays using any combination of these 
plug-in units. Plug-in units other than those listed above 
are not recommended for X-Y displays. 

For medium and high-frequency X-Y operation, use of two 
units of the same type is recommended. Deflection-circuit 
capacitances of the Type 561 B and R561B are carefully stand- 
ardized to minimize high-frequency phase shift between 
two plug-ins of the same type when operated X-Y. 

Using two Type 3A72 or two Type 3A74 Plug-In Units, 
both synchronization and automatic pairing are provided. 
With two 3A72's operated X-Y in the dual-trace mode, Chan- 
nel 1 of the left-hand plug-in is always plotted against Chan- 
nel 1 of the right-hand plug-in. With two Type 3A74's, two, 
three or four independent displays may be obtained, proper- 
ly paired: Channel 4 versus Channel 4, Channel 3 versus 
Channel 3, etc. Using two Type 3A3 Plug-In Units, dual-trace 
switching is synchronized, but there is no provision for con- 
sistent pairing each time the system is operated. Using two 
Type 3A6 Plug-In Units, dual-trace switching is not syn- 
chronized. 

RASTER GENERATION 

A raster display can be presented by using two time-base 
plug-in units, one in each compartment. Signal modulation 
can be achieved through the Z-axis of the CRT. 




TYPE 561 B CHARACTERISTICS 

PLUG-IN COMPARTMENTS 
Accepts all 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier and Time-Base 
Units except Type 3T6 and Type 3S6 Plug-Ins. 



TEKTRONIX CRT 

Flat-faced rectangular 5-inch tube with internal "no parallax" 
graticule, controllable edge-lighting, 3.5-kV monoaccelerator, 
beam deflection unblanking. A P31 Phosphor is normally 
supplied; P2, P7 or Pll are optional without extra charge. 
Consult your Field Engineer, Representative or Distributor 
for application information and availability. 

ILLUMINATED INTERNAL GRATICULE 

Edge lighted graticule marked in 8 vertical and 10 horizontal 
cm divisions. The centerlines are marked every 2 mm. Il- 
lumination is controlled by a front-panel knob. 

DISPLAY CONTROLS 

Front-panel controls include Focus, Astigmatism, Intensity 
and Scale Illumination (of the 8-cm by 10-cm display area), 
in addition to screwdriver adjustment for Trace Alignment. 

Z-AXIS INPUT 

Accessible through a BNC connector at the rear of the in- 
strument permitting external modulation of the CRT cathode. 
Z-axis input is AC coupled to the CRT cathode and requires 
10 V P-P for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

Front-panel selection of calibration signals. Voltage — 4 mV, 
40 mV, 400 mV, 4 V and 40 V ground-to-peak squarewave 
into 1 MQ or greater; 40 V DC into 1 Mn or greater; 2 mV, 
20 mV or 200 mV ground-to-peak squarewave into 50.0 Q. 
Current — Current loop of 10 mA DC or 10 mA ground-to-peak 
squarewave. 

Voltage and current amplitude accuracy is within l'/ 2 % from 
+20°C to +30°Q within 2% from 0°C to +50°C. 

Squarewave frequency is 1 kHz, within 1%. Risetime and 
falltime is 1 /as or less with load capacitance of lOOpF or 
less except in the 40-V position where t r and t, is 2.5 /is or 
less with load capacitance of 100 pF or less. 



o 



o 



770 



TYPE 



561B 
R561B 



DC-VOLTAGE SUPPLIES 

All voltages required for proper operation of the oscilloscope 
and the plug-in units are regulated. Supplies operate normal- 
ly with or without plug-ins. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Quick-change, line voltage selection permits operation from 
any of the following voltages: 90 to ll V, 1 04 to 1 26 V, ll 2 
to 136 V, 180 to 220 V, 208 to 252 V, 224 to 272 V. The Type 
561 B will operate over a line-frequency range from 48 Hz 
to 440 Hz with a power consumption of 178 watts at 115 VAC, 
60 Hz. The Type R561B will operate over a line frequency 
from 48 Hz to 66 Hz, with a power consumption of 186 watts 
at 115 VAC, 60 Hz. 

ONS AND WEIGHTS 

37.5 cm 
24.8 cm 

54.7 cm 

14.6 kg 
= 18.6 kg 
=24 kg 

17.8 cm 
48.3 cm 

52.1 cm 

14.2 kg 
=25.4 kg 
=34.4 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES FOR TYPE 561 B 

3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); BNC-post jack (012- 
0092-00); 18-inch patch cord (012-0087-00); 2 instruction manu- 
als (070-0802-00). 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES FOR TYPE R561B 
Mounting hardware (061-0131-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092- 
00); 18-inch patch cord (012-0087-00); 2 instruction manuals 
(070-0803-00). 

TYPE 561 B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $560 
TYPE R561B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $610 

TYPE R561B WITH SLIDE-OUT TRACKS 

Type R561B MOD 171 A mounts to a standard 19-inch rack 
on slide-out tracks. It can be pulled out, tilted and locked 
in any one of 7 positions for convenient servicing. The in- 
strument has the same standard accessories as the Type 
R561 B, but also includes one pair of mounting tracks (351- 
0084-00). 

TYPE R561B MOD 171 A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in 
units $660 



TYPE 561 B DIMENSIONS 


AND 


WEIGHTS 


Height 




14% in 


Width 




9% in 


Depth 




21 '/j in 


Net weight 




32 lb 


Domestic shipping weight 




=41 lb 


Export-packed weight 




=53 lb 


TYPE R561B DIMENSIONS 


AND 


WEIGHTS 


Height 




7 in 


Width 




19 in 


Rack depth 




20y 2 in 


Net weight 




31 y 4 lb 


Domestic shipping weight 




=56 lb 


Export-packed weight 




~76 lb 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. 

PROBES 

The probes recommended for use with these instruments are 
covered on the 2- and 3-series plug-in unit pages. Additional 
probes are available that may be better suited for a particular 
application, including current and high-voltage measurements. 
See the catalog accessory pages for information on these and 
other items. 

CAMERAS 




Standard C-12 with beam-splitting mirror for straight-on view- 
ing and use of optional projected graticule; f/1.9 — 1:0.85 
lens, Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 561 B or R561B to C-12 Camera adapter, order 
016-0217-00 $15 

Standard C-27 has rotating and removable viewing hood 
allowing mounting on adjacent Type R561B's f/1.9 — 1:0.85 
lens. Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-27 .... $430 

Type 561 B or R561B to C-27 Camera adapter, order 
016-0224-00 $15 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 201-2 for Type 561 B: two plug-in carrier, 9-position 
tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 201-2 $140 

SLIDE-OUT TRACKS 

Converts standard Type R561B for easy withdrawal and 
tilt of instrument, order 351 -0050-00 $45 

CRADLE ASSEMBLY 

Provides rear slide support when R561B with slide-out tracks 
is mounted in a backless rack, order 040-0344-00 $ 9 

*Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



171 



TYPE 



564B 
R564B 



SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE 




The Types 564B and R564B Storage Oscilloscopes are virtually 
two instruments in one, offering all the advantages of a split- 
screen storage oscilloscope, plus those of a conventional plug-in 
oscilloscope. A complete selection of plug-ins permits changing 
the oscilloscope's performance to meet changing measurement 
needs. 

With the split-screen storage feature, either half of the 8x 
10-cm display can be independently controlled, thus allowing 
stored or conventional displays on either the upper or lower 
half. The contrast ratio and brightness of the stored displays 
are constant and independent of viewing time, writing and 
sweep rates, or signal repetition rates. 

The Type 564B and R564B have dual plug-in flexibility with 
vertical and horizontal plug-in units. Amplifier plug-ins offer a 
wide range of measurement capabilities with 10-MHz multi- 
trace, 10 /tV differential, 25-ps sampling and spectrum analyzer 
plug-ins. Time-base plug-ins include delayed sweep, X50 mag- 
nifier, single time bases and sampling time bases. Amplifier 
plug-ins may be placed in the horizontal position for X-Y or 
multiple X-Y displays, and automatic seeking plug-ins are avail- 
able. 

Occupying only 7 inches of rack height, the Type R564B bolts 
directly to the rack, but may be ordered with optional slide- 
out tracks at additional cost. 

The Type 564B and R564B offer reliable operation with low- 
heat dissipation through the use of solid-state components. 



772 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible through 
use of 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier Plug-In Units (see chart). 
Dual Trace— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns. 
Differential— DC to 1 MHz, 10/iV/div. 
Sampling— DC to 14 GHz, 25 ps. 
Spectrum Analyzer — 10 Hz to 36 MHz. 

HORIZONTAL 

Horizontal deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through the use of versatile 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier 
and Time-Base Units (see chart). 

STORAGE CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 cm. 

ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3.5 kV. 

SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE— Store on either upper or lower 

half of screen with non-storage on other half; store on entire 

screen; or non-store on entire screen. 
VIEWING TIMES— Up to one hour. 
ERASE TIME— Approximately 0.25 second. 
WRITING SPEED— Up to 500cm/ms. 
PHOSPHOR— Similar to PI. 

OTHER 

CALIBRATOR— 4 mV to 40 V (±1.5%), 1 kHz (±1%) square- 
wave and 40 V DC. Info 50.0 Q, 2 mV, 20 mV and 200 mV 
squarewave. Current loop of 10 mA DC and 10 mA square- 
wave (±1.5%). 

LINE VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS— 90 V to 136 V or 180 V to 
272 V, 48 Hz to 440 Hz (564B), 48 Hz to 66 Hz (R564B). 



7 



TYPE 



564B 
R564B 






SHOCK TEST 
Display shows ability of the Type 5648 to 
store consecutive events for comparison or 
photography. Waveforms indicate shock 
imparted by dropping sub-table weight of 
5 lbs from different heights. 



LOW-REPETITION RATE SAMPLING 
Display shows ability of the Type 564B (with 
sampling plug-in units) to record complete 
sampling waveforms at low repetition rates. 
Upper trace is stored. Lower trace is not 
stored. This capability for storing low-repeti- 
tion-rate waveforms allows observation and 
analysis of the entire sampled display at one 
time. 



STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAY 
Stored waveform showing center frequency 
with two sidebands. Using single-sweep and 
storage allows measurement of frequency drift 
with spectrum analyzer unit. 



PLUG- IN UNITS 






PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 




PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


Tr 


PRICE 




SPECIAL PURPOSE 




MULTIPLE TRACE 


3A8 
Operational 


20 mV/div 


DC to 3.5 MHz 


100 ns 


$ 650 


3A3 Dual-Trace 


lOOiiV/div 


DC to 500 kHz 


0.7 /is 


$ 850 


3C66 
Carrier Amp 


10 iistrain 
/div 


DC to 5 kHz 


70 /is 


450 


3A6 Dual-Trace 


lOmV/div 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


525 


3A72 Dual-Trace 


lOmV/div 


DC to 650 kHz 


0.54 /is 


295 










3A74 Four-Trace 


20 mV/div 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /is 


650 


SINGLc ikmv_c 


2A60 


50 mV/div 


DC to 1 MHz 


0.35 /as 


$ 125 


DIFFERENTIAL 


3A5 

Automatic/Prog 


lOmV/div 
1 mV/div 


DC to 15 MHz 
DC to 5 MHz 


23 ns 


825 


3A75 


50 mV/div 


DC to 4 MHz 


90 ns 


195 


2A61 


10/iV/div 


0.06 Hz to 
300 kHz 


1.2 /AS 


$ 425 


TIME-BASE UNITS 




2A63 


1 mV/div 


DC to 300 kHz 


1.2 lis 


175 


TYPE 


FASTEST 

TIME-BASE 

RATE 


MAGNIFIER 


FEATURES 


PRICE 


3A3 


100 /xV/div 


DC to 500 kHz 


0.7 /as 


850 


3A7 
Comparator 


1 mV/div 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


695 


2B67 


1 /is/div 


X5 


single sweep 


$ 225 


3A9 


10/iV/div 


DC to 1 MHz 


350 ns 


490 


3B3 


0.5 /As/div 


X5 


calib sweep 
delay; 
single sweep 


650 


SPECTRUM ANALYZERS 


3B4 


0.2 /is/div 


XI to X50 


single sweep 


450 


3B5 

Automatic/ 

Programmable 


0.1 /is/div 


X10 

XI 00 


calib delay 
mag; 

auto-seek pro- 
grammable 


950 


3L5 


*10 jtiV/div 


10 Hz to 1MHz 




$1125 


3L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 
Center Freq 




1275 




SAMPLING 




3S1 Dual Trace 


2 mV/div 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1195 




3T2 


0.2 ns/div 


XI 


random 
sampling 


$1000 


3S2 Dual Trace 


2 mV/div 


Used with S-Serie 


> Heads 


850 


3S5 Program- 


2 mV/div 


Used with S-Serie 


5 Heads 


1550 


3T5 
Programmable 


0.1 ns/div 




calib digital 
sweep delay 


1650 


S-l 


50 a 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


275 


3T77A 


0.2 ns/div 


XI 


single sweep; 
manual scan 
sweep delay 


700 


S-2 


so n 


DC to 7 GHz 


50 ps 


325 


S-3 


ioo kn 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


395 


S-4 


so n 


DC to 14 GHz 


25 ps 


795 


S-50 


25-ps Pulse Generator Hea 


i 


475 


S-51 


l-to-18 GHz Trigger Countdo 


Nn Head 


450 











*RMS 



173 



TYPE 



564B 
R564B 

STORAGE OPERATION 



Features of the Type 564B as a storage oscilloscope in- 
clude — 

Long-term storage with short-time erasure. 

Storage of single-shot signals. 

Split-screen with individual controls for each half. 

SOME THINGS YOU CAN DO WITH 
TYPE 564B STORED DISPLAYS 

1. Observe single-shot phenomena. 

2. Study, for long periods of time, a waveform without 
having to photograph it. (Stored brightness and con- 
trast remain essentially constant for up to an hour.) 

3. Photograph only those stored waveforms you want. 

4. Compare changing waveforms to a stored waveform, 
each displayed on half of the CRT face. 

5. Change the stored standard while viewing other wave- 
forms on the non-stored half. 

6. Photograph a multi-event stored display with only one 
exposure. 

7 . Store fast recurrent phenomena by using the integrate 
feature. 

8. Store X-Y displays. 




Calibrated dispersion is lOHz/div to lOOkHz/div. Sensi- 
tivity is 10/iV/div RMS for spectral displays, 1 mV/div peak 
to peak for time-based displays. 

AUTOMATIC SEEKING 

The Types 3A5 Amplifier (DC to 15 MHz) and 3B5 Time Base 
are automatic-seeking plug-in units. These units, when com- 
manded, have the ability to sense voltage levels and time 
changes and adjust their deflection factors to present cali- 
brated on-screen displays. The control settings are readout 
on the front panels in large, lighted digits. 



o 



AVAILABLE DISPLAYS 

With the wide-range sensitivity and bandwidth of the Type 
564B, several storage and conventional operation displays are 
obtainable. The range of signals which may be stored is limited 
by stored-mode writing characteristics of the CRT. 

MULTI-TRACE AND SINGLE-TRACE DISPLAYS 

Four-trace and dual-trace displays are obtained by select- 
ing the Type 3A74 Four-Trace Plug-In or dual-trace plug-ins 
including Types 3A3, 3A6 or 3A72 Plug-Ins. All other am- 
plifier plug-in units provide single-trace displays. Selection 
of the Type 2A61, 2A63, 3A3, 3A7 or 3A9 gives differential 
amplifier operation. 

SAMPLING DISPLAYS 

The Type 3T77A, 3T2 and 3T5 Sampling Sweep Units with 
Type 3S1, Type 3S2 and Type 3S5 Amplifier Units give dual- 
trace sampling displays with risetimes in the subnanosecond 
region. The Type 3S2 and Type 3S5 Sampling Units feature 
a choice of six sampling heads that offer new convenience 
and versatility when making fast pulse measurements. 

SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 
The Type 3110 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit covers the 
1-36 MHz range. This plug-in unit with a sensitivity of —100 
dBm and calibrated dispersion allows the display of RF 
signals with a resolution of 10 Hz to 1 kHz. 

The Type 3L5 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit provides 
both spectral and time-base displays from 10 Hz to 1 MHz. 



X-Y DISPLAYS 
The Types 2A60, 2A61, 2A63, 3A3, 3A9, 3A72, 3A74 and 
3A75 Amplifier Plug-In Units operate equally well in the 
vertical and horizontal compartments of the Type 564B 
and R564B permitting X-Y displays using any combination 
of these plug-in units. Plug-in units other than those listed 
above are not recommended for X-Y displays. 

For medium and high-frequency X-Y operation, use of 
two units of the same type is recommended. Deflection- 
circuit capacitances of the Type 564B and R564B carefully 
standardized to minimize high-frequency phase shift between 
two plug-ins of the same type when operated X-Y. 

Using two Type 3A72 or two Type 3A74 Plug-In Units, 
both synchronization and automatic pairing are provided. 
With two 3A72's operated X-Y in the dual-trace mode, 
Channel 1 of the left-hand plug-in is always plotted against 
Channel 1 of the right-hand plug-in. With two Type 3A74's; 
two, three or four independent displays may be obtained, 
properly paired: Channel 4 versus Channel 4, Channel 3 
versus Channel 3, etc. Using two Type 3A3 Plug-In Units, 
dual-trace switching is synchronized, but there is no pro- 
vision for consistent pairing each time the system is oper- 
ated. Using two Type 3A6 Plug-In Units, dual-trace switch- 
ing is not synchronized. 

RASTER GENERATOR 

A raster display can be presented by using two time-base 
plug-in units, one in each compartment. Signal modulation 
can be achieved through the Z-axis of the CRT. 



774 



TYPE 



564B 
R564B 



CRT PERFORMANCE 

There are two storage tubes available for use in the Type 
564B Oscilloscope. Both tubes exhibit characteristics of a con- 
ventional CRT when used in the non-stored mode. The standard 
tube, the Type 5641-200, has the brighter stored display. The 
other tube, the Type T5641-201, has the faster writing speed. 

By selecting the proper tube, you can obtain optimum oscillo- 
scope performance for your particular application. Such selec- 
tion is important because each tube has its own maximum writ- 
ing speed and brightness for stored-mode operation. The bright- 
ness of a stored display for an individual tube is one value 
regardless of the intensity of the beam that generated it. 

The hours shown are the actual hours the CRT is used in the 
stored mode with repetitive writing, storing, and erasing. It 
should be noted that non-storage operation of the CRT has little 
effect on the age characteristics shown. Therefore to obtain 
maximum CRT performance and service, the oscilloscope should 
be in the non-stored mode when stored displays are not needed. 







TYPICAL LIFE DATA 








up to 2000 hours 




CO 

1- 

UJ 

m 

£ 




an 








^^^LUMINANCE 


1 




2 

o 


LU 

to 


| STANDARD CRT | 






< 
















-I 






6 










30 




i- 
o 


o 










1 


o 


<r 














1 




DC 




WRITING SPEED _ 








o 


UJ <Z 

u 

2 
< 


Efl 

< 

h- 


■l 








20 


Q 

LU 
UJ 


^T CONTRAST RA 


TIO 






^ 














CO 


2 



o 


2 










10 


2 
1- 










a 
















B 


LU 
















g 




















o 
So 

















Q 

LU 

E 
O 










500 1000 1500 2000 


fe 






HOURS OF OPERATION (STORED MODE) 


Q 
















i- 














2 




Lt 

UJ 










| MOD OS CRT | 




O 

o 
















m 
















UJ 


S 
















CO 


< 














1 50 


5 


o 








CONTRAST RATIO 


o 


H 
















o 


< 














1 


u. 


C£ 














o 


lu oH 
o 


co 

< 


4 










100 


a 










2 








WRITINC 








< 
















BL 


2 

i 


O 
o 












■Jl 


CO 
CD 

2 


LUMINAf 


ICE 


_i 














1- 


a 
















B 


LU 
















g 


EC 

O 

















Q 

LU 

B 
O 










500 1000 1500 2000 


CO 






HOURS OF OPERATION (STORED MODE) 





TEKTRONIX STORAGE CRT 

The CRT is a Tektronix Type T5641, flat-faced bistable stor- 
age tube with beam-deflection blanking and an accelerat- 
ing voltage of 3.5 kV. It has an 8xl0-cm storage target 
divided into two 4xl0-cm areas, individually controllable 
for storage and erasure. 



WARRANTED MINIMUM CHARACTERISTICS 




Standard CRT 


MOD 08 CRT 


Writing Speed* 


Initial 


Normal 


>25 cm/ms 


> 100 cm/ms 


Enhanced 


>250 cm/ms 


>500 cm/ms 


After 2000 hours 


>8 cm/ms 


>50 cm/ms 


Luminance 


Initial 


>6fL 


>2fL 


After 2000 hours 


>3fL 


>HL 


Contrast Ratio 


Initial 


2:1 


2:1 


After 2000 hours 


>2:1 


>2:1 



*Middle 7 X 9 cm area. 

STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS 

VIEWING TIME 

Displays can be stored for viewing up to 1 hour. Longer times 
may be obtained but tend to reduce target sensitivity in the 
stored areas. 

ERASURE TIME 

Approximately 0.25 second. 

STORED WRITING-SPEED ENHANCEMENT 

This feature controls the single-sweep storage capabilities of 
the storage CRT. Through adjustment of the front-panel 
Level control, single-trace spot velocities up to 250 cm/ms 
using the standard CRT; up to 500 cm/ms using the MOD 08 
CRT can be stored with minimal loss of resolution and contrast 
in the center 7x9cm. 

SINGLE-SHOT SIGNALS 

At slow or medium speeds, single-shot signals are easily 
stored for extended viewing time (within writing-speed capa- 
bilities of CRT selected). 

INTEGRATE MODE 

Increases the effective writing speed for repetitive fast signals 
with repetition rates that are too low for effective storage, 
but which may be too fast for satisfactory single-shot storage 
with enhancement. 

REMOTE ERASE 
A rear-panel connector permits erasing of upper and/or 
lower half of the split screen from a remote location. Era- 
sure can be initiated in either of two ways: 

1. Pulse initiated — Requires a negative pulse of 5 V to 100 V. 
Rate of change at least 0.1 V//j.s. 

2. Impedance change initiated — Requires a change from at 
least 1 Mfi to 50 kfi or less in 10 /is or less. 

TYPE 564B CHARACTERISTICS 

PLUG-IN COMPARTMENTS 

The instrument accepts 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier and 
Time-Base Units except Type 3T6 and Type 3S6. 

LOCATE BUTTON 

This button, when depressed, causes a spot or spots to appear 
at the left of the CRT screen at the vertical position of the 
next sweep. 

EXTERNAL GRATICULE 

The graticule is edge lighted and is marked in 8 vertical and 
10 horizontal cm divisions. The centerline is marked every 
2 mm. Illumination is controlled by a front-panel knob. 



775 



TYPE 



564B 
R564B 



Z-AXIS INPUT 
Accessible through a BNC connector at the rear of the in- 
strument permitting external modulation of the CRT cathode. 
Z-axis input is AC coupled to the CRT cathode and requires 
10 V P-P for beam modulation at normal intensity. 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

Front-panel selection of calibration signals. 

Voltage— 4 mV, 40 mV, 400 mV, 4 V and 40 V ground-to-peak 
squarewave into IMS! or greater; 40V DC into 1 Mfl or 
greater; 2-mV, 20-mV or 200-mV ground-to-peak squarewave 
into 50.0 Q. 

Current — Current loop of 10 mA DC or 10-mA ground-to-peak 
squarewave. 

Voltage and current amplitude accuracy is within 1%% from 
+20°C to +30°C; within 2% from 0°C to +50°C. Square- 
wave frequency is 1 kHz, within 1%. Risetime and falltime 
is 1 /is or less with load capacitance of lOOpF or less except 
in the 40-V position where t r and t f is 2.5 ps or less with load 
capacitance of lOOpF or less. 

ELECTRONICALLY REGULATED SUPPLIES 

Regulated power supplies furnish all voltages required for 
proper operation of the Indicator and the plug-in units. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Quick-change, line voltage selection permits operation from 
any of the following voltages: 90 to 110 V, 104 to 126 V, 
112 to 136 V, 180 to 220 V, 208 to 252 V, 224 to 272 V. The 
Type 564B will operate over a line-frequency range from 48 
Hz to 440 Hz with a power consumption of 196 watts at 
115 VAC, 60 Hz. The Type R564B will operate over a line 
frequency from 48 Hz to 66 Hz, with a power consumption 
of 204 watts at 115 VAC, 60 Hz. 

TYPE 564B DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


14 3 /, in 


37.5 cm 


Width 


9% in 


24.8 cm 


Depth 


21% in 


54.7 cm 


Net weight 


34% lb 


15.7 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=41 lb 


=18.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=53 lb 


=24.0 kg 


rPE R564B DIMENSIONS 


AND WEIGHTS 




Height 


7 in 


17.8 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Rack depth 


20% in 


52.1 cm 


Net weight 


34 lb 


15.4 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=57 lb 


=25.8 kg 


Export-packed weight 


■XJ7 lb 


=34.9 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES FOR TYPE 564B 

3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092- 
00); 18-inch patch cord (012-0087-00); 2 instruction manuals 
(070-0804-00). 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES FOR TYPE R564B 

Mounting hardware (016-0131-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092- 
00); 18-inch patch cord (012-0087-00); 2 instruction manuals 
(070-0805-00). 

TYPE 564B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . $995 
(with CRT for stored display of highest intensity). 

TYPE 564B MOD 08 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units 
$995 

(with CRT for fastest stored writing speed). 



TYPE R564B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1050 
(with CRT for stored display of highest intensity). 

TYPE R564B MOD 08 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units 
$1050 

(with CRT for fastest stored writing speed). 

TYPE R564B WITH SLIDE-OUT TRACKS 

Type R564B MOD 171 A or Type R564B MOD 08, MOD 
171 A mounts to a standard 19-inch rack on slide-out tracks. 
It can be pulled out, tilted, and locked in any one of seven 
positions for convenient servicing. Instrument has same stand- 
ard accessories as the Type R564B, but also includes one pair 
of mounting tracks (351-0084-00). 

TYPE R564B MOD 171 A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in 
units $1 100 

(with CRT for stored display of highest intensity). 

TYPE R564B MOD 08, MOD 171 A OSCILLOSCOPE, without 
plug-in units $1 100 

(with CRT for fastest stored writing speed). 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. 

PROBES 

The probes recommended for use with these instruments are 
covered on the 2- and 3-series plug-in unit pages. Additional 
probes are available that may be better suited for a particular 
application, including current and high-voltage measurements. 
See the catalog accessory pages for information on these and 
other items. 

CAMERAS 

Standard C-12 with beam-splitting mirror for straight-on view- 
ing and use of optional projected graticule; f/1.9 — 1:0.85 
lens, Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 564B or R564B to C-12 Camera adapter, order 016- 
0217-00 $ 15 

Standard C-27 has rotating and removable viewing hood 
allowing mounting on adjacent Type R564B's f/1.9 — 1:0.85 
lens, Polaroid Land* Pack-Film back, order C-27 $430 

Type 564B or R564B to C-27 Camera adapter, order 016- 
0224-00 $ 15 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 201-2 for-Type 564B: two plug-in carrier, 9-position tilt- 
lock oscilloscope tray, order 201-2 $140 

SLIDE-OUT TRACKS 
Converts standard Type R564B or R564B MOD 121 N for easy 
withdrawal and tilt of instrument, order 351-0050-00 . . $ 45 

CRADLE ASSEMBLY 
Provides rear slide support when R564B with slide-out tracks 
is mounted in a backless rack, order 040-0344-00 ... $ 9 

REMOTE-ERASE CONNECTOR 
Mates with 9-pin connector on the rear panel of R564B sup- 
plied without cable, order 134-0049-00 $4.25 

*Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



176 



TYPE 



564B 
R564B 



STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE WITH AUTO ERASE 
Type 564B or R564B MOD 121N 




• VARIABLE VIEWING TIME 
1 s to 12s 

• SPLIT-SCREEN CONTROL 

• REMOTE ERASE 

• REMOTE AND FRONT PANEL SAVE 

The Type 564B MOD 121N and the Type R564B MOD 121N 
Storage Oscilloscopes feature the same characteristics as the 
Type 564B/R564B with the added advantage of automatic erase 
and variable viewing time. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

AUTO ERASE 

In the Auto Erase Mode there is a continuous sequence of 
storing, viewing time and erasure of either upper screen, 
lower screen or entire screen. A rear-panel switch provides 
two modes of operation, either Signal Triggered Sweep or 
Erase Triggered Sweep. 

SIGNAL TRIGGERED SWEEP 

In the Signal Triggered Sweep Mode, the input Signal ini- 
tiates a sweep and the viewing time begins as the sweep 
ends. At the end of the variable viewing time, the selected 
portion of the screen is automatically erased and the 
cathode-ray tube is unblanked after the next sweep retrace. 
This cycle will automatically repeat itself as long as an input 
signal triggers the sweep. 

ERASE TRIGGERED SWEEP 

The Erase Triggered Sweep Mode is primarily useful with 
sweep rates of 0.1 s/div and slower. In this mode of opera- 
tion, the CRT is not blanked during the variable viewing 
time. The sweep unit can be triggered either by the input 
signal or by the erase pulse output located on the rear of 
the oscilloscope. 

VARIABLE VIEWING TIME 

1 s to at least 12 s. SAVE position disables automatic erasure. 




REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION 

A rear-panel connector permits erasing of upper and/or 
lower half of split screen from a remote location and per- 
mits remote operation of the Save Mode. 

Erasures are initiated in either of two ways: 1. Pulse Initiated 
— Requires a negative pulse of 5 V to 100 V, rate of change 
at least 0.1 V//xs. 2. Impedance Change Initiated — Requires 
a change from at least 1 Mfi to 50 kQ or less in 10,us or 
less. 

The Save Mode is initiated by a contact closure to ground. 

STANDARD ACCESSORIES FOR TYPE 564B MOD 121N 
3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092- 
00); 50-n BNC cable (012-0057-01); adapter, BNC to dual 
banana connector (103-0090-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0806-00). 

STANDARD ACCESSORIES FOR TYPE R564B MOD 121N 
Mounting hardware (016-0131-00); BNC-post jack (012-0092- 
00); 50-fi BNC cable (012-0057-01); adapter, BNC to dual 
banana connector (103-0090-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0807-00). 

TYPE 564B MOD 121N OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in 
units $1 1 50 

(with CRT for stored display of highest intensity). 

TYPE 564B MOD 121 N, MOD 08 OSCILLOSCOPE, without 

plug-in units $1 150 

(with CRT for fastest stored writing speed). 

TYPE R564B MOD 121N OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in 
units $1195 

(with CRT for stored display of highest intensity). 

TYPE R564B MOD 121 N, MOD 08 OSCILLOSCOPE, without 
plug-in units $1 195 

(with CRT for fastest stored writing speed). 

TYPE R564B MOD 121N WITH 
SLIDE-OUT TRACKS 

Type R564B MOD 121N, MOD 171 A or Type R564B MOD 
121N, MOD 08, MOD 171A mounts to a standard 19-inch rack 
on slide-out tracks. It can be pulled out, tilted and locked in 
any one of seven positions for convenient servicing. Instrument 
has same standard accessories as the Type R564B MOD 121 N, 
but also includes one pair of mounting tracks (351-0084-00). 

TYPE R564B MOD 121N, MOD 171A OSCILLOSCOPE, with- 
out plug-in units $1245 

(with CRT for stored display of hightest intensity). 

TYPE R564B MOD 121 N, MOD 08, MOD 171 A OSCILLO- 
SCOPE, without plug-in units $1245 

(with CRT for fastest stored writing speed). 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



777 



ENGINE ANALYZER 




• ELIMINATES GUESSWORK 

• REDUCES MAINTENANCE COSTS 

• DETECTS MALFUNCTIONS 

FAULTY IGNITION 

FAULTY VALVES 

BLOWBY 

DAMAGED RINGS 

DAMAGED BEARINGS 

DAMAGED CYLINDER LININGS 

• MEASURE AND DISPLAY 

PRESSURE VS VOLUME 
PRESSURE VS CRANK ANGLE 
PRESSURE VS TIME 
ENGINE VIBRATION 
ENGINE IGNITION 

• CRANK-ANGLE MARKERS 



The Tektronix Engine Analyzer is designed to eliminate 
guesswork in locating possible failures in gas and diesel en- 
gines and compressors. The over-all performance of the en- 
gine can be determined by measuring engine parameters 
such as cylinder combustion pressure, vibration, ignition, timing 
and indicated horsepower. When used in conjunction with a 
preventive maintenance program, the Engine Analyzer can 
substantially reduce maintenance costs and increase engine 
and compressor life and efficiency. 

The Engine Analyzer detects and locates malfunctions such 
as faulty ignition, timing, faulty valves, blowby, and broken 
or frozen piston rings. Damaged bearings, low compression 
pressures and other failures that impair the performance of 
the engine are also indicated on the oscilloscope. With the 
use of the Rotational Function Generator and pressure trans- 
ducer, the engine horsepower can be calculated. 

The Tektronix Engine Analyzer consists of a Type 561 B 
Oscilloscope or Type 564B Storage Oscilloscope, a specially 
designed Type 2B67 Engine Analyzer Time Base with a Ro- 
tational Function Generator input, and a Type 3A74 Engine 
Analyzer Amplifier featuring four channels, with separate in- 
puts for pressure, ignition, vibration, and crank-shaft rotation 
markers. 

The Engine Analyzer Accessories package includes a Rota- 
tional Function Generator, pressure transducers, vibration trans- 
ducers, ignition pickoff, magnetic pickup, cables and an ac- 
cessory carrying case. Optional accessories include a Polar- 
oid* Trace-Recording Camera, Scope-Mobile* Cart and a tri- 
pod for easy mounting of the Rotational Function Generator. 

■•■Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 



775 



VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS 

Vibration measurements are useful in detecting leaking valves, 
destructive detonation, excessive cylinder wear, blowby, worn 
bearings, broken compression rings, valve flutter and many 
other signs of wear and malfunction. The vibration pickup is 
a piezoelectric crystal mounted in a magnetic head that can 
be placed anywhere on the engine or compressor. 



IGNITION MEASUREMENTS 

Ignition measurements are used for proper timing of the en- 
gine and can detect bad spark plugs, pulse generator prob- 
lems, point problems, bad condensers and coil condition. 
Ignition measurements can also be used to calculate RPM. 
Ignition measurements are made using a 1000:1 capacitive at- 
tenuator that clamps on the secondary coil and spark-plug 
wire. 



PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS 

Pressure measurements detect peak firing pressures, com- 
pression, early and late cylinder firing, and pre-ignition of 
the engine under test. Three displays of cylinder pressure are 
easily and quickly obtained: pressure vs crank angle, pressure 
vs cylinder volume and pressure vs time. 



FOUR SIMULTANEOUS DISPLAYS 



ENGINE ANALYZER 

PRESSURE VS VOLUME 




Simultaneous displays of four engine parameters provide the 
operator with one comprehensive picture of the total engine 
performance and make identification of malfunctions easy. 
The top waveform is engine pressure,- waveform 2 shows 
crank-angle markers with the larger marker in the center 
indicating the top dead center; waveform 3 is engine igni- 
tion; waveform 4 is engine vibration showing valves opening 
and closing and vibration due to combustion. 




Pressure vs cylinder volume displays are used to determine 
the indicated engine horsepower and detect over-all pro- 
blems in engines and compressors. The area within the loop 
is the mean effective pressure and is used to determine indi- 
cated horsepower of the engine. 



hp = 



PLAN 



hp = Horsepower 



33,000 

P = Mean Effective Pressure 

L = Piston Stroke (ft) 

A = Piston Area (in 2 ) 

N = Engine RPM 



ENGINE ANALYZER CHARACTERISTICS 



TYPE 561 B OSCILLOSCOPE 

The Type 561 B Oscilloscope accepts the Type 2B67 Engine 
Analyzer Time-Base Plug-In and the Type 3A74 Engine Analyzer 
Amplifier Plug-In plus all two-series and three-series Tektronix 
plug-in units. The Type 561B uses an 8xl0-cm cathode-ray 
tube that features an internal, illuminated graticule. An ampli- 
tude and time calibrator provides accurate squarewave voltages 
from 4 mV to 40 V P-P. 



TYPE 564B STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE 

The Type 564B Storage Oscilloscope uses the same plug-in 
units as the Type 561 B and offers the added advantage of 
split-screen storage. Split-screen storage permits using either 
half of the display for storage and/or conventional displays. 
Storage is especially useful when making pressure measure- 
ments. 10 or 20 engine cycles can be stored on the display 
to detect changes of pressure, or the display can be continu- 
ously stored for up to one hour to detect pre-ignition problems. 



179 



ENGINE ANALYZER 

TYPE 2B67 ENGINE ANALYZER TIME BASE 



TYPE 3A74 ENGINE ANALYZER AMPLIFIER 




TIME BASE 

1 jus/div to 5s/div and 21 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. 5X magnifier operates over full time 
base, accurate within 5%. 

SINGLE SWEEP 

Provides single display for one-shot waveform photography 
and storage applications. In the Rotational Function Gener- 
ator mode of operation, single displays of either 360° (2 
cycle) or 720° (4 cycle) are possible. 

TRIGGER 

Automatic, manual, or free-run operation; triggering on 
+ or — slope from an internal, line frequency or external 
source. In external trigger, a signal from the Rotational 
Function Generator is available for triggering. 

ROTATIONAL FUNCTION AMPLIFIER 

Accepts inputs from the Rotational Function Generator pro- 
viding horizontal displays of piston volume or crank angle. 
Crank-angle degree markers are internally coupled to Chan- 
nel 2 of the Type 3A74 Engine Analyzer Amplifier. 




The Type 3A74 Engine Analyzer Amplifier is a four-channel 
plug-in unit featuring simultaneous displays of pressure, crank- 
angle markers, engine vibration, and ignition. Channel 1 
is a charge amplifier designed for use with the pressure trans- 
ducer; Channel 2 provides a crank-angle marker display from 
the Rotational Function Generator plus the magnetic pickup 
display of top dead center; Channel 3 and Channel 4 are 
identical amplifiers used for vibration and ignition displays. 

CHARGE AMPLIFIER, CHANNEL 1 

1 psi/div to 500 psi/div in 1-2-5 sequence; accurate within 
3%. Frequency response: Restore Time — Long is from 0.05 
Hz to 10 kHz, Short is from 0.5 Hz to 10 kHz. Maximum 
charge signal is 0.6 /j.C (micro coulomb) at 10 kHz, increas- 
ing to 2 /(C at 2.75 kHz. Restore Time is at least 3 s in the 
Long position, at least 0.3 s in the Short position. Display 
noise is less than 0.15 pC (pico coulomb) per 1000 pF of 
source capacitance, with 1 psi/div and gain set to 100 
pC/psi. 

CHANNELS 2, 3 and 4 

0.02V/div to lOV/div in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 25 V/div. Bandwidth is DC 
to 2 MHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency response 
is 2 Hz. Input characteristics are 1 MQ paralleled by ap- 
prox 47 pF. Maximum input voltage is 600 V (combined DC 
plus AC). 



180 



ENGINE ANALYZER ACCESSORIES 

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER 



ENGINE ANALYZER 

VIBRATION TRANSDUCER 




The Pressure Transducer is designed for use at engine speeds 
up to 6000 RPM, providing thread temperature is limited to 
150° C. Engine speed must be derated to 1500 RPM when using 
the cooling adapter and to 1000 RPM when a 5-inch to 10-inch 
coupling pipe is used. The piezoelectric Pressure Transducer, 
when used with the charge amplifier of the Type 3A74 Engine 
Analyzer Amplifier and the included 50-ft low-noise cable, has 
the following characteristics. 

PRESSURE RANGE is to 3000 psi. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR is 1 psi/div to 500 psi/div in 1-2-5 
sequence, accurate within 5% throughout calibrated range. 
Maximum overload pressure is 300%. 

BANDWIDTH in the Long Restore Time position is from 0.05 
Hz or less to at least 10 kHz; in the Short Restore Time posi- 
tion, from 0.5 Hz or less to at least 10 kHz. 

RESTORE TIME in the Long position is at least 3 seconds; in 
the Short position is at least 0.3 seconds. 

NOISE is not discernible with the 50-ft low-noise cable sup- 
plied. 

TEMPERATURE RANGE is from -40°C to +150°C. A cool- 
ing adapter is supplied for environmental conditions above 
+ 150°C. 





The piezoelectric Vibration Transducer has a magnetic mount 
and is used with Channel 2, 3 or 4 of the Type 3A74 Engine 
Analyzer Amplifier with the included 50-ft low-noise cable. 

TRANSDUCER SENSITIVITY is nominally 6 mV/g (4.5mV/g 
with the included cable). Exact value is shown with the cali- 
bration chart supplied with the transducer. 

BANDWIDTH is from 40 Hz to 15 kHz with a resonant fre- 
quency at approx 10 kHz. 

MAXIMUM ACCELERATION is 1000 g's. 

TEMPERATURE RANGE is from — 40°C to +150°C 

IGNITION PICKOFF 




The Ignition Pickoff, when used with Channel 2, 3 or 4 with 
the Type 3A74 Engine Analyzer Amplifier and the included 
50-ft low-noise cable, has the following characteristics. 

ATTENUATION is nominally 1000:1. Exact attenuation is de- 
termined by the capacitance between the pickoff and the 
secondary lead under test. The oscilloscope calibrator and 
a piece of ignition cable can be used to calibrate the ig- 
nition pickoff and the vertical amplifier. 

TIME CONSTANT is at least 6.5 ms. 

MAGNETIC PICKUP 




The Magnetic Pickup, when used with Channel 2 of the Type 
3A74 Engine Analyzer Amplifier and the included 20-ft or 
50-ft low-noise cable, has the following characteristics. 

OUTPUT VOLTAGE is at least 15 V P-P at 1000 inch/s and 
a clearance gap of 0.005 inch using a 20-pitch, 30-tooth 
ferrous metal gear. 

COIL RESISTANCE is 90 fi to 110 a 

COIL INDUCTANCE is 26 mH to 40 mH. 

TEMPERATURE RANGE is from -54°C to +107°C. 



181 



ENGINE ANALYZER 

ROTATIONAL FUNCTION GENERATOR 




The Rotational Function Generator is mechanically coupled 
to the engine under test and generates 10°, 60° and 360° 
markers. Crank-Angle Markers are displayed on Channel 2 
of the Type 3A74 Engine Analyzer. The Rotational Function 
Generator is mechanically timed to an engine reference point 
by comparing the display of the top dead center mark of the 
magnetic pickup from the fly wheel with the 0°/360° pulse 
generated by the function generator. The Rotational Func- 
tion Generator also generates a sawtooth ramp for displays 
related to crank angle, and a waveform that is equivalent to 
piston volume for P-V curves. The Rotational Function Gen- 
erator, when used with the Type 2B67 Engine Analyzer Time 
Base and the included 20-ft cable supplied, has the following 
characteristics. 

MAXIMUM RPM is 20,000 revolutions per minute. 

DEGREE MARKER angular accuracy is within 1°. 

SHAFT LOAD axial and radial is 10 lb maximum. 

CRANK-ANGLE MARKERS are generated every 10°, a pulse 
of larger amplitude every 60°, and a pulse riding on a 
pedestal every 360°. The markers are internally coupled to 
Channel 2 and have an amplitude of at least a division 
of the display. The magnetic pickup signal can be super- 
imposed on Channel 2 to permit timing of the function gen- 
erator markers to the engine under test. 

CRANK ANGLE displays provide 350° of useable display 
related directly to crank angle; incremental accuracy is 
within 3% of full scale display. 

PISTON VOLUME displays have an incremental accuracy 
within 3% of full scale display. The phase shift is 0.5° or 
less at 20,000 RPM. 

TEMPERATURE RANGE is from -15°C to +75°C. 



ORDERING INFORMATION 

TYPE 561 B ?7 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $560 

OR 

TYPE 564B STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in 
units $995 

TYPE 2B67 ENGINE ANALYZER TIME BASE, order 
Type 2B67 MOD 730A $375 

Includes: Engine Analyzer instruction manual (070-0890-00). 

TYPE 3A74 ENGINE ANALYZER AMPLIFIER, order 

Type 3A74 MOD 730A $775 

Includes: Engine Analyzer instruction manual (070-0890-00). 

ENGINE ANALYZER ACCESSORY PACKAGE 

Order 01 5-01 26-00 $820 

Includes: rotational function generator (015-0108-00); pres- 
sure transducer (015-0117-00); vibration transducer (015-0116- 
00); magnetic pickup (015-0119-00); ignition pickoff (012-0139- 
00); 20-ft function generator cable (012-0140-00); adapter 
plate (386-1453-00); extension shaft kit (015-0124-00); cooling 
adapter (015-0118-00); 3 50-ft low-noise coax cables (012- 
0137-00); 20-ft low-noise coax cable (012-0136-00); clip mark- 
er cable kit (016-0127-00); 18-inch coax cable (012-0076-00); 
charge amplifier calibrator (011-0095-00); carrying case/trays 
(202-0170-01); instruction manual (070-0890-00). 
For price and availability information on specific items 
included in the Engine Analyzer accessory package, 
contact your nearby Tektronix Field Office. 

RECOMMENDED OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

CAMERAS 
C-12 with beam-splitting mirror for straight-on viewing and 
use of optional projected graticule, f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, Polar- 
oid Land* Pack Film back, order C-12 $460 

Type 561 B or Type 564B to C-12 Camera adapter, order 

016-0217-00 $ 15 

Projected Graticule for 115V, order 016-0204-00 .... $160 
Projected Graticule for 230V, order 016-0234-00 .... $160 
Camera carrying case, order 016-0208-01 $ 75 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 201-1: 9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray, order 201-1 
$130 

TRIPOD 

For easy mounting and positioning of the Rotational Func- 
tion Generator, order 016-0253-00 $ 30 

ROTATIONAL FUNCTION GENERATOR 

Rotational Function Generators can be permanently attached 
to a number of engines for use with the Engine Analyzer 
when needed, order 015-0108-00 $170 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



182 






TYPE 



565 



RM565 

DUAL-BEAM OSCILLOSCOPES 




• TWO VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SYSTEMS 

• 8 x JO-cm DISPLAY PER BEAM 

• ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• REAR-PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS 

• ACCEPTS WIDE VARIETY OF VERTICAL PLUG-INS 

A Type 565, or rack-mount counterpart Type RM565, is 
essentially two single-beam oscilloscopes sharing a common 
cathode-ray tube and power supply. Each beam has separate 
vertical and horizontal deflection systems, focus, and intensity 
controls. 

The vertical amplifiers can be any of 2-Series or 3-Series 
Plug-In Units, except Spectrum Analyzer and Sampling Units. 
The horizontal amplifiers are built-in and can be driven by 
either of two sweep systems, simultaneously or independently, 
or from their external inputs. Front-panel controls permit using 
"A" sweep as a delaying sweep and "B" as the delayed sweep. 
In this mode of operation the upper beam is intensified for 
the duration of the "B" sweep. "B" sweep may also be used 
for single-sweep operation. 

There are rear-panel outputs of: Vertical Signals, Horizontal 
Signals, + Gate, Delayed Trigger, and Auxiliary Power. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

2 identical vertical-deflection systems 

Vertical-deflection characteristics are extremely flexible through 
use of 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units (see chart). 

HORIZONTAL 

2 independent horizontal-deflection systems 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 1 psfdlv to 5s/div. 
10X MAGNIFIER— Extends time base to 0.1 jus/div. 
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 10 /.is to 50 s. 
EXTERNAL INPUT— Approx lOOmV/div to 30V/div. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 10 x 10 cm (each beam scans 8 cm vertical, 
overlap of the two beams is 6 cm). Major graticule division 
equals 1cm, minor division equals 2 mm. Illuminated no- 
parallax graticule. 

ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV. 

PHOSPHOR— P2 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 1 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz squarewave. 
REAR-PANEL SIGNAL OUTPUTS— Output impedance approx 
500 ohms; max load 2 mA. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 600 
watts. 



183 



TYPE 



RM565 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

2 identical systems 

Characteristics of the two vertical systems depend upon the 
2-Series or 3-Series Amplifier Units used. Please refer to the 
plug-in chart for more information on these vertical amplifier 
units. (The 565 does not use Sampling or Spectrum Analyzer 
Plug-In Units.) 



VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS* 


PLUG-IN 

UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


3A3 Dual Trace 


100/xV/div 


DC to 500 kHz 


0.7 /ts 


$850 


3A6 Dual-Trace 


lOmV/div 


DC to 10 MHz 


35 ns 


525 


"3A72 Dual-'lrace 


lOmV/div 


DC to 650 kHz 


0.54 /is 


295 


3A74 Four-Trace 


20mV/div 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /xs 


650 


SINGLE TRACE 


2A60 


50 mV/div 


DC to 1 MHz 


0.35 /is 


$125 


3A5 

Automatic/Prog 


lUmV/div 
1 mV/div 


DC to lb MHz 
DC to 5 MHz 


23 ns 


82b 


3A/5 


50 mV/div 


DC to 4 MHz 


VUns 


195 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


3A8 
Operational 


20 mV/div 


DC to 3.5 MHz 


100 ns 


$650 


3C66 
Carrier Amp 


IU /(.strain 
/div 


DC to 5 kHz 


/U/is 


450 


DIFFERENTIAL 


2A61 


10/tV/div 


0.06 Hz to 
300 kHz 


1.2 /is 


$425 


2A63 


1 mV/div 


DC to 300 kHz 


1.2 (is 


175 


3A3 


100/iV/div 


DC to 500 kHz 


0.7 (is 


85U 


3 A/ 

Comparator 


1 mV/div 


DC to lUMHz 


3b ns 


695 


3A9 


lO/AVdiv 


DC to 1 MHz 


350 ns 


490 



*2- and 3-Series Time Base Plug-Ins can be used for raster generation. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

2 identical systems 

TIME BASE A AND B 

1 /ts/div to 5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
and to approx 12 s/div. A warning light indicates when the 
variable control is in the uncalibrated position. Either time 
base can be operated independently, or Time Base B can 
be delayed by Time Base A. In delayed-sweep operation, 
Time Base A display is intensified for the duration of the 
"B" sweep. 

X10 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases fastest rate to 0.1 /.is/ 
div. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

DELAY INTERVAL 

10 /ts to 50 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 3% of indicated delay. Incremental delay-time accu- 
rate within 0.5%. Delay-time jitter is 1 part in 20,000 or 
less. 

DELAY MODES 

Delayed sweep starts immediately at end of delay time, or 
is triggerable at end of delay time (for jitter-free displays). 




Automatic mode, sweep 
absence of a triggering 



OPERATING MODES 

Time Base A — Normal Sweep. 

Time Base B — Normal, B delayed by A, and Single Sweep. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 
Upper and Lower Horizontal Display Switches select Time 
Base A, Time Base B, or Ext. In the External position, the 
gain is continuously variable from approx lOOmV/div to 
30V/div, DC to 350 kHz. Maximum input voltage is 300-V 
RMS. Input RC is approx 100 kilohms paralleled by 30-55 pF 
depending on gain setting. 

TRIGGER 

2 identical systems 

MODES 

Manual, Automatic, Free-run. In 

free-runs at approx 50 Hz in the 

signal. 
COUPLING 

AC, AC Fast, DC. 
SOURCES 

Internal from Upper Beam or Lower Beam, External, or Line. 
REQUIREMENTS 

0.2 divisions of deflection internal or 0.5 V external up to 

50 kHz, increasing to 1 div or 1 V at 2 MHz. 

CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES 

TEKTRONIX DUAL-BEAM CRT 

5-in round tube, lOxlO-cm display area; 8x10 cm per beam 
with 6-cm overlap. Tube is aluminized with illuminated, in- 
ternal, no-parallax graticule. Accelerating potential is 4 kV. 
P2 phosphor is normally supplied, P7, Pll, or P31 are optional 
without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Repre- 
sentative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. 

DISPLAY CONTROLS 
Separate intensity, focus and astigmatism controls for each 
beam, intensity contrast between A sweep and non-intensified 
B-zone of A sweep (internal screwdriver adjustment), trace 
rotation. 

Z-AXIS MODULATION 

AC-coupled to both CRT grids via rear panel input connec- 
tors. Time constant is 3.5 ms nominally, CRT modulation 
requires approx 10 V at normal intensity. 



184 



TYPE 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

1-kHz squarewave output, calibrated in 6 steps from 1 mV 
to 100 V. Accurate within 3%. 

REAR-PANEL OUTPUTS 

VERTICAL SIGNAL OUT (both upper and lower)— Signal 
amplitude, DC level, and transient response depend on the 
vertical plug-in unit used. Typical signal amplitude: 2 V/div 
to 4 V/div of display; DC level ±20 V. Output impedance: 
approx 500 ohms; maximum load current 2 mA. 

HORIZONTAL OUTPUTS (both upper and lower)— Signal 
amplitude, at least 50 mV/div of display in External position 
and 0.5 V/div of display in Sweep position. DC level to 
+ 5 volts. Output impedance; approx 500 ohms; maximum 
load current 2 mA. 

A AND B +GATES— Pulse height 20 V minimum,- DC level 
zero volts. Output impedance: approx 500 ohms; maximum 
load current 2 mA. 

DELAYED TRIGGER— Fast-rise pulse amplitude +8V mini- 
mum; DC level zero volts. Output impedance: approx 50 
ohms; maximum load current 2 mA. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

600 watts maximum, 50 to 60 Hz. Instrument factory wired 
for 105-V to 125-V (117 V nominal) operation, or 210 V to 
250 V (234 V nominal) upon request. Transformer taps permit 
operation at nominal voltages ranging from 99 V to 132 V 
or 198 V to 265 V. 

CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

RACK MODEL DIMENSIONS AND 
Height 

Width 

Rack depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

RACKMOUNTING 

Type RM565 mounts on tilting slide-out tracks to standard 
19-inch rack. Additional mounting information on catalog 
instrument dimension page. 



13% in 


34.9 cm 


16% in 


42.8 cm 


23%, in 


59.8 cm 


67 lb 


30.5 kg 


=95 lb 


=43.2 kg 


117 lb 


=53.2 kg 


WEIGHTS 
12'/ 4 in 


31.1 cm 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


22 3 /,« in 


56.4 cm 


68 lb 


30.9 kg 


104 lb 


=47.3 kg 


124 lb 


=56.4 kg 



565 
RM565 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord 
(161-0010-03); smoke-gray filter (installed) (378-0567-00); clear 
CRT protector plate (387-0918-00); two patch cords, BNC-to- 
BNC 18-inch (012-0087-00); post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0269-00). Type RM565 also includes 1 
pair mounting tracks (351-0086-00); power cord (161-0024-03); 
two instruction manuals (070-0353-00). 

TYPE 565 OSCILLOSCOPE without plug-in units . . . $1525 

TYPE RM565 OSCILLOSCOPE without plug-in units . . 1625 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The probes recommended for use 
with these instruments are covered on the 2- and 3-series plug- 
in unit pages. Additional probes are available that may be 
better suited for a particular application, including current and 
high-voltage measurements. See the catalog accessory pages 
for information on these and other items. 

CAMERAS 

C-27-547: f /1. 9— 1:0.7 lens, Polaroid Land 1 Pack-Film back 
provides lOxlO-cm coverage on 3y4x4y 2 film, order 
C-27-547 $450 

C-27G: f/ 1.9— 1:0.85 lens, no back, provides lOxlO-cm 
coverage on 4x5 film with optional Graflok'- back and 
Polaroid Land film holder, order C-27G $350 

Graflok back for 4x5 film holder (not included), order 
122-0604-00 $45 

Type 565, RM565 to C-27-547 or C-27G Camera adapter, 
order 016-0225-02 $15 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 205-3: holds 4 plug-in units, has 9-position tilt-lock 
oscilloscope tray, order 205-3 $145 

CRADLE ASSEMBLY 

Provides rear slide support when RM565 is mounted in back- 
less rack, order 040-0346-00 $9 

Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation. 
"Registered Trademark Graflex Inc. 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



185 



TYPE2A60 

DC-to-1 MHz 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 



• DC-fo-J MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 50 mV/DIV-to-50 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• LOW COST 



The Type 2A60 is a general-purpose plug-in unit. It may be 
used in the Type 561B, Type 564B, Type 565, and in the Type 
567/6R1A or Type 568/230 Oscilloscope without digital read- 
out. Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 2A60 
can drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, and other 
indicators. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to l MHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency 
response is 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with I OX probe. 

RISETIME 

0.35 /as. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
0.05V/div, 0.5V/div, 5V/div and 50V/div. Calibrated accu- 
racy within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between 
steps and to approx 500V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 3 lb 

Domestic shipping weight X 6 lb 



Export-packed weight 



;10 lb 



1.4 kg 
i2.7 kg 
'A.5 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0263-00). 

TYPE 2A60 AMPLIFIER UNIT $125 




OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, 
including high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



186 



• UP TO 250:1 CMRf? 

• I mV/DIV-to-20 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type 2A63 is a differential amplifier plug-in unit. It can 
be used to make voltage measurements between two above- 
ground points while at the same time cancelling in-phase signals 
such as hum pickup in the connecting leads. 

The Type 2A63 may be used in the Type 561 B, Type 564B, 
Type 565, or Type 567/6R1A and Type 568/230 Oscilloscope 
without digital readout. Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, 
the Type 2A63 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, 
and other indicators. 



type 2 A 6 3 

DIFFERENTIAL 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 




BANDWIDTH 

DC to 300 kHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency 
response is 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

RISETIME 

<1.2;U,S. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/div to 20V/div in 14 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

DIFFERENTIAL INPUT 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 


CMRR* 


1 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm 
0.1 V/cm to 20V/cm 


1 kHz 


50 kHz 


250:1 
25:1 


150:1 
25:1 



*Wifh a maximum sinewave amplitude of 5 V P-P. 

PHASE SHIFT 

Phase shift between two Type 2A63 Units used for X-Y dis- 
plays is nominally less than 1 ° at 50 kHz. 



INTER-STAGE AC COUPLING 

Reduces drift at high gain. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


3% lb 


1.7 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


« 7 lb 


JS3.2 kg 


Export-packed weight 


«11 lb 


cs5.0 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0266-00). 

TYPE 2A63 AMPLIFIER UNIT 



$175 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 



The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, 
including high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation helps main- 
tain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 .... $47 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page. 



757 



TYPE 



TIME-BASE 
UNIT 



I fis/DIV-to-S s/DIV 
CALIBRATED TIME BASE 

5X MAGNIFIER 

SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION 

LOW COST 



The Type 2B67 Time-Base Unit is designed to generate a 
sweep in the Type 561 B and Type 564B. 

The unit is recommended for use with 2- and 3-series vertical 
plug-in units with bandwidths up to 2 MHz. 



TIME BASE 

1 jtts/div to 5s/div in 21 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 12 s/div. 

5X MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases the fastest rate to 
0.2 /xs/div. Magnified display accurate within 5%. 

SINGLE SWEEP 

For one-shot waveform photography and storage applica- 
tions. 

EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT 

Approx 1 V/div, DC to 750 kHz at —3 dB. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Manual, automatic, or free-run. 

COUPLING 

AC slow, AC fast, or DC. 




SOURCES 

Internal, external, or line. 

REQUIREMENTS 

Internal Triggering — 0.4 divisions of display. 

External Triggering — 0.5 V at DC increasing to 2 V at 2 MHz. 

WEIGHTS 



Net weight 


4% lb 


1.9 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


« 7 lb 


~3.2 kg 


Export-packed weight 


Sill lb 


JT5.0 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0366-00). 

TYPE 2B67 TIME-BASE UNIT $225 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page. 



188 



• 1 00 fiVIDIV-to- 1 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• 50,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

• DC-to-500 kHz BANDWIDTH 
CONSTANT AT ALL DEFLECTION FACTORS 

• FET INPUTS 



The Type 3A3 Dual-Trace Differential Amplifier is designed 
for use in the Type 561 B, 564B, 565, or in the Types 567/6R1A 
and 568/230 Oscilloscope without digital readout. Used in 
the Type 129 Power Supply, the unit can be used to drive X-Y 
plotters, oscilloscopes, and other indicators. 

The Type 3A3 contains two independent, high-gain amplifier 
channels with identical characteristics. Either channel may be 
used to produce a display, or the two channels may be electronic- 
ally switched to produce dual-trace displays. The unit features 
high sensitivity with direct-coupled inputs and has a high degree 
of common-mode rejection. A switch on the front panel selects 
the upper bandwidth limit of the unit, thus increasing the signal- 
to-noise-ratio. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to >500 kHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB point 
is 2 Hz with AC coupling, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. A BAND- 
WIDTH switch selects high or low upper 3-dB points: DC to 
>500kHz or DC to 5 kHz. Selected bandwidth is constant 
at all deflection-factor settings. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

100/iV/div to lOV/div in 16 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 25V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. Input R can be dis- 
connected by removing internal wire link. 

OPERATING MODES 

Channel 1, Channel 2, or dual-trace with Alternate or 
Chopped switching. Chopping frequency is approx 200 kHz. 
Chopped transient blanking is provided. 

DUAL X-Y DISPLAYS 

Obtained with two Type 3A3 Plug-In Units. Dual-trace switch- 
ing is synchronized, so that one Y-channel remains plotted 
against the same X-channel, once the display is set up. There 
is no provision for consistent pairing each time the system 
is operated. 




COMMON-MODE REJECTION 
0.1 mV/div to 10 mV/div® 


Frequency 


DC-Coupled 


AC-Coupled 


DC to 100 kHz 


> 50,000:1 




100 kHz to 500 kHz 


> 1,000:1 




15 Hz 




> 500:1 


60 Hz 




> 2,000:1 


20mV/div to lOV/div® 
(Equal to, or adjustable to, the following minimum 
CMR ratios.) 


DC to 1 kHz 


5,000:1 




1 kHz to 100 kHz 


1,000:1 




100 kHz to 500 kHz 


500:1 




15Hz 




> 500:1 


60 Hz 




> 2,000:1 


® For signals within -|- and — 5 V of ground. 

® For signals within -j~ and — 50 V of ground from 20 mV/div to 0.1 

V/div, and within -f- and —350 V of ground from 0.2 V/div to 10 

V/div. 



PHASE SHIFT 
Less than 2° from DC to 100 kHz between two Type 3A3 
Amplifiers used in X-Y operation. Phase shift can be adjusted 
to 0° at any particular deflection factor setting. 



189 





type 3 A3 












TRIGGER PICKOFF 

Internally coupled. Can be selected from Channel 1, Chan- ^A 
nel 2 or the composite signal after switching. 

DIFFERENTIAL CF OUTPUTS 
















































Output is available from two of the connector pins at the 
rear of the plug-in for use in driving recorders or other equip- 
ment. Output amplitude is a ground-reference, differential, 
~5-volt signal for each division of displayed signal. Front- 
panel TRIGGER SWITCH allows signal out selection of CH 1, 
CH 2 or composite. Bandwidth is DC to ~400 kHz with a 
non-capacitive load. Jacks can be easily installed at the 
rear of the oscilloscope to provide access to the CF outputs. 

WEIGHTS 
























■ 


■ 


■ 
































■■ 












■ 


■■ 






■ 






Net weight 5'/ 4 lb 2.4 kg 
Domestic shipping weight ~10 lb ~4.5 kg 


















Export-packed weight Sil4 lb ~6.4 kg 








INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Four BNC-to-binding post adapters (103-0033-00); two BNC- 
to-BNC 18-inch patch cords (012-0087-00); two instruction 
; manuals (070-0787-00). 

» TYPE 3A3 DUAL-TRACE DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER . . $850 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, in- 
cluding high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Packaae. order 010-0074-00 $15 




Upper trace is a 200-jxV pulse displayed at 100 /iV/cm 
Lower trace is the same signal showing significantly /owe 
noise with the use of the bandwidth limiting switch (50C 
kHz vs 5 kHz). 

NOISE 

Displayed noise, tangentially measured, is less than 15/xV ir 
the 500 kHz bandwidth position. 

DRIFT 
Less than 50,aV/°C. 


INTERCHANNEL ISOLATION P6023 1 OX Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
Electrostatic Isolation is 10M or better referred to input maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 . $47 
signal levels. Dual-Trace Isolation in alternate or chopped 

operation is 100:1 or better referred to divisions of display. P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

Example: 5 divisions displayed on channel 1 will cause no us sdes Prices FOB Beaverton/ Oregon 

more than 0.05 divisions of deflection on channel 2. Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



730 



TYPE3A5 



• 24-ns RISETIME 

• AUTOMATIC SENSITIVITY "SEEKING" 

• PROGRAMMABLE FRONT-PANEL FUNCTIONS 

• LIGHTED INDICATION OF MEASUREMENT 
PARAMETERS 

The Type 3A5 is an automatic plug-in unit designed for use 
in Type 561 B and 564B Oscilloscopes. Press the "seek" button 
on the special 10X probe and the instrument selects the de- 
flection factor for a convenient display size. This "seek" feature 
is ideal for applications where the instrument is located out of 
reach, or for production-line testing that requires continuous 
readjustment of the volts/division control. 

Upon receipt of the "seek" command, the deflection factor 
is automatically selected so that neither peak of the displayed 
waveform extends more than 3 divisions from the graticule 
center, thus establishing the display within the CRT viewing 
area. Large, lighted indicators in the front-panel window tell 
you at a glance the volts/division setting, input coupling, and 
when the manual variable volts/division control is in the un- 
calibrated position. 

The Type 3A5 can be operated manually for applications 
that do not require the automatic features. In addition, the 
automatic functions are overridden whenever the manual V/div 
setting is changed. The plug-in can also be operated remotely 
using the Type 263 External Programmer. Both the "seek" 
feature and manual operation of the control settings are over- 
ridden when the instrument is programmed externally. 

Other features of the Type 3A5 include a special "AC Trace 
Stabilized" circuit that minimizes trace drift. This feature is 
particularly useful when the instrument is operated at high 
sensitivity or when long term trace-stability is required. 

OPERATING MODES 
SEEK, MANUAL AND EXTERNAL 

Seek operation selected by front-panel pushbutton or push- 
button on the P6030 Probe. Manual or external operation 
selected by front-panel pushbuttons. 

SEEKING CHARACTERISTICS 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 50 V/div without probe; 0.1 V/div to 500 V/div 
with P6030 probe. 

SEEKING TIME 

<200ms. (Time required to complete one "seek" operation). 

CYCLING TIME 
2 to 4 s (interval between seek operations with "seek" com- 
mand button held down continuously). 

LOGIC CIRCUIT RESPONSE 
Seeking circuitry functions for signal rep-rates up to 20 MHz. 

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 
READOUT FACILITY 

Bulb-and-film digits '/ 2 inch high. Readout information in- 
cludes 1 mV/div to 50 V/div (lOmV/div to 0.5 kV/div when 
special 10X probe activates the 10X circuit); "AC" or "DC" 
input coupling, "with probe" indication, and "uncal" indica- 
tion when using the variable manual V/div control. 
DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 50 V/div in 12 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Additional steps of 1, 2 and 5 mV/div 
in manual mode only; accurate within 5%. A manual con- 
trol provides uncalibrated variable V/div settings between 
all steps. 



AUTO PROGRAMMABLE 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 




BANDWIDTH 

DC to >15MHz at 3-dB down, from lOmV/div to 50 V/div 
(all modes). DC to >5MHz at 1, 2 or 5 mV/div (manual 
mode only). AC-coupled low-frequency response is 5 Hz, 
0.5 Hz with included 10X probe. 

RISETIME 

<24ns at deflection factors of 10 mV to 50 V/div. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm paralleled by approx 24 pF. 

SIGNAL DELAY 
Permits viewing the leading edge of fast-rise waveforms. 

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS 
V/div settings, with or without 10X probe, AC or DC input 
coupling, AC Trace Stabilization, all by contact closure to 
ground. Vertical positioning by variable resistance. 

P6030 PROBE 

10X probe with "seek" command button and 6-ft cable. Sup- 
plied with the instrument. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 5% lb 2.4 kg 

Domestic shipping weight Sill lb ~5.0 kg 

Export-packed weight ~\A lb ~6.4 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
P6030 10X Probe Package (010-0195-00); 37-pin connector 
(131-0422-00); connector cover (200-0660-02); telephone plug 
(134-0079-00); two instruction manuals (070-0500-00). 

TYPE 3A5 AUTOMATIC/PROGRAMMABLE UNIT . . . $825 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



191 



TYPE 



AUTOMA TIC/ PROGRAMMABLE 
TIME-BASE UNIT 

• AUTOMATIC TIME-BASE "SEEKING" 

• PROGRAMMABLE FRONT-PANEL FUNCTIONS 

• LIGHTED INDICATION OF MEASUREMENT 
PARAMETERS 

• DELAYED SWEEP MAGNIFIER 

Used in association with the Type 3A5 Amplifier and P6030 
Probe, the Type 3B5 automatically establishes a triggered 
time-base display upon receipt of the "seek" command from 
the probe. The time/division setting is automatically selected 
to provide a convenient display of 2 to 6 cycles. Lighted 
indicators in the front-panel window show the selected time/ 
division setting. They also indicate when the time base is not 
triggered and when the manual variable time/division con- 
trol is in the uncalibrated position. 

The Type 3B5 features a delayed sweep magnifier for 
expanding the display by X10 or X100. A calibrated delay 
control selects the point in the display where magnification 
begins. When the sweep magnifier is in operation, the time/ 
division readout is automatically corrected to indicate the 
magnified setting, and a "magnified sweep" indication lights 
up in the readout window. 

The automatic "seek" feature of the Type 3B5 is over- 
ridden when the manual time/division control is used. Both 
the "seek" feature and manual operation of the control set- 
ting are overridden when the instrument is programmed 
remotely using the Type 263 External Programmer. 

OPERATING MODES 
SEEK, MANUAL AND EXTERNAL 

Manual or external operation selected by front-panel push- 
buttons. Seek operation selected by front-panel pushbutton 
or pushbutton on the P6030 Probe supplied with the Type 
3A5 Amplifier. 

SEEKING CHARACTERISTICS 
TIME BASE 

5 s/div to 0.1 jiis/div. 
SEEKING TIME 

<500ms (time required to complete one "seek" operation). 
CYCLING TIME 

1 to 2 s ("seek" command button held down continuously). 
LOGIC CIRCUIT RESPONSE 

Seeking circuitry functions for signal rep-rates from 30 Hz 

to 20 MHz. 

GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS 
READOUT FACILITY 

Bulb-and-film digits '/ 2 inch high. Readout information in- 
cludes 5 s/div to lOns/div sweep times, plus "Magnified 
Sweep," "Not Triggered," and "Uncalibrated" indications. 

TIME BASE 

lOns/div to 5 s/div in 27 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Accurate within 3% from 0.1 /xs/div to 1 s/div ; within 5% at 
10, 20, or 50ns/div and at 2 or 5 s/div. A manual control 
provides uncalibrated variable time/div settings between all 
steps and to approx 12.5 s/div. 

DELAYED SWEEP MAGNIFIER 
Expands the display by a factor of XI or XI 00. XI range 
magnifies time/division settings from 5 s/div to 1 fis/d'w. 




XI 00 range magnifies time/division settings from 5 s/div to 
10/ts/div. Accuracy is within 3% for all magnified sweep 
times except the 5 and 2 s/div (within 5%). VARIABLE 
DELAY: 10-turn control determines portion of sweep to be 
magnified. 

TRIGGER MODES 

Internal: AC-coupled or Auto. External: AC-coupled or 
DC-coupled. 

TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS 

Internal AC, Auto (with Type 3A5): 0.5 div of signal displayed, 
50 Hz to 8 MHz, increasing to 2 div at 20 MHz. 

External AC: 1 V to 40 V peak to peak, 50 Hz to 20 MHz. 

External DC: 2.5 V to 40 V peak to peak, DC to 10 Hz; 1 V 
to 40 V peak to peak, 10 Hz to 20 MHz. 

PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS 

Time/div, magnifier range, trigger-mode, slope, and coupling, 
by contact closure to ground. Horizontal positioning, trigger 
level, and magnifier delay by variable resistance. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 5 lb 2.3 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~11 lb ~5.0 kg 

Export-packed weight ~14 lb ~6.4 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

37-pin connector (131-0422-00); connector cover (200-0660-01); 
two instruction manuals (070-0538-00). 

TYPE 3B5 AUTOMATIC/PROGRAMMABLE TIME BASE UNIT 
$950 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



192 



TYPE 263 



PROGRAMMER 




COMPLETE SYSTEM FOR FAST PRODUCTION -LINE TESTING 

TYPE 263 CHARACTERISTICS 

• FAST AMPLITUDE AND TIME MEASUREMENTS PRO GRAM CAPABILITIES 

• REDUCED OPERATOR ERROR All operational controls of the Type 3A5 and Type 3B5 are 

programmable except the variable volts/division and time/ 

• SIMPLE, CONVENIENT OPERATION division functions. Program established by jumper place- 

ment and potentiometer setting on the program cards. 

OUTPUT CABLES 

,-,,„ ,-n -ii * i_- j ■,. tL t tac Two 3 ft cables with multi-pin connectors. 

The Type 561 B Oscilloscope* combined with the Type 3A5, 

3B5 Plug-In Units and the Type 263 Programmer, offers the CONSTRUCTION 

ideal system for making production-line measurements quickly Cast aluminum with wrap-around steel cabinet. Blue vinyl 

and conveniently . . . and with less chance for operator error. finish. 

The system allows measurements to be made at the push of a n , lil:k , cl ^ klc ..m u ,r, ruTC 

button without changing the manual controls of either plug-in DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

unit. The oscilloscope settings are programmed for a particu- v*?ju alt '" 00 ^ 

lar measurement and read out in large, lighted indicators on Width 8 / 4 in zz.z cm 

the face of the plug-in units. After the initial program is estab- De P tn y '" o^ 

lished, this new system can be operated by personnel with little Net weight J« lb J-7 

„ t „^u„;^„i »,.„;„;„„ Domestic shipping weight ~12 lb ~5.5 kg 

or no technical training. i i . i . _ ,o >i o o i 

Export-packed weight ~18 lb ~8.2 kg 

The Type 263 Programmer provides the facility for con- _._,.___. — * ...-,.»-. Ls-rrrr^^c 

trolling the Type 3A5 and 3B5 Automatic/Programmable Plug- INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

In Units remotely. Pushbuttons on the front panel of the Pro- Etovjinijgnaj leads (175-0674-00); two mstruct,on manu- 

grammer select any one of six internal program cards. Each als (070-0535-00). 

card, after initial set-up, establishes the plug-in functions re- Type 263 PROGRAMMER, with 6 program cards . . $325 

quired for a particular test or measurement. More than one Extra program carc )s, order 670-0226-00 ea $ 40 

programmer can be cascaded for applications requiring more 

than the six initial measurement set-ups. The plug-in type pro- TYPE 561 B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $560 
gram cards are identical, allowing them to be interchanged TYPE 3A5 AMPLIFIER UNIT $825 
or arranged in any sequence. New programs are easily estab- 
lished by relocating small jumpers and changing the potenti- TYPE 3B5 TIME-BASE UNIT $950 

ometer settings on the cards. ... » , „• r ^„ „ ^ 

U.S. Soles Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
*Also Type 564B Oscilloscope for storage applications. Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

SEE THE TYPE 56 IB, 3A5, 3B5 PAGES FOR INDICATOR AND PLUG-IN UNIT INFORMATION 793 



TYPE 3A6 

DC-to-10 MHz 
DUAL-TRACE UNIT 

• 35-ns RISETIME 

• TWO IDENTICAL CHANNELS 

• DC-fo- 1 MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 1 mV/DIV-fo- 1 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type 3A6 Amplifier is a general-purpose, dual-trace 
plug-in unit designed for use in the Types 561 B, 564B and 565 
Oscilloscopes. It can also be used in the Type 567/6R1A or 
Type 568/230 when digital readout is not required. 

The Type 3A6 features two separate channels with identical 
characteristics. It can be operated in any one of five modes for 
a variety of single and dual-trace displays. Two Type 3A6's 
can be used for X-Y curve tracing, but without synchronized 
switching or channel pairing. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to 10 MHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency 
response is 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

RISETIME 

Approximately 35 ns. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to lOV/div in 10 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 25 V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

OPERATING MODES 

Includes Channel 1 only (polarity of Channel 1 can be 
changed to provide 180° inversion); Channel 2 only; alter- 
nate — Channel 1 and 2 switched electronically on alternate 
sweeps; Chopped — successive 4 /j.s (approx) segments of each 
channel are displayed at an approx 125-kHz rate per chan- 
nel (chopped transient blanking is provided); Added — outputs 
of Channel 1 and 2 added algebraically. 

INTERNAL TRIGGER SIGNAL 

Selectable from the output of Channel 1 only or from the com- 
bined output of the unit. Triggering from Channel 1 only 
permits viewing the true relationship between two signals 
when operating the unit in either alternate or chopped mode. 




SIGNAL DELAY 

Permits viewing of leading edge of fast-rise waveforms.* 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 5 3 / 4 lb 2.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight Si 9 lb KS4.1 kg 

Export-packed weight s;13 lb ~5.9 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0419-00). 

TYPE 3A6 AMPLIFIER UNIT $525 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, 
including high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

*The Type 3A6 can be used with a Type 2B67 or Type 3B2 Time-Base Unit, 
but it will not usually be possible to view the entire leading edge ol the 
triggering waveform. Same applies when the unit is used with Types 565 
and RM565 Oscilloscopes. 



U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page. 



194 



type 3A7 



• J mV/DIV-to-50 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• UP TO 10-MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 20,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

• 1 1 ,000-cm EFFECTIVE SCREEN HEIGHT 

The Type 3A7 High-Gain Differential Comparator adds to 
the measurement capabilities of Type 561 B, 564B, and 565 
Oscilloscopes. It can also be used in the Types 567/6R1A and 
568/230, but does not provide digital readout. Used with 
Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 3A7 can drive recording 
equipment, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, or other indicators. 

As a differential input amplifier, the dynamic range of the 
3A7 Unit permits common-mode signals up to ±15 volts in 
amplitude to be applied to the amplifier without attenuation. 
With a rejection ratio of about 20,000 to 1 for DC or low- 
frequency signals, differential signals of 1 mV or less on large 
common-mode signals can be measured. A front-panel atten- 
uator permits the acceptance of common-mode voltages up 
to 500 V. 

As a differential comparator, voltage measurements using 
the slide-back technique can be made with this unit. The high 
accuracy and stability of the DC comparison voltage, added 
differentially to the input signal, makes precise voltage meas- 
urements possible. Using this mode of operation, the 3A7 
Unit has an effective screen height of ±11,000 cm. This is 
equivalent to a ±11 -volt dynamic signal range at a deflection 
factor of 1 mV/cm. Within this range, calibrated ±DC com- 
parison voltages can be added differentially to the input signal 
to permit a maximum of about 0.001% or 100/xV per mm to 
be resolved. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/div to 50 V/div, depending on millivolts/div and 
attenuator settings. Accuracy of millivolts/div positions is 
within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuous variation between steps 
and to approx 125 V/div. 



BANDWIDTH (— 3dB)t 


mV/DIV 


FREQUENCY 


RISETIME 


50 mV to lOmV/div 


DC to > 10 MHz 


<35ns 


5 mV/div 


DC to > 8 MHz 


<44ns 


2 m V/div 


DC to > 6 MHz 


<58ns 


1 m V/div 


DC to > 4 MHz 


<88ns 



fLow-frequency 3-dB point, AC coupled: 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 



INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 


INPUT 
ATTEN 


MAX PEAK INPUT VOLTS 
Common or Differential Mode 


MAX INPUT 
ATTEN ERROR 


Rs; » 


±15V 


* 


IX 


±15V 


** 


10X 


±150V 


±0.05% 


100X 


±500V 


±0.15% 


1000X 


±500V 


±3% 



*lnput R » 10,000 to 50,000 MS2. 

**1X input R within ±0.1% of 10X input R. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF. 




COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO AT 1 mV/div 


DC COUPLED 


> 20,000:1 with ±15VDC or 30 V P to P AC, 
DC to 20 kHz 


AC COUPLED 


> 1000=1 with 30 V P to P at 60 Hz, to >20,000:1 
at 20 kHz 


HF (AC OR DC 
COUPLED) 


>500:1 with 30 V P to P at 500 kHz, to >20,000:1 
at 20 kHz 



COMPARISON VOLTAGE 

to ±1.1 V, or to ±11 V. Accuracy: ± (0.15% of indi- 
cated value plus 0.05% of V c Range). 

OVERDRIVE RECOVERY 

Recovers to within lOmV of reference signal within 300 ns 
after the signal returns to the screen. Certain overdrive 
signals can cause an additional slow (thermal) shift of up 
to 5 mV in the reference level. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0477-00). 

TYPE 3A7 DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR $695 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 . . $47 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



5'/ 4 lb 


2.4 kg 


9 lb 


=4.1 kg 


14 lb 


=6.4 kg 



195 



™> E 3A8 

OPERATIONAL 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 



• TWO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 

• 10 MHz OR GREATER GAIN-BANDWIDTH 
PRODUCT 

• 15,000 OR GREATER OPEN-LOOP GAIN 

• SELECTABLE INTERNAL Z\ AND Z, COMPONENTS 

• PROVISION FOR EXTERNAL Z AND Z f 
COMPONENTS 



The Type 3A8 Operational Amplifier performs precise inte- 
gration, differentiation, function generation, linear and non- 
linear amplification. The unit can be used in the Type 561 B, 
564B, or Type 565. It can also be used in the Type 567/6R1A and 
Type 568/230, but without digital presentation of the measure- 
ment. Signals from the operational amplifiers can be displayed 
on the oscilloscope and/or fed to other devices. 

Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 3A8 can 
drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, and other indicators. 



DISPLAY AMPLIFIER 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to >3.5MHz at 3-dB down. 

RISETIME 
< 100 ns. 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

20mV/div to lOV/div in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable be- 
tween steps and to approx 25 V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF. 

OPERATING MODES 

Signal source selection from either operational amplifier 
or an external signal. AC or DC coupling. The display can 
be inverted to provide the desired deflection polarity. 



OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS 

OPEN-LOOP GAIN 
> 15,000 at DC. 

OPEN-LOOP GAIN-BANDWIDTH PRODUCT 
>10MHz. 




OUTPUT RANGE 

±25 V, ±7.5 mA. Protected against shorts to ground. 

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 

<30Q at 1 MHz for compensated unity-gain amplifier. 

INPUT OFFSET 

Voltage: adjustable to zero ±500 /xV (front-panel control). 

Current: adjustable to zero ±50 pA (calibration control). 

DRIFT 

After 30 minute warmup, typically <0.5mV/hour referred to 
input (averaged over 10 hours). 

FEEDBACK 

Provisions for negative and/or positive feedback. Negative 
feedback utilizes internal and/or external impedances; posi- 
tive feedback utilizes external impedances only. 

SELECTABLE INPUT AND FEEDBACK COMPONENTS 

Front-panel switches allow independent selection of the fol- 
lowing resistors and capacitors in any combination as Z, 
and Z f : 0.01, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5 and 1 megohm; 10 pF, 100 pF, 
0.001, 0.01, 0.1 and 1 /xF. All values are ±1% except 10 pF 
and lOOpF which are adjustable. 

INTEGRATION LOW-FREQUENCY REJECT 

An RC network which prevents integration below approx 1 Hz 
(voltage or current offset drift) can be switched in or out 
as needed. Other networks can be connected externally. 






196 



TERMINAL ADAPTERS 

Two shielded terminal adapters are included for construction 
of external circuitry for custom applications. Over one hundred 
suggested circuits for special applications are shown in the 
instruction manual. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


4% lb 


^2.0 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


ZZ9 lb 


^4.1 kg 


Export-packed weight 


~13 lb 


^5.9 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two terminal adapters (013-0048-01); two terminal shields 
(013-0049-01); two BNC to binding post adapters (103-0033- 
00); two instruction manuals (070-0507-00). 

TYPE 3A8 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER UNIT $650 



BASIC OPERATING MODES 



Ri 




R, 




e — — 


R, 



AMPLIFICATION is determined by the ratio of R f to Ri due 
to the high open-loop gain. This provides convenient signal 
step-up or step-down with low output impedance. External 
compensation extends the closed-loop gain-bandwidth (see 
Compensating Adapter). 





c 

II 




R 




II 




e D — — 


-*-/•• 



INTEGRATION is obtained by placing a capacitor in the feed- 
back loop. Unlike the passive RC integrator, this circuit permits 
output loading. Typical applications include magnetic core B-H 
loop studies. 



c 

e O II 




R 




oi || 

e = — 


RC de 

RC dt 



DIFFERENTIATION is accomplished by placing a capacitor 
in the input circuit. The unique characteristic of this circuit 
is the extraction of higher frequency signal components with- 
out loss of signal level. It can detect minute information such 
as transients and slope changes. 



type 3A8 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 




COMPENSATING ADAPTER 

For extending the high-frequency performance of either 
operational amplifier when the internal Z ; and Zf resistors 
are used in any combination for gain or attenuation. The 
adapter compensates for stray capacitance associated with 
the internal resistors, providing an adjustment for optimum 
HF response. Order Part Number 013-0081-00 $35 

LOG ADAPTER 

Mixed low- and high-amplitude signals can be measured 
using the Log Adapter. Pulses and transient waveforms span- 
ning three voltage decades to plus 100 volts or minus 100 
volts can be displayed and measured on the same trace. Order 
Part Number 013-0067-00 $75 

GATING ADAPTER 

The Gating Adapter allows integration and display of repeti- 
tive signals by resetting the integrator to zero during sweep 
retrace time. The adapter uses Operational Amplifier "2" of the 
Type 3A8 to gate amplifier "1" on and off in response to an 
external gating signal, such as the -fGafe signal from a Type 
3B4 Time Base Plug-In Unit. The signal applied to amplifier "1" 
is then amplified, integrated, or differentiated only during the 
"on" time. Order Part Number 013-0068-00 $75 

PROBES 

The probes recommended for use with the display amplifier 
of the Type 3A8 satisfy most measurement requirements. Addi- 
tional probes are available that may be better suited for a par- 
ticular application including high-voltage and current measure- 
ments. See accessory pages at the rear of the catalog for infor- 
mation on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



197 



type 3A9 



DC-to-1 MHz DIFFERENTIAL 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 

• VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS 
1 fiV/div to 1 V/div 
DC-fo-T MHz BANDWIDTH 

• CURRENT MEASUREMENTS (with optional current 
probe) 

1 mA/div to 1 A/div 

1 Hz-fo- 1 MHz BANDWIDTH 

• SELECTABLE UPPER AND LOWER 3-dB POINTS 

• 100,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION 

• INTERNAL DIFFERENTIAL DC OFFSET 

• 10 fxV I hour DC DRIFT* 

CHARACTERISTICS 

The Type 3A9 is a DC-coupled differential amplifier designed 
for use in Tektronix Type 560-Series Oscilloscopes, including 
the new Type 561 B and Type 564B Storage Oscilloscopes. 
Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 3A9 can drive 
recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes and other indicators. 

The Type 3A9 represents a significant improvement from pre- 
vious performance standards in high-gain, differential, DC- 
coupled amplifiers for the Type 560-Series Oscilloscopes. DC 
drift is held to 10/xV/h, long term without chopper stabiliza- 
tion; displayed noise (tangentially measured) is 12 /aV at 10 
fiV/div and 1-MHz bandwidth with a 25-fi source resistance. 
Bandwidth is maintained at DC-to-1 MHz throughout the de- 
flection factor range of 10/iV/div to 10 V/div. CMRR is at 
least 100,000:1 from DC-to-1 00 kHz from 10/iV/div to 10 mV/ 
div. DC differential offset provides an internal voltage to 
cancel residual DC levels or to inspect signal components over 
a full differential dynamic range. Bandwidth is selectable at 
both upper and lower 3-dB points for noise attenuation and 
AC coupling at very low frequencies (0.1 Hz). 

In addition, Tektronix 125-turn AC current probes (P6021, 
P6019) provide the convenience of current readings from 1 mA/ 
div to 1 A/div with the AC current probe input. The bandwidth 
when using the optional current probe is from 10 Hz to 1 MHz. 



VOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS 

BANDWIDTH 

DC-to-1 MHz independent of deflection factor setting. 

FREQUENCY LIMITS— 3-dB POINTS 

Upper— 1 MHz, 300 kHz, 100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 
1 kHz, 300 Hz, 100 Hz. 

Lower— DC, 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz. A 
DC offset position provides DC low frequency response and 
turns on the DC offset control. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm, paralleled by 47 pF. 

'Constant ambient temperature and line voltage. See DC-drift specification. 

198 




DEFLECTION FACTOR 

10/j.V/div to 10 V/div in 19 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence, 
accurate within 2%. Uncalibrated continuously variable 
between steps and to approximately 25 V/div. 

INPUT COUPLING 

May be switched to AC, GND or DC. Input coupling ca- 
pacitor is automatically charged to proper voltage through 
a 1 -megohm resistor when switch is in GND position. Lower 
—3-dB point is approximately 1.6 Hz when AC coupled at 
input. 

INPUT GATE CURRENT 

From 10/xV/div to lOmV/div, maximum input gate current 
is ±20 pA at +25°C and ±100 pA at +50 "Q 20 mV/div to 
10 V/div, maximum input gate current is ±10 pA at +25°C 
and ±10 pA at +50°C. Display shift at 10/xV/div (+25°C, 
AC coupled) is ±2 div. 

DISPLAYED NOISE 

<12/xV or 0.1 div, whichever is greater, measured tangenti- 
ally at full bandwidth (1 MHz), source resistance 25 O or less. 

DC DRIFT 

Drift with time (constant ambient temperature and line voltage; 
DC to 100 kHz bandwidth). 

Short term: <5 juV/min (P-P) or 0.1 div (whichever is greater) 
after 1-hour warm up. 

Long term: <10/j.V/h (P-P) or 0.1 div (whichever is greater) 
after 1-hour warm up. 

Drift with ambient temperature change (line voltage con- 
stant) is <50^V/°C. 



DIFFERENTIAL DYNAMIC RANGE 

lO/iV/div to lOmV/div— ±1 V. 

20mV/div to 0.1 V/div— ±10 V. 

0.2V/div to 1 V/div— ±100 V. 

2V/div to lOV/div— ±1000V (500V max each input). 

DC OFFSET 

10 //.V/div to lOmV/div — hi V to -1 V. 
20mV/div to 0.1 V/div— +10 V to -10 V. 
0.2 V/div to 1 V/div — hlOOV to — 100 V. 
2V/div to lOV/div — H000V to -1000V. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION 



\ VERIFICATION POINTS 



l.OOO-l 



V 



/ 



J 



/ 



/ 



/ 



\/' 




DC COUPLED 
AC COUPLED 



SO mV /tflv - 10 V/div 



boo. i i r 



COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE 
10/xV/div to lOmV/div— ±10 V. 
20mV/div to 0.1 V/div— ±100 V. 
0.2 V/div to 10 V/div— ±500 V. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
DC Coupled: 10fiV/div to 10 mV/div— ±15 V (DC + peak 

AC); 

20mV/div to 10 V/div— ±500 V (DC + peak 

AC). 
AC-Coupled Input DC Voltage: ±500 V, each input. 

OVERDRIVE RECOVERY 

<10/xs to recover to within 0.5% of zero level after removal 
of a + or — voltage applied for 1 s. Voltage not to exceed 
differential dynamic range. 

INPUT OVERDRIVE LIGHT 

Indicates differential overload is being approached. 



type 3A9 



AC CURRENT CHARACTERISTICS 
WITH OPTIONAL CURRENT PROBES 

BANDWIDTH 

10 Hz to 1 MHz with optional AC current probe. 

FREQUENCY LIMITS — 3-dB POINTS 

Upper— 1 MHz, 300 kHz, 100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 1 kHz, 
300 Hz, 100 Hz. 

Lower— 10 kHz, 1 kHz, 100 Hz, 10 Hz. Not calibrated from 
10 Hz to DC. 

INPUT 

Accepts Tektronix 125-turn AC current probe (P6021, P6019). 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mA/div to 1 A/div in 10 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated continuously variable 
between steps and to approximately 2.5 A/div. 

MAXIMUM INPUT CURRENT 
10 A P-P. 

FRONT-PANEL SIGNAL OUTPUT 
1 V (±20%) per displayed division. DC coupled, internally 
adjustable to ground reference. Dynamic range is at least 
+5V to — 5 V. Bandwidth is DC to at least 500 kHz. Out- 
put resistance is 100O or less. Minimum load resistance, 
10 kO. 



Net weight 


4% lb 


2.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


K 8 lb 


=23.6 kg 


Export-packing weight 


£212 lb 


JS5.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0913-00). 

TYPE 3A9 PLUG-IN UNIT $490 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this plug-in unit satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Other probes are available. 
See the Tektronix Catalog accessory pages for additional infor- 
mation on these and other items. 

P6023 10X Probe Package, adjustable attenuation ratio helps 
maintain common-mode rejection, order 010-0167-00 . . $ 47 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $ 15 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $ 26 

P6021 Current Probe, order 010-0237-00 $ 85 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



199 



type 3 A7 2 

DC-to-650 kHz 

DUAL-TRACE 

AMPLIFIER UNIT 



• TWO IDENTICAL CHANNELS 

• 10 mV/DIV-to-20 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type 3A72 Amplifier is a general-purpose dual-trace 
plug-in unit that has two separate channels, each with identical 
characteristics. The unit can operate in any of five operating 
modes for a variety of single and dual-trace displays. This 
unit can be used in the Type 561 B, Type 564B, or Type 
565 Oscilloscope. It can also be used in the Types 567/6R1A 
and 568/230, but without digital presentation of the measure- 
ment. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to 650 kHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency 
response is 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to 20 V/div in 11 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

OPERATING MODES 

Includes Channel 1 only (normal or inverted); Channel 2 only; 
Alternate — Channel 1 and 2 switched electronically on alter- 
nate sweeps; Chopped — successive 16-/is segments of each 
channel are displayed at an approx 30-kHz rate per channel. 
Chopped transient blanking is provided; Added — outputs of 
Channel 1 and 2 algebraically added. 

MULTIPLE X-Y DISPLAYS 

Obtained with two Type 3A72 Plug-In Units; both synchron- 
ization and automatic pairing are provided. With two Type 
3A72's operated in the dual-trace mode, Channel 1 of the left- 
hand unit is always plotted against Channel 1 of the right- 
hand unit. 




Net weight 


5 lb 


2.3 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


zz 8 lb 


:=S3.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


—13 lb 


^5.9 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0274-00). 

TYPE 3A72 AMPLIFIER UNIT $295 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, 
including high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

U.5. 5ales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



200 



™* 3A74 

DC-to-2 MHz FOUR-TRACE 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 



• FOUR SEPARATE CHANNELS 

• DC-to-2 MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 20 mV/DIV-to-JO V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type 3A74 Amplifier is a general-purpose multi-trace 
plug-in unit that has four separate channels, each with identical 
characteristics. The unit can operate in a number of modes for 
a variety of single and multi-trace displays. The Type 3A74 can 
be used in the Type 561 B, Type 564B or Type 565, and in the Type 
567/6R1A or Type 568/230 Oscilloscope without digital readout. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to 2 MHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency 
response is 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

RISETIME 

Approximately 0.1 7 /xs. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
0.02V/div to lOV/div in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable be- 
tween steps and to approx 25 V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

OPERATING MODES 

Includes any one of the four channels separately (normal or 
inverted); Alternate — any combination of two or more chan- 
nels switched electronically on alternate sweeps; Chopped — 
successive 2-/is segments of each channel are displayed at an 
approx rate per channel of: 250 kHz when using two chan- 
nels; 167 kHz when using three channels; and 125 kHz when 
using four channels. Chopped transient blanking is provided. 

MULTIPLE X-Y DISPLAYS 

Obtained by using two Type 3A74 Plug-In Units; both synchro- 
nization and automatic pairing are provided. With two 
Type 3A74's, two, three or four independent displays may be 
obtained, properly paired: Channel 4 of the left-hand unit is 
always plotted against Channel 4 of the right-hand unit, 
Channel 3 versus Channel 3, etc. 



TYPE 3A74 -"^"" four-trace 

'EG VOLTS/DIV. 




INTERNAL TRIGGER SIGNAL (for the time-base) 
From one of two sources as selected; either from the output 
of Channel 1 only or the combined output of the amplifier. 



Net weight 


6V 4 lb 


2.8 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


S10 lb 


«45 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=:14 lb 


X6A kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Four BNC to binding-post adapters (103-0033-00); two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0347-01). 

TYPE 3A74 AMPLIFIER UNIT $650 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, 
including high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



201 



type 3A75 

DC-to-4 MHz 
AMPLIFIER UNIT 



• DC-fo-4 MHz BANDWIDTH 

• 50 mV/DIV-to-20 V/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 



The Type 3A75 Amplifier is a general-purpose wide-band 
plug-in unit. It may be used in the Type 561 B, Type 564B, Type 
565, or in the Type 567/6R1A and Type 568/230 Oscilloscope 
without digital readout. Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, 
the Type 3A75 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes 
and other indicators. 



BANDWIDTH 
DC to 4 MHz at 3-dB down. AC-coupled low-frequency 
response is 2 Hz, 0.2 Hz with 10X probe. 

RISETIME 

Approximately 90 ns. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

50mV/div to 20V/div in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 
between steps and to approx 50 V/div. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 3V 2 |b 1.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 6 lb ^2.7 kg 

Export-packed weight ~1 1 lb ^5.0 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two instruction manuals (070-0275-00). 
TYPE 3A75 AMPLIFIER UNIT $195 




OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The probes recommended for use with this instrument satisfy 
most measurement requirements. Additional probes are avail- 
able that may be better suited for a particular application, 
including high-voltage and current measurements. See catalog 
accessory pages for information on these and other items. 

P6028 IX Probe Package, order 010-0074-00 $15 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0127-00 $26 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



202 



type 3B3 

•BASE UNIT 



• 500 ns/DIV-to-1 s/DIV CALIBRATED TIME BASE 

• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• TRIGGERING TO 1 MHz 

• SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION 



The Type 3B3 Time-Base Unit is used to generate normal 
and delayed sweeps. Flexible triggering facilities are similar for 
both the normal sweep and delayed sweep. Calibrated sweep 
delay enables accurate delay intervals to be set and measured. 
The unit can be used with the Type 561 B or Type 564B, and 
with the Type 567/6R1A or Type 568/230 Oscilloscope without 
digital readout. 



TIME BASE 

(Both normal and delayed sweeps.) 0.5/xs/div to 1 s/div in 
20 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accurate within 3%. 
Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps and to 
approx 2.5 s/div. The Variable control operates with the 
normal sweep in the normal display mode, and with delayed 
sweep in all other display modes. 

5X MAGNIFIER 

Expands the fastest sweep rate to 0.1 jus/div. Magnified 
sweep accurate within 5%. 

SINGLE SWEEP 

Facilitates photographic recordings of waveforms. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

Permits accurate setting and measuring of delay intervals 
from 0.5 jas to 10 s, continuously variable in 20 ranges. One 
control can select both the normal and delayed sweeps 
simultaneously or the delayed sweep rate can be selected 
independent of the normal sweep. Delay accurate within 
1 % of full scale reading and delay time linearity is within 
0.2% of full scale from 5 /is to 2 s of delay. 

The normal sweep generator operates as the display time 
base in (1) the NORMAL position, (2) the INTENSIFIED position 
— where the delayed-sweep generator intensifies a portion of 
the normal sweep trace, indicating the time during which the 
delayed sweep operates— and (3) the TRIGGERED, INTENSI- 
FIED position — where the delayed sweep is armed at the end 
of the delay time and starts by the delayed sweep trigger 
. . . intensifying a segment of the normal sweep trace as 
above. 

The delayed-sweep generator operates as the display time 
base in (1) the DELAYED SWEEP position— displaying the 
portion of the trace which was intensified in the INTENSIFIED 
position . . . with time-jitter less than 1 part in 20,000 of the 
maximum available delay interval — and (2) the jitter-free 
TRIGGERED, DELAYED SWEEP position— displaying the por- 
tion of the trace which was intensified in the TRIGGERED, 
INTENSIFIED position. 




MODES 

Normal-Sweep Trigger — manual or automatic. 
Delayed-Sweep Trigger — manual only. 

COUPLING 
AC or DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal or External. Line triggering in normal or delaying 
sweep operation only. External trigger facility has two 
ranges: 0.5 to 15 V and 5 to 150 V, plus or minus polarity. 

REQUIREMENTS 

Internal Triggering — 0.4 major graticule divisions from DC 
to 5 MHz, increasing to 1 major division at 10 MHz. 
External Triggering — 0.5 V from DC to 5 MHz, increasing to 
1.25 V at 10 MHz. Requirements increase below 6 Hz with 
AC-coupling. 



WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0365-01). 

TYPE 3B3 TIME-BASE UNIT $650 



U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



5% lb 


2.3 kg 


9 lb 


SS4.1 kg 


13 lb 


S5.9 kg 



203 



type 3B4 

TIME-BASE UNIT 



• 50 ns/DIV-to-5 s/DIV CALIBRATED TIME BASE 

• TRIGGERING TO 20 MHz 

• DIRECT READING MAGNIFIER 

• CALIBRATED EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT 

• SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION 



The Type 3B4 Plug-In Unit is a wide-range time base with 
flexible, high-speed triggering facilities, and a wide-range, 
direct-reading magnifier. It can be used in the Type 561 B or 
Type 564B, and in the Type 567/6R1A or Type 568/230 Oscillo- 
scope without digital readout. The Type 3B4 is recommended 
for operation with Type 3A6 and other wideband (>2MHz) 
vertical amplifier plug-in units. 

In addition to time base facilities, the 3B4 provides a DC- 
coupled external input amplifier with calibrated deflection 
factors from 0.2 to 5 V/div. 



TIME BASE 
0.2 jus/div to 5s/div in 23 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; 
accuracy within 3% from 0.2 /xs/div to 2s/div, within 5% 
at 5s/div. Uncalibrated, continuously variable between steps 
and to 12.5s/div. 

DIRECT READING MAGNIFIER 

Provides sweep expansion up to X50 and extends the fastest 
sweep rate to 50 ns/div. The MAGNIFIER control is concen- 
tric with the TIME/DIV control, providing a direct indica- 
tion of both the sweep rate being magnified and the magni- 
fied time/div rate. Up to 5 magnification steps are provided, 
to X40, or X50, depending on the TIME/DIV control setting 
before magnification. Magnified sweep rates are confined to 
the time/div steps on the panel, so there are no "forbidden" 
(uncalibrated) combinations. Magnified sweep accurate with- 
in 5%. 

The MAGNIFIER control is also used to set the external input 
deflection factor when the TIME/DIV control is in the "Ext 
Input" position. 

EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT 

0.2 V/div to 5 V/div in 5 calibrated steps (max input ±20 V); 
accuracy, when plug-in unit is matched to oscilloscope, is 
within 3%. The External Input Amplifier is DC-coupled. 

SINGLE SWEEP 

Facilitates waveform photography and operation in the Type 
561 B or 564B Oscilloscope. 




TRIGGER 



(with bright base-line in the 



MODES 

Manual, free-run, automatic 
absence of a trigger). 

COUPLING 

AC, AC LF-Reject, DC. 

SOURCES 

Internal, Line, External, External -h 10. A front-panel light 
indicates when the sweep is receiving a triggering signal — 
especially convenient when using an external trigger. 

REQUIREMENTS 

Internal Triggering — 1 minor graticule division from DC to 
20 MHz, with additional deflection required above 20 MHz. 
External Triggering— 0.5 V to 15 V (EXT) or 5 V to 150 V 
(EXT ~ 10) from DC to 20 MHz, with additional signal 
required above 20 MHz. Requirements increase below 30 Hz 
with AC-coupling. 



WEIGHTS 




Net weight 4Y 2 lb 


2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight ~ 7 lb 


SS3.2 kg 


Export-packed weight ^13 lb 


JS5.9 kg 


INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 




Two instruction manuals (070-0431-00). 




TYPE 3B4 TIME BASE UNIT 


$4i 



U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



204 



TYPE3C66 




CARRIER 
AMPLIFIER UN 



TYPE 3C66 CARRIER AMPLIFIER 



• HIGH GAIN 

• LOW NOISE 

• ESSENTIALLY DRIFT FREE 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 

The Type 3C66 Carrier Amplifier with suitable transducer 
measures mechanical quantities that can be converted to a 
change in resistance, capacitance, or inductance. This unit 
may be used in the Type 561 B, Type 564B, Type 565, or in the 
Types 567/6R1A and 568/230 Oscilloscopes without digital 
readout. Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 3C66 
can drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, and other 
indicators. 

The gap between mechanical engineering and electronic 
instrumentation is bridged with the Type 3C66 and suitable 
transducers. The total range of applications is as broad as 
the mechanical field itself and includes stress analysis, vibra- 
tion studies, and fatigue tests. Typical quantities measured 
are force, displacement, acceleration, and strain. 

The Type 3C66 operates on an AC carrier principle. It uses 
an AC bridge at the input to convert transducer signals into 
an amplitude-modulated carrier signal. The carrier signal is 
amplified by a high-gain AC amplifier and then demodulated 
to obtain the CRT deflection voltages. 



BANDWIDTH 

DC to 5 kHz at 3-dB down. 

RISETIME 

Approximately 70 /j.s. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

10 microstrain/div (micro-inches per inch/div) to 10,000 micro- 
strain/div when the Type 3C66 is used with a single strain 
gage having a gage factor of approximately 2. Uncalibrafed 
continuous control from 10 microstrain/div to 25,000 micro- 
strain/div. Attenuator accuracy, when set accurately in any 
one step, is within 2% on all other steps. 

AMPLIFIER INPUT 

Input is to an AC bridge with 25-kHz excitation voltage. 
One or more of the four bridge arms can have transducers 
attached to them. Total bridge voltage is approximately 5 V 
RMS, regulated. 

NOISE 

Typically equivalent to an input of 2.0 microstrain (peak to 
peak) at maximum calibrated sensitivity. This approximates 
an RMS noise of 0.5 microstrain. 

DRIFT 

Drift of the over-all system is primarily a function of the 
transducer stability. The Type 3C66 Amplifier system is essen- 
tially drift free. 

GAGE FACTORS 

Factors from 1 to 6 are usable without changing the steps 
of the sensitivity control. The range of factors is compensated 
for by adjusting the Gain Adjust Control. 




EQUIVALENT DC SENSITIVITY 

A comparable DC amplification system would require approxi- 
mately 10 microvolts/div sensitivity for the same amount of 
power applied to the Type 3C66. 

CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCERS 

Used in conjunction with a four-arm resistive bridge results 
in the following maximum useful sensitivities: 120-ohm bridge, 
1 pF/div; 1000-ohm bridge, 0.2 pF/div; useful sensitivities 
are slightly lower when using long cables. 

INDUCTIVE TRANSDUCERS 

Must have characteristics compatible with the 25-kHz carrier 
frequency to function properly. Linear-variable-differential 
transformers designed for nominal carrier frequencies of 2 kHz 
and higher usually operate satisfactorily without additional 
circuitry. 

RECORDER SIGNAL OUTPUT 

DC coupled with an output of about 3 V for each major divi- 
sion of CRT display. DC level is adjustable to V by an 
internal control. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Synchronizing cable, RG174/U (012-0063-00); 4-wire 15-ft 
shielded connector cable (012-0040-00); two instruction man- 
uals (070-0357-00). 

TYPE 3C66 AMPLIFIER UNIT $450 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



5 lb 


2.3 kg 


9 lb 


SS4.1 kg 


14 lb 


X6.4 kg 



205 



1 



TYPE3L5 



50 Hz-to-1 MHz 
SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT 



• CALIBRATED VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

• CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

• 10 Hz to 1 MHz IN ONE DISPLAY 

• TIME-BASED OR FREQUENCY-BASED DISPLAYS 

• REPETITIVE OR MANUAL SCAN 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Type 3L5 operates over a center-frequency range of 50 
Hz to 1 MHz, and provides accurate spectral and time-based 
displays from 10 Hz to 1 MHz. Calibrated volts/div and Hz/ 
div controls make the Type 3L5 as easy to use as the Type 
561 B or 564B Oscilloscope in which it operates. The Type 3L5 
can be used with a Type 2B67, 3B3, 3B4, or 3B5 Time Base Unit.* 
Used with Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 3L5 can drive re- 
cording equipment, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes or other indicators. 

Resolution bandwidth extends from 10 Hz to 500 Hz. High- 
resolution spectral displays can be viewed in their entirety 
(even at the very slow sweep rates required for maximum 
resolution) with the Type 564B Storage Oscilloscope. Stored 
displays can also be compared with subsequent displays, and 
can be easily photographed for permanent record. 

Applications include vibration studies, waveform analysis, 
and noise measurements. 

IMPORTANT: Time Base Units with serial numbers under those 
listed require a simple modification to provide a sweep signal 
to the Analyzer. Type 2B67: 15180, Type 3B3: 4270, Type 3B4: 
740. Modification Kit part number 040-0413-00. 

SPECTRAL DISPLAYS 
CENTER FREQUENCY RANGE 

50 Hz to 990 kHz, selectable in 10-Hz, 100-Hz, 1-kHz and 
10-kHz steps. Continuously variable to at least 1 MHz. 



CENTER 
FREQUENCY 


ACCURACY 


50 Hz to 990 Hz 


±(5% + 50 Hz + 50 Hz/°C change) 


1000 Hz to 9900 Hz 


±(5% + 100Hz+ 100 Hz/ °C change) 


10 kHz to 99 kHz 


±(5% + 3 kHz + 200Hz/°C change) 


100 kHz to 990 kHz 


±(5% + 10 kHz + 200 Hz/ °C change) 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

10/xV/cm to 2V/cm, calibrated in RMS volts/cm (1-2-5 se- 
quence). Accurate within 3% from 1 mV/cm to 2 V/cm, 
within 6% from lO^V/cm to 500 /xV/cm (-f-100 pulled), for 
linear displays at maximum resolution. The uncalibrated vari- 
able control is continuous between steps (~3:1). 
CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

10 Hz/cm to 100 kHz/cm in 9 steps. Accuracy at center fre- 
quencies of: 

a) 50 Hz to 9900 Hz - <±10% (20°C to 30°C) 

- <±20% (0°C to 50 °C) 

b) 10 kHz to 990 kHz - <±15% (0°C to 50°C) 
Linearity is within 3%. 

COUPLED RESOLUTION 

<10Hz to >500Hz (20°C to 30°C) cross-coupled with the 
dispersion control but separately switchable. 

DISPLAY FLATNESS 

Amplitude variations are within 0.5 dB from 10 Hz to 1 MHz 
at most deflection factors; except within +0.5 dB, — 3dB 
at 1 mV/cm and 2 mV/cm (or lOtiV/cm and 20/xV/cm with 
-=-100 pulled). 

206 




NOISE 

<5/xV RMS. 
DYNAMIC RANGE 

>60dB in LOG (uncalibrated) mode. Maximum input signal 
is 8 div. 

INTERMODULATION DISTORTION AND SPURIOUS 
SIGNALS 

>50dB below the 8-cm signal level. 
RECORDER OUTPUT 

5 to 15mV for 8 div display, 600-fi source resistance, DC 
coupled. 

LOCAL OSCILLATOR OUTPUT 

Must sweep >lMHz from =:3MHz to s2MHz ; >1 V 
peak to peak. 
SWEEP MODES 

Manual and internal. Accuracy of frequency measurements 
can be increased using manual scan and monitoring the local 
oscillator output with a frequency counter. Type 561 B and 
564B Oscilloscopes with time base unit provide an internally- 
coupled sweep to the Analyzer. 

TIME-BASED DISPLAYS 
BANDWIDTH 

10 Hz to 1 MHz at most deflection factors; 10 Hz to 700 kHz 
at 0.1 V/div and 0.2V/div (or 1 mV/div and 2 mV/div with 
-=-100 switch pulled). 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
1 mV/div to 100 V/div in calibrated P to P steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3% (within 6% from 5 V/div to 
100 V/div). Uncalibrated control provides continuous varia- 
tion between steps, reduces gain by a factor of approx 3. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. 



7 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


5 3 A lb 


2.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


SS 8 lb 


^3.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


5S12 lb 


S35.5 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

IX probe (010-0193-00); banana-to-banana cable (012-0031- 
00); BNC-to-banana cable (012-0091-00); plug (134-0052-00); 
plug protector (134-0076-00); two instruction manuals (070- 
0630-00). 

TYPE 3L5 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $11 25 



type 3 1_ 5 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The standard IX probe supplied with the analyzer satisfies 
most measurement requirements. Optional probes may be better 
suited for particular applications. See catalog accessory pages 
for additional information on these and other items. 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0150-00 $26.00 

P6012 10X Probe Package, order 010-0203-00 $32.00 

600-12 Termination (BNC), order 011-0092-00 $15.00 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



SWEPT FREQUENCY CONVERTER 




• SLAVED SPECTRUM ANALYZER-SWEPT 
FREQUENCY DISPLAYS 

• SO-Hz to 1-MHz CENTER FREQUENCY 

• 1-MHz DISPERSION CAPABILITY 

• OUTPUT CONSTANT WITHIN 0.5 dB 



The Swept Frequency Converter is designed as an accessory 
unit to the Type 3L5 and Type 1L5 Low Frequency Spectrum 
Analyzer Plug-In Units. It accepts the local oscillator output from 
the analyzer (approx 2 MHz to 3 MHz) and converts it to a 
signal source slaved to the center frequency and dispersion set- 
ting of the analyzer. 

The result is a signal source with center frequency range of 
50 Hz to 1 MHz, single frequency (analyzer in MANUAL SWEEP 
mode) or swept frequency with dispersion capability of 1 MHz 
max to 100 Hz min. It provides for variable amplitude control 
and regulation for constant output within 0.5 dB. Sweep rate 
is controlled by the horizontal TIME BASE which sweeps the 
local oscillator of the analyzer and, thereby, the converter. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

OUTPUT FREQUENCY — 50 Hz to 1 MHz, selectable within the 
center frequency range of the Spectrum Analyzer. 

OUTPUT VOLTAGE — 4 V P-P to 8 V P-P max behind 60012. 

OUTPUT FREQUENCY FLATNESS — within 0.5 dB into 600 0. 



OSCILLATOR INPUT VOLTAGE (from Spectrum Analyzer) 
0.8 V P-P to 2 V P-P. 

OUTPUT REGULATION 

FAST — effective in preserving amplitude flatness when low- 
est frequency component is not less than 10 kHz and sweep 
rate is lOms/div or faster. 

SLOW — used when frequency is less than 10 kHz and for 
sweep rates slower than 10 ms/div. 

OUTPUT AMPLITUDE RECOVERY (output regulator FAST to 
SLOW) 
10 s or less to recover to same amplitude as FAST. 

OUTPUT RESISTANCE — 600 O within 15%. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS — 90 VAC to 272 VAC, 50 Hz to 400 
Hz. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
600-n termination (011-0092-00); two BNC cables (012-0075- 
00); 3- to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); BNC-to-dual banana 
adapter (013-0094-00); two instruction manuals (070-0762-00). 

SWEPT FREQUENCY CONVERTER, order 01 5-01 07-00 . . $300 

600 Q STEP ATTENUATOR 



5'/ 2 in 


14.0 cm 


5 13 /,6 in 


14.7 cm 


5% in 


14.5 cm 


3Vj lb 


1.6 kg 


7'/ s lb 


« 3.4 kg 


12 lb 


« 5.5 kg 




The 600-fi Step Attenuator is a to 51 dB switch attenuator 
for use with the Type 1 L5. The input resistance is 600 Q 
(within 2%). The attenuation error is 0.05dB/dB of indicated 
attenuation. Power rating is '/e W max. Bandwidth is DC 
to 1 MHz. 
600-O Step Attenuator (order 01 1-0093-00) $75 



207 



i 



TYPE3L10 

1-to-36 MHz SPECTRUM 
ANALYZER UNIT 



• CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

• COUPLED RESOLUTION 

• CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED SWEPT OSCILLATOR 

• IMAGE REJECTION 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 

• STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAYS 



This l-to-36MHz Analyzer permits low-cost spectrum analysis 
with the compact Type 561B Oscilloscope, and stored or non- 
stored displays with the equally-compact Type 564B Oscillo- 
scope. The Type 3L10 can be used with a Type 2B67, 3B3, 3B4 
or 3B5 Time-Base Unit.* 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION from lOHz/div to 2 kHz/div makes 
frequency measurement as easy and accurate as time measure- 
ment. Frequency differences can be read directly from the 
CRT. The SEARCH MODE permits rapid location of signals 
for analysis. 

COUPLED RESOLUTION from 10 Hz to 1 kHz greatly simpli- 
fies operation, providing narrow resolution bandwidth at nar- 
row dispersion and wide resolution bandwidth at wide disper- 
sion. Dispersion and resolution controls can be uncoupled 
and operated separately if desired, for optimized viewing 
of a particular signal. 

IF stability is achieved through use of CRYSTAL-CONTROL- 
LED OSCILLATORS. Even the swept local oscillator is controlled 
through a crystal discriminator. An external front-end oscillator 
can be connected through a front-panel input to provide still 
greater stability to spectral displays within or outside the 
normal l-to-36MHz range of the Type 3L10. 

IMAGE REJECTION is achieved through use of a 60-MHz 
first IF amplifier, which places images at more than twice the 
upper tuning frequency of the Type 3L10. 

Analyzer familiarity is soon achieved, since operation is 
similar to that of the oscilloscope — with dispersion calibrated 
in kHz/div. Dispersion accuracy is quickly verified with crystal- 
controlled frequency markers available at the push of a button. 
This feature is especially convenient where the Analyzer is 
used with more than one oscilloscope. 



*IMPORTANT: Time-Base Units with serial numbers under those listed require 
a simple modification to provide a sweep signal to the Analyzer. Type 2B67: 
15180, Type 3B3: 4270, Type 3B4: 740. Modification Kit part number 040- 
0413 00. 




FREQUENCY RANGE 
1 to 36 MHz. 

MINIMUM CW SENSITIVITY [5043 INPUT) 

— lOOdBm, measured at 2 kHz/div dispersion and 1 kHz 
(coupled) resolution. 

DIAL ACCURACY 

±(100 kHz + 1% of dial reading). 

CALIBRATED DISPERSION 

lOHz/div to 2 kHz/div, 8 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy 
within ±3% when calibrated with internal calibrator. Dis- 
persion linearity within ±5%. Search position (uncalibrated) 

— minimum 20 kHz + 1 kHz/MHz of indicated frequency 
full scale (lOdiv). 

DISPERSION CALIBRATOR 

10.7-MHz carrier, 4-kHz crystal-controlled side-bands with 
±0.1% accuracy. 
COUPLED RESOLUTION 

10 Hz to 1 kHz, coupled with calibrated dispersion positions, 
and separately switchable. Search position — approximately 
10 kHz. 

DISPLAY FLATNESS 

Amplitude variation is within 2 dB over dispersions of 20 kHz 
or less. 
MAXIMUM INCIDENTAL FM 
IF within 5 Hz. 
LO within 25 Hz + 1 -Hz/MHz dial frequency. 

FREQUENCY STABILITY 

IF within 2 p/m per °F change, 1 p/m per 1-V line change. 
LO within 150 p/m per °F change, 10 p/m per 1-V line 
change. 



208 



type 3 LI 



INTERMODULATION 

25 dB below full-screen deflection in the log mode for input 
levels up to — 20dBm. 

INPUT IMPEDANCE 
Approx 50 ft and approx 600 ft. 

MAXIMUM INPUT POWER 

+24dBm at full RF attenuation, — 20dBm without RF atten- 
uation. 

RF ATTENUATOR 

51 dB ±0.1 dB/dB in 1-dB steps. 

y 2 -watt maximum power-handling capability. 

IF GAIN CONTROL 

>60-dB range. 

VERTICAL DISPLAY (8 DIVISIONS) 
Log — 50-dB dynamic range. 
Linear — 20-dB dynamic range. 

Video— 100 mV/div (variable) DC to 50 kHz, approx 50-ft 
input resistance. 

RECORDER OUTPUT 

DC-coupled, approx 600-ft source 

display in Linear mode, output linear with voltage. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 6 1 /, lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~10 lb 

Export-packed weight ~17 lb 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Tini-plug (134-0052-00); two instruction manuals (070-0521-00). 

TYPE 3L10 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1275 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 




resistance, 15-mV/div 



2.8 kg 
n4.5 kg 
Z7.7 kg 



STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAY 
with Type 564B Oscilloscope 

Using the single-shot capabilities of the Type 2B67, and the storage 
capabilities of the Type 564B, we are able to measure the drift of a 60-MHz 
crystal oscillator, as supplied to the IF of the Type 3L10. 

Temperature variation shows as a drift of approx 4 Hz between sweeps. 
Dispersion is lOHz/div. 



209 



TYPE 3S1 

350-ps DUAL-TRACE 
SAMPLING UNIT 



• DC-fo-7 GHz BANDWIDTH 

• INTERNAL TRIGGERING AND DELAY LINES 

• 2 mV/DIV-to-200 mV/DIV DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• RANDOM NOISE LESS THAN 2 mV (UNSMOOTHED) 

The Type 3S1 Plug-In Amplifier is a dual-trace sampling unit 
designed for use in the Type 561 B, 564B, 567 or Type 568 Oscil- 
loscope. The unit can be used with sampling sweep units, or with 
real-time time base units allowing sweep rates from 20 ps/div 
to 5 s/div. 

The Type 3S1 features fast-rise, low-noise performance coupled 
with excellent transient response. The unit has two identical 
channels, each with internal trigger takeoff and a signal delay 
line. It can be operated in any of five modes for a variety of 
single, dual-trace, or X-Y displays. A DC-Offset provision allows 
the display of signals with DC voltages up to ±1 volt. Power 
is provided at the front panel for use with probes and other 
accessories. 

CHARACTERISTICS 
RISETIME 

Less than or equal to 350 ps. 

BANDWIDTH 

Equivalent to DC to 1 GHz at 3-dB down. 
TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

±2% or less aberrations in the first 5 ns following the step 
transition, ±1% or less after 5 ns (as observed with a Tek- 
tronix Type 281 TDR Pulser). 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

2mV/div to 200mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 

Each step accurate within 3%. Variable between steps, ex- 
tending to 0.8 mV/div, uncalibrated. 
RANDOM NOISE 

Equivalent to an input signal of 2 mV or less unsmoothed, or 

1 mV smoothed (tangentially measured). 
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

Nominally 50 ohms. Safe overload is ±5 V. GR 874 input 

connectors. 

DC OFFSET RANGE 

At least +1 V to —IV. Allows signals between +1 V and 
—IV limits to be displayed at 2mV/div. Signals between 
+2V and — 2 V limits may be displayed at 200mV/div. 
Monitor jacks provide 10X actual DC offset within 2% through 
10 kO. 

TRIGGERING 

Separate internal delay lines and trigger pickoffs permit trig- 
gering on either input signal. Trigger pickoffs deliver to the 
timing unit approximately 10% of the input signal amplitude. 
DISPLAY MODES 
A only, B only, Dual-Trace, Alegebraic Addition of A and B 
signals, and X-Y display of A-vertically and B-horizontally 
(for observation of hysteresis loops, phase shift and similar 
displays). Independent controls for each channel permit posi- 
tioning and inverting displays as desired. Time coincidence 
between channels is within 30 ps. 

270 




VERTICAL OUTPUT 

200 mV for each division of displayed signal through 10 kQ. 
Zero volt level corresponds to center of screen. 

PROBE POWER 

Available at front-panel connectors for accessories such as 
P6032 Cathode-Follower Probes, Type 281 TDR Pulser, and 
Type 282 Adapters for high-impedance probes. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 7 3 / 4 lb 3.5 kg 

Domestic shipping weight s;ll lb ^5 kg 

Export-packed weight ^15 lb s:6.8 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two 5-ns 50-n RG58/AU cables (017-0512-00); two 10X 50-Q 
GR attenuators (017-0078-00); two instruction manuals (070- 
0632-00). 

TYPE 3S1 DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT $1195 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Type 281 TDR Pulser, order 015-0060-00 $95.00 

Type 282 Probe Adapter, order 01 5-0074-00 95.00 

P6040/CT-1 Current Probe, order 015-0041-00 35.00 

CT-3 Signal Pickoff, order 017-0061-00 35.00 

VP-1 Voltage pickoff "T", order 017-0073-01 25.00 

P6034 10X Passive Probe, order 010-0110-00 40.00 

P6035 100X Passive Probe, order 010-0111-00 40.00 

Power Divider GR 874-TPD, order 017-0082-00 70.00 

Coupling Capacitor, GR 874-K, order 017-0028-00 11.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



• PLUG-IN SAMPLING HEADS 

• 2 mV/DIV-to-200 mV/DIV 
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• VARIABLE INTER-CHANNEL DELAY 

• NEW PERFORMANCE WITH RANDOM SAMPLING 

The Type 3S2 Dual-Trace Sampling Unit is designed for use in 
the Type 561 B, 564B, 567 or 568 Oscilloscope. The unit can be 
used with sampling sweep units, including the Type 3T2 and 
3T5 Sampling Sweeps, or with real-time time base units to allow 
sweep rates to 5s/div. 

The Type 3S2 accepts two Sampling Heads that can be in- 
serted directly or located remotely with an optional extender. 
Sampling Heads feature a choice of measurement capabilities 
and may be mixed or matched to meet specific measurement 
needs. A front panel control allows adjustment of the inter- 
channel time relationship to compensate for signal cables or 
other external delays. 

Five display modes provide for a variety of single-trace, 
dual-trace or X-Y displays. The 3S2 can also be operated with 
only one head, for applications not presently requiring dual- 
trace displays. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

SAMPLING HEADS 

May be plugged into the Type 3S2 or located remotely on 
the optional 3-ft or 6-ft Sampling-Head extenders. 



SAMPLING 
HEAD 


RISETIME 


INPUT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


RANDOM 
NOISE 


PRICE 


Type S-l 


350 ps 


50 a GR874 


2 mV/div 


2mV 


$275 


Type S-2 


50 ps 


50 a GR874 


2 mV/div 


6mV 


$325 


Type S-3 


350 ps 


2.3 pF, 100 kO. 


2 mV/div 


3mV 


$395 


Type S-4 


25 ps 


50 fi, 3 mm 


2 mV/div 


5mV 


$795 


Type S-50 


25-ps Pulse Generator Head 


$475 


Type S-51 


l-to-18GHz Trigger Countdown Head 


$450 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

2mV/div to 200mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Each step accurate within 3%. Variable between steps, 
extending to approximately 0.8 mV/cm, uncalibrated. 

DC OFFSET RANGE 

+ 1 V to —1 V. Allows signals between 1-V and — 1-V limits 
to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals between +2-V and 
— 2-V limits can be displayed at 200 mV/div. Monitor jacks 
provide 10X actual DC offset within 2% through 10 kQ. 

TRIGGERING 

Trigger pickoff within most Sampling Heads permits triggering 
on either input signal. 50-Q Trigger Out connector at the front 
panel delivers pulse signals with approximately IX gain and 
2-ns risetime to the 50-fi External Trigger Input of the sweep 
unit. 

B-DELAY RANGE 

Channel B display can be continuously positioned in time 
from +5 ns to — 5 ns with respect to Channel A. Accom- 
modates 3-feet difference in signal or sampling-head cables. 




DISPLAY MODES 
A only, B only, Dual Trace, Algebraic Addition of A and B 
signals, and X-Y display of A-vertically and B-horizontally, 
(for observation of hysteresis loops, phase shift, and similar 
displays). Independent controls for each channel permit posi- 
tioning and inverting displays as desired. 

VERTICAL OUTPUT 

200 mV for each division of displayed signal through lOkQ. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 5'/ 2 lb 2.5 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 9 lb ~4.1 kg 

Export-packed weight ~12 lb ~5.5 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

10-inch RG58 trigger cable with BNC/BSM connectors (012- 
0128-00); 18-inch RG58 trigger cable with BNC/BSM connec- 
tors (012-0127-00); two instruction manuals (070-0759-00). 

TYPE 3S2 DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT, without sampling 
heads $850 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

3-ft Sampling-Head extender, order 012-0124-00 $58 

6-ft Sampling-Head extender, order 012-0125-00 $60 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



211 



TYPE S-1 

350-ps SAMPLING HEAD 




• DC-TO-I GHz BANDWIDTH 

• RANDOM NOISE LESS THAN 2 mV (unsmoothed) 

The Type S-1 Sampling Head is a low-noise, 350-ps risetime 
unif with a 50-Q input impedance. It is designed for use with 
the Type 3S2, 3S5 and 3S6 Dual-Trace Sampling Units, and can 
be plugged in or attached by a cable for remote use. A trig- 
ger pickoff within the Type S-1 provides a trigger signal output 
from the plug-in unit. When used with the Type 3T2 Random 
Sampling Sweep Unit, the triggering event may be displayed 
on the screen without the use of delay lines or a pretrigger. 

RISETIME 

Less than or equal to 350 ps. 

BANDWIDTH 

Equivalent to DC to 1 GHz at 3-dB down. 

TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

Aberrations as observed with the Type 284 Pulse Generator 
are +0.5%, —3% or less, total of 3.5% or less P-P, first 
5 ns following the step transition; +0.5%, —0.5% or less, 
total of 1% or less P-P after 5 ns. 

RANDOM NOISE 
Equivalent to an input signal of 2 mV or less, unsmoothed; 
1 mV, smoothed (tangentially measured). 

SIGNAL RANGE 
Variable DC offset allows signals between +1 V and —1 V 
limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals between +2 V 
and —2 V limits may be displayed at 200 mV/div. For best 
dot-transient response with random-sampling sweep unit, 
signal amplitude should be less than 500 mV P-P. 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
Nominally 50 CI. Safe overload is 
connectors. 

WEIGHTS 
Net weight 
Domestic shipping weight ~2 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

5-ns, 50-n RG58/AU cable (017-0512-00); 10X, 50-O, GR at- 
tenuator (017-0078-00); instruction manual (070-0763-00). 

TYPE S-1 SAMPLING HEAD $275 



:5 V. GR 874 input 



Va 



0.34 kg 
;0.9 kg 



TYPE S-2 

50-ps SAMPLING HEAD 




• DC-TO-7 GHz BANDWIDTH 

• RANDOM NOISE LESS THAN 6 mV (unsmoothed) 

The Type S-2 Sampling Head is a 50-ps risetime unit with a 
50-Q input impedance. It is designed for use with the Type 3S2, 
3S5 and 3S6 Dual-Trace Sampling Units, and can be plugged 
in or attached by a cable for remote use. A trigger pickoff 
within the T ype S-2 provides a trigger signal output from the 
plug-in unit. When used with the Type 3T2 Random Sampling 
Sweep Unit, the triggering event may be displayed on the 
screen without the use of delay lines or a pretrigger. 

RISETIME 

Less than or equal to 50 ps. 
BANDWIDTH 

Equivalent to DC to 7 GHz at 3-dB down. 
TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

Aberrations as observed with the Type 284 Pulse Generator 
are +5%, —5% or less, total of 10% or less P-P, first 2.5 
ns following a step transition; +2%, —2% or less, total of 
4% or less P-P after 2.5 ns. 

RANDOM NOISE 

Equivalent to an input signal of 6 mV or less, unsmoothed; 
3 mV, smoothed (tangentially measured). 

SIGNAL RANGE 
Variable DC offset allows signals between +1 V and —1 V 
limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Signals between +2 V 
and —2 V limits may be displayed at 200 mV/div. For best 
dot-transient response with random-sampling sweep unit, 
signal amplitude should be less than 200 mV P-P. 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
Nominally 50 Q. Safe overload is : 
connectors. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 3 , 

Domestic shipping weight ~2 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
5-ns, 50-n RG213 cable (017-0502-00); 10X, 50-fi, GR attenua- 
tor (017-0078-00); instruction manual (070-0764-00). 

TYPE S-2 SAMPLING HEAD $325 



:5 V. GR 874 input 



lb 
lb 



0.34 kg 
;0.9 kg 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 



P6040/CT-1 Current Probe, order 015-0041-00 $35.00 

CT-3 Signal Pickoff, order 017-0061-00 35.00 

VP-1 Voltage Pickoff "T", order 017-0073-01 25.00 

P6034 10X Passive Probe, order 010-01 10-00 40.00 

212 



P6035 100X Passive Probe, order 010-0111-00 $40.00 

Power Divider GR 874-TPD, order 017-0082-00 70.00 

Coupling Capacitor, GR 874-K, order 017-0028-00 11.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



NEW 



TYPE S-3 
350-ps SAMPLING HEAD 




• COMPACT PROBES 

• 100 kQ, 2.3-pF INPUT RC 

• DC-fo-I GHz BANDWIDTH 

• DISPLAYED NOISE LESS THAN 3 mV 
(unsmoothed) 

The Type S-3 Sampling Head is a low-noise, 350-ps risetime, 
sampling-probe unit with a 100-kfi, 2.3-pF input impedance. 
A switch on the Sampling Head selects a DC offset of XI or 
X2 while maintaining a 2-mV/div deflection factor. 

The Type S-3 Sampling Head is designed for use with the 
Type 3S2, 3S5 and 3S6 Dual-Trace Sampling Units and can 
be plugged in or attached by an optional Sampling-Head ex- 
tender for remote use. When used with the Type 3T2 Random 
Sampling Sweep Unit, the triggering event may be displayed 
on the screen without the use of delay lines or a pretrigger. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

RISETIME 

Probe only, 350 ps or less. 

With 10X attenuator, 400 ps or less. 

With 100X attenuator, 500 ps or less. 

BANDWIDTH 

Probe only is equivalent to DC-to-1 GHz at 3-dB down. 

TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

(As observed with Type 284 Pulse Generator) 
Probe only: aberrations in the first 2 ns following a step 
are +8%, —2% or less, total of 10% or less P-P; +1%, 
—1 % or less, total of 2% or less P-P after 2 ns. 

With 10X attenuator: aberrations in first 5 ns following a 
step transition are +2%, —5% or less, total of 7% or less 
P-P; +1%, —1% or less, total of 2% or less P-P after 5 ns. 

With 100X attenuator: aberrations in the first 5 ns following 
a step transition are +5%, —8% or less, total of 13% or 
less P-P; +2%, —5% or less, total of 7% or less P-P from 
5 ns to 30 ns ; +1%, —1% or less, total of 2% or less P-P 
after 30 ns. 



DISPLAYED NOISE 

Probe only, 3 mV or less, measured tangentially, referred to 
the probe tip. 

SIGNAL RANGE 
Variable DC offset allows signals between +1 V and —1 V, 
XI range; or +2 V and — 2 V, X2 range to be displayed 
at 2 mV/div. For best dot-transient response with random- 
sampling sweep unit, signal amplitude should be less than 
1 V P-P. The signal range may be increased XI or XI 00 
with the use of the probe attenuators. 

PROBE AND ATTENUATOR ACCURACY 

Accuracy is within 1% for probe only, within 2.25% with 10X 
attenuator, within 3% with 100X attenuator, in addition 
to the accuracy of the vertical plug-in unit. 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
Probe only is 100 kQ paralleled by 2.3 pF. 
With 10X attenuator, 1 Mn paralleled by 2 pF. 
With 100X attenuator, 1 Mn paralleled by 1.75 pF. 
With coupling capacitor 4.5 pF; probe only and coupling 
capacitor time constant is approx 100 /xs. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 3 lb 1.4 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 5 lb Si2.3 kg 

Export-packed weight ~10 lb ~4.5 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

10X attenuator (010-0364-00), 100X attenuator (010-0365-00), 
coupling capacitor (011-0098-00), probe tip (206-0114-00), 
bayonet-ground adapter (013-0085-00), two test-point jacks 
(131-0258-00), 5'/ 2 -inch ground lead (175-1017-00); 12y 2 -inch 
ground lead (175-1018-00); 3-inch cable assembly (175-0249-00); 
three probe clips (344-0046-00); end cap (200-0834-00); two 
end caps (200-0835-00); probe holder (352-0090-00); retractable 
hook tip (013-0097-00); 50-12 voltage pickoff (017-0077-01), 
carrying case (016-0121-00), manual (070-0765-00). 

TYPE S-3 SAMPLING HEAD $395 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Probe tip-to-BNC adapter, order 013-0084-00 $4.75 

Probe tip-to-GR adapter, order 017-0076-00 $7.50 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

213 



TYPE S-4 

25-ps SAMPLING HEAD 



NEW 





1 — 


TYPE S-4 
SAMPLING HEAD 

' v +5VMAX 






k 


Mfk 





• 25-ps SAMPLING HEAD 

• DC-to-14 GHz BANDWIDTH 

• RANDOM NOISE LESS THAN 5 mV 

(unsmoothed) 

The Type S-4 Sampling Head is a 25-ps risetime unit with 
a 50-fi input impedance. It is designed for use with the Type 
3S2, 3S5 and 3S6 Dual-Trace Sampling Units. The Type S-4 
can be plugged into the sampling unit or attached by a Sam- 
pling-Head extender for remote use. A trigger pickoff within 
the Type S-4 provides a trigger signal output from the plug-in 
unit. When used with the Type 3T2 Random Sampling Sweep 
Unit, the triggering event may be displayed on screen without 
the use of delay lines or a pretrigger. 

CHARACTERISTICS 
RISETIME 

Less than or equal to 25 ps. 
BANDWIDTH 

Equivalent to DC-to-14 GHz at 3-dB down. 

TRANSIENT RESPONSE 

Aberrations in the first 400 ps following a step are: — 10%, 
+ 10% or less, total of 20% or less P-P as observed with Type 
S-50; from 400 ps to 25 ns following a step, 0%, +10% or 
less, total of 10% or less P-P, as observed with Type 284; after 
25 ns, —2%, +2% or less, total of 4% or less P-P as observed 
with Type 284. 

RANDOM NOISE 
Equivalent to an input signal of 5 mV or less, unsmoothed; 
2.5 mV, smoothed (tangentially measured). 

SIGNAL RANGE 
Variable DC offset allows signals between +1 V and —1 V 
limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. For best dot-transient 
response with random-sampling sweep unit, signal amplitude 
should be less than 500 mV P-P. 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
Nominally 50 fi. Safe overload ±5V. 3-mm input connector. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 3 / 4 lb 0.34 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~2 lb ~0.9 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
2-ns cable with 3-mm connectors (015-1005-00); 10X 50-Q 
3-mm attenuator (015-1003-00); GR874 to 3-mm male adapter 
(015-1007-00); 3-mm male-to-male adapter (015-1011-00); 5 / 16 - 
inch wrench (003-0247-00); instruction manual (070-0896-00). 

TYPE S-4 SAMPLING HEAD $795 



TYPE S-50 

-ps PULSE GENERATOR 



TYPE S 50 
PULSE GENERATOR 

HEAD STAWLm 




• 25-ps PULSE RISETIME 

• 400-mV PULSE AMPLITUDE 

• IOO-ns PULSE WIDTH 

The Type S-50 Pulse Generator Head is a high-speed, tunnel- 
diode step generator designed for use in the Type 3S2, 3S5 
and 3S6 Sampling Unit or in the Type 285 Power Supply Unit. 
The Type S-50 when used with the Type S-4 Sampling Head 
provides high-resolution 35-ps TDR measurements. The Type 
S-50 is also used for verification of sampling system risetimes. 
A pretrigger output allows operation with sequential sampling 
systems. 

CHARACTERISTICS 
PULSE OUTPUT 

Risetime is 25 ps or less. Amplitude into 50 Q is at least 
400 mV, positive going. Pulse duration is 100 ns, pulse repe- 
tition rate is 25 kHz. Pulse aberrations following the step are: 
—10%, +10% with a total of 20% or less P-P in the first 
400 ps ; —5%, +5% with a total of 5% or less P-P from 400 
ps to 5 ns ; —2%, +2% with a total of 4% or less P-P after 
5 ns. 

PRETRIGGER OUTPUT 

Risetime is 400 ps or less. Amplitude into 50 Q is at least 
180mV, positive going. Pretrigger pulse duration is 4 ns. 
Pretrigger occurs 75 ns (±5 ns) before the pulse output. 
Pretrigger to pulse output jitter is 15 ps or less. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Risetime is 200 ps or less. Amplitude into 50 Q is at least 
200 mV, positive going. Trigger pulse duration is 100 ns. The 
trigger output occurs in time coincidence with the pulse output. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
The necessary power is provided from the Type 3S2, 3S5, 
3S6 or Type 285 Power Supply. 

OUTPUT CONNECTORS 

Pulse output uses a 3-mm connector. Pretrigger output and 
trigger output use BSM connectors. A pretrigger output 
from the rear of the Type S-50 provides a pretrigger pulse 
for internal triggering of the sampling sweep unit. 

WEIGHTS 



% 



0.34 kg 
i0.9 kg 



Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight ~2 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

500 ps 50 a solid coax (015-1015-00); instruction manual (070- 
0897-00). 

TYPE S-50 PULSE GENERATOR HEAD $475 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



214 




TYPE SSI 

1-to-18 GHz TRIGGER 
COUNTDOWN HEAD 



NEW 





The Type S-51 Trigger Countdown Head is a free-running 
tunnel-diode oscillator designed to provide stable sampling 
displays of signals up to 1 8 GHz. The Type S-51 may be used 
with the Type 3S2, 3S5 and 3S6 Sampling Units in place of 
one of the Sampling Heads, or it may be operated separately 
with the Type 285 Power Supply. The Type S-51 has a front- 
panel sync control that synchronizes the oscillator frequency 
to a sub-harmonic of the input signal. The output from the Type 
S-51 is available at a front-panel trigger output connector 
and through a rear-panel connector for internal triggering. The 
output signal is a direct countdown of the input and permits 
triggering by a standard sampling time-base unit. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

INPUT SIGNAL 

Frequency range is I GHz to 1 8 GHz. Stable synchroniz- 
ation on signals at least lOOmV P-P, 5 V, P-P maximum. 

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
50-n 3-mm connector. Open termination paralleled by l pF. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Front panel trigger output is at least 200 mV into 50 Q, Type 
BSM connector. Internal trigger output is at least 100 mV into 
50 n, internally connected to sampling unit. Jitter is lOps or 
less, with signals from 5 GHz to 18 GHz; 15 ps or less with 
signals from 1 GHz to 5 GHz. Kickout at signal input con- 
nector is 400 mV or less, kickout occurs between successive 
samples. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
The necessary power is provided from the Type 3S2, 3S5, 
3S6 or Type 285 Power Supply. 

WEIGHT 



3 A 



lb 
lb 



0.34 kg 
r0.9 kg 



Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight ~2 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Instruction manual (070-0898-00). 
TYPE S-51 TRIGGER COUNTDOWN HEAD $450 



TYPE 285 




• ACCEPTS ONE TYPE S-50 SERIES HEAD 
TYPE S-50 PULSE GENERATOR HEAD 
TYPE S-51 TRIGGER COUNTDOWN HEAD 

The Type 285 Power Supply is designed for use with either 
the Type S-50 Pulse Generator Head or the Type S-51 Trigger 
Countdown Head. The Type 285 provides the regulated power 
supplies necessary to power one Type S-50 Series Head. It 
also provides a front panel trigger output jack. The trigger 
output jack provides the internal trigger pulse from the plug-in 
Head to the front panel of the Type 285. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 V to 136 V or 180 V to 272 V, 50 Hz to 400 Hz, 10 watts 

at 115 V and 60 Hz. Slide switch on rear panel selects high 

or low voltage operation. 
TRIGGER OUTPUT 

BSM Connector provides internal trigger output of Type S-50 

Series Heads to the front panel. 
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 
INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

3-to-2 wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction manuals 

(070-0903-00). Cable, 18 inch, TRIGGER OUTPUT (012-0127-00). 

TYPE 285 POWER SUPPLY, without Heads $150 



3% in 


5.1 cm 


5 in 


12.7 cm 


8 in 


20.3 cm 


3'/ 8 lb 


1.4 kg 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES WITH 3-mm CONNECTORS 



10X 50-n attenuator, order 015-1003-00 $65 

5X 50-n attenuator, order 015-1002-00 $70 

2X 50-n attenuator, order 015-1001-00 $60 

2-ns 50-n signal cable, order 015-1005-00 $20 

5-ns 50-n signal cable, order 015-1006-00 $22 

50-n termination, order 015-1004-00 $28 

500-ps 50-n solid coax, order 015-1015-00 $20 

50-n power divider T, order 015-1014-00 $85 



Male-to-male adapter, order 015-101 1-00 $ 8 

Female-to-female adapter, order 015-1012-00 $6 

Male-to-GR874 adapter, order 015-1007-00 $18 

Female-to-GR874 adapter, order 015-1008-00 $18 

Male-to-7-mm adapter, order 015-1010-00 $95 

Male-to-N female adapter, order 015-1009-00 $25 

Coupling capacitor, order 015-1013-00 $68 

3-mm T adapter, order 015-1016-00 $16 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



215 



TYPE3T2 



RANDOM SAMPLING 
SWEEP UNIT 

• RANDOM OR SEQUENTIAL SAMPLING 

• NO PRETRIGGER REQUIRED 

• 20 ps/DIV-to-100 fis/DIV SWEEP RANGE 

• WIDE RANGE TIME POSITION 

The Type 3T2 Random Sampling Sweep Unit provides a 
unique, state-of-the-art advancement in measurement capabili- 
ties. This unit may be used in a Type 561 B, 564B, 567, or 568 
Oscilloscope, in conjunction with a Vertical Dual-Trace Sampling 
Unit. 

Random sampling permits observation of the leading edge 
(or other portions) of signals even when used with vertical 
units that have no delay lines and without a pretrigger. Random 
sampling is especially useful with sampling units such as the 
Type 3S2 with S-l, S-2, S-3, or S-4 Sampling Heads. 

A front-panel switch (START POINT) selects either conven- 
tional, sequentially-stepped sampling or random sampling modes 
of operation. 

SWEEP TIME/DIV 

100/is/div to 200ps/div, 1-2-5 sequence extending to 20 ps/ 
div with XI DISPLAY MAGNIFIER. Accurate within 3% from 
100 /is/div to 2 ns/div, within 5% from 1 ns/div to 200 ps/div. 
TIME/DIV is a resultant of the combined settings of TIME 
POSITION RANGE, TIME MAGNIFIER, and DISPLAY MAG. 
The sweep rate is displayed (digitally) in the TIME/DIV "win- 
dow" for all combinations of these controls. 

DISPLAY MAG 

XI or XI magnification of the display. Display magnifier 
accurate within 2%, in addition to specified sweep time/div 
accuracy. 

TIME POSITION RANGE 
100 ns, 1 fts, 10 pa, 100/j.s, and 1 ms. TIME POSITION and 
FINE variable controls position start of the display through 
an interval equal to TIME POSITION RANGE setting. 

SAMPLES/DIV 

Continuously variable adjustment of samples displayed per 
horizontal division from approx 5 samples/div to an immeas- 
urable number of samples/div. Allows optimum adjustment of 
display rate and dot density. 

DISPLAY MODES 

Normal (repetitive), Single Sweep, Manual, or Ext. Horiz. For 
external input, deflection factor is adjustable from 1.5V/div 
to 15 V/div. Front-panel START button for single-sweep opera- 
tion. 

PULSE OUTPUT 

Approximately 150mV into 50 fi, negative going. Coincides 
with trigger recognition. 

TRIGGERING 

SOURCES (AC-coupled): Internal — if Sampling Unit contains a 
trigger pickoff. External, both 1-Ma (for hi-Z probes) and 
50-fi terminated inputs. 

JITTER: Depends on signal shape, repetition rate and ampli- 
tude; Less than or equal to 20 ps under optimum conditions. 

HORIZONTAL OUTPUT 
1 V for each division of displayed signal through lOkfi. 




PULSE TRIGGERING 


SOURCE 


REPETITION RATE 


AMPLITUDE* 


EXTERNAL 
1-Mfi/UHF Sync 
input 


10 Hz to 100 MHz 
600 MHz to 3 GHz 


lOmV to 250 mV 
(100 V max DC) 


EXTERNAL 
50-fi input 


10 Hz to 600 MHz 


5mV to 125 mV 

(5 V max DC) 


*Either polarity. Minimum rise rate is 150mV//ts. 


SINEWAVE TRIGGERING 


SOURCE 


FREQUENCY 


AMPLITUDE 


EXTERNAL 
1-Mfi/UHF Sync 
input 


10 kHz to 100 MHz 
500 MHz to 3 GHz 
(+ polarity) 


lOmV to 500 mV 

peak- to- peak 


100 kHz to 100 MHz 
500 MHz to 3 GHz 
(— polarity) 


EXTERNAL 
50-fi input 


100 kHz to 500 MHz 


lOmV to 250 mV 
peak-to- peak 



WEIGHTS 

Net weight 6y 2 lb 3 kg 

Domestic shipping weight Sill lb ~5 kg 

Export-packed weight ^il7 lb ~7J kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

10X 50-fi attenuator, BNC (011-0059-00); GR-to-BNC female 
adapter (017-0063-00); GR-to-BNC male adapter (017-0064-00); 
two instruction manuals (070-0631-00). 

TYPE 3T2 RANDOM SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT ... $1000 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment-, General Information page. 



216 



• TRIGGERING THROUGH 1 GHz 

• 20 ps/DIV-to- 1 fts/DIV CALIBRATED TIME BASE 

• WIDE-RANGE TIME POSITION 

• SINGLE-DISPLAY PROVISION 

• RECORDER OUTPUT 



The Type 3T77A Sampling Sweep Unit provides sub-nano- 
second capabilities when used in conjunction with a Type 3S1, 
3S2, 3S5 or 3S6 Sampling Unit in a Type 561 B, 564B, 567 or 568 
Oscilloscope. In the Type 567 (with Type 6R1A) or 568 (with 
Type 230), information can be presented in digital as well as 
analog form. 



CHARACTERISTICS 

SWEEP TIME/DIV 

10/xs/div to 200 ps/div in 15 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence, 
extending to 20 ps/div with XI TIME EXPANDER. Each step 
accurate within 3%. Variable between steps. 

TIME EXPANDER 

XI expansion of time scale while maintaining a constant 
number of dots per division. 

TIME POSITION 

Provides a sweep delay range corresponding to at least one 
screen diameter, unexpanded and at least ten screen dia- 
meters (100 div) when expanded. 

DOT DENSITY 
Either 10 or 100 dots/div. 

SWEEP MODES 

Normal (repetitive), Single Sweep, Manual, or External Hori- 
zontal. For external input, deflection factor is adjustable 
from 5V/div to 25V/div. Front panel START button for 
single-sweep operation. 

TRIGGERING 

SOURCES (AC-coupled): Internal — if Sampling Unit contains a 
trigger pickoff. External, 50-fi termination input. 

AMPLITUDE (External): Sinewaves, 10 mV to 400 mV peak-to- 
peak; Pulses, lOmV to 200 mV, either polarity. 5-V maximum 
DC input. 



™ 3T77A 

SAMPLING 
SWEEP UNIT 




REPETITION RATE: Sinewave triggering or synchronizing from 
100 kHz through 1 GHz. Pulse Triggering from 30 Hz through 
1 GHz. 

JITTER: Depends on signal shape, repetition rate and ampli- 
tude; less than or equal to 50 ps under optimum conditions. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Approximately 150mV into 50 Q, positive going, coincides 
with trigger recognition. 

SWEEP OUTPUT 

1 V for each division of displayed signal through lOkfi. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


5 3 A lb 


2.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


«ioy 4 ib 


SS4.9 kg 


Export-packed weight 


;=20 Ib 


~9kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
5-ns cable, RG58 with BNC connectors (012-0057-01); 10X 
50-n BNC attenuator (011-0059-00); GR-to-BNC female adap- 
ter (017-0063-00); GR-to-BNC male adapter (017-0064-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0546-00). 

TYPE 3T77A SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT $700 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



217 



DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS AND SYSTEMS 



• VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS 
PULSE AMPLITUDE 
SATURATION VOLTAGE 



• DYNAMIC MEASUREMENTS 

(100 measurements per second) 

• PROGRAMMABLE MEASUREMENTS 



• TIME MEASUREMENTS 

PULSE RISETIME AND FALLTIME 
PULSE WIDTH AND PERIOD 
PROPAGATION DELAY AND STORAGE TIME 

• MANY OTHER SPECIFIC MEASUREMENTS 



ON YOUR BENCH 

Type 568/230 Digital Oscilloscope System provides digital 
readout of measurements that are displayed in analog form 
on the CRT. They enable the engineer, technician or production 
worker to make dynamic switching time measurements with 
greater speed, convenience and repeatability than is possible 
by making measurements directly from the cathode-ray oscillo- 
scope display. Typical measurements include pulse voltages, 
risetime, delay time, storage time, pulse width and many other 
specific measurements. 

All of the measurement functions of the Type 568/230 can be 
externally programmed for use in high-speed automated meas- 
urement systems. The Type 568/230 can make more than 100 
dynamic measurements per second, and data output connectors 
provide measurement results in convenient BCD code. The pro- 
gramming is accomplished with the use of Tektronix Program 
Units or by programming 157 parallel program lines using nega- 
tive logic with true being ground or <2 Vand false being open 
or>6V. 

New programmable plug-in units extend the automated meas- 
urement capabilities of the Type 568/230. The Type 3T5 and 
3T6 Programmable Sampling Units have a programmable sweep 
range that extends from lOOps/div to 0.5s/div. 

The Type 3S5 and Type 3S6 Dual-Trace Programmable Units 
feature Sampling Heads and programmable vertical deflection 
factors and DC offset. 

Sampling Heads provide a choice of system measurement capa- 
bilities. Select the measurement performance you need today 
and update your performance with future Sampling Heads. 



• PROGRAMMING UNITS 



• AUTOMATED MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 




#ii ■; -. . .- 

#11 -1 Hf).ro(^_i) f 



/ 
\ 




s 



• • •• 



• -•• 



•„•■ m 



^ 



•« 3K"l 


=T?r." 




hj 




* 




§ 



Type 3S6 



Type 3T6 




or 



or 



Type 3S5 



Type 3T5 



Type S-l 
350 ps, 50 Q 



218 




Type S-2 
50 ps, 50 fi 




Type S-3 

350 ps 

lOOka, 2.3 pF ' f 





MORE 

TO 
COME 



DIGITAL INSTRUMENTS AND SYSTEMS 



IN YOUR SYSTEM 

Tektronix digital instruments are designed for use in your auto- 
mated measurement systems. Their modular construction lets 
you put together a complete measurement system designed to 
do your specific job. 




TEKTRONIX MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS 

Tektronix Measurement Systems use Tektronix Catalog products 
and add additional equipment such as programmable pulse 
generators, programmable power supplies, fixtures, equipment 
racks and other equipment. Tektronix does the systems engineer- 
ing and supplies a digital measurement system ready to do 
your measurement job. 



TYPE 241 PROGRAMMER provides up to 15 measurement pro- 
grams for the Type 568/230. Programs can be manually or 
remotely selected. The Type 241 will automatically sequence 
through up to 15 programs, stopping on out-of-limits measure- 
ments. 



M 


a 


• f'ij, 


1 ft V 


■*"' 


If H| 
«) A 






1 f. / 


* * 




I 

TYPE 240 PROGRAM CONTROL UNIT programs the Type 
568/230 with up to 1600 measurement programs, stored in a 
Disc Memory or Punched Tape Reader. Additional units may be 
programmed by adding the Type R250 Auxiliary Unit. 

\ 





TYPE R250 PROGRAM AUXILIARY UNIT adds additional pro- 
gramming capabilities to the Type 240 and provides program- 
ming and buffering for pulse generators, power supplies and 
other equipment. Customer engineering and design is required 
with the Type R250. 



TYPE S-3110 Digital Meas- 
urement System consists of the 
Type 568/230 with Type 241 
Program Unit providing up to 
15 automatic measurements. 



TYPE S-3120 Digital Meas- 
urement System consists of the 
Type 568/230 with the Type 
240 Program Control Unit, a 
Disc Memory and Punched 
Tape Reader. It includes a 
pulse generator and 2 power 
supplies. 



TYPE S-3130 Digital Meas- 
urement System consists of the 
Type 568/230/240 with the 
Type R250 Auxiliary Program 
Unit and a Disc Memory and 
Punched Tape Reader. It also 
includes a programmable pulse 
generator, 4 programmable 
power supplies and test fix- 
tures. 




219 



TYPE 



568 
RS68 







• ANALOG DISPLAYS OF ANALOG/DIGITAL 
MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 

• PROVIDES MEASUREMENT INFORMATION FOR 
TYPE 230 DIGITAL UNIT 

• ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 



Type 568 and Type R568 Readout Oscilloscopes are designed 
for use with 2- and 3-series plug-in units in both the vertical 
and horizontal deflection systems. When used together with 
the Type 230 Digital Unit, digital readout of measurements 
(in addition to the analog display on the CRT) makes the meas- 
urements faster, more convenient, and more accurate. 

Connectors on the rear provide measurement information 
for the Type 230 Digital Unit, couple trace-brightening informa- 
tion from the Type 230 to the Type 568, and provide input and 
programming information for programmable plug-in units. 

The Types 568/R568 are designed mainly for use in digital 
measurement systems, but through use of amplifier, spectrum 
analysis, and time-base plug-in units, they may be used in other 
applications that do not require digital readout. 

Through use of solid state components, the Types 568/R568 
offer reliable operation with low heat dissipation. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of 2-series and 3-series Amplifier Plug-In Units. 
See chart for plug-in units that provide digital readout when 
used with a Type 230 Digital Unit. 

HORIZONTAL 

Horizontal deflection characteristics are extremely flexible 
through use of 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier and Time-Base 
Units. See chart for plug-in units that provide digital readout 
when used with a Type 230 Digital Unit. 



CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8 x 10 div. (Each major div 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3.5 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P2. 



= 1 cm.) 



OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 5 V and 0.5 V into >100kn or 
500 mV and 50 mV into 50 O. Repetition rate is 100 kHz or 
1 kHz. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— Quick-change line-voltage taps per- I 
mit operation from 90 to 110 V, 104 to 126 V, 112 to 136 V; or 
180 to 220 V, 208 to 252 V, 224 to 272 V. Line frequency is 48 
to 66 Hz. Power consumption is 210 watts maximum. 



220 



TYPE 



568 
R568 



DIGITAL READOUT COMBINATIONS 



' Digital and analog displays are simultaneously presented on 
the Type 568 Readout Oscilloscope and Type 230 Digital Unit. 
A Digital Readout Combination consists of a Type 568, Type 
230, and any of the following combinations of amplifier and 
time-base plug-in units. Units marked with asterisk are program- 



PLUG-IN UNITS 


VERTICAL 


TYPE 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


Tr 


BANDWIDTH 


PRICE 


3S1 


2mV/div 


350 ps 


DC to 1 GHz 


$1195 


3S2 


2 mV/div 


Use with S-Series Heads 


850 


3S5* 


2 mV/div 


Use with S-Series Heads 


1550 


3S6* 


2mV/div 


Use with S-Series Heads 


1550 


S-l 


50-fi Head 


350 ps 


DC to 1 GHz 


275 


S-2 


50-O Head 


50 ps 


DC to 7 GHz 


325 


S-3 


100-kn Head 


350 ps 


DC to 1 GHz 


395 


S-4 


50-Q Head 


25 ps 


DC to 14 GHz 


795 


3A2 


lOmV/div 


700 ns 


DC to 500 kHz 


550 


TIME BASE 


TYPE 


CALIBRATED 
SWEEP RANGE 


PRICE 


3T2 


200ps/div to 100/j.s/div plus X10 magnifier 


$1000 


3T5* 


lOOps/div to 500ms/div 


1650 


3T6* 


lOOps/div to 500ms/div 


1650 


3T77A 


200 ps/div to 100/j.s/div plus XI magnifier 


700 


3B2 


2 jus/div to 1 s/div 


695 



''Programmable in addition to providing digital readout. 




mable in addition to providing digital readout. The Type 3A2 
and 3B2 should be installed in pairs. Other 2-Series and 3-Series 
Plug-In Units can be used for normal analog CRT display, but do 
not provide digital readout. 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

Front-panel selection of squarewave outputs of 100 kHz, 
crystal-controlled, with an accuracy of ±0.05% or approx 
1 kHz, RC time-constant controlled. Output voltages are 
5 V and 0.5 V into lOOkfi or greater or 500 mV and 50 mV 
into 50 O. + PRETRIGGER output provides a positive-going 
pulse that occurs ='/ 4 cycle ahead of the rising portion 
of the calibrator signal. Connectors are BNC. 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-inch rectangular CRT with 3.5-kV accelerating potential. 
A P2 phosphor is normally supplied; P7, Pll, or P31 are op- 
tional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. 

ILLUMINATED INTERNAL GRATICULE 

Edge lighted graticule is marked in 8 vertical and 10 hori- 
zontal divisions (centimeters). Centerlines are also marked 
in 2-mm increments. Scale illumination is adjustable with 
a front-panel control. 

DC-VOLTAGE SUPPLIES 

Electronically regulated to compensate for widely varying 
line conditions. Separate regulated heater supply is included. 
The Type 568 has an additional 25 watts of regulated power 
available at the rear connector for system use. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 66 Hz, 210 watts 
maximum. Rear panel selector provides rapid accommodation 
for six line-voltage ranges. 

TYPE 568 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


8 in 


20.3 cm 


Width 


WVu in 


42.7 cm 


Depth 


21% in 


55.5 cm 


Net weight 


40 lb 


18.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=52 lb 


=23.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=72 lb 


=32.7 kg 


TYPE R568 DIMENSIONS AND 


WEIGHTS 




Height 


7 in 


17.8 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Rack depth 


22 3 / 4 in 


57.8 cm 


Net weight 


41 lb 


18.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=56 lb 


=25.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 


zz76 lb 


=34.5 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); CRT protector plate (387- 
0935-00); 18-inch patch cord, BNC-to-BNC (012-0087-00); 18- 
inch patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug (012-0091-00); patch 
cord, post jack-to-BNC (012-0092-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0596-00). Type R568 also includes mounting tracks (351- 
0086-00) and mounting hardware. 

TYPE 568 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $925 

TYPE R568 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . $975 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



221 



TYPE 



PROGRAMMABLE SAMPLING UNIT 



• PROGRAMMABLE VOLT5/DIV 

• PROGRAMMABLE DC OFFSET 

• PLUG-IN SAMPLING HEADS 

• FRONT AND REAR PANEL PROGRAM 
CONNECTORS 

The Type 3S5 Programmable Sampling Unit extends the auto- 
mated measurement capabilities of the Type 567 or Type 568 
Digital Readout Oscilloscopes by allowing remote program- 
ming of the vertical plug-in measurement functions. The Type 
3S5 can also be used in the Type 561 B and 564B Oscilloscopes 
where it may be operated manually from the front panel or 
externally programmed. 

The Type 3S5 is a dual-trace programmable vertical unit 
featuring Sampling Heads that plug-in directly or are located 
remotely with the optional Sampling-Head extenders. Most 
of the measurement functions of the Type 3S5 are externally 
programmable through use of parallel multi-pin connectors on 
the front panel of the plug-in and the rear panel of the Type 568 
Oscilloscope. Programmable functions include deflection factor, 
DC offset and smoothing. 

Sampling Heads feature a choice of measurement capabilities 
and may be mixed or matched to meet specific measurement 
needs. A front-panel control allows adjustment of the interchan- 
nel time relationship to compensate for signal cables or other 
external delays. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

SAMPLING HEADS 

May be plugged into the Type 3S5 or located remotely on the 
optional 3-ft or 6-ft Sampling-Head extenders. 



SAMPLING 
HEAD 


RISETIME 


INPUT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


RANDOM 
NOISE 


PRICE 


Type S-l 


350 ps 


50 o, GR874 


2 mV/div 


2mV 


$275 


Type S-2 


50 ps 


50 n, GR874 


2 mV/div 


6mV 


$325 


Type S-3 


350 ps 


2.3 pF, lOOkfi 


2 mV/div 


3mV 


$395 


Type S-4 


25 ps 


50 Q,, 3 mm 


2 mV/div 


10 mV 


$795 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

2 mV/div to 200mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Each step accurate within 3% in normal mode, within 4% 
smoothed. Vertical outputs to the Type 230, each channel 
programmed with 3 program lines or by manual front-panel 
controls. 

DC OFFSET RANGE 
+ 1 V to —1 V. Allows signals between +1-V and — 1-V 
limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Continuously variable and 
calibrated with front-panel controls between +1 V and — 1 V, 
accurate within lOmV of same offset voltage obtained in the 
external program mode. Programmable between +995 mV 
and — 995 mV in 5-mV steps. The programmable accuracy 
is within 2% or 5 mV (whichever is greater) of the program- 
med value. Programming is accomplished with 9 program 
lines per channel in modified BCD code plus one program 
line per channel for + or — polarity. 

B-DELAY RANGE 

Channel B display can be continuously positioned in time 
from +5 ns to — 5 ns with respect to Channel A. Accom- 
modates up to 3-foot difference in signal cable or Sampling- 
Head extenders. 




PROGRAMMING 
The Type 3S5 uses negative logic with true being ground 
or <2V, and false being open or >6V. The units/div range 
is programmed with 3 lines per channel. DC offset is pro- 
grammed with 9 lines per channel in modified BCD code 
plus one line per channel for + or — polarity. One line is 
used to program smoothed or normal operation. A total 
of 27 program lines plus ground is required to externally 
program all the measurement functions of the Type 3S5. 

DISPLAY MODES 
A only, B only, dual trace, algebraic addition of A and B 
signals. In the external program mode, dual-trace operation 
is automatically provided. Independent controls for each 
channel permit positioning and inverting displays as desired. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 6'/ 4 lb 2.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~10 lb ~4.5 kg 

Export-packed weight ~14 lb ~6.3 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Connector (131-0422-00); connector cover (200-0660-00); cir- 
cuit board connector (388-0805-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0788-00). 

TYPE 3S5 PROGRAMMABLE SAMPLING UNIT, without Sam- 
pling Heads $1 550 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

3-ft Sampling-Head extender, order 012-0124-00 $58 ^fe 

6-ft Sampling-Head extender, order 012-0125-00 $60 ' 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



222 



• PROGRAMMABLE VOLTS/DIV 

• PROGRAMMABLE DC OFFSET 

• REMOTE SAMPLING HEADS 

• ALL CONNECTIONS ON REAR PANEL 



The Type 3S6 Programmable Sampling Unit is designed for 
use only in the Type 568 and Type R568 Digital Readout Os- 
cilloscopes. The measurement functions of the Type 3S6 may 
be operated manually from the front panel or they may be con- 
trolled externally from connectors mounted on the rear panel 
of the Type 568 Oscilloscope. The Type 3S6 is designed pri- 
marily for use in automated measurement systems that require 
minimum front panel connections and remote programming of 
all vertical measurement functions. The programmable func- 
tions of the Type 3S6 are deflection factor, DC offset, and 
smoothing. Sampling Heads and program cables are attached 
to rear panel connectors on the Type 568 Oscilloscope. 

Sampling Heads feature a choice of measurement capabili- 
ties and may be mixed or matched to meet specific measure- 
ment needs. A front-panel control allows adjustment of the 
interchannel time relationship to compensate for signal cables 
or other external delays. 



CHARACTERISTICS 

SAMPLING HEADS 

Located remotely on included 6-ft Sampling-Head extender 
that connects on the rear of the Type 568 Oscilloscope. 
Type 568 Oscilloscopes below serial number B11O00O re- 
quire a modification. Please consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative or Distributor. 



SAMPLING 
HEAD 


RISETIME 


INPUT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


RANDOM 
NOISE 


PRICE 


Type S-l 


350 ps 


50 n, GR874 


2 mV/div 


2mV 


$275 


Type S-2 


50 ps 


50 Q, GR874 


2 mV/div 


6 mV 


$325 


Type S-3 


350 ps 


2.3 pF, 100 kO 


2 mV/div 


3mV 


$395 


Type S-4 


25 ps 


50 fi, 3 mm 


2 mV/div 


10 mV 


$795 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

2 mV/div to 200 mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
Each step accurate within 3% in normal mode, within 4% 
smoothed. Vertical outputs to the Type 230, each channel 
programmed with 3 program lines or by manual front-panel 
controls. 

DC OFFSET RANGE 

+ 1 V to —1 V. Allows signals between +1 V and —1 V 
limits to be displayed at 2 mV/div. Continuously variable 
and calibrated with front-panel controls between +1 V and 
— IV, accurate within 10 mV of same offset voltage ob- 
tained in the external program mode. Programmable be- 
tween +995 mV and —995 mV in 5-mV steps. The pro- 
grammable accuracy is within 2% or 5 mV (whichever is 
greater) of the programmed value. Programming is accom- 
plished with 9 program lines per channel in modified BCD 
code, plus one program line per channel for -f or — polar- 
ity. 




type 3S6 

PROGRAMMABLE 
SAMPLING UNIT 



NEW 



TYPE 3S6 PROGRAMMABLE SAMPLING UNIT 

CHANNELA CHANNELS 

DC OFFKT ±1V f ■?:•;**' 1 DC OFFSET > IV 




B-DELAY RANGE 

Channel B display can be continuously positioned in time 
from +5 ns to —5 ns with respect to Channel A. Accommo- 
dates up to 3-foot difference in signal cables. 

PROGRAMMING 
The Type 3S6 uses negative logic with true being ground 
or <2V and false being open or >6V. The units/div 
range is programmed with 3 lines per channel. DC offset 
is programmed with 9 lines per channel in modified BCD 
code plus one line per channel for + or — polarity. One 
line is used to program smoothed or normal operation. A 
total of 27 program lines plus ground is required to external- 
ly program all the measurement functions of the Type 3S6. 

DISPLAY MODES 
A only, B only, dual trace, and algebraic addition of A 
and B signals. In the external program mode, dual-trace 
operation is automatically provided. Independent controls 
for each channel permit positioning and inverting displays 
as desired. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

6-ft Sampling-Head extender (012-0130-00); two circuit board 
connectors (388-0805-00); two instruction manuals (070-0789- 
00). 

TYPE 3S6 PROGRAMMABLE SAMPLING UNIT, without Sam- 
pling Heads $1550 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



6V 2 lb 


3 kg 


10 lb 


5=4.5 kg 


14 lb 


^6.3 kg 



223 



type 3T5 



PROGRAMMABLE 
SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT 

• PROGRAMMABLE TIME/DIV 

• PROGRAMMABLE SWEEP DELAY 

• 100ps/DIV-to-500 ms/DIV 

CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE 

• FRONT AND REAR PANEL PROGRAM CONNECTORS 



The Type 3T5 Programmable Sampling Sweep Unit extends 
the automatic measurement capabilities of the Type 567 or 
the Type 568 Digital Readout Oscilloscopes, by allowing re- 
mote programming of the sampling sweep unit. The Type 3T5 
can also be used in the Type 561 B and Type 564B Oscilloscopes 
where it may be operated manually from the front panel, or 
externally programmed with the front panel program con- 
nector. 

The time/div range, delay time range and samples/sweep 
of the Type 3T5 are externally programmed by means of par- 
allel multipin connectors located on the front panel of the 
Type 3T5 and the rear panel of the Type 568 Oscilloscope 
(Serial Number Bl 10000 and above). Digital delay and real- 
time sampling (1 ms/div to 500ms/div) are controlled by a 
clock and digital counter within the plug-in unit. An automatic 
trigger mode is provided to eliminate the need for trigger 
adjustments over a wide range of trigger amplitudes, repeti- 
tion rates, risetimes and pulse widths. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

SWEEP TIME/DIV 

Remotely programmable or front-panel operation from 100 
ps/div to 500 ms/div in 30 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
TIME/DIV "window" provides digital readout of all sweep 
time/div settings in both programmable and manual modes 
of operation. Programming is accomplished with 7 program 
lines. Accuracy is within 3% (within 5% from 100 ps/div to 
500 ps/div), except for non-linearities at the beginning of the 
sweep, that can be programmed off screen. 

SAMPLES/SWEEP 

1 sample/sweep or 1000 samples/sweep are available in the 
manual mode of operation; 1000 samples/sweep or 100 
samples/sweep are available in the external programming 
mode of operation. In the external program modes, the 
Type 230 Digital Unit can program the sweep unit to scan 
quickly (100 samples/sweep) when not making a measure- 
ment, but provides maximum measurement resolution (1000 
samples/sweep) when making the measurement. The Type 
230 will also reset the sweep immediately after the com- 
pletion of a measurement. These functions are obtained by 
externally programming the high speed program line on the 
Type 230. 

DELAY RANGE 

The digital delay is remotely programmable or selectable 
from the front panel. The delay range is from to 999.9 ns 
in 100-ps increments from 100 ps/div to 500 ps/div; to 9.999 
,u,s in 1-ns increments from 1 ns/div to 1 /xs/div; to 999.9 /« 
in 100-ns increments from 2 fts/div to 500 /xs/div. Program- 
ming is accomplished with 16 program lines. 

224 




TRIGGERING 

SOURCES: Internal, if sampling unit contains a trigger pick- 
off; External, 50-Q terminated input. 

JITTER: External automatic, pulse, 30 ps or less with 300-mV 
pulse, 2 ns or less wide; sinewave, 200 ps or less with 300-mV 
P-P signal at 30 MHz. 





PULSE TRIGGERING 




SOURCE 


FREQUENCY 


AMPLITUDE 


Internal 


DC to 100 MHz 


100 mV to 2 V 


External 


DC to 100 MHz 


5 mV to 250 mV 


External Automatic 


DC to 100 MHz 


lOOmV to 500 mV 


SINEWAVE TRIGGERING 


SOURCE 


FREQUENCY 


AMPLITUDE 
peak-to-peak 


Internal 


100 kHz to 100 MHz 


100 mV to 2 V 


External 


1 Hz to 100 MHz 


10 mV to 500 mV 


External Sync 


100 MHz to 1 GHz 


10 mV to 150 mV 


External Automatic 


DC to 100 MHz 


100 mV to 500 mV 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


7 lb 


3.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=10 lb 


=4.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=14 lb 


=6.3 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
5-ns, 50-Q RG58 cable with BNC connectors (012-0057-01); 
10X 50-n BNC attenuator (011-0059-00); GR-to-BNC female 
adapter (017-0063-00); GR-to-BNC male adapter (017-0064- 
00); electrical connector (131-0422-00); electrical connector 
cover (200-0660-00); circuit board connector (388-0805-00); 
two instruction manuals (070-0760-00). 

TYPE 3T5 SAMPLING UNIT $1650 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



• PROGRAMMABLE TIME/DIV 

• PROGRAMMABLE SWEEP DELAY 

• 1 00 ps/DIV to 500 ms/DIV 

CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE 

• ALL CONNECTIONS ON REAR PANEL 



The Type 3T6 Programmable Sampling Sweep Unit is designed 
for use only in the Type 568 and Type R568 Digital Readout 
Oscilloscopes. The measurement functions of the Type 3T6 
may be operated manually from the front panel or they may be 
controlled externally from connectors mounted on the rear 
panel of the Type 568 Oscilloscope. The Type 3T6 is designed 
for use in automated measurement systems that require minimum 
front panel connections and remote programming of horizontal 
functions. 

The time/div range, sweep delay range and sample per 
sweep of the Type 3T6 are externally programmable using 
negative logic, with true being ground and false being open. 
Digital sweep delay and real-time sampling (1 ms/div to 500 
ms/div) are controlled by a clock and digital counter within 
the plug-in unit. An automatic trigger mode is provided to 
eliminate the need for trigger circuit adjustment over a wide 
range of pulse amplitudes, repetition rates, and pulse wave- 
shapes. Type 568 Oscilloscopes below the serial number Bll- 
0000 require a modification for use with the Type 3T6. Please 
consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

SWEEP TIME/DIV 
Remotely programmable or front panel operation from 100 
ps/div to 500 ms/div in 30 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 
TIME/DIV "window" provides digital readout of all sweep 
time/div settings in both programmable and manual modes 
of operation. Programming is accomplished with 7 program 
lines. Accuracy is within 3% (within 5% from 100 ps/div to 
500 ps/div), except for non-linearities at the beginning of the 
sweep, that can be programmed off screen. 

SAMPLES/SWEEP 

1 sample/sweep or 1000 samples/sweep are available in the 
manual mode of operation; 1000 samples/sweep or 100 sam- 
ples/sweep are available in the external programming mode 
of operation. In the external program modes, the Type 230 
Digital Unit can program the sweep unit to scan quickly 
(100 samples/sweep) when not making a measurement, but 
provides maximum measurement resolution (1000 samples/ 
sweep) when making the measurement. The Type 230 will 
also reset the sweep immediately after the completion of a 
masurement. These functions are obtained by externally 
programming the high speed program line on the Type 230. 

DELAY RANGE 

The digital delay is remotely programmable or selectable 
from the front panel. The delay range is from to 999.9 ns 
in 100-ps increments from 100 ps/div to 500 ps/div; to 9.999 
,xs in 1-ns increments from 1 ns/div to 1 fis/divj to 999.9 jxs 
in 100-ns increments from 2ju.s/div to 500/.is/div. Program- 
ming is accomplished with 16 program lines. 



• 



TYPE 3 T6 



PROGRAMMABLE 
SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT 



NEW 







TRIGGERING 
SOURCES: Internal, if sampling unit contains a trigger pickoff; 
External, 50-Q terminated input. 

JITTER: External automatic, pulse, 30 ps or less with 300-mV 
pulse, 2 ns or less wide; sinewave, 200 ps or less with with 
300-mV P-P signal at 30 MHz. 



PULSE TRIGGERING 


SOURCE 


FREQUENCY 


AMPLITUDE 


Internal 


DC to 100 MHz 


100 mV to 2 V 


External 


DC to 100 MHz 


5 mV to 250 mV 


External Automatic 


DC to 100 MHz 


lOOmV to 500 mV 


SINEWAVE TRIGGERING 


SOURCE 


FREQUENCY 


AMPLITUDE 
peak-to-peak 


Internal 


100 kHz to 100 MHz 


100 mV to 2 V 


External 


1 Hz to 100 MHz 


10 mV to 500 mV 


External Sync 


100 MHz to 1 GHz 


10 mV to 150 mV 


External Automatic 


DC to 100 MHz 


lOOmV to 500 mV 



7 lb 
;10 lb 

;14 lb 



3.2 kg 
24.5 kg 
26.3 kg 



WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Circuit board connector (388-0805-00); two instruction manuals 

(070-0761-00). 
TYPE 3T6 SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT $1650 



U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



225 



type 3A2 



DUAL-TRACE ANALOG/ 
DIGITAL AMPLIFIER UNIT 




— .43NB 



TYPE 3A2 DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER 



GC ' 2 © TOLARITY 



CH 1 



TRIG SOURCE 



O ■1| CH0P '"■■: 



VOLTS/DIV. 




TEKTRONIX INC 



SERIAL 
'ORTLAND. OHEGON US 




CH 2 



The Type 3A2 Dual-Trace Amplifier and Type 3B2 Time-Base 
Units enable digital readout and analog displays of low and 
medium-frequency information. Both types of displays are 
provided using the Type 567 Oscilloscope (with Type 6R1A) or 
Type 568 Oscilloscope (with Type 230). Analog displays (but 
not digital readout) are provided using Type 561 B or 564B 
Oscilloscopes. The Type 3A2 also provides analog displays in 
the Type 565 Oscilloscope. 

TYPE 3A2 DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 500 kHz at 3-dB down. Low-frequency 3-dB point 

AC-coupled: 2 Hz. 
DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOmV/div to lOV/div in 10 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 

accurate within 3%. Uncalibrated, continuously variable 

between steps and to approx 25V/div. 
INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V (DC + peak AC). 
OPERATING MODES 

Either single channel, normal or inverted; algebraic addition; 

chopped or alternate electronic switching between channels. 

Alternate: channels switched at the end of each sweep. 

Chopped: successive 12-/*s segments of each channel dis- 
played at an approx 40-kHz rate per channel. Chopped 

transient blanking is provided. 
TRIGGER SOURCE 

Channel 1, Channel 2, or displayed signal. 
TYPE 3A2 DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT $550 



TYPE 

ANALOG/DIGITAL 
TIME BASE UNIT 




TYPE 3B2 TIME-BASE UNIT 

TIME BASE 
2/^s/div to 1 s/div in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Calibrated digital readout available 
throughout full time base with Types 568 and 230, from 20 
/xs/div to 1 s/div with Types 567 and 6R1A. 

DIGITAL RESOLUTION 
0.1 (is to 10 ms in 6 decade steps with Types 568 and 230; 
1 fa to 10 ms in 5 decade steps with Types 567 and 6R1A. 
Resolution can be selected independently of time/div, to 
increase digital readout accuracy when the first significant 
digit is known. Front panel indicates maximum resolution 
(without possible counter overflow) that can be attained for 
each time/div setting. Clock accuracy is 0.1 %. 

DELAY TIME 
5 fxs to 10.5 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accurate 
within 1%. Delay can be switched in or out. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Delayed trigger nominally +5V, sweep gate nominally 
+ 15 V. 

TRIGGER COUPLING 
AC Slow, AC Fast, or DC. 

TRIGGER SOURCES 

Internal, external, or line. 

TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS 
0.2-cm deflection or 0.4 V external, 
selection. 

TYPE 3B2 TIME-BASE UNIT $695 



:12-V trigger level 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



226 



TYPE 



230 



R230 

DIGITAL UNIT 








• PRESENTS OSCILLOSCOPE MEASUREMENTS 
IN DIGITAL FORM 

• DIGITAL READOUT PARAMETERS 

PULSE AMPLITUDE 

PULSE RISE AND fALL TIME 

PULSE WIDTH 

TIME INTERVAL 

• UP TO 50 MEASUREMENTS PER SECOND 

• PARALLEL GROUND-CLOSURE 
PROGRAMMING 

• BCD DATA OUTPUT (1 2 4 8) 

• ALL SOLID STATE — EXTENSIVE USE OF 
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS 



The Type 230 and Type R230 Digital Units are new high- 
speed solid-state units that provide digital measurements of 
signals displayed on the Type 568 Oscilloscope. The Type 230 
has flexible measurement capabilities with up to 50 measure- 
ments per second, easy programming, BCD data outputs, and 
solid-state circuitry with extensive use of integrated circuits. 
The Type 230 Digital Unit can make a wide variety of repe- 
titive pulse measurements on the signals displayed on the 
Type 568. The digital presentations can designate voltage 
measurements, time-difference measurements between similar 
pulses, and time-difference measurements between percentages 
or voltages of pulse amplitudes. The Type 230 can be exter- 
nally programmed for use in high-speed automatic measure- 
ment systems and data output connectors provide measurement 
results in convenient BCD code. Programming is easily accom- 
plished with the use of new Tektronix Program Units. 



227 



TYPE 



230 
R230 

MEASUREMENT MODES 



\ 



The Type 230 Digital Unit's four basic measurement func- 
tions (Channel A volts, Channel B volts, Time, and External 
Program) are selected by the Measurement Mode switch. 

VOLTAGE measurements are made on either Channel A or 
Channel B between the 0% and the 100% reference zones. 
The signal polarity is determined and read out automatically 
on the digital readout. 

TIME measurements are made on either Channel A, Channel 
B or between the two channels. The time measurements are 
made from a pre-determined start point to a pre-determined 
stop point that can be referenced to the 0% and 100% refer- 
ence zones or to the start of the sweep. 

EXTERNAL PROGRAM: All of the front-panel functions 
required to make voltage and time measurements can be easily 
programmed externally. The variety and flexibility of meas- 
urements possible with external programming are even greater 
than those possible through use of the Type 230 front-panel 
controls, and measurements and limits can be changed more 
rapidly. 

DIGITAL READOUT 

The measurements made by the Type 230 are read out 
directly on six Nixie* tubes. Decimal point and unit of meas- 
ure (ns, jus, ms, s, mV, V) are automatically presented. The 
polarity of the measurement (+ or — ) is also read out auto- 
matically. 

DISPLAY TIME 

The digital readout display time may be varied from ~10 ms 
to 10 s. EXTERNAL HOLD light indicates when the measured 
data is being held until the recording device has had suf- 
ficient time to record the measurement. External hold does 
not prevent the next measurement from being made. In TRIG- 
GERED MEASUREMENT operation, a measurement is started 
after a receipt of a trigger (+ or — ) and after DISPLAY TIME 
has been completed. The READY light indicates a ready con- 
dition for a trigger. 

REFERENCE ZONES 

To make any digital voltage or time measurement of the 
waveforms displayed on the Type 568 Oscilloscope, the Ref- 
erence Zones must be properly set. The 0% and the 100% 
zones establish the reference points from which all measure- 
ments are made. The reference zones can be brightened on 
the oscilloscope by means of the CRT Intensification Reference 
Zone switch. The switch brightens both zones, 100% zone 
only, 0% zone only or disables the zone intensification. 

CHANNEL A REFERENCE ZONE 

The 0% POSITION and 100% POSITION controls determine 
the start position of the 0% and 100% zones to any y 2 -cm 
point from the start of the sweep by means of a 20-position 
switch. Five external program lines are required for each 
position control. 

LEVEL WIDTH controls select the width of the reference 
zone and select the type of voltage reading, average or peak. 

The AVERAGE 0.3-cm WIDTH position of the control is 
normally used for average voltage and most time measure- 
ments. 

*Trade-Mark Burroughs Corporation 




The three PEAK positions (2-cm, 4-cm, 10-cm WIDTH) are 
used for average to peak, or peak to peak voltage measure- 
ments. Two program lines are required for each 0% LEVEL 
or 100% LEVEL width controls. 

CH B REFERENCE ZONES are identical in function and oper- 
ation as Ch A Reference Zones except they are set on Ch B 
display. 

TIME MEASUREMENT START POINT 

The start of the time measurement is selected to start on 
either Channel A or Channel B and on the first or second 
positive-going or negative-going slope. The time measure- 
ment starts when the signal reaches one of the 99 pre-deter- 
mined levels. Four different modes of start point level selec- 
tion are available: (1) % between 0% and 100% zones, 
(2) mm above 0% zone, (3) mm below 100% zone, and (4) 
Horizontal mm from sweep start. Eleven BCD program lines 
are required for externally programming the time measure- 
ment start point. There are 159 pre-determined levels available 
in the external programming mode. 

CRT intensification during the time measurement portion of 
the sweep is selected by means of the CRT Intensification Time 
Measurement On-Off switch. 

TIME MEASUREMENT STOP POINT 

All functions of the Time Measurement Stop Point are identi- 
cal to the previously explained Time Measurement Start Point. 
It stops the count on the selected point on Ch A or Ch B. 
If the Stop Point occurs before the Start Point, a negative read- 
ing is indicated. 

LIMIT CONTROLS 

The Limit Controls select the UPPER and LOWER measure- 
ment Limits. Measurement limit results can be quickly deter- 
mined on the front-panel by means of three lights (ABOVE 
UPPER LIMIT, WITHIN LIMITS, BELOW LOWER LIMIT) and the 
information is available on the rear panel for stopping auto- 
matic measurement sequences or for automatic sorting. Fifteen 
BCD lines are required for programming each limit control. 



228 



TYPE 



230 
R230 



RESOLUTION 

DOTS/MEASUREMENT Time measurements are performed 
by gating and counting clock-pulses during the measurement 
interval. If a measurement interval occupied 2.5 div and the 
sweep speed was lOns/div with 100 samples/div, then 250 
samples would be registered in the digital readout counter 
and reading would be 25.0-ns. For sweep speeds with multi- 
pliers of 2, the count is doubled and the decimal is shifted to 
maintain maximum resolution. For multiples of 5 the count 
is divided by 2 providing 50 samples/div. 

The TIME MEASUREMENT START and STOP comparators have 
±0.1 mm pick-off resolution capabilities. This gives the Type 
230 the ability to scale a 1-cm display in 1% steps. 

MEASUREMENT AVERAGING permits selection of measure- 
ments to be a statistical average of eight sweeps or to be a 
measurement of only one sweep. One program line is required 
for Measurement Averaging selection. 

EXTERNAL READOUT 

Data outputs are available on the rear-panel of the Type 
230 that permit the recording of measurement polarity, dis- 
played digits, units of measure, decimal point, and measure- 
ment limit results. The information is in BCD code (12 4 8; 
true . . . ground, false . . . +12 Volts) and the Type 230 can 
be synchronized to the data recorder. 

Regulated power is available for use in systems applica- 
tions. 

EXTERNAL PROGRAMMING 

The Type 230 Digital Unit is designed to be externally pro- 

TYPICAL MEASUREMENT CAPABILITIES 



DUAL-TRACE DISPLAY 
SHOWING TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS 


MEASUREMENT PROGRAM 


Risetime A 


Start 


Stop 


+10% A 


+90%A 


Falltime A 


-90%A 


-10% A 


Risetime B 


-10%B 


-90% B 


Falltime B 


+90%B 


+10%B 


Delay A to B 


+10%A 


-10%B 


Storage A to B 


-90%A 


+90%B 


Turn on A to B 


+10% A 


-90%B 


Turn off A to B 


-90%A 


+10%B 


Width A 


+50%A 


-50%A 


Width B 


-50 %B 


+50%B 





BE BE 


23HIIHI 

!■&■■■ 


50.% A Signal 


mmwm 

■Si 


Ii9!l 
!■■■■§ 


■■■EI' 


B Signal / 50% 


■■■SB 
■■■■I 


El 


EE M 


!■■■■■! 



grammed for use in high-speed measurement systems, up to 100 
measurements per second with proper programming techniques. 
All of its measurement functions can be programmed by means 
of ground closures or logic levels. The programming is achieved 
with 105 program lines using negative logic with true being 
ground or <2V and false being open or >6V. Suitable 
programming devices include card readers, block readers, com- 
puters, etc. 

HIGH SPEED PROGRAMMED MEASUREMENTS 

When using the Type 3T5 or 3T6 Programmable Sampling 
Sweep Units for the oscilloscope time base, the Type 230 
Digital Unit can program the sweep to provide increased 
measurement speeds. The time-base can be made to run fast 
(10 dots/div) during the non-measurement part of the sweep 
and then run at normal speeds (100 dots/div) for maximum 
resolution during the measurement. This function is obtained 
by externally programming the high speed program line. 

Measurement speed can be increased by externally program- 
ming the position of the 0% and/or 100% Reference Zones 
start point to 12 cm. This puts the reference zones into a 
memory hold position of up to 10 seconds and permits several 
different measurements to be made without a zone charging 
sweep. This gives an additional feature of permitting measure- 
ments referenced to reference zones that are not on the CRT 
display. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 66 Hz, 130 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accomodations for six line-voltage ranges. 

TYPE 230 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 8 in 20.3 cm 

Width 16 13 / u in 42.7 cm 

Depth 21 7 / s in 55.5 cm 

Net weight 38 lb 17.3 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~50 lb ~22.7 kg 

Export-packed weight ~73 lb ~33.2 kg 

TYPE R230 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Depth 22% in 57.8 cm 

Net weight 40 lb 18.2 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~52 lb ~23.6 kg 

Export-packed weight ~75 lb ~34.1 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Type 230 to Type 568 48-inch interconnecting cable (012-0119- 
01); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0635-00). Type R230 also includes mounting tracks (351- 
0086-00) and mounting hardware. 

TYPE 230 DIGITAL UNIT $3200 

TYPE R230 DIGITAL UNIT $3250 

PROBE CHOPPERS 

Probe choppers are available for the P6045 Probe or the 
S-3 Sampling Probe. With the probe choppers, the Type 230 
Digital Unit can make DC and pulse voltage measurements with 
respect to ground. 
Probe Choppers for S-3 Probe, order 015-0128-01 $175 

Includes: 10X attenuator (010-0367-00) 
Probe Chopper for P6045 Probe, order 015-0129-01 $100 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

229 



TYPE 



240 
R240 



PROGRAM CONTROL UNIT 



• CONTROLS TYPE 568 OSCILLOSCOPE 
AND TYPE 230 DIGITAL UNIT 



• PROGRAM BRANCHING FOR DIAGNOSTIC 
TESTING 

• SERIAL TO PARALLEL CONVERTOR 

• PROGRAM PREPARATION, 
MODIFICATION AND VERIFICATION 



) 



• PROGRAM STORAGE 

Disc Memory Option 
Punched Tape Reader Option 

• FIXED WORD LENGTH 

48 4-bit Characters 



MEMORY 

• 1600 Measurement Memory 

• 100 Measurements/Second 

• Branching 



• EXPANDABLE WITH TYPE 250 

192 or 384 Additional Program Lines 



The Type 240 and Type R240 Program Control Units are 
designed to provide automated measurements utilizing the 
Type 568 Oscilloscope with the Type 3T5 or 3T6 and 3S5 or 
3S6 Programmable Plug-In Units and the Type 230 Digital 
Unit. The Type 240 accepts program data serial-by-bit from 
the optional Disc Memory, serial-by-character from an op- 
tional Punched Tape Reader or from an external source. Pro- 
grams may be originated or modified manually from the front 
panel of the Type 240. If other equipment needs to be exter- 
nally programmed, a Type R250 Auxiliary Program Unit may 
be added to the Type 240. 

Measurement rates in excess of 100 measurements per sec- 
ond are achieved using a Disc Memory. Sorting, classifying 
and diagnostic test routines are obtained using the Disc Mem- 
ory. The Disc Memory also permits random access to a library 
of up to 1600 independent measurements. This feature per- 
mits a computer or other control device to have complete 
control over the test measurements, making calculations from 
the test data and using the Disc Memory for further measure- 
ments and sorting at the maximum test rates. 

The Punched Tape Reader provides a maximum measurement 
rate of 5 measurements per second and is used in low-speed 
measurement systems. The Disc Memory can be added later 
to achieve maximum measurement rates and a library of 1600 
measurement programs. The Punched Tape Reader is also used 
for loading measurement programs into the Disc Memory. The 
Type 240 may be used without the Disc Memory or Punched 
Tape Reader by providing program data externally in a serial- 
by-character form, asynchronously at up to 600-kHz character 
rate. Data sources include paper or magnetic Tape Readers 
and computer data output. 



230 





PUNCHED TAPE READER 

• 5 Measurements/Second 

• Loads Programs on Disc 




The Type 240 has a fixed word length of 48 4-bit charac- 
ters that normally are used to program the measurement ad- 
dress, Type 568 Oscilloscope with the Type 3T5 or 3T6 and 
3S5 or 3S6 Programmable Plug-In Units, and the Type 230 
Digital Unit. The 192 program lines use negative logic, with 
true being a saturated NPN transistor to ground and false 
being an open collector. The Type 240 Program can also be 
used to program other equipment. 

The Type R250 Auxiliary Program Unit expands the program- 
ming capabilities of the Type 240, permitting programming 
of pulse generators, power supplies, test fixtures, automatic 
handlers, and other devices required for automated measure- 
ment systems. The Type R250 provides program buffering, 
digital-to-analog conversion and patch panel capabilities. One 
Type R250 provides an additional 192 program lines; two Type 
R250's provide 384 program lines. 




240 

TYPE 

R240 



r- 



i 



DATA RECORDING 



I 



.J 



TAPE PUNCH 

• 60 Characters/Second 

• Permanent Program Storage 



NEW 




TYPE 240 PROGRAM CONTROL UNIT 






TYPE 568/230 DIGITAL OSCILLOSCOPE 

• Voltage Measurements 

• Time Measurements 



'1 






J 


,- 






• 






fc 


« 


i 




4 


■ -., , 




«' 



TYPE R250 AUXILIARY PROGRAM UNIT 

• 192 Additional Program Lines 

• Program Buffering 

• Patch-Panel Capabilities 



T' 



h- 



POWER SUPPLIES 



PULSE GENERATORS 



I 



OTHER EQUIPMENT | 

I 
I 



l__. 



237 



TYPE 



240 

R240 

OPERATING MODES 



\ 



The Type 240 has eight operating modes that are selected 
by the front panel mode switch. It will perform any of the 
eight functions after receiving the start command from an ex- 
ternal source or the front panel. The functions are as follows: 

TRANSFER TEST ON DISC TO TAPE 

This function loads the shift registers of the Type 240 with 
program data from the Disc Memory as selected by the 
disc test address. When the register is full, the program 
data is shifted out of the register to the Tape Punch. When 
the Tape Punch has punched a complete program tape, 
the Type 240 is returned to a ready condition. 

LOCATE NEXT DISC ADDRESS 

This function locates the next disc address after a complete 
measurement has been made. Measurement programs on 
the disc are spaced to achieve minimum program access 
time, providing measurement rates in excess of 100 measure- 
ments per second. 

READ TEST FROM DISC 

This function loads the register with program data from the 
disc sector selected and tells the Type 568/230 to make the 
measurement. At the end of the measurement, the Type 240 
returns to the ready condition. 

READ TEST SEQUENCE FROM DISC 

This function loads the shift register with program data from 
the disc sector selected and tells the Type 568/230 to make 
the measurement. At the end of the measurement, a print 
command from the Type 230 loads the shift register with 
data from the disc sector selected by the next program test 
address. In the automatic sequence mode, this sequence 
continues until the Type 240 receives a stop signal and re- 
turns to the ready condition. 

In this mode of operation the Type 240 can be programmed 
to branch to a new measurement sequence and stop the se- 
quence on out-of-limits measurements. For example when 
making a risetime measurement, a within-limits measure- 
ment would continue the normal measurement sequence; 
an above-limit measurement (slow risetime) can stop the 
sequence to reject the component, and a below-limit meas- 
urement (fast risetime) can branch to a new measurement 
sequence for reclassifying the component. Out-of-limit meas- 
urements are normally programmed to repeat, to check for 
possible measurement error. 

READ TEST SEQUENCE FROM TAPE 

This function loads the shift register data from the Punched 
Tape Reader, tells the Type 230 to make a measurement, and 
continues making measurements until the Type 240 receives 
a stop signal. The Punched Tape Reader can program the 
Type 240 to stop the measurement sequence on out-of-limit 
measurements. Out-of-limit measurements are normally pro- 
grammed to repeat, to check for possible measurement error. 

EXAMINE OR MODIFY CHARACTERS IN REGISTER 

This function displays on the character data lights the data 
that is in the shift register. Characters are selected by the 
character address switches and the characters can be modi- 
fied with the use of the new data switch and the modify 
pushbutton. 

WRITE TEST IN REGISTER ON DISC 

This function permits new or modified program data in the 
register to be written on the disc sector selected. A write 
inter-lock key prevents accidental writing and changing 
of data that is already written on the Disc Memory. 

232 



TRANSFER TAPE SEQUENCE TO DISC 

This function loads the Type 240 shift register with new \ 
program data from the Punched Tape Reader and writes the 
program data on the disc sector selected. The write inter- 
lock key must be turned on and prevents accidental writ- 
ing on the Disc Memory. 

PROGRAM INPUTS 

The Type 240 program inputs are in one of two forms: either 
serial by 4-bit character plus parity at up to 600-kHz char- 
acter rate, or the Disc Memory input is serial by bit (4 bits 
plus parity per character) at a 3-MHz bit rate. The optional 
Disc Memory and Punched Tape Reader are designed specifical- 
ly for use with the Type 240. The optional Disc Memory pro- 
vides a storage capacity of 1600 measurements for the Type 
240/250 Measurement System (1024 complete measurements for 
a Type 240/250/250 Measurement System). The program access 
time for the Disc Memory is 17 ms average and can be op- 
timized to approximately 1 ms through the use of minimum 
access time programming. The optional Punched Tape Reader 
provides a maximum speed of 300 characters per second 
and is used in low-speed measurement systems and for load- 
ing programs into the Disc Memory. Other data sources could 
be used, including magnetic tape readers and computers. 

DISC TEST ADDRESS 

The disc test address can be selected manually from the 
front panel or can be controlled externally by a computer or 
other control device. This permits random access to the Disc 
Memory's library of up to 1600 independent measurements. 
For external control of the disc test address, 12 program lines 
are required with negative logic (true = V to +2 V, false 
= +6V to +12 V) plus one external enable line. 

PROGRAM LINE OUTPUTS 

The Type 240 has 192 program lines that are normally used 
to program the Type 568 Oscilloscope with the Type 3T5 or 
3T6 and 3S5 or 3S6 Programmable Plug-In Units, and the 
Type 230 Digital Unit. These lines can be used to program 
other equipment when the Type 568 and Type 230 are not 
used. The 192 program lines feature negative logic, with true 
being a saturated NPN transistor to ground and false being 
an open collector. Space is available on the program boards 
for special circuitry such as logic level conversion, logical in- 
version, gating, etc. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 V to 136 V or 180 V to 272 V, 48 to 66 Hz, 
115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides 
modation for 6 line-voltage ranges. 

TYPE 240 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT 

Height 8 in 

Width 16 3 / 4 in 

Depth 21 7 /„ in 

Net weight 37'/ 2 lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~49 lb 

Export-packed weight =69 lb 

TYPE R240 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT 

Height 7 in 

Width 19 in 

Depth 22 3 / 4 in 

Net weight 38V 2 lb 

Domestic shipping weight ~54 lb 

Export-packed weight ~7A lb 



194 watts at 


rapid accom- 


20.3 cm 


42.7 cm 


55.5 cm 


17 kg 


=24.2 kg 


=31 .3 kg 


17.8 cm 


48.3 cm 


57.8 cm 


17.4 kg 


=24.4 kg 


1=33.6 kg 



TYPE 



240 
R240 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Type 240 only adapter (013-0095-00); Punched Tape Reader 
only adapter (013-0096-00); 5 36-pin cables with labels (012- 
0131-00); 36-pin cable with label (012-0131-01); Type 240 
program format table tablet (070-0884-00); 2 instruction man- 
uals (070-0749-00). Type R240 also includes mounting tracks 
(351-0086-00) and mounting hardware. 

TYPE 240 PROGRAM CONTROL UNIT $4000 

TYPE R240 PROGRAM CONTROL UNIT $4050 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 




DISC MEMORY 

Disc Memory is an 8-track rotation Disc Memory capable of 
storing 200 measurements per track or a total of 1600 meas- 
urements when used with the Type 240 or 240/250 Program 
Units (1080 measurements with the Type 240/250/250). The 
format for any test is made up of a fixed word length of 96 
characters of 4 bits each plus parity (144 characters with 
Type 240/250/250). The Disc Memory is 8 3 / 4 inches high, 19 
inches wide and 19 3 / 4 inches deep with a total weight of 62 lb. 
The instrument is factory wired for 108-V to 132-V operation, 
190 watts, 60 Hz. The Disc Memory is made by Data Disc, Inc. 
especially for Tektronix. 

Disc Memory, order 020-0024-00 $6600 

Disc Memory, 50 Hz power, order 020-0028-00 $6600 

Disc Memory for Type 240/250/250 System, 50 Hz power, 
order 020-0029-00 $6600 

Disc Memory for Type 240/250/250 System, 
order 020-0025-00 $6600 

Includes: extender card (012-0151-00); Type 240 to Disc 
Memory cable (012-0133-00). 

LINE SELECTOR TRANSFORMER 

The Line Selector Transformer is designed for use with the 
above optional accessories, where line voltages are encoun- 
tered outside the accessories' limitations. The transformer is 
capable of delivering 0.85 kVA, within the voltage ranges of 
90 V to 1 36 V or 1 80 V to 272 V, 48 to 66 Hz, (50 or 60 Hz with 
above accessories). 

Three outlets are available; one wired for 120 V nominal, while 
the additional two are wired for 115 V nominal. 
Line Selector Transformer, order 120-0598-00 $175 




PUNCHED TAPE READER 

The Punched Tape Reader is designed for use with the Type 240 
for programming the Type 568/230 Digital Oscilloscope Sys- 
tem or for loading programs into the Disc Memory. Programs 
may be generated on the Tape Punch or any standard 
ASCII tape punch. The Punched Tape Reader has a maximum 
speed of 300 characters per second. Measurement programs 
are fixed word length and require 48 4-bit characters plus par- 
ity when using the Type 240, 96 4-bit characters plus parity 
when using a Type 240/250, and 144 4-bit characters plus 
parity when using a Type 240/250/250 Measurement System. 
The Punched Tape Reader is 7 inches high, 19 inches wide, 7 3 / 4 
inches deep and weighs 26 lb. Power requirements are 95 V 
to 130 V, 150 watts, 60 Hz. The Punched Tape Reader is made 
by Remex Electronics, Inc. especially for Tektronix. 

Punched Tape Reader, order 020-0026-00 $1250 

Punched Tape Reader, 50 Hz power, order 020-0030-00 $1250 

Includes: Type 240 to Punched Tape Reader cable (012-0147- 

00). 




TAPE PUNCH 

The Tape Punch is designed to be used with the Type 240 
Program Control Unit, and is used for generating new program 
tapes from the Type 240. Programs stored in the Disc Memory 
may be transferred via the Type 240 to the Tape Punch for 
permanent storage. The Tape Punch has a maximum speed 
of 60 characters per second. It is 10'/ 2 inches high, 19 inches 
wide, 12 3 / 4 inches deep and weighs 38 lb. The tape Punch is 
factory wired for 105-V to 125-V operation, 320 watts, 50 Hz 
to 60 Hz. The perforator mechanism is made by Tally, Inc. 
especially for Tektronix. 
Tape Punch, order 020-0027-00 $2500 

Includes: Type 240 to Punched Tape Reader/Tape Punch 

cable (012-0146-00). 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



233 



TYPE 



241 




• PROGRAMS TYPE 568/230 DIGITAL 
OSCILLOSCOPE 

• UP TO 15 MEASUREMENTS 

• MANUAL OR REMOTE SELECTION 

• AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL SEQUENCE 

• AUTOMATIC STOP SEQUENCE 

ABOVE UPPER LIMITS 
WITHIN LIMITS 
BELOW LOWER LIMITS 

• 14 ADDITIONAL PROGRAM LINES 

The Type 241 Program Unit is designed for use with the 
Type 568 Oscilloscope, Type 3T5 or 3T6, Type 3S5 or 3S6 Pro- 
grammable Plug-In Units, and the Type 230 Digital Unit. The 
Type 241 programs all the programmable functions of the Type 
568/230 and has an additional 14 lines available for program- 
ming other equipment. 

The Type 241 provides up to 15 programmed measurements 
that can be selected manually by front panel push buttons 
or by external control lines. Automatic or manual sequence 
of up to 15 measurements is provided with front panel or ex- 
ternal control. In the automatic sequence mode, out-of-limit 
conditions can stop the measurement sequence if desired. 



Each program card controls one measurement and has 
159-bit capacity, enough to control the Type 568/230 with the 
Type 3T5 or 3T6 and Type 3S5 or 3S6 Programmable Plug-In 
Units and an additional 14 bits for external equipment. 

Programs are easy to set up. A special tool is supplied to 
make insertion and removal of diodes quick and easy. Pro- 
gram cards are labeled to permit a person having minimum 
training to program the boards. Typically only 15 to 20 diodes 
need to be inserted for a particular measurement. 

The Type 241 program cards are accessible from the front 
panel and may be easily removed, rearranged or exchanged 
with others that are intended for different tests. A storage 
area in the rear of the Type 241 provides storage for up to 
15 additional program cards. A storage drawer holds extra 
diodes and the diode inserting tool. 

OPERATING MODES 

SINGLE TEST MODE 
Any program card/measurement can be selected in any 
order by a row of numbered push buttons on the front 
panel. 15 external control lines permit external selection 
of any measurement in any order by an external ground 
closure. 

MANUAL SEQUENCE MODE 

Up to 15 measurements may be stepped through manually 
with the front panel ADVANCE push button or by an ex- 
ternal ground closure. Less than 15 measurements can be 
manually sequenced without including the undesired tests. 



234 



TYPE 



241 
R241 



AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE MODE 

In the automatic sequence mode up to 15 measurements can 
be sequenced through at a rate in excess of 100 measure- 
ments per second. Measurement limits may be programmed 
and out-of-limit conditions can stop the measurement se- 
quence if desired. Limit lights on the front panel indicate 
the status of each test, and the condition which may have 
interrupted the automatic sequence. The ADVANCE button 
will advance the Type 241 to the next measurement in the 
sequence. The RESET button will reset the Type 241 to a 
ready condition. Both of these functions can be controlled 
externally by a ground closure. Less than 15 measurements 
can be automatically sequenced without including the un- 
desired tests. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 




The power required to o 


perate 


the Type 241 


is obtainec 


from the Type 230 Digital 


Unit. 






TYPE 241 DIMENSIONS 








Height 




8 in 


20.3 cm 


Width 




16 3 / 4 in 


42.7 cm 


Depth 




21% in 


55.5 cm 


Net weight 




29% lb 


13.3 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 




S41 lb 


Si 8.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 




SS61 lb 


S27.6 kg 


TYPE R241 DIMENSIONS 








Height 




7 in 


17.8 cm 


Width 




19 in 


48.3 cm 


Depth 




22 3 / 4 in 


57.8 cm 


Net weight 




31% lb 


14.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 




s43 lb 


Si 9.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 




s63 lb 


S28.6 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

15 program cards (670-0285-00); 6 interconnecting cables 
(012-0131-00); 450 diodes (152-0141-03); diode insertion tool 
(003-0611-00); 2 instruction manuals (070-0809-00). Type R241 
also includes mounting tracks (351-0086-00) and mounting 
hardware. 
TYPE 241 PROGRAM UNIT $2000 

TYPE R241 PROGRAM UNIT $2050 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

PROGRAM CARDS 

Up to 15 additional program cards may be stored in the 
rear of the Type 241. Program cards may be easily re- 
moved, rearranged or exchanged with others that are in- 
tended for different tests, order 670-0285-00 $40 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 




[] INDICATES FUNCTION OBTAINED WHEN CH0DE IS OMITTED 



TOOL PROVIDED. —/*-**— IH 
* SEE PROGRAKSHNG INFORMATION DRAWER 




235 



TYPE R250 

AUXILIARY PROGRAM UNIT 




• PROGRAMS 

Type R116 Pulse Generator 

Type R293 Pulse Generator 

Power Supplies 

Fixtures 

Other Equipment 

• 192 PROGRAM LINES 

48 4 -bit Characters 

• PROGRAM BUFFERING 

Level Conversion 

Level Inversion 

Digital -To- Analog Conversion 

• PATCH-PANEL CAPABILITIES 



The Type R250 Auxiliary Program Unit is designed for use 
with the Type 240 Program Control Unit and permits external 
programming of additional equipment such as power supplies, 
pulse generators, and fixtures. Internal power supplies are 
available for external programming requirements: +20 V at 
300mA, +10V at 4 A, +3.6V at 7A, and -10V at 2A. 
The Type R250 requires 12 program assembly cards and cables 
for operation. Program assembly cards consist of one shift 
register card and two program (standard, resistance, conduc- 
tance) cards in any combination. 

Systems engineering is required with the shift register cards 
and the program boards. The customer must determine the 
proper interface required from the Type R250 to the auxiliary 
equipment to be programmed. Then two program boards are 
selected and wired to each shift register card to obtain the 
necessary program functions. Three program boards are avail- 
able offering the following functions: standard program boards 
with negative logic programming, resistance program boards, 
and conductance program boards. 

Up to two Type R250's may be used with the Type 240, pro- 
viding an additional 192 program lines per Type R250. The 
Type R250 has 48 4-bit characters with 192 program lines. It 
features program buffering, digital-to-analog conversion and 
patch panel capabilities. 

Two Tektronix programmable pulse generators are available 
and listed under optional equipment. They come complete with 
the program assembly cards and cables necessary for use with 
the Type R250. 



236 



TYPE R250 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 
90 V to 136 V or 180 V to 272 V, 48 to 66 Hz, 194 watts at 
115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides rapid ac- 
commodation for 6 line-voltage ranges. 

TYPE R250 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT 

Height 7 in 17.8 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Depth 22 3 / 4 in 57.8 cm 

Net weight 37'/ 2 lb 17 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ^52 lb ~23.5 kg 

Export-packed weight Si72 lb ;^32.6 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Type 240 to Type R250 interconnecting cable (012-0134-00); 
program format table (070-0886-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0748-00); mounting tracks (351-0086-00) and mounting 
hardware. 



TYPE R250 AUXILIARY PROGRAM UNIT (requires 12 Pro- 
gram Assembly Cards for operation) $1550 



TYPE R250 MOD 29 

If a second Type R250 is to be used in a system, please 
indicate on your order, Type R250 MOD 29. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Type 240 to Type R250/Type 250 interconnecting cable (012- 
0135-00); performance check program tape (016-0134-00); 
program format table (070-0887-00); two instruction manuals 
(070-0748-00); mounting tracks (351-0086-00) and mounting 
hardware. 

TYPE R250 MOD 29 AUXILIARY PROGRAM UNIT (requires 
12 Program Assembly Cards for operation) .... $1550 



REQUIRED PROGRAM ACCESSORIES 




PROGRAM ASSEMBLY CARDS 

Twelve program assembly cards are required for operation 
of the Type R250. Each program assembly card consists of 
one shift register card that does the serial-to-parallel con- 
version, and two program boards that provide program buf- 
fering. Wiring between the shift register card and the pro- 
gram boards is required. Interwiring connections provide 
patch-panel capabilities. Two Tektronix Programmable Pulse 
Generators are available with program assembly cards neces- 
sary for programming their functions. 



SHIFT REGISTER CARD 

12 shift register cards are required for the operation of the 
Type R250. Each card contains a 4-character, 4-bit shift 
register providing a total of 16 bits for programming. The 
normal connection from the shift register is 8 bits to the upper 
program board and 8 bits to the lower program board. Two 
program boards are required with each shift register card. 
The program boards may be of the same or different types. 
The shift register card provides the following connections: 
16 program lines to an associated rear panel connector, 8 
lines to an adjacent program board on the right, and 8 lines 
to an adjacent program board on the left. 

Order 020-0020-00 $70 



STANDARD PROGRAM BOARD 

The standard program board contains separate buffer ampli- 
fiers for 8 program lines and has provisions for adding isola- 
tion diodes and RC delay networks for each program line. 
The standard program board must be mounted on the shift 
register card, and inter-wiring connections must be made. 
The board provides negative logic with true being a saturated 
NPN transistor to ground, and false being an open collector. 
Space is available on the board for special circuitry, such 
as logic level conversion, logical inversion gating, etc. 

Order 020-0021-00 $25 



237 



TYPE R250 




«$ lb 4 $ U A .» i 



._& 



r i>V»« b » ! * a * • » » 




RESISTANCE PROGRAM BOARD 

The resistance program board includes buffer drivers, ampli- 
fiers, and reed relay switches and coils for switching 8 resis- 
tors in a series of resistive networks. Eight program bits from 
the shift register provide 2 decades of resistance changes (1 % 
increments) for programming analog functions. The resistance 
program board provides digital-to-analog conversion neces- 
sary for programming analog equipment. The resistance pro- 
gram board must be mounted on the shift register card, and 
inter-wiring connections must be made. Proper resistors must 
be wired on the board to program the steps desired in the 
external equipment. 

Order 020-0023-00 $80 

CONDUCTANCE PROGRAM BOARD 

The conductance program board is similar to the resistance 
board, except that 8 resistors are switched in a parallel resist- 
ance network. This gives 100 increments of conductance 
change for programming analog conversions which require 
linear change of conductance. The conductance program 
board must be mounted on the shift register card, and inter- 
wiring connections must be made. Proper resistors must be 
wired on the board to program the steps desired in the ex- 
ternal equipment. 

Order 020-0022-00 $85 

CABLES 

The 192 program lines of the Type R250 are available on 
seven 36-pin connectors on the rear panel. Cables are re- 
quired to connect the Type R250 to the programmable instru- 
ments. Interconnecting cables are included with the optional 
Tektronix programmable equipment. 

6-ft shielded interconnecting cable with 36-pin connector on 
both ends, order 012-0131-00 $40 

8-ft shielded interconnecting cable with 36-pin connector on 
one end, no connector on other end, order 012-0132-00 . . $25 



OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 




TYPE Rl 16 MOD 703L 

The Type R116 MOD 703L Programmable Pulse Generator is 
a modified Tektronix Type R116 Programmable Pulse Generator 
furnished with 5 Program Assembly Cards and interconnecting 



cables necessary for the Type R250. Program assembly cards 
program the Type R116 and are calibrated to the Type R116. 
The input and output connectors of the Type R116 are moved to 
the rear panel. 



238 



TYPE R250 



PROGRAMMING BITS required for all range and incremental 
programming plus mode and polarity programming is 75. If 
all functions do not require programming, one or more of the 
programming assembly boards need not be used. Front panel 
controls are accurate within the indicated tolerances plus an 
additional 2%. 

PULSE PERIOD is programmed in 5 decade ranges (100 ns, 1 /is, 
10 /is, 100 /as, 1 ms). Each range can be programmed from XI .0 
to XI 0.9 in 0.1 incremental steps. Accurate within 5% on 100-ns 
range, within 3% on all other ranges. 

PULSE DELAY/BURST is programmed in 4 decade ranges (10 
ns, 100 ns, 1 /is, 10 /is) with each range programmed from X5.0 
to X54.5 in 0.5 incremental steps. Accurate within (3% + 10 ns). 

PULSE RISETIME AND PULSE FALLTIME are programmed from 
10 ns to 109 /is. The risetime and falltime is the result of (t r /t f 
range) x (t r or t f multiplier) x (amplitude multiplier). Range is 
programmed in 4 decade steps (1 ns, 10 ns, 100 ns, 1 /is). Rise- 
time and falltime multipliers are separately programmable, but 
share a common range program. Multiplier ranges are from XI .0 
to XI 0.9 in 0.1 incremental steps. Accurate within 10% above 
10 ns on the 1-ns and 10-ns range, within 5% on the 100-ns and 
1 -/as range. When (t r /t f range) x (t r or t ( multiplier) x (amplitude 
multiplier) is less than 10 ns, the output risetime or falltime is 
less than 11 ns, uncalibrated. 



PULSE AMPLITUDE is programmed in 3 ranges (0.2 V, 0.5 V, 1 V) 
with multipliers from X2.0 to X9.9 in 0.1 incremental steps. 
Amplitude into 50 fi is accurate within (3% + 15 mV) on 0.2-V 
range; within (3% + 25 mV) on 0.5-V range; within (3% + 50 
mV) on 1-V range. 

PULSE WIDTH is programmed in 4 decade ranges (10 ns, 100 
ns, 1 /is, 10 /is) with each range programmed from X5.0 to X54.5 
in 0.5 incremental steps. Accurate within 5% on 10-ns range, 
within 3% on all other ranges. 

PULSE DC OFFSET RANGE is -X4.9 to +X4.9 in 0.1 incre- 
mental steps, times the pulse amplitude range. Accurate within 
(5% ±200 mV). 

TYPE Rl 1 6 MOD 703L $2800 

Includes: 5 program assemblies for the Type R250; board P7, 
pulse delay (672-0207-01); board P8, pulse period, mode (672- 
0208-01); board P9, pulse width, amplitude, t r /t, decade, offset 
(672-0208-02); board P10, pulse width multiplier, amplitude multi- 
plier (672-0209-01); board Pll, pulse risetime multiplier, falltime 
multiplier (672-0209-02); Type R116 MOD 703L to Type R250 
interconnecting cable (012-0141-00); test format tables; stand- 
ard accessories of Type R116; two instruction manuals with 
MOD 703L information added. 




TYPE R293 MOD 703M 

The Type R293 MOD 703M is a modified Tektronix Type R293 
Programmable Pulse Generator and Power Supply Unit furnished 
with a program assembly (1 shift register card with 2 program 
boards installed and wired) for the Type R250, designed to pro- 
gram the pulse amplitude and pulse width of the Type R293. All 
input and output connectors of the Type R293 are moved to the 
rear panel. The following performance characteristics apply 
to the Type R293 MOD 703M programmed by the Tektronix 
Type R250 Auxiliary Program Unit and using the program as- 
sembly card furnished with the Type R293. Other character- 
istics of the Type R293 Programmable Pulse Generator and 
Power Supply Unit may be found on pages 321-322 of Tek- 
tronix Catalog 28. 



PULSE AMPLITUDE is programmed with 4 bits in 0.5-V incre- 
ments over a range of 6 V to 12 V, accurate within 3% of pro- 
grammed value. 

PULSE WIDTH is programmed with 10 bits in 1-ns increments 
over a range from 2 ns to 250 ns, accurate within (3% + 3 ns). 
TYPE R293 MOD 703M $1310 

Includes: Program assembly board for Type R250 (672-0210-01); 
Type R293 MOD 703M to Type R250 interconnecting cable 
(012-0142-00); measurement format table; two instruction man- 
uals with MOD 703M additions; plus included standard acces- 
sories of the Type R293. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



239 



TYPE S-3110 

DIGITAL MEASUREMENT 
SYSTEM 



• DYNAMIC MEASUREMENTS 

PULSE RISETIME AND FALLTIME 
PULSE WIDTH AND PERIOD 
PROPAGATION DELAY AND STORAGE TIME 
PULSE AMPLITUDE AND SATURATION VOLTAGE 
MANY OTHER SPECIFIC MEASUREMENTS 

• AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENT SEQUENCE 

UP TO 15 MEASUREMENTS 
AUTOMATIC STOP SEQUENCE 

• GO/NO-GO TESTING 

• 400-ps RISETIME 

• 100 ps/DIV-to-500 ms/DIV 

CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE 

• 20 mV/DIV-to-2 V/DIV 

CALIBRATED VOLTAGE RANGE 



The Type S-3110 Digital Measurement System is a dynamic 
measurement system intended for measuring the performance of 
active devices under simulated operating conditions. It is de- 
signed to test integrated circuits, transistors, diodes, circuit 
modules, circuit boards and sub-assemblies in all segments of 
the electronic industry. The Type S-3110 can sequence through 
up to 15 measurements at a rate of 100 measurements per 
second. High and low measurement limits may be programmed 
and the Type S-31 10 will stop on any combination of limits (high, 
go, low) if desired. A foot switch permits remote operation of 
the Type S-3110's advance and reset program functions. 

The Type S-3110 features up to 15 measurement programs. 
Each measurement program has a card that is easily program- 
med by inserting diodes between the proper clips. Typically 15 
to 20 diodes will provide the necessary program conditions. 
They are inserted with an easy-to-use tool. 

The following instruments comprise the Type S-3110: Type R568 
Oscilloscope with the Type 3T6 Programmable Sampling Sweep 
and Type 3S6 Programmable Sampling Unit, two Type S-3 
Sampling Heads, Type R241 Programmer, 33 3 / 8 -inch high equip- 
ment rack, a drawer, a foot switch, a utility panel and two 
probe choppers. The utility panel provides mounting for the 
Type S-3 Sampling Heads, a trigger input connector, power 
supply output connectors, pulse generator output and trigger 
input connectors, and a program connector that has 14 program 
lines available for programming peripheral equipment plus 
the necessary lines for operating the probe choppers. 




CHARACTERISTICS 

VERTICAL AMPLIFIER 

The included 10X or 100X probe attenuators must be used 
with the included probe choppers. Vertical characteristics 
are stated with the 10X attenuator. 

Voltage measurements are from 20 mV/div to 2 V/div (8 div 
full scale) accurate within 3%. 

Bandwidth is equivalent to DC to 875 MHz. 

Risetime is less than or equal to 400 ps. 

Input characteristics are 1 MO paralleled by 2 pF. 

Programmable DC offset is from +9.95 V to —9.95 V in 50- 
mV steps. 



240 



TYPE S-3110 



TIME BASE 

Programmable sweep time/div is from lOOps/div to 0.5 s/div 
in 30 calibrated steps, accurate within 3%. 

Programmable digital delay range is from to 999.9 xis in 
increments of lOOps, 1 ns or 100 ns, depending on the sweep 
time/div. 

Automatic triggering eliminates the need for trigger adjust- 
ments over a wide range of trigger amplitudes, shapes and 
repetition rates. Automatically triggers on signals of 100 mV 
to 500 mV amplitude over a frequency range from DC to 100 
MHz. 

DIGITAL UNIT 

Units of measure are read out in V, mV, ns, /xs, ms, s. 
Numerical readout is from —3999 to +3999. 
Programmable measurement limits are from —3999 to +3999. 
Data output is in parallel BCD code, 29 lines, (1, 2, 4, 8; 
true = ground, false = +12 V). 

PROGRAMMER 

Programs up to 15 measurements. Test modes include auto- 
matic sequence of up to 15 measurements, manual or external 
program sequence through 15 measurements or single meas- 
urement operation. Out-of-limits measurements can stop the 
automatic sequence if desired. Each program has one pro- 
gram card with 159 bits that are selected by inserting diodes 
between the proper clips. Typically 15 to 20 diodes will 
provide the necessary program conditions. A foot switch pro- 
vides remote operation of the Programmers advance and reset 
functions. 

DISPLAY UNIT 
CRT display is 8 x 10 cm with P31 phosphor. 
Calibrator provides 100 kHz accurate within 0.05%, and ap- 
proximately 1-kHz signals; amplitudes of 0.5 V and 5 V P-P 
within 2% into >100-kn load, or 50 mV and 500 mV P-P 
within 2% into a 1% 50-Q load. 

INPUT-OUTPUT PANEL 

The input-output panel of the Type S-31 10 provides in one con- 
venient location the input and output facilities of the system. 
The panel is 3 V 2 inches high and provides the following 
facilities: mountings for 2 Sampling Heads; 2 probe power 
connections for FET probes (room is available for mounting 
probe power supplies inside); 2 sets of pulse generator trig- 
ger and output connectors; 2 sets of power supply output 
connectors; Type 3T6 trigger input; a 36-pin connector which 
provides probe-chopper drive lines and 14 program lines for 
peripheral equipment; and a system master power switch and 
pilot light. 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

105 V to 125 V or 180 V to 272 V, 48 Hz to 66 Hz, 340 watts 
at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selector on each instrument 
provides rapid accommodations for six line-voltage ranges. 

DIMENSIONS 
The Type S-3110 is 33 3 / 8 inches high, 23 inches wide and 27'/ 2 
inches deep. Instruments are mounted on slide-out tracks 
and individually can be pulled out, tilted and locked in any 
one of seven positions for convenient access. 

TYPE S-3110 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . . $12,000 

Includes: Type R568 Oscilloscope; Type 3T6 Programmable 
Sampling Sweep; Type 3S6 Programmable Sampling Unit; two 
Type S-3 Sampling Heads; Type R230 Digital Unit; Type R241 
Program Unit; equipment rack and storage drawer; two probe 
choppers; foot switch; utility panel; and includes the standard 
accessories of the above instruments. 

TYPE S-31 11 

The Type S-31 11 is identical to the standard Type S-3110 with 
the exception that a pulse generator and power supply are 
added, and supplied in a 42-inch high equipment rack. The 
pulse generator is a Tektronix Type 115 MOD 81 4R, mounted 
in a rack adapter that permits adding another pulse generator 
at a later date. The power supply is a Power Designs, Inc. 
Model 2005 mounted in a rack adapter that permits adding 
another supply at a later date. 

The Tektronix Type 115 MOD 81 4R features output connectors 
on the rear panel, 10-ns to 100-/ts separate and variable rise- 
times and falltimes, 100-ns to 10-ms pulse periods, 50-ns to 
500-iis pulse delay or burst time, 50-ns to 500-iis pulse width, 
+5V to — 5V DC offset and up to ±10 V amplitude into 
50 n. 

The Power Designs, Inc. Model 2005 Precision Power Source 
features a digitally-selected operating range from to 20 V, 
to 500 mA; accuracy is within 0.1% ±1 mV; load and line 
regulation is less than 0.0005% or 100 /xV; noise and ripple is 
less than 100 /xV, P-P; and stability is less than 100 tiV drift 
per 8 hours. 

TYPE S-31 11 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM .. $13,850 

The Type S-3110 and S-31 7 1 Digital Measurement Systems 
are available with different Sampling Heads featuring up to 
25-ps risetimes, and data recording options. Consult your 
Field Engineer, Representative or Distributor for further infor- 
mation. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



241 



type S-3120 

DIGITAL MEASUREMENT 
SYSTEM 



NEW 



• DYNAMIC MEASUREMENTS 

PULSE RISETIME AND FALLTIME 
PULSE WIDTH AND PERIOD 
PROPAGATION DELAY AND STORAGE TIME 
PULSE AMPLITUDE AND SATURATION VOLTAGE 
MANY OTHER SPECIFIC MEASUREMENTS 

• DIAGNOSTIC TESTING 

• 100 MEASUREMENTS PER SECOND 

• 1 600-MEASUREMENT STORAGE 

• 400-ps RISETIME 

• 100 ps/DIV-to-500 ms/DIV 

CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE 

• 20 mV/DIV-to-2 V/DIV 

CALIBRATED VOLTAGE RANGE 

• MANUAL POWER SUPPLIES 

• MANUAL PULSE GENERATORS 

The Type S-3120 Digital Measurement System is a dynamic 
measurement sysrem intended for measuring the performance 
of active devices under simulated operating conditions. It is 
designed to test integrated circuits, transistors, diodes, circuit 
modules, circuit boards and sub-assemblies in all segments of 
the electronic industry. Typical areas of application are found 
in production testing, QC, incoming inspection and preproduc- 
tion testing. 

The S-3120 is intended for use in measurement areas where 
the power supply voltages and pulse parameters do not require 
programming. It is not necessary to program pulse generators 
and power supplies when testing large quantities of devices 
of a single family that require the same input pulse characteris- 
tics, power supplies and logic voltages. 

The Type S-3120 can sequence through measurements at a 
rate of more than 100 measurements per second. The Disc Mem- 
ory stores a library of up to 1600 independent measurements 
and permits sorting and classifying devices with diagnostic test 
routines. The Disc Memory also permits random access to a 
library of 1600 measurements, permitting a computer or other 
control device to have complete control over the test measure- 
ment. The computer can make calculations from the test data 
and use the Disc Memory for further measurements and sorting 
at the maximum test rate. 

The following instruments comprise the Type S-3120: Type 
R568 Oscilloscope with the Type 3T6 Programmable Sampling 
Sweep and the Type 3S6 Programmable Sampling Unit, two Type 
S-3 Sampling Heads, Type R240 Program Control Unit, a Disc 
Memory, Punched Tape Reader, Type R115 MOD 814R Pulse 
Generator, two Power Supplies, two Probe Choppers; enclosed 
in a single-bay cabinet with a pull-out drawer that is used 
as a test station. 

242 




CHARACTERISTICS 

VERTICAL AMPLIFIER 

The included 10X or 100X probe attenuators must be used 

with the included probe choppers. Vertical characteristics 

are stated with the 10X attenuator. 

Voltage measurements are from 20 mV/div to 2 V/div (8 div 

full scale), accurate within 3%. 

Bandwidth is equivalent to DC to 875 MHz. 

Risetime is less than or equal to 400 ps. 

Input characteristics are 1 Mfi paralleled by 2 pF. 

Programmable DC offset is from +9.95 V to —9.95 V in 50 

mV steps. 

TIME BASE 

Programmable sweep time/div is from lOOps/div to 0.5s/div 
in 30 calibrated steps, accurate within 3%. 
Programmable digital delay range is from to 999.9 jus in 
increments of 100 ps, 1 ns or 100 ns depending on the sweep 
time/div. 

Automatic triggering eliminates the need for trigger adjust- 
ments over a wide range of trigger amplitudes, shapes and 
repetition rates. Automatically triggers on signals of 100 mV 
to 500-mV amplitude over a frequency range from DC to 
100 MHz. 



typb S-3120 



DIGITAL UNIT 

Units of measure are read out in V, mV, ns, ps, ms, s. 
Numerical readout is from -3999 to +3999. 
Programmable measurement limits are from —3999 to +3999. 
Data output is in parallel BCD code, 29 lines, (l, 2, 4, 8; 
true = ground, false = +12 V). 

MEMORY AND PROGRAMMING 
Storage capacity is 1600 measurements. Programming format 
is a fixed word length of 48 4-bit characters. Parity of each 
character is checked for positive parity compliance. Program 
access time is 17 ms average and can be optimized to ap- 
proximately 1 ms through minimum-access programming. 

PULSE GENERATOR 
The Tektronix Type 115 MOD 81 4R features output connectors 
on the rear panel, 10-ns to 100-jus separate and variable rise- 
times and falltimes, 100-ns to 10-ms pulse periods, 50-ns to 
500-/HS pulse delay or burst time, 50-ns to 500-^.s pulse width, 
+ 5-V to — 5-V DC offset and up to 10 V into 50 n, positive 
or negative. 

TWO POWER SUPPLIES 
The Power Designs, Inc. Model 2005 Precision Power Source 
features a digitally-selected operating range from to 20 V, 
to 500 mA; accuracy is within 0.1% ±1 mV; load and line 
regulation is less than 0.0005% or 100 /tV; noise and ripple 
is less than 100,aV, P-P; and stability is less than 100-juV drift 
per 8 hours. 

DISPLAY UNIT 
CRT display is 8 x 10 cm with P31 phosphor. 
Calibrator provides 100 kHz accurate within 0.05%, and ap- 
proximately 1-kHz signals; amplitudes of 0.5 V and 5 V P-P 
within 2% into >100-kO load, or 50 mV and 500 mV P-P 
within 2% into a 1 % 50-Q load. 

TEST STATION 

The Test Station is a pull-out drawer that provides the inter- 
face between the Type S-3120 and the device under test. All 
of the inputs and outputs of the Type S-3120 are available on 
a 56-pin connector and through 50-fi connectors located in the 
Test Station. A text fixture containing a socket for the device 
under test, and the appropriate test circuitry for input and out- 
put signals can quickly and easily be inserted into the 56-pin 
connector and the 50-n connectors. This feature permits the 
test fixture to be easily changed when new devices are to be 
checked. Two unwired test fixture cards are included with 
the Type S-3120. They require circuit design and wiring to 
obtain a proper interface to the device under test. A system 
performance check-out test fixture card is also included. Con- 
sult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for 
quotations on wired test fixture cards for specific devices 
and tests. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

105 V to 125 V, 60 Hz, approx 700 watts at 115 V and 60 Hz. 
Rear panel selector on each instrument provides rapid ac- 
commodation for line-voltage ranges. 

DIMENSIONS 
The Type S-3120 is 72 inches high, 23 V 2 inches wide and 32 
inches deep. Instruments are mounted on slide-out tracks and 
individually can be pulled out, tilted, and locked in any one 
of seven positions for convenient access. 



INSTALLATION 

A Tektronix System Specialist installs the Type S-3120. He 
checks the complete system for proper operation, and assures 
that it meets or exceeds published specifications. 
TYPE S-3120 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . $29,500 

Includes the following instruments in a single-bay rack with 
a pull-out drawer that serves as a test station: Type R568 
Oscilloscope; Type R230 Digital Unit; Type 3S6 Programmable 
Sampling Unit; Type 3T6 Programmable Sampling Sweep; two 
Type S-3 Sampling Heads; Type R240 Program Control Unit; 
Disc Memory; Punched Tape Reader; Type 115 Pulse Genera- 
tor MOD 81 4R in rack adapter; two Power Supplies; two 
Probe Choppers; two unwired test fixture cards; a perform- 
ance check-out test fixture card; and includes the standard 
accessories of the above instruments. 

PUNCHED TAPE PROGRAMMING ONLY 

The Type S-3121 is identical to the standard Type S-3120 with 
the exception that the Disc Memory is deleted, and program- 
ming is accomplished with the Punched Tape Reader. The maxi- 
mum measurement rate is 5 measurements per second. The Disc 
Memory can be added to the system at any time. 
TYPE S-3121 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . $22,900 

DISC MEMORY PROGRAMMING ONLY 

The Type S-3122 deletes the Punched Tape Reader from the 
standard Type S-3120. The Disc Memory features a maximum 
measurement rate of 100 measurements per second. The Punched 
Tape Reader can be added to the system at any time. 
TYPE S-3122 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . $28,250 

OPTIONS 

TEST FIXTURE CARDS 

Additional unwired test fixture cards can be ordered at any 
time. They require circuit design and wiring to obtain a pro- 
per interface to the device under test. The fixture cards mate 
to the 56-pin connector in the Type S-3120 and have a coax- 
ial connector for the pulse generator input and two probe con- 
nectors mounted on the card. 
Order 670-1016-00 $ 65 

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION 

The automatic-calibration option checks and adjusts, when 
necessary, the vertical deflection factor (20 mV/div to 1 V/ 
div) and the horizontal sweep rates (1 ns/div to 0.5 s/div) to 
within 1%*. 
Order 015-0131-00 $3480 

TAPE PUNCH 

The Tape Punch provides punched tape copies of program 
data stored in the Disc Memory. The Tape Punch can be 
ordered installed, when ordering an S-3120. 
Tape Punch installed $2575 

The Type S-3120 is also available with different Sampling 
Heads featuring up to 25-ps risetime capabilities, and data 
recording options. It is available in single-bay fully enclosed 
cabinet with an operator table on one side (similar to Type 
S-3130). Consult your Field Engineer, Representative or Dis- 
tributor for additional information. 

♦Accuracy on 20-mV/div and 50-mV/div positions is within 5% and 2% 
respectively. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

243 



type S-3130 

DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM 





• DYNAMIC MEASUREMENT 

PULSE RISETIME AND FALLTIME 
PULSE WIDTH AND PERIOD 
PROPAGATION DELAY AND STORAGE TIME 
PULSE AMPLITUDE AND SATURATION VOLTAGE 
MANY OTHER SPECIFIC MEASUREMENTS 



• 100 MEASUREMENTS PER SECOND 

• 400-ps RISETIME 

• PROGRAM BRANCHING FOR DIAGNOSTIC 

TESTING 



• 1600 MEASUREMENT STORAGE 

• PROGRAMMABLE 

PULSE GENERATOR 
POWER SUPPLIES 

244 



• 1 00 ps/DIV-to-500 ms/DIV 

CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE 

• 20 mV/DIV-to-2 V/DIV 

CALIBRATED VOLTAGE RANGE 



type S-3130 



The Type S-3130 Digital Measurement System is a dynamic 
measurement system intended for measuring the performance 
of active devices under simulated operating conditions. It is 
designed to test integrated circuits, transistors, diodes, circuit 
modules, circuit boards and sub-assemblies in all segments of 
the electronic industry. Typical areas of application are found 
in production testing, QC, incoming inspection and preproduc- 
tion. 

The Type S-3130 can sequence through measurements at a 
rate of more than 100 measurements per second. The Disc 
Memory provides local storage and random access to 1600 in- 
dependent measurements, and permits sorting and classifying. 
Diagnostic test routines may also be performed. Provisions are 
made for a computer or other control device to control the 
measurement or measurement routine. The computer can make 
calculations based on test data and employ the Disc Memory 
for further measurements. 

The following instruments comprise the Type S-3130: Type 
R568 Oscilloscope with the Type 3T6 Programmable Sampling 
Sweep and Type 3S6 Programmable Sampling Unit, two Type 
S-3 Sampling Heads, Type R240 Program Control Unit, Type 
R250 Auxiliary Program Unit, Type Rl 16 MOD 703L Program- 
mable Pulse Generator, four Programmable Power Supplies, 
a Disc Memory, Punched Tape Reader, Probe Choppers, and 
a dual-bay enclosed cabinet with an operator table contain- 
ing Test Station at one side. Several options for the Type 
S-3130 are available to satisfy specific measurement require- 
ments. 

VERTICAL AMPLIFIER 

Vertical characteristics are stated with the 10X attenuator. 

Either the 10X or 100X attenuators must be used with the 

included probe choppers. 

Voltage measurements are from 20mV/div to 2V/div (8 

div full scale) accurate within 3%. 

Bandwidth is equivalent to DC to 875 MHz. 

Risetime is less than or equal to 400 ps. 

Input characteristics are 1 Mn paralleled by 2 pF. 

Programmable DC offset is from +9.95 V to —9.95 V in 

50-mV steps. 

TIME BASE 

Programmable sweep time/div is from lOOps/div to 0.5s/div 
in 30 calibrated steps, accurate within 3%. 

Programmable digital delay range is from to 999.9 /is in 
increments of lOOps, 1 ns or 100 ns, depending on the sweep 
time/div. 

Automatic triggering eliminates the need for trigger adjust- 
ments over a wide range of trigger amplitudes, shapes and 
repetition rates. Automatically triggers on signals of 100-mV 
to 500-mV amplitude over a frequency range from DC to 100- 
MHz. 




DIGITAL UNIT 

Units of measure are readout in V, mV, ns, /as, ms, s. 
Numerical readout is from -3999 to +3999. 
Programmable measurement limits are from —3999 to +3999. 
Data output is in parallel BCD code, 29 lines; 1, 2, 4, 8; 
true = ground, false = +12 V. 

MEMORY AND PROGRAMMING 

Storage capacity is 1600 measurements. Programming for- 
mat is a fixed word length of 96 4-bit characters. A parity 
check is made on each character read into the Type 240 
Program Control Unit. Program access time is 17 ms average 
and can be optimized to approximately 1 ms through mini- 
mum-access time programming. 360 parallel program lines 
are available to various systems instruments. 

THREE 40-VOLT PROGRAMMABLE POWER SUPPLIES 

Operating ranges from to ±40 V; 500 mA, programmed in 
10-mV steps, repeatable within 0.5%, ±3 mV. Output slewing 
rate is 20V/ms. Load regulation is within 0.25% or 1 mV, 
whichever is greater. Line regulation is within 0.02% or 0.5 
mV, whichever is greater. Ripple is less than 3 mV RMS. 



245 



type S-3130 

80-VOLT PROGRAMMABLE POWER SUPPLY 

Operating range is from V to ±79.9 V; 200 mA, programmed 
in 100-mV steps, repeatable within 1.0%, ±3 mV. Output 
slewing rate is 20 V/ms. Load regulation is within 0.25% or 1 
mV, whichever is greater. Line regulation is within 0.02% or 
0.5 mV, whichever is greater. Ripple is less than 3 mV RMS. 

PROGRAMMABLE PULSE GENERATOR 

The Type R116 Programmable Pulse Generator is modified 
(MOD 703L) to include 5 program assembly cards, that pro- 
vide digital-to-analog conversion of program data. The Type 
R116 is calibrated with the program assembly cards that are 
mounted in the Type R250. The input and output connectors of 
the Type R116 are moved to the rear panel. 

All functions of the Type Rl 16 MOD 703L are programmed 
in the Type S-3130. These functions include: pulse period 
from 100 ns to 10.9 ms; pulse delay/period from 50 ns to 545 
/ts ; pulse width from 50 ns to 545 ps; pulse amplitude from 
0.4 V to 9.9 V; pulse risetime and falltime from 10 ns to 109 
/as; pulse DC offset from —4.9 V to +4.9 V. 

DISPLAY UNIT 

CRT display is 8x10 cm with P31 phosphor. 
Calibrator provides 100 kHz accurate within 0.05%, and ap- 
proximately 1-kHz signals; amplitudes of 0.5 V and 5 V P-P 
within 2% into >100-kn load, or 50 mV and 500 mV P-P 
within 2% into a 1% 50-Q load. 

TEST STATION 

The Test Station is in the operator table and provides the 
interface between the Type S-3130 and the device under test. 
Test inputs and outputs of the Type S-3130, incl. ling 32 pro- 
gram lines, are available on a 56-pin connector and through 
50-12 connectors located in the Test Station. A test fixture 
card that contains a socket for the device under test, and the 
appropriate test circuitry for input and output signals, can 
quickly and easily be inserted into the Test Station. This fea- 
ture permits the test fixture to be easily changed when 
various devices are to be checked. Two unwired test fixture 
cards are included with the Type S-3130. They require cir- 
cuit design and wiring to obtain a proper interface to the 
device under test. A system performance check-out test fixture 
card is also included. Consult your Field Engineer, Repre- 
sentative, or Distributor for quotations on wired test fixture 
cards for specific devices and tests. 

DIMENSIONS 

The Type S-3130 is 62y 2 inches high, 99 inches wide, and 46 
inches deep, including the operator table. Instruments are 
mounted on slide-out tracks and individually can be pulled 
out, tilted, and locked in any one of seven positions for con- 
venient access. 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

105 V to 125 V, 60 Hz, approx 1000 watts at 115 V and 60 
Hz. Rear panel selectors on each instrument provide rapid 
accommodation for line-voltage ranges. 



INSTALLATION 

A Tektronix System Specialist installs the Type S-3130. He 
checks the complete system for proper operation, and assures 
that it meets or exceeds published specifications. 

FACTORY TRAINING 

Tektronix provides an intensive 3-week System Training course 
on the Type S-3130. Theory of operation, programming, cali- 
bration, and trouble-shooting are discussed for each System 
instrument, as well as the complete System. Classes are held 
at the Tektronix Industrial Park, Beaverton, Oregon. 

TYPE S-3130 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . . $42,500 

Includes the following instruments in a dual-bay enclosed 
cabinet with operator table containing a Test Station at one 
side: Type R568 Oscilloscope; Type R230 Digital Unit; Type 
R240 Program Control Unit; Type R250 Program Unit; Type 
3S6 Programmable Sampling Unit; Type 3T6 Programmable 
Sampling Sweep; two Type S-3 Sampling Heads; Type R116 
Programmable Pulse Generator MOD 703L; Disc Memory; 
Punched Tape Reader; four Programmable Power Supplies; 
two Probe Choppers; two unwired test fixture cards; a per- 
formance check-out test fixture card; and includes the stand- 
ard accessories of the above instruments. 



PUNCHED TAPE PROGRAMMING ONLY 

The Type S-3131 is identical to the standard Type S-3130 
with the exception that the Disc Memory is deleted and program- 
ming is accomplished with the Punched Tape Reader. The maxi- 
mum measurement rate with the Punched Tape Reader is 3 meas- 
urements per second. The Disc Memory can be added to the 
system at any time. 

TYPE S-3131 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . . $35,900 



DISC MEMORY PROGRAMMING ONLY 

The Type S-3132 deletes the Punched Tape Reader from the 
standard Type S-3130 and maintains the maximum measurement 
rate of 100 measurements per second. The Punched Tape Reader 
can be added to the system at any time. 

TYPE S-3132 DIGITAL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM . . $41,250 



246 



type S-3130 



OPTIONS 



DUAL-TEST STATIONS 

Dual-Test Stations are available for the Type S-3130 that 
permits full use of its measurement speed of 100 measurements 
per second. This lets the Type S-3130 scan the two test 
stations, making measurements from either station on com- 
mand. If the Type S-3130 is making a measurement at one 
station and receives a start command from the other station, 
it finishes the first measurement sequence before switching 
stations. 

Each station has separate test fixture cards that permit check- 
ing different devices at each station. The station selects its 
own measurement sequence, indicates the measurement limit 
results (high, low, go), has a start and reset button, and indi- 
cates the station's condition of test (in process or waiting). 

Order 015-0133-00 $3500 

AUTOMATIC CALIBRATION 

The automatic-calibration option checks and adjusts, when 

necessary, the vertical deflection factor (20 mV/div to 1 V/div) 

and the horizontal sweep rates (1 ns/div to 0.5 s/div) to within 

1%*. 

Order 015-0131-00 $3480 

TAPE PUNCH 

The Tape Punch provides punched tape copies of program 
data stored in the Disc Memory. The Tape Punch can be 
ordered installed, when ordering a Type S-3130. 

Tape Punch, installed $2575 




TEST FIXTURE CARDS 

Additional unwired test fixture cards can be ordered at 
any time. They require circuit design and wiring to obtain 
a proper interface to the device under test. The fixture card 
mates to the 56-pin connector in the Type S-3130 and has a 
coaxial connector for the pulse generator input and has two 
probe connectors mounted on the card. 

Order 670-1016-00 $65 



TYPE R250 AUXILIARY PROGRAM UNIT 

An additional Type R250 can be added to the Type S-3130 
System. The Type R250 adds 192 program lines that can be 
used to program additional power supplies, pulse generators, 
programmable fixtures, automatic handler, or other program- 
mable equipment. Consult your Tektronix Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for a quotation on the Type 
R250 designed to do your specific programming job. 

The Type S-3130 is also available with different Sampling 
Heads featuring up to 25-ps risetime capabilities, and data re- 
cording options. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, 
or Distributor for additional information. 



♦Accuracy on 20-mV/div and 50-mV/div positions is within 5% and 2% 
respectively. 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



247 



TYPE 



TRANSISTOR-CURVE TRACER 




• DISPLAY DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTIC CURVES 

• DIRECT COMPARISON OF TRANSISTOR 
CHARACTERISTICS 

• MAKE DIODE MEASUREMENTS 



The Type 575 Transistor-Curve Tracer displays the dynamic 
characteristic curves of both NPN and PNP transistors. Several 
different transistor characteristic curves may be displayed, in- 
cluding the collector family in the common-base and common- 
emitter configuration. In addition to the transistor curves, the 
Type 575 is used to display dynamic characteristics of a wide 
range of semiconductor devices. 

A special model (Type 575 MOD 122C), although similar to 
the Type 575, provides much higher voltages for diode break- 
down test and collector supply. Horizontal deflection factor 
selections are extended to 200 V/div to accommodate the higher 
voltages. 

Transistors under test are inserted into either a common-base 
or common-emitter test circuit. The transistor collector has a 
sweep voltage applied to it while a step voltage or current 
is applied to either the base or emitter (whichever is unground- 
ed). Voltage, for the collector, sweeps between zero and a 
selectable value. The Step Generator applies steps to the base 
or emitter that start at zero and build up to a value determined 
by the number of steps and value of each step as selected with 
front-panel controls. Each sequence of steps, in conjunction with 
the sweep voltage on the collector, produces one family of 
characteristic curves. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



BASE OR EMITTER STEP GENERATOR— 

Type of Steps — Steps are increments of voltage or current and 
are either positive or negative. 

Voltage Increments— Selectable from lOmV/step to 0.2 V/ step 
±3% with 2.4-A current capability. 

Current Increments — Selectable from 1 uA/step to 200 mA/step, 
±3%. 

Stepping Rate — 2 or 4 times line frequency. 

Number of Steps — Continuously variable from 4 to 12 steps per 
family of characteristic curves. 

Single or Repetitive — Stops after a single family of curves is gen- 
erated, or repeatedly generates the family of curves. 

COLLECTOR SWEEP GENERATOR— 

Frequency — 2 times line frequency. 

Peak Sweep Voltage — Continuously variable from V to 20 V 
minimum with 10-A capability and from V to 200 V minimum 
with 1-A capability. 

Type 575 MOD 122G Continuously variable from 0-20 V mini- 
mum with 10-A capability, 0-200 V minimum with 1-A capabil- 
ity or 0-400 V minimum with 0.5-A capability. 

Polarity — positive or negative. A third switch position is added 
on Type 575 MOD 122C providing + and — (AC) to 1500 V 
for diode breakdown tests. 



248 



VERTICAL DISPLAY 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 

Transistor Collector Current— 1 //A/div to 2 A/div, ±3%. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Current— 1 /xA/div to 200 mA/div, 
±3%. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage — lOmV/div to 0.5 V/div, 

±3%. 

Base or Emitter Source Voltage — lOmV/div to 0.2 V/div, ±3%. 



HORIZONTAL DISPLAY 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 

Transistor Collector Voltage— 10 mV/div to 20 V/div, ±3%. 
MOD 122C— lOmV/div to 200 V/div, ±3%. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Current— 1 t<A/div to 200 mA/div, 
±3%. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage— 10 mV/div to 0.5 V/div, 
±3%. 

Base or Emitter Source Voltage— 10 mV/div to 0.2 V/div, ±3%. 



CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 10x10 div ( 5 / u inch per div). 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

COMPARISON SWITCH— Switch allows switching between two 
semiconductors for comparison. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 50 to 
60 Hz, 410 watts max. 



type 575 



COLLECTOR SWEEP GENERATOR 

The Collector Sweep Generator provides the sweep voltages 
that drive the collector of the transistor under test. These volt- 
ages sweep between zero and a peak value selected with a 
front-panel control. The peak voltage is either positive or 
negative depending on the setting of the polarity switch to 
allow the collector voltages to sweep between zero and posi- 
tive peak values or zero and negative peak values. The repeti- 
tion rate of the sweep is 2 times the line frequency; thus the 
collector voltage sweeps between zero and the peak value 
at least once for each step applied to the transistor base or 
emitter. 

The peak sweep voltage is continuously adjustable from 
zero to 20 V with 10-A capability or from zero to 200 V with 
1-A current capability. (Additional to 400-V with 0.5-A cur- 
rent capability is provided on Type 575 MOD 122C.) 

The collector current limiting resistance is selected from 16 
values ranging from 1 ohm to 100 kilohms ±5%. 

On Type 575 MOD 122C, a third position has been added to 
the POLARITY switch, providing + and — (AC) to 1500 V. 



BASE OR EMITTER STEP GENERATOR 

The Step Generator develops current or voltage steps to 
drive the base or emitter (whichever is ungrounded) of the 
transistor under test. These steps are used to generate either 
repetitive or single-family (as selected) characteristic curves 
for display. The steps are adjustable in number from 4 to 
12 and move in a positive or negative direction depending on 
the polarity switch setting. Step repetition rate is selectable 
as either 120 steps/s or 240 steps/s (values equal to 2X or 
4X the line frequency). A control is available to set the start- 
ing point of a series of steps to zero. 

Each step has a rise that is selected as either a value of 
current or a value of voltage. The value of each step rise in 
current ranges from 0.001 mA/step to 200 mA/step and is se- 
lected from 17 values that are in a 1-2-5 sequence. The value 
of each step rise in voltage is from 0.01 V/step to 0.2 V/step 
and is selected from 5 values that are in a 1-2-5 sequence. 
Also a switch is provided for grounding the transistor input 
to give a zero drive-voltage reference check, and opening the 
transistor input to give a zero drive-current reference check. 

The driving resistance of the step generator, when devel- 
oping voltage steps, is selected from 24 values that range 
from 1 ohm to 22 kilohms ±10%. Any other value can be 
added externally. 



VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM 

Signals used for vertical deflection are selected from various 
points in the transistor test circuit. Each point has several 
selectable deflection factors available. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Transistor Collector Current— 10 iiA/div to 1 A/div in 16 
steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Pushbuttons are provided for multi- 
plying each step by 2 or 0.1 thus extending the deflection 
factor from 1 iiA/div to 2 A/div. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Current— 1 iiA/div to 200 mA/div 
in 17 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage— 10 mV/div to 0.5 V/div 
in 6 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 

Base or Emitter Source Voltage— 10 mV/div to 0.2 V/div in 5 
steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 



HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM 

Signals used for horizontal deflection are selected from 
various points in the transistor test circuit. Each point has 
several selectable deflection factors available. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Transistor Collector Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 20 V/div in 11 

steps, 1-2-5 sequence. (10 m V/div to 200 V/div on Type 575 

MOD 122C). 

Transistor Base or Emitter Current— 0.001 mA/div to 200 
mA/div in 17 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 

Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 0.5 V/div 
in 6 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 

Base or Emitter Source Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 0.2 V/div in 
5 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 



249 



TYPE 




PNP TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs collector voltage with base 
grounded and constant-current emitter steps. Col- 
lector sweep is to 120 V through a 5-k load 
resistor, emitter current 1 mA/step. Vertical de- 
flection is 1 mA/div, horizontal deflection 10 
V/div. 



~~mr 




PNP TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs collector voltage with base 
grounded and constant-current emitter steps. Col- 
lector sweep is to 1.5 V, emitter current 200 
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 200 mA/div, 
horizontal deflection 0.1 V/div. 



'«Hk\SE553 



£===«»■■■ 






NPN TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs collector voltage 
with constant-voltage base steps. Col- 
lector sweep is to 2 V, base voltage 
0.02 V/step, vertical deflection is 5 mA/ 
div, horizontal deflection 0.2 V/div. 



■■■■■ 

■iiii 



ssssri 




■MM 


■»'ll 


■IIII1MI 


mmwM 




mmu mmmm 


■v« 


■?il 


IP4I 


SKI 




PNP TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs collector voltage 
with constant-current base steps. Col- 
lector sweep is to 5 V with a 0.25- 
ohm load, base current is 50 mA/step. 
Vertical deflection is 1000 mA/div, hori- 
zontal deflection 0.5 V/div. 



NPN TRANSISTOR 

Base current vs base voltage with 
constant-current base steps. Collector 
sweep is to 1 V, base current 0.1 
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 0.1 mA/ 
div, horizontal deflection 0.05 V/div. 
Dots represent equal increments of base 
current. Dynamic base impedance can be 
determined from this display. 



NPN TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs base current with 
constant-current base steps. Collector 
sweep is to 1.5 V, base current 0.1 
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 5 mA/ 
div collector current, horizontal deflec- 
tion 0.1 mA/div base current. Incre- 
mental and DC current gain can be de- 
termined from this display. 



iH! 


■■■■»■■■■ 


■■■»!■■! 


■r= ="1B 


W ^zzzzzzzzz^. 11 


/fiS -- aat - sss=i - i || 


t/iiBBBaaa^l 


liHHI ivm 


ira m>] 


&■■■■«■■■ 



m 

i « 

ii 



ii 

IB 



EHHHU 




NPN TRANSISTOR 

Base voltage vs collector voltage with 
constant-current base steps. Collector 
sweep is to 1 V, base current 0.1 mA/ 
step. Vertical deflection is 0.05-V/div 
base voltage, horizontal deflection 0.1- 
V/div collector voltage. 



NPN TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs collector voltage 
with constant-current base steps. Collec- 
tor sweep is to 2 V, base current 0.01 
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 0.5 mA/ 
div, horizontal deflection 0.2 V/div. 



NPN TRANSISTOR 

Collector current vs bose voltage with 
constant-voltage base steps. Collector 
sweep is to 1.5 V, base voltage 0.05 
V/step with a 1-ohm source impedance. 
Vertical deflection is 0.5 mA/div, hori- 
zontal deflection 0.05 V/div. 



250 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

4-kV accelerating voltage, P31 phosphor normally supplied; 
PI, P2, P7, or Pll are optional without extra charge. Consult 
your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for applica- 
tion information and availability. 

GRATICULE 

External, 3'/ 8 inch x 3y 8 inch viewing area, 10 divisions each 
axis with each division measuring 5 / u inch. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

TRANSISTOR TEST PANEL— The transistor test panel has 
provisions for two transistors at the same time. Two sockets 
accept low-power transistors with short leads and three binding 
posts alongside the sockets accept other transistor and semi- 
conductors. One switch will change the sockets from the com- 
mon-emitter to the common-base test circuit configuration. 
A second switch allows two transistors inserted into the test 
circuit to be rapidly compared by switching the test conditions 
from one to the other. 

POWER REQUIREMENT 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117 V nominal); may be ordered 
with transformer taps connected for nominal values of 107, 
127, 214, 234, or 254 V; 50 to 60 Hz. 410 watts maximum. 

TYPE 575 AND TYPE 575 MOD 122C DIMENSIONS AND 



WEIGHTS 








Height 




16% in 


41 .6 cm 


Width 




13 in 


33 cm 


Depth 




23% in 


60 cm 


Net weight 




66'/ 4 lb 


30.1 kg 


Domestic shipp 


ing weight 


« 84 lb 


:=38.2 kg 


Export-packed 


weight 


Sil02 lb 


=:46.4 kg 



TYPE 575 AND TYPE 575 MOD 122C INCLUDED STANDARD 

ACCESSORIES 
Two transistor adapters, long lead (013-0069-00); two transistor 
adapters, TO-3 (013-0070-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013- 
00); two 2N1381 transistors (151-0039-00); 3-conductor power 
cord (161-0010-03); smoke-gray filter (378-0567-00); two in- 
struction manuals (070-0255-00); measurement concepts book- 
let "Semiconductor Device Measurements" (062-1009-00). 

TYPE 575 TRANSISTOR CURVE TRACER $1200 

INCREASED COLLECTOR VOLTAGE 

Type 575 MOD 122C, although similar to the Type 575, pro- 
vides much higher diode breakdown test voltage (variable 
from zero to 1.5 kV, maximum short circuit current of 1 mA); 
also provides much higher collector supply (up to 400 V at 0.5 A). 

TYPE 575 MOD 122C TRANSISTOR CURVE TRACER $1475 



TYPE 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and pro- 
vide added convenience. See catalog accessory pages for addi- 
tional information on these and other items. 

RACKMOUNT ADAPTER 

Cradle mount to adapt the Type 575 Transistor-Curve Tracer 
for rackmounting. Consists of a cradle to support instru- 
ment in any standard 19-inch relay rack and mask to fit around 
regular instrument panel. Tektronix blue vinyl finish. Rack 
height requirements 17'/ 2 inch. Order 040-0281-00 $31.00 



TEST FIXTURES 



013-0072-00 





013-0073-00 



I * 



013-0074-00 



I I 



013-0079-00 



*A 



DIODE TEST FIXTURE 
Holds axial-lead diodes. Order 013-0072-00 $ 6.00 

ADAPTER BOX 

Allows mounting of additional semiconductor sockets. Order 
013-0073-00 $ 4.00 

POWER TRANSISTOR SOCKET 

For power transistors with hook leads. Order 013-0074-00 
$ 7.50 

DIODE TEST ADAPTER 
Production test fixture for rapid handling. Order 013-0079-00 
$ 25.00 

CAMERA 

The standard C-12 camera satisfies most trace-recording re- 
quirements. For applications that might require a different 
viewing system, lens, or back, refer to camera descriptions or 
consult your field engineer, representative, or distributor. 
Standard C-12: f/1.9 — 1:0.85 lens, on-axis, no parallax view- 
ing, Polaroid Land* Pack-Film Back, order C-12 .. $460.00 
Mounting Adapter for C-12, order 016-0226-01 $ 15.00 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 
Model 202-1: storage drawer, 9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope 
tray, order Type 202-1 $130.00 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipmenf. General Information page. 



251 



type 775 

HIGH-CURRENT ADAPTER 



• 200-A COLLECTOR DISPLAYS 

• 12- A BASE SUPPLY 

The Type 175 Transistor-Curve Tracer High-Current Adapter 
enables the Type 575 to plot and display characteristic curves of 
high-current semiconductors. Basically the Type 175 contains a 
high-current Collector Sweep Generator, a high-current Base or 
Emitter Step Generator and high-current test circuits that are 
used in place of those in the Type 575. The 175 also contains 
the necessary circuits to convert these high currents into deflec- 
tion signals suitable for display on the Type 575 CRT. There is 
one source for the vertical deflection signal: the transistor col- 
lector current. There are two sources for the horizontal deflection 
signal: transistor collector voltage and transistor base or emitter 
voltage. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



BASE OR EMITTER STEP GENERATOR 

Type of Steps — Steps are increments of voltage or current and 

are either positive or negative. 
Voltage Increments — Selectable from 20 mV/step to 0.5V/step 

with 12-A current capability. 

Current Increments — Selectable from 1 mA/step to 1 A/step. 

Stepping Rate — 2 or 4 times line frequency. 

Number of Steps — Continuously variable from 4 to 12 steps per 

family of characteristic curves. 
Single or Repetitive — Stops after a single family of curves is 

generated, or repeatedly generates the family of curves. 

COLLECTOR SWEEP GENERATOR 

Frequency — 2 times line frequency. 

Peak Sweep Voltage — Continuously variable from V to 20 V 
with 200-A capability and V to 100 V with 40-A capability. 
Polarity- — positive or negative. 

VERTICAL 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Transistor Collector Current — 5 mA/div to 20 A/div. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Transistor Collector Voltage— 0.1 V/div to lOV/div. 
Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage — 0.1 V/div to 2 V/div. 

OTHER 

COMPARISON SWITCH— Allows switching between two semi- 
conductors for comparison. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 1100 
watts max. 




BASE STEP GENERATOR 

The Type 175 step generator produces ten input steps of con- 
stant current from 1 mA/step to 1 amp/step and five input steps 
of constant voltage from 0.02 V/step to 0.5 V/step. A polarity 
switch provides for stepping the input in either the positive or 
negative direction. The STEPS/FAMILY control on Type 575 
adjusts the number of steps per family from 4 to 12. A repeti- 
tive or single-family display can be presented. Either a 120- 
steps/s or 240-steps/s repetition rate can be selected. When 
used with a 50-hertz supply, the step/s rate will be either 100 
or 200. 

A switch grounds the transistor input for a zero voltage ref- 
erence check, and opens the transistor input for a zero current 
reference check. The starting point of input current or voltage 
steps can be adjusted with the STEP ZERO control. 

When constant-voltage input steps are in use, a resistance 
is inserted in series with the source impedance of the step gen- 
erator. This driving resistance can be selected from eleven values, 
0.5 ohms to 1,000 ohms. 



252 



type 775 



COLLECTOR SWEEP GENERATOR 

The Collector Sweep Generator provides the sweep voltages 
that drive the collector of the transistor under test. These volt- 
ages sweep between zero and a peak value selected with a 
front-panel control. The peak voltage is either positive or nega- 
tive depending on the setting of the polarity switch to allow 
the collector voltages to sweep between zero and positive peak 
values or zero and negative peak values. The repetition rate of 
the sweep is 2 times the line frequency; thus the collector voltage 
sweeps between zero and the peak value at least once for each 
step applied to the transistor base or emitter. 

The peak sweep voltage is continuously adjustable from zero 
to 20 V with 200-A capability or from zero to 100 V with 40-A 
capability. Also, in the 0-1 00 V range a 300-ohm collector- 
current-limiting resistor can be switched in. Any other desired 
resistance can be added externally. 

VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM 

The signal used for vertical deflection is the transistor collector 
current from the transistor test circuit. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Transistor Collector Current — 5 mA/div to 20 A/div in 12 steps, 
1-2-5 sequence. 

HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM 

Signals used for horizontal deflection are selected from various 
points in the transistor test circuit. Each point has several select- 
able deflection factors available. 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Transistor Collector Voltage — 0.1 V/div to lOV/div in 7 steps, 

1-2-5 sequence. 
Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage — 0.1 V/div to 2 V/div in 5 

steps, 1-2-5 sequence. 



OTHER 

TRANSISTOR TEST PANEL 

The Type 175 Transistor Test Panel is basically the same as 
that of the Type 575. Special connectors and cables are 
provided for high-current applications and for eliminating 
measurement errors due to voltage drops in high-current 
carrying leads. 

POWER REQUIREMENT 

Type 175 wired for 105 to 125 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 1100 watts 
maximum. Type 175 MOD 167C wired for 210 to 250 V, 50 
to 60 Hz, 1100 watts maximum. 

TYPE 175 AND TYPE 175 MOD 167C DIMENSIONS AND 
WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

TYPE 175 AND TYPE 175 MOD 167C STANDARD 
ACCESSORIES 

Two black output leads (012-0014-00); two red output leads 
(012-0015-00); interconnecting cable (012-0042-00); two red 
test cables (012-0043-00); two black test cables (012-0044-00); 
575 adapter cable (012-0045-00); two blue test leads (012-0056- 
00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord 
(161-0030-01); 3-conductor power cord, 20-in (161-0014-01); 
two lock washers (210-0010-00); two nuts (210-0410-00); two 
screws (212-0520-00); two bolt hinges (214-0152-00); two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0255-00). 

TYPE 175 HIGH-CURRENT ADAPTER $1600 

TYPE 175 MOD 167C $1600 

Modifies the Type 175 for 210-250 volts, 50 to 60 Hz operation. 



12V, 6 in 


30.7 cm 


13 1 /,* in 


33.2 cm 


23% in 


60 cm 


83% lb 


38 kg 


117 lb 


=53.2 kg 


139 lb 


=63.2 kg 



CHARACTERISTIC CURVE DISPLAYS WITH TYPE 175 





bs mm 
mm eh 

H MW/M 

mm m 

mm mmm 

BB 1SII 

■■KB 

■ KB 

BBB 



Collector current vs collector voltage 
(emphasis on saturation resistance). Verti- 
cal deflection is 10 A/div, horizontal de- 
flection is 0.2 V/div. Base drive is 500 
mA/step (top curve is 2.5 A). 



Collector current vs base voltage (col- 
lector sweep voltage is 4.2 V). Vertical 
deflection is 10 A/div, horizontal deflec- 
tion is 0.1 V/div. Base drive is 500 mA/ 
step. 



Collector current vs collector voltage. 
Vertical deflection is 1 A/div, horizontal 
deflection is 1.0 V/div. Base drive is 500 
mA/step (top curve is 2.5 A). 



253 



TYPE 576 

CURVE 



NEW 




■ * 



• BIG 6 1/ 2 -INCH CRT 

• PARAMETER READOUT 
Including /3/div or g m /dlv 

• THREE COLLECTOR 
SUPPLY MODES 

• AUTO POSITIONING 
AND POLARITY TRACKING 



• PULSED BASE OPERATION 

• CALIBRATED DISPLAY OFFSET 
WITH MAGNIFIER 

• KELVIN SENSING 
FOR HIGH CURRENT TESTS 

• PROTECTIVE FEATURES FOR 
OPERATOR AND DEVICE 



The Type 576 brings meaningful performance to semicon- 


CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 


ductor testing and establishes a new standard in human en- 
gineering features. The measurement requirements for diodes, 
transistors, and FET's (in all their different forms) established 
the functions of the Type 576; innovative circuit and compo- 
nent engineering make those measurements easy, accurate, safe 
and more understandable. 

The most noticeable new feature is PARAMETER READOUT. 
Placed adjacent to the CRT (where you normally focus your 
attention) are digital indicators of vertical and horizontal de- 
flection factors, step amplitude, and Beta/div or g m /div. Read- 
out offers convenience for test setup and labeled waveform 
photography. It also offers freedom from the simple but bother- 
some arithmetic required to compute Beta/div or g m /div or to 
correct for magnifiers or multipliers. The other features, such 
as multifunction switching, calibrated display offset, and many 
more, are equally important to semiconductor testing applica- 
tions. The following page describes these features around 
waveform photographs of measurement situations. 


COLLECTOR SUPPLY 
VOLTAGE RANGE— V to 1500 V, continuously variable. 
POLARITY — positive, negative, or AC. 
PEAK CURRENT— 10 A to 0.1 A; doubled in pulse mode. 
POWER LIMIT SETTING— 0.1 W (or less) to 220 W in 6 

steps. 

STEP GENERATOR 
CURRENT STEPS— 5 nA/step (0.1 X MULT) to 200 mA/step; 

2 A max. 
VOLTAGE STEPS— 5 mV/step (0.1X MULT) to 2V/step; 40 V 

max including offset. 
CALIBRATED STEP OFFSET— to XI the step amplitude 

setting, AID or OPPOSE. 
NUMBER OF STEPS— to 10, digitally selectable. 
PULSED STEPS— 300 /us or 80 /xs pulse width. 

VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS 


CRT & READOUT 

CRT — 6Y 2 -inch rectangular; 10 cm x 10 cm calibrated area, 
4kV, P2 phosphor. 

READOUT— digital indicators of VERT CURRENT/div, HORIZ 
VOLTS/div, CURRENT or VOLTS per STEP, and BETA/div 
or g m /div. 


VERT COLLECTOR CURRENT— 0.1 /xA/div (XI MAG) to 
2 A/div. 

VERT EMITTER CURRENT— 1 nA/div to 2 mA/div. 

HORIZ COLLECTOR VOLTS— 5 mV (XI MAG) to 200V/div. 

HORIZ BASE VOLTS— 5 mV/div (XI MAG) to 2V/div. 

DISPLAY OFFSET AND MAGNIFIER— XI MAG with cali- 
brated positioning increases resolution and accuracy. 



254 



How the TYPE 576 
Makes the Measurement 

DIODES 



Easier 



TYPE 576 



■BIUI 

Nl 

' ■■ 

■■■■a 
■■■■■■■■I 

■■■■■■■■ 



«■■■■■■ 

■■ 1 

■■! ■■■■ 

■■I 1 

■■■■■■I 

■■■■■ Bs 
■■■■■BS 



■■!!■■! 

■■nar 



This test shows reverse breakdown and forward current characteristics simul- 
taneously. The AC mode (-J- and — collector sweep) was selected, which 
automatically positioned the trace to center-screen. The power limit (0.1 W) 
was selected with the direct-reading switch. The operator was protected 
from shock by the protective box, which disconnects voltage to the device 
when the cover is raised. The inserted waveform shows the forward and 
reverse characteristics of a tunnel diode. Identical functions were used ex- 
cept at different settings. 



This display of a zener diode test demonstrates the use of the CALIBRATED 
DISPLAY OFFSET and MAGNIFIER to increase resolution. The main waveform 
shows the zener region to be somewhere above 70 V. With the DISPLAY 
OFFSET and MAG, the trace was centered, positioned horizontally exactly 
7 divisions, and magnified 10 times (see insert}. The center graticule line 
is now a known 70 V with the horizontal scale at 1 V/div. The zener voltage 
at 1 mA can now be measured at 72.6 V, accurate within 2%. 



TRANSISTORS 






This is an NPN transistor family of curves. When 
the positive collector supply polarity was selected, 
the step generator polarity automatically became 
positive and the trace start was positioned to the 
proper point. The display shows a full 10-sfep 
family but the number of steps could have been 
digitally selected between 1 and 10. The param- 
eter readout effectively labels the waveform, giv- 
ing vertical collector current /div, horizontal col- 
lector volts/div, current amplitude per step, and 
computes Beta/div. 



This waveform Is a double exposure showing the 
increased readability for low-current devices ob- 
tained by using the DC collector supply mode. 
The wide "loops" are the result of the collector- 
to-base capacitance being swept at 120 Hz in the 
NORM collector supply mode. The center-line (in 
the middle of each loop) is the display obtained 
in the DC mode by manually turning the vari- 
able voltage control. The DC mode is functional 
since measurements can be made to 100nA/div 
for collector currents, or 1 nA/div in the leakage 
mode. 



This display is a power transistor test at 17-A 
collector current with 2 A into the base; Beta/div 
is shown as 10. Power devices can be checked 
at 10-A continuous or 20-A peak pulse mode 
current. Max base current is 2 A. The 80-/is 
pulsed base mode is used for duty-cycle limiting 
(300 /is also available) and single family opera- 
tion offers further control. Collector-emitter volt- 
age can be measured more accurately with the 
TO-3 and TO-66 adapters which employ KELVIN 
contacts to cancel the effects of contact resistance. 



FET's 
































|H^— ==— ^P^M 




Ml 


kr ■■■■■■] 






'111 




B 




&*■■ m 



H*S5 ■ 
: ■■■■ . 

1 

HriS ■■ 

■MS 


1 



The Type 576 is particularly well suited for FET measurements. Here a FET 
is operating in the enhancement mode [positive drain sweep and voltage 
steps) with the maximum power and gate current selected and limited for 
device protection. For operation in the depletion mode, the step generator 
polarity can be inverted (INVERT switch). The insert shows a FET with AC 
(positive and negative) drain sweep for inspection of the resistive region char- 
acteristics. 



This drain family shows FET characteristics in both enhancement and de- 
pletion modes, accomplished with the CALIBRATED DC STEP OFFSET. The 
voltage/step is selectable, the number of steps is digitally selectable between 
1 and 10, and the first step can be started from any DC plateau between 
and 10X the amplitude setting, aiding or opposing the step polarity. In this 
case an opposing DC voltage was selected allowing the positive steps to 
start below the zero bias point. 



255 



TYPE 



576 



COLLECTOR SUPPLY 
MODES 

NORM: positive or negative full wave rectified AC (line fre- 
quency). 

DC: positive or negative DC. No-load ripple <1% of volt- 
age or <0.1 % of full range voltage. 

LEAKAGE: emitter current rather than collector current meas- 
urements with an increase in the basic vertical deflection 
factor to 1 nA/div; DC supply voltage. 

VOLTAGES 

Peak open circuit voltages within +20% and —5% of in- 
dicated range. 

RANGES 15 V 75 V 350 V 1500 V 

MAX CONTINUOUS 
PEAK CURRENT 
PEAK PULSE 
MODE CURRENT 



10A 
;20A 



2A 

a A 



.5 V 
i\ A 



0.1 A 
0.2 A 



SERIES RESISTANCE— from 0.3 Q, to 6.5 Ma in 12 steps, all 
within 5% or 0.1 fi. 

PEAK POWER LIMIT 

SETTING 0.1 W, 0.5 W, 2.2 W, 10W, 50 W, 220 W, all 
within 25%. 

SAFETY INTERLOCK 

A protective cover over Test Terminals must be closed to 
apply collector voltage in 75 V, 350 V, and 1500 V ranges. 

STEP GENERATOR 

ACCURACY 

Current or voltage steps including offset. 

INCREMENTAL: within 5% between steps; within 10% with 
0.1 X MULT. 

ABSOLUTE: within 2% of total output including offset, or 
1% of AMPLITUDE setting, whichever is greater. 

OFFSET MULTIPLIER— to XI the AMPLITUDE setting, con- 
tinuously variable. Polarity AID(s) or OPPOSE(s) the step 
polarity. 

CURRENT MODE 

STEP AMPLITUDE RANGE— 5 nA/step (with 0.1 X MULT) to 
200 mA/step, 1-2-5 sequence. 

MAX CURRENT (steps and aiding offset)— 20X AMPLITUDE 
setting, except 10X (2 A) at 200 mA/step and 15X (1.5 A) 
at 100 mA/step. 

MAX VOLTAGE (steps and aiding offset)— at least 10 V. 

MAX OPPOSING OFFSET CURRENT— 1 OX AMPLITUDE switch 
setting or 10 mA, whichever is less. 

MAX OPPOSING VOLTAGE— limited at 1 to 3 V. 

RIPPLE plus NOISE— <0.5% of AMPLITUDE switch setting, 
or 2 nA P-P, whichever is greater. 

VOLTAGE MODE 

STEP AMPLITUDE RANGE— 5 mV/step (with 0.1 X MULT) to 
2V/step, 1-2-5 sequence. 

MAX VOLTAGE (steps and aiding offset)— 20X AMPLITUDE 
switch setting, 40 V max. 

MAX CURRENT (steps and aiding offset)— at least 2 A at 10 V, 
derating linearly to 10 mA at 40 V. 



SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT LIMITING— 20 m A, 100 mA, 500 
mA, or 2 A, all within 30%. £\ 

MAX OPPOSING OFFSET VOLTAGE— 1 OX AMPLITUDE switch ™ 
setting. 

MAX OPPOSING CURRENT— limited at 10 to 20 mA. 
RIPPLE plus NOISE— <0.5% of AMPLITUDE switch setting or 
2 mV P-P. 

STEP RATES 

0.5X, lX(NORM), and 2X the collector supply rate, which is 
twice line frequency. 

PULSED STEPS 

80 or 300 /ts width, +20% and —5%, at NORM or 0.5X 
rates. 

STEP/OFFSET POLARITY 

The STEP GEN polarity is the same as the COLLECTOR SUP- 
PLY polarity, and positive in the AC position. Step polarity 
may be inverted by actuating the INVERT pushbutton. 

STEP FAMILY 
REPETITIVE or SINGLE FAMILY (manually actuated). 

NUMBER OF STEPS 

Digitally selectable between 1 and 10. 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS 
DISPLAY ACCURACIES 

as a percentage of the highest on-screen value 



NORM and 
DC MODES 


NORMAL 


OFFSET and MAGNIFIED 
with CENTERLINE VALUE from: 


100-40 div 


35-15 div 


10-0 div 


Vert Collector Current 


3% 


2% 


3% 


4% 


Horiz Collector Volts 


3% 


2% 


3% 


4% 


Horiz Base Volts 


3% 


2% 


3% 


4% 


LEAKAGE MODE 

Vert Emitter Current/div: 










10 nA-2 mA/div 


3% ± 1 nA 








1 nA-200 /tA/div 
(magnified) 




2% ± 1 nA 


3% ± 1 nA 


4% ± 1 nA 


5, 2, 1 nA/div 


5% ± 1 nA 








Horiz Collector or Base 
Volts with Emitter 

Current/div of: 










>1 fiA 


3% 


2% 


3% 


4% 


100, 10, or 1 nA 


3% plus 

25 mV/vert 

div 


\^ 


> 




50 or 5 nA 


3% plus 
125 mV/ 
vert div 






fc* 


20 or 2 nA 


3% plus 

50 mV/vert 

div 








VERT STEP 
GEN POSITION 


4% 


3% 


4% 


5% 


HORIZ STEP 
GEN POSITION 


4% 


3% 


4% 


5% 



VERTICAL DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Collector Current — 1 /xA to 2A/div, 20 steps in 1, 2, 
quence (0.1 /xA/div with XI magnification). 

Emitter Current — 1 nA to 2 mA/div. 

Step Generator — 1 step/div. 



5 se- 



256 



TYPE 576 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION FACTOR 
COLLECTOR VOLTS— 50 mV to 200V/div, 12 steps in 1-2- 

5 sequence (5 mV/div with XI magnification). 
BASE VOLTS— 50 mV to 2V/div, 6 steps in 1, 2, 5 sequence 

(5 mV/div with XI magnification). 
STEP GENERATOR— 1 step/div. 

DISPLAYED NOISE 

VERTICAL— Normal Mode: <1% or 50 nA P-P. 

Leakage Mode: <1% or 0.2 nA P-P. 
HORIZONTAL— < 1 % or 3 mV P-P. 

CALIBRATOR (CAL) 

DC voltage (accurate within 1.5%) provided to check and 
adjust vertical and horizontal gain. 

POSITION CONTROLS 

Fixed 5-div increments within 0.1 div. Continuous fine control 
over ~5 div. 

DISPLAY OFFSET 

Provides 20 calibrated positioning increments, vertically or 
horizontally, of 0.5 div or 5 div with the X10 MAGNIFIER. 
Accurate within 0.5%. 

CRT AND READOUT 
CRT 

6Y 2 -inch rectangular with parallax-free, illuminated graticule 
in centimeters. The calibrated area is 10 cm vertical by 10 cm 
horizontal (12 cm usable horizontal). P2 phosphor normally 
supplied; P7 and P31 are optional without extra charge. Con- 
sult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for 
application information and availability. 

READOUT 

The readouts, adjacent to the CRT, are digital indicators of 
the following display parameters: 
PER VERT DIV— 1 nA to 2 A/div 
PER HORIZ DIV— 5 mV to 200 V/div 
PER STEP— 5 nA to 2 A/step, 5 mV to 2 V/step 
/? (BETA) or g m PER DIV— 1 p to 500 k calculated from 
CURRENT/DIV, X10 MAG, STEP AMPLITUDE, and 0.1X 
MULT 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
STANDARD TEST FIXTURE 

A plug-in fixture with two sets of 5-pin test terminals, the 
EMITTER GROUNDED or BASE GROUNDED switch, Left-Off- 
Right switch, STEP GEN OUTPUT, EXT BASE or EMITTER input, 
and the OPERATOR PROTECTION BOX. The test terminals 
accept either the 6-pin universal adapters, 3-pin adapters, 
or the high-power transistor adapters with KELVIN contacts. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

POWER SOURCE — operates only with an unbalanced-to- 
ground power source. For safe operation, the power line 
neutral (white or "identified" conductor) must be connected 
to the instrument neutral (unfused), and the power plug safety 
ground (green conductor) must return to ground through a 
different path than the power line neutral. 

VOLTAGE RANGES — The quick-change line-voltage range 
selector accommodates 90 VAC to 136 VAC or 180 VAC to 
272 VAC (six positions), at 48 Hz to 66 Hz line frequency. 
Max power consumption is 305 W (3.2 A), standby power 
S60W. 



ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS 

Temperature — Non-operating, — 40°C to +65°C 
Useful operation, 0°C to +50°C 
Specified operation, +10°C to +40°C 

Altitude— Non-operating to 50,000 ft; operating to 10,000 ft. 

Vibration — Operating, 15 minutes each axis at 0.015 inch 
with frequency varied from 10-50-10 c/s in 1 -minute cycles, 
3 minutes at any resonant point or 50 c/s. 

Shock — Non-operating, 30 g's, '/ 2 sine, 11 -ms duration, one 
shock per axis, total six shocks. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 



Height 


15 in 


38 cm 


Width 


11% in 


29 cm 


Depth 


23 in 


59 cm 


Net weight 


70% lb 


32 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


si 07 lb 


S48.5 kg 


Export-packed weight 


S127 lb 


S57.5 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 



TEST ADAPTERS 





013-0098-00 



013-0099-00 








2 Each 
013-0100-00 



2 Each 
013-0101-00 



2 Each 
013-0072-00 



Not shown: 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); measurement 
concepts booklet "Semiconductor Device Measurements" 
(062-1009-00); two instruction manuals (070-0905-00). 

TYPE 576 CURVE TRACER $2125 



INSTRUMENT OPTION 

The Type 576 MOD 301 W deletes the parameter readout 
module but maintains provision for insertion. 

Type 576 MOD 301W $1850 

Parameter Readout Module (020-0031-00) $ 300 



257 



TYPE 576 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

LONG-LEAD ADAPTERS 




Designed to accept untrimmed bipolar or single FET's or tran- 
sistors. 

Long-lead transistor adapter, order 013-0102-00 $25 

Long-lead FET adapter, order 013-0103-00 $25 

OTHER ADAPTERS 




ADAPTER BOX 

Blank, for mounting special semiconductor sockets. 

Order 013-0073-00 $ 4 



POWER TRANSISTOR ADAPTER 

For power transistors with hook leads. 

Order 013-0074-00 $7.50 

DIODE ADAPTER 

Magnetic holder for axial lead diodes, providing quick in- 
sertion and removal for production applications. 
Order 013-0079-00 $25 

OTHER 

Adapters for stud-type power transistors and diodes will be 
available after mid-1969. 

CAMERA 

A camera system compatible with the wider viewing area of 
the 6V 2 inch CRT and readout area will be available after 
mid-1969. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 




} 



Model 202-1 with storage drawer 



$130 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



258 



type 581 A 




• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• TUNNEL-DIODE TRIGGERING TO BEYOND 
150 MHz 

• SINGLE SWEEP 

• SINGLE-TRACE AND DUAL-TRACE PLUG-IN UNITS 

• MORE THAN 20 OTHER VERTICAL PLUG-IN 
UNITS (with adapter) 



The Type 581 A Oscilloscope is a general-purpose, laboratory 
instrument featuring bandwidth to 80 MHz (at 3-dB down) when 
used with the Type 82 or Type 86 Plug-In Units. Tunnel-diode 
triggering to 150 MHz and HF Sync to 250 MHz makes the instru- 
ment useful beyond the specified bandwidth. The Type 81 A 
Plug-In Adapter provides additional versatility by permitting 
the use of more than 20 Tektronix 1 -series and letter-series plug- 
in units. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Dual-trace displays from DC to 80 MHz (3-dB down) at 100 
mV/cm or from DC to 75 MHz (3-dB down) at lOmV/cm are 
available with the Type 82 Dual-Trace Plug-In Unit. Other 
vertical-deflection characteristics are available (with Type 81 A 
adapter) through use of a wide variety of plug-in units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— 50 ns/cm to 2 s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER — X5, increases sweep rate to 10 ns/cm. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm to 15V/cm ; DC to 350 kHz. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 4x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENT— Wired for 105 to 125 V, may be 
ordered with taps connected for 210 to 250 V. 50 to 60 Hz, 
560 watts maximum. 



259 



type 581 A 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 

Bandwidth figures are at 3-dB down. 



TYPE 82 or 86 
PLUG-IN UNIT 


MINIMUM 
BANDWIDTH 


MAXIMUM 
RISETIME 


at lOOmV/cm 


80 MHz 


4.4 ns 


at lOmV/cm 


75 MHz 


4.7 ns 



BALANCED DELAY NETWORK 

Permits observation of the leading edge of the waveform 
that triggers the sweep. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 
TIME BASE 

50ns/cm to 2s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (I -2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Continuously variable (uncalibrated) 
between steps and to approx 5 s/cm. Warning light indicates 
uncalibrated setting. 

DISPLAY MODES 

Normal (repetitive) and single-sweep. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 
Operates over full time base, increases the fastest rate to 
lOns/cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 
Continuously variable deflection factor from 0.2 V/cm to 15 
V/cm. DC to 350 kHz at maximum gain. Input RC approx 1 
megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

A positive gate of approx 20 V and a positive-going sawtooth 
of approx 150 V. 

TRIGGER 

SOURCES 

Internal, external, or line. Internal sources are AC coupled. 
External sources are AC or DC coupled. External trigger input 
RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. 
REQUIREMENTS 
2-mm deflection or 0.3 V external from 15 Hz to 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 15 Hz with AC coupling, below 
15 kHz with AC LF Reject. HF Sync requires 4-mm deflection 
or 0.2 V external from 5 MHz to 250 MHz. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in CRT, accelerating potential 10 kV. P31 phosphor normally 
supplied; P2 or Pll are optional without extra charge. Consult 
your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for appli- 
cation information and availability. Z-axis input requires 20 V 
peak to peak for beam modulation at normal intensity. 
GRATICULE 
Parallax-free, 4x10cm, internal graticule with variable edge 
illumination, ruled in 1-cm divisions. Vertical and horizontal 
centerlines further marked in 2-mm increments. 



DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators light to show direction of CRT beam 
when off the screen. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
Squarewaves from 0.2 mV to 100-V in 18 steps (1-2-5 se- 
quence), accurate within 3%, approx 1-kHz repetition rate. 

POWER OPTIONS 

Wired for 105 to 125-V operation, 50 to 60 Hz. Tapped trans- 
former allows operation also at 210 to 250 V. Power con- 
sumption 560 watts maximum. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


16% in 


42.9 cm 


Width 


13 1 /, in 


33.4 cm 


Depth 


23% in 


58.2 cm 


Net weight 


63 lb 


28.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


s=81 lb 


^36.8 kg 


Export-packed weight 


^99 lb 


^45.0 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord 
(161-0010-03); smoke-gray filter, installed (378-0567-00); clear, 
CRT-protector plate (387-0918-00); 18-inch BNC-to-BNC patch 
cord (012-0087-00); 18-inch BNC-to-banana plug patch cord 
(012-0091-00); post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0390-01). 

TYPE 581 A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . $1525 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. See catalog accessory pages for 
additional information on these and other items. 

C27-662 R CAMERA 

Equipped with a special lens to permit single-sweep photo- 
graphy of Type 581 A Oscilloscope displays at fast writing 
speeds. 1:0.5, f/1. 3 lens; Polaroid Land* Roll-Film Back. 

Order C-27-662 R $595 

Mounting Adapter, order 016-0225-02 $ 15 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with plug-in units satisfy 
most measurement requirements; however, optional probes 
(recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be better suited 
for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 
9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray. 

Order Type 202-2 $140 

♦Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page 



260 



I 



TYPE 



585A 
RM585A 



DC-to-80 MHz SWEEP DELAY OSCILLOSCOPES 







• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY 

• TUNNEL DIODE TRIGGERING TO BEYOND 
150 MHz 

• ILLUMINATED PARALLAX-FREE GRATICULE 

• SINGLE SWEEP 

• SINGLE-TRACE AND DUAL-TRACE VERTICAL 
PLUG-IN UNITS 

• MORE THAN 20 OTHER VERTICAL PLUG-IN 
UNITS (with adapter) 



Type 585A and Type RM585A are general-purpose laboratory 
instruments. Features are designed to permit signal analysis 
from DC to 80 MHz (3-dB down) and beyond. Tunnel Diode 
triggering from DC to 150 MHz, 10-ns/cm sweep speed, and 
calibrated sweep delay complement the response characteristic 
of the Type 82 Dual-Trace Plug-In Unit or Type 86 Single-Trace 
Plug-In Unit. The Type 81 A Adapter permits use of any letter 
series or 1 -series plug-in units: adding Sampling, Spectrum 
Analysis, and High Gain Differential measurement capability. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Dual-Trace DC to 80 MHz (approx 3-dB down) displays at 100 
mV/cm or DC to 75 MHz (approx 3-dB down) displays at 10 
mV/cm are available with the Type 82 Dual-Trace Plug-In Unit. 
Extreme flexibility of vertical deflection characteristics through 
the use of a wide variety of plug-in units. 

HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED TIME BASE— Time Base A: 50ns/cm to 2 s/cm ; 
Time Base B: 2/xs/cm to 1 s/cm. 

SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X5, extends Time Base A to lOns/cm. 

CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 2 ps to 10 s, continuously vari- 
able. 

EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm to 15V/cm ; DC to 350 kHz at 
maximum gain. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 4x10 cm. 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENT— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 50 

to 60 Hz, 630 watts maximum. 



I 



267 



TYPE 585A 

RM585A 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 

Bandwidth figures are at 3-dB down. 



TYPE 82 OR 86 
PLUG-IN UNIT 


MINIMUM 
BANDWIDTH 


MAXIMUM 
RISETIME 


at lOOmV/cm 


80 MHz 


4.4 ns 


at lOmV/cm 


75 MHz 


4.7 ns 



BALANCED DELAY NETWORK 

Permits observation of the leading edge of the waveform 
that triggers the sweep. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

TIME BASE A 

50 ns/cm to 2 s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Continuously variable (uncalibrated) 
between steps and to approximately 5 s/cm. Warning light 
indicates uncalibrated setting. 

TIME BASE B 

2/j.s/cm to Is/cm in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. Control for varying sweep length from 
4 to 10 cm permits Time Base B to be used as a repetition- 
rate generator from 0.1 Hz to 40 kHz. 

X5 MAGNIFIER 

Operates over full time base, increases the fastest Time 
Base A rate to 10 ns/cm and fastest Time Base B rate to 
0.4/j.s/cm. Magnified time base accurate within 5%. 

DELAY TIME 
2jUS to 10 s, continuously variable and calibrated. Accuracy 
from 2 /xs to 0.1 s within 1 % of indicated delay. Accuracy 
from 0.2 s to 1 s within 3% of indicated delay. Incremental 
delay time accurate within 0.2% of the available delay time. 
Short-term jitter less than 1 part in 20,000 of the available 
delay time. 

OPERATING MODES 
Time Base A: Normal, single sweep, delayed by B. 
Time Base B: Normal, intensified by A. 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

Continuously variable deflection factor from 0.2 V/cm to 
15V/cm. DC to 350 kHz at maximum gain. Input RC approx 
1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Positive gates from both time bases of approx 20 V, a posi- 
tive-going sawtooth of approx 150 V and a delayed trigger 
pulse of approx +5V. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-in CRT metalized, accelerating potential 10 kV. P31 phos- 
phor normally supplied; P2, or Pll are optional without extra 
charge. Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Dis- 
tributor for application information and availability. Z-axis 
input requires 20 V peak to peak for beam modulation at 
normal intensity. 

GRATICULE 

Parallax-free, 4 x 10 cm, internal graticule with variable edge 
illumination is ruled in 1-cm divisions with vertical and hori- 
zontal centerlines further marked in 2-mm increments. 

DISPLAY FEATURES 

Beam-position indicators light to show direction of CRT beam 
when it is off the screen. 

262 




TRIGGER 

SOURCES 

Internal, external, or line. Internal sources are AC coupled. 
External sources are AC or DC coupled. External trigger 
input RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. 

TIME BASE A REQUIREMENTS 

2-mm deflection or 0.3 V external from 15 Hz to 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 15 Hz with AC coupling, below 
15 kHz with AC LF Reject. HF Sync requires 4-mm deflection 
or 0.2 V external from 5 MHz to 250 MHz. 

TIME BASE B REQUIREMENTS 

4-mm deflection or 0.5 V external from 15 Hz to 1 MHz, 
increasing to 2-cm deflection or 1.5 V external at 5 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 15 Hz with AC coupling, below 
15 kHz with AC LF Reject. 




FREQUENCY IN MfGACVClES 



./ 



TYPE 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 



AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 
0.2 mV to 100-V squarewave in 18 
Accurate within 3%. Approx 1-kHz 



steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
repetition rate. 



POWER OPTIONS 

Wired for 105 to 125-V operation, 50 to 60 Hz. Tapped 
transformer allows operation at 210 to 250 V. Power con- 
sumption 630 watts maximum. 

TYPE 585A DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 16 7 / 8 

Width 13 7 / 8 

Depth 23 7 / e 

Net weight 67'/ 4 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 85 lb 

Export-packed weight ~104 lb 

TYPE RM585A DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 14 in 

Width 19 in 

Depth 22 3 / 4 in 

Net weight 83'/;, 

Domestic shipping weight Srl08 lb 

Export-packed weight ~131 lb 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 3-conductor power cord 
(161-0010-03); smoke-gray filter, installed (378-0567-00); clear 
CRT-protector plate (387-0918-00); 18-inch BNC-to-BNC patch 
cord (012-0087-00); 18-inch BNC-to-banana-plug patch cord 
(012-0091-00); BNC post jack (012-0092-00); Type 585A— two 
instruction manuals (070-0391-01). Type RM585A— two instruc- 



in 


42.9 cm 


in 


33.4 cm 


in 


58.2 cm 


lb 


30.6 kg 
=;38.6 kg 
=:47.3 kg 


lb 


35.6 cm 




48.3 cm 


in 


57.8 cm 


lb 


38.0 kg 
^49.1 kg 
^59.5 kg 



585A 
RM585A 



tion manuals (070-0392-00); set mounting hardware included 
with Type RM585A. 

TYPE 585A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . $1800 
TYPE RM585A OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units $1900 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. See catalog accessory pages for 
additional information on these and other items. 

C27-662 R CAMERA 

Equipped with a special lens to permit single-sweep photog- 
raphy of Type 585A Oscilloscope displays at fast writing 
speeds. 1:0.5, f/1.3 lens; Polaroid Land* Roll-Film Back. 

Order C-27-662 R $595 

Mounting Adapter, order 01 6-0225-02 $ 15 

PROBES 

The standard 10X probes supplied with Type 82 and Type 86 
plug-in units satisfy most measurement requirements; however, 
optional probes (recommended on plug-in unit pages) may be 
better suited for particular applications. 

SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 202-2: storage drawer, carrier for 2 plug-in units, 

9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray. 

Order Type 202-2 $140 

*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page 



263 



TYPE SI A 
PLUG-IN 
ADAPTER 



The Type 81 A Adapter allows use of all 1 -Series and Letter- 
Series Plug-In Units with 580-Series Oscilloscopes. The full band- 
width capabilities of the plug-in units are realized. For example, 
the Type 1A5 Differential Amplifier provides DC-to-50 MHz 
displays at 5 mV/cm. 

No cabling or switching is required; the Type 81 A is simply 
inserted into the oscilloscope, then the plug-in unit is inserted 
into the adapter. Provision for chopped blanking when used 
with a multi-trace plug-in is not available. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Instruction manual (070-0751-00). 

TYPE 81A PLUG-IN ADAPTER $160 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



4 lb 


1.8 kg 


6 lb 


^3kg 


1 lb 


^5 kg 




o 



EXTEND CAPABILITIES OF TYPE 580-SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES TO THESE AREAS 




VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


T R 


PRICE 




PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MINIMUM 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH 
(—3 dB) 


T R 


PRICE 


MULTIPLE TRACE 


DIFFERENTIAL 


1A1 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 

5 mV/cm 

~500 /iV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 28 MHz 
2 Hz to 15 MHz 


7 ns 
13 ns 
24 ns 


$ 625 


1A5 

Comparator 


5 mV/cm 
2 mV/cm 
1 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 
DC to 45 MHz 
DC to 40 MHz 


7 ns 

8 ns 

9 ns 


$ 575 


1A2 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


350 


1A6 


1 mV/cm 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 ms 


250 


1A7A 

High-Gain 


10/xV/cm 


DC to 1 MHz 
Selectable 


350 ns 


450 


CA 

Dual-Trace 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 24 MHz 


15 ns 


280 


G 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


205 


1A4 
Four-Trace 


lOmV/cm 


DC to 50 MHz 


7 ns 


825 


W 

Comparator 


1 mV/cm 
50 mV/cm 


DC to 8 MHz 
DC to 23 MHz 


44 ns 
16 ns 


560 


M 

Four-Trace 


20 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 


18 ns 


560 




SPECTRUM 


ANALYZERS 






SINGLE TRACE 




1L5 


10 AiV/cm 


10 Hz to 1MHz 


$1025 


1L10 


-100 dBm 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1175 


B 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 20 MHz 
2 Hz to 12 MHz 


18 ns 

30 ns 


$ 170 


1L20 


-110 to -90 dBm 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1950 


1L30 


-105 to -75 dBm 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


1950 


H 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


200 


1L40 


-110 to -70 dBm 


1.5 GHz to 40 GHz 


2150 


K 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 


12 ns 


155 


WIDE-BAND SAMPLING 


L 


50 mV/cm 
5 mV/cm 


DC to 30 MHz 
3 Hz to 24 MHz 


12 ns 

15 ns 


235 


1S1 


2 mV/cm 


DC to 1 GHz 


350 ps 


$1275 


SPECIAL PURPOSE 


1S2 TDR 


5 mp/cm 


140-ps system risetime 


1400 


5 mV/cm 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 


O 
Operational 


50 mV/cm 


DC to 25 MHz 


14ns 


$ 560 




Q 

Strain Gage 


10/iStrain/div 


DC to 6 kHz 


60/iS 


350 



264 



I 



• DC to 80 MHz at lOOmV/cm* 

• DC to 75 MHz at 10 mV/cm* 

• CHOPPED OR ALTERNATE SWITCHING 

Two identical input channels add dual-trace capability to 
Tektronix Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes permitting the display 
of the time difference between two input signals, the response 
of two circuits to the same pulse, the input and output wave- 
forms of a circuit, and many other dual-trace functions. 

BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 

Bandwidth figures are at 3-dB down and apply to calibrated 
and uncalibrated deflection factors. 



WITHOUT PROBE 

(Source impedance approx 25 ohms) 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


DC-COUPLED 
BANDWIDTH 


AC-COUPLED 

LOW- 
FREQUENCY 
3-dB POINT 


RISETIME 


XI GAIN 

lOOmV to 

50 V/cm 


DC to 80 MHz 


2 Hz 


4.4 ns 


XIO GAIN 

1 mV to 

5 V/cm 


DC to 75 MHz 


2 Hz 


4.7 ns 


WITH P6008 10X PROBE 


XI GAIN 

1 V to 

500 Vcm 


DC to 70 MHz 


0.2 Hz 


5 ns 


XIO GAIN 

100 mV to 

50 V/cm 


DC to 66 MHz 


0.2 Hz 


5.3 ns 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOOmV/cm to 50 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. 2:1 variation, uncalibrated, between 
steps and to approx 100 V/cm. 

XIO AMPLIFIER 
DC coupled, extends deflection factor to 10 mV/cm. Operates 
at all deflection-factor settings, accurate within 3%. 

P6008 10X PASSIVE PROBES 
Increase input resistance to 10 megohms and decrease input 
capacitance to approx 7 pF. Risetime of Type 580-Series 
Oscilloscope with Type 82 Plug-In Unit and P6008 Probe, at 
an overall deflection factor of 1 V/cm is 5 ns. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm paralleled by approx 1 5 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 5 lb 2.3 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ^10 lb ~4.5 kg 

Export-packed weight ~14 lb ~6.4 kg 

*Approx 3-dB down 



TYPE 82 
DUAL-TRACE UNIT 




INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6008 probes (010-0129-00); two instruction manuals 

(070-0349-01). 
TYPE 82 DUAL-TRACE PLUG-IN UNIT $695 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard probe supplied with 
the instrument satisfies most measurement requirements; optional 
probes, including high-voltage and current-measuring probes, 
may be better suited for particular applications. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 
PROBES 
P6009 100X Passive Probe Package, order 010-0140-00 $60.00 
P6011 IX Passive Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 . . $19.00 

MODIFICATION FOR EARLY INSTRUMENTS 
TYPE 581/585 VERTICAL STANDARDIZATION MOD KIT 

improves and standardizes the transient response of early 
Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes. The Mod Kit is essential for the 
use of Type 82 or Type 86 Plug-In Unit in the early instruments 
and also improves the performance of these instruments when 
used with the Type 80/P80 combination. 

Tektronix Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes with serial numbers 
prior to #950 for Type 581 and #2585 for Type 585 may 
require this modification. Please consult your Field Engineer 
or Distributor. 

Each kit includes components to change delay-line imped- 
ance, standardize CRT termination, modify CRT and distributed 
amplifier circuitry, and modify Type 80/P80 combination. 
Order 040-0275-01 $25 



U.S. Soles Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



265 



TYPE 86 



SINGLE-TRACE 
UNIT 

• 10mV/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR 

• DC fo 80 MHz at 1 00 mV/cm* 

• DC fo 75 MHz at 1 mV/cm* 

The Type 86 Plug-In Unit provides fast-rise capability, a cali- 
brated deflection-factor range of lOOmV/cm to 50 V/cm and a 
built-in XI amplifier which extends the deflection-factor range 
to lOmV/cm. A P6008 Probe is supplied with the Type 86; 
other probes are available as optional accessories. 

BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 

Bandwidth figures are at 3-dB down and apply to calibrated 
and uncalibrated deflection factors. 



WITHOUT PROBE 

(Source impedance approx 25 ohms 




DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


DC-COUPLED 
BANDWIDTH 


AC-COUPLED 

LOW- 
FREQUENCY 
3-dB POINT 


RISETIME 


XI GAIN 

1 00 mV to 

50 V/cm 


DC to 80 MHz 


2 Hz 


4.4 ns 


XI GAIN 

10 mV to 

5 V/cm 


DC to 75 MHz 


2 Hz 


4.7 ns 


WITH P6008 10X PROBE 


XI GAIN 

1 V to 
500 V/cm 


DC to 70 MHz 


0.2 Hz 


5 ns 


X10 GAIN 

lOOmV to 

50 V/cm 


DC to 66 MHz 


0.2 Hz 


5.3 ns 



DEFLECTION FACTOR 

lOOmV/cm to 50 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
accurate within 3%. 2:1 variation, uncalibrated between steps 
and to approx 100 V/cm. 

X10 AMPLIFIER 

DC coupled, extends deflection factor to lOmV/cm. Oper- 
ates at all deflection-factor settings, accurate within 3%. 

P6008 10X PASSIVE PROBE 

Increases input resistance to 10 megohms and decreases input 
capacitance to approx 7 pF. Risetime of Type 580-Series 
Oscilloscope with Type 86 Plug-In Unit and P6008 Probe, at 
an overall deflection factor of 1 V/cm, is 5 ns. 

INPUT RC 
1 megohm paralleled by approx 15pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

WEIGHTS 
Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

P6008 Probe (010-0129-00); two instruction manuals (070- 
0364-01). 

TYPE 86 PLUG-IN UNIT $385 

*Approx 3-dB down 



3V 2 lb 


1.6 kg 


8 lb 


=r3.6 kg 


12 lb 


^5.5 kg 




OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard probe supplied with 
the instrument satisfies most measurement requirements; optional 
probes, including high-voltage and current-measuring probes, 
may be better suited for particular applications. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

PROBES 

P6009 100X Passive Probe Package, order 010-0140-00 $60.00 
P6011 IX Passive Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 . . $19.00 

MODIFICATION FOR EARLY INSTRUMENTS 

TYPE 581/585 VERTICAL STANDARDIZATION MOD KIT 

improves and standardizes the transient response of early Type 
580-Series Oscilloscopes. The Mod Kit is essential for the use 
of a Type 82 or 86 Plug-In Unit in the early instruments and also 
improves the performance of these instruments when used with 
the Type 80/P80 combination. 

Tektronix Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes with serial numbers 
prior to #950 for Type 581 and #2585 for Type 585 may require 
this modification. If in doubt about instrument modification, 
please consult your Field Engineer or Distributor. 

Each kit includes components to change delay-line imped- 
ance, standardize CRT termination, modify CRT and distributed- 
amplifier circuitry and modify Type 80 Plug-In Unit/Type P80 
Probe combination. 
Order 040-0275-01 $25 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



266 



TYPE 



647A 
R647A 



DC-to-100 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES 




• DC-to-100 MHz BANDWIDTH WITH OR 
WITHOUT PROBES 

• BUILT FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS 

• HIGH WRITING SPEED 

• ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE 

• 6x1 0-em DISPLAY 

• SOLID-STATE DESIGN 



The Type 647A and R647A are compact, high-performance 
instruments capable of accurate measurements over an ambient 
temperature range from —30° C to +65° C. Accuracy is even 
better in normal ambient temperatures ranging from 0° C to 
+40° C. 

The Type 647A and R647A Oscilloscopes offer bandwidths 
from DC to 100 MHz with or without probes when used with 
the Type 10A2A Dual-Trace Plug-in Unit. Triggering over the 
entire 100-MHz bandwidth is possible with a Type 1 1 B2A Sweep- 
Delay Time-Base Unit. 

An accelerating potential of 14 kV provides a small, bright 
CRT spot with corresponding high writing speed. An internal, 
6xl0-cm graticule with variable illumination offers parallax- 
free measurements. 

A quick-change line-voltage selector permits simple and 
convenient adaptation to 6 different line-voltage ranges. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL 

Two vertical plug-in units are available: Type 10A1 Differen- 
tial Amplifier featuring voltage-comparator capability, and Type 
10A2A Dual-Trace Amplifier with 100-MHz bandwidth. Oper- 
ating modes of Type 10A2A include CH 1, CH 2, ALTERNATE, 
CHOP (Si -MHz rate), and ADD. 

HORIZONTAL 

Two time-base plug-in units are available: Type 11B1 with 
single time base and direct reading magnifier, and Type 11B2A 
with dual time bases and sweep delay; both units equipped with 
single sweep for photographic recording. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm 
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 14 kV 
PHOSPHOR— P31 

OTHER 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- 
wave. 

POWER REQUIREMENT— 90 V to 136 V and from 180 V to 
272 V in six ranges; range selection accomplished by quick- 
change, switching device. Maximum power approx 200 watts 
at 115 V and 60 Hz. Type 647A: 45 to 440 Hz, Type R647A: 
45 to 66 Hz. 



267 



TYPE 647A 

R647A 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 

Bandwidth figures are at 3-dB down. 



PLUG- 
IN 


DEFLEC- 
TION 
FACTOR 


BANDWIDTH* 


RISETIME 






0°C 

to 

+40 °C 


-30 "C 

to 
+65°C 


0°C 

to 

+40°C 


-30 °C 

to 
+65 °C 


10A1 


5 mV/cm 

to 
20 V/cm 


55 MHz 


50 MHz 


6.4 ns 


7 ns 




1 mV/cm 

and 

2 mV/cm 


35 MHz 


35 MHz 


10 ns 


10 ns 


10A2A 


lOmV/cm 

to 
20 V/cm 


100 MHz 


90 MHz 


3.5 ns 


3.9 ns 



*Staled frequencies ore upper bandwidth limits. Lower limit is DC (when 
DC coupled]. With AC coupling, low-frequency 3-dB-down point is ~ 1 .6 Hz 
without probe, or SS 0.16 Hz with P6047 10X Probe. 

SIGNAL DELAY 

Permits observation of the leading edge of the waveform 
that triggers the sweep. Delay line requires no tuning. 



HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

Two Time-Base Plug-In Units are available for use with the 
Type 647A and R647A Oscilloscopes. 



PLUG-IN 


CALIBRATED 


SWEEP 


SWEEP 


UNIT 


RANGE 


MAGNIFIER 


SYSTEM 


Type 11B1 


0.1 /xs/cm 


Direct reading 


Single 




to 


up to X50, 


Time Base 




2s/cm 


10 ns/cm max 


Generator 


Type 11B2A 


0.1 fis/cm 


XI 0, Extends 


Dual 




to 


Range to 


Time Base 




5 s/cm 


10 ns/cm 


Generator 

with 

Sweep Delay 



Both plug-in units have single-sweep and external-horizontal 
amplifier capability. 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

Rectangular, flat-faced CRT. 14-kV accelerating potential for 
bright displays. P31 phosphor normally supplied, Pll is 
optional without extra charge. Consult your Field Engineer, 
Representative, or Distributor for application information and 
availability. 

GRATICULE 

No-parallax, 6xl0-cm, internal graticule with variable edge 
illumination. Ruled in 1-cm divisions, vertical and horizontal 
centerlines further marked in 2-mm increments. 

EXTERNAL CRT INPUTS 

Input through unblanking amplifier to CRT grid, usable 
from DC to 10 MHz; visible modulation with 4-V peak-to- 
peak signal. An additional input to CRT cathode is AC 
coupled; visible modulation with 5-V peak-to-peak signal. 




ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES 

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 
Operating: Type R647A: — 30° C to +65° C. 
Type 647A: — 30°C to +65°C, continuous, when instrument 
is not tipped more than 20° in any direction from level posi- 
tion. When instrument is operated vertically (with front panel 
up), the maximum ambient temperature is +55°C. Non- 
operating: — 55°C to +75°C. 

VIBRATION* 
Operating: 0.025 inch peak to peak, 10 to 55 to lOc/s in 1 
minute sweeps (4g at 55 c/s) for 15 minutes on each axis. 

ALTITUDE 

Operating: 15,000 feet maximum. Maximum operating temp- 
erature of the Type 647A reduced to +55°C at 15,000 feet. 
Non-operating: 50,000 feet, maximum. 

SHOCK 

Non-operating: 20 G's, one-half sine, 1 1 -millisecond duration. 
Two shocks each direction along each of the three major 
axes; total of 12 shocks. 

HUMIDITY 

Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications 
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202B, 
method 106A (omit freezing and vibration, and allow 24-hour 
post-test drying period before operating). 

TRANSPORTATION 

Meets National Safe Transit test when factory-packaged: 
Vibration for one hour at slightly greater than one G. Drop on 
any corner, edge or flat surface; 18-inch drop for Type R647A, 
30-inch drop for Type 647A. 

*Applicable to R647A when mounted in a rack with rear support kit 016- 
0065-00. 



268 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
'amplitude calibrator 

0.2 mV to 100 V in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), 
1-kHz squarewave. Crystal-controlled frequency accurate 
within 0.1% from -30° C to +65° C. 
Output resistance 50 Q from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. Squarewave 
duty cycle 49.9% to 50.1%. Risetime <1 pS. For current- 
probe calibration, a 5-mA squarewave is available through a 
front-panel current loop. The calibrator also provides a 100-V 
DC output. 



AMPLITUDE 
ACCURACY 


0°C to +40°C 


— 30°Cto +65°C 


100 V and 100 mV 


±1% 


±1.5% 


All other positions 


±2% 


±3% 



POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Quick-change line-voltage selector permits selection of the 
following ranges: 90 V to 110 V, 104 V to 126 V, 112 V to 
136 V, 180 V to 220 V, 208 V to 252 V, or 224 V to 272 V. 
Approx 200 watts maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Type 647A: 
45 to 440 Hz. Type R647A: 45 to 66 Hz. 



TYPE 647A DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 




Height 14 5 / 8 in 


37.1 cm 


Width 9 7 / 8 in 


25.2 cm 


Depth 22 in 


56.0 cm 


Net weight 40 lb 


17.8 kg 


Domestic shipping weight ~49 lb 


=121 .9 kg 


Export-packed weight ~62 lb 


=27.6 kg 


TYPE R647A DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 




Height 7 in 


17.8 cm 


Width 19 in 


48.3 cm 


Rack depth 19 in 


48.3 cm 


Net weight 50 lb 


22.2 kg 


Domestic shipping weight ~73 lb 


1=32.4 kg 


Export-packed weight ~96 lb 


=42.6 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two P6047 Probes (010-0211-00); smoke-gray filter, installed 
(378-0548-00); 8-inch, 93-fi cable, BNC to BNC (012-0123-00); 
clear implosion shield (337-0573-00); 18-inch patch cord, BNC 
to BNC (012-0087-00); 18-inch patch cord, BNC to banana plug 
012-0091-00); BNC post jack (012-0092-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter 



TYPE 



647A 
R647A 



(103-0013-00); 6-inch patch cord, BNC to BNC (012-0085-00); 2 
red plastic graticule-light inserts (377-0105-00); Type 647A: 
two instruction manuals (070-0614-00); Type R647A: two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0627-00); set mounting tracks and hardware 
(351-0085-00); rackmount rear support kit (016-0065-00); hard- 
ware kit (016-0099-00). 
TYPE 647A OSCILLOSCOPE, without Plug-In Units . $1600 
TYPE R647A OSCILLOSCOPE, without Plug-In Units (45- 
to-66 Hz power source) $1725 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. The standard probe supplied with 
the instrument satisfies most measurement requirements; optional 
probes, including high-voltage and current-measuring probes, 
may be better suited for particular applications. See catalog 
accessory pages for additional information on these and other 
items. 

REAR-PANEL CONNECTOR 

10-pin connector for remote single-sweep reset and external 
use of power-supply voltages. Order (131-0300-00) .... $13 

C27-662 R CAMERA 

Equipped with a special lens to permit single-sweep photo- 
graphy of oscilloscope displays at fast writing speeds. 1:0.5, 
f/1.3 lens, Polaroid Land* Roll-Film back. 

Order C-27-662 R $595 

Mounting Adapter, order 016-0223-00 $ 15 

PROBES 
P6023 10X Low-Capacitance 
differential amplifiers. 

Order P6023 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0167-00 LOCKING BNC) 
$ 47 



Probe for use with Tektronix 



SCOPE-MOBILE® CART 

Model 201-2: Storage drawer, carrier for two plug-in units, 

9-position tilt-lock oscilloscope tray. 

Order Type 201-2 $140 

♦Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverlon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



269 



TYPE 10A1 

DC-TO-55 MHz 
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT 



I mV/em-fo-20 V/cm CALIBRATED DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 

1000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION FROM DC 
TO 10 MHz 

EQUIVALENT OFFSET VOLTAGE UP TO ± 600 V 
PROVIDES 4-DIGIT RESOLUTION FOR ACCURATE 
AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENTS 



The Type 10A1 combines the features of a conventional ampli- 
fier, a differential amplifier, and a calibrated differential com- 
parator in a single plug-in unit for Type 647A and R647A 
Oscilloscopes. Rapid recovery from large differential overload 
allows detailed study of pulse-top flatness as well as comparator 
measurement of transient amplitudes. The effective 6,000-cm 
slide-back scale and 20,000:1 common-mode rejection ratio 
permit accurate measurements and comparisons. Rugged design 
insures accuracy over the same range of environmental condi- 
tions as stated for Type 647A and R647A Oscilloscopes. 



CONVENTIONAL AMPLIFIER 

BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 

Bandwidth is specified at 3-dB down. Bandwidth may be 
limited to 1 MHz ±10%, when desired, for noise reduction 
at higher sensitivities. AC coupling provides a low-frequency 
3-dB point at SSl.6 Hz. Use of the P6047 10X probe with AC 
coupling extends the low-frequency 3-dB point to 0.1 6 Hz. 



BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME 
WITH OR WITHOUT P6047 10X PROBE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


0°C to 
+40° C 


-30° C to 
+65° C 


5mV/cm to 
20 V/cm 


55 MHz 
and 6.4 ns 


50 MHz 
and 7 ns 


1 mV/cm and 

2 mV/cm 


35 MHz 
and 10 ns 


35 MHz 
and 10 ns 



MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

Maximum combined DC and Peak AC is ±20 V when using 
1-mV/cm to 20-mV/cm deflection factors, ±600 V when using 
the 50-mV/cm to 20-V/cm deflection factors. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

1 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 14 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Continuously variable (uncalibrated) between steps and to 
approx 50 V/cm. Deflection factor can be calibrated at any 
step with front-panel GAIN adjustment. When GAIN has 
been accurately adjusted at 5 mV/cm, accuracies are as 
follows: 

270 




VOLTS/CM ACCURACY 


DEFLECTION FACTOR 


0°C to 

+40°C 


-30 °C to 
+65°C 


1 mV/cm (also lOmV/cm 
and 0.1 V/cm with Vc 
range extended) 


±2.5% 


±4% 


2mV/cm through 2 V/cm 
(except lOmV/cm and 
0.1 V/cm with Vc range 


±1.5% 


±2.5% 


extended) 

5 V/cm through 20 V/cm 


±3% 


±4% 



INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by 20 pF. 

DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIOS 

Values stated apply at a deflection factor of 1 mV/cm and 
from 0° C to +40° C. 



COMMON-MODE REJECTION 
DC COUPLED 


FREQUENCY 
RANGE 


REJECTION 
RATIO 


RANGE OF 

PEAK-TO-PEAK 

INPUT SINEWAVE 


DC to 100 kHz 


20,000:1 


V to 10 V 


100 kHz to 1 MHz 


10,000:1 


V to 10 V 


1 MHz to 10 MHz 


10,000:1* 
divided by 
freq in MHz 


V to 10 V* 

divided by 

freq in MHz 


20 MHz 


100:1 


V to IV 


AC COUPLED 


60 Hz 


2,000:1 


0V to 10V 



♦Divide CMRR and voltage by the frequency in MHz; e.g., at 2 MHz the CMRR 
is 5,000:1 up to 5 V input amplitude. 



At lOmV/cm, using the internal 10X attenuator, CMRR is 
2,000:1 for 20-V peak-to-peak 10 kHz sinewave. 

RECOVERY TIME 

<0.5/j.s for a return to within ±2mV after differential 
offset. Recovery DC error <0.5mV after 1-ms recovery time. 
Characteristics apply from 0° C to +40° C. 

CALIBRATED DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR 

Comparison Voltage (Vc) can be used to offset the input 
waveform via the slide-back technique. The internal Vc source 
allows measurement, with 4-digit resolution, of signal ampli- 
tudes up to ±600 V. Equivalent Vc range is normally selected 
simultaneously with deflection factor, but may be extended for 
two additional steps. Bandwidth and risetime in the extended 
Vc positions are the same as at 1 and 2 mV/cm. 



INPUT VOLTAGE 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


LINEAR 

DYNAMIC 

RANGE and 

EQUIVALENT 

Vc RANGE 


MAXIMUM 
COMBINED DC 
AND PEAK AC 


1 mV/cm 

through 

20 mV/cm 


±6V 


±20 V 


lOmV/cm 
through 
0.2 V/cm 


±60 V 


±600 V 


0.1 V/cm 
through 
20 V/cm 


±600 V 


±600 V 



Vc CHARACTERISTICS 


EQUIVA- 
LENT Vc 
RANGE 


SLIDEBACK 

MEASUREMENT 

ACCURACY 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


0°C to 
+40° C 


-30 °C to 
+65°C 


6 volts 


±(0.1 % 
+ 5mV) 


±(0.15% 
+ 8mV) 


1 mV/cm 

through 

20 mV/cm 


60 volts 


±(0.225% 
+ 50 mV) 


±(0.4% 
+ 80 mV) 


lOmV/cm 

through 

0.2 V/cm* 


600 volts 


±(0.35% 
+ 0.5 V) 


±(0.65% 
+ 0.8 V) 


0.1 V 

through 
20 V/cm* 



TYPE 1QA1 



Vc OUTPUT 

Available at front panel as well as internally. Output con- 
tinuously variable from to ±6V (0 to ±0.6 V when deflec- 
tion factor is set at 5, 10, or 20 V/cm). Accuracy is within 
±(0.1 % + 5 mV) from 0° C to +40° C and within ± (0.15% 
+ 8mV) from — 30° C to +65° C. (Open circuit values). 



Vc CHARACTERISTICS WITH P6023 PROBE 


EQUIVA- 
LENT Vc 
RANGE 


SLIDEBACK 

MEASUREMENT 

ACCURACY 


DEFLECTION 
FACTOR 


0°C to 

+40°C 


-30 °C to 
+65 °C 


60 volts 


±(0.225% 
+ 50 mV) 


±(0.4% 
+ 80 mV) 


lOmV/cm 
through 
0.2 V/cm 


600 volts 


±(0.5% 
+ 0.5V) 


±(0.95% 
+ 0.8 V) 


0.1 V/cm 

through 

0.2 V/cm* 


6000 volts** 


+d % 
+ 5 V) 


±(2% 
+ 8V) 


1 V/cm 

through 

200 V/cm* 



*Pull knob to retain Vc range at two lowest deflection fac- 
tors. 



''Probe rating is 1000 volts maximum. 



WEIGHTS 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 



4 3 / 4 lb 
S9 lb 
;13 lb 



2.2 kg 
-4.1 kg 
r5.9 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0464-00). 

TYPE 10A1 DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER $950 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. See catalog accessory pages for 
additional information. 

PROBES 
P6023 10X Low-Capacitance Probe for use with Tektronix dif- 
ferential amplifiers is provided with ±2.5% adjustability of 
attenuation ratio; helpful in maintaining common-mode rejec- 
tion ratio of the system. Order P6023 PROBE PACKAGE 
(010-0167-00 LOCKING BNC) $47 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipmenf, General Information page. 



♦Pull knob to 
tors. 



retain Vc range at two lowest deflection fac- 



271 



TYPE10A2A 

DC-to-100 MHz 
DUAL-TRACE UNIT 

• 3.5-ns RISETIME 

• lOmV/CM fo 20 V/CM 

• DUAL TRACE, 5 OPERATING MODES 

• FRONT-PANEL CHANNEL-2 OUTPUT 

• TRIGGER SELECTION 

Bandwidth from DC to 100 MHz, with or without probe, makes 
the Type 10A2A an especially versatile plug-in unit for the 
Type 647A and Type R647A Oscilloscopes. Two identical 
channels can be added algebraically, operated singly with 
either polarity, or operated dual trace with alternate or chopped 
switching. The Type 10A2A is built to meet the same environ- 
mental requirements as Type 647A and R647A Oscilloscopes. 

BANDWIDTH 
Without probe or with P6047 10X Probe: DC to 100 MHz 
(3-dB down) from 0°C to +40°C or DC to 90 MHz (3-dB 
down) from —30° C to +65° C. Low-frequency 3-dB point 
with AC coupling is ~1.6Hz, ^0.16 Hz with 1 OX probe. 

RISETIME 
Without probe or with P6047 10X Probe: 3.5 ns from 0° C to 
+40°C or 3.9 ns from — 30°C to +65°C. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
Without Probe: lOmV/cm through 20V/cm in 11 calibrated 
steps (1-2-5 sequence). After calibration at 0.01 V/cm, and 
at the operating temperature, deflection-factor accuracy is 
within 2% for the other 10 steps. Deflection factor can be 
calibrated at any step with front-panel GAIN adjustment. 
Deflection factor continuously variable (uncalibrated) between 
steps and to approx 50 V/cm. With P6047 10X Probe: All 
deflection factors multiplied by 10. Probe attenuation accu- 
rate within 2% from — 30°C to +65°C. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
600 V, DC + peak AC (<1 kHz). Peak-to-peak AC not to 
exceed 600 V. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by 20 pF. 

CHOPPED MODE 

Switches channels at 1 MHz (±15%) rate, displaying approx 
500-ns segments of each channel. Chopped-transient blanking 
is provided. 

CHANNEL INVERSION 
The display of either channel can be inverted for comparing 
signals 180° out of phase. 

ADDED MODE 
Common-mode rejection ratio 20:1 in added-algebraically 
mode for frequencies to 50 MHz and amplitudes to 10 cm. 

CHANNEL ISOLATION (ATTENUATOR) 

10,000:1 or greater for frequencies to 25 MHz. 

CHANNEL-2 OUTPUT 
Front-panel output with amplitude >100mV per centimeter 
of Channel-2 display. Can be connected to Channel 1 in cas- 
cade for overall deflection factor of approx 1 mV/cm and 
bandwidth from DC to 40 MHz (3-dB down). 




INTERNAL TRIGGER 

Selectable triggering from common output amplifier or from 
Channel 2 only. Triggering from Channel 2 provides common 
time relationship between channels in Alternate or Chopped 
operation. 



WEIGHTS 






Net weight 


5y 4 lb 


2.4 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=9 lb 


JS4.1 kg 


Export-packed weight 


SJ13 lb 


S5.9 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0615-00). 

TYPE 10A2A DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER $825 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

The standard probe supplied with the Type 647A satisfies 
most measurement requirements. Optional probes, including 
high-voltage and current-measuring probes, may be better 
suited for particular applications. See catalog accessory pages 
for additional information on these and other items. 

PROBES 

P6011 IX Passive Probe Package, order 010-0193-00 . . $19.00 
P6009 100X Passive Probe Package, order 010-0170-00 $60.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



272 



• 10 ns/cm-to-2 s/cm SWEEP RANGE 

• DIRECT -READING MAGNIflER 

• 50-MHz TRIGGERING 

• SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION 

The Type 11B1 is a Time-Base Plug-In Unit for Type 647A 
and R647A Oscilloscopes, and is built to meet the same envi- 
ronmental requirements. It features a single, wide-range sweep 
generator with a direct reading XI to X50 magnifier. It provides 
normal sweeps to 0.1 /is/cm and direct-reading magnified 
sweeps to 10 ns/cm. 

TIME BASE 

0.1 jus/cm to 2s/cm in 23 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Continuously variable (uncalibrated) between steps and to 
approx 5s/cm. Free-run light warns the operator when sweep 
is not triggered. 

DIRECT-READING MAGNIFIER 

Up to X50 sweep expansion selected by TIME/CM switch. 



ACCURACIES 




SWEEP RATES 


0° C 

to 

+ 40° C 


— 30° C 

to 
+ 65° C 


0.1 jus/cm to 50 ms/cm 


±1.5% 


±2.5% 


0.1 s/cm to 2 s/cm 


±3% 


+4%, -6% 




Added by 


magnifier: 


10 ns/cm and 20 ns/cm 


±2% 


±2.5% 


50 ns/cm to 1 s/cm 


±1% 


±1.5% 



EXTERNAL INPUT 

0.1 V/cm to 2V/cm in 5 steps, accurate within 2%; or, using 
4-10 input attenuator, 1 V/cm to 20 V/cm in 5 steps, accu- 
rate within 5%. Continuously variable (uncalibrated) between 
steps. DC to 3 MHz (3-d B down). Low-frequency 3-dB point 
16 Hz with AC coupling, 17 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. 
Input RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by approx 35 pF 
(EXT) or approx 10 megohm and 6 pF (EXT -^ 10). 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

+ Gate (approx 15 V) and positive-going sawtooth (approx 
10 V) outputs via front-panel BNC connectors. 

TRIGGER 

MODES 

Free-run, single-sweep, normal and 2 types of automatic base- 
line operation (manual or auto trigger level). Automatic base- 
line triggering is useful above 20 Hz and minimizes trigger 
adjustment for signals of different amplitudes, shapes and 
repetition rates. With no triggering signal, a recurring sweep 
provides a convenient reference trace. 

AUTO-LEVEL AUTOMATIC OPERATION 

Establishes triggering level near waveform average. Offers 
triggering convenience for most waveforms. 



TYPE 11 B1 

TIME-BASE 
UNIT 




MANUAL-LEVEL AUTOMATIC OPERATION 

Full operator control of triggering level for triggering on either 
+ or — slope. Provides for effective triggering with small 
amplitude or low duty cycle signals. 

COUPLING 

DC, AC (3-dB down at approx 16 Hz) or AC LF Reject (3-dB 
down at approx 17 kHz). 

SOURCES 

Internal, external, external -^ 10, or line. External trigger 
input RC approx 1 megohm paralleled by 35 pF (EXT) or 10 
megohm and 6 pF (EXT -r- 10). 

REQUIREMENTS 

2-mm deflection or 125mV external from DC to 50 kHz, in- 
creasing to 1-cm deflection or 250 mV external at 50 MHz. 
Requirements applicable to normal triggering or automatic 
baseline, manual level. 

HIGH-FREQUENCY STABILITY 
Changes time-base recovery time to reduce high-frequency 
jitter. 

OTHER 
WEIGHTS 

Net weight 4 3 / 4 lb 2.2 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 8 lb ~3.6 kg 

Export-packed weight ~13 lb ~5.9 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two instruction manuals (070-0424-01). 

TYPE 1 1 Bl TIME BASE $695 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



273 



type 11B2A 

SWEEP DELAY 
TIME-BASE UNIT 



• JO ns/cm-to-5 s/cm SWEEP RANGE 

• VERSATILE TRIGGERING TO 1 00 MHz 

• NORMAL AND DELAYED SWEEPS 

• SINGLE SWEEP FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING 



The Type 11B2A is a Time-Base Plug-In Unit for Type 647 A 
and R647A Oscilloscopes, and is built to meet the same envi- 
ronmental requirements. Two separate time-base generators 
and a calibrated sweep delay are provided. Time Base A is 
the normal sweep and is also used to delay the start of Time 
Base B. 



TIME BASE A AND B 

0.1 fxs/cm to 5 s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). 
Continuously variable (uncalibrated) between steps and to 
approx 12.5 s/cm. 

XI SWEEP MAGNIFIER 

Operates over the full range of both time bases. Increases 
the fastest rate to lOns/cm. 



ACCURACIES 


SWEEP RATES 


0° C 

to 

+ 40° C 


— 30° C 

to 
+ 65° C 


0.1 /j.s/cm to 50 ms/cm 


±1.5% 


±2.5% 


0.1 s/cm to 5 s/cm 


±3% 


+4%, -6% 




Added by XI magnifier: 


10 ns/cm and 20 ns/cm 


±2% 


±2.5% 


50 ns/cm to 0.5 s/cm 


±1% 


±1.5% 



DELAY TIME 

1 /is to 50 s, continuously 



variable and calibrated. 



DELAY ACCURACIES 


RANGE 

OR 

CHARACTERISTIC 


0° c 

to 

+ 40° C 


— 30° C 

to 
+ 65° C 


1 fis/cm to 50 ms/cm 


±1.0% 


+2% 


0.1 s/cm to 5 s/cm 


±2.5% 


+3%, -6% 


Multiplier Incremental 
Linearity 


±0.15% 


±0.2% 


Jitter 


Less than 1 part in 20,000 of 
maximum available delay 




OPERATING MODES 

A only, A intensified by B, B delayed by A. In the two latter 
modes, B can be started automatically at the end of A, or is 
triggerable following the end of the delay period (providing 
a steady display of time-modulated pulses and signals with 
inherent jitter). 

EXTERNAL INPUT 

1 V/cm ±10% without magnification or 0.1 V/cm ±10% 
with XI magnifier. Bandwidth is DC to 3 MHz (3-dB down). 
Low-frequency 3-dB point is 16 Hz with AC coupling. Input RC 
is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. 

SIGNAL OUTPUTS 

Positive gates (approx 15 V) and positive-going sawtooths 
(approx 10 V) from both time bases. 



TRIGGER 

MODES 

Normal, automatic, single-sweep, or free-run on Time Base 
A. Automatic operation is useful between approx 20 Hz and 
100 MHz, minimizes trigger adjustments for signals of different 
amplitudes, shapes and repetition rates. With no input (or 
input less than 20 Hz), a recurring sweep provides a conven- 
ient reference trace. 

COUPLING 

AC, AC Low-frequency reject, or DC on Time Base A. 



274 



TYPE HB2A 



SOURCES 

Internal source selected from oscilloscope vertical amplifier, 
external, external -H 10, or line. External trigger input RC 
approx I megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF (EXT) or approx 
10 megohm and approx 5 pF (EXT -*- 10). 

TIME-BASE A REQUIREMENTS 

3-mm deflection or !25mV external from DC to 20 MHz 
increasing to 2-cm deflection or 250 mV external at 1 00 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 60 Hz with AC coupling; below 
50 kHz with AC low-frequency reject. 

TIME BASE B REQUIREMENTS 
5-mm deflection or 200 mV external from DC to 20 MHz 
increasing to 3-cm deflection or 300 mV external at 1 00 MHz. 
Requirements increase below 60 Hz with AC coupling. 

OTHER 

WEIGHTS 

Net weight 6'/ a lb 3.0 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~10 lb ~4.5 kg 

Export-packed weight ~14 lb ~6.4 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

BNC female to BSM female adapter (103-0036-00); two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0640-00). 

TYPE 1 1 B2A TIME BASE $895 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
[provide added convenience. These and other accessory items 
are described in detail in the catalog accessory pages. 

BNC-TO-BSM ADAPTER 

Converts Type 1 1 B2A front-panel outputs to accept BNC 
cables. Order 103-0036-00 $5.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverlon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 




The waveform below (B delayed by A) is a X20 expansion of 
the intensified portion of the waveform above (A intensified by 
8J. Time Base A at 2 fis/cm, Time Base B at 0.1 fis/cm. 




275 



TYPE SOI 

5-INCH STORAGE DISPLAY UNIT 




• bistable storage 

• 1-v full-scale deflection factor for 
vertical and horizontal differential 
amplifiers 

• remote programming of display 
functions 

• all Solid-state design 



The Type 601 Storage Display Unit provides stored displays 
of alphanumeric and graphic information from digital computers 
and other data transmission systems. The Tektronix-developed 
bistable Storage CRT used in the Type 601 eliminates the need 
for costly memory devices for refreshing the information display. 
The built-in vertical and horizontal differential amplifiers permit 
Y versus T plots up to 100 kHz for remote storage monitor ap- 
plications. All solid-state modular circuit design insures long- 
term stable performance. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL (Y) AND HORIZONTAL (X) 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 1-V full-screen deflection 
X and Y axis. 

INFORMATION STORAGE RATE— 100 thousand dots per 
second. 

Z AXIS 

TURN-ON LEVEL — f-1 V or greater. 
TURN-OFF LEVEL — 1-0.5 V or less. 
INPUT RC— 100kn paralleled by 50 pF. 

STORAGE CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— Vertical— 8 cm, Horizontal— 10 cm. 

RESOLUTION— Vertical— 100 stored line pairs, Horizontal— 125 
stored line pairs. 

ERASE TIME— 200 ms. 

DOT WRITING TIME— 9 /^s. 

OTHER 

REMOTE CONTROL OF ERASE AND NON-STORE 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 
440 Hz, 57 watts max power consumption. 



276 



TYPE 60J 



abc def gf. •. jlilnnoPVStu'nixYzC 1 )! 

' ftBCDEFGHIJKLtlNOPORSTUWXYZC - J*. 

• ".?>,,, >*+,-./01234S6789:;< = >? 

abcdef qli ijili noPqr St uu*xvr( "Ml 

s AECr€FGHIJKLnNOPORSTUUW>;rZ[-r. 

I «i,!i- )*+,-./0123456789:;< = >'' 

abcdefgk tjt l»noPS>'Stouiiixvzi - '}l 
ABCC EFGHI JKLHNOPORSTUUUXYZt - r_ 

■ «u;,r< )*+,-./ei:3456?89:;<:> / ' 

»bcd*f9lijkli»oPVStii«»xvi(" , }l 
ABC&EFGHIJKLrlNOFOPSTUWIXYZC - r_ 
< I «+»-./0123456789:»<s rt 



Stored display of standard ASCII character sets. 



OPERATING FUNCTIONS 

The Erase and Non-Sfore operating functions are remotely 
programmable through contacts at the remote program con- 
nector on the rear panel. An Erase Interval signal is also pro- 
vided at this connector. X, Y, Z inputs are provided through 
rear BNC connectors or the remote program connector. Manual 
control of Erase and Power On-Off is provided on the front 
panel. A "ready-to-write" mode is established by erasing the 
CRT manually or remotely. Remote programming of the Type 
601 is achieved by grounding the appropriate contacts at the 
rear program connector. The Intensity, Focus, Astigmatism, 
and Operating Level Controls are located behind the front 
access door for convenience of the operator. 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS 

The X (Horizontal) and Y (Vertical) differential amplifier input 
circuits are isolated from ground and offer noise-rejection ca- 
pabilities to minimize noise signals common to the inner and 
outer conductor of the connecting cables. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Vertical — 1 V for 8-cm deflection, adjustable from 0.75 V to 
1.1 V using internal controls. 

Horizontal — IV for 10-cm deflection, adjustable from 0.9 V 
to 1.1 V using internal controls. 

With Attenuation Resistors — Up to 150-V full screen can be 
obtained by adding attenuation resistors to input circuits. 



PHASE SHIFT 
Not more than 1 ' 



between X and Y up to 100 kHz. 



Y-T DISPLAYS 

Useful to 100 kHz for displaying waveforms on a Y versus 
T plot. 

INITIAL BEAM POSITION 

Positioned by internal adjustment to any point on the screen. 
Position drift is not more than 1 mm/h after 20-min warm-up. 



POLARITY 

Positive input to the vertical and horizontal inputs moves 
the beam up and to the right. 

LINEARITY 

The voltage required to produce a 2-cm deflection at any 
point on the CRT will not vary more than 5%. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

±50 V combined DC and Peak AC. 

INPUT RC 
100 kCl paralleled by approx 50 pF. 

Z AXIS 

The Z-axis on-time should be at least 9 jus to insure good 
storage of each written dot. The Z-axis pulse should be timed 
so that the system settling time is completed before unblanking 
occurs. 

INPUT 

Turn-on level (unblanked) is +1 V. Turn-off level (blanked) 
is +0.5 V or less. Recommended source impedance for driv- 
ing the Z-axis is 1 kf2 or less. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

±50 V combined DC and peak AC. 

INPUT RC 
lOOkfJ paralleled by approx 50 pF. 




Rear panel of Type 601 Storage Display Unit. 



CRT DISPLAY AND STORAGE 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-inch flat-faced bistable storage tube, phosphor similar to PI. 

DISPLAY SIZE 

8 cm vertically and 10 cm horizontally. 

STORED LUMINANCE 

At least 3 foot-lamberts. 

CONTRAST RATIO 

3:1 or greater. 



277 



TYPE SOI 



DISPLAY LINEARITY 

HORIZONTAL — No more than 5% difference between any 

two cm. 

VERTICAL — No more than 2% difference between any two cm. 

RESOLUTION 

100 stored line pairs along the vertical axis. 125 stored line 
pairs along the horizontal axis. 

LINE WRITING SPEED (STORED) 

At least 5 cm/ms (at specified resolution). 

DOT WRITING TIME 

9 ,us or less is required to write (store) one dot. 

INFORMATION STORAGE RATE— 100 thousand dots per s. 

VIEWING TIME 

Up to 15 min recommended. Longer times may be obtained; 
however, erasure of previously stored information becomes 
more difficult. 

ERASE TIME 
200 ms is required to clear screen of stored information. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz, 57 watts 
maximum power consumption. Rear panel selector provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


6 in 


1 5.3 cm 


Width 


8% in 


21.6 cm 


Depth 


17 3 / 8 in 


44.1 cm 


Net weight 


17V 2 lb 


8.0 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=24 lb 


=10.9 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=30 lb 


=13.6 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Connector (131-0570-00), connector cover (200-0821-00), two 
instruction manuals (070-0747-00). 

TYPE 601 STORAGE DISPLAY UNIT $1075 

TYPE 601 MOD 146B $1050 

Standard instrument, less cabinet, for mounting in rack 
adapter. 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories serve to extend the usefulness of the 
Type 601 in certain applications. 

RACK ADAPTER 

For mounting two Type 601's side-by-side in a standard 19- 
inch rack, order 016-01 15-01 $ 85 

PANEL ASSEMBLY 

For covering V 2 of rack adapter when only one Type 601 
is rackmounted, order 016-0116-00 $7.50 




C-30A CAMERA 
f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1; Polaroid 

Land* Pack-Film Back, order C-30A-P $450 

Type 601 to C-30A Camera adapter, order 016-0248-00 $ 15 




C-30A CAMERA CARRYING CASE 

Constructed of heavy-gage, high-impact plastic, has foam- 
backed, vacuum-formed styrene liner. Holds C-30A Camera, 
all standard accessories and extra film. 
Order 016-0126-00 $35 



*Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



278 



TYPE S02 
S-INCH DISPLAY UNIT 



NEW 







• I -MHz X AND Y BANDWIDTH 

• 100-mV/em X AND Y DEFLECTION FACTORS 

• X-Y PHASE DIFFERENCE WITHIN ? ° TO I MHz 

• UNIFORMLY SMALL SPOT SIZE 

• DC-COUPLED Z AXIS 

• ALL SOLID-STATE DESIGN 



The Type 602 Display Unit is a compact, solid-state instru- 
ment with excellent resolution providing accurate displays of 
information from X, Y and Z signal inputs. Application areas 
are: phase shifts and frequency ratios using Lissajous figures, 
graphic and alphanumeric displays from computers, high-reso- 
lution raster displays with intensity modulation and Y-T plots 
of amplitude versus time displays. 

Permanent records of the Type 602 display are provided 
on Polaroid prints using the Tektronix C-30A Camera with adapt- 
er. Two Type 602's may be mounted side-by-side using an 
optional rack adapter. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL (Y) AND HORIZONTAL (X) 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 1 MHz. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR— Vertical 90 mV/cm to 135mV/cm. 
Horizontal 90 mV/cm to llOmV/cm. Internally variable. 

PHASE DIFFERENCE— Within 1 ° between X and Y to 1 MHz. 

INPUT R and C— ~100kn and ^30 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE— ± 1 V DC plus peak AC. 

Z AXIS 

BANDWIDTH— 1 MHz. 

SIGNAL AMPLITUDE— 0.0 to +1 V. 

INPUT R and C— ~100kn and ~70 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE— ±10 V DC plus peak AC. 

CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 cm. 
PHOSPHOR— P31. 

OTHER 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 
to 440 Hz. 50 W at 115 VAC, 60 Hz. 



279 



TYPE 602 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS 

The X (Horizontal) and Y (Vertical) differential amplifier input 
circuits are isolated from ground and offer noise-rejection ca- 
pabilities to minimize noise signals common to the inner and 
outer conductor of the connecting cables. 




Signal input is via BNC connectors on the rear panel. 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 1 MHz at 3-dB down. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 
Vertical — 90 mV/cm to 135mV/cm, internally variable. 
Horizontal— 90 mV/cm to llOmV/cm, internally variable. 

PHASE DIFFERENCE 

Not more than 1 ° between X and Y amplifiers up to 1 MHz. 

BEAM POSITION 

Front panel vertical and horizontal position ranges permit 
setting zero signal position to any point on screen. Posi- 
tion shift is not more than 1 mm/h after 20-min warm up. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 
±10 V DC plus peak AC. 

INPUT RC 

100 kn ±10% paralleled by 30 pF or less. 

RECOMMENDED SOURCE IMPEDANCE 
1 kfl or less. 



Z AXIS 

A linear Z-axis amplifier permits intensity modulation of the 
writing beam. Analog input: DC to 1 MHz over 0.0 V to +1 V 
range. Signal input is via a BNC connector on the rear panel. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

±10 V DC and peak AC. 

INPUT RC 

100 kn paralleled by approx 70 pF. 

RECOMMENDED SOURCE IMPEDANCE 

1 kn or less. 



CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

5-inch flat-faced rectangular CRT with P31 phosphor stand- 
ard, ?7 phosphor optional. 



DISPLAY SIZE 

8 cm vertically and 10 cm horizontally. 

GRATICULE 

Standard graticule — internal, parallax-free, variable illumina- 
tion. 

Optional graticule — internal 8xl0-cm outline (no graticule 
lines). 

TRACE WIDTH 
Maximum trace width within the 8xl0-cm display area is 
14 mils at 0.5-/xA beam current. 

DISPLAY LINEARITY 

The difference in any 2-cm deflection on the vertical axis 
is not more than 1%. The difference in any 2-cm deflection 
on the horizontal axis is not more than 6%. 




o 



The Type 602 provides uniform line width and linearity over 
full 8x W-cm display area. 




Displayed is a low-frequency damped sinewave with 90° 
phase difference between X and Y inputs. A 1-MHz timing ^fc 
sinewave is also applied to the X, Y and Z input. Intensity ^~ 
modulation with the 1-MHz timing waveform adds the third 
display parameter and creates the illusion of depth. 



280 



TYPE 



602 




Operating controls are conveniently located behind (ront panel 
door. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 440 Hz. 50 watts 
at 115 VAC, 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides rapid ac- 
commodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

TEMPERATURE 

Electrical specifications are valid over the range of 0°C to 
+50°C ambient. 

FINISH 

Blue vinyl painted cabinet, aluminum construction. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT (cabinet included) 

Height 6 in 15.3 cm 

Width 8% in 21.6 cm 

Depth 17% in 44.1 cm 

Net weight 17'/ 2 lb 7.9 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ^r22 lb ^ 9.9 kg 

Export-packed weight ^;28 lb SSl2.7kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Smoke-gray filter, installed (378-0586-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0799-00). 

TYPE 602 DISPLAY UNIT $700 

TYPE 602 MOD 174K $700 

Standard instrument with optional internal 8xl0-cm outline 
graticule. 

TYPE 602 MOD 146B DISPLAY UNIT $675 

Standard instrument, without cabinet, for mounting in rack 
adapter. Requires 5'/ 4 -inch vertical rackmounting space. 

If optional P7 phosphor is ordered, smoke-gray filter (378- 
0586-00) is deleted and orange filter (378-0595-00) is added. 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories serve to extend the usefulness of the 
Type 602 in certain applications. 




5'/, -INCH RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 601, 602, and 528 

For mounting two instruments side-by-side in a standard 19- 
inch rack, order 016-0115-01 $ 85 

PANEL ASSEMBLY 

For covering V 2 of rack adapter when only one Type 602 is 
rackmounted, order 01 6-01 1 6-00 $7.50 




C-30A CAMERA 
f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1; Polaroid 
Land* Pack-Film Back, order C-30A-P $450 

Type 602 to C-30A Camera adapter, order 016-0248-00 $ 15 
C-30A CAMERA CARRYING CASE 

Constructed of heavy-gage, high-impact plastic, has foam- 
backed, vacuum-formed styrene liner. Holds C-30A Camera, 
all standard accessories and extra film. 

Order 016-0126-00 $ 35 

♦Registered Trademark, Polaroid Corporation. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



281 



TYPE 611 

11 -INCH STORAGE DISPLAY UNIT 




• FLICKER-FREE DISPLAYS 

• HIGH RESOLUTION ALPHANUMERIC AND 
GRAPHICS DISPLAY CAPABILITIES 

• WRITE-THROUGH ABILITY 

• REMOTE PROGRAMMING OF DISPLAY 
FUNCTIONS 



The Type 61 1 Storage Display Unit permits stored displays 
of combined alphanumeric and graphic information from digital 
computers and other data transmission systems. The Tektronix- 
developed bistable Storage CRT used in the Type 61 1 eliminates 
the need for costly memory devices for refreshing the informa- 
tion display and provides high information density without 
flicker or drift and with excellent resolution. A write-through 
feature provides the operator the ability to visually position the 
writing beam to any point on the CRT display area without 
distrubing previously stored information. All solid-state circuit 
design insures long-term stable performance. The standard 
instrument provides a vertical format display area with the same 
aspect ratio as a typewritten page. A horizontal format display 
is available in a Type 611 Mod 162C. 



CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL 

CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 1-V full screen deflection 
X and Y axis. 

SETTLING TIME— 3.5 ps/cm + 5 p.%. 

Z AXIS 

TURN-ON LEVEL hi V or greater. 

TURN-OFF LEVEL— +0.5 V or less. 
INPUT RC— 100 kO paralleled by 50 pF. 

STORAGE CRT 

DISPLAY AREA— Vertical— 21 cm, Horizontal— 16.2 cm. 25% 
incrementally storable. 

RESOLUTION — Equivalent to 400 stored line pairs along the 
vertical axis; 300 stored line pairs along the horizontal axis. 

ERASE TIME— 0.5 seconds. 

DOT WRITING TIME— 20 /is 

OTHER 

REMOTE CONTROL OF ERASE, NON-STORE, VIEW AND 
WRITE-THROUGH 

POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 136 or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 
to 66 Hz, 250 watts. 



282 



TYPE 6ff 




The Type 61 1 Storage Display Unit is ideally suited for information display applications. Up 
to 4000 alphanumeric characters may be stored and legibly displayed. The above photo, 
and the photo at the top of page 284, was taken from a Type 61 1 used as the readout 
device of a remote computer terminal. 



OPERATING FUNCTIONS 

The Erase, Non-Store, Write-Through and View operating 
functions are remotely programmable through contacts at the 
remote program connector on the rear panel. An Erase Interval 
signal is also provided at this connector. X, Y, Z inputs are 
provided through rear BNC connectors or the remote program 
connector (optional). Manual control of Erase and View is pro- 
vided on the front panel. Remote programming of the Type 611 
is achieved by grounding the appropriate contacts at the rear 
program connector. The remote switching device must be 
capable of switching +10 V to approx ground (+0.5 V to 
—10 V) and handle up to 5 mA of current. 

A "ready-to-write" mode is established by erasing the CRT. 
When the new information has been written, the instrument will 
be in the "view" mode for approximately one minute and will 
then automatically switch to the "hold" mode. This holds in- 



formation stored on the CRT at a low brightness to improve CRT 
life. Pressing the VIEW switch while in the "hold" mode re- 
turns instrument to the "view" mode for approximately 1 minute. 

A special "write-through" feature is provided and is pro- 
grammed through the rear-panel program connector. When the 
program contact is closed the CRT beam is unblanked if Z-axis 
is activated, and "viewed" without destroying previously stored 
information, and without storing new information. A combina- 
tion of reduced beam current and beam movement to form a 
circular small diameter Lissajous pattern prevents storage. 

The Intensity, Focus, Operating Level, Power Switch and Test 
Spiral controls are located behind a front-panel access door. 
Pushing the Test Spiral switch causes the instrument to complete 
an erase cycle and store a single-shot test pattern presentation. 
Pulling TEST SPIRAL switch provides a "non-store" mode with 
repetitive test pattern for focusing and other tests. 

283 



TYPE 611 




Alphanumeric and graphic display taken from a Type 6 1 J used in a re- 
mote computer terminal application. 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Vertical — 1-V full scale (16.2 cm for square format or 21 cm 
for rectangular format), accuracy within 2%. 

Horizontal — 1-V full scale (16.2 cm), accuracy within 2%. 

With Attenuation Resistors — Up to 75-V full screen for verti- 
cal or horizontal deflection can be obtained by adding 
attenuation resistors to input circuits. 

INITIAL BEAM POSITION 

Any one of 9 initial beam positions can be selected by inter- 
nal switches. Each position is adjustable ±10% of full scale 
both vertically and horizontally. 

SETTLING TIME 

3.5|U.s/cm + 5 /as, to within 1 spot diameter of final position. 



POLARITY 
Positive input to the vertical and horizontal inputs moves the 
beam up and to the right. 

LINEARITY 
The voltage required to produce a 2-cm deflection at any 
point on the CRT will not vary more than 10%. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

±50 V combined DC and peak AC. 

INPUT RC 

lOOkn paralleled by approx 60 pF. 

POSITIONAL STABILITY 

0.16 mm (or less)/hour with 75-Q source impedance at 20° C 
to 30° C. Within 1.6 mm/hour with 75-Q source impedance at 
10° C to 50° C. Reference 25° C. 



284 



Z-AXIS 

INPUT 

Turn-on level (unblanked) is -fl V. Turn-off level (blanked) 
is +0.5 V. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

±50 V combined DC and peak AC. 

INPUT RC 

lOOkQ paralleled by approx 50 pF. 









© II o 






!° 






© 










*<§> 










e {'??:•?) © 










1 










I 






aft} © 


l^^^^fl 







Rear panel of Type 611 Storage Display Unit. 

CRT DISPLAY AND STORAGE 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

1 1 -inch flat-faced bistable storage tube, phosphor similar to PI . 

DISPLAY SIZE 

Vertically — 21cm (approx 8 5 / 3 2 in), Horizontally — 16.2 cm 

(approx 6 7 / 16 in). Display area is up to 25% incrementally 
storable. 

STORED LUMINANCE 

At least 3 foot-lamberts. 

CONTRAST RATIO 

3:1 or greater. 

RESOLUTION 

4,000 characters based on a 90x70 mil matrix, clearly legible 
with good spacing. Equivalent to 400 vertical x 300 horizontal 
stored line pairs. (Resolution is measured using 400x300 
stored dots since closely spaced line pairs exceed 25% incre- 
mental storage.) 

VIEWING TIME 

Less than 15 min recommended. Viewing time may be 
longer; however, erasure of previously stored information 
becomes more difficult. 




Type 611 MOD 162C features a horizontal display format. 

ERASE TIME 

500 ms or less. 

DOT WRITING TIME 

20 /xs is required to write (store) one bit of information. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

ERASE INTERVAL PULSE 

A negative-going erase pulse is provided at the rear program 
connector to inhibit external equipment during an erase cycle. 
Amplitude is approx 10 V, source impedance approx 2 kQ. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 66 Hz, 250 watts 
maximum at 115 V and 60 Hz. Rear panel selection provides 
rapid accommodation for six line-voltage ranges. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT 



Height 


ll 7 /a in 


30.1 cm 


Width 


H 5 /e in 


29.5 cm 


Depth 


22 Vb in 


56.8 cm 


Net weight 


51 lb 


23.1 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


62 lb 


28.1 kg 


Export-packed weight 


72 lb 


32.6 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

External program connector (131-0570-00); connector cover 
(200-0821-00); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0752-00). 

TYPE 611 STORAGE DISPLAY UNIT $2500 

TYPE 61 1 MOD 1 62C $2500 

Horizontal display format with same accessories as standard 
instrument. 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



285 



type T4002 



. 



GRAPHIC COMPUTER TERMINAL 



NEW 





The Tektronix Type T4002 Graphic Computer Terminal is a 
completely self-contained, desk-top, information display system 
designed to facilitate rapid and efficient exchange of infor- 
mation between man and computer. Complete communication 
interaction is achieved through a solid-state, data-entry key- 
board and visual displays of high-resolution alphanumerics 
and graphics. A Tektronix developed, direct-view storage 
cathode-ray tube is used as the display medium. High-density 
alphanumerics and complex graphics are presented without 
flicker or drift. Resolution achieved is equivalent to 400 x 300 
line pairs. 



286 



TYPE 



T4002 



•WWWWWWB!) 




CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY 



CONTROL PANEL 

KEYBOARD— Full USASCII (128 codes). 
POWER— Key switch. 

CONTROL LOCK — Key switch for security purposes. 
MODE CONTROLS: 

On line/local. 

Computer status indicator (ready/busy). 
Input (keyboard/auxiliary). 
Output (display/auxiliary or both). 
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS: 

Page full — Halts output when screen is full. 

Margin shift — Allows four margin positions for increased 

information. 
Error indicator — Lights on detected error. 
Data received — Indicates computer output. 
Interrupt — Used to halt computer output. 

INTERFACE 

TYPE 4801— For Digital Equipment Corporation PDP-8 Series 
Computers. 

TYPE 4802— For Bell System Type 201 and Type 202 data 
sets and other compatible modems or high- 
speed data systems. 



DISPLAY CHARACTERISTICS 

DISPLAY AREA— 6'/ 2 inches x 8% inches. 

ERASE TIME— 0.5 second. 

LUMINANCE— >3 fL. 

CONTRAST RATIO— >3:1. 

RESOLUTION— Equivalent to 400 x 300 line pairs. 

DISPLAY CAPABILITY 

96 USASCII symbols including both upper and lower case 
characters, numbers and special symbols. 

GRAPHICS: 

Point plot. 

Incremental plot. 

Linear interpolation (vector). 

1024 x 1024 addressable points. 

ALPHANUMERIC: 

35 lines. 

80 symbols per line. 

2 sizes of characters under program control (others avail- 
able). 

Approximately 1000 characters per second writing capa- 
bility. 

287 



type T4002 



CONFIGURATION 

All of the elements required to effectively communicate with 
a computer are contained within the T4002 console. System 
components are: display unit; terminal control; character 
generator, input/output interface; and keyboard. Space is 
provided within the terminal to accommodate an auxiliary 
module for expanding system capability. Interfaces are 
available for direct coupling to computers or data com- 
munication systems. 

DISPLAY UNIT 

A Tektronix, 11 -inch, direct-view, bistable storage tube is 
used as the display medium. High-density alphanumerics 
and complex graphics are presented without flicker or drift. 
The 6'/2-inch by 8V 4 -inch screen will accommodate up to 35 
lines of alphanumeric characters with 80 symbols per line. 
More than 2800 characters may be displayed with excellent 
clarity. Resolution achieved is equivalent to 400 x 300 line 
pairs. The luminance level of stored information is at least 
3 fL and contrast ratio at least 3:1. Stored information may 
be erased in 0.5 seconds or less. 

KEYBOARD 

Manual entry of data is through a solid-state keyboard with 
full USASCII capability (128 codes). 96 upper and lower-case 
characters, numbers and special symbols are provided for 
alphanumeric data entry. Two sizes of characters are under 
program control with others available. 32 additional con- 
trol characters are included for communications between the 
computer and the terminal. 

TERMINAL CONTROL 

The terminal control provides timing logic, data buffers and 
interconnection logic for the character generator, keyboard 
and auxiliary module. Linear interpolation is a function of 
the terminal control, D/A converters and plot logic. 1024 
x 1024 points are addressable. 



CHARACTER GENERATOR 

The character generator provides a set of 94 USASCII print- 
able characters. Two sizes of characters are under program 
control, 70 x 90 mils and 140 x 180 mils. Up to 1000 char- 
acters per second (average) may be generated and stored 
on the display tube. 

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS 

In addition to a standard alphanumeric keyboard, other con- 
trols are provided to enhance ease of operation. The num- 
ber of panel controls are minimized and control functions 
made automatic where practical (see photo of control panel). 

1. Control Characters — The USASCII provides for 32 
control characters to be utilized for communication 
between computers and remote I/O equipment. Keys 
to activate these control characters are provided on 
the right portion of the keyboard. 

2. VIEW — Switches the display from a hold mode to a 
view mode for approximately 1 minute. 

3. ERASE — Erases the display. 

4. Format Controls — Provide a means of moving the 
cursor when fixed-format alphanumerics are used. 
The five format buttons (top left of keyboard) move 
the cursor UP, DOWN, RIGHT, LEFT or HOME (fixed 
reference point). 

5. POWER— Key switch for Power ON/OFF and CON- 
TROL LOCK. Control lock position locks out all key- 
board and control functions. 

6. ON LINE/LOCAL — Controls on-line and off-line termi- 
nal operation and indicates status. 

7. READY/BUSY— Indicator to signal the status of the 
computer when an initial inquiry is made from the 
terminal. 




288 



TYPE 



8. INPUT— Permits selection of KEYBOARD or AUXILI- 
ARY as input to computer. Indicates status. 

9. OUTPUT— Permits selection of the DISPLAY or AUX- 
ILIARY or both to receive output from computer. In- 
dicates status. 

10. PAGE FULL — Indicates full page and stops information 
from computer. 

11. MARGIN SHIFT — Allows a choice of four margin posi- 
tions, starting on the left and moving to the right. 
Useful when writing columns of short statements. 

12. ERROR/HALT — Indicates echoplexed character is not 
identical to the character sent. HALT control allows 
a halt on data error detection. 

13. DATA RECEIVED — When the computer makes an entry 
to the display, the indicator lights. Pressing the con- 
trol extinguishes the indicator. 

14. INTERRUPT — Any time the computer is sending data, 
all controls on the terminal are inhibited except the 
INTERRUPT switch (and the POWER switch). Pressing 
this switch stops the transmission and allows the op- 
erator to send data to the computer. 

15. DIRECT/COMPOSE— Controls text editing function and 
indicates status. 

Direct: Each character is processed as it is typed. 
Compose: Each character is sent to an editor-buffer for 
future corrections, additions, or processing. 

16. OVERFLOW/CLEAR— Overflow indicator lights when 
the editor-buffer capacity is exceeded. Depressing the 
control will clear the editor-buffer of stored information. 

17. TRANSMIT — Depressing the control switches the ter- 
minal to direct and processes the information stored in 
the editor-buffer. 




• #• 

Rear panel of Type 14002 




T4002 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Quick-change line-voltage selector provides three ranges: 
90 to 110 V, 104 to 126V and 112 to 136 V. 48 to 66 Hz, 
375 watts maximum at 117 V and 60 Hz. An AC outlet, with 
power controlled by the terminal ON/OFF switch, is pro- 
vided at the rear panel for auxiliary equipment. Maximum 
available power from the outlet is 300 watts. 



OPERATING TEMPERATURE 

Normal operation over 20° 



C to 50° C range. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 19% inches 

Length 35 inches 

Width 19 inches 

Net weight 103 pounds 

TYPE T4002 GRAPHIC COMPUTER TERMINAL 



$8000 



OPTIONS 

INPUT/OUTPUT INTERFACE 

The terminal interface provides code conversion, logic levels 
and necessary connections to interface with a computer or 
data communication system. Initially two types of interface 
are available: Type 4801 for Digital Equipment Corpora- 
tion PDP-8 Series Computers; and Type 4802 for interface 
with Bell System Type 201 and Type 202 Data Sets and other 
compatible acoustic modems or high-speed data systems. 

TYPE 4801 DEC PDP-8 SERIES INTERFACE, WITH CABLE 
$ 585 

TYPE 4802 DATA COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE, WITH 
CABLE $ 515 

AUXILIARY MODULE 

Provision is made inside the terminal console for an auxiliary 
plug-in module to expand future capability. Inputs to periph- 
eral gear and outputs from peripheral gear such as teleprint- 
ers, tape readers and magnetic recorders are feasible. A 
blank plug-in is available to satisfy unusual or special de- 
sign requirements. 

AUXILIARY MODULE, order 040-0507-00 $ 75 

CAMERA 

A specially designed camera will be available that permits 
photographing displays on Polaroid film for permanent 
records. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



289 



TYPE 



4501 



R4501 

SCAN CONVERTER UNIT 




Conventional or stored displays are converted to 
composite video and modulated RF for viewing on 
bright, large-screen, TV monitors or receivers. 



Video output conforms to EIA, 525-line 160-field 
or CCIR, 625-line/ 50-field television standards. 



Storage capability permits convenient viewing of 
single-event or low -repetition rate information. 



Output from a single scan converter may be 
looped through a multiple number of monitors for 
viewing at remote locations. 



Wideband X and Y amplifiers, DC-to- 1 MHz 
frequency response. 



The Type 4501 Scan Converter Unit is an analog memory 
device with readout in the form of a composite television signal. 
Information written on its 5-inch storage tube is converted to 
composite video or modulated RF for convenient viewing on 
large-screen television monitors or receivers. The bright displays 
achieved in this manner are ideal for individual or group view- 
ing under high-ambient light conditions. A Tektronix, 5-inch 
rectangular bistable storage tube is utilized as the memory 
device and provides resolution equivalent to 100 by 125 stored 
line pairs. 

The output video signal conforms to EIA 525-line, 60-field 
television standards. Provision is made to internally switch to 
CCIR, 625 line, 50 field to accommodate European television 
standards. The modulated RF output permits displaying infor- 
mation on Channel 2, 3, or 4 of conventional television re- 
ceivers. 



• Remotely programmable. 



290 



I 



TYPE 



4501 
R4501 




DISPLAY MODES 

The scan converter may be operated in a STORE or NON- 
STORE mode. In the STORE mode, information from X, Y 
and Z-axis signal inputs is stored in a conventional manner on 
the storage CRT. Conversion is obtained by raster scanning 
the storage target with the CRT writing beam. The detected 
signal is then combined with internally generated television 
sync and blanking, and is provided at the rear panel as com- 
posite video or modulated RF. Operation of the Type 4501 
in the NON-STORE mode is similar to operating in the STORE 
mode except displays are not retained. In this mode dynamic 
displays of changing information may be scan converted for 
large-screen viewing. 

Associated with the STORE and NON-STORE operating 
modes are the WRITE ONLY, WRITE AND READ and READ 
ONLY operating functions. The WRITE AND READ function 
permits a display to be visually written and read simultaneously. 
This is accomplished by "time-sharing" the single electron beam. 
Using the same deflection amplifiers and electron beam to per- 
form the write and read functions insures excellent input-output 
tracking, thus adding negligible position errors to the output 
monitor. 



VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS 

The DC coupled X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) differential 
input amplifiers provide cancellation of common-mode signal 
components, permit convenient polarity inversion and provide 
a means for mixing of two signals from separate sources. The 
display aspect ratio is 3 units vertical and 4 units horizontal. 
Access to (+) and (— ) inputs is through rear-panel BNC con- 
nectors. Simultaneous access to the ( + ) inputs is available 
through the remote program connector. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

Vertical— 0.75-V full screen (7.5 cm), variable from 0.375-V 
full screen to 1.125-V full screen with internal 
adjustment. 



Horizontal — l .0-V full screen (10 cm), variable from 0.5-V 
full screen to 1 .5-V full screen with internal ad- 
justment. 

POLARITY SENSE— (+) vertical input moves beam up, ( + ) 
horizontal input moves beam to the right. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE— ±200 V, (DC and peak AC). 

INPUT RC— I MQ within 2%, paralleled by 47 pF. 

POSITIONAL STABILITY— Within I % of full scale at +20°C 
to +30°C. 

GAIN STABILITY— Within l%. 

DOT SETTLING TIME— 0.15/ts or less to within 1% of final 
position. 

BANDWIDTH— (X and Y amplifiers) at least 10 MHz within 
center 7.5 division. 

PHASE DIFFERENCE— Within 10° between X and Y at 10 MHz. 

DIFFERENTIAL INPUT 

COMMON-MODE DYNAMIC RANGE— 5 V P-P sinewave. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO— 500:1 from DC to 
10 kHz, decreasing to 100:1 at 1 MHz and decreasing to 
10:1 at 10MHz. 



Z AMPLIFIER 

The DC-coupled Z-axis amplifier provides cancellation of 
common-mode signal components, permits convenient polarity 
inversion and provides a means for mixing of two signals from 
separate sources. In all WRITE modes, the CRT beam intensity 
is determined by the Z-axis input and the INTENSITY control. 
Access to ( + ) and ( — ) inputs is through BNC connectors on 
the rear panel. Simultaneous access to the ( + ) input is avail- 
able through the remote program connector. 

The Z amplifier input has two operating modes: LINEAR and 
LIMITING. 



291 



TYPE 



4501 
R4501 






• ABCDCrGHI JKLMWOPQRSU'VUXYZC ~ 
» ftBCOErGHIJKLHMOPORSTUUUXYZC ~ J- 

- ABCOErGHjJKLMMOPORSTUUWK 
v ABCOErGHlJKLMMOPORSTUVWK 
» ABCOETGHUKLMMOPORSTUyUXYZC - 
» ABCCCrGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUUXYZt - y 

- ABCOCrGHUKLMMOPORSTUVUKYZt ~ 7 
"^CDErGMI J KLMMOPORSTUUUVv— 




The information written on the 5-inch CRT of the scan con- 
verter (bottom} Is converted to composite video and is 
displayed on the U-inch CONRAC monitor (top). 



LINEAR AMPLIFIER CHARACTERISTICS (Single ended or 
differential input) 

POLARITY SENSE — Positive signal on the (+) input increases 
intensity, negative signal on the ( — ) input increases in- 
tensity. (Intensity modulation of the CRT beam is the re- 
sultant difference between the signal applied to the (+) 
and (— ) Z-axis inputs). 

LINEAR INPUT SIGNAL RANGE— ±2.5 V peak. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE— ±200 V (DC and peak AC). 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO— At least 500:1 from 
DC to 100 kHz, decreasing to 200:1 at 1 MHz and de- 
creasing to 14:1 at 5 MHz. (A single-ended signal to either 
( + ) or ( — ) input receives rejection of common-mode com- 
ponents existing on the signal lead and the signal ground.) 

INPUT RC— 1 MQ, ±2% paralleled by 47 pF. 

AMPLITUDE REQUIREMENTS— Maximum intensity is achieved 
at 1.0 V P-P. Normal writing intensity is produced by 0.5 V 
P-P and minimum useable intensity is 0.05 V P-P (50% beam 
current modulation). 

BANDWIDTH— DC to 5 MHz. 

RISETIME— 75 ns. 

LIMITING AMPLIFIER CHARACTERISTICS 

A single-ended signal at the ( + ) input connector can be routed 
through an amplitude limiting stage by moving two internal 




Displays may be viewed with a light or dark background 
(top and bottom photo). The front-panel BACKGROUND 
switch provides a choice of LIGHT (written area is displayed 
dark on a light background) or DARK (written area is dis- 
played light on a dark background). 




plugable links. The drive signal to the Z-axis amplifier is auto- 
matically limited to 1 V P-P. 

INPUT REQUIREMENTS— Voltage levels from +1 V to +50 V 
turn the beam on to a fixed level. The fixed level can be 
adjusted with the intensity control. Voltage levels from 
—50 V to +0.5 V keep the beam turned off. 

MINIMUM ON/OFF TIME— Minimum beam ON or OFF time 
is 5 /xs. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE— ±50 V (DC and peak AC). 

CRT AND DISPLAY 

TEKTRONIX CRT— 5-inch, flat-faced bistable storage tube, 
phosphor similar to PI. 

DISPLAY SIZE — 7.5 divisions vertical by 10 divisions horizontal 
(1 div equals 1 cm). 

CONTRAST RATIO— At least 3:1. 



292 



I 



TYPE 



4501 
R4501 



STORED RESOLUTION— Equivalent to 100 line pairs along the 
vertical axis. Equivalent to 125 line pairs along the hori- 
zontal axis. 

ASPECT RATIO — Three units vertically by four units 
horizontally. 

STORAGE TIME— 15 minutes or less. 

ERASE TIME— 200 ms or less. 

DOT WRITING TIME— 8 /t s or less. 

LINE WRITING SPEED— At least 5 div/ms (at specified 
resolution). 

READ RASTER 

Readout is accomplished by scanning the CRT storage target 
with a TV raster. The necessary TV sync, blanking and raster 
scanning voltages are developed in the scan converter unit. 
Sync and video are combined to assemble a composite TV 
signal. An internal switch permits selection of either EIA 525- 
line, 60-field or CCIR 625-line, 50-field TV standards. Provision 
is made to automatically utilize external sync and blanking 
when these signals are connected to the scan converter. 

SYNC FREQUENCY 



Vertical 


EIA 


CCIR 


60 Hz 
° r 525- H 


50 Hz 

° r ir H 


Horizontal 


31.5 kHz 
within 0.012% 


31 .250 kHz 
within 0.012% 



COMPOSITE SYNC AND BLANKING OUTPUTS 

Conforms to EIA or CCIR timing requirements. 
Amplitude is — 4 volts into 75 Q. 

COMPOSITE SYNC AND BLANKING INPUTS 

Inputs must meet EIA or CCIR timing requirements. Loop- 
through connections or terminated in 75 Q are required. 

READOUT 

VIDEO OUTPUT 
Composite video amplitude is 1.0 V P-P (0.714 V video plus 
0.286 V sync). Video polarity is black negative. 

MODULATED RF OUTPUT 

The carrier frequency is set to 61 .25 MHz (TV Channel 3) and 
is internally adjustable from 55.25 MHz (TV Channel 2) to 
67.25 MHz (TV Channel 4). Frequency stability is within 250 
kHz of carrier frequency over stated environmental range. 
Amplitude is at least 10 mV P-P into 75 Q. 

REMOTE PROGRAMMING 

Remote programming of the Type 4501 Scan Converter Unit 
is accomplished through 2 rear-panel program connectors. The 
NON-STORE, ERASE, READ ONLY, WRITE ONLY and BACK- 
GROUND are externally programmable by grounding or switch- 
ing to volts on the appropriate program line. The ( + ) inputs 
to the X, Y and Z amplifiers are also available at the remote 
program connectors. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 V AC or 180 to 272 V AC, 48 to 448 Hz, 125 watts 
maximum at 115 V 60 Hz. Rear-panel selector provides rapid 
accommodation for 6 line voltage ranges. 




Rackmount version, Type R4501 

TEMPERATURE 

Performance characteristics are valid over an operating tem- 
perature range of 0°C to +50°C. 



DIMENSIONS 


AND WE 


IGHTS 






Type 4501 


Height 




5 3 A in 


14.7 cm 




Width 




16% in 


42.6 cm 




Depth 




18% in 


47.4 cm 




Net we 


ght 


30 lb 


13.6 kg 


Type R4501 


Height 




5'A in 


13.4 cm 




Width 




19 in 


48.3 cm 




Depth 




18% in 


47.4 cm 




Net we 


ght 


30 lb 


13.6 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Connector, 25-pin (131-0570-00); connector cover (200-0821- 
00); cable, 25-ft. 75-0, BNC (012-0157-00); connector, 37-pin 
(131-0422-00); connector cover (200-0660-01); 3-to-2 wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0943-00). 
Type R4501 also includes rackmounting hardware. 
TYPE 4501 SCAN CONVERTER UNIT $2200 

TYPE R4501 SCAN CONVERTER UNIT (rackmount 

model) $2200 

TELEVISION MONITORS 

The Type 4501 Scan Converter Unit provides an output in 
the form of composite video or modulated RF. Satisfactory 
displays can be achieved using any good quality TV monitor 
or receiver. The following monitors are especially recom- 
mended for their advanced performance characteristics. 

TRANSISTORIZED 23-INCH DISPLAY MONITOR 

CONRAC TYPE RVC23/C 

Net weight 99 lb 44.9 kg 

Shipping weight 112 lb 50.8 kg 

Order Tektronix 119-0193-00 $525 

TRANSISTORIZED 14-INCH DISPLAY MONITORS 

CABINET MODEL: CONRAC TYPE RKC14 

Net weight 44 lb 20 kg 

Shipping weight 60 lb 27.2 kg 

Order Tektronix 119-0194-00 $480 

RACKMOUNT MODEL: CONRAC TYPE RLC14 

Net weight 51 lb 22.7 kg 

Shipping weight 60 lb 27.2 kg 

Order Tektronix 119-0195-00 $470 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



293 



TYPE 106 



SaUAREWAVE GENERATOR 



• 1-ns RISETIME 

• IOHz-fo-I MHz REPETITION RATE 

• HI-AMPLITUDE OR FAST-RISE OUTPUTS 

• SYNC INPUT, TRIGGER OUTPUT 

This general-purpose generator provides simultaneous posi- 
tive and negative-going output transitions with <l-ns risetime 
into 50 n, or positive-going hi-amplitude output with <12-ns 
risetime into 50 CI. A clean transition and flat top make the 
Type 106 ideal for checking oscilloscope transient response. 
It can be used in such applications as diode recovery, core 
testing, digital and analog design. 



OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 


CHARACTER- 
ISTIC 


+ and — FAST- 
RISE OUTPUTS 


HI-AMPLITUDE 
OUTPUT 


RISETIME 


<1 ns at 0.5 V 


<12ns at 12V, 


(into 50 a) 




<20ns at 0.5 V 
<120 ns with no ex- 
ternal load 


REPETITION 
RATE 


Continuously variable from at least 10 Hz 
to at least 1 MHz 


SYMMETRY 


Duty cycle variable from <45% to >55% 


AMPLITUDE 
(into 50 Q) 


<50mV to >500 
mV 


<0.5V to >12V, 
(<7V to >120V 

unterminated) 


ABERRATIONS 
(into 50 Q) 


< + and — 2% or 
+ and — 6 mV 
(whichever is greater) 
in first 5 ns*, typical- 
ly <0.5% for re- 
mainder of pulse top 


< + and — 2% in 
first 100 ns*, typical- 
ly < 0.5% for re- 
mainder of pulse top 



*Time period begins at 98%-amplitude point on rising edge. 



OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

SYNC INPUT 

Accepts sinewaves, squarewaves, or pulses. Accepts 5 V-to- 
100 V peak-to-peak sinewave, 2.5V-to-50V pulse or square- 
wave, 100 Hz to 1 MHz. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Positive and negative going triggers occur within 50 ns of 
the rise and fall of the HI-AMPLITUDE squarewave. Positive 
triggers occur within 50 ns of leading edge of fast-rise out- 
puts. Risetime is 50 ns and amplitude is 0.1 V or more into 
50 Q. Time jitter is less than 300 ps. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
103.5 V to 126.5 V or 207 V to 253 V, 50 to 60 Hz. Low 
or high range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 85- 
watts maximum power consumption at 115 VAC. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 




294 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 6 3 / 4 in 17.1 cm 

Width 9 in 22.8 cm 

Depth 15 3 /4 in 40 cm 

Net weight 15 lb 6.8 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~21 lb ~ 9.6 kg 

Export-packed weight ~29 lb ~13.2kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
5-ns 50-Q RG213 cable (017-0502-00); GR-to-BNC 50-Q thru- 
line termination (017-0083-00); right-angle 3-conductor power 
cord (161-0024-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two in- 
struction manuals (070-0523-00). (Power cord for MOD 146B is 
161-0031-01). 

TYPE 106 SQUAREWAVE GENERATOR $625 

TYPE 106 SQUAREWAVE GENERATOR MOD 146B . $600 
As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in Rack Adapter. 
RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 106 
Adapts the Type 106 MOD 146B for rackmounting in a 19- 
inch rack, in only 5V 4 inches of panel height. The Type 106 
occupies V 2 -rack width. Two Type 106's can be mounted 
side-by-side, or along side other y 2 -rack width generators, 
such as the Type 191 Constant-Amplitude Generator, 114 Pulse 
Generator, 115 Pulse Generator, or 184 Time-Mark Generator. 
The Type 106 may also be mounted with the '/ 4 -rack width 
Type 284 Pulse Generator. The Adapter provides forced-air 
ventilation. Blank panels are available to cover the unused 
opening when the adapter is not filled. A divider kit is re- 
quired between instruments, between an instrument and panel, 
and between panels. Blank panels and divider kits are not in- 
cluded with the Rack Adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-01) $1 20.00 

% -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0133-00) $ 8.50 

V 2 -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0081-00) $ 7.50 

V 4 -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0109-00) $ 5.00 

DIVIDER KIT (016-0089-00) $ 10.00 



o 



TYPE 10Q 
PULSE GENERATOR 



• 250-ps RISETIME PULSES 

• ALTERNATE PULSES OF EQUAL OR DIFFERENT 
TIME DURATION 

• 0-55 V CALIBRATED VARIABLE AMPLITUDE 

• SELECTABLE POLARITY 

The Type 109 is intended for use with fast-rise sampling 
or conventional oscilloscopes that generate their own internal 
sweep trigger. The Type 109 is transistorized and requires no 
warmup time before operating. 



PULSE CHARACTERISTICS 


CHARACTERISTICS 


PERFORMANCE 


RISETIME 


Less than 250 ps 


AMPLITUDE 


Adjustable from through 55 V, accuracy 
±3% 


REPETITION 
RATE 


Preset between 550 p/s and 720 p/s 
(using two charge lines) 


PULSE 
DURATION 


0.5 ns to max of 100 ns at full rep rate; 
300 ns at half rep rate 


DECAY 


approx 10% in 300 ns 


POLARITY 


Positive or negative 


OUTPUT 
IMPEDANCE 


50 n 



CHARGE LINES 

Either one or two charge lines can be used to provide alter- 
nate equal or unequal pulses as desired. Equal charge lines 
produce a repetition rate of 550 pulses per second to 720 
pulses per second. 

EXTERNAL DC CHARGE VOLTAGE INPUTS 

Use of external charge voltages allows alternate pulses to 
be of different amplitude and polarity. Maximum external 
charge voltage is 600 volts. With up to 100-volfs input, 
the output amplitude will be half the external input ampli- 
tude. At voltage inputs over 100 volts, the output amplitude 
will be less than half the input amplitude. At pulse outputs 
over 50 volts, irregularities may occur. 

POWER REQUIREMENT 

Wired for 105 to 125 V, may be ordered with the taps con- 
nected for 210 to 250 V. 50 to 800 Hz, 60 watts maximum. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


7 3 A in 


19.7 cm 


Width 


4% in 


12.2 cm 


Length 


ll 7 / 8 in 


30.2 cm 


Net weight 


8V, lb 


3.8 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=rl7 lb 


SS 7.7 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=r28 lb 


= 12.7 kg 




INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Charge network (017-0067-00); three 5-ns 50-Q RG213 cables 
(017-0502-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 3 to 2- 
wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0299- 
00). 

TYPE 109 PULSE GENERATOR $380 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 




Waveform showing the Type 109 pulse displayed on a Tek- 
tronix Type 661 (Sampling) Oscilloscope with an equivalent 
sweep rate of 0.2ns/cm. Combined risetime of the system, be- 
tween 10% and 90% amplitude levels, is less than 0.4 nano- 
second. 



295 



TYPE 7/7 



PRETRIGGER 
PULSE GENERATOR 



• 0.5 -ns RISETIME PULSES 

• PULSE DURATIONS to 1 .5 /is 

• 1 Hz-to- 1 00 kHz REPETITION RATE 

• SELECTABLE POLARITY 

• 30 to 250-ns PRETRIGGERING 



The Type 111 is a low cost, fast-rise pulse generator. The 
unit provides two pulse outputs: fast-rising output pulses and 
pretrigger pulses. The pretrigger pulses occur from 30 to 250 
nanoseconds ahead of each output pulse. Pretrigger pulses 
can be used as a regenerated trigger signal for sampling 
systems without internal delay lines or as a triggering signal for 
a conventional oscilloscope. The amount of delay between the 
pretrigger pulse and the output pulse can be varied by means 
of a front-panel control. This eliminates the need for delay 
cables. 



OUTPUT PULSE CHARACTERISTICS 


CHARACTERISTIC 


PERFORMANCE 
(into 50 Q) 


RISETIME 


<0.5 ns (either polarity) 


REPETITION RATE 


Continuously variable, 10 Hz to 100 
kHz 


PULSE DURATION 


2 ns to 1.5 /is with appropriate 
charge line 


AMPLITUDE 


>10V 


POLARITY 


Positive or negative 


OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 


50 n 


ABERRATIONS 


<5% P to P on leading edge and 
top of output pulse; <10% P to P 
on region following the pulse 



PRETRIGGER PULSE CHARACTERISTICS 
Amplitude: ~10V, duration: ~300 ns, risetime: <7ns. 

PULSE DELAY 
30 to 250 ns, continuously variable. Time jitter less than 
lOOps. 




OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 

50 ohms. 

EXTERNAL TRIGGER SIGNAL 

+3 V or greater at a rate of rise of 3 V//ts or faster. As 
long as rate of rise is maintained, repetition rates from 
to 100 kHz can be used. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 V, may be ordered with taps connected 
for 210 to 250 V. 50 to 800 Hz, approx 35 watts. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


11 7 /u in 


29 cm 


Width 


6"/,« in 


17.7 cm 


Depth 


H 5 /,6 in 


28.7 cm 


Net weight 


9 lb 


4.1 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=;14 lb 


« 6.4 kg 


Export-packed weight 


^20 lb 


a 9.1 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
5-ns 50-n RG213 cable (017-0502-00); 9-ns 50-fi charge line 
(017-0506-00); 50-n 10X GR attenuator (017-0078-00); 3-con- 
ductor power cord (161-0010-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103- 
0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0252-00). 

TYPE 1 1 1 PULSE GENERATOR $395 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



296 



Transmission Lines 

Transmission lines used for nanosecond pulses are commonly 
of ihe transverse electric and magnetic fields mode type. The 
Type 113 uses this mode, because response is desired to zero 
frequency with minimum dispersion. In the nanosecond region, 
skin effect losses cause most of the pulse distortion in well- 
constructed cables. This results in a nongaussian response. 
Risetimes of cascaded cables do not follow the usual RMS 
addition method of combining risetimes, as in gaussian ampli- 
fiers. 

Transmission line distortion of a step function shows up in a 
distinctive way. After a small transition period, the output 
rises fairly rapidly and then slows considerably, compared to 
an RC charge. An RC step requires 2.2 time constants to change 
from 10% to 90% of the input step. A transmission line requires 
30 times the 0-to-50% risetime period to accomplish this [10% 
to 90%) transition. 

The graph illustrates time of rise from 0-to-50% (TJ of the 
input for various common coaxial cables. Note that the rise- 
time deteriorates as the square of the length. Thus, it is very 
important to keep cable lengths (or delays] to a minimum. 
The Type 113 uses about 50 feet of %-inch diameter cable, 
resulting in a 0-to-50% risetime of about 0.0025 nanosecond, 
and 10% to 90% of better than 0.1 nanosecond. 



10" 



c 
O 



io- 2 

8 





//■ 


/ / <$ 


/ 4/ 

e ' s 


■/ / & 


• 

(after F. Kirslen l.R.L.,. 
Berkeley, Calif.) 



10 20 40 80 100 

Cable Length in Feet 



1000 



TYPE 113 
DELAY CABLE 




The Tektronix Type 113 Delay Cable has a delay of 60 ns 
and a characteristic impedance of 50 Cl. In general it is used 
in those sampling applications where the vertical amplifier 
does not contain internal delay lines and the triggering of 
the sweep is external and signal delay is required. 

CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE 

50 o ±1%. 

HIGH QUALITY CABLE 
Approximately 1.5-dB loss per 100 feet at 1000 MHz. Rise- 
time approximately 0.1 ns. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

TYPE 1 1 3 DELAY CABLE $275 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



22% in 


57.1 cm 


8 5 / 8 in 


21.9 cm 


21 7 / 8 in 


55.5 cm 


WU lb 


20.3 kg 


60 lb 


^27.3 kg 


75 lb 


^34.1 kg 



297 



TYPE 114 



PULSE GENERATOR 



\ 



• PULSES OR SYMMETRICAL SQUAREWAVES 

• 10-ns RISETIME AND FALLTIME 

• VARIABLE PULSE PERIOD, WIDTH AND AMPLITUDE 

• ±10 V INTO 50 OHMS 

• SHORT-PROOF OUTPUT 

The Type 114 is a general-purpose pulse and squarewave 
generator designed for laboratory and production test facilities. 
The broad operating range of the Type 114 makes it well suited 
for applications such as studying network response to changes 
in pulse period and/or width, or determining the step response 
of systems. 



OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 


CHARACTER- 
ISTIC 


PERFORMANCE 


ACCURACY 


RISE AND 
FALL TIME 


<10ns 


— 


PULSE OR 

SQUAREWAVE 

PERIODS 


5 ranges from 1 /is to 
10ms continuously 
variable from 1 /is to 
100 ms. 


Pulse: ±3% with 
variable in calibra- 
ted position. Square- 
wave: ±5% from 
100 ms to 10 /is, ± 
10% at 1 /is with 
variable in calibra- 
ted position 


PULSE WIDTH 
(DURATION) 


5 ranges from 100 ns 
to 1 ms continuously 
variable from 100 ns 
to 10 ms 


±3%* from 1 /xs to 
1 ms, ±5%* at 100 
ns; variable control 
in calibrated posi- 
tion 


AMPLITUDE 


1 V to 3 V and 3 V to 

1 V, positive or nega- 
tive polarity. Variable 
within each range. 




POLARITY 


Positive or negative 


— 


ABERRATIONS 


<5% (at maximum 
amplitude) 


— 



*Plus 10 ns on negative pulse. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT REQUIREMENT 

Trigger signals from +2 V to +20 V having a risetime of 
1 /xs or less. Signals up to 2 MHz may be used. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

>2V, open circuit; approx 0.5 V into 50-O load. Front- 
panel switch sets trigger output pulse to occur at leading 
or trailing edge of output pulse. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
94.5 V to 137.5 V or 189 V to 275 V, 48 to 440 Hz. Low or 
high range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 15-watts 
maximum power consumption. 

298 




DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 6% in 17.1 cm 

Width 9 in 22.8 cm 

Depth 12% in 33.6 cm 

Net weight 9'/ 4 lb 4.2 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~13 lb ~ 5.9 kg 

Export-packed weight ~23 lb ~10.5kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Right-angle 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-03); 3 to 2- 
wire adapter (1 03-001 3-00); two instruction manuals (070- 
0465-00). (Power Cord for MOD 146B is 161-0031-01). 

TYPE 114 PULSE GENERATOR $320 

TYPE 114 PULSE GENERATOR MOD 146B $295 

As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in rack adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 114 
Adapts the Type 114 MOD 146B for rackmounting in a 19- 
inch rack, in only 5'A inches of panel height. The Type 114 
occupies V 2 -rack width. Two Type 114's can be mounted 
side-by-side, or along side other '/ 2 -rack width generators, 
such as the Type 106 Squarewave Generator, 191 Constant- 
Amplitude Generator, 115 Pulse Generator, or 184 Time-Mark 
Generator. The Type 114 may also be mounted with the 
'/ 4 -rack width Type 284 Pulse Generator. The Adapter pro- 
vides forced-air ventilation. Blank panels are available to 
cover the unused opening when the adapter is not filled. A 
divider kit is required between instruments, between an in- 
strument and panel, and between panels. Blank panels and 
divider kits are not included with the Rack Adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-01) $120.00 

%-WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0133-00) $ 8.50 

Vi -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0081-00) $ 7.50 

y 4 -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0109-00) $ 5.00 

DIVIDER KIT (016-0089-00) $ 10.00 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page, 



J 00 Hz-fo- JO MHz REPETITION RATE 



• VARIABLE DC OFFSET 



VARIABLE RISETIME AND FALLTIME 



PAIRED, BURST, GATED, UNDELAYED AND DELAYED 
PULSES 



CLEAN PULSES TOTAL ABERRATIONS 

<3% P-P 



• ±10 VOLTS INTO 50 Q 



• SHORT-PROOF OUTPUT 



OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 
(TERMINATED IN 50-O. LOAD) 


CHARACTER- 
ISTIC 


PERFORMANCE 


ACCURACY 


RISETIME AND 
FALLTIME 


10 ns to 100 /is in 4 ranges, 
continuously variable. 


Within 5%, ±1 ns, 
with RISETIME MULT 
or FALLTIME MULT 
ccw (position 1). 


PERIOD 


100 ns to at least 10 ms in 
5 ranges, continuously vari- 
able. (MINIMUM PULSE SEP- 
ARATION — 50 ns, between 
the 50% amplitude points 
of any two adjacent pulses, 
with risetime and ialltimes 
set to minimum.) 


Within 3% with vari- 
able in CAL position 
(except within 5% on 
100-ns range). 


DUTY FACTOR 


At least 75%, limited by 
minimum pulse separation. 




WIDTH 


50 ns to at least 500 /xs in 4 
ranges, continuously vari- 
able. 


Within 3% with vari- 
able in CAL position, 
risetime and falltime 
set at minimum (ex- 
cept within 5% on 
the 50-ns range). 


DELAY OR 
BURST TIME 


50 ns to at least 500 /is in 
4 ranges, continuously vari- 
able (refer to pulse separa- 
tion performance limit 
above). 


Within 3%, ±10 ns 
with variable in CAL 
position. 


AMPLITUDE 


3 ranges, continuously vari- 
able. At least ±10V to less 
than ± 200 mV with MULTI- 
PLIER at XI, ±5V to ±50 
mV with MULTIPLIER at X.5 
and ±2V to ±20mV with 
MULTIPLIER at X.2. 


The X.5 and X.2 
MULTIPLIER positions 
are referenced to the 
amplitude of the XI 
MULTIPLIER position. 
They are accurate 
within 5%. 


ABERRATIONS 


+3%, -3%, total 3% P-P, 
or 200 mV times the DC 
OFFSET AND AMPLITUDE 
MULTIPLIER settings, which- 
ever is greater. 




DC OFFSET 


3 ranges, continuously vari- 
able. At least ±5V with 
MULTIPLIER at XI, at least 
±2.5V with MULTIPLIER at 
X.5, and at least ±1 V with 
MULTIPLIER at X.2. 






TYPE 7/5 
PULSE GENERATOR 



NEW 










m 



# ■•>;■ 



r\ 



The Type 115 is a 10-MHz, 10-volt, general-purpose pulse 
generator with separately variable risetime, falltime, width, 
delay, period, amplitude and baseline offset. It is intended for 
use in applications where a variety of pulse amplitudes, polar- 
ities, shapes and other characteristics are required. 



OPERATING MODES 

GATED 

Provides output pulses for the duration of input gate. First 
pulse is nearly coincident with input gate and recurs at a 
repetition rate determined by PERIOD control setting. 

BURST 

Provides output pulses for the duration of the burst time 
when initiated by external triggering pulse. Pulse repetition 
rate determined by PERIOD control. The first pulse in the 
burst will lag the trigger pulse initiating the burst by an 
amount dependent upon risetime selected. 

PAIRED PULSES 

Provides pairs of pulses; one at the time of normal undelayed 
pulse, and one at the end of delay time. Pairs recur at repeti- 
tion rate set by PERIOD control. 

DELAYED PULSE 

Provides pulse at the end of delay time. 

UNDELAYED PULSE 

Sequence of pulses with repetition rate set by PERIOD control. 



299 



TYPE "115 





Multiple exposure from a last-risetime oscil- 
loscope showing typical waveform aberra- 
tions for positive and negative polarities at 
various amplitude settings. 20-ns/cm sweep 
time and 4-V/cm deflection factor. 



Single exposure showing combined outputs 
of two Type 115s. The burst of pulses on 
top of the positive pedestal was triggered 
by the + delayed trigger from the instru- 
ment generating the pedestal. !0-/.is/cm 
sweep time and 2-V/cm deflection factor. 




Multiple exposure showing variable rise- 
time and falltime. 500-ns/cm sweep time 
and 10-V/cm deflection factor. 



TRIGGERING 

A two-position front-panel switch provides selection of inter- 
nal or external trigger source. A manual pushbutton provides 
a means to produce a single undelayed pulse, delayed pulse, 
pulse pair or burst of pulses. 



INPUTS 



+ TRIGGER 





PULSE 


SINEWAVE 


FREQUENCY 


At least 0.5-V//is 
rate of rise 


1 kHz to 10 MHz 


MINIMUM 
AMPLITUDE 


+2V 


2-V peak 


MAXIMUM 
AMPLITUDE 


+20 V, decreasing 
to +4 Vat 10 MHz 


20-V peak, decreas- 
ing to 4-V peak at 
10 MHz 



+ GATE 
Accepts gate from + 2V to +20 V. 

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 
+ PRETRIGGER 

At least 2 V into 1 kfl. 

+ DELAYED TRIGGER 

At least +2 V into 1 kfi. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

OPERATING TEMPERATURE 

Instrument operating specifications are valid over an am- 
bient temperature range of +20° C to +30° C. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

90 to 136 VAC or 180 to 272 VAC, 48 to 66 Hz, 115 watts at 
115 VAC, 60 Hz. Rear panel selector provides rapid ac- 
commodation for six line-voltage ranges. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 6 in 15.3 cm 

Width 9 in 22.8 cm 

Depth 15% in 42.0 cm 

Net weight 15 lb 6.8 cm 

Domestic shipping weight ^s22 lb ~ 9.9 kg 

Export-packed weight ~33 lb ~14.9kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
50-n, 5-W termination (011-0099-00); 50-fi BNC cable (012- 
0057-01); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0786-00). 

TYPE 115 PULSE GENERATOR $825 

TYPE 115 PULSE GENERATOR MOD 146B (without 
cabinet) $800 

Same accessories as above with addition of a detachable 
power cord (161-0031-01). 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 115 
Adapts the Type 115 MOD 146B for rackmounting in a 19- 
inch rack, in only 5'/ 4 inches of panel height. The Type 115 
occupies V 2 -rack width. Two Type 115's can be mounted 
side-by-side, or along side other '/ 2 -rack width generators, 
such as the Type 106 Squarewave Generator, 114 Pulse Gen- 
erator, 191 Constant-Amplitude Generator, or 184 Time-Mark 
Generator. The Type 115 may also be mounted with the %- 
rack width Type 284 Pulse Generator. The Adapter provides 
forced-air ventilation. Blank panels are available to cover 
the unused opening when the adapter is not filled. A divider 
kit is required between instruments, between an instrument 
and panel, and between panels. Blank panels and divider 
kits are not included with the Rack Adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-01) $120.00 

% -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0133-00) $ 8.50 

Vt -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0081-00) $ 7.50 

y 4 -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0109-00) $ 5.00 

DIVIDER KIT (016-0089-00) $ 1 0.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverfon, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



300 



TYPE R116 

PROGRAMMABLE 
PULSE GENERATOR 




CALIBRATED AND PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS 



• MODE 

• TRIGGER SOURCE 

• PERIOD 

• DELAY OR BURST TIME 

• WIDTH 

• POLARITY 

• AMPLITUDE 

• DC OFFSET 

• RISETIME AND FALLTIME 



The Type Rll6 is a broad-range, programmable pulse gen- 
erator intended primarily for applications where various com- 
binations of pulse amplitude, width, polarity, and other features 
are required in rapid sequence. 

All functions and parameters are easily programmable with 
no need for extra-cost modifications. The Type Rll6 can also 
be operated manually from calibrated front-panel controls for 
initial test setup and for applications not requiring external 
programming. Full programming capability requires 21 bits and 
7 analog lines. 



PULSE CHARACTERISTICS (at 10-volts amplitude) 


CHARAC- 
TERISTICS 


RANGE 


BASIC 

ACCURACY 

(% of dial) 


REQUIRED 

PER 
PROGRAM 


♦RISETIME 

AND 

FALLTIME 


10 ns to 
110/xs 


±5% (except ± 
10% on 1 and 10 ns 
range. <10ns un- 
calibrated.) 


3 bits + 
2 resistors 


♦PERIOD 


1 00 ns to 
11 ms 


±3%, except short- 
est period range is 
±5% 


4 bits + 
1 resistor 


*WIDTH 


50 ns to 
550 /xs 


±3%, except short- 
est width is ±5%. 


3 bits + 
1 resistor 


*DELAY OR 
BURST TIME 


50 ns to 
550 /xs 


±3% +10 ns 


3 bits + 
1 resistor 


♦AMPLITUDE 
(into 50 0] 


0.4 to 2 V 

1 to 5 V 

2 to 10 V 


±3% ±10 mV 
±3% ±25 mV 
±3% ±50 mV 


2 bits + 
1 resistor 


*DC OFFSET 
(continuous) 


— 5V to 
+5V 


±5% ±200 mV 


1 resistor 


POLARITY 


positive or 
negative 




1 bit 



*These parameters are calibrated and continuously variable. 



307 



TYPE R116 



PROGRAM ACCURACY 

Accuracy of the remote program when using recommended 
program resistor values is the same as the corresponding 
front-panel control plus 2%, plus any error in the value of 
the program resistor. For example, the period which has a 
basic accuracy of ±3% from the front panel would have a 
maximum error of ±5%, plus the error in the programming 
resistor when it is remotely programmed. Accuracy of remote 
programming may be improved by calibrating the instrument 
for remote programming rather than for front-panel operation. 

OPERATING MODES 
SINGLE 

Undelayed pulses. 

DELAYED SINGLE 

Pulses occurring at the end of the delay time. 

DOUBLE 
Pairs of pulses: one occurring at the time of the normal 
undelayed pulse, one occurring at the end of the delay time. 
100-ns minimum pulse separation. 




Multiple exposure showing timing relationships between Single, 
Delayed Single, and Double operating modes. Oscilloscope 
triggered from Type Rll6 Pretrigger. 50-fis/cm sweep time, 
5-V/cm deflection factor. 

BURST 

Output pulses obtained for the duration of Burst Time when 
initiated by external triggering pulse. Pulses occur at 
internal repetition rate. 

GATED OUTPUT 

Output pulses obtained for the duration of input gate. Pulses 
are synchronous with input gate and occur at internal repeti- 
tion rate. 

REMOTE PROGRAM 

Permits remote programming of the operating mode. Pro- 
gramming requires 4 bits. 



INPUTS 

+ TRIGGER 

Accepts pulses with 0.5-V//is rate of rise or sinewaves from 

1 kHz to 10 MHz. Pulse amplitude may be +2 V to +20 V, 
decreasing to a maximum of +4 V at 10 MHz. Sinewave 
amplitude may be 2 to 20 V peak to peak, l kHz to 5 MHz, 
3 to 4V peak to peak at 10MHz. 

+ GATE 

Accepts gate from +2 V to -flOV. Output pulses start 
approximately 1 00 ns after gate reaches +2-V level and 
continue until gate drops below +2 V. Output pulses syn- 
chronous with gate. DC-coupled input. 

AUXILIARY OUTPUTS 

+ PRETRIGGER 

2 V minimum into l kn, risetime less than 20 ns. Occurs 
approx 30 ns prior to start of the undelayed output pulse. 

+ DELAYED TRIGGER 

2 V minimum into l kn, risetime less than 20 ns. Occurs 
approx 30 ns prior to the start of the delayed output pulse. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

OPERATING TEMPERATURE 

Instrument operating specifications are valid over an am- 
bient temperature range of +20°C to +30 o C. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
94.5 to 1 37.5 V or 189 to 275 V, selectable by rear-panel 
switch. 50 to 60 Hz, 100 watts maximum. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


5'/ 4 in 


13.3 cm 


Width 


19 in 


48.3 cm 


Depth 


17y 2 in 


44.5 cm 


Net weight 


25 3 / 4 lb 


11.7 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=61 lb 


=27.7 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=86 lb 


=39.1 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

30-in 50-Q BNC cable (012-0057-01); 50-Q BNC termination 
(011-0049-00); 36-pin remote program connector (131-0293-00); 
set mounting tracks (351-0084-00); set mounting hardware, 
cabinet feet kit (016-0052-00); 3-conductor power cord (161- 
0024-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0498-00). 

TYPE Rl 16 PULSE GENERATOR $1675 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

Optional accessories increase measurement capability and 
provide added convenience. See catalog accessory pages for 
additional information. 

CIRCUIT BOARD EXTENSION 

Permits mounting of circuit boards away from surrounding 

circuitry for convenient servicing. 

Order 012-0078-00 $17 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information Page. 



302 



TYPE 122 



FM122 
RM122 



LOW-LEVEL PREAMPLIFIER 




• APPROXIMATE VOLTAGE GAIN: 100 OR 7 000 

• SINGLE ENDED OR DIFFERENTIAL INPUT 

The Tektronix Type 122, FM122, or RM122 Low-Level Preampli- 
fier is a compact 3-stage amplifier extending the usefulness of 
the oscilloscope into the microvolt region. The Type 122 is 
especially useful in biological research and other applications 
that require the amplification of microvolt signals. 

BANDWIDTH 

0.2 Hz to 40 kHz. High and low-frequency — 3 dB points can 
be set by front panel switches. 

APPROXIMATE VOLTAGE GAIN 

100 or 1000, selected by a toggle switch. 

INPUT RC 

10 megohms paralleled by approximately 50 pF. 

COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO (CMRR) 

Better than 10,000:1 between 5 Hz and 40 kHz. Maximum 
common-mode input signal: 4 V. 

SIGNAL OUTPUT 

20 V (peak to peak) maximum in high gain position, 10 V 
(peak to peak) maximum in low gain position; AC signals up 
to 0.02 V (gain 1000) or 0.1 V (gain 100) and DC levels up 
to ±0.1 V (either gain setting) can be applied before wave- 
form distortion occurs. Output impedance is approximately 
1000 ohms. 

NOISE LEVEL 

1 to 5-/iV RMS referred to input with input grounded. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

+ 135 V at 5 mA, —90 V at 4 mA, and 6.3 V at 0.9 A, applied 
through a standard octal plug. The Type 122 can be pow- 
ered by the Type 125 Power Supply or by batteries. Bat- 
teries are not included with the Type 122. 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Output cable (012-0003-00); input plug (131-0013-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0246-00). Type FM122 and RM122 
include mounting hardware. 
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS— TYPE 122 
Height 12% in 31.2 cm 

Width 4V 8 in 10.5 cm 

Depth 7% in 18.1 cm 

Net weight 4 1 /, lb 1.9 kg 

Domestic shipping weight RJ 9 lb ~ 4.1 kg 

Export-packed weight ~13 lb ~ 5.9 kg 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS — TYPE FM122 
Electrically identical to Type 122, but designed to mount verti- 
cally in a standard rack with associated instruments. Can be 
mounted directly or mounted by Tektronix mounting frame, 
(see Type 125 catalog page for mounting frame information). 
Height 14% in 31.2 cm 

Width 4V 6 in 10.5 cm 

Depth 7 in 17.8 cm 

Net weight 4 3 /„ lb 2.2 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~ 9 lb ~ 4.1 kg 

Export-packed weight ^13 lb ~ 5.9 kg 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS — TYPE RM122 

Electrically identical to Type 122, but designed for horizontal 
mounting in standard 19-inch rack. 

Height 5'/ 4 in 13.4 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Depth 7 in 17.8 cm 

Net weight 4 3 / 4 lb 2.2 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~11 lb IS 5.0 kg 

Export-packed weight ^18 lb ~ 8.2 kg 

TYPE 122 PREAMPLIFIER $150 

TYPE FM122 without mounting frame $155 

TYPE RM1 22 $1 55 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



303 



TYPE 125 



FM125 



RM125 
POWER SUPPL 




• POWERS UP TO FOUR TYPE 7 22 AMPLIFIERS 

• ELECTRONIC VOLTAGE REGULATION 

POWER OUTPUT 

Supply voltages with corresponding ripple: +135V, <3 mV; 
—90 V, <2mV; — 6V, <5mV. Voltage stability assured 
by regulated heater supply. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Instrument factory wired for 105 V- 
I operation. Transformer taps per- 
to 250 V (234 V nominal). Can be 
ordered factory wired for 2lOV-to-250V operation. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Four 36-inch interconnecting cables (012-0065-00); 3-con- 
ductor power cord (161-0010-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103- 
0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0246-00). In addition, 
Types FM125 and RM125 include mounting hardware. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS— TYPE 125 



110 watts, 50 to 60 Hz. 
to-125V (117 V nominal; 
mit operation at 210 V 



Height 


12'/ 4 in 


31.2 cm 


Width 


4% in 


10.5 cm 


Depth 


10% in 


26.4 cm 


Net weight 


14% lb 


6.7 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


=21 lb 


« 9.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


=40 lb 


=18.2 kg 


DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS- 


-TYPE FM125 





Electrically identical to Type 125, but designed to mount ver- 
tically in a standard rack with associated instruments. Can 
be mounted directly or mounted by Tektronix mounting frame. 



Height 14% in 37.2 cm 

Width 4% in 10.5 cm 

Depth 13% in 34.3 cm 

Net weight 14% lb 6.6 kg 

Domestic shipping weight =21 lb = 9.6 kg 

Export-packed weight =40 lb =18.2 kg 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS — TYPE RM125 

Electrically identical to Type 125, but designed for horizontal 
mounting in a standard 19-inch rack. 

Height 5% in 13.3 cm 

Width 19 in 48.3 cm 

Rack depth 13% in 34.3 cm 

Net weight 16% lb 7.5 kg 

Domestic shipping weight =28 lb =12.7 kg 

Export-packed weight =40 lb =18.2 kg 

TYPE 125 POWER SUPPLY $300 

TYPE FM125 POWER SUPPLY $305 

TYPE RM125 POWER SUPPLY $305 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 
MOUNTING FRAME FOR TYPE FM125 

Fits any standard 19-inch rack and is fastened to the front 
of the rack by four screws. Capacity is four of any combina- 
tion of Type FM122 Preamplifier, Type FM125 Power Supply, 
Type 360 Indicator, and Type 160-Series Units. (Note: Because 
the Type FM122 Preamplifier has high sensitivity, it is recom- 
mended that it be mounted at least 4 inches to the left of 
the Type FM125 Power Supply, order 014-0002-00 $7 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverron, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



304 



TYPE 127 




• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SPECTRUM 
ANALYZER, AND SAMPLING, PLUG-IN UNITS 

• DC-to-19 MHz BANDWIDTH 

The Tektronix Type 127 Preamplifier Power Supply provides 
operating power to one or any combination of two Tektronix 
Letter Series or "1" Series Plug-In Units. This permits the opera- 
tion of Tektronix Plug-Ins separate from the oscilloscope in 
which they are normally used. For example, a double-differen- 
tial dual-trace display can be obtained with a Type 127 and 
two Type 1A5, 1A6, 1A7A or G Plug-In Units — when used in 
conjunction with a dual-trace oscilloscope. 

Triggering Signal Inputs are provided at the rear of the in- 
strument to permit the introduction of triggering pulses into 
a Type CA, 1A1, 1A2, M, or 1A4 Unit to utilize the alternate- 
sweep features of these multitrace units. The triggering pulses 
may be obtained from the + GATE OUT terminal of the asso- 
ciated oscilloscope. 

Spectrum Analyzer Units require an external sweep voltage 
(positive going from to at least +90 V). This can be supplied 
from a Type T Time Base Unit in one compartment, or from an 
associated oscilloscope with this signal output. 



CHARACTERISTICS 

BALANCED OUTPUT 

The outputs of Plug-In Units powered by the Type 127 are 
fed through DC-coupled differential amplifier stages and 
cathode followers to provide a push-pull signal at the output 
terminals. Push-pull output swing is linear ±3% over a 
range of ±0.3 volt into 170-Q termination. Output DC oper- 
ating levels are adjustable to ground potential. 



GAIN 
The Type 127 has a gain of one, push-pull, 
ended output, gain is one-half. 



With single- 



OUTPUT TERMINALS 

Each channel has four output terminals, two on the front 
panel and two at the rear. Terminated UO-Q output cables 
are furnished. 

AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR 

A squarewave calibration voltage is available through a 
front-panel coaxial connector. Eighteen fixed voltages — 0.2 
mV to 100 V, peak to peak (1, 2, 5 sequence). Accuracy is 
within 3%. Squarewave frequency is approximately 1 kHz. 



305 



TYPE 127 



TYPE 127 TYPICAL PERFORMANCEt 


PLUG-IN 
UNIT 


MAXIMUM 
VOLTAGE GAIN 


BANDWIDTH 
(— 3dB) 


RISE- 
TIME 


B 


2 
20 


DC to 15 MHz 
2 Hz to 1 1 MHz 


24 ns 
32 ns 


CA 


2 


DC to 17 MHz 


21 ns 


G 


2 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


H 


20 


DC to 12 MHz 


30 ns 


K 


2 


DC to 19 MHz 


19 ns 


L 


2 
20 


DC to 19 MHz 
3 Hz to 17 MHz 


19 ns 
21 ns 


M 


5 


DC to 15 MHz 


24 ns 


O 


2 


DC to 17 MHz 


21 ns 


Q 


* 


DC to 6 kHz 


60 /is 


W 


2 

100 


DC to 16 MHz 
DC to 7.5 MHz 


22 ns 
47 ns 


1A1 


2 

20 
200 


DC to 19 MHz 
DC to 17 MHz 
2 Hz to 11 MHz 


19 ns 
21 ns 
32 ns 


1A2 


2 


DC to 19 MHz 


19 ns 


1A4 


10 


DC to 19 MHz 


19 ns 


1A5 


20 

100 


DC to 19 MHz 
DC to 18 MHz 


19 ns 

20 ns 


1A6 


100 


DC to 2 MHz 


0.18 /is 


1A7A 


10,000 


DC to 1 MHz 


0.35 fts 


1L5 


100 


10 Hz to 1 MHz 


0.35 /is 


1L10 


NA** 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


NA** 


1L20 


NA** 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


NA** 


1L30 


NA** 


925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 


NA** 


1L40 


NA** 


1.5 GHz to 40 GHz 


NA** 


1S1 


50 


Equiv to 

DC to 1 GHz 


0.35 ns 


1S2 


20 


Equiv to 

DC to 3.9 GHz 


90 ps 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 




Height 


8% in 


Width 


19 in 


Depth 


21% in 


Net weight 


37'/, lb 


Domestic shipping weight 


=s71 lb 


Export-packed weight 


^92 ib 



POWER REQUIREMENT 
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 450 watts 
maximum. Unit factory wired for 1 17 V. Can be factory wired 
for 234 V if so indicated on order. 



22.3 cm 
48.3 cm 
55.0 cm 
16.9 kg 
^32.3 kg 
SS41.9kg 

RACKMOUNTING 

Type 127 can be withdrawn from rack on slide-out tracks, 
tilted and locked in 4 positions. Further mounting information 
on catalog instrument dimension page. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Four 170-fi terminations (011-0048-00); four 170-Q coaxial 
cables (012-0034-00); four BNC-to-UHF adapters (103-0032-00); 
four UHF-to-BNC adapters (103-0015-00); 3-conductor power 
cord (161-0010-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); pair 
mounting tracks (351-0085-00); two instruction manuals (070- 
0284-00). 

TYPE 127 POWER SUPPLY, without plug-in units . . $700 

CRADLE ASSEMBLY 

For rear slide support when the instrument is to be mounted 
in a backless rack, includes necessary mounting hardware, 
order 040-0344-00 $9 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



*A 10/tstrain input produces a lOO-mV output. 
**Not applicable. 

fPush-pull output terminated in 170 ft, monitored with DC-to-33 MHz 
oscilloscope. 



306 



TYPE 129 



PLUG-IN UNI 
POWER SUPPL 





• OPTIONAL CURRENT OR VOLTAGE OUTPUTS 

• OPERATES UP TO FOUR PLUG-IN UNITS 



The Type 129 Plug-In Supply provides a method of utilizing 
2- and 3-Series Amplifier and Time Base Plug-In Units in a wide 
variety of instrumentation systems. With this power supply, the 
amplifiers can be used to drive recording equipment, X-Y plot- 
ters, oscilloscopes, or other external indicators having require- 
ments within the plug-in unit specifications. The unit is designed 
to mount in a standard 1 9-inch rack. 

The Type 129 is recommended for use with the 2- and 3- 
Series single channel low-frequency amplifiers. Multiple-trace 
plug-ins are usable in the Type 129, but operation should be 
limited to single-trace modes unless provision is made to oper- 
ate the multiple-trace switching circuits at a relatively slow 
rate compatible with the output-circuit bandwidth. 



The Type 129 powers up to four 2- and 3-Series plug in units*, 
singly or in combination. Each plug-in unit fits into a plug-in 
compartment having an output connector at the front and rear 
panels. A selectable cathode-follower or passive circuit card, 
placed between the plug-in unit and the output connector, 
controls the output characteristics. All plug-in units that do not 
have a signal-out provision on the front panel must use one of 
these cards in order to function properly. Plug-in units with 
signal-output connectors on the front panel can be used with or 
without circuit cards. 

With the cathode-follower plug-in circuit card installed, 
push-pull, low impedance signals (to approximately 8 V peak 
to peak) are available via cathode followers at front and rear 
connectors. An automatic DC level-setting circuit keeps the 
average DC level of the two connectors close to V. Band- 
width of the cathode-follower output circuit is DC to approxi- 
mately l MHz. 

With the passive card installed, a high-impedance push- 
pull signal is available at the front panel for balancing and 
a single-ended signal at low impedance (approximately 500 
ohms) is available at the rear output connector. Bandwidth 
of the passive divider output circuit is DC to approximately 
1 00 kHz and is dependent upon the plug-in used. 

Each output can be switched to a meter for DC balance 
indication. This allows quick setting of the plug-in position 
control. In addition to the output monitor switch, a two-position 
switch has been included for balancing of the Type 3C66 
Carrier Amplifier Plug-In Unit. 

*Sampling plug-ins, designed to operate in pairs (one vertical 
and one sweep), and Spectrum Analyzer or Automatic "Seek- 
ing" plug-ins designed to operate in conjunction with another 
2 or 3-Series plug-in, must be "paired up" in Channels I and 
2 or 3 and 4. 



307 



TYPE 129 



TYPICAL APPLICATIONS 


PLUG-IN 
TYPE 


INDICATED 

DEFLECTION 

FACTOR 


APPROXIMATE SYSTEM GAIN 


With Passive Output Card* 


With CF Output Card** 


Single Ended 


Push-Pull 


2A60 


50 mV/div 


50 


20 


40 


2A61 


10/xV/div (AC) 


2.5 X10 5 


10 5 


2X10 5 


2A63 


1 mV/div (DC) 


2.5 X10 3 


10 3 


2X10 3 


3A3 


lOOfiV/div 


2.5 X10 4 


10 4 


2X10* 


3A9 


10/iV/div (DC) 


2.5 X10 5 


10 5 


2X10 5 


3A75 


50 mV/div 


50 


20 


40 


3C66 


10/j.sfrain/div 


0.25 V//xstrain 


0.1 V/justrain 


0.2 V/justrain 


3L5 


To be used with any 2 or 3-Series Time Base to provide 10Hz-to-l MHz Spectrum Analysis. 


1 mV/div 


2.5 X 10 J 10 3 2X10 3 


3L10 


To be used with any 2 or 3-Series Time Base to provide l-to-36MHz Spectrum Analysis. 


3S1/3S2/3S5 


2 mV/div (max) 


Sampling Amplifier (must be paired with Sampling Time Base). 


3T2/3T5/3T77A 


0.2 ns/div 


Sampling Time Base (must be paired with Sampling Amplifier). 



*Output single ended at rear connector. 
**Output at front or rear connector. 



In addition to supplying power for the plug-in compartments, 
the Type 129 provides regulated voltages at a rear-panel con- 
nector for powering accessories. Two low-noise fans provide 
forced-air cooling for the power supply and plug-in compart- 
ments. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Electronically-regulated DC supplies insure stable operation 
with as much as — 10% to +7% variation from design-center 
line voltage. The instrument is factory wired to operate at a 
design center of 117 volts, but a multi-tap transformer permits 
operation at design centers of 110, 117, 124, 220, 234 or 248 
volts, 50 to 60 Hz. Instrument can be ordered factory wired 
for any of the design centers listed. Power consumption is 
typically 575 watts maximum under full load. 

26.8 cm 
48.3 cm 
59.8 cm 
22.5 kg 
:=37.8 kg 
=;48.6 kg 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Right-angle power cord (161-0024-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter 
(103-0013-00); pair of mounting tracks (351-0085-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0409-00). 

TYPE 129 RACKMOUNT PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLY 

(without plug-in units or circuit cards) $700 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

BLANK PLUG-IN CHASSIS 

Contains necessary mechanical parts for construction of a 
custom plug-in. Includes frame, blank front panel, blank 
chassis, 24-pin connector, latch and small hardware; electrical 
components not included. Order 040-0245-00 $25 



DIMENSIONS 


AND 


WEIGHTS 




Height 








lO'/j in 


Width 








19 in 


Rack depth 








23 % in 


Net weight 








49% lb 


Domestic shi 


pping 


we 


ght 


« 83 lb 


Export-packed wei 


grit 




c=107 lb 




CATHODE-FOLLOWER CIRCUIT CARD 

Order 018-0001-00 



$32.50 




PASSIVE DIVIDER CIRCUIT CARD 

Order 018-0002-00 



U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverron, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



$12 



308 



TYPE 130 




• MEASURES UP TO 300 [*H OR 300 pF 

• EASY-TO-READ 4V2-INCH METER 

• CONVENIENT OPERATION 



The Type 130 L-C Meter is a direct-reading reactance meter 
that measures small reactances in a series mode at a fre- 
quency between 125 kHz and 140 kHz. Meter indicates 
inductance up to 300 /aH and capacitance up to 300 pF. The 
unknown inductor or capacitor is part of a resonant circuit 
whose frequency is compared to a 140-kHz reference oscillator. 
Meter indicates the two oscillator's frequency difference but 
is calibrated directly in /iH and pF. Measurement of very small 
reactances is possible by using special measurement procedures 
that are described in the instrument instruction manual. 

The Type 130 is particularly useful for measuring small 
capacitances in the presence of environmental strays. A 
front-panel Guard Voltage output connector provides in-phase 
drive to the environmental capacitance to eliminate strays 
from the measurement. Thus it is possible to measure vacuum 
tube interelectrode capacitances. Up to 300 pF environmental 
capacitance around an unknown capacitor can be guarded 
if the guard terminal loading is not excessive. Loading limits 
are outlined in the instruction manual. 



DIRECT-READING L-C METER 

Resistance loading compensation is optimized for H7-volts 
RMS operation. The following loads will not appreciably alter 
the measurement indication: 

Capacitance: as low as 100-kO shunt. 

Inductance: as low as 20-kQ shunt, up to 10-fi series. 

Correction tables in instruction manual indicate needed 
corrections for other values of load resistance. Actual cor- 
rections determined for each instrument at time of each recali- 
bration. 



RANGE SELECTION 

Microhenrys— to 3, 10, 30, 100, and 300. 
Picofarads— to 3, 10, 30, 100, and 300. 

ACCURACY 

Meter indicates within 3% of full scale. Full scale accuracy 
of any one range can be improved by special calibration at 
the time measurement is made. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

40 watts, 50 to 60 Hz. Instrument factory wired for 105 V- 
to-125V (117V nominal) operation. Transformer taps permit 
operation at 210 V to 250 V (234 V nominal). Instrument can 
be ordered factory wired for 210 V to 250 V operation. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


10% in 


27.0 cm 


Width 


7 in 


17.8 cm 


Depth 


llVs in 


28.3 cm 


Net weight 


9 lb 


4.1 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


£S14 lb 


« 6.4 kg 


Export-packed weight 


S521 lb 


S 9.5 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
P93C Probe (010-0003-00); black output lead (012-0014-00); 
red output lead (012-0015-00); 3-conductor power cord (161- 
0010-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction 
manuals (070-0231-01). 

TYPE 130 DIRECT-READING L-C METER $250 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORY 




PRODUCTION TEST FIXTURE 

Reduces production time required to sort and test capacitors 
and inductors, order 013-0001-00 $6.50 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



309 



A 



TYPE 132 

PLUG- IN UNIT 
POWER SUPPLY 



• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SPECTRUM 
ANALYZER, AND SAMPLING PLUG -IN UNITS 

• DC-to- 1 6 MHz BANDWIDTH 

The Type 132 provides an electronically regulated power 
supply and amplifier for any Tektronix Letter-Series or "1" 
Series Plug-In Unit. 

Convenient front-panel terminals for either push-pull or 
single-ended output facilitate connections to associated equip- 
ment. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 16 MHz at 3-dB down, depending on plug-in unit and 
load impedance. See chart. 

GAIN 

10 (push-pull) when using a Tektronix Plug-In Unit at 50- 
mV/cm deflection factor, terminated with a 93-Q load 
(approximately 5 into 50-Q load). 

OUTPUT 

Push-pul 

OUTPUT VOLTAGE 

Source impedance is £Z5 kQ with ±10 mA available short 
circuited. With 93-Q load, voltage swing is ~±1 V max. 
No load, voltage is ±50 V single ended or ±100V push- 
pull. 

DUAL-TRACE OPERATION 

Back-panel jacks and switching arrangements provide for 
use of the alternate and chopped modes of operation 
including blanking, with a Tektronix Multi-Trace Plug-In Unit 
(1A1, 1A2, CA, 1A4 or M). 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117 V nominal); transformer taps 
permit operation at 110, 117, 124, 220, 234, or 248 VAC; 
50 to 60 Hz. Approx 320-W power consumption. Can be fac- 
tory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, if so indi- 
cated on order. 



or single-ended -f or — outputs on front panel 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 



10y,« in 
6% in 

18'Vi6 in 

21 lb 
=26 lb 
=33 lb 



25.9 cm 

17.5 cm 

48.1 cm 

9.5 kg 

= 11.8 kg 

= 15.0 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 
Two 93-Q terminations (011-0056-00); two 93-Q cables (012- 
0075-00); 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 3 to 2-wire 
adapter (103-0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0288-01). 

TYPE 132 POWER SUPPLY, without plug-in units . . . $495 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 




TYPE 132 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE! 


PLUG-IN 
TYPE 


TERMINATED IN 93 (i 


DOUBLE TERMINATED 93 o 


SYSTEM GAINt 


BANDWIDTH 


SYSTEM GAINt 


BANDWIDTH 


B 


100 
10 


10 MHz 

14 MHz 


50 

5 


10 MHz 
16 MHz 


CA 


10 


14 MHz 


5 


16MH: 


G 


10 


14 MHz 


5 


16 MHz 


H 


100 


11 MHz 


50 


12 MHz 


K 


10 


14 MHz 


5 


16 MHz 


L 


100 
10 


14 MHz 
14 MHz 


50 
5 


16 MHz 

16 MHz 


M 


10 


I4MHz 


5 


16 MHz 


O 


10 


14MHz 


5 


16 MHz 


Q 




6 kHz 




6 kHz 


w 


500 
10 


7 MHz 

14MHz 


250 
5 


7 MHz 
16 MHz 


1A1 


100 


14 MHz 


50 


16 MHz 


1A2 


10 


14MHz 


5 


16 MHz 


1A4 


50 


14 MHz 


25 


16 MHz 


1A5 


500 
250 


13 MHz 

14 MHz 


250 

125 


15 MHz 

16 MHz 


1A6 


500 


2 MHz 


250 


2 MHz 


1A7A 


Useful to 
20,000 


1 MHz 


Useful to 
10,000 


1 MHz 


IL5 


500 


1 MHz 


250 


1 MHz 


Spectrum Analyzer 10 Hz to 1 MHz 


1L10 


Spectrum Analyzer 1 MHz to 36 MHz 




1L20 


Spectrum Analyzer 10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 




1L30 


Spectrum Analyzer 925 MHz to 10.5 GHz 




1L40 


Spectrum Analyzer 1 .5 GHz to 40 GHz 




1S1 


250 


Equiv to 
1 GHz 


125 


Equiv to 

1 GHz 


1S2 


100 


Equiv to 
3.9 GHz 


50 


Equiv to 
3.9 GHz 


tPush-pull ourput, monitored with DC-to-24MHz oscilloscope. 
tSystem Gain — Overall gain from input of plug-in to the push-pull output 
cables. 

Spectrum Analyzer Units require an external sweep voltage [positive going 
from to at least +90 V). This can be supplied from an associated oscillo- 
scope with this output. 



310 



• ACCEPTS MULTI-TRACE, DIFFERENTIAL, SPECTRUM 
ANALYZER, AND SAMPLING PLUG-IN UNITS 

• DC-to-100 kHz BANDWIDTH 

• 2 9. SOURCE IMPEDANCE 

The Type 133 provides power to an internal, transistor- 
ized amplifier and any Tektronix Letter-Series or "1" Series 
Plug-In Unit. Characteristics of this unit make it particularly 
useful for driving recorders, and in audio or other low-frequency 
work. 

Connectors on the front-panel enable the output to be fed 
directly into an oscilloscope or used for other applications. 

A typical application of the Type 133 is its use in con- 
junction with the Tektronix Type Q Transducer and Strain 
Gage Unit. This combination requires no external equipment 
other than the strain gages or transducers needed for the par- 
ticular operation. The output can drive a recorder and be moni- 
tored visually at the same time with an oscilloscope. The in- 
dicating instrument should have some response at 25 kHz to 
enable balancing the bridge in the Type Q Unit, otherwise an 
external monitor must be used. 

CHARACTERISTICS 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 100 kHz. Specified at — 3 dB. 

GAIN 

10, single-ended. 

OUTPUT 

±5V (high-impedance load). 1 .5 A (short circuit). Source 
impedance 2 Q. 

DC ADJUST 

The output DC operating level adjusts to ground potential. 

PHASE INVERSION 

An internal switch permits either output polarity. 

MONITOR JACK 

Allows observation of the output with an oscilloscope with- 
out switching cables. 

DUAL-TRACE OPERATION 

Back-panel jacks and switching arrangements provide for 
use of the Alternate mode of operation when using a Tek- 
tronix Type 1A1, 1A2, CA, 1A4 or M Plug-In Unit. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

Wired for 105 to 125 VAC (117 V nominal); transformer taps 
permit operation at 110, 117, 124, 220, 234, or 248 VAC; 
50 to 60 Hz. Approx 320-W power consumption. Can be 
factory wired for any of the above nominal voltages, if so 
indicated on order. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 

Width 

Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

3-conductor power cord (161-0010-03); 3- to 2-wire adapter 
(103-0013-00); two instruction manuals (070-0290-00). 

TYPE 133 POWER SUPPLY without plug-in units $475 

U.S. Sales Price FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



ioy„ in 


25.9 cm 


6 7 / 8 in 


17.5 cm 


18»/„ in 


48.1 cm 


22 lb 


10.0 kg 


26 lb 


^11.8 kg 


34 lb 


^15.5 kg 



TYPE 123 

PLUG -IN UNIT 
POWER SUPPLY 






TYPE 133 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE 


PLUG-IN 
TYPE 


OVERALL GAIN 
(NO LOAD) 


BANDWIDTH 
(-3dB) 


B 


10 

100 (AC only) 


DC to 100 kHz 
2 Hz to 100 kHz 


CA 


10 


DC to 100 kHz 


G 


10 


DC to 100 kHz 


H 


100 


DC to 100 kHz 


K 


10 


DC to 100 kHz 


L 


10 

100 (AC only) 


DC to 100 kHz 
3 Hz to 100 kHz 


M 


10 


DC to 100 kHz 


O 


10 


DC to 100 kHz 


Q 




DC to 6 kHz 


W 


10 to 500 


DC to 100 kHz 


1A1 


100 


DC to 100 kHz 


1A2 


10 


DC to 100 kHz 


1A4 


50 


DC to 100 kHz 


1A5 


500 


DC to 100 kHz 


1A6 


500 


DC to 100 kHz 


1A7A 


50,000 


DC to 100 kHz 


1L5 


SPECTRUM ANALYZER 
500 


10 Hz to 1 MHz 
10 Hz to 100 kHz 


1L10 


SPECTRUM ANALYZER 


1 MHz to 36 MHz 


1L20 


SPECTRUM ANALYZER 


10 MHz to 4.2 GHz 


1L30 


SPECTRUM ANALYZER 


925 MHz to 
10.5 GHz 


U40 


SPECTRUM ANALYZER 


1.5 GHz to 40 GHz 


1S1 


250 


DC to 1 GHz 


1S2 


100 


DC to 3.9 GHz 


Spectrum Analyzer Units require an external sweep voltage 
(positive going from to at least +90 V). This can be supplied 
from an associated oscilloscope with this output. 



311 



type 160 A 

POWER SUPPLY 

• REGULATED VOLTAGES 

• LARGE LOAD CAPACITY 

• POWERS UP TO SEVEN INSTRUMENTS 



The Type 160A Power Supply provides the required cur- 
rents and voltages for one Type 360 Indicator Unit in com- 
bination with up to six Type 160-Series Generators. Power 
capability handles up to five Type 360 Indicator Units, up 
to five Type 163 Pulse Generators, up to seven Type 162 Wave- 
form Generators, or up to seven Type 161 Pulse Generators. 

Electronic regulation compensates for line-voltage variations 
between 105 and 125 V or 210 and 250 V, and for current- 
demand differences between instruments. 



\ 



POWER OUTPUT 

REGULATED: +225 V DC at 175 mA with no shunt across the 
series regulator, increasing to a maximum of 225 mA with 
a 1500-ohm shunt; + 150 V DC at 15mA ; —170 V DC at 125 
mA. 

UNREGULATED: +300 V DC at 50 mA to 275 mA depend- 
ing on the current drawn from the regulated +225 V supply; 
+80 V DC up to 50 mA depending on the current drawn from 
the regulated —170 V supply; 6.3 V AC at 20 A. 

OUTPUT CONNECTORS 

Four octal sockets mounted on rear panel. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 
350 watts, 50 to 60 Hz. Unit factory wired for 105 V to 125 V 
(117 V nominal) operation. Transformer taps permit opera- 
tion at 210 V to 250 V (234 V nominal). Instrument can be 
ordered factory wired for 210V-to-250V operation. 

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 
Width 
Depth 

Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 

Export-packed weight 



12'/ 4 in 


31.1 cm 


4% in 


10.5 cm 


14% in 


36.6 cm 


20 lb 


9.1 kg 


26 lb 


Si 1.8 kg 


44 lb 


S20.0 kg 




INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two inter-unit power cables (012-0016-00); 3-conductor power 
cord (161-0010-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); mount- 
ing hardware; instruction manual (070-0220-01). 

TYPE 160A POWER SUPPLY $225 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

MOUNTING FRAME 

Adapts Type 160A to standard 19-inch rack. Mounts up to 
four Type 160-Series instruments or up to three Type 160- 
Series instruments and a Type 360 Indicator Unit. Occupies 
12y 4 -inches rack space, order 014-0002-00 $ 7 

BLANK PANEL 

For above mounting frame, occupies same panel area as one 
instrument, order 333-01 57-00 $ 4 

U. S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer (o Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



312 



\ 



• VARIABLE PULSE DELAY 

• VARIABLE WIDTH AND AMPLITUDE 

• SEPARATE GATE AND PULSE OUTPUTS 

• ±50-V OUTPUT AMPLITUDE 



The Tektronix Type 161 Pulse Generator is designed to 
supply calibrated rectangular output pulses from zero to 50-V 
amplitude (positive or negative polarity) and 10 /.is to 100 ms 
duration when an external trigger of required voltage is re- 
ceived. An excellent trigger source is the Type 162 Waveform 
Generator. The 50-V Gate Output has the same duration and 
timing as the pulse output, but is of fixed amplitude. 

When triggered by a negative-going sawtooth, the output 
pulse and gate can be adjusted to occur at designated points 
along the sawtooth. A calibrated control indicates out- 
put delay as a fraction of the triggering sawtooth duration. 
Other calibrated controls indicate pulse and gate width (in 
milliseconds) and pulse amplitude (in volts). When triggered 
by a positive pulse, the same output waveforms are available. 
In this instance the delay control functions as a triggering- 
level selector. 

Voltages necessary to operate the Type 161 can be obtained 
from the Type 160A Power Supply, which can power up to 
seven Type 161 Generators. 



OUTPUT WAVEFORMS 

Variable-amplitude positive or negative pulse, 
tude positive gate. 



Fixed-ampli- 



OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

Risetime — Positive pulse; within 0.5 /.is when load capacitance 
is 10 pF or less, within 0.75 us for 100 pF or less load capaci- 
tance. Negative pulse; within 0.5 «s when load capacitance 
is lOpF or less, within 1.5 lis for 100 pF or less load capaci- 
tance. Overshoot less than 5%. 

Duration — calibrated, variable, 1 /xs to 0.1s. 

Delay — continuously variable, to 100% of triggering saw- 
tooth waveform. 

AMPLITUDE 

Pulse — calibrated, continuously variable, to 50 V, peak. 
Front panel switch provides positive or negative polarity. 

Gate- -fixed, 50-V positive, peak to peak minimum. 

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 

Positive pulse — 1.8 kilohms maximum. 

Negative pulse — 5 kilohms approximately. 
Positive gate — 1 kilohm maximum. 

TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS 
Positive pulse, 3 V peak to peak minimum. Negative-going 
sawtooth; must include DC bias sufficient to keep voltage 
positive. Maximum repetition rate, 50 kHz. 



TYPE fQJ 

PULSE GENERATOR 





TYPE 161 

PULSE GENERATOR 






$f| z.%^. W 












{8! 






TUItONH HC KCM1IAHO OWOON UV«. ^H 






• 









POWER REQUIREMENTS 

-170 V DC at 17 mA +225 VDC at 22 mA, 6.3 VAC at 
1.65 A. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 
Width 
Depth 
Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight 



12'/ 4 in 

4Vb in 
6% in 
3% lb 

S 8 lb 

iU lb 



31.2 cm 

10.5 cm 

16.2 cm 

1.6 kg 

t 3.6 kg 

S 6.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Inter-unit cable (012-0017-00); mounting hardware; instruc- 
tion manual (070-0220-01). 

TYPE 161 PULSE GENERATOR $150 



OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

MOUNTING FRAME 
Adapts Type 161 to standard 19-inch rack. Mounts up to four 
Type 160-Series instruments or up to three Type 160-Series 
instruments and a Type 360 Indicator Unit. Occupies 12V 4 - 
inches rack space, order 014-0002-00 $7 

BLANK PANEL 

For above mounting frame, occupies same panel area as one 
instrument, order 333-01 57-00 $ 4 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



313 



TYPE 162 
WAVEFORM GENERATOR 

• PULSE OR GATE AND SAWTOOTH OUTPUT 

• VARIABLE WAVEFORM DURATION AND PULSE 
INTERVAL 

• 5 OPERATING MODES 



The Type 162 Waveform Generator produces three types of 
calibrated output waveforms. Both the duration and repetition 
rate of the output waveforms — pulse, gate, and sawtooth — are 
adjustable. Triggering can occur from an external electrical 
impulse or by front-panel pushbutton. The unit is designed to 
operate as a delay generator in conjunction with the Type 161 
or Type 163, and to supply a sweep voltage for the Type 360 
Indicator Unit. It is useful for initiating chains of events electri- 
cally, for controlling their duration and repetition rate, and for 
generating waveforms recurrently. As such it is a stable repeti- 
tion rate generator. 

Voltages necessary to operate the Type 162 can be obtained 
from the Type 160A Power Supply, which can power up to 
seven Type 162 Generators. 



OUTPUT WAVEFORMS 

Positive pulse, positive gate, and negative-going positive 
sawtooth. 

OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

Pulse Risetime — 1 /.is or less. 

Duration — pulse, 10 /.is to 0.05 s ; gate and sawtooth, 100 /.is 
to 10 s. 

Repetition Rate — 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, recurrent operation. 

AMPLITUDE 

Pulse and gate are fixed, positive, 50-V peak minimum. 
Sawtooth decreases linearly with time from > + 145V 
to < +25 V. 

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 

Approximately 1000 ohms for all outputs. 

TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS 

Positive pulse— 15 V. Positive gate— 8 V. Sinewave— 6 V RMS, 
frequency from 5 Hz to 50 kHz. 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

-170 V DC at 7 mA, +150 V DC at 1 mA. +225 V DC at 
28 mA, 6.3 V AC at 1.7 A. 




DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


12V 4 in 


31.2 cm 


Width 


4V 8 in 


10.5 cm 


Depth 


6% in 


16.2 cm 


Net weight 


3% lb 


1.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


« 8 lb 


« 3.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 


KS14 lb 


SS 6.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Inter-unit power cable (012-0017-00); mounting hardware; 
instruction manual (070-0220-01). 

TYPE 162 WAVEFORM GENERATOR $150 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 
MOUNTING FRAME 

Adapts Type 162 to standard 19-inch rack. Mounts up to four 
Type 160-Series instruments or up to three Type 160-Series 
instruments and a Type 360 Indicator Unit. Occupies 12V 4 - 
inches rack space, order 014-0002-00 $ 7 

BLANK PANEL 

For above mounting frame, occupies same panel area as one 
instrument, order 333-01 57-00 $ 4 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



314 



,' 



TYPE fS^ 



PULSE GENERATOR 



• 0.2-/us RISETIME 

• VARIABLE PULSE DELAY 

• VARIABLE WIDTH AND AMPLITUDE 

• SEPARATE GATE AND PULSE OUTPUT 



The Tektronix Type 163 Pulse Generator is designed to supply 
rectangular output pulses from to 25 V in amplitude and 1 /js 
to 10 ms in duration, when an external trigger of required volt- 
age is received. An excellent trigger source is the Type 162 
Waveform Generator. The 25-V Gate Output of the Type 163 
has the same characteristics as the pulse, but is of fixed ampli- 
tude. 

When triggered by a negative-going sawtooth, the output 
pulse and gate can occur at designated points along the saw- 
tooth. A calibrated control indicates output delay as a 
fraction of the triggering sawtooth duration. Other calibrated 
controls indicate pulse and gate width (in microseconds) and 
pulse amplitude (in volts). 

The Type 163 operates up to 50% duty cycle at the minimum 
time setting on any range. With higher multiplier-control set- 
tings, the duty cycle can be correspondingly higher. Maximum 
repetition rate is 500 kHz — with a generated pulse of l-/xs dura- 
tion. 

Voltages necessary to operate the Type 163 can be obtained 
from the Type 160A Power Supply, which can power up to five 
Type 163 Generators. 



OUTPUT WAVEFORMS 

Variable-amplitude positive pulse. 
Fixed-amplitude positive gate. 

OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

Risetime — Within 0.2 /is when load capacitance is lOpF or 
less, within 0.25 /is for 100 pF or less load capacitance. 

Overshoot can be adjusted to zero. 
Duration — calibrated, variable, 1 /ts to 10 ms. 
Delay — continuously variable, to 100% of triggering saw- 
tooth duration. 

Decay Time — 0.2 to 0.5 /is. 

AMPLITUDE 

Pulse — calibrated, continuously variable, to 25 V, peak. 
Gate — fixed, positive, 25 V minimum, peak to peak. 

OUTPUT IMPEDANCE 

Pulse — 500 ohms (varies with pulse-amplitude control setting). 

Gate — 100 ohms. 

Minimum load resistance — 3.5 kilohms. 

TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS 

Positive pulse, 2 V peak to peak minimum. 
Negative-going sawtooth; must include DC bias sufficient to 
keep voltage positive. Maximum repetition rate, 500 kHz. 




POWER REQUIREMENTS 



-170 V DC at 25 mA, +225 V 


DC 


at 45 mA. 


6.3 V AC at 


3.6 A. 








DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 








Height 




12V, in 


31.2 cm 


Width 




4% in 


10.5 cm 


Depth 




6% in 


16.2 cm 


Net weight 




3'/ 2 lb 


1.6 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 




i 8 lb 


K 3.6 kg 


Export-packed weight 




i!4 lb 


« 6.4 kg 



INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Inter-unit power cable (012-0017-00); mounting hardware; 
instruction manual (070-0220-01). 

TYPE 163 PULSE GENERATOR $150 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

MOUNTING FRAME 

Adapts Type 163 to standard 19-inch rack. Mounts up to four 
Type 160-Series instruments or up to three Type 160-Series 
instruments and a Type 360 Indicator Unit. Occupies 1 2 Y 4 - 
inches rack space, order 01 4-0002-00 $ 7 

BLANK PANEL 

For above mounting frame, occupies same panel area as one 
instrument, order 333-01 57-00 $ 4 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



315 



I 



TYPE 3 CO 

IN DIC A TOR 



• DC-to-500 kHz VERTICAL BANDWIDTH 

• 0.05 V/DIV-to-50 V/DIV DEFLECTION FACTOR 

The Type 360 Indicator Unit in combination with the Type 
160-Series Instruments becomes an integral building block in 
a complex sequence control and monitoring system. 

The compact indicator contains a flat-faced, 3-inch cathode- 
ray tube, accelerating-voltage supply, horizontal amplifier, 
vertical amplifier and a calibrated vertical attenuator, among 
other features. It is designed to receive its sweep and unblank- 
ing voltages from a Type 162 Waveform Generator. 

Any source of proper voltage and waveforms can power the 
indicator. The Type 160A Power Supply is recommended for 
applications that require a compact rack-mounted combination. 
In system use, up to 5 Type 360 Indicator Units can operate 
from a single Type 160A Power Supply. 

VERTICAL DEFLECTION 

BANDWIDTH 

DC to 500 kHz at 3-dB down. 

DEFLECTION FACTOR 

0.05V/div, 0.5V/div, 5 V/div and 50V/div. Continuously 
variable between steps. 

INPUT RC 

1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. 

MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE 

600 V combined DC + peak AC. 

HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION 

WAVEFORMS REQUIRED 

Positive or negative-going sawtooth: 110 to 150 V excursion 

within the limits of —95 V to +170 V. 

Unblanking gate: 45 to 75 V positive, same duration as the 

sawtooth. 

BANDWIDTH 
DC to 75 kHz at 3-dB down. 

CRT 

TEKTRONIX CRT 

A flat-faced 3-inch cathode-ray tube provides a bright trace. 
Accelerating potential is 1.5 kV. A P2 phosphor is normally 
supplied, PI , P7, PI 1 , or P31 are optional without extra charge. 
Consult your Field Engineer, Representative, or Distributor for 
application information and availability. Z-axis input is DC- 
coupled to the grid and requires at least 45 V to unblank CRT. 

GRATICULE 

External, illuminated, marked in eight vertical and ten hori- 
zontal one-fourth inch major divisions. Center lines are fur- 
ther marked in five minor divisions per major division. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

+300 V DC at 20 mA unregulated; +225 V DC at 35 mA reg- 
ulated; —170 V DC at 23 mA regulated; 6.3 V AC at 3.5 A. 

INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Inter-unit power cable (012-0016-00); smoke-gray filter (378- 
0550-00); mounting hardware; instruction manual (070-0220-01). 




DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 

Height 12V 4 in 31.2 cm 

Width 4V 8 in 10.5 cm 

Depth 14 in 35.6 cm 

Net weight 9 3 / 4 lb 4.4 kg 

Domestic shipping weight ~16 lb ~ 7.3 kg 

Export-packed weight ~26 lb csll.8kg 

TYPE 360 INDICATOR $300 

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES 

MOUNTING FRAME 

Adapts Type 360 to a standard 19-in rack. Mounts up to four 
Type 360 Indicator Units or up to three Type 160-Series 
instruments and one Type 360. Occupies 12V 4 inches of rack 
space, order 014-0002-00 $7 

BLANK PANEL 

For above mounting frame, occupies same panel area as one 
instrument, order 333-01 57-00 $4 

C-30A CAMERA 

f/1.9 lens, magnification variable from 1.5:1 to 0.7:1; Polaroid 

Land* Pack-Film Back, order C-30A-P $450 

Type 360 to C-30A Camera Adapter, order 016-0241-00 . $15 

PROBES 

P6006 10X Probe Package, order 010-0125-00 $26.00 

P6007 100X Probe Package, order 010-0134-00 $26.00 

P6027 IX Probe Package, order 010-0070-00 $15.00 

^Registered Trademark Polaroid Corporation 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



• 



376 



/ 



TYPE 184 
TIME-MARK GENERATOR 



• 16 MARKER INTERVALS, 5 SINEW AVE 
FREQUENCIES 

• 500-MHz SINEWAVE OUTPUT 

• CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR 

The Type 184 is a compact wide-range time-mark generator. 
It is CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED and provides 16 MARKER INTER- 
VALS, 5 SINEWAVE FREQUENCIES, and 7 TRIGGER-PULSE 
INTERVALS. 

Marker pushbuttons are self-canceling so that when any 
marker button is pushed, other buttons are automatically 
released. More than one marker interval (up to two decades 
apart) can be obtained at one time by pushing the desired 
buttons simultaneously. Triggers are time-coincident with the 
corresponding markers. 

The Type 184 is transistorized (plus 6 nuvistors) and is fre- 
quency controlled by a temperature-stabilized 10-MHz crystal 
oscillator. This instrument gives you great versatility for many 
laboratory or production-line applications. 

OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR 
10 MHz ±0.001% from 20 °C to 30° C, 10 MHz ±0.002% 
from 0°C to +50°C within 5 minutes after instrument turn 
on, when instrument has been plugged in for 2 hours. When 
72 h initial aging is complete and after 2 h continuous op- 
eration, frequency stability is within 3 P/M in any 24-hour 
period from 20°C to 30°C. 

MARKER OUTPUT 

Positive-going markers with 16 intervals of 100 ns to 5 s in 
1-5-10 sequence, 1-V minimum peak amplitude into 50 ohms. 

MARKER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT 

Positive- or negative-going markers with 14 intervals of 1 jus 
to 5 s in 1-5-10 sequence, 25-V minimum amplitude into 1 kfi. 

SINEWAVE OUTPUTS 
10-ns, 20-ns, and 50-ns sinewave signals at Marker Output 
connector with 1-V minimum peak to peak amplitude into 
50 ohms. 2-ns and 5-ns sinewave signals at HF output con- 
nector with 0.3-V minimum peak to peak amplitude into 50 
ohms. 

TRIGGER OUTPUT 

Positive-going pulses with 7 intervals of 1 /is to Is in 1-10 
sequence, 0.4-V minimum amplitude into 50 ohms, 2.5-V 
minimum amplitude into open circuit. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 
POWER REQUIREMENTS 

94.5 V to 137.5 V or 189 V to 275 V, low or high range selected 
by rear-panel switch. 50 to 400 Hz, approx 40 watts. 
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 
Height 
Width 
Depth 
Net weight 

Domestic shipping weight 
Export-packed weight 



6 in 


17.2 cm 


9 in 


22.9 cm 


16V 8 in 


41 cm 


13 lb 


5.9 kg 


19 lb 


5S 8.7 kg 


30 lb 


Sl3.6kg 




INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

Two 50-a BNC coaxial cables (012-0057-01); 50-O BNC ter- 
mination (011-0049-00); right-angle, 3-conductor power cord 
(161-0024-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two instruc- 
tion manuals (070-0499-00). (Power cord for MOD 146B is 
161-0031-00). 

TYPE 184 TIME-MARK GENERATOR $725 

TYPE 184 TIME-MARK GENERATOR MOD 146B ... $700 

As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in rack adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 184 

Adapts the Type 184 MOD 146B for rackmounting in a 19- 
inch rack, in only 5'/ 4 inches of panel height. The Type 184 
occupies y 2 -rack width. Two Type 184's can be mounted 
side-by-side, or alongside other y 2 -rack width generators, 
such as the Type 106 Squarewave Generator, 114 Pulse Gen- 
erator, Type 115 Pulse Generator, or 191 Constant-Amplitude 
Generator. The Type 184 may also be mounted with the '/ 4 - 
rack width Type 284 Pulse Generator. The Adapter provides 
forced-air ventilation. Blank panels are available to cover 
the unused opening when the adapter is not filled. A divider 
kit is required between instruments, between an instrument 
and panel, and between panels. Blank panels and divider 
kits are not included with the Rack Adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-01) $120.00 

% -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0133-00) $ 8.50 

Vi -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0081-00) $ 7.50 

Va -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0109-00) $ 5.00 

DIVIDER KIT (016-0089-00) $ 10.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 

377 



\ 



TYPE 1Q1 



CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE 
SIGNAL GENERATOR 

• 350-kHz to 100-MHz SINEW AVES 

• 5-mV to 5.5-V CONSTANT AMPLITUDE 

• 50-kHz AMPLITUDE REFERENCE 



The Type 191 is a variable-frequency sinewave generator 
with a constant-amplitude output over the entire frequency 
range. Both output amplitude and frequency are calibrated. 
Amplitude is held constant during frequency variations by con- 
tinuous sampling of peak-to-peak voltage. 

OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS 

FREQUENCY RANGE 

Continuously variable and calibrated in 7 ranges from 350 
kHz to 100 MHz, plus 50-kHz reference output. Accuracy 
within dz2% of selected frequency with output terminated 
in 50 Q or unterminated (except ±5% on 0.5-5 V range 
with output unterminated). 

AMPLITUDE RANGE 

5 mV to 5 V peak to peak in 3 ranges (10 calibrated steps 
per range) into 50 9. termination. Unterminated output is 
2X indicated output. Amplitude is continuously variable 
(uncalibrated) between steps and to 10% over the top of 
each range (5.5 V terminated or 1 1 V unterminated). 

AMPLITUDE ACCURACY 

50-kHz reference output accurate within ±3% of indicated 
amplitude on 0.5-5 V range, ±4% on 50-500 mV range, 
and ±5% on 5-50 mV range, into ±1% 50 Q termination. 
Accuracy improved with a more accurate termination. 
Unterminated output is 2X indicated amplitude, at same 
accuracy. When the frequency is varied from 350 kHz to 
100 MHz, the output amplitude into 50 Q (at the output con- 
nector or through no more than 5 ns of RG8 cable) will not 
vary more than ±3% from actual amplitude at 50 kHz, except 
when using the 5-mV to 50-mV range the output may vary 
+3%-5% on frequencies from 42 MHz to 100 MHz. 

HARMONIC CONTENT 

Typically less than 5%. 

OTHER CHARACTERISTICS 

POWER REQUIREMENTS 

103.5 V to 126.5 V or 207 V to 253 V, low or high range 
selected by rear-panel switch. 50 to 400 Hz, 25 watts maxi- 
mum. 



DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS 






Height 


6 in 


17.1 cm 


Width 


9 in 


22.8 cm 


Depth 


15% in 


40 cm 


Net weight 


14 lb 


6.4 kg 


Domestic shipping weight 


^20 lb 


« 9.1 kg 


Export-packed weight 


^31 lb 


«141 kg 




INCLUDED STANDARD ACCESSORIES 

5-ns, 50-Q RG213 cable (017-0502-00); 50-Q GR to BNC thru- 
line termination (017-0083-00); right-angle 3-conducfor power 
cord (161-0024-03); 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); two 
instruction manuals (070-0522-00); (power cord for MOD 146B 
is 161-0031-00). 

TYPE 191 CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE SIGNAL GENERATOR 

$450 

TYPE 191 MOD 146B CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE SIGNAL 
GENERATOR $425 

As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in rack adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 191 
Adapts the Type 191 MOD 146B for rackmounting in a 19- 
inch rack, in only 5'/4 inches of panel height. The Type 191 
occupies '/ 2 -rack width. Two Type 191 's can be mounted 
side-by-side, or along side other Wrack w jdth generators, 
such as the Type 106 Squarewave Generator, 114 Pulse Gen- 
erator, Type 115 Pulse Generator, or 184 Time-Mark Gen- 
erator. The Type 191 may also be mounted with the V 4 -rack 
width Type 284 Pulse Generator. The Adapter provides 
forced-air ventilation. Blank panels are available to cover 
the unused opening when the adapter is not filled. A divider 
kit is required between instruments, between an instrument 
and panel, and between panels. Blank panels and divider 
kits are not included with the Rack Adapter. 

RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-01) $120.00 

% -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0133-00) $ 8.50 

Vi -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (016-0081-00) $ 7.50 

V 4 -WIDTH BLANK PANEL (01 6-01 09-00) $ 5.00 

DIVIDER KIT (016-0089-00) $ 10.00 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



318 



I 



TYPE 281 

TIME-DOMAIN 

REFLECTOMETER 

PULSER 





The Type 281 Time-Domain Reflectometer Pulser is designed 
for use with Tektronix Type 1S1, 3S1, and 4S1 Sampling Plug- 
Ins. It converts these general-purpose sampling plug-ins to an 
easy-to-use TDR system. Power is obtained from their probe 
power connector. 

FEED-THROUGH OUTPUT allows Type 281 to be connected 
directly between oscilloscope input and TDR test-line. Pulse 
injection is from non-loading current source (<10% capaci- 
tive reflection of 750-ps step). GR874 connectors. 

RISETIME is less than or equal to 750 ps at negative transition. 

AMPLITUDE is approximately 460 mV (both connectors termi- 
nated in 50 Q). 

WIDTH is greater than or equal to 5 /as from negative-going 
edge to positive-going edge, at 50% amplitude points. 

ABERRATIONS are ±2% or less in first 10 ns following the 
negative transition, ±0.5% after 10 ns. 

TYPE 281 TDR PULSER, order 015-0060-00 $95 

Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0515-00]. 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page. 



The Type 282 permits the use of conventional high-impedance 
probes with 50-Q sampling plug-in units, such as Types 1S1, 
3S1, 4S1, and 4S2A. Power is obtained from their probe power 
connector. 

Features of sampling such as DC offset, smoothing and over- 
load recovery not normally available with a conventional oscil- 
loscope are combined with the convenience of a high-impedance 
probe. 

RISETIME is 3 ns or less. 

GAIN is unity ±3%, non-inverting. 

INPUT RESISTANCE is 1 megohm. 

INPUT CAPACITANCE is approximately 17 pF. 

DYNAMIC RANGE is +750 mV to — 750 mV into 50 O. 

MAXIMUM INPUT is ±5V (DC + peak AC). 



CHARACTERISTICS REFERRED TO PROBE TIP 


Probe 


Overall 
Risetime 


Input RC 


Dynamic 
Range 


Deflection 
Factor 


Offset 


P6008 
(10X) 


~4 ns 


10 MQ, 
7.5 pF 


±7.5 V 


20mV/cm to 
2V/cm 


±10V 


P6009 
(100X) 


~3.5 ns 


io Ma 

2.5 pF 


±75 V 


200mV/cm to 
20V/cm 


±100V 


P6010 
(10X) 


~3.5 ns 


io Ma 

10 pF 


±7.5V 


20mV/cm to 
2V/cm 


±10V 


P6011* 
(IX) 


~12ns 


1MO, 
42 pF 


±0.75 V 


2 mV/cm to 
200 mV/cm 


±1 V 


P6047 
(10X) 


a 2.5 ns 


10 MO 

lOpF 


±7.5V 


20 mV/cm 

2V/cm 


±10 V 


P6048 
(10X) 


~4 ns 


1 kQ 
lpF 


±7.5 V 


20 mV/cm 
2V/cm 


±10V 



*Care must be used to avoid exceeding the ±5V max input limits 
of the Type 282. 



TYPE 282 PROBE ADAPTER, order 015-0074-00 .. 

Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0544-00). 

U.S. Sales Prices FOB Beaverton, Oregon 
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General information page. 



$95 



319 



TYPE 284 



\ 



PULSE GENERATOR 

• PULSE OUTPUT WITH <70-ps RISETIME 

• SINEWAVE AND SQUAREWAVE OUTPUTS 

• COMPACT, SOLID-STATE DESIGN 

The Type 284 Pulse Generator provides the facility for veri- 
fying the performance of Sampling Oscilloscopes. This gen- 
erator offers, in one small instrument, all of the signals required 
to check the risetime, vertical deflection factors, and horizontal 
sweep rates. A pre